Skip to main content

Full text of "The Gastineau method. The conversation method for speaking, reading, and writing German, intended for self-study or use in schools; with a system of pronunciation based on Websterian equivalents"

See other formats 


^^SgS^£^l!Sr^^si!S:4229!Sr^«SS5SiS:^ 


The  Gastineau  Method 


LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  Of 
CALIFORNIA 


SDUCA^EIOU  LiBBf 


j^^^t^t.^^^     /^^   /  y  ^ 


THE 

GASTINEAU  METHOD 


THE  CONVERSATION  METHOD 
FOR  SPEAKING,  READING,  AND  WRITING 

GERMAN 

INTENDED   FOR  SELF- STUDY  OR  USE   IN   SCHOOLS 

WITH  A  SYSTEM  OF  PRONUNCIATION  BASED  ON 
WEBSTERL^  EQUIVALENTS 

BY 

EDMOND   GASTINEAU,  A.M. 

AUTHOI*   OF  THE  "CASTINEAU  METHOD  FOK  SPEAKING,  READING,  AND  WltlTINO 

FliENCH,"  AND  PUINCIPAL  OP  THE  GASTINEAU  SCHOOL  OF 

LANGUAGES,  NEW  YOUK 

WITH  THE  ASSISTANCE  OF 

RUDOLF  TOMBO,  Ph.  D. 

GERMAN  INSTRUCTOR  IN  THE  NEW  YORK  SCHOOLS 


NEW  YORK  .:•  CINCINNATI  •:•  CHICAGO 

AMEEICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


Copyright, 

1889, 

By  Edmond  Gastineau, 

w.  p.  7 


/  ditccCho^^ 


SIFT 


HOW    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE. 


"  I  would  fain,''^  said  John  Locke, "  have  one  show  me  that  tongue 
that  any  one  can  learn  to  speak,  as  he  should,  by  the  rules  of 
grammar. ^^ 

And,  indeed,  how  many  thousands,  after  months  and,  often, 
years  of  poring  over  some  of  the  text-books  in  ordinary  use, 
discover,  on  going  abroad  or  meeting  foreigners  in  society, 
that  they  neither  can  speak  nor  understand  the  first  word  of 
the  language! 

This  is  as  unnecessary  as  it  is  astounding.  We  find  that, 
in  the  last  century,  a  Mezzofanti  could  speak  58  languages. 
Bayard  Taylor  was  famous  for  the  rapidity  with  which  he 
mastered  foreign  tongues ;  and  the  great  explorer,  Henry 
Schliemann,  learned  to  speak  modern  Greek  in  six  weeks' 
time!  It  will  not  serve  to  answer  that  these  were  excep- 
tionally gifted  men,  for  we  see  not  only  children,  but  also 
adults  of  most  ordinary  capacity,  when  thrown  among  for- 
eigners, acquire  in  a  few  weeks  a  practical  ability  to  express 
themselves  and  to  understand  others. 

Yet  these  same  children  and  adults,  when  taught  by  the 
prevailing  methods  in  the  class-room,  will  spend  years  of 
irksome  and  arduous  labor  in  the  study  of  a  language,  only 
to  find,  in  the  vast  majority  of  cases,  that  they  are  unable  to 
say  the  simplest  things  or  to  understand  the  simplest  questions 
in  it. 

"WHY    IS    THIS? 

Simply  because,  contrary  to  the  sage  advice  of  Wolfgang 
Ratke  and  Erasmus,  "the  way  of  nature"  is  not  followed, 
but  the  way  of  the  methods  instead.     Now, 

WHAT    IS    THE    WAY    OF    THE    METHODS 

in  common  use? 

One  and  all,  whether  avowedly  grammatical,  or  claiming,  as 
some  do,  to  be  practical  and  conversational  because  affecting 
to  discard  grammar  wholly  or  in  part,  these  systems  are  really 

737 


IV  HOW    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE. 

what  is  called  'grammatical/  that  is  to  sny  ' constructive.'  For 
all  are  based  on  the  following  principles :  (1)  The  presentation 
of  words,  either  in  vocabularies,  or  simple,  i.  e.,  formless  and 
meaningless  sentences.  (2)  The  drilling  of  the  pupil  in  con- 
structing sentences  with  this  material  from,  the  single  word  up. 

Let  us  not  forget,  in  the  first  place,  that  a  large  portion  of 
language  can  not  be  constructed,  being  entirely  different  from 
synonymous  forms  in  the  language  of  the  pupil.  Such  idioms 
as,  "  Never  mind ! "  "  What  is  the  matter  ?  "  "  You  don't  mean  it !  " 
etc.,  can  not  be  constructed  by  foreigners  learning  English,  but 
have  to  be  taken  up  in  their  idiomatic  compactness.  This 
applies  just  as  well,  of  course,  to  English-speaking  pupils  who 
are  learning  foreign  tongues. 

But,  apart  from  this  most  important  element  of  language,  it  is 
not  against  grammar  and  construction  per  se  that  a  protest  is 
entered.  On  the  contrary,  we  should  finally  acquire  the  power 
to  construct.  But  it  is  against  grammar  and  construction  being 
made  the  great  and  main  dependence  of  the  pupil  in  expressing 
himself,  and  the  broad  highway  to  the  acquisition  of  language, 
that  a  protest  is  made.  It  is  evident  that,  on  such  a  plan,  any 
attempt  at  expression  involves  calcidation  as  to  what  place  this 
or  that  word  should  occupy,  or  what  inflection  it  should  aflect 
in  this  or  that  circumstance.  For  this,  the  learner  depends 
upon  a  multiplicity  of  rules  which  he  never  half  understood 
and  never  half  remembers.  Or,  if  he  has  used  one  of  those 
methods  which  affect  to  discard  grammar,  he  has  to  muster 
up  the  empyrical  substitutes  for  rules  which  have  been  given 
him,  but  which  he  has  never  either  clearly  understood  or 
mastered.  Any  one  so  taught,  whenever  attempting  to  utter 
a  sentence,  will  ponder,  wonder,  stammer  out  something,  take 
it  back,  try  it  again,  and  ultimately  end  in  confusion  and  silence. 
Or,  in  the  case  of  the  few  who,  being  either  over  gifted  or 
persistent,  learn  to  speak  in  spite  of  the  wrong  method  adopted, 
they  almost  invariably  express  themselves  in  faulty,  crippled, 
^m-French,  itn-German  little  sentences.  In  a  word,  they  do  not 
really  speak  French,  or  German,  or  Spanish,  etc.,  but  English- 
French,  English-Germsin,  or  English-Fipamsh.  And  this  is  no 
more  correctness  and  propriety  of  speech  {which  these  systems 
pretend  to  impart)  than  is  hobbling  along  on  crutches  the  per- 
fection and  poetry  of  motion. 


HOW    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE.  V 

To  this  first  and  fatal  defect,  however,  the  methods  in 
common  use  add  other  mistakes : 

(1)  THE  NATURE  OF  THEIR  VOCABULARY. 

Who  does  not  know  how  the  majority  of  these  books  fill 
their  pages  witli  tlie  most  formless,  useless,  and  often  inexpres- 
sibly absurd  sentences  ?  Think  of  poring  over  page  after  page 
of  such  phrases  as  (I  quote  textually  throughout) :  '*/  have  a 
'rose,  She  has  a  book.  You  have  a  stick.  My  brother  has  a  pen.  His 
sister  has  an  apple,''  etc.,  etc.,  etc. ;  or  of  being  dragged  over  such 
as  these:  '^ Are  you  sniffl,ingf{!)  I  am  sniffling!  Why  are  you 
sniffling  ?  I  am  not  sniffling  now.  You  are  sniffling  !  "  etc.,  etc. ;  or, 
of  being  entertained  with  such  as  the  following,  the  source  of 
which  will  be  instantly  recognized :  ^' Has  the  baker  our  bread? 
No,  but  he  has  our  fine  asses  !  Has  he  our  nails  and  hammers  f 
No,  but  he  has  our  good  loaves!"  and  so  on,  for  fifty  closely 
printed  pages  of  asses,  bakers,  loaves,  nails,  and  hammers  mixed 
in  the  most  astonishing  and  bewildering  manner!  — Is  that, 
I  ask,  really  learning  to  speak  a  sensible,  practical  tongue? 
Certainly,  all  the  methods  do  not  sin  as  grievously  as  the 
ones  quoted  above,  but  all  are  tainted  more  or  less  with  this 
defect,  and  give  the  pupil,  in  the  main,  a  mass  of  useless 
and  senseless  matter  to  learn.  As  if  every  language  did  not 
contain  more  than  twenty  times  enough  practical,  sensible,  and 
useful  material  to  teach  any  one  all  the  combinations  and 
evolutions  of  which  it  is  capable ! 

(2)  THE  EXTENT  OF  THEIR  VOCABULARY. 

What  are  we  to  think,  then,  in  addition  to  the  above,  of 
an  attempt  to  familiarize  us  with  a  stock  of  words  of  so 
vast  and  indigestible  bulk  that  natives  themselves  would  find 
it  impossible  to  master  it !  Yet,  several  of  these  methods  con- 
tain a  vocabulary  far  greater  than  even  a  Victor  Hugo  or  a 
Goethe  would,  or  could,  have  used  for  the  walks  and  talks  of 
ordinary  life. 

And  this,  although  philologists  have  assigned  very  narrow 
limits  indeed  to  the  vocabulary  of  every-day  life,  some  placing 
the  number  of  words  necessary  for  the  expression  of  our  general 
thoughts  and  wants  at  even  less  than  2,000,  wliile  Prendergast 
shrewdly  observes  that  "there  are  200  or  300  common  words  in 


VI  HO"W    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE. 

every  language  some  of  which  occur  necessarily  in  every  colloquial 
sentence ;  and  the  profusion  of  speech  which  we  observe  in  children, 
springs  from  their  power  of  wielding  these  200  or  300  words,  with 
a  gradually  increasing  stock  of  nouns  and  verbs  interspersed." 

No  wonder  then,  in  view  of  all  these  facts,  that  the  methods 
above  described  fail  ignominiously  to  teach  us  the  art  of 
speaking  a  foreign  tongue,  and,  indeed,  in  most  cases,  even 
of  reading  or  of  WTiting  it.     But  let  us  now  inquire, — 

"WHAT    IS    THE    WAY     OF    NATURE? 

Whether  in  the  case  of  the  child  surrounded  by  those  who 
constantly  speak  to  or  before  it,  or  in  that  of  the  adult  in 
a  foreign  land,  the  ear  is  incessantly  struck  with  the  sounds 
not  of  single  words,  let  us  remember,  but  of  cotnplete  sentences  and 
perfect  idiomatic  forms. 

Some  of  these  finally  impress  themselves  on  the  memory, 
and,  child  or  adult,  according  to  our  need  or  impulse,  we 
attempt  to  use  one  or  the  other  of  them.  At  first,  it  is  in  a 
crippled  sort  of  way,  perhaps  bringing  out  but  a  shred  of  the 
sentence.  But,  let  us  not  fail  to  observe,  even  in  the  case  of  the 
child,  that  the  perfect  and  entire  forwj  or  idiom  is  aimed  at.  So, 
with  greater  perfection  at  each  effort,  we  at  last  use  the  diffi- 
cult idiom  or  phrase  with  ease  and  accuracy, — not  building 
it,  but  reproducing  it  as  a  copy  of  the  perfect  whole  presented 
and  aimed  at  from  the  first. 

In  this  manner,  a  limited  but  sufficient  collection  or  stock  of 
such  sentences  is  gathered.  These  forms  become  habitual  to 
us,  and  we  make  a  constantly  recurring  use  of  them,  modi- 
fying them,  however,  by  the  introduction  of  new  words  to 
express  more  and  more  diversified  meanings.  Thus  do  we 
insensibly  yet  quickly  find  ourselves  masters  of  a  spoken 
totigue.  Then  it  is  that  grammar  often  is  studied,  with  the 
purpose  of  making  us  conscious  of  what  we  know  and  more 
critical,  but  never  as  a  primary  means  by  which  we  are  expected 
to  attempt  to  speak. 

This  plan,  with  such  modifications  as  the  different  circum- 
stances of  real  life  and  study  in  the  class-room  necessitate,  is 
the  one  followed  by  the  "  Conversatiox  Method."  In  this, 
it  is  partly  following  in   the  path   traced  out  as  early  as  the 


HO^W    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE.  Vll 

sevenieenth  century  by  Comenius,  a  learned  Moravian.  His 
work  entitled  "  Janua  Linguarum  Reserata,"  or  "  The  Door  oj 
Languages  Opened,"  marked  the  dawn  of  a  revolution  which,  in 
our  day,  is  slowly  but  surely  overturning  the  present  methods 
of  language  study. 

Comenius  himself  was  followed,  but  not  until  two  centuries 
later,  by  Hamilton,  Robertson,  Toussaint-Langenscheidt,  Pren- 
dergast,  and  others.  All  these  systems  copied  nature  in 
presenting  us,  at  the  outset,  not  si4ig]e  words  or  common- 
place, formless  and  meaningless  phrases,  coupled  with  a 
confusing  mass  of  incomprehensible  rules  (or  substitutes), 
but  idiomatic  and  perfect  forms  of  speech,  accompanied,  gen- 
erally on  opposite  column  or  page,  with  their  meaning  in  the 
learner's  vernacular.  They  all  led  the  pupil,  then,  to  re- 
peatedly utter  and  handle  these  sentences  until  absolutely 
mastered,  and,  finally,  to  analyze,  reconstruct,  and  recombine 
them. 

But,  although  moving  in  the  right  direction,  they  necessarily 
had  to  feel  their  way,  and,  consequently,  were  imperfect; 
some,  like  Prendergast  and  Hamilton,  entirely  excluding 
grammar;  others,  like  Robertson,  introducing  it  to  such  an 
excessive  degree  as  absolutely  to  prevent  that  constant  repe- 
tition without  which  it  is  impossible  by  any  system  to 
learn  to  speak  a  language ;  others  still,  being  replete  with 
the  grossest  errors,  and  filling  page  after  page  with  dry  lists 
of  synonymous  terms  that  pall  upon  the  mind  and  bewilder 
the  memory. 

The  Conversation  Method,  while  applying  the  same  great 
and  natural  principles,  avoids  the  mistakes  committed  by  its 
direct  predecessors.  It  supplies  the  pupil  from  the  outset 
with  sentences  of  daily  necessity  coupled  with  their  translation 
and  pronunciation,  so  that  they  may  be  easily  memorized  and 
mastered  in  their  perfect  and  idiomatic  completeness,  and 
turned  to  immediate  conversational  account.  These  are  now  re- 
hearsed in  active  colloquial  exercise,  and,  when  thoroughly 
familiar,  analyzed,  and  the  words  of  which  they  were  made  up 
inserted  into  other  forms  and  idioms  to  express  a  still  greater 
variety  of  meanings.  Such  is  the  true  basis  of  practical  and 
perfect  language  knowledge.  It  is  in  this  way,  says  Prendergast, 
that  "for  slovenly  hesitation,  fluency  and  readiness  are  substituted. 


Vlll  HOW    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE. 

Instead  of  translating  from  the  English,  the  beginner  has  to  learn 
the  genuine  foreign  forms  of  speech." 

When  a  certain  number  of  these  idiomatic  and  necessary 
phrases  have  been  mastered  by  the  pupil,  a  vocabulary  —  7iot 
made  up  of  unrelated  and  ill-assorted  words,  as  is  the  case  with 
so  many  methods,  but  classified,  and  all  pertaining  to  the  par- 
ticular topic  treated  in  the  sentences  —  is  furnished.  These 
words  are  used  to  insert  into  the  ready  forms  of  speech  already 
mastered,  thus  at  a  trifling  cost  of  study  and  memory,  broaden- 
ing a  hundred-fold  the  range  of  our  expression. 

At  the  same  time,  the  words  contained  in  the  method  have 
been  limited  to  such  a  number  as  to  render  possible  and  bring 
about  that  constant  repetition  of  the  same  words  and  phrases,  with- 
out which  we  canriot  expect  to  learn  to  think  in  a  language. 

Now, 

WHAT    IS    THINKING    IN    A    LANGUAGE? 

In  reality,  there  is  no  such  thing.  What  is  meant  is,  that  we 
become  so  familiar  with  the  forms  of  language  that  we  do  not 
hdve  to  think  in  using  them.  This  faculty  is  developed  in  our 
own  or  in  any  other  language  only  by  the  constant  repetition 
of  the  same  idioms  and  words.  Now,  if  a  method  deluges  the 
pupil,  as  many  do,  with  an  avalanche  of  useless  words,  it  is 
evident  he  can  never  repeat  this  mass  frequently  enough  to 
familiarize  himself  with  any  portion  of  it.  This  mistake  has 
been  avoided  in  this  book  by  the  introduction  mainly  of  words 
within  the  range  of  every-day  conversation  and  necessities, 
although  the  other  extreme  has  been  shunned,  and  literary, 
artistic,  and  social  topics  have  been  freely  introduced. 

So  far,  therefore,  "  the  way  of  nature  "  has  been  ftiithfuUy 
copied.  But  while,  owing  to  the  incessant  reiteration  of  the 
same  forms  and  the  constant  urging  of  daily  wants  in  real  life, 
the  way  of  nature  is  all  sufficient  to  force  upon  us  a  fluent  and 
even  elegant  use  of  language,  the  limited  hours  of  the  class- 
room demand  the  introduction  of  some  element  to  make  plain 
the  by-paths  just  traversed  but  still  brushy  and  hampered; 
something  to  co-ordinate  that  practical  but  still  partially  cha- 
otic knowledge,  and  clear  for  us  the  broad,  general  avenues  of 
language ;  something,  in  fine,  to  take  the  place  of  the  ever 


HOW    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE.  IX 

present  and  despotic  tutorship  of  nature  ;    and  that  something 
is 

GRAMMAR. 

Although  John  Locke  would  have  had  us  study  "without 
the  drudgery  of  grammar,"  it  is  certainly  indispensable  to  the 
perfect  knowledge  of  a  language  acquired  in  the  class-room. 
And  grammar  has  become  the  bugbear  that  it  is,  simply 
1)C(:iusc  it  lias  IxxMi  made  to  play  a  part  for  which  it  never 
was  fit.  But  hrouf/Jit  hi  at  the  ivoper  time,  and,  as  Erasmus 
advised,  kept  in  proper  limits,  Avhy  should  grammar  be  other 
than  a  help,  instead  of  a  hindrance?  For,  then,  it  is  simply 
the  exptanation  of  what  may  be  puzzling  us.  Kow,  explanation, 
if  clear  and  to  the  point,  will  not  confuse  but  assist  us.  For  it 
will  give  us  the  rationale  of  the  construction  and  frame-work 
of  forms  already  mastered,  and  teach  us  how,  intelligently,  to 
construct  others  upon  these  vivid  models.  In  a  word,  it  will  fill 
the  gaps  of  our  practical  knowledge  and  bind  its  segments 
firmly  together.  Thus  to  complete  and  cap  the  edifice,  but  not 
to  be  tlie  foundation  and  main  support  of  it,  that  is  the  office  of 
grammar. 

HOW    IT    IS    TAUGHT    IN    THIS    BOOK. 

In  the  first  place,  notes  are  given  at  the  bottom  of  every 
French  (or  German)  page.  These  are  not  expected  to  be 
specially  memorized,  but  are  rather  meant  as  present  answers 
to  whatever  queries  may  arise  in  the  mind  concerning  the 
forms  and  phrases  we  master.  In  addition,  all  the  necessary 
grammatical  elements  of  the  language  are  found  together, 
properly  classified,  at  the  end  of  the  book,  while  the  learner  is 
referred  to  them  from  time  to  time  throughout  the  text.  In 
this  way,  avc  are  assured  a  thoroughness  not  attained  by  works 
which  cut  the  grammar  into  shreds,  and  sow  it  piecemeal 
throughout  their  pages,  so  that  seeing  no  end  or  connection 
about  this  straggling  grammatical  mass,  the  learner  becomes 
inevitably  and  hopelessly  bewildered. 

But  it  will  be  found  that,  as  a  result  of  the  mastery  of  idio- 
matic forms  obtained  through  this  method,  many  minor  rules 
ivill  have  taiu/J;t  themsrlvrs ;  (bus,  isolating  the  inain  aiul  m)re 
difficult   rules,   which    arc   then    easily  mastered.     Five  of  the 


X  HOW    TO    SPEAK    A    LANGUAGE. 

latter,  which  I  consider  most  important  and  hence  call  the 
"  Five  Cardinal  Rules,"  are  inserted  from  place  to  place  in 
the  text  so  as  to  further  isolate  them  for  the  pupil. 

However,  the  book  is  so  constructed  as  to  allow  those  who, 
like  John  Locke  and  Herbert  Spencer,  are  adverse  to  grammar, 
to  study  without  it. 

CONVERSATION. 

Another  distinctive  feature  of  this  method  remains  to  be 
explained.  Any  system  of  teaching  languages  not  based  upon 
the  successive  treatment  of  actual  topics  will  be  one-sided  and 
incomplete.  For  if,  as  Prendergast  says,  "  disconnected  words 
are  not  language, ^^  then  certainly,  disconnected  seiitences  are  not 
conversation.  For  this  reason,  and  in  view  of  the  manifold 
and  patent  advantages  of  such  a  plan,  every  portion  of  this 
work  (whether  sentences,  conversations,  exercises,  or  even 
readings)  is  cast  in  conversational  form.  And  in  order  to 
create  a  series  of  topics  at  once  practical  and  interesting,  we 
are  so  to  speak,  transported  to  Paris  (or  Berlin,  or  Madrid), 
and  then  surrounded  with  the  most  natural  circumstances 
pertaining  to  traveling  or  residing  in  the  country  of  which  we 
study  the  language.  In  this  medium,  we  are  made  to  speak, 
to  read,  and  to  write  about  things  which  we  would  really  need 
to  know  and  to  say  with  foreigners. 

The  book  is  composed  of  five  parts.  At  the  beginning  of  each 
of  these,  a  long  idiomatic  sentence  is  given,  with  its  pronun- 
ciation and  translation.  This  sentence  is  divided  into  its  clauses, 
each  one  of  which  introduces  a  number  of  other  sentences  modi- 
fied from  or  related  to  it.  Then  follows  a  vocabulary,  a  portion 
of  which  is  absorbed  in  "Conversations"  and  "Exercises."  (See 
Directions,  page  xi.)  Finally,  a  reading,  and,  generally,  a  letter 
close  every  section. 

In  order  to  assure,  beyond  question,  in  the  execution  of  the 
German,  that  perfect  accuracy  which  characterizes  the  French 
book,  the  able  services  of  Dr.  Rudolf  Tombo,  a  native  of  Ger- 
many, graduate  of  the  Berlin  and  Leipsic  universities,  and 
an  experienced  German  teacher,  have  been  secured.  In  short, 
nothing  has  been  omitted  to  make  the  method  a  complete  and 
interesting,  as  well  as  a  thorough  and  practical  one. 

EDMOND    GASTINEAU. 


DIRECTIONS. 
I.  — PREPARATION    OF    THE    LESSONS. 

Read  the  sentence  found  at  the  beginning  of  each  part  a 
number  of  times,  by  means  of  the  figured  pronunciation.  This 
reading,  if  possible,  should  be  done  aloud,  as  first  and  properly 
recommended  by  Langenscheidt.  When  the  sentence  begins 
in  this  way  to  grow  familiar,  attempt  to  repeat  it  from  the 
English  side,  without  looking  at  the  German.  If  any  word 
escapes  the  memory,  however,  look  at  it  at  once,  yet  do  not 
finish  the  sentence  from  there,  but  return  to  the  beginning  of  it ;  and 
again,  from  the  English  side,  attempt  to  repeat  it  from  end  to 
end  without  looking  at  the  German.  This  will  be  found  a  much 
easier  task  than  one  would  anticipate,  and  soon  the  learner 
will  find  himself  able  to  repeat  a  long  and  idiomatic  sentence 
with  practical  fluency. 

This  done,  learn  the  shorter  sentences  following  in  the  same 
manner.  When  one  page  has  been  gone  over,  return  to  the 
beginning  of  it  and  attempt  to  repeat  all  the  sentences  from 
the  English  side,  without  the  help  of  the  German. 

CONVERSATIONS,  EXERCISES,  READINGS,  LETTERS.  —  Directions 
will  be  found  with  each  of  these.  But  in  the  case  of  the  Con- 
versations, write  them  out  in  English,  if  necessary,  and  repeat 
the  German  aloud  from  this  translation. 

II.  — HINTS    FOR    RECITATIONS. 

The  'sentences'  may  be  recited  in  class,  either  by  each  pupil 
separately,  or  by  a  section  of  the  class  speaking  together.  The 
teacher  may  ask  the  English,  the  pupil  or  pupils  repeating 
the  German  without  aid  of  the  book,  or,  if  the  class  is  apt  and 
forward,  the  instructor  may  read  one  of  the  German  questions, 
the  pupils  giving  the  answer  from  memory. 

The  Literal  Translations  accompanying  each  idiomatic 
phrase  will  allow  the  pupil,  once  he  has  mastered  the  sentence, 
to  study  the  meaning  of  each  word,  while  also  gi^'ing  him  a 
clear  conception  of  what  the  Germans  really  say. 

THE  conversations  AND  EXERCISES.  —  At  first,  the  English 
of  the  conversations  may  be  given,  the  pupil  repeating  the 
German  from  memory.     But  the  class  should  be  gradually  led 


XU  DIRECTIONS. 

to  repeat  these  as  real  conversations,  with  such  additions  oi 
alterations  as  may  be  brought  in  by  the  instructor. 

With  adults,  I  usually  recommend  not  to  have  the  exercises 
written  out,  but  only  recited  orally. 

THE  LETTERS.  —  It  has  been  my  invariable  experience  that 
to  memorize  a  few  model  letters  and  write  them  from  memory, 
impresses  the  usual  forms  of  letter-writing  better  than  months 
of  ordinary  exercise  writing.  But  in  addition  to  this,  it  is  well 
to  lead  pupils  to  write  letters  on  topics  suggested  to  them. 

SELECTION  OF  THE  MATTER.  —  It  is  a  good  plan  to  omit  those 
X)ortions  of  a  book  which  appeal  least  directly  to  the  particular 
pupil  or  class.  Thus,  with  children,  I  would  omit  sections  about 
needle-work,  for  instance.  If  ladies  are  studying,  I  would  pass 
over  business  letters,  etc.  A  good  way  is  to  draw  a  pencil-mark 
diagonally  across  the  parts  thus  omitted.  This  does  away  with 
the  feeling  of  incompleteness  otherwise  engendered. 

CONVERSATION.  —  After  recitation,  whether  of  Sentences, 
Conversations,  or  Exercises,  etc.,  pupils  should  be  drilled,  as 
far  as  time  and  size  of  class  permit,  in  independent  conversa- 
tion over  the  topics  just  treated,  care  being  taken  to  introduce 
words  from  the  vocabularies.  Questions  should  also  be  asked 
of  them  concerning  the  facts  contained  in  the  readings,  and 
they  should  be  led  to  answer  in  the  foreign  tongue. 

III.  — FOR    SELF-STUDY. 
SENTENCES,  ETC.  —  Follow  directions    under  "Preparation, 

Etc."  Do  not  stop  short  of  uttering  the  phrases  without  any 
hesitation. 

CONVERSATIONS.  —  To  be  written  out  into  English  and  the 
German  repeated  aloud  from  that,  without  help  of  the  book. 
But  learners  should  gradually  apply  themselves  to  repeat  these 
Conversations  from  beginning  to  end,  without  looking  at  book  or 
paper. 

EXERCISES  should  be  written  out  in  German,  and  then  re- 
peated aloud  from  the  English  text  without  looking  at  the  paper. 

IV.  — TIME    OF    STUDY. 

Pendergast  was  right  in  reconiinemliiig,  at  least,  sliort  hnt  freqiUMit 
periods  of  study,  instead  of  tlie  ordinary  two  or  three  hours  of  con- 
secutive drudgery.  Study,  then,  from  five  to  fifteen  or,  at  niotit,  tliirty 
minutes,  as  often  as  practicable  each  day. 


A    FEW    WORDS. 

A  WORD  ON  THE  STUDY  OF  GERMAN.  —  It  is  gratifying  to 
notice  that  the  study  of  Germfin  is  constantly  on  the  increase, 
the  necessity  for  speaking  that  important  language  for  pur- 
poses of  business,  as  iveil  a^  the  fuller  understanding  of  its  great 
literature,  being  more  and  more  realized.  At  the  same  time, 
great  dissatisfaction  cert^iinly  prevails  with  the  results  obtained 
in  the  study  of  Gernmn,  not  only  by  private  pupils,  but  also  in 
public  and  private  schools.  This  absence  of  satisfactory  results 
is  due,  beyond  anv  doubt,  to  the  lack  of  a  conversational 
method  combiw'nq  the  elements  of  thoroughness  and  practicability. 
The  Conversation  Method  has  been  published  to  meet  this 
want,  and  to  supply  the  public  and  the  schools  with  a  method 
both  thorough  and  practical. 

A  WORD  ON  THE  USE  OF  LATIN  TYPE,  —  Latin  type  is  mostly 
used  in  the  Conversation  Method  for  German.  This  feature 
will  undoubtedly  be  welcomed,  as  it  very  properly  removes 
from  the  path  of  the  pupil  at  the  outset  one  of  those  difficulties 
which  unnecessarily  tend  to  make  German  unattractive.  It 
is  also  justified  by  the  fact  that  at  least  one-third  of  the  books 
now  published  in  Germany  are  printed  in  Latin  type. 

However,  the  pupil  is  made  thoroughly  familiar  with  Gothic 
text  by  means  of  the  Headings,  printed  in  Gothic  characters. 

A  WORD  ABOUT  GERMAN  SPELLING.  —  The  new  spelling,  adopted 
in  all  German  schools  since  1880,  is  used  in  this  method.  In 
reality  it  differs  but  little  from  the  old.  Its  characteristics  are 
as  follows : 

1.  The  capital  (as  well  as  small)  '  modified  vowels '  take  the  Umlaut 
sign  above  instead  of  after  them.  Thus  :  A,  a;  O,  6;  tj,  u;  Au,  au; 
instead  of  Ae,  ae;  Oe,  oe;  Ue,  ue;  Aeu,  aeu,  as  formerly. 

2.  The  termination  nisz  is  now  spelt  nis. 

3.  The  terminations  thuni,  thiim,  are  now  spelt  turn,  tiim. 

4.  The  letter  h  is  dropped  after  t  at  the  end  of  words ;  also,  at  the 
beginning  of  words  when  the  t  is  followed  by  a  vowel  which  is  un- 
mistakably long.  Thus,  we  now  write  Mut,  rot,  Tier,  Teil,  and  no 
longer  Muth,  roth,  Thier,  Theil. 

5.  The  d  is  dropped  from  Brodt,  Erndte,  gescheidt,  Schwerdt, 
now  spelt  Brot,  Ernte,  gescheit,  Schwert. 

Ten  words  having  formerly  aa,  ee,  oo,  drop  one  of  the  vowels. 
Thus :    Hcrde,  Los,  etc.,  and  no  longer  Heerde,  Loos,  etc. 

6.  The  infinitive  ending  iren  is  changed  into  ieren. 


TABLE    OF    SIGNS, 
As  taken  from  Webster  and  used  in  this  Book. 

Notp:.  —  Tlie  table  is  a  key  to  the  signs  used  througliout  tlie  book; 
and  the  pupil  will  do  well  to  refer  to  it  constantly  until  mastered.  A 
good  plan  is  also  to  copy  it  off  on  a  piece  of  stiff  paper  or  card-board, 
so  as  to  have  it  always  before  one  for  ready  reference. 


SIGNS. 

a  =  a  in  father. 
a  =  a  in  what. 
a  =  a  in  ale. 
a  =  a  in  share. 
6  =  e  in  spell. 
e  =  the  first  e  in  eve. 
i  = « in  pin. 
o  =  0  in  note. 
6  =  (closer  than)  o  in  not 
oo  =  00  in  noon. 
&o  =  00  in  good. 

'  =  the  nearly  silent  e  in  heaven. 
See  page  xvi. 

THE    MODIFIED 


VOWEL    SOUNDS. 

VOWELS    REPRESENTED. 

Long  sound  of  a.     Soo  p.  xv. 
Short  sound  of  a.     See  p.  xvi. 
First  long  sound  of  e.     See  p.  xvi. 
Second  long  sound  of  e.     See  p.  xvi. 
Short  sound  of  e.     See  p.  xvi. 


Long  sound  of  i. 
Short  sound  of  i. 
Long  sound  of  o. 
Short  sound  of  o. 
Long  sound  of  u. 
Short  sound  of  u. 


See  p.  xvi. 
See  p.  xvi. 
See  p.  xvi. 
See  p.  xvi. 
See  p.  xvi. 
See  p.  xvi. 


Ex. :  Oben.     Pron. :  o^-b'n. 


a  =  a  in  air. 

e  =  e  in  spell. 

A  =  uiu  urge,  but  much 

deeper.     See  p.  xvii. 
u  =  ?t  in  hut. 
u.  =  u  in  gude. 
u=u  in  duenna. 


VOTVELS. 

Long  sound  of  a.     See  p.  xvii. 


Short  sound  of  a. 
Long  sound  of  6. 

Short  sound  of  o. 
Long  sound  of  ii. 
Short  sound  of  ii. 


See  p.  xvii. 
See  p.  xvii. 

See  p.  xvii. 
See  p.  xvii. 
See  p.  xvii. 


DIPHTHONGS. 

Sound  of  au.     See  p. 


Sound  of  ai  and  ei. 
Sound  of  au  and  eu. 


THE 

a-db  =:  ou  in  house. 
\  =  i  in  pine. 
6-i  =  oy  in  hoy. 

THE    CONSONANTS, 

cZi  =  soft  sound  of  eh.     See  p.  xix. 
hh  =  hard  sound  of  cli.     See  p.  xix, 
ii  =:  ng  in  singer.     See  p.  xx. 


xvii. 

See  p.  xvii. 
See  p.  xvii. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


In  German,  pronunciation  and  spelling  correspond  much 
more  closely  with  each  other  than  is  the  case  in  English.  As 
a  general  rule,  each  word  is  pronounced  exactly  as  it  is  written, 
there  being  no  silent  letters  except  sometimes  li.* 

Notwithstanding  these  facts,  a  thoroughly  elaborated  system 
of  figured  pronunciation  is  given  throughout  this  book  for  the 
following  reasons :  It  will  be  of  material  help  to  those  who 
have  to  study  without  a  teacher.  It  will  be  of  help  even  to 
those  who  study  under  a  teacher,  as  it  will  recall  to  them 
sounds  and  directions  given  him  which  otherwise  will  fre- 
quently escape  the  memory.  Finally,  it  accurately  indicates 
where  the  accent  or  accents  on  any  new  word  may  be,  —  this 
actually  being  a  most  important  element  of  pronunciation. 

In  the  Pronunciation  and  Table  of  Signs,  English  values,  as 
taken  from  Webster,  are  used  to  represent  equivalent  German 
sounds.  This,  if  properly  done,  furnishes  a  perfectly  clear  and 
well-nigh  absolute  criterion  for  the  learner. 

THE    VOWELS. 

Vowels  may  be  long  or  short  in  quantity,  while  their  quality 
(or  shade  of  sound)  is  either  absolutely  or  nearly  the  same. 

1.  A  vowel,  when  double  or  followed  by  the  letter  h,  is 
always  long.     Ex.:   Haar  (har),  hair;   Kuh  (koo),  cow. 

2.  A  vowel  when  followed  by  a  double  consonant  (as  tntn, 
8S,  W,  etc.)  is  always  short.  Thus:  Kamm  (k^m),  comb ; 
lessen  (la^-s'n),  to  let;   Bett  (b6t),  bed,  etc. 

o.  A  vowel  followed  by  two  consonants  m  the  saine  syllable  is 
generally  short.     Ex.  :  Bald  (bait),  soon;  Kentnis,  knowledge. 

Sounds  of  A. 

Long  sound  =  a  in  father.     Sign  :  a. 

Examples:  \atei,  father ;  Haar,  hair;  Bahn,  road. 
Short  sound  =  «  in  ivhat.     Sign  :  g,. 

Examples:  hat,  has;  Hand,  hand;  Mann,  man 


*  However,  some  simple  sounds  are  represented  by  a  combination 
of  two  or  tliree  letters,  as  sch  (pron. :  sh),  ch,  ie  (pron. :  e),  etc. 

XV 


XVI  PRONUNCIATION. 

Sounds  of  E. 

LONG   SOUNDS. 

First  long  sound  =  a  in  ale.     Sign  :  a. 

Examples:  'Rede,  speech ;  Schnee,  snow ;  Ueh,  deer. 
Second  long  sound  =  a  in  share*    Sign  :  a. 

Examples:  Leder,  leather ;  Pferd,  horse. 

SHORT    SOUNDS. 

First  short  sound  =  6"  in  spell.*    Sign  :  6. 

Examples:  T>enu,for;  Belt,  bed;  Kecke,  hedge. 
Second  short  sounds  the  last  e  in  heaven.     Sign  :  '• 
Ex. :  haben  (pron. :  lia^-b'n),  to  have;  Klager  (kld^-g'r), plaintiff. 

Sounds  of  I  (3,   i).t 
Long  sound  =  the  first  e  in  eve.    Sign  :  e. 

Examples:  Mir,  to  me;  lieben,  to  love ;  ihm,  to  him. 
Short  sound  =  i  in  pin.    Sign  :  i.  §    Ex. :  Lippe,  lip ;  List,  deceit. 

Note  1.  —  An  i  followed  by  e  or  h  is  long,  the  e  (or,  h)  being 
entirely  silent.    Thus ;  Astronomie,  a-stro-no-me'. 

Exception:  le  in  words  of  foreign  origin,  liowever,  is  pronounced 
i-g  (or,  yg).     Thus  :  Faniilic,  fa-me'-li-e. 

Note  2.  —  Y  (Gothic  letter,  ^),  when  a  vowel,  is  sounded  Hke  i.  Thus : 
Syrup  (se-roop),  Myrte  (mir-te).     For  consonantal  sound,  see  page  xx. 

Sounds  of  O. 

Long  sound  =  o  in  note.     Sign  :  o. 

Examples:  'H.o\Qn,  to  fetch ;  Loh,  praise;  Mond,  moon. 
Short  sound  =  0  in  not  (but  somewhat  closer'). \\     Sign :  6. 
Examples:  dort,  there ;  Gold  (g61t),  gold. 
Sounds  of  U. 
Long  sound  =  n  in  rule.    Sign  :  oo. 

Examples:  Schi*le,  school;  Buch,  book. 
Short  sound  =  ii  in  _p?(//.     Sign:  c)b.    Ex.:  Schu]d,  fauUs. 


*  Only,  slightly  more  open. —  f  Notice  that  capital  I  and  (•a))itnl  J  are 
the  same  letter  in  Gotliic  print  (3).     But  small  i  =  t,  and  ^mull  j  =  !• 

{J  Note,  however,  »liat  tlie  German  sliort  i,  wliile  havinu  [\\v  quajititu 
or  length  of  i  in  ;>///,  lias  the  pure  qiiaUty  of  ihe  lirst  c  in  aw 

II  It  is  really  a  sound  between  that  of  0  in  not  and  0  in  other. 


PRONUNCIATION.  XVll 

MODIFIED    VOWELS. 

The  letter  e  following  a,  o,  or  u,  modifies  the  sound  of  these 
three  letters.  In  modern  German,  this  e  is  represented  by  a 
double  sign  (")  above  the  vowel  modified.  Thus:  A,  a;  O,  6; 
tJ,  ii  (instead  of  Ae,  ae,  etc.). 

Sounds  of  A. 

Long  sound  =  ain  air.  Sign:  ^.  Ex.:  Thranen  (tr^'^-n^u), tears. 
Short  sound  =  e  in  spe//.     Sign:  e.     Ex.:  Ldchelxi,  smile. 

Sounds  of  6. 

Long  sound  =  u  in  ur-ge,  but  much  deeper.     Sign  :  u. 

This  sound  really  does  not  exist  in  English.     To  produce  it, 

sound  the  u  in  urge,  only  deeper,  that  is  to  say,  not  as  a  throat, 

but  as  a  profound  chest  tone.     The  lips  are  also  slightly  contracted, 

and  held  much  closer.   Ex. :  schon  (shun),  beautiful;  m  gen,  may. 

Short  sound  =  It  in  hut.    Sign  :  u.     Ex. :  Worter,  words. 

Sounds  of  ij. 

This  sound  has  no  equivalent  in  English,  although  the  u  in 
the  Scotch  word  gude  approximates  it  somewhat.  It  is  really 
the  same  sound  as  that  of  the  French  u.  To  produce  it,  con- 
tract tightly  (but  do  not  protrude  the  lips  as  if  about  to  whistle), 
then,  with  the  lips  firmly  held  so,  attempt  to  give  the  sound  of 
ee  in  meet,  but  quickly. 

It  may  be  long  or  short: 
Long  Sound.  —  Sign,  ii.     Ex.:  mUde,  tired;  Schiller^  scholars. 
Short  Sound. — Sign,  u,    Ex.:  Gliickf  happiness;  Hiitte,  hut. 

THE    DIPHTHONGS. 

Diphthongs  are  combinations  of  two  vowels.    Thus  : 
Sound  of  ai  and  ei  =  i  in  pine.     Sign  :  i. 

Examples:  Mai  (pron. :  mi),  3Iay ;  Frei,free. 
Sound  of  au  =  oii  in  house.    Sign  :  a-db. 

Example:  Haws  (pron.:  lia-dbs),  house. 
Sound  of  au  and  eu  =  oy  in  hoy.     Sign  :  6-i. 
Ex.:  Hai^ser  (pron. :  lio-i^-z'r),  houses;  Fewer  (pron. :  f6-i^- 
'r),  fire. 


XVlll  PRONUNCIATION. 

THE    CONSONANTS. 

Consonants  in  German  are  sounded  as  in  English,  with  the 
followKjg  exceptions : 
B  at  the  end  of  words  (or  preceding  a  final  consonant)  =p;* 
Lob,  praise;  pron. :  lop.    Geliebt,  beloved ;  pron. :  g-e-lepf. 
C  before  e,  i,  a,  y,  or  o  =  ts.    Ex. : 
Cylinder,  Cacilie.    Pron. :  tse-lin^'-d'r,  tsd-tse^-li-6. 

Note.  —  Elsewhere  c,  as  in  English  =  A;.  Thus:  Coiito,  account; 
Cousin,  cousin. 

Ch  is  pronounced  either  with  a  hard  or  a  soft  sound.  Neither 
has  any  equivalent  in  English. 

Soft  Sound  of  ch. — Sign,  ch.  To  produce  the  soft  sound, 
pronounce  the  y  in  yes,  but  aspirate  it.  Or,  let  the  mouth  be 
slightly  open,  while  the  tongue  is  flattened  and  its  sides  pressed 
against  the  upper  teeth.  Then  try  to  pronounce  the  letter  c, 
hut  forcibly,  while  the  tongue  is  firmly  held  in  position.  Ex. : 
liicht,  light ;  welche,  which ;  Bucher,  books,  etc. 

Note.  —  Ch  is  soft  everywhere  except  after  the  vowels  a,  o,  and  M.f 

Hard  Sound  of  ch.  —  Sign,  kh.    To  produce  it,  open  the 
mouth  somewhat  widely  and  make  an  effort  as  if  to  clear  the 
throat,  while  contracting  slightly  the  aperture  of  the  throat  and 
larynx.     As  already  seen,  ch  is  hard  after  a,  o,  and  u.     Ex.  : 
Dacfe  (d^feTi,),  roof;  ^och  (do/cfe),  yet;  Tuch  {tobkh),  cloth. 

K  Sound  of  ch. — Sign,  k,  Ch,  when  followed  by  s  (also, 
generally  at  the  beginning  of  words)  =  k.    Ex. : 

Wac/isen  (v^lC-s'n),  to  watch.     C/tristus  (kris^'-tdbs). 

Note.  — When  the  s,  following  ch,  is  really  the  first  letter  of  a  suffix, 
ch  is  no  longer  pronounced  like  k,  but  has  the  ch  or  hh  sound. 
Thus  :  Wac/i-sam,  watchful.  Pron.:  vafcli'-sain;  not,  vak'-sam,  because 
sam  is  not  an  original  part  of  the  word,  but  a  suffice,  asful  is  in  English. 


1  One  of  the  two  vowels  may  be  a  modified  vowel.     Ex. :  au. 

*  The  sound  of  linal  b  in  German  is  perhaps  a  little  heavier  than 
the  absolutely  flat  sound  of  p  in  English,  but  very  slightly  so. 

t  After  au  and  eu,  ch  is  soft,  although  following  u,  because  the  u 
is  then  a  part  of  the  diphthong,  and  no  longer  an  independent  letter. 
Thus:  Gebrauche,  customs;  leuchten,  ff>  ,<>hi.ne.  Pron.:  gS-br5-i'- 
ch^,  loAch'-Vn.  ^ 


PRONUNCIATION.  XIX 

D  at  the  end  of  a  word  =  <.     Ex. :  MileZ,  mild.     Pron. :  milt. 

At  the  end  of  a  syllable,  followed  by  a  consonant,  d  has  also 
the  sound  of  t.     Ex. :  BilcZlich,  typical.    Pron. :  \yiW-\\ch, 

G  at  the  beginning  of  words  and  syllables  =  (7  in  get.  Ex.: 
6rretchen;  Creist,  spinY.     Pron.:  grat^-c/t'n,  gist. 

At  the  end  of  words  or  syllables,  or  when  just  preceding  a 
final  consonant,  g  has  either  the  soft  or  the  hard  sound  of  ch. 
Sign,  ch  and  kh.  Ex. :  Tagr  {tUTch),  day;  Tagrlich  {t^ch^-Wch), 
daily ;  Magrd  (mafe/it),  girl;  erregrt  (6r-racM^),  excited. 

H  at  the  end  or  in  the  middle  of  a  syllable  is  silent,  and 
merely  lengthens  the  preceding  vowel.    Ex. :  We/i-  (va),  pain. 

After  t,  h  is  also  silent.     Ex. :  TJ^un,  to  do.     Pron. :  toon. 
Note.  —  Elsewhere,  li  is  always  aspirated.    Thus  :  Hwt  (hoot),  hat. 
3,  as  a  consonant  (latin  letter,  f)  =  y  m  yet.    Ex. :  «7a,  yes. 
Ng  =  ng  in  singer,  but  not  in  finger.    Sign  :  n. 

Example  :  Singren,  to  sing.    Pron. :  zm''-'n. 
N  before  k  =  n^  in  singer,  but  not  quite  as  strong  and  distinct 
as  ng.    Sign :  also,  n.    Example  :  Danfe  (dank). 

Note.  —  However,  when  n  and  g  (or  k)  belong  to  the  different  syl- 
lables, each  is  pronounced  separately.    Ex. :  Hinflreben,  to  give  away. 

R  is  more  hard  and  gutteral  than  in  English. 

Qu  =  A;w.    Ex.:  Quelle  (kw6M6). 

S  (sharp  sound).  —  Sign,  s.  S  has  the  sound  of  s  in  sad  when 
before  a  consonant,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  or  when  double. 

Ex.:  Leisten,  to  afford;  Haus,  house;  beissen,  to  bite. 

S  (soft  sound).  —  Sign,  z.  Before  a  vowel,  at  the  beginning 
of  words ;  also,  in  the  middle  of  words  when  preceded  by  m,  n, 
If  or  r,  s  =  z.    Ex.: 

Sehen  (za^-'n),  Gesang  (gr6-zan0,  Felsen  (ffeF-z'n). 

Sch  =  sh  in  short.    Ex. :  Fisch  (fish),  fish. 

St  and  sp  {beginning  a  word  or  syllable)  are  pronounced 
differently  in  various  parts  of  Germany.  The  most  current 
pronunciation  is  that  of  sht,  shp,  the  h  sound  being  somewhat 
lighter  than  it  would  be  in  English.    The  other  propunciation 


XX  PRONUNCIATION. 

is  purely  that  of  st  and  sp  in  English.  The  signs  sht  and  sfep 
are  used  in  this  book  to  represent  both  pronunciations.  Ex.: 
/S»<ehen  (s/fcta^-'n),  to  stand.    The  pupil  can  elect  for  either. 

^g  (latin  letters,  ss)=ss.     Ex.:  <^pa^  pron. :  sT^pas. 

T  before  le  or  io  =  ^6'.    Ex. :  Pafient  (pa-tsi-ent^),  patient. 

Th  always  =  i  in  mat.     Ex. :  T^iir,  door.     Pron. :  tiir. 

Tz  =  ts  in  bats.  —  V  =/  in  fleet.     Ex. :  Fiel  (f  el),  much. 

1^  =  1;  in  vine.  However,  it  is  pronounced  in  a  somewhat 
heavier  manner  and  approaches  the  sound  of  w  a  little  more 
than  the  v  in  English.     Ex. :   Wein  (vin),  wine. 

Y  (Gothic  letter,  ^),  as  a  consonant,  =  y.   Ex, :  lacht  (ysikht). 

Z  =  ts  in  bats.    Ex. :  Zug  (tsobkJi),  train  ;  Her«  (h6rts),  heart. 

N.  B.  —  Double  consonants  are  pronounced  a  little  more 
distinctly  than  in  English. 

HOW    TO    DIVIDE    WORDS    INTO    SYLLABLES. 

A  single  consonant  in  the  middle  of  a  word  goes  with  the 
following  syllable.    Thus  :  Station,  station.    Divide  :  Sta-tion, 

However,  the  compound  consonants,  ch,  sen,  ph,  th,  dt, 
count  as  one.  Ex.:  Eichen^  oak;  Epheu,  ivy;  Stddte,  cities. 
Divide :  Ei-chen,  E-pheu,  Std-dte, 

Two  consonants  in  the  middle  of  a  word  belong,  one  to  the 
previous,  the  other  to  the  following  syllable.  Ex. :  Schiffe, 
ships;  Schulter,  shoulder.    Divide:  Schif-fe,  Schul-ter, 

THE    ACCENT. 

The  accent  falls  on  the  main  syllable  of  the  word ;  i.  e.,  on 
the  syllable  which  indicates  principally  its  meaning. 

Exceptions  :  Words  of  foreign  origin  usually  have  the  accent 
on  the  last  syllable.    Ex. :  Station,     Pron. ;  sMa-tsi-on''. 

Compound  words  have  two  accents.  The  main  accent 
falls  on  the  main  or  radical  syllable  of  the  first  component 
part.  The  secondary  accent  falls  on  the  radical  vowel  of  the 
second  component  part.    Ex. :  Tintenfass  (tin^-t'n-fas'), 

ExcEFnoN:  In  compound  particles  (ns  obgleich,  although; 
formed  of  ob  and  gleich),  the  accent  generally  falls  on  the  last 
component  part.    See  also  pages  234  and  480. 


Par^  L 


THE    ARRlVALc 


DIE    AI^J^KU^FT 


.o^« 


SECTION    I. 


1. 

THE  ARRIVAL. 

2. 

TO  HAVE  BAGGAGE  CARRIED. 

3. 

GOING  TO  THE  WAITING-ROOM. 

A. 

IN  THE  WAITING-ROOM. 

5. 

ABOUT  TRAVEL. 

6. 

THE  RAILWAY;  CITIES  AND  COUNTRIES. 

7. 

IN  THE  DEPOT. 

8. 

TO  TAKE  A  CAB. 

9. 

READING:  THE  ALPHABET. 

I. 


DIE    ANKUNFT.* 

Was  woUeii  Sie  thuii,  weiin  wir  dort  an- 
kominen? — Zuerst  will  ich  mir  meiii  Gepack 
g^ebeu  lasseii,  daiiii  eiiie  Droschke  nehmeii 
uiid  sogleich  in  das  Hotel  zum  Friihstuck 
fahren. 

PRONUNCIATION.t 

Vas  v6 -rn  ze  toon,  v6ii  ver  dort  an''-k6'-in'ii  ? 
—  Tsoo-arst^  vil  ichf  iiier  niiu  g6-p6k^  ga^-b'n  la^-s'n, 
d^n  i^-n6  dr6sh^-k6  na^'-ni'n  obnt  zo-gllch^t  in  d^s 
lio-t61^  tsobm  frii^-sfetwk'  fa^-r'n.i 


*  De  an'-koonft'. 

t  Soft  sound  of  the  German  ch.    See  Pkonunciation. 
1  For  the  value  of  signs  used,  see  Table  of  Signs. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 

What  do  you  want^  to  do  when  we  get 
there?  —  In  the  first  place,  I  want  to  get 
my  baggage,  and  then  take  a  cab  and  go  at 
once  to  the  hotel  for  breakfast. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATION. 

Wliat  will  you  ^  do  when  we  there  arrive  ?  —  At-first, 
will  I  to-me  my  bagrgrag-e  give  let,  then  a  cab  take 
and  at-once  in  the  hotel  to-the  breakfast  g-o. 


1  The  Germans  never  use  thun  as  an  auxiliary  in  asking  questions, 
as  the  Englisli  use  do.  Thus,  Do  you  want?  becomes  simply,  Want 
(or  rather,  Will)  you?  Wollen  Sie? 

3 


DIE    ANKUNFT. 


!• 


GERMAN. 


1.  Was  wollen  Sie  thun? 

Was  wollen  Sie  thun  lussen?! 

Was  wollen  Sie  thun   lassen,^  wenn  wir  dort  an- 

kommen  ? 
Was  wollen  Sie  tragen  lassen?^ 


2.  Wollen  Sie  Ihre  Reisetasche  tragen  las- 
sen  ?  ^ 

Nach  dem  Wartesaal? 

Wollen  Sie  nicht  ^  Ihre  Reisetasche  tragen  lassen  ? 

Wollen    Sie  nicht  ^  Ihre    Reisetasche    nach   dem 
Wartesaal  tragen  lassen? 


NOTES. 

1  The  Germans  use  lassen  (Lit.  :  let)  with  very  different  meanings. 
In  tlie  present  instance,  lassen  accompanied  by  tlie  infinitive  thun  is 
to  be  rendered  in  Englisli  by  to  have  done,  in  the  sense  of  cmising  [any 
thing)  to  be  done  or  made.  —  It  is  used  in  the  same  way  witli  any  infini- 
tive. Tims  :  Tragen  lassen,  To  have  [any  thing)  carried,  (see  fourth  and 
fiftli  sentences) ;  Ausbessern  lassen  (a-oos'-bgs'-'rn  la'-s'n).  To  have 
{any  thing)  mended;  etc. —  2  Nicht  =  uo^.  Tlie  Germans  do  not  have 
any  word  corresponding  to  the  English  auxiliary  do.  Hence^  /  don't 
want  becomes  /  want  not. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


I. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  Vas  voM'ii  ze  toon^? 

Vas  vo'-l'n  ze  toon  la'-s'n? 

Vas  vo'-l'n  ze  toon  la'-s'n, 
ven  ver  dort  an'-ko'-m'n? 

tra'-g'n  la'-s'n  ? 


What  do  you  want  to  do?^ 

What   do    you   want  to    have 

done? 2 
What   do    you  want  to    have 

done  when  we  get  there?* 

What  do    you   want  to    have 
carried  ?  * 


2.    To^-rn  ze  e^-r6  rF-zS- 
ta'-sli6  tra^-g-'n  la^-s'n? 

'Nakh  dam  var^-te-zal'? 
Vo'-l'n    ze    nicht   e'-re   ri'- 
ze-ta'-she  tra'-g'n  la'-s'n? 
Vo'-l'n  ze  nicht . 


Do  you  want  to  have  your 
travelingr-bag"  carried  ?  ^ 

To  the  ^  waiting-room  ?  ® 

Do  you  not  want  to  have  your 

traveHng-bag  carried  ?' 
Will  you  not  have  your  travel- 
ing-bag carried  to  the  wait- 
ing-room ?  ^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  What  will  you  do? 

2  What  will  you  do  let? 

3  What  will  you  do  let  when  we  there  arrive? 

*  What  will  you  carry  let? 

5  Will  you  your  traveling-bag  carry  let? 

6  After  to-the  waiting-room?  —  See  page  10,  note  *. 
J'  Will  you  not  your  traveling-bag  carry  let  ? 

8  Will  you  not  your  traveling-bag  to  the  waiting-room  carry  let? 

*  Before  masculine  nouns,  The  —  Aer,  Ofthe  =  deSy  To  the=deni. 


6  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

3.  Neiii,  ich  will  niclit. 

Nein,  ich  will  sie  nicht  tragen  lassen. 

Ich  kann. 

Ich  kann  sehr  gut. 

Ich  kann  sie  sehr  gut  selbst^  tragen. 


4.  Warvim  wollen  Sie  *  sie  iiicht  tragen  las- 
sen? 

Weil  wir  sie  eben  so  gut  selbst^  tragen  konnen. 

Bis  zum^  Wartesaal. 

Weil  wir  sie  eben  so  gut  selbst  bis  zum  Wartesaal 
tragen  konnen. 


5.   Gepacktriig^er !     Bitte,    wollen    Sie    niir 
sag^en  ? 

Bitte,  wollen  Sie  mir  sagen,  wo  der  Wartesaal  ist? 

Ja,  mein  Herr,  gerade  aus. 

Ja,  mein  Herr,  gerade  vor  Ihnen.^ 


NOTES. 

1  Selbst  (lit. :  self)  is  rendered  by  myself,  himself  herself  itself  our- 
selves, yourselves,  themselves,  (and  sometimes  by  self  ou\y). 

2  A  contraction  of  zu  dem  (tsoo  dSm),  to  the.  —  3  Ihnen,  dative  of 
Sie,  after  tlie  preposition  vor.  Some  German  prepositions  j^ovcrn  the 
genitive,  others  the  dative,  etc.  In  the  literal  translations  only  the 
equivalent  English  preposition  will  be  given,  the  of  or  to  contained  in 
the  German  genitive  or  dative  form  being  omitted.  Thus,  vor  Ihnen 
is  rendered  by  before  you,  instead  of  before  to-you ;  etc. 

*■  Sie  (with  capital  S)  =  yow ;  sie  (without  capital)  =;.s7te.  her,  it,  them. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


3.  Nin,  ich  vil  nicht, 

ze    nicht  tra'-g'n   la  - 

s'n. 

Ich  kan. 

zar  goot. 

ze  zar  goot  zelpst  tra'- 
g'n. 


No,  I  don't  want.i 

No,   I  don't  want  to   have   it 

carried.^ 
I  can. 

I  can  very  well. 
I   can  very  well   carry  it  my- 

self.8 


4.  Ysi-r^onV  vo^-l'n  ze  ze 
nicht  tra^-gr*n  la^-s'n? 

Vil  ver  ze  a'-b'n  zo  goot 
zelpst  tra'-g'n  ku'-nen. 

Bis  tsoom  var'-te-zal'. 

zelpst  bis  tsoom  var'- 
te-zal'  tra'-g'n  ku'-nen. 


Why  will  you  not  have  it 
carried  ?  ^ 

Because   we   can  just  as   well 

carry  it  ourselves.^ 
As  far  as  the  waiting-room.* 
Because   we  can  just  as   well 

carry  it  to  the  waiting-room.' 


6.  G6-p^k^-trd-gr'r!  bi^-t6 
v6^-rn  ze  mer  za^-g'n? 

vo  d'r  var'-te-zal'  ist? 

'Va,    min    h.er',    ge-ra'-de 
a-(56s'. 
"^-^for'  e'-nen. 


Porter !    Will  you  please 
tell  nie.8 

Will  you  please  tell  me  where 

the  waiting-room  is?* 
Yes,  sir,  straight  ahead. ^"^ 

Yes,  sir,  straight  before  you.*^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  No,  I  will  not. —  2  No^  ]  ^vill  it  (strictly:  her)  not  carry  let. 
When  it  refers  to  a  feminine  noun  the  Germans  say  she,  or  her :  sie. 

3  I  can  it  very  well  myself  carry.  —  *  Why  will  you  it  not  carry  let. 

5  Because  we  it  just  as  well  ourselves  carry  can.  —  *  Till  to  the 
waiting-room. —  ^  Because  we  it  just  as  well  ourselves  till  to-the 
waiting-room  carry  can, —  «  Porter!    Please  will  you  to-me  tell? 

9  Please  will  you  to-me  tell  where  the  waiting-room  is? 

If'  Yes,  my  gentleman  (t.  e.,  sir),  straight  out. 
11  Yes,  sir,  straight  before  you. 


8  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

6.  Wohin  wiiiischen  Sie  zvi  gehen?* 

Wohin  wiinscht  der  Herr  zu  gehen? 
Wohin  wiinscht  Ihr  Freund  zu  gehen  ?  ^ 

Ich  wiinsche  zu  gehen. 
Er  wiinscht  zu  gehen. 
Wir  wiinschen  nach    dem  Wartesaal  zu  gehen. 

Gerade  vor  Ihnen,  mein  Herr. 


7.  Wohin  wiinscht  Ihre  Freundin  ^  zu  gelien, 
wenn  sie  anliommt  ? 

Sie  wiinscht  direkt  nach  dem  Hotel  zu  gehen. 
Nach  welchem  Hotel  wiinscht  sie  zu  gehen? 
Nach  dem  Hotel  de  Rome. 


8.  Wohin   wiinsclit   er   zu   reisen,  wenn  er 
Berlin  verliisst? 

Wohin    wiinscht    Ihr*  Herr    Schwiegervater ^    zu 
reisen,  wenn  er  Berlin  verlasst? 


NOTES. 

1  In  the  nominative  (or  siniple)  case,  your,  before  masculine  or 
neuter  nouns,  =  Ihr,  and  before  feminine  nouns,  =  Ihre. 

2  Freund,  wtoZe /newd ;  freunditif  female  friend.  Many  mas(?uline 
nouns  form  the  feminine  by  adding  in. 

8  Herr  Schwiegervater,  father-in-law.  Herr  (i.  e.  gentleman  or 
mister)  is  used  before  the  words  father,  father-in-law ;  sometimes  also 
before  ftro^Aer,  brother-in-law;  son,  son-in-law  or  other  words  indicating 
a  male  relation,  or  before  titles,  whenever  the  Germans  desire  to  speak 
in  a  formal  manner.  In  the  same  way  the  word  Frau  (or  Fraulein) 
is  used  when  speaking  to  other  people  of  their  lady  relatives.  Ex.: 
Ihre  Frau  Mutter  iFra-ob  Moo'-t'r) ;  lit.:  your  lady  mother.  Hire 
Fraulein  Sch  wester  (Fro-i'-lin  Slivgs'-t*r) ;  lit. :  your  young -lady  sisttr. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


6.  Vo-hln^     vtin^-sh'n    ze 
tsdb  ga^-'n? 

Vo-liin'    vwnslit   dar  h.er' 
tsdo  ga'-'n  ? 
er  fro-int  tsdo  ga'-'n. 

Ich  vun'-slie— — . 

Ar  vwnslit . 

Ver  vwn'-sh.'n  nakh  dam 
var'-te-zal'  tsdo  ga'-'n. 

Ge-ra'-de  for'  e'-nen,  min 
her'. 


7.  Vo-hin^  viinsht  e^-r6 
fro-iu^-diii  tsdb  ga^-'n, 
veiTze  an^-komt? 

Ze  viinsht  di-rekt'  nakh 
dam  ho-tel'  tsoo  ga'-'n. 

Nakh  vei'-c/i'm  lio-tel' 
vunsht  ze  tsod  ga'-'n? 

NaA;7i  dam  tio-tel'  du  r5m. 


8.  Vo-hin^  vi^nsht  ar  tsdt) 
ri^-z'ii,  v6n  ar  b6r-len^ 
fer-lest^  ? 

Vo-h.in'  vwnslit  er  h.er 
stive'-g'r-fa'-t'r  tsob  ri'-z'n, 
ven . 


Where  do  you  want* to 
go?i 

Where  does  the  gentleman 
wish  to  go  ?  ^ 

Where  does  your  friend  want 
togo?8 

I  want  to  go.* 

He  wants  to  go.^ 

We  want  to  go  to  the  waiting- 
room.® 

Straight  before  you,  sir.' 


Where  does  your  friend 
want  to  go  when  she 
arrives  ?  ^ 

She  wants  to  go  straight  to  the 

hotel.» 
To  what  hotel  does  she  want  to 


go 


?io 


To  the  Hotel  de  Rome. 


Where  does  he  want  to 
go  when  he  leaves  Ber- 
lin ?" 

Where  does  your  father-in-law 
want  to  go  when  he  leaves 
Berlin?  12 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

Whither  wish  you  to  go? 

Whither  wishes  the  gentleman  to  go? 

Whither  wishes  your  friend  to  go? 

I  wish  to  go.  —  5  He  wishes  to  go. 

We  wish  to  the  waiting-room  to  go. 

Straight  before  you,  my  master. 
8  Whither  wishes  your  friend  to  go  when  she  arrives? 
s  She  wishes  directly  to  the  hotel  to  go. 
i<>  To  which  hotel  wishes  she  to  go? 

11  Whither  wishes  he  to  travel  when  he  Berlin  leaves? 

12  Whither  wishes  your  Mr.  father-in-law  to  travel  when  he  Beilin 
leaves? —  *  For  the  use  of  zu,  see  page  11,  note  t- 


10  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Er  will  direkt  iiach  Venedig  reisen. 

Warum  will  er  nicht  mit  uiis  gehen? 

Warum   will    er    nicht    erst   mit    uns  nach  der* 
Schweiz  gehen  ?t 


Note. —  Study  the  "Table  of  Signs," 


9.   Er  wilrde  sehr  gem  ^  mitg^ehen.  f 

Er  wiirde  sehr  gern  erst  mit  uns  nach  der  Schweiz 

jgehen.* 
Aber  er  hat  Geschafte.^ 
Aber  er  hat  Geschiifte  in  Italien. 
Aber  er  hat  Geschafte   in  Venedig,   Florenz  und 

Rom. 


NOTES. 

1  The  German  adverb  gern  is  used  idiomatically  with  the  force  of 
the  English  verb  to  like.  Tims:  Er  wiirde,  he  would;  Er  wtirde 
gern,  he  would  like;  Er  wiirde  sehr  gern,  he  would  very  much 
like. 

2  Geschaft=  business.  In  i^w special  phrase,  the  phiral.  Geschafte 
(lit. :  businesses)  is  used. 

*  Dem  (masculine  and  neuter  form  for  to  the),  and  der  (feminine 
form  for  to  the.  See  page  459)  are  used  instead  of  der,  das  (masc.  and 
neut.  for  the),  and  die  (fern,  for  the),  after  certain  prepositions,  as: 
nach  {after,  or  to),  mit  {with)  von,  from,  etc.  Ex.:  To  the  waiting- 
room  =  nach  dem  WartesaaL. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


11 


Ar  vil  di-rekt'  n'dkh  fe- 
na'dich , 

ya-room  vil  ar  nicht  mit 
d6ns  ga'-'n? 

arst    mit   56ns    nakh 

d'x  stivits' ? 


He   wants    to    go    straight    to 

Venice.^ 
Why  does  he  not  want  to  go 

with  us  ?  2 
Why  does  he  not  want  to  go 

first  to  Switzerland*  with  us  ? 


page  459. 


9.  Ar   vur''-d6   zar  gfern 
niit^-g-a'-'n. 

Ar  vur'-de  zar  gem  arst  mit 
dons  nakh  d'r  slivits' . 

A.'-b'r  ar  hat  ge-shef^'-te. 

in  i-ta'-li-en. 

in    ie-na'-dic7i,    flo- 

rents'    66nt  rom . 


He  would  like  very  much^ 
to  go  (along). 

He  would  very  much  like  to  go 
first  to  Switzerland  with  us.** 

But  he  has  business.* 

But  he  has  business  in  Italy. 

But  he  has  business  •  in  Venice, 
Florence,  and  Rome. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  He  will  directly  to  Venice  travel. 

2  Why  will  he  not  with  us  go? 

8  Why  will  he  not  first  with  us  to  the  Switzerland  go? 
*  He  would  very  willingly  with-go. 

5  He  would  very  willingly  first  with  us  to  the  Switzerland  go. 

6  Businesses. 

t  Zu  is  used  before  an  infinitive  after  all  verbs  except  the  auxiliaries 
(wollen,  to  will,  konnen,  to  he  able,  etc.),  and  other  verbs  noted  later 
on.  (See  page  200.)  Ex. :  I  want  to  qo  =  ith.  wiinsche  (lit. :  wish)  zu 
gehea;  or:  ich  will  (lit.:  will)  gehen  (no  zu,  because  will  is  part 
of  the  auxiliary  wollen). 


12  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 

VOKABELN. 


Die* Eisenbahn (de i^-z'n-ban).  The  railway. 

Der  *  Bahnhof  (dar  ban'-liof '),  The  depot. 

Die*  Station  (s7ita-tsi-on'),  The  station. 

Der  Stations-Vorsteher  (for'-s7jta'-'r),  The  station-master. 

Das  Billetbureau  (bil-yet'-bii-ra'),  )  ^,     ,.  ,    ,    ^ 

_  I  The  ticket-office. 

Die  Billetausgabe( — ^-oos-ga'-be),  ) 

Das  Gepackbureau  (ge-pek'  — ),  The  baggage-room. 

Der  Gepackschein  (ge-pek'-sMn' ) ,  The  baggage-check. 

Das  Ubergewicht  (u'-b'r-ge-vicTif),  The  overweight. 

Der  Schaff'ner  (shaf'-n'r),  The  conductor. 

Der  Schnellzug  (sh.nel'-tsooA;7i')>  The  express-train. 

Der  BUtzzug  (blits'-tsoo7^7i')>  The  Hghtning  express. 

Der  Personenzug  (per-zo'-nen — ),  The  accommodation  train. 

Der  erste  Zug  (ar'-ste  tsoo'hh'),  The  first  train. 

Der  Eisenbahnwagen  (i'-z'n-ban'- 

va'-g'n),  The  railway-carriage. 

Der  Schlafwagen  (sblaf'-va'-g'n),  The  sleeping-car. 

Die  Pferde -Eisenbahn  (pfgLi-'-de — ),f  The  horse-cars  (tramway). 


*  The  German  nouns  given  in  the  vocabularies  will  always  be  ac- 
companied by  their  article,  in  order  to  indicate  their  gender.  They 
should  not  he  memorized  ivHhout  this  article.  The  German  article  has  three 
forms  for  the  singular :  Der,  before  masculine  nouns  ;  Die,  before  femi- 
nine nouns ;  Das,  before  neuter  nouns.  In  the  plural,  the  German 
article  has  one  form  only  in  the  nominative:  Die,  for  all  genders. 

t  Lit. :  The  horse-railroad. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  13 

Ine  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 

VOCABULARY. 


Die  *  Stadte  (s^t6^-t6), 

111  Berlin  (in  ber-len'), 

In  Wien  (ven), 

In  Paris  (pa-res'), 

In  London  (lon'-don), 

In  Philadelphia  (fi-la-del'-fi-a), 

In  Neu  Orleans  (no-i  6r-la-an'),^ 


Die  Lander  (leii^-d'r). 

In  Deutschland  (do-itsh'-lanf), 
In  England  (en'-lanf), 
In  Schottland  (sti6t'-lant'), 
In  Irland  (ir'-lanf), 
In  Frankreich  (frank'-rioTi'), 
In  Ostreich  (<i'-stric7i'), 
In  Amerika  (a-ma'-ri-ka), 
In  Mexico  (mek'-si-ko), 
In  den  Vereinigten  Staaten  (in  dan  fer- 
i'-nic7i-t'n  shta  -t'n), 


The  cities. 

At  or  in  Berlin.^ 
At  or  in  Vienna. 
At  or  in  Paris. 
At  or  in  London. 
At  or  in  Philadelphia. 
At  or  in  New  Orleans. 

The  countries. 

In  Germany.'* 
In  England. 
In  Scotland. 
In  Ireland. 
In  France. 
In  Austria. 
In  America. 
In  Mexico. 

In  the  United  States. 


1  7b  Berlin,  to  Paris,  to  America,  to  England,  etc.  =  Nach  Berlin, 
nach  Paris,  tiach  Amerika,  nach  Kngland,  etc. 

2  The  7iames  of  cities  and  countries  are  neuter.  Ex. :  Das  schone 
Deutschland ;  etc.  The  article,  however,  is  used  witli  tlieni  onli^ 
Avlien  an  adjective  accompanies  tliem.  Thus:  Beautiful  Germany  = 
Das  schone  (shu'-ne)  Deutschland.  But,  Germain/ =  Deutsch- 
land.   Exception:  Switzerland  =  2>ic  Schweiz  (de  Shvits). 

8  For  pronunciation  of  an,  see  page  xv. 


14  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

The  German  "  Conversations"  are  intended  for  oral  recitation  in  the 
class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see  Directions,  before  Part  I,) 

CONVERSATIONS. 

l.-DIE  ABREISE. 

Entschuldigen  Sie/  mein  Herr;  konnen  Sie^  mir 
vielleicht  ^  sagen,  wo  der  Potsdamer  Bahnhof  ist  ?  — 
Ja,  gnadige  Frau>     Er^  ist  dort,  gerade  vor   Ihnen. 

—  Danke  schoii.^ 

Gepiicktrager,  konnen  Sie  mir  zeigen/  wo  das  Ge- 
piickbureau  ist?  —  Es  ist  dort,  gnadige  Frau,  links.^ 

—  Ich  will  mein  Gepack  aufgeben.^ 

Wie  viele  Stiicke  haben  Sie  ?  ^^  —  Ich  babe  drei 
Stiicke."  — Haben  Sie  Ihr  Billet?— Nein,  noch  nicht.i^ 

—  Dann^^  konnen  Sie  Ihr  Gepack  nicht  aufgeben. 
Konnen  Sie  mir  sagen,  an  welchem  Schalter^*  man^^ 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Ent-shd6r-di-gen  ze,  I  beg  your  pardon. 

2  Ku'-n5n  ze  (lit:  can  you),  will  you.—  »  Fi-licM',  perhaps, 
(makes  the  question  more  polite).  —  ■*  Gna'-di-ge  fra-do,  madam. 
Lit. :  gracious  lady. 

*  Er  (lit.:  he)  referring  to  der  Bahnhof,  the  station.  Bahnhof 
being  a  masculine  noun,  the  pronoun  must  also  be  masculine,  to 
agree  with  it  in  gender.  Hence  we  say  er  (he),  and  not  es  (it).  See 
page  484,  par.  1.  —  6  Dan'-ke  shCin,  I  thank  you. 

7  Tsi'-g'n,  show.  —  s  Links,  left  side.  —  ^  A-oof'-ga^-b'n,  to 
check. —  10  Ve  fe'-lg  sMi*'-ke  ha'-b'n  ze?  How  many  pieces  have 
you? —  11  Ic/i  ha'-bg  dri  s/itle'-ke,  I  have  three  pieces. 

12  NoJfeJi,  nielit,  not  yet.  —  i3  Dan,  then  ;  in  that  case. 

"  Shal'-t'r,  wicket,  ticket-office. 

^  Man  nimmt  (man  nimt),  one  takes,  people  take. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  15 

die  Billette  ^  nimmt  ?  —  Nach  Potsdam,  gnadige  Frau  ? 
Links. — 1st  dies  hier^  der  Schalter  nach  Potsdam?  — 
Ja,  gnadige  Frau.  Links.  —  Wollen  Sie  mir  ein  Billet 
geben.  —  Welch  e  Klasse  ?  ^  —  Ein  Billet  erster  Klasse.* 
Or^  simply,  Eins  erster,  bitte. 

Hier  ist  mein  Billet,  und  dort  ist  mein  Gepack.  — 
Hier  ist  Ihr  Gepackschein.  —  Wie  viel^  Ubergewicht 
habe  ich?  —  Sie  haben  kein^  Ubergewicht.  Sie  haben 
25  Kilo  7  frei. 

Was  ist  das  ?  ^  —  Es  ist  das  Signal  zur  Abfahrt.^  — 
Steigen  Sie  ein.^^  —  Steigen  Sie  nicht  in  den  Wagen  da. 
Es  ist  ein  Wagen  zweiter  Klasse.^^ 

Sie  wollen  nach  Europa  reisen,  nicht  wahr?^^  — 
Ja.  Ich  will  mit  meinem  Schwager,^*  meiner  Mutter, 
und  meiner  Schwester  hinreisen.^^  —  Wann  wollen  Sie 
abreisen?^^  —  Wir    wollen    mit    dem    Dampfer    am 


.,  Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Bil-yg'-te,  plural  of  Billet.—  2  Des  her,  this,  here! 

3  Vel'-c/te  kla'-se,  which  class?—  ^  Ar'-st'r  kla'-s5,  first-class 
ticket.     Lit. :  a  ticket  of-fint  class.—  5  Ve  fel?  how  much? 

6  Kin,  no.—  7  Funf'-oont-tsvan'-tsieli  ke'-15.  One  kilo  is  about 
two  English  pounds. —  8  What  is  that? 

9  Ks  ist  das  zin-nal'  tsoor  ap'-fart',  it  is  the  signal  of  departure. 

10  S/iti'-g'n  ze  In',  step  (you)  in  (namely,  into  the  carriage). 

11  In  tliat  carriage.  Lit. :  In  the  wagon  there.  Den,  accusative  of 
der.  —  Tsvi'-t'r  kla'-sS,  of-second  class.  —  12  Ri'-z'n,  traveling. 

13  Nicltt  var  ?  Do  you  not?  Lit. :  Not  true?  Is  often  used  to  turn 
an  aflfirmative  proposition  into  a  question. 

14  Shva'-g'r,  brother-in-law.—  i^  Shves'-t'r,  sister;  hm'-ri'-z'n, 
lit. :  there  to  travel.  —  ^  Ap'-ri'-z'n,  start,  go ;  lit, :  away-go. 


16  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Samstag  fahren.^  —  Wohin  wiinschen  Sie  zuerst  zu 
gehen? — Wir  wolleii  iiach  Irland  und  England  gehen, 
und  von  da  nach  Deutschland.  Ich  wiinsche  meinen  * 
Agenten  in  Berlin  zu  besuchen.^  —  Wollen  Sie  dann 
nach  Amerika  zuriick^  kommen?  —  Nein,  wir  wollen 
nach  Frankreich,  Italien,  Griechenland,  Agypten,  und 
von  da  vielleicht  nach  Asien  gehen.  —  Was  fiir  eine 
schonef  Reise!*  —  Nicht  wahr? 


Nota  — Study  the  Declension  of  Dieser,  page  460. 


Pronunciation  and   Translations. 

1  Dam'-pf'r  am  zams'-taA;/i.  fa'-r'a ;  tlie  Saturday  boat.  Lit. :  the 
steamer  on-the  Saturday.  Am,  contraction  of  an  dem,  on  the.  Fahren, 
to  ride,  to  go. 

2  A-gen'-t»n Be-zoo'-fcli'n  to  visit,  to  see. 

3  Tsoo-rii-k'  ko'-m'n,  return.     Lit. :  hack  come. 

4  Vas  fiir  i'-ne  shu'-ne  ri'-ze!  What  a  beautiful  trip!  Lit.: 
What  for  a  heautifxd  trip  ! 

*■  Meineti-,  accusative  {masculine)  form  of  mein.  In  German,  ad- 
jectives agree  in  gender  and  number  with  their  noun.  Here,  tlie 
adjective  mein  is  made  accusative,  because  its  noun  Agenten.  {nomi- 
native:  Agent),  being  the  direct  object  of  the  verb  (zu  besuchen),  is 
in  the  accusative. 

I  £ine,  schdne,  feminine  {nominative)  forms  of  ein,  schon. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  17 

The  English  "  Exercises  "  should  he  translated  and  written  into  Ger- 
man, hut  also  treated  conversationally  in  the  class-room.    {For 
Self -Study,  see  Directions,  he/ore  Part  I,) 

EXERCISES. 

l.  —  THE  BAGGAGE* 

What  do  you  want  to  do  ?  ^  —  Will  you  have  your 
baggage  carried ?2  —  Yes,  (please)  carry  my  baggage^ 
to  the*  baggage-room.  I  want  to  go  there  to  have  my 
heavy  baggage  checked.^ 

2.- THE  ARRIVAL. 

What  does  he  want  to  do  when  he  gets  to  Berlin  ?  ^ 
—  He  wants  to  go  straight  to  the  bank.  —  After  that, 
he  wants  to  go  to  the  hotel.^  —  To-morrow,^  he  wants 
to  take  a  walk  about  the  city.^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 

1  Lit. :  What  want  (or  rather  will)  you  to-do? 

2  Lit.  :  Will  you  your  baggage  (Ihr  Handgepack)  carry  let? 
Notice  that  Ihr  {your),  and  Sie  when  meaning  you,  begin  with  a 
capital. 

«  Lit. :  Yes,  carry  you  (tragen  Sie).  —  '»  Nach  dem. 

5  I  wish  there  (Ich  will  dorthin)  to-go  in-order-to  (um)  my  heavy 
baggage  up-to-g\vc  (mein  schweres  Gepack  aufzugeben). 

6  Lit. :  What  wisbes  he  to  do  when  lie  in  Berlin  arrives  (wenn  er 
in  Berlin  ankommt). 

^  Lit.  :  After  that  (darauf)  wishes  he  to-the  hotel  to  go. 

8  Morgen.  —  »  Lit.:  He  wants  a  walk  about  the  city  to  make, 
(einen  Spaziergang  in  der  Stadt  zu  machen). 

■■  Das  Gepack.  Remember  that  the  first  letter  of  German  nouns 
is  always  written  as  a  capital.  Thus,  Gepack,  Hand;  and  not,  ge- 
pack, hand. 


18  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

3.— rO    TAKE  A    CAB. 

Cabman!^  Take  me^  to  the^  depot.  —  All  right. 
Get  into  the  carriage,*  madam.  —  I  want  to  catch  the 
two  o'clock  train.^  —  I  can  get  there.^  —  Very  well, 
drive  fast.  * 

4:. -IN   THE  DEPOT. 

At  what  time  does  the  Potsdam  train  start?"  — 
The  Potsdam  train  starts  at  two  o'clock,^  madam. — 
Please  ^  tell  me  ^^  where  the  tickets  are  taken  ?  "  —  The 
tickets  are  taken  ^^  at  the  second  wicket  ^^  (to  the) 
right.^*  —  Thank  (you).^^ — A  first-class  ticket,  please. 
How  much  is  it?^^  —  Seven  marks f — All  aboard  for 
Potsdam!  17 

5.  — SAME  SUBJECT. 

Do  you  speak  German  ?i^ — I  speak  it  a  little.^^  — 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Kutscher  (koot'-sh'r). 

2  Fahren  Sie  mich  (fa'-r'n  ze  inic^).  —  3  Nach  dem. 

*  Steigen  Sie  ein;  lit.:  Mount  you  in;  from  einsteigen  (in'-sMi''- 
g'n),  to  luouut  into,  to  get  in  (a  carriage). 

5  Lit. :  T  wish  tlie  train  at  two  o'clock  to  catch.  —  ^  Lit. :  T  can  there 
arrive  (liinkommen).  —  '  Uin  wie  viel  Uhr  geht  der  Zug  nach 
Potsdam  ab?     Lit.  :  At  how  much  o'clock  goes  the  train  to  PotMhim  offf 

8  Lit.  :   The  train  to  Potsdam  goes  at  two  o'clock  (um  zwei  Uhr)  off. 

»  Bitte.—  1"  Sagen  Sie  mir.     Lit. :  Say  ye  to-u\e. 

n   Lit. :    Where  one  the  tickets  takes,  wo  man nimmt. 

12  Lit. :  One  takes  the  tickets.  —  i^  An  ^er  zweiten  Billetausgabe. 

1*  Rechts  (rgcTits).  —  is  Danke.  —  i6  Wie  viel  macht  es  (ve  fel 
makhV  es)  ?     r>it.    —  makes  it  ?  —  ^^  Einsteigen  nacli  Potsdam  ! 

18  Sprechen  Sie  deutsch  (s/tprg'-c/i*n  ze  do-itsh')?  Lit. :  Speak 
yon  German?—  i9  Ich  spreche  es  ein  wenig  (Ic/i  shpre'-ehe  Ss  in 
va'-nic/t).  —   •   Gut!    Gehen  Sie  schnell  (goot !  ga'-'n  ze  shneF). 

t  Sieben  Mark  (ze'-b'n  mark). 


THE    ARRIVAL.  19 

Well,  will  you  come^  with  me^  to  the^  baggage- 
room?^  I  want  to  have  my  baggage  checked  for 
Leipsic*  I  can  read  German,^  but  I  cannot  speak 
it.6 

What  do  you  wish,  gentlemen  ?  *  —  My  friend  wants 
to  have  his  baggage  checked  for  LeipsicJ  —  Please 
give^  me^  your  ^^  ticket.  —  Here.^^  —  Here  is  your^^ 
baggage-check,  sir.  You  have  for  two  marks  (worth) 
of  overweight.^^ 

Where  do  you  want  to  go  ?  —  I  want  to  go  to  the 
waiting-room.  Will  you  please  tell  me  where  the 
waiting-room  is  ?-- Straight  before  you,  sir.  —  Many 
thanks. 

What  do  you  want  to  do  ?  —  I  want  to  have  my 
baggage  carried  to  the  waiting-room. 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Lit.:  Will  yon  then  (dann)  with  me a//er  «o-</je  baggage-room  go? 

2  Mit  mir  (met  mer). —  8  ijt. :  After  to-the.     See  p.  6,  note  3. 

4  1  will  my  baggage  for  Leipsic  up-give. 

5  Lit. :  I  can  German  read  (lesen,ia'-z'n). 

6  Lit. :  but  I  can  it  not  speak, 

7  Tiit. :  wants  his  baggage  for  Leipsic  np  to-give. 

8  Geben  Sie.     Lit.:  <jiveye. —  ^  Mir.     Lit.:  to-me. 

10  See  !>.  14,  9th  line.—  "  Hier  (her).  —  12  See  p.  15,  7th  line. 

13  Sie  haben  fiir  zwei  Mark  Ubergewicht. 

*  Meine  Herren  (mi'-nS  hg'-r*ii).     Lit. :  my  musters ;  my  sirs. 


20 


DIE    ANKUNFT. 


ITie  following  alphabet  to  be  learned  by  heart. 


GERMAN   ALPHABET. 


LETTERS. 

NAMES. 

LETTERS. 

NAMES. 

3t,  a 

=:A,a. 

a.i 

%n 

=  N,  n. 

en. 

33,0 

=  B,b. 

ba. 

0,0 

=  0,0. 

0.2 

e,c 

=  C,  c. 

tsa. 

%P 

=  P,  p. 

pa. 

^,  b 

=  D,  d. 

da. 

D,  q 

=  Q,q. 

koo 

©,  e 

=  E,  e. 

a. 

^,r 

=  R,r. 

er. 

5,f 

=  F,f. 

ef. 

©,  f,  ^5 

3=S,  S. 

es. 

@,g 

=  G,g. 

ga. 

^,t 

=  T,t. 

ta. 

§,^ 

=  H  h. 

lia. 

U,  u 

=  U,  u. 

oo. 

3,i 

e. 

33,  t) 

=  V,v. 

fa-dt>. 

3  J 

=  J,j. 

y6t. 

2B,  it) 

r=W,  W. 

va. 

SI,! 

:=K,   k. 

ka. 

3E,i' 

=  X,  X. 

iks. 

S,I 

=  L,L 

el. 

?),V 

=  Y,y. 

ipsilon< 

3Jl,  m 

=  M,  m. 

em. 

8,S 

=  Z,z. 

tset. 

DISTINGUISH   BETWEEN; 


^  and  33  (B  and  V). 
^  and  D  (D  and  0). 
g  and  e  (C  and  E). 
t  and  ^Ji  (K  and  R). 
3JJ  and  m  (M  and  W). 
@  and  6  (G  and  S). 


m  and  ^  (N  and  R). 
D  and  Q  (O  and  Q). 
h  and  b  (b  and  d). 
f  and  f  (f  and  s). 
t)  and  I)  (v  and  y). 
r  and  r  (r  and  x). 


1  51  (a),  however,  has  tivo  sounds,  a  and  a. 

2  ©  (5)  lias  <t<;o  sounds,  o  and  5. 

8  The  form  ^  is  used  at  the  eiid  of  words. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  21 

Learn  the  following  modified  vowels,  etc. 

GERMAN   ALPHABET. 


MODIFIED    VOWELS,    DIPHTHONGS, 

ETC. 

pron.                       pron. 

pron. 

Modified  vowels :  —  S,  d ;  a.       D,  o  ;  a.i 

u,  u; 

U.2 

Diphthongs: —         2li ;      a-i.     (Si;       e-i. 

©u,  du ; 

i   6J[. 

Doubled  vowels :  —  3la ;     aT      ©e ;      i. 

Do; 

oT 

COMBINED    CONSONANTS. 

©f)  =  c/i  and  kh.^                        fe  =  s». 

Sc^  =  sh.                                   %  =  ts. 

FIRST   READING    EXERCISE. 
Read    aloud    the    following    sentences. 

<Bk  moHen  mdj  (Bnxopa  reifen,  riid;t  irnhx'^  —  3a.  3rf) 
tt)ill  mit  meincm  Bd)\vaQCX,  meiner  SHutter  iinb  meiner 
©d)it)efter  ^inreifen.  —  3Bann  tDoKen  ©ie  abreifeu?  —  3Bir 
tDoHen  mit  bem  ^ampfer  am  ©amftag  fat)ren.  —  SSo^iu 
lt)imfd)cn  ©ie  ^uerft  ju  ge^cn?  —  2Bir  woUm  md)  3r(anb 
imb  ©nglanb  geben,  unb  t»on  ba  narf)  ^eutfcbtanb.  ^6 
it)iinf(f)e  meineu  Slgeiiteii  in  Berlin  ^ii  befudKii.  —  SBottcu 
<Bk  bamt  nadj  Slmerifa  ^uriicf  fommen  ?  —  9]ein,  Wiv  tDollen 
nad)  granfreid^,  Stalien,  @ried;en(anb,  Sgt)^>ten,  unb  t)on 
ba  t)ielleid)t  wad}  2lfien  ge^eu.  —  3Ba^  fiir  eine  fc^one  D^ieif e ! 
—  mid}i  ma^r? 


1  For  the  sound  of  u,  see  page  xiv. 

2  For  the  sound  of  ii,  see  page  xiv. 

*  For  the  sound  of  ch  and  fc/t,  see  page  xiv. 


22  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

SECOND    READING    EXERCISE. 
Read  aloud  the  following: 

©in  grember,  ber  ba^  beutfc^e  @e(b  fe^r  gut  ^u  !ennen 

A  stranger,   who  the   German  money   very   well   to  know 

glcxubte,  fam  einft  nad}  Berlin.    3((g  er  ben  33a^nf)of  DerUefe, 

thought,  came  once  to  Berlin.     When  he   the     depot    left, 

fragte  er  ben  ^utfc^er,  tme  t)te(  er  bafiir  tjerlange,  i^n  unb 

asked  he  the  cabman  how  much  he  for -it  wanted,   him   and 

fein  ©epacf  nad)  bem  ^otet  gu  faf)ren.    „5^^f  ^^^^  fi^^D^S 

his    baggage    to     the    hotel    to    drive.         "  Five  and  seventy 

^fennige/'^  fagte  ber  Tlann,     „gunf  unb  fieO^ig  ^fen= 

pfennige,"    said    the    man.        "Five    and    seventy    pfen- 

nige!"  rief  ber  g^embe,  ,,ba§  ift  ^u  t)ie(.    3d;  (affe  mid; 

nige!"  cried  the  stranger,  "that  is   too  much.     I    let    myself 

nid)t  fo  iiberDorteilen.     3<^  ^^i^  3(;nen  eine  Tlaxt^  <^chm, 

not     so      deceive.  I    will    to-you    one    mark    give, 

unb  nid)t  einen  ^^fennig  me^r."   „  @ut/'  fagte  ber  ^utfc^er, 

and    not     one     cent     more."      "Well,"    said    the    cabman, 

,,tt)mn  6ie  mir  ni(f)t  me^r  geben  iDotten,  fo  n)i(l  id;  eine 

"if       you  to-me  not    more    give    will,    so    will    I    one 

SJiar!  ne^men." 

mark    take." 

PRONTTNCIATION   OF   THE   PBECEDINa    EXEMCISE. 

In  frem'-d'r  dSr  das  do-it'-she  gelt  zar  goot  tsoo  ke'- 
nen  gla-66p'-te  kam  inst  nakh  ber-len'.  Als  ar  dan 
ban'-hof  fer-les^  tvakh'-te  ar  dan  koot'-sh'r  ve  fel  ar 
da-fur'  fer-lafi'-e  en  obnt  zin  ge-pek'  nakh  dam  ho- 
tel' tsoo  fa'-r'n.     Filni  66nt    zep'-tsicTt   pfe'-ni-ge    zakh'- 

te    dar    man ref    d§Lr   frem'-de   das    ist    tsoo    fel! 

Ych  la'-se  micTi  nicTit  zo  u'-b'r-for'-ti-l'n.  Ich  vil  e'-nen 
i'-ne  mark  g5'-b'n  d6nt  nicht  i'-nen  pfe'-nic/i  mar. 
Goot,  za7^7i'-te  dar  kdbt'-sh'r  ven 


1  A  pfennig  is  the  hundredth  part  of  a  mark.  —  2  i  mark  =  25  cts. 


Part  I. 


THE   ARRIVAL, 


DIE    ANKUKFT. 


SECTION    II. 


1.  IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE  CUSTOM-HOUSE. 

2.  ABOUT  HAVING  A  DRESS  MADE. 

3.  THE  GERMAN  CONSTRUCTION. 

4.  MAKING  PURCHASES  ;  CLOTHING. 

5.  TO  HAVE  A  THING  MADE  OR  DONE. 

6.  A  HOUSE  FURNISHED :  A  HAT  TRIMMED. 

7.  GOING  TO  THE  DENTIST'S. 

8.  TO  HAVE  LINEN  LAUNDERED. 

9.  A  STRANGER  IN  BERLIN. 
10.    THE  WRITING  ALPHABET. 


'24  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

►■ 

n. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Ich  will  mir  erst  das  Gepiick  geben  las- 
sen.^ 

Ach  ja.     Wir   iniissen   unser   Gepack   durchsehen 
lassen. 

Nein.     Wir  haben  es  schon  in  Bremen  durchsehen 

lassen. 
Ja,  ich  weiss,  aber  ich  glaubte  man^  wiirde  es  hier 

nochmals  durchsehen. 

Nein.     Einmal  ist  genug. 


2.  In  der  That,  ich  hatte  in  Bremen  Zoll  zu 
zalilen. 

Zuerst  glaubte  ich,  die  Zollbeamten  wiirden  keinen 
Zoll  von  Ilinen  verlangen. 

Oho !     Diese    Burschen    sind    scharf  dahinterher. 
Darauf  konnen  Sie  sich  verlassen. 


NOTES. 

1  As  already  seen,  lassen  is  often  combined  with  another  verb. 
Thus  :  (sich)  geben  lassen,  to  get  [lit. :  to-one  s  self  [anything)  give  let]  ; 
warten  lassen,  to  keep  waiting  (lit.  :  to-make  wait) ;  holen  lassen,  to 
send  for  {anything  or  anybody),  sehen  lassen,  <o  .s/<om;  (lit.:  to  make  or 
let  see). 

2  Man  in  German  is  used  in  place  of  one,  pcnj>le  (or  even  for  they,  we, 
etc.,  when  taken  in  a  general  sense).  The  active  voice  is  thus  often 
employed,  with  man  as  the  subject,  instead  of  the  passive  voice. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


25 


II. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  Ich  vil  mer  arst  das  §"6- 
p6k^  g-a^-b'n . 

A.hh  ya.'.  Ver  inw'-s'n 
don'-z'r  ge-pek'  d66rc7i'-za'- 
'n  la'-s'n. 

Nin.  Ver  ha'-b'n  es  slion 
in  Bra'-men . 

Ya,  Ich  vis,  a'-b'r  Ich 
dakh'-te,  man  vilr'-de  es  her 
nokh'-mals'  dobrch'-za'-n. 

Nin.  In'-mal'  ist  ge- 
n66kh.' 


2.  In-d'r  tat^,  ich  ha'-t6  in 
Bra^-m6n  ts6r  tsob  tsa^- 
I'n. 

Tsoo-arst'  gla-obp'-te  ich 
de  tsol'-be-am'^'n  vur^-d'n 
ki'-nen  tsol  fon  e'-nen  fer- 
lan'-'n. 

O-ho' !  De'-ze  boor'-sh'n 
zint  sharf  da'-liin'-t'r-har'. 
Da'-ra-oof  ku'-nen  ze  zicTi 
fer-la'^'n. 


I  want  first  to  get  the 
baggagre.i 

Why,  yes.  We  must  have  our 
baggage  examined. '^ 

No.  We  have  ah-eady  had  it 
examined  in  Bremen.^ 

Yes,  I  know.  But  I  thought 
they  would  examine  it  here 
again.* 

No.     Once  is  enough. 


In  fact,  I  (lid  have  to 
pay  duty  in  Bremen.^ 

At  first,  I  thought  the  custom- 
house officers  would  not  ask 
any  duty  from  you.* 

Oh !  These  fellows  keep  their 
eyes  open."^  You  may  de- 
pend upon  that.* 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  I  will  to-me  first  the  baggage  give  let. 

2  We  must  our  baggage  examine  let. 

*  We  have  it  already  in  Bremen  examine  let. 

*  Man  (i.  <?.,  One)  would  it  here  once  more  examine, 
s  In  the  fact,  I  had  in  Bremen  duty  to  pay. 

6  Believed  I  the  custom-officers  would  no  duty  from  you  ask. 

"^  Are  sharp  thereafter, 

8  Thoroughly  idiomatic.    Lit. :  Thereupon  can  you  yourself  leave. 


26  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

3.  Wohin  miissen  wir  gehen,  um-  unser  Ge- 
piick  zu^  bekomiiien? 

Wir  miissen  nach  dem  Gepackbureau  gehen. 

Wo  ist  das? 

Gerade  vor  uns,  sehen  Sie,  da. 


4.  Aber  wir  brauchen  iiicht  selbst  zu  gehen. 

Hier    ist    ein    Gepacktrager.       Wir    wollen    ihin 
unseren  Gepackschein  geben. 

Ich  glaube,  wir  gehen  besser  selbst. 
Gut,  lasseii  Sie  uns  mit  ihm  gehen! 


5.  Doch  warteii  Sie !  *  Wir  miissen  erst  einen 
Wagen  nelimeii. 

Das  ist  richtig.     Georg,  gehen  Sie  vor  den  Bahnhof 
und  besorgen  Sie  einen  Wagen. 


Nein.     Das  ist  hier  nicht  notig. 

Ein  Schutzmann  wird  ^  ihm  am  Eingang  des  Bahn- 
hofs  eine  Nummer  geben. 


NOTES. 

i  Um  zu  corresponds  to  the  English  to,  when  the  latter  is  used  in 
the  sense  of  in  order  to. 

2  Warten  Sia,  lit. :  wait  you.  Observe  that  Sie  must  be  used,  in 
this  form,  in  the  German  imperative,  while  you  is  not  used  in  English. 

8  Wird  from  werden,  to  become.  Werden  is  used  to  form  the  future 
tense  of  all  verbs.  Er  wird  geben,  he  tvill  (jive.  Observe  that  he  will 
give  may  be  translated  in  German  either  by  er  wird  geben  or  er  will 
geben ;  by  the  latter,  when  will  is  expressed  rather  ih&w  futurity. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


27 


3.  Vo-hin^  niii^-s'ii  ver 
ga^-'n,  dbni  doii^-z'r  g^- 
p6k^  tsob  b^-ko^-m'n  ? 

Ver  mii'-s'n  nakh  dam 
ge-pek'-bii'-ro'  ga'-'n. 

Vo  ist'  das  ? 

Ge-ra'-de  for'  dons,  za'-'n 
ze,  da'. 


4.  A^-b'r  ver  bra-()b^-A;7i'ii 
iiicM  z^lpst . 

Her  ist  in  ge-pek'-tra'-g'r. 
Ver  vo'-l'n  em  don'-z'r-'n 
gepek'-sliin'  ga'-b-'n. 

Ich  gla-oo'-be  ver  ga'-'n 
be'-s'r  zelpst. 

Goot,  la'-s'n  ze  66ns  mit 
em  ga'-'n. 


5.  lyoeh  var^-t'n  ze !  Ver 
mii^-s'ii  arst  i^- 11611  va^- 
g'li  iia^-m'n. 

Das  ist  ricTi'-ticTi.  Ga- 
OTch',  ga'-'n  ze  for  dan 
ban'-h.of'  dont  be-z6r'-g'n  ze 
i'-nen  va'-g'n. 

Nin.  Das  ist  tier  nicTit 
n^'-ticTi. 

In  sh.a6ts'-man'  virt  em 
am  in'-gan'  des  ban'-liofs' 
i'-ne  n65'-m'r  g§.'-b'n. 


Where  must  we  go  to  get 
our  lug-gage  ? 

We  must  go  to  the  luggage- 
office. 

Where  is  that  ? 

Straight  before  us,  don't  you 
see,^  there. 


But  we  need  not  go  our- 
selves. 

Here  is  a  porter.     We  will  give 
him  our  luggage-check.^ 

I  think  we  had  better  go  our- 
selves.* 
Well,  let  us  go  with  him.* 


But  wait.^  We  must  first 
take  a  carriage. 

That  is  so.*  George,  go  out  of 
the  station '  and  get  ®  a  car- 
riage. 

No.     That    is    not    necessary 

here. 
A  policeman  will   give   him  ® 

a  number  at  the  entrance  of 

the  station. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  See  you? 

2  We  will  to-him  our  luggage-check  give.  Unsercn,  accusative 
{masc).  —  3  We  go  better  selves. 

4  Let  ye  us  with  him  go.  —  5  Yet  wait  ye. 

6  Correct.  —  '^  Go  ye  before  the  station. 

8  Provide  ye  a  carriage.  Einen  accusative  case  of  ein  {mxisc),  used 
when  the  word  is  a  direct  object  of  the  verb  ;  also,  after  certain  prepo- 
sitions. —  9  To-him.  —  *  Am,  for  an  dem,  at  the.    8ee  p.  10,  n.  *. 


m 


28  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Und  wir  geben  nachher  die  Nummer  dem  Kutscher. 

Die  Droschke  muss  warten,  bis  wir  kommen  und 
die  Nummer  abgeben. 


6.   Ich  habe.  ich  ha'-b6.  I  have. 

du  hast.  doo  liast.  thou  hast. 

er  {or  sie)  hat.*        ar  (or  ze)  liat.  he  {or  she)  has. 

wir  haben.  ver  ha'-b'n.  we  have. 

ihr  habt.^  er  tiapt. 

Sie  haben.  ze  lia'-b'n. 

sie  haben.  ze  h.a'-b'n.  they  have. 


you  have. 


Will    cler    Herr   sein   Gepiick   nacli   dem 
Wagen  trageii  lasseii? 

Warten  Sie  einen  Augenblick! 

Georg,  haben  Sie  einen  Wagen  genommen? 

Ja,  mein  Herr. 

Schon.     KofFertrager,  hier  ist  mein  Gepackschein. 

Bitten  tragen  Sie  mein  Gepack  nach  dem  Wagen ! 


NOTES. 

1  The  Germans  express  you  in  two  ways:  (1)  ihr,  which  is  the  regu- 
lar form,  but  is  used  (if  addressing  more  than  one  person)  wlien  speaking 
to  children,  friends,  relatives,  or  inferiors.  For  the  use  of  du,  thou, 
see  page  34,  note  2.  (2)  Sie,  wliicli  is  used  in  addressing  either  one  or 
more  persons,  when  speaking  to  equals  or  those  with  whom  we  are  not 
very  familiar.  Observe  that  Sie,  when  meaning  you,  is  written  with  a 
capital  S,  wliile  when  meaning  they  (as  in  sie  haben),  it  is  written 
with  a  small  letter.  —  *  Also,  es  hat,  it  has.-  hat  es?  has  itf 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


29 


OOnt  ver  ga'-b'n  nakh'- 
liar  de  nob'-m'r  dam  koot'- 
sli'r. 

De  drosh.'-ke  mdos  var'- 
t'n,  bis  ver  ko'-m'n  dont  de 
ndo'-m'r  ap'-ga'-b'n. 


And  we  give  afterwards  the 
number  to  the  cabman. 

The  cab  must  wait,  till  we 
come  and  deliver  the  num- 
ber. 


6. 


Habe  ich? 

hast  du  ? 
hat  er  {or  sie)  ? 
haben  wir? 
habtihr? 
haben  Sie? 
haben  sie  ? 


ha'-b6  ich, 

bast  doo. 
bat  ar  (or  ze 
ba^-b'n  ver, 
bapt  er. 
ha'-b'n  ze 
ba'-b'n  ze 


Have  I? 

hast  thou  ? 
has  he  {or  she) 
have  we  ? 

have  you  ? 

have  they  ? 


7.  Vil  d'r  h6r  zin  g6-p6k^ 
nakh  dam  va'-gr'n  tra'- 
g'n  la^-s'n? 

Var'-t'n  ze  i'-nen  a-db'-g'n- 
blik'.  '^ 

Ga-6rch',  ba'-b'n  ze  i'-nen 
va'-g'n    ge-no'-m'n? 

Ya,  min  ber'. 

Sb<in.  Ko'-fr-trel'-g'r,  ber 
ist  min  ge-pek'-sbin'. 

Bi'-te  tra'-g'n  ze  min  ge- 
pek'  nakh  dam  va'-g'n. 


Will  you  have  your  hag- 
gage  carried  to  the  ^  car- 
riag-e?^ 

Wait  a  moment.^ 

George,  did  you  engage  a  car- 
riage ?  * 

Yes,  sir.^ 

Very  well.^  Porter,  here  is  my 
baggage-ch  eck . 

Please  carry  my  baggage  to  the 
carriage. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  See  page  6,  note  3.  —  2  "Will  the  gentleman  his  luggage  (after)  to- 
the  carriage  carry  let.  Tlie  Germans  often  use  this  indirect  form  of 
question  as  being  more  deferential.  —  ^  Wait  you  a  moment, 

*  Have  you  a  carriage  taken.  Notice  tliat  the  Germans,  having  no 
such  auxiliary  as  did,  use  haben  instead,  in  ordinary  conversational 
forms  such  as  this.  —  ^  Mein  Herr.     Lit. :  my  gentleman. 

6  Beautifully.  Strictly  :  heautifid.  Adjectives  are  sometimes  used 
adverbially  in  German,  as  in  the  present  instance. 


30  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Note.  — Study  the  Indefinite  Article, 


8.  Endlich  sitzen  wir  im^  Wagen! 

Endlich  sind  wir  auf  dem  Wege  zum  Hotel! 

Mir  liegt  so  viel  daran  dorthin^  zu  kommen. 

Ich  muss^  heute  morgen  ausruhen. 

Weil  ich  heute  nachmittag  zum  Schneider  geheii 
will. 

Wozu? 


9.  Ich  will  mir  ein  Kleid  niachen  lassen. 

Wie!    So  bald? 

Ja  wohl.     Ich  muss. 

Ich  bleibe  nur  eine  Woche  in  Berlin. 

Ich  habe  keine  Zeit  zu  verlieren. 


NOTES. 

1  A  contraction  of  In  dem,  oftcMi  used. 

2  Dorthin,  dort,  dorther.  Hiii  and  her  are  often  connected 
with  (Jcniian  adverbs  of  place,  for  tlie  sake  of  expressing  the  direction 
of  motion.  Her,  indicates  motion  in  the  direction  of  the  speaking 
person;  hin,  motion  away  from  tlie  speaking  person.  Tlius :  Geh 
hin,  ga  hin'  (lit.:  go  thither),  go.  Komm  her,  (lit.:  come  hither), 
come. 

8  Ich  muss;  lit.:  T  must.  Notice  that  to  want,  with  an  infinitive 
in  CJorman,  mav  Ik'  givfii  in  vnrious  ways;  for  instance,  by  wollen, 
to  will:  wiinscheii,  to  wish  ;  konnen,  (to)  can;  uiiissen,  (to)  micst. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 
page  460. 


31 


8.  Ent^-lich  zif-s'n  ver  im 
va^-g'n ! 

zint    ver    a-oof    dam 

va'-ge  tsobm  h.o  -tel'. 

Mer  lecht  zo    fel    da-ran' 
dort'-liin'  tsoo  ko'-m'n, 

Ich  moos  li6-i'-te  mor'-g'n 
a-d6s'-roo'-'n.  ^ 

"Vil  ich  li6-i'-te  nakh'-rcii'- 
takh  tsoom^slini'-d'r  ga'-'n 
vil. 


At  last  we  are  in  the  car- 
riage !  1 

At  last  we  are  on  our  way  to 

the  hotel !  ^ 
I  am  so  anxious  to  get  *  there. 

I  want  to  rest  this  morning.* 

Because    I  want    to    go    to  a 
tailor's  this  afternoon.^ 

What  for? 


9,   Ich    vil    mer    in    klif 
ma^-kh'n  la^-s'n. 

Ve  !  zo  bait'  ? 

Ya  vol'.    Ich  mdbs.' 

Ich  bli'-be  noor  i'-ne  v6'- 
khe  in  ber-len'. 

ki'-ne     tsit     tsoo    fer- 

le'-r'n. 


I   want  to   have   a   dress 
made.^ 

What!  already?^ 

Why,  yes.     I  have  to.^ 

I  only  stay  a  week  in  Berlin.® 

I  have  no  time  to  lose.^<* 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  At-last  sit  we  in -the  carriage. 

2  At-last  are  we  on  the  way  to-the  hotel.  —  Zum,  for  zu  dem. 

3  To-me  lies  so  much  thereon,  there-hence  to  come. 
^  I  must  to-day  morning  rest. 

5  Because  I  to-day  afternoon  to-the  tailor  go  will. 

6  I  will  to-me  a  dress  make  let. 

7  How  !    So  soon  ?  —  8  Yes,  well.    I  must, 
s  I  remain  only  a  week  in  Berlin. 

10  The  Germans  do  not  say :  not  a  (nicbt  ein,  or  eine),  but  only  :  no 
(kein,  or  kelne). 


32  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

lO.  Bei'   welchem   Schneider  wollen  Sie  es 
inacheu  lassen? 

Ich   will   es   bei    einem    Schneider    unter      den 
Linden  machen  lassen. 

Will  sich  Ihre  Schwester  nicht  auch  ein  Kleid 
machen  lassen? 


11.   Sie  mochte  sich  gern  ein  seidenes  ^  Kleid 
machen  lassen. 

Bei  welcher  Schneiderin  wiinscht  sie  es  machen 
zu  lassen? 

Bei  Miiller. 

Aber  Miiller  ist  keine  Schneiderin,  sondern  ein 
Schneider. 

Das  ist  wahr.     Ich  dachte  nicht  daran. 

Nun,  es  kommt  auf  eins  hinaus. 

Aber  warum  geht  sie  nicht  zu  meinem^  Schnei- 
der, Herrn*  Schwarz? 


NOTES. 

1  Notice  that  bei  governs  the  dative.  So  we  use  here,  welchem. 
(dative  of  welcher,  m.,  which),  and  not  the  accusative  (welchen). 

2  Seidenes,  neuter  form  of  seiden,  because  Kleid  is  neuter.  Ad- 
jectives agree  in  gender,  number  and  case  with  their  noun. 

«  Notice  tliat  zu  always  governs  the  dative  (zu  meinem,  zu  ihvn), 
and  not  the  accusative  (meinen,  ihn). 

4  Observe  how  appositive  nouns  take  tlie  same  case  as  their  ante- 
cedents. Thus  here,  Herrn  {dat.)  instead  of  Herr  {nom.),  because 
dependent  on  meinetn  Schneider,  which  is  in  the  dative. 


THE    AERIVAL. 


33 


10.  Bi  \^V-ch*m  shnF-d'r 
voF-'n  ze  6  s  nia^-A^^'n 
la^-s*ii. 

Ich  vil  es  bi  i'-n'm  slini'- 
d'r  don'-t'r  dan  lin'-d'n. 


Vil  zich  e'-re  slives'-t'r 
nicht  a-obkh'  in  klit  ma'- 
kh'n  la'^'n  ? 


11.  Ze  muc/i^-tfe  zic/t  g6rn 
ill  zi^-d'-n6s  klit  mg,^- 
/cfe'n  la^-s'n. 

Bi  vel'-cTi'r  slini'-de-rin 
vnnslit  ze  es  ma'-^Ti'n  ts<5t) 
la  -s'n. 

Bi  Mli'-ler. 

A'-b'r  Mii'-ler  ist  ki'-ne 
sh.ni'-de-rin  zon'-d'rn  in 
sh.ni'-d'r. 

Das  ist  var.  Ich  dakh  -te 
Tiicht  da-ran'. 

Noon,  es  komt  a-66f  ins' 
h.i-na-d6s'. 

A'-Vr  va-rd6m'  gat  ze 
nicht  tsoo  mi'-n'm  shni'- 
d'r,  hern  StLvarts? 


At  what  tailor's  do  you 
want  to  have  it  made  ?  ^ 

I  am  going  to  have  it  made  at 
a  tailor's  in  unter  den  Lin- 
den.^ 

Does  not  your  sister  also  want 
to  have  a  dress  made  ?  * 


She  would  like  to  have  a 
silk  dress  made.* 

At    what  dressmaker's    would 
she  want  ^  to  have  it  made  ? 

At  Muller's. 

But  Miiller  is  not  a  dressmaker, 
but  a  tailor.** 

That  is  true.     I  did  n't  think.' 

Well,  it 's  all  the  same.* 

But  why  does  she  not  go®  to 
my  tailor,  Mr.  Schwarz? 


LITERAL.  TRANSLATIONS. 


1  At  which  tailor  will  you  itinake  let? 

2  I  will  it  at  a  tailor. 

3  Will  to-herself  your  sister  not  also  a  dress  make  let? 

4  She  might  to-herself  willingly  a  silken  dress  make  let. 
•^  Wishes  slie. 

6  Is  no  tailoress,  hut  a  tailor. 

7  I  tliouglit  not  thereon. 

8  Thoroughly  idiomatic.      Strictly  :  It  comes  on  {i.  e.,  to)  one  out. 
Anglice:  Jt  comes  to  tlie  same  tiling.  —  ^  Why  goes  she  not? 


34  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Sie  hat  mir  gestern  gesagt,  dass  sie  letztes  Jahi 
zu  ihm^  gegangen  ist. 

Ich  weiss  wirklich  nicht,  warum  sie  nicht  wieder 
zu  ihm  gehen  will. 

Vielleicht  denkt  sie,  dass^  er  zu  teuer  ist. 

Ich  kann  es  ihnen  nicht  genau  sagen. 


13.  Ich  bin.  Ich  bin.  I  am. 

du  ^  bist.  doo  bist.  thou  art. 

er  (or  sie)  ist.*     ar  {or  ze)  ist.  he  (or  she)  is. 

wir  sind.  ver  zint.  we  are. 

ihr  seid  er  zit.     ] 

ry-       •    J  >  you  are. 

feie  smd.  ze  zint.  J 

sie  sind.  ze  zint.  they  are. 


NOTES. 

1  See  page  32,  note  3. 

*  Notice  the  frequent  use  of  dass,  in  German,  when  it  is  omitted  in 
English. 

8  The  familiar  form  with  Du,  thou,  is  used  in  Germany  among  rela- 
tives and  intimate  friends.  Formerly,  it  was  very  generally  used  in 
speaking  to  servants;  but  now  this  is  going  more  and  more  out  of 
fashion.  —  ^  Or,  Es  ist.  It  is. 


THE    AERIVAL. 


35 


Ze  hat  mer  ges'-tern  ge- 
zakhV,  das  ze  lets'-tes  yar 
tsoo  era  ge-gan-'n  ist. 

Ich  vis  virk'-licTi  nicJit, 
va-roora'  ze  nicTit  ve'-d'r 
tsoo  em  ga'-'n  vil. 

Fe'-licht   denkt    ze 

tsoo  to-i'-er  ist. 

nic7itge'-na-o6'  za'-g'n. 


She  told  me  yesterday  ^  that 
she  went  to  him  last  year.^ 

1  really  do  n't  know  ^  why  she 
does  not  want  to  go  to  him 
again.^ 

Perhaps  she  thinks  he  is  too 
dear.^ 

I  can't  exactly  tell  you.* 


13.  Bin  ich?  hlnich. 

bist  du  ?  bist  doo. 

ist  er  (or  sie)  ?  ^  ist  ar  (or  ze). 

sind  wir?  zintver. 

seid  ihr  ?  zit  er. 

sind  Sie  ?  zint  ze. 


sind 


sie 


zint  ze. 


Am  I? 

art  thou  ? 
is  he  (or  she) 
are  we  ? 

are  you  ? 

are  they? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  She  has  to-me  yesterday  said. 

2  That  she  last  year  to  him  gone  is. 

3  I  know  really  not. 

*  Why  she  not  again  to  him  go  will. 

5  Perhaps  thinks  she  that  he  too  dear  is. 

6  I  can  it  to  you  not  exactly  say. 
^  Or,  Istes?     Isitf 


36  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

THE    GERMAl^i^    COIS^STRUCTION. 

I.-NON-INTERROGATIVE    SENTENCES. 

IN    A    PRINCIPAL    CLAUSE: 

1.  If  the  verb,  in  a  principal  clause,l  is  in  a  simple 

tense,*  the  order  is  similar  to  the  English.     Ex. : 
Er  baut  ein  Haus.  —  He  builds  a  house. 
Er  verlasst  Berlin.  —  He  leaves  Berlin. 

2.  If  the  verb,  in  a  principal  clause,  is  in  a  compound 

tense,f  the  past  participle  (or,  the  infinitive)  is  separated  from 
the  auxiliary  and  placed  at  the  end  of  the  clause.    Thus : 
Eng.  :  He  has  built  a  house.  —  Ger.  :    He  has  a  house  built. 

Er  hat  ein  Haus  gehaut. 
Eng.  :  He  will  build  a  house.  —  Ger.  :   He  ivlll  a  house  build. 

Er  wird  ein  Haus  bauen. 
Eng.  :   He  would  leave  Berlin.  —  Ger.  :   He  would  Berlin  leave. 
Er  wiirde  Berlin  verlassen, 

IN    A   DEPENDENT    CLAUSE: 

1.  If  the  verb,  in  a  dependent  clause,  is  in  a  simple  tense, 

it  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  clause.     Ex. : 

Eng.  :  He  says  he  is  building  a  house.  —  Ger,  :  He  says  that  ^  he 
a  house  builds.    Er  sagt,  doss  ^  er  ein  Haus  baut. 


1  For  construction  when  dass  is  omitted,  see  page  56,  note  1. 

*  Simple  tenses  are  those  which  are  simply  fornied  of  one  word, 
containing  the  root  of  the  verb  and  a  termination.  Ex.  :  Bauen,  Ich 
baue^  Er  bau#  {Root:  bau.      Terminations :  en,  e,  *). 

t  Compound  tenses  are  those  made  up  of  an  auxiliary  (liahen, 
sein,  -werden,  etc.),  and  the  past  participle  {or  infinitive)  of  any  verb. 
Thus :  Ich  Jiabe  gehaut,  Er  ist  gegangeny  Sie  wird.  gehen,  etc. 
{Auxiliaries:  Imhe,  ist,  tvird;  past  jmrt. :  gehaut,  gegatigen^ 
infinitive:  gelien). 

t  A  principal  clause  is  one  to  which  other  clauses  are  united  by 
means  of  such  words  as  dass,  oh  {whether),  uyer,  ivaSf  tvelcher 
{which),  uyie,  ivann,  tvo,  etc.  A  dependent  clause  is  one  whicli  is 
united  to  anotlier  by  one  of  these  words.  Thus  :  Sie  hat  mir  gesagt, 
dass  sie  eiu  Haus  bauen  wurde,  She  told  me  {that)  she  would  build  a 
house.  Principal  clause:  Sie  hat  mir  gesagt.  Dependent  clause :  Dass 
Bie  ein  Haus  bauen  wiirde.     (Lit. :  That  she  a  house  build  woxdd..\ 


THE    ARRIVAL.  37 

2.   If  the  verb,  in  a  dependent  clause,  is  in  a  compound 

tense,  both  parts  of  the  verb  come  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  hut 
in  reversed  order.     Ex. : 

Eng.  :  He  says  he  has  built  a  house. 
Ger.  :  He  says  that  he  a  house  built  has. 

"        Er  sagt,  d<iss  er  ein  Haus  gehaut  hat, 
Eng.  :  She  says  she  ivill  leave  Berlin. 
Ger.  :  She  says  that  she  Berhn  leave  uill. 

"        Sie  sagt,  dass  sie  BerUn  verlassen  wird, 

2.-INTERR0GATIVE   SENTENCES. 

The  rules  given  on  p.  36  for  the  construction  oi  principal  clauses 
in  non-interrogative  forms  apply  also  to  interrogative  sentences. 
Thus,  when  the  verb  is  in  a  simple  tense — order  as  in  English: 
Eng.  :   Who  builds  a  house  f  —  Ger.  :  Wer  baut  ein  Haus  ? 
Eng.  :  Does  he  build  a  house? —  Ger.  :  Builds  he  a  house? 
Baut  er  ein  Haus  ? 

But  if  the  verb  is  in  a  compound  tense,  —  the  past  participle 
(or  infinitive)  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  clause : 

Eng.  :  Did  your  father  build  a  house  f  —  Ger.  :  Has  y.f.  a  h.  built? 
Hat  Ihr  (Herr)  Vater  ein  Haus  gehaut  ? 
Eng.  :•  Did  he  leave  Berlin  ?  —  Ger.  :   Has  he  Berlin  left  ? 

Hat  er  Berlin  verlassen? 

Eng.  :  Will  she  go  to  Munich  ?  —  Ger,  :   Will  she  to  M.  go  ? 

Wird  sie  nach  Miinchen  gehen  ? 

Note.  —  If  an  interrogative  word  or  locution  (such  as  wer,  wen^ 
tvanti,  tvarum)  enters  into  the  clause,  notliing  is  changed  to  the 
above  order,  the  interrogative  locution  simjily  beginning  the  sentence : 

Wlien  does  your  father  leave  Berlin? 

Wann  verlasst  Ihr  (Herr)  Vater  Berlin  ? 

Why  didn't  your  father  build  a  house? 

Warum  hat  Ihr  (Herr)  Vater  nicht  ein  Haus  gehaut  ?  * 


*  Of  course  dependent  clauses,  though  often  entering  into  an 
interrogative  sentence,  are  not  themselves  interrogative,  and  follow  the 
rules  already  given  for  dependent  clauses.  Ex. :  Does  he  say  he  is 
making  the  coatf  =  Sa,gt  er,  dass  er  den  Rock  macht?  Does  she  say 
ihat  she  made  the  coai  f  =  Sagt  sie,  dass  sie  den  Rock  gemacht  hut  f 


38 


DIE    ANKUNFT. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  be  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


I.  — Maclien  (ma^-A:/t'n),  To  make. 


To  make  purchases. 
To  do  shopping. 


Einkaufe  machen  (in'-ko-i'-fe), 
Kleiiie  Ehikiiufe  machen  (kli'-ne),^ 
Einen  gnten  Handel  abschUessen^  (i'- 
nen  goo'-t'n  tLan'-d'l  ap'-shle'-s'n),  To  make  a  good  bargain. 


Billig  kaufen  (bi'-lic7i  ka-c5c)'-f  n), 
Viel  Ausgaben  machen  (fel  a-66s'- 
ga'-b'n),8 


To  buy  cheap. 

To  go  into  expenses. 


Bei  der  Putzmacherin  (pobts^- 
ina'-/c^6-rin),4 

In  dem  Modevvarengeschaft, 

Bei  welchem  Schuhmacher  (stLOo'- 

Bei  meiner  Schneiderin ,• 


At  the  milliner's. 

At  the  furnishing  store. 

At  what  shoemaker's. 
At  my  dressmaker's. 


1  Lit. :  Small  purchases  to  make. 

2  Lit. :  A  good  trade  to  strike-off. 
8  Much  out-give  to  make. 

*  At-the-house-of  (bei)  the  milliner. 

*  At-the-store-of  (bei)  wluit  slioemaker. 
6  At-the-store-of  (bei)  my  dressmaker. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


39 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOCABULARY. 


II.  — Lassen  (lg,^-s'ii),  To  let;  To  have.* 


To  have  (anything) 
repaired. 


(Etwas)  wiederlierstellen  lassen  (ve-d'r- 
har'-shte'-rn), 

"    reparieren  lassen  (re'-pa-re'-r'n), 

"    aiisbessern  lassen  (a-6bs'-bes'-'rn),  To  have  —  ^  mended. 

"    reinigen  lassen  (ri'-ni-g'n),  To  have  —  cleaned. 

"    ausklopfen  lassen  (a-oos'-klop'-fn),  To  have  —  shaken. ^ 

"    ausziehen  lassen  (a-oos'-Lse'-en),  To  have — pulled  out. 

(Jemanden)  kommen  lassen,  To  call  (any  one).^ 

Sehen  lassen  (za'-'n),  To  show.* 


In  welchem  Laden  (in-x^V-ch'm. 
la^-d'n), 

In  diesem  Laden  (de'-z'm), 

In  jenem  Laden  (ya'-nem), 

In  die  Unterstadt  (66n'-t'r-s7itat'), 

In  die  Obei*stadt  (5'-b'r-s7itat'), 


In  what  store  ? 

In  this  store. 
In  that  store. 
Down  town.^ 
Up-town.® 


1  Anytliing. —  ^  Lit:  ow^-beaten. 

3  Lit. :  any  one  to-come  to-let,  as :  to  call  a  physician :  Binen  Arzt 
kommen  lassen. —  *  Lit. :  to-see  let. 

^  Lit.  :  iti  the  uiidertown. —  ^  In  the  owrtown. 

*  Lassen  =  To  have,  in  tlie  sense  of  having  {anylhiti.<j)  made  or  done; 
i.  e.,  causinij  {anything)  to  he  made  or  done. 


40 


DIE    ANKUNFT. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


III.  — Die  Kleider  (kl^-d'r),  The  Clothingr. 


Der  Hut  (lioot),! 

Die  Schuhe  (shoo'-e),  m.,^ 

Die  Daniensliefel  (da'-m'n-slite'-f' 1),  m., 

Die  Striimpfe  (s7itram'-pfe),  m., 

Der  UnteiTOck  (don'-t'r-rok'), 

Der  Morgeiirock  (mor'-g'n-rok'), 

Der  Mantel  (man'-t'l), 

Der  Kragen  (kra'-g'n), 

Die  Manschetten  (man-sh.e'-t'n),/.,^ 

Der  Kock  (rok), 

Der  Frack  (frak), 

Der  Gesellschaftsrock  (ge-zel'-shaits  — ), 

Der  tlberrock  (u'-b'r — ), 

Der  tJberzieher  (ii'-b'r-tse'-er), 

Ein  Paar  *  Hosen  ^  (par  lio'-z'n), 

Die  Hosentrager  (lio'-z'n-tr§.'-g'r),  m., 

Die  Weste  (ves'-te), 

Ein  Paar*  Unterhosen  (don'-t'r — ), 

Das  Hemd  (lieint), 

Das  Linnen  (li'-nen), 


The  hat  {or  bonnet) 

The  shoes. 

The  ladies'  shoes. 

The  stockings. 

The  petticoat. 

The  morning-gown. 

The  cloak. 

The  collar. 

The  cuffs. 

The  coat. 

The  dress-coat. 

The  coat. 

The  overcoat. 

The 

A  pair  of  trousers. 

The  suspenders. 

The  waistcoat. 

A  pair  of  drawers. 

The  shirt. 

The  linen. 


1  Some  article  (der,  die,  das;  or  ein,  eine)  will  be  given  with  each 
noun,  so  as  to  show  its  gender.  But  in  the  case  of  ein,  wliicli  is  the 
nominative  form  for  both  masculine  and  neuter,  and  also  when  die  is 
prefixed  to  a  plural  noun,  the  gender  will  be  indicated  tlius  :  masculine 
(m.);  feminine  (/.);  neuter  (w.).—  2  A  shoe  =  ein  Schuh. 

*  A  cuff=eine  Manschette. —  ^  Neuter. —  ^  Feminine. 


DIE    ANKUNFT.  41 


To  be  learned  by  heart  and  recited  orally.     (For  Self-Study,  see 
Directions,  before  Part  I,) 


CONVERSATIONS. 

l.-EINKAUFE  ZU  MACHEN. 

Wollen  Sie  mit  mir  in  diesen  Laden  ^  gehen  ?  —  Was 
wollen  Sie  kaufen?  —  Ich  mochte  ein  Paar  Stiefelchen^ 
fiir  meine  kleine  Tochter,^  und  Hausschuhe*  fiir  mich 
selbst  kaufen.  —  Gut.^  Aber  wenn^  Sie  billig  kaufen 
wollen,  gehen  Sie  lieber  in  den  Laden  auf  der  anderen 
Seite^  der  Strasse.  Meine  Mutter^  hat  gestern  dort 
billig  und  gut  gekauft.  —  Was  hat  sie  gekauft?  —  Sie 
hat  ein  Paar  Damenstiefel  zu  sehr  angemessenem 
Preise  ^  gekauft.  —  Gut,  lassen  Sie  uns  dorthin  gehen ! 

2.-EINE    WOHNUNG   MOBLIEREN  ZU  LASSEN.^^ 

Will  Ihre  Frau  Mutter  ^^  nicht  im  Herbst^^  j\^yq 
Wohnung  neu^^  moblieren  lassen?  —  Ja,  ich  glaube. 
Aber  sie  wiinscht  nicht  viel  Ausgaben  zu  machen.  — 


PronTinciation  and  Translations. 
1  Yn  de'-z'n  la'-d'n,  in  this  store.  —  2  Tn  par  s/ite'-f el-dt'n,  a 
pair  of  shoes.—  3  Tofc/i'-t'r,  daughter.—  •*  Ha-obs'-shoo'-e,  slippers. 
5  Goot,  well.  —  6  Ven,  if.  —  ^  A-dof  dSr  an'-de-r'n  zi'-te. 

8  Mdo'-t'r,  mother. 

9  Tsdo  zar  an'-gS-mes'-ngm  pri'-zg,  at  a  very  reasonable  price. 

10  P-ne  vo'-ndon  mu-ble'-r'n,  to  have  an  apartment  furnished. 

11  E'-rg  fra-db  mdo'-t'r.    Lit. :  Your  Mrs.  mother.    See  p.  8,  n.  3- 

12  In  the  Fall  —  13  No-i,  anew. 


42  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Sagen  Sie  ihr  doch/  dass  sie  zu  meinem  Mobelhandler^ 
gehen  soll.^  Er  liefert*  sehr  gute  Ware.  —  Wo  ist  sein 
Geschaft?^ 

3.  —  EINEN  HUT   GARNIEREN  ZU  LASSEN* 

Bei  welcher  Putzmacherin  werden  Sie  Ihren  neuen^ 
Hut  garnieren  lassen?  —  Bei  Fraulein^  Wilde.  Sie 
wohnt  ^  Ecke  der  Konigs-und  Klosterstrasse.^  —  Wie 
wollen  Sie  Ihren  Hut  garnieren  lassen?  —  Ich  will  ihn 
mit  Bandern  und  Spitzen  ^^  garnieren  lassen.  —  Was 
verlangt  ^^  Fraulein  Wilde  fiir  ihre  Hiite  ?  —  Nun,  das 
ist  verschieden ;  ^^  aber  ihre  Preise  sind  sehr  billig.  — 
Warum  gehen  Sie  nicht  lieber  zu  meiner  Putz- 
macherin ? 

4.-BEIM  ZAHNARZTEA 

Wohin  gehen  Sie  doch^^  so  geschwind?|  —  Ich  will 
mir  einen  Zahn^*  ausziehen  lassen.     Wollen  Sie  mir 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 
1  Just  tell  her.  —  2  Mu'-b'l-hent'-l'r,  furniture  maker. 
»  Lit. :   That  slie  go  shall. 

*  Ar  le'-f* rt  zar  goo'-te  va'-rg,  he  furnishes  very  good  ware, 
s  Zin  ge-shgft'  (lit. :  his  business),  his  store. 

6  New.  —  ^  Fro-i'-lin,  Miss. 

8  Ze  voiit  (lit. :  she  dwells),  she  lives. 

9  E'-kg  dar  kii'-nieTis  oont  klo'-st'r-sJitra'-sS,  corner  of  Kings 
and  Cloister  Streets. 

10  Mit  bgn'-d'rn  dont  sli-pit'-s'n,  with  ribbons  and  laces. 

11  Fgr-lant'  (lit. :  asks),  charges.  —  12  Fgr-she'-d'n,  different. 
18  Doik/i,,  not  to  be  translated,  makes  the  question  more  polite, 
1*  F-nSn  tsan,  a  tooth. 

*  I'-nSn  hoot  gar-ne'-r'n  tsdo  la'-s'n,  to  have  a  bonnet  trimmed, 
t  Bim  tsan'-art'-stS,  at  the  dentist's.  —  \  GS-shvint,  fast. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  43 

gefalligst  ^  sagen,  wo  ich  einen  guten  Zahnarzt  finden 
kann.  Ich  ging^  zum  ersten  besten.  —  Gehen  Sie 
doch^  zu  meinem  Zahnarzte,  Herrn  N.  S.  Jenkins. 
—  Wiirden  Sie  wohl*  mit  mir  dorthin  gehen?  —  Ge- 
wiss,  sehr  gern.^  —  Gut,  lassen  Sie  uns  gehen. 

Schellen  Sie!^  —  Ich  hore  kommen."  —  1st  der  Herr 
Doktor  zu  Hause?^ — Nein,  meine  Herren;^  er  ist 
augenbhckhch  ^^  nicht  zu  Hause.  Aber  er  wird  in 
ein  paar  Minuten  ^^  wiederkommen.^^  Bitte,  bemiihen 
Sie  sich  herein.^^ 

Note.  —  Study  the   Declension  of  Kein,  Mein,  etc., 
page  461. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Ge-f  el'-ic/«.st,  if  you  please. 

2  Yc/i.  gin,  etc.,  I  was  going  to  the  first  I  came  to.     Lit. :  1  went 
to-the  first  best. 

8  Just  go.     (Lit. :  Go  ye  now.) 

4  Vol.     Lit. :  well ;  i.  e.,  kindly. 

6  Lit. :  Very  willingly;  i.e.,  with  pleasure. 

6  Slie'-l'n  ze,  ring.     Lit. :  ring  ye. 

7  Ich  hu'-re  ko'-m'n,  I  hear  somebody  coming.    Lit. :  I  hear  come. 

8  Lit. :    Is  the  Mr.  Doctor  (dok'-tor)  at  home  (ha-do'-ze)  ?     See 
p.  8,  n.  3. 

9  Mi'-ne  he'-r'n,  gentlemen. 

1"  A'-oo'-g'n-blik'-licfi.,  at  present,  just  now. 

11  Tn  in  par  mi  -noo'-t*n,  in  a  few  minutes. 

12  Ve'-crr-ko-m'n. 

13  Be-mii'-'n  ze  zich  her-in'.     Literally :    trouble  you  yourself 
here-in. 


44  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

To  he  translated  and  written  into  German,  then  recited  in  the  class, 
(For  Self -Study,  see  Directions  be/ore  JPart  I.) 

EXERCISES. 

l.-rO   MAKE  PURCHASES. 

Are  you  not  going  ^  down  town  ?  —  What  for  ?  —  To 
do  some  shopping  ?  ^  —  No.  I  would  like  to  buy  some 
clothing ,3  but  my  husband^  does  not  want  to  go  to  any 
expense  now.^ 

2. -SAME  SUBJECT.^ 

Please  tell  me  where  I  can  buy  a  good  overcoat, 
cheap.^  —  Go  to^  Taubenhaus.  They  are  very  cheap. 
I  bought  a  frock-coat  very  cheap  in  that  store.^  —  Will 
you  come  with  me  ?  —  Yes,  I  will. 

3. -SAME  SUBJECT. 

Why  does  your  friend  not  want  to  buy  these  shirts  ?i^ 
He  says  he  wants  to  have  shirts  made  to  order.^^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Are  you  not  going?  Do  you  not  go?  Both  forms  are  given  in 
German  by  Go  you  not  ?    Gehen  Sie  nicht  ? 

2  Lit. :  in  order  several  (einige)  little  purchases  to  make. 
8  I  would  willingly  some  clothing  buy. 

■*  Mein  Mann.  Lit. :  my  man.  —  ^  Lit.  :  wishes  now  no  expenses 
(keine  Ausgaben)  to  make.  —  6  Fortsetzung.     Lit. :  Continuation. 

■^  Lit. :  where  I  a  good  (einen  guten)  overcoat  cheap  buy  can. 

^  Zu.  —  9  Lit. :  I  have  a  (einen)  frock-coat  very  cheap  in  that  store 
bought  (gekauft). 

1"  Why  will  your  (Ihr)  friend  these  sliirts  (diese  Hemden)  not  buy? 
11  He  says  he  wants  (Er  sagt,  er  ivUnscht)  for-Iiimself  (sich)  shirts 
to  order  (nach  Mass)  make  to-let. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  45 

4:, -TO  HAVE  LINEN  LAUNDERED.^ 

I  would  like  to  have  some  linen  laundered.^  Please 
tell  me  where  I  can  find  a  good  laundress.^ — I  can 
recommend  our  laundress  to  you.  *  —  Very  well. 
Where  does  she  live?^ — She  lives  in  Frederic  Street.^ 
But  I  have  forgotten  the  number.^  —  That's  a  pity.^ 

—  But  I  can  send  her  to  your  room.^  —  If  you  please.^^ 

5. -SAME  SUBJECT. 

Good  morning,  madam.^^  —  I  am  the^  laundress. 
The  porter  1^  told  me^*  you  would  like  to  have  some 
washing  done.^^  —  Yes,  I  would  like  to  have  two  dozen 
pieces  ^^  washed.    How  much  do  you  charge  a  dozen  ?^^ 

—  That  depends.^^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Linen  wash  (waschen)  to-let.  —  2  I  would  willingly  some 
(einiges)  linen  wash  let.  —  «  "Where  I  a  good  laundress  (eine  gute 
Wascherin)  find  (finden)  can.  —  *  I  can  to-you  (Ihnen)  our  (unsere) 
laundress  recommend  (empf ehlen).  —  5  Where  lives  (wohnt)  she  ? 

6  In  der  Friedrichstrasse.  Lit. :  on  the.  The  names  of  streets 
in  German  are  always  preceded  by  the  definite  article.  —  ^  But  I  have 
the  number  (die  Nummer)  forgotten  (vergessen). —  «  Das  ist  schade. 
Lit.  :  that  is  damage.  —  ^  But  I  can  her  (sie)  to  your  room  (auf  Ihr 
Zimiuer)  send  (schicken).  —  lo  Wenn  es  Ihnen  gef  allig  ist.  Lit. : 
if  it  to-you  pleasing  is.  —  n  Guten  Morgen,  Madam  (ma-damO. 

12  Die  —  13  Der  Hausmann.     Lit. :  the  houseman.  —  i^  Sagte  mir. 

16  Etwas  waschen  lassen.  Lit. :  something  wash  let.  —  i^  Zwei 
Dutzend  Stiick.—  i^  Wie  viel  rechnen  Sie  das  Dutzend?  Lit. : 
how  much  do  you  count  the  dozen?  Observe  that,  in  German,  the 
definite  article  is  used  (das  Dutzend),  instead  of  the  indefinite  [ein 
(or  eine);  a,  an]  in  stating  prices.  —  18  Das  konimt  darauf  an. 
Thoroughly  idiomatic.    Strictly  :  That  comes  thereupon  by. 


46  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

In  the  class-room,  the  following  foreign  text  should  he  read  aloud  by 

the  pupils,  and  then  translated  ivithout  the  aid  of  the  literal 

translation  opposite.    For  pronunciation,  see  page  50. 

«efeftttrf.* 
®ln  %xtm^cx  in  a^etUtt* 

^er  3^fembe.  —  ©uten  3J^orgen.     SBo  U)otten  n)ir  unfcre 

®er  gii^rer.  —  2Btr  tt)o(Ien  unter  ben  Sinben  anfan;]cii. 

®er  grembe.  —  ^iefe^  ©tanbbilb  ift  grofeartii] !  )bjm 
ftettti  e§  bar?i 

®er  gitfjrer.  —  ©^  ift  ^u  ®(;ren  g^iebrid)^  be^o  ©roBcn 
errid)tet.  (5e()en  ©ie  einmal.  ^ie  ^auptfigur  iibcr  bcin 
^iebeftal  ^etgt  3f)nen  '^zn  ^bnig  ^u  ^fcrbe.  3'^  ^^iiefe 
an  ben  6eitenf(dd)en  be§  pebeftal^  fe[;en  ©ie  il^n  in  i>cr= 
fd;iebenen  ^erioben  feine^  ;^eben§.  §ier  lebrt  ibn  bie 
9Jiufe  @ei'd;id)te;  bort  ge(;t  er  in  bem  ©arten  feine» 
^a(afte§  fpa^ieren,  umgeben  Don  2Sinbl;unben,  feinen  Sieb= 
Ungen;  (;ier  fpielt  er  auf  ber  glote;  I;ier  enbtid;  entmirft 
er  ben  ^lan  einer  <Sd)lad)t,  nadjbem  er  bei  ^oKin  cine 
9^ieberlage  erlitten  ^atte. 

—  Slber  h)a§  fiir  ein  im^ofante^  ^^or  ift  bort  am  anbern 
©nbe  ber  ©tra^e? 

—  ^a§  ift  bag  ^ranbenbnrger  %[jox.  ©e^cn  ©ie  ben 
(5iei]egu>ai3cn  2  oBen  baranf?  ©rf  imirbe  l^on  9kv^oIeon  al^ 
Oiege^^^eid^en  nadj  ^ari^  entfiifjrt,  nad)  ber  Sd;Iad;t  bei 
SSaterloo  aber  a>ieber  nad)  Berlin  5nnidi3ebraa;t. 


1  From  darstellen,  to  represent,  a  ^separable'  verl).  Stri(;tly  :  Whom 
places  it  there?—  2  Strictly:  tlie  Victory's-car.  —  *  At  first  a  literal 
translation  of  those  exercises  will  be  given  on  the  page  opposite. 

f  Lit. ;  he  because  Siegeswagen  is  masculine.     Anglice,  it. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  47 

For  Self -Study,  or  preparation  for  the  class-room,  use  the  literal  trans- 
lation below,  until  the  German  text  on  the  opposite  page  is 
thoroughly  understood.     Then  read  the  German  aloud. 

READING. 
A    FOREIGNER    IN     BERLIN. 

The  Stranger.  —  Good  morning.  Where  will  we 
our  rounds  begin? 

The  Guide.  —  We  will  under  "  the  Linden  "  ^  begin. 

The  Stranger. — This  monument  is  grand!  Whom 
represents  it? 

The  Guide.  —  It  is  to  honor  of-Frederick  the  Great 
erected.  See  {ye)  *  once.  The  main  ^-figure  over  the 
pedestal  shows  to-you  the  king  on  horse  (back).t  In 
reliefs  on  the  side-faces  of-the  pedestal,  see  you  him 
in  different  periods  of-his  life.  Here  teaches  him 
the  Muse  history ;  there  goes  he  in  the  garden  of  his 
palace  to-walk,  surrounded  by  his  greyhounds,  his 
favorites;  here  plays  he  on  the  flute;  here,  finally, 
designs  he  the  plan  of-a  battle,  after  he  at  Kollin  a 
defeat  suffered  had. 

—  But  what  (for)*  an  imposing  arch  is  there,  at 
the  other  end  of-the  street? 

—  That  is  the  Brandenburger  Gate.  See-you  the 
car-of- victory  over  upon  (it) :  he  was  by  Napoleon  as 
trophy  to  Paris  carried  off,  after  the  battle  at  Waterloo 
however  again  to  Berlin  brought-back. 


1  "Unter  den  Linden"  (Lit.:  "Under  the  linden-trees")  is  the 
name  of  the  main  street  in  Berlin.—  2  Strictly  :  Head. 

*  Words  in  italics  and  bracketed  are  those  not  used  in  English, 
t  Words  bracketed  but  not  in  italics  are  those  not  used  in  German. 


48  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Copy  carefully  the  following  German  writing  alphabet. 

"WRITING    ALPHABET.  — I. 


GERMAN. 

ENGLISH. 

GERMAN. 

ENGLISH 

je.  /,  - 

<3^.  ./ 

a    <r.    „ 

^^ 

^    ,            't-^y          « 

"^.^ 

^^. 

<3?y^ 

?/^- 

»^^ 

^^.= 

(2^ 

^              -^^         " 

$,  e- 

^,  ^.  = 

^,Ay 

K-  /  - 

^ 

^^.=: 

&^,    ^ 

/    ■^■- 

^^ 

"j^.  J.  ^ 

.^"^ 

i^X- 

^^ 

Ol,        r^,     == 

c^,My 

^     ^,  - 

c/^ 

:^-,  . 

^^ 

^   ^.- 

/^ 

^^,^ 

^^ 

'2.  J-.. 

C3^-^ 

^-  t-- 

Sf  ^  - 

^/ 

p.^ 

*:  ^. 

^w 

/     ^    = 

^,^ 

THE    ARRIVAL.  49 

Copy  carefully  the  following  German  writing  alphabet, 

"WRITING    ALPHABET.  — II. 
1.- MODIFIED   VOWELS. 

2. -SOME    COMPOUND    CONSONANTS. 
Read  and  carefully  copy  the  following : 


^^kict^^^^^pp^ ,  tuY<f^^,  ^^vi^^>^^^,  (yui>^^/^^,    ^sW^^, 


1  Another,  but  older  form  of  capital  f  is  J/  .  —  2  The  form  '^f  is 
used  at  the  enrf  of  words  and  syllables;  the  long  form  at  the  beginning. 

'  Notice  that  all  nouns  in  German  are  written  with  a  capital.  — 
Pron.:  Tsa-tse'-li-S,  yafcli-t  [chase),  kam  [comb),  o'-him  (uncle),  ill, 
{oil),  kwe'-le  [source,  spring),  roo'-e  [rest). 

4  S/ipe'-Pr  [player),  oor  [watch),  fu'-g'l  [bird),  ksS'-res  [Xeres), 
yakht  [yacht),  shlakht  [battle),  shios  [castle). 


50  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

PMONUXCIATION   OF   THE   FItECEI>ING   BEADINa 
EXERCISE. 

Note.  —  The  pupil  should  try  to  read  the  preceding  German  exer- 
cise as  much  as  possible  without  the  aid  of  the  pronunciation  given 
below.  For  this  purpose,  a  study  should  be  made  of  the  chapter  on 
Pronunciation,  just  preceding  this  Part  First,  Further  on, 
no  pronunciation  will  be  given,  so  as  to  exercise  the  pupil  in  reading 
without  aid. 


In  fp6m'-d'r  in  B6r-len'. 

I>ar  fr6ni''-d6.  —  Goo'-t'n  mor'-g'n.  Vo  vo'-l'n  ver  don'- 
z're  toor  an'-fan'-'n  ? 

Dar  fii'-r^r.  —  Ver  vo'-l'n  don'-t'r  dan  L.in'-d'n  an'- 
fan'-'n. 

D.  fr.  —  De'-zes  sTitant'-bilt  ist  gros'-ar'-ticTi.  Van 
sTitelt  es  dar'? 

D.  fii.  —  Es  ist  tsob  a'-r'n  Fre'-dricTis  des  Gro'-s'n  er- 
ricTi'-tet.  Za'-'n  ze  in-mal' !  De  h.a-66pt'-fi-g6or'  li'-b'r 
dam  pi-e'-de-stal  tslcht  e'-nen  dan  k<i'-nic7i  tsoo  pfar'-de. 
In  re-li-efs'  an  dan  zi'-t'n-fle'-cTi'n  des  pi-e'-de-stals  za'-'n 
ze  en  in  f er-she'-d ' -nen  pe-ri-o'-d'n  zi'-nes  la'-bens.  Her' 
lart  en  de  moo'-ze  ge-sh.ic7i'-te ;  dort'  gat  ar  in  dam 
gai/-t'n  zi'-nes  pa-las'-tes  slipa-tse'-r'n,  d6m-ga'-b'n  fon 
vint'-bobn'-d'n,  zi'-nen  lep'-liii'-'n ;  her  sTipelt  ar  a-d6f 
d'r  iia'-te;  ber  ent'-licTi  ent-virft'  ar  dan  plan  i'-n'r 
shlafeTit,  nB-hh-d^m.'  ar  bi  ko-len'  i'-ne  ne'-d'r-la'-ge  er- 
li'-t'n  ba'-te. 

A'-b'r  vas  fiir  in  im-p6-zan'-tes  tor  ist  dort  am  an'- 
d'rn  en'-de  d'r  s7itra'-se. 

Das  ist  das  bran'-d'n-b66r'-g'r  tor.  Za'-'n  ze  dan  ze'- 
ges-va'-g'n  o'-b'n  da-ra-dof?  ar  vd6r'-de  fon  na-po'-le-6n 
als  ze'-ges-tsi'-cTi'n  nsJch  pa-res'  ent-fiirt',  no^hh  d'r 
shlskht  bi  va'-t'r-lo  a'-b'r  ve'-d'r  nahh  ber-len'  tsoo- 
ruk'-ge-bra  A;7it' . 


ParI^  L 


THE   ARRIVAL. 


DIE    AKKU:t^rT. 


••ofo*> 


SECTION    III. 


1. 

IN  AND  OUT  OF  A  CAB. 

2. 

THE  RAILWAY. 

3. 

WALKING  AND  TRAVELING. 

4. 

GOING  TO  MARKET. 

5. 

ON  THE  WAY. 

6. 

IN  A  RESTAURANT. 

7. 

indisposition! 

8. 

BERLIN  :  THE  TIERGARTEN. 

9. 

THE  BEGINNING  OF  LETTERS. 

52  DIE   ANKUNFT. 


in. 

GEBMAN. 

Dann  eine  Droschke  nehinen. 

Will  Herr  Vogel  nicht  eine  Droschke  nehmen? 

Natiirlich. 

Er  verliess  sogleich  die   Ankunftshalle,   nachdem 
er  ausgestiegen  war.^ 

Er  wollte  uns  eine  Droschke  holen,  sogleich  nach- 
dem wir  hier  angekommen  waren. 


2.  Haben  Sie  ihn  seitdem  nicht  geselien? 

Nein.     Aber  hier  ist  er. 

Nun,  haben  Sie  uns  eine  Droschke  besorgt? 

Jawohl. 

Sie  wartet^  auf  uns  am  Eingang. 


NOTES. 

1  War,  imperfect  of  sein,  to  he.  Tntransitive  verbs  expressing  mo- 
tion are  conjugated  with  sein,  when  motion  from  one  place  to  another 
is  understood.  They  are  conjugated  with  haben,  when  no  cliange  of 
place  is  meant. — Ausstelgen,  lit, :  to  step  out,  is  always  conjugated 
with  sein,  because  it  always  indicates  moving  out  of  the  carriage  into 
another  place.  For  a  similar  reason  ankommen,  to  arrive,  is  always 
conjugated  with  sein.    Ausgestiegen,  past  participle  of  aussteigen. 

2  Sie  wartet  =  t7  is  waiting,  or  it  waits.  —  Sie,  lit. :  she,  is  used  here 
because  the  pronoun  refers  to  the  feminine  noun  die  Droschke. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


53 


ni. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

1.  Dan    1^-116    dr6sli^-k6 
na^-m'n. 

Vil    h.er    F5'-g'l    nicht   V- 

ne ? 

Na-tur'-licTi. 

Ar  fer-les'  zo-glic7i'  de  an'- 
koonfts-lia'-le,  naikh-dSiin' 
ar  a-oos'-ge-s^te'-g'n  var. 

—  v61'-te  dons  i'-ne  drosh.'- 

ke    tLo'-l'n,    zo-glic7t' 

an'-ge-ko'-m'n  va'-r'n. 


TRANSLATION. 
And  then  take  a  cab. 

Does  not  Mr.   Vogel  want  to 

take  a  cab?^ 
Why,  certainly.2 
He  went  out  of  the  depot  as 

soon     as     he    got    off   (the 

train).^ 
He  wanted  to  get  us  a  cab  just 

as  soon  as  we  got  here.* 


2.  Ha^-b'n  ze  en  zit-dam^' 
nicht  g^-za^-'n? 

Nin,  a'-b'r  h.er  ist'  ar. 

Noon,  h.a'-b'n  ze  dons  i'- 
ne  dr6sh.'-ke  be-zorc7it'  ? 

Ya-vol'. 

Ze  var'-tet  a-d6f  d6ns  am 
in'-gaii'.  ^ 


Have   you   not   seen   him 
since  ? 

No,  but  here  he  is. 

Well,  did  you  get  us  a  cab?^ 

Yes,  I  have.® 

It    is    waiting    for  us    at   the 
entrance."^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Will  Mr.  Vogel  not  a  cab  take?    Eine,  feminine  form  of  ein; 
used  here  because  its  noun  Droschke  is  feminine. —  2  Naturally. 

3  He  left  at-once  the  hall-of-arrival  after  he  out-stepped  had  (or, 
strictly  :  was).     See  opposite  page,  note  1. 

4  He  wanted  a  cab  to  fetcli,  at-once  after  we  arrived  had  (or,  strictly : 
were).    See  opposite  page,  note  1. 

6  Have  you  for-us  a  cab  provided? 

6  Yes- well ;  yes  indeed. 

^  She  waits  for  (upon)  us  at-Che  entrance.     Am,  abbrev.  for  an  dem. 


54  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

3.  8<chon,  lassen  Sie  uns  gehen! 

Gepacktrager,    hier    haben    Sie    fiinfzig    Pfennig 
Trinkgeld. 

Danke  schon.^ 

Kutscher,  nach  dem  KaiserhofI 

SchonI    Steigen  Sie  ein,  meine  HerrenI 


Warten  Sie  I    Es^  fehlen  noch  zwei  Damen. 

Es^  kommen  noch  zwei  Damen. 

Hier  sind  sie. 

Beeilen  Sie  sich,  meine  Damen. 

Steigen  Sie  geschwind  ein! 
Wir  haben  noch  viel  Zeit. 

Nein.     Wir  haben  keine   Zeit.     Ich  bin  iiberaus 
hungrig. 

Es  hegt  mir  sehr  daran,  in  das  Hotel  zu  kommen. 

Ich  muss  friihstiicken,  sobald  ich  dort  hinkomme. 


Nota  —  Study  the  Indicative  and  Conditional 


NOTES. 

1  Mein  Herr,  lit. :  my  master  {or  gentleman)  in  German  is  not  so 
often  used  as  Sir  in  English.  The  plural,  Meine  Herren,  corresponds 
to  the  English  Gentlemen,  when  used  as  a  form  of  address. 

2  Es  is  often  used  in  German  as  there  is  in  English.  Thus :  £l8 
fehlen  zwei  Damen,  lit. :  there  are  lacking  two  ladies. 


3.   Shun,   la^'-s'n   ze   dbns 
ga^-'n. 

Ge-pek'-tr§.'-g'r,  her  h.a'- 
b'n  ze  iilnt'-tsiGh  pfe'-nicTi 
trink'-gelt'. 

Dafi'-ke  slitin. 

Koot'-sh-'r,  nakh  dam  ki'- 
z'r-hof . 

Stiiin,  sTiti'-g'n  ze  in,  mi'- 
ne  lier'-'n. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  65 

Well !    Let  us  go. 


Porter,  here  are  fifty  pfennig 
for  you.  ^ 

Thank  you,  sir. 

Cab !     To  the  Kaiserhof. 

Very  well !   Get  in,*  gentlemen. 


4.  Var^-t'n  ze!    Es  f5M'n 
nokh  tsvi  da^-ni'n. 

Es  ko'-m'n  nokh . 

Her  zint'  ze. 

Be-i'-rn  ze  zich,  mi'-ne 
da'-m'n. 

S7iti'-g'n  ze  ge-sh.vint'  in. 

Ver  ha'-b'n  nokh  feV  tsit. 

Nin  ver  h.a'-b'n  ki'-ne  tsit'. 
Ich  bin  ti'-b'r-a-dos'  lidbn'- 
ricTi.  ^ 

Es  lecht  mer  zar  da-ran' 
in  das  ho-tel'  tsoo  ko'-m'n. 

Ich  moos  fru'-sTitw'-k'n  zo- 
balt'  ich  dort  Mn'-ko'-me. 


Wait!    There   are  two 
ladles  yet.3 

There  are  two  ladies  to  come 

yet. 
Here  they  are. 
Make  haste,*  ladies. 

Get  in,  quick? 
We  have  plenty  of  time.^ 
No.     We  have  no  time.     I  am 
as  hungry  as  I  can  be.* 

I  am  very  anxious"^  to  get  to 

the  hotel. 
I  want  to  have  my  breakfast  ^ 

as  soon  as  I  get  there. 


of  Haben,  page  498. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Here  have  you  twenty  pfennig  drinklng-nioney. —  2  step  you  in. 
8  Wait  you !     There  are-missing  (strictly  miss)  still  two  ladies. 
^  Hurry  you  yourselves.  —  6  We  have  still  much  time. 
*  I   am   overout  hungry.  —  ^  It   is-of-importonce   to-me   very-much 
there-in  in  the  hotel  to  come. —  ^  I  must  breakfast. 


56  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

5.  Kutscher  I  Fahren  Sie  so  schnell  als  mog- 
lich ! 

Sehen  Sie  sich  vor! 

Was  giebt  es? 

Die  Pferde  gehen  durch. 

Halt! 

Sagen  Sie  dem  Kutscher,  er  soil  halten.^ 

Sagen  Sie  dem  Kutscher,  er  soil  nicht  so  schnell 

fahren.^ 
Kutscher!     Fahren  Sie  nicht  so  schnell! 
Die  Damen  sind  erschrocken. 

Aber  fahren  Sie  den  kiirzesten  Wegl 


6.  Was  fehlt  Ihnen? 

Mir  ist  ubel.2 

Ich    kann    nicht    riick warts    fahren,    ohne    mich 
unwohl  zu  fiihlen.^ 


NOTES. 

1  Notice  that  after  sagen  tlie  infinitive  cannot  be  used  as  in  English. 
The  Germans  cannot  say,  Tell  him  to  stop,  but  must  say,  Tell  him  that  he 
shall  stop,  Sagen  Sie  ihm,  dass  er  halten  soil.  Also :  Sagen  Sie 
ihm,  er  soil  halten  (lit. :  Tell  liini  he  shall  stop).  Observe  that  in 
this  last  form  of  the  sentence,  the  conjunction  being  omitted  from 
before  the  subordinate  clause,  the  verb  is  not  inverted,  the  construc- 
tion being,  then,  the  same  as  in  English. 

2  Or,  Es  ist  mil*  iibel,  I  am  sick.  Impersonal  expressions  are  mucli 
more  frequently  used  in  German  than  in  English.  Foriustaiico:  Es 
thut  mir  leid  (lit),  lit. :  it  does  to-me  pain  ;  /  am  sorri/.  Es  freut 
(fro-it)  mich,  lit. :  it  rejoices  me ;  I  am  glad. 

8  Ohne  mich,  etc.     Lit. :  without  myself  sick  to  feel.     English : 

without /eeling  sick.    A  German  infinitive  preceded  by  ohne zu 

is  rendered  in  English  by  the  preposition  withmU^vfith.  ih.Q  participle  present. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


57 


6.  Kdt)t''-sh'r !    Fa^-r'n  ze 
zo  shii6F  ^Is  muc^^-lic^. 

Za'-'n  ze  zicTi  f5r'. 

Vas  gept'  es  ? 

De  pfar'-de  ga'-'n  d(56rc7i'. 

Halt ! 

Za'-g'n  ze  dam  kdot'-sli'r 
ar  zol  lial'-t'n. 
nicht  zo  stinel 


De  da'-m'n  zint  er-sliro'- 
k'n. 

A'-b'r  fa'-r'n  ze  dan  kwr'- 
tse-sten  vacTi. 


6.  Vas  falt^  e^-n^n? 

Mer  ist  u'-b'l. 

Ich  kan  nicTit  mk'-verts 
fa'-r'n  o'-ne  mioh  don'-vol' 
ts66  fu'-l'n. 


Cab!     Go  just  as  fast  as 
you  can.i 

Take  care !  ^ 

What  is  the  matter  ?  ^ 

The  horses  are  going  to  run 

away.* 
Stop ! 

Tell  the  driver  to  stop.^ 

Tell  the  driver  not  to  go  so  fast.® 

Cabman !     Do  not  go '  so  fast. 
The  ladies  are  frightened. 

But  take  the  shortest  way. 


What  is  the  matter  with 
you?^ 

I  am  sick  at  my  stomach.® 
I  cannot  ride  backward  without 
being  sick.^^ 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Drive  you  as  quick  as  possible. 

2  Look  5'ou  before  yourself  {yourself  before). 

8  Idiomatic  phrase.    Cannot  be  given  in  comprehensible  English. 
Word  for  word  :  What  gives  it  f 
4  The  horses  go  through. 
6  Tell  you  to-the  driver,  he  shall  stop. 
6  He  shall  not  so  quick  drive. 
^  Drive  {you)  not  so  fast. 

8  What  ails  {to)  you?  Lit. :  What  to-you  fails?  — The  Germans  also 
say,  Was  ist  mit  Ihnen  ?  lit. :  What  is  with  you  f  although  this  expres- 
sion is  not  so  frequently  used  as,  Was  fehlt  Ihnen? 

9  Idiomatic.    Word  for  word :  To-me  is  bad. 
10  Without  me  sick  to  feel. 


58  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Dann  nehmen  Sie  meinen^  Platz. 

Aber  ich  fiirchte  es  wird  Ihnen  iibel  werden. 

Ein  Mann!     Keine^  Idee! 

Danke  schon.     Sie  sind  sehr  freundlich. 


Ich  will. 

ich  vil. 

I  will. 

du  willst. 

doo  vilst. 

thou  wilt. 

er  {or  sie)  will. 

ar  vil 

he  will. 

wir  wollen. 

ver  vo'-l'n. 

we  will. 

Ihr  wollt. 

er  volt.       ) 

•11 

Sie  wollen. 

ze  vo'-l'n.  J 

you  will. 

sie  wollen. 

ze  vo'-l'n. 

they  will. 

8.  Nun  sind  wir  da. 

Lassen  Sie  uns  aussteigen! 

Steigen  Sie  aus,  meine  Damen! 
Kutscher!     Was  bekommen  Sie? 

Zwei  Mark,*  mein  Herr. 

Hier  ist  ein  Thaler.     Geben   Sie   mir   eine  Mark 
heraus ! ^  , 


NOTES. 

1  Meinen,  accusative  masculine  form  of  mein.    See  page  16,  note  *. 

2  Keiue,  feminine  form  of  kein.  Used  here  because  Idee  is  feminine. 
8  Heraus.    Her  and  hin  can  be  connected  with  prepositions  as  well 

as  witli  (tdvcrhs.  See  page  30,  note  2.  But,  while  hin  and  her  precede 
prepositions  (/lin-aus,  lier-aus),  they  follow  adverbs  (dort-hin,  dort- 
her).  F\irtlit'rni()re,  hin  and  her  are  separable  from  the  adverbs 
(dort,  hier,  etc.).  see  page  30,  note  2,  but  not  separable  from  the  pre- 
positions (aus,  ab,  etc.).  —  •^-  Mark,  not  ^^rken.    See  note/*  opp.  p. 


Dan  na'-m'n  ze  mi'-nen 
plats. 

A'-b'r  ich  tilrch'-te  es  virt 
e'-nen  u'-b'l  var'-d'n. 

In  man !     Ki'-ne  i-da' ! 

Daii'-ke  sli-Qxi.  Ze  zint  zar 
fro-int'-licTi. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  59 

Then  take  my  place. 

But  I  fear  you  might  get  sick.* 

A  man !     The  idea !  * 


Thank    you.      You    are    very 
kind. 


Will  ich? 

willst  du  ? 
will  er  (or  sie)  ? 
wollen  wir? 
wolltihr? 
wollen  Sie? 
wollen  sie? 


vil  ich? 

vilst  d65? 
vil  ar? 
vo'-l'n  ver? 
volt  er? 
vo'-l'n  ze? 


8.  Noon  zint  ver  da^. 

La'-s'n    ze    obns    a-dos*- 
s7iti'-g'n.  '^ 

Mi'-ne  da'-m'n. 

Koot'-stL'r!    Vas    be-ko'- 
m'n  ze? 
Tsvi  mark,  min  her'. 

Ta'-l'r lie-ra-dos' ! 


Win  I? 

wilt  thou  ? 
will  he  ? 
will  we? 
will  you  ? 
will  you  ? 
will  they  ? 


Well,  here  we  are.' 

Let  us  get  out.* 

Come  oiit,  ladies.** 

Cab!     What  is  the  fare ?« 


Fifty  cents,  sir.' 
Here   is   a  thaler.^ 
back  a  mark.® 


Give    me 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

i  It  will  to-you  bad  become. —  2  ts^q  idea!  Keine,  feminine  of 
kein,  no. —  8  Now  are  we  there. 

*  Let  iye)  us  outstep.  —  ^  Step  (ye)  out,  my  ladies. 
«  What  receive  you? —  ^  Lit.  :  two  marks. 

8  A  Thaler  is  equal  to  three  marks.  —  ^  Give  (ye)  to  me  a  mark  out ! 

*  A  mark  is  worth  twenty-five  cents.  —  Notice  that  the  Germans  do 
not  use  the  plural  of  the  word  Mark  in  connection  with  numbers. 
They  say  :  Eine  Mark,  zwei  Mark  {not  Marken),  etc. 


60 


DIE    ANKUNFT. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Auf  derEisenbahn  (a-()bf  d'r      With   the   cars;    by 


i^-z'n-ban'),^ 

Im  Wagen  (im  va'-g'n),^ 
Im  Schlitten  (im  stili'-t'n), 
Zu  Fusse  (tsoo  foo'-se),^ 
Zu  Pferde  (pfar'-de),* 


rail. 

In  a  carriage. 
In  a  sleigh. 
On  foot. 
On  horseback. 


Auf  der  Eisenbahn  fahreii,^ 

Spazieren  ^  fahren  (s7ipa-tse'-r'n 

fa'-r'n),® 
Im  Schlitten  fahren  (sh.li'-t'n), 

Spazieren  gehen  (s7ipa-tse'-r'n 

Spazieren  reiten  (ri'-t'n),^ 


To  take  a  railway  trip. 

To  take  a  drive ;  or  go  out 

driving. 
To  take  a  sleigh-ride ;  or  go 

out  sleighing. 

To  take  a  walk. 
To  take  a  ride. 


Nach  dem  Orient  reisen  To  take  a  trip  to  the 

{uakh  dam  o^-ri-6iit'  ri^-z'n),^      East. 

Nach  Japan  reisen  (ya'-pan),  To  take  a  trip  to  Japan. 

Nach  Californien  reisen,  To  take  a  trip  to  California. 


1  Lit. :  Upon  the  railroad.  —  2  Lit. :   In-the  wagon.  —  8  Lit. :  2b  foot 

*  Lit. :  To  horse.  —  ^  Lit. :  Upon  the  railroad  to-ride. 

«  Lit.:  Walking  to-drive. —  ^  Lit.:  Walking  to-go. 

«  Lit.  :  Strolling  to-ride.  —  »  I-it. :  To  the  Orient  to-traveL 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


61 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Getranke ; —Beverages. 


Frisches  ^  Wasser  (fri'-slies  va'-s'r),      Cool  or  fresh  water. 


Kaltes  1  Wasser  (kal'-tes), 
Lanes  ^  Wasser  (la-oo'-es), 
Warmes  ^  Wasser  (var'-raes), 
Heisses  ^  Wasser  (iii'-ses), 
Seller  Wasser  (zel'-t'r), 
Wasser  mit  Wein  (mit  vin), 
Eiswasser  (is'-va'-s'r), 
Eine  KarafFe  mit  Eiswasser,^ 


VVeisswein  (vis^-vin'), 

Kotwein  (rot'-vin'), 

Bordeaiixwein  (bor-do'), 

Bii rounder  (boor-gdon'-d'r), 

Eine  Flasche  Weln  ^  (fia'-stie), 

Ein  Glas  Wasser^  (glas), 

Ein  Glas  Limonacle  ^  (li-mo-na'-de), 

Branntwein  (brant'-vin'), 


Cold  water. 

Tepid  water. 

Warm  water. 

Hot  water. 

Seltzer  water. 

Wine  and  water. 

Ice-water. 

A  decanter  of  ice-water. 

White  wine. 

Red  wine. 

Claret. 

Bnrgundy. 

A  bottle  of  wine. 

A  glass  of  water. 

A  glass  of  lemonade. 

Brandy. 


1  Wasser  is  neuter,  hence  the  form  of  the  adjectives,  frisches, 
kaltes,  lanes,  etc. 

2  Lit. :  A  decanter  with  ice-water. 

8  Lit. :  A  bottle  wine ;  a  glass  water ;  a  glass  lemonade. 


62  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  conversation^ 
whether  /or  self-study  or  preparation  for  the  class, 

CONVERSATIONS. 

l.-AUF  DEN  MARKT*    GEHEN.     • 

Ich  mochte^  heute  nachmittag^  auf  den  Markt 
gehen.  Wollen  Sie  mit  mir  gehen  ?  —  Sehr  gem. 
Ich  mochte  selbst  einige  kleine  Einkaufe  macheii. — 
Will  Ihre  Freundin,  Frau  Burkhard,  uns  nicht  be- 
gleiten.^  —  Sie  mochte  wohl ;  *  aber  sie  muss  ihre 
Schneiderin  sprechen. — Nun,  so^  lassen  Sie  uns  gehen! 

2.  -  UNTERWEGSA 

Wie  wollen  Sie  dorthin  gehen?  —  Ich  mochte  zu 
Fusse^  gehen.  —  Das"^  mochte  ich  auch.  Aber  ich 
habe  einen  bosen  ^  Fuss.  —  Das  ist  wahr.  Sie  hinken.^ 
Also^^  lassen  Sie  uns  einen  Wagen  nehmen!  —  Aber 
ich  sehe  keine  Droschke.  —  Sehen  Sie,  da  konnnt 
gerade  ein  Omnibus.    Kondukteur !  ^^   Halten  Sie  an!^ 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Ich  mochte,  ich  mochte  gern,  ich  wiirde  gern,  with  an 
infinitive  {i.e.,  gehen,  etc.)  are  all  to  be  translated  by  I  should  like. 

2  Lit. :  Today  afternoon,  i.  e.,  this  afternoon ;  ho-i'-te  nafc/i'-mi'- 
tekhh.  —  8  Accompany.  —  *  Lit. :  She  would  like  (to)  indeed. 

5  So,  wlien  used  to  connect  or  introduce  sentences,  simply  adds 
strength  and  cannot  be  rendered  in  Eng. —  ^  Tsoo  foo'-sS,  on  foot. 

5"  That.  —  8  Bft'-z'n,  sore.—  9  Hm'-k'n,  limping.—  ^  AF-zo,  then. 

11  Kon-dook-tur'.  —  i'^  Anhalten,  auMial'-t'n,  to  stop,  is  a  com- 
pound verb  consisting  of  the  preposition  an  and  the  verb  halten. 
These  two  parts  are  separable,  thus :  Halten  Sie  an.    Sec  p.  234. 

*  To  the  market.  —  f  On  the  way. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  63 

3.—SPAZIEREN   REITEN.  ^ 

Will  Ihr  Herr  Bruder^  nicht  heute  morgen^  mit 
mir  spazieren  reiten  ?  —  Ich  weiss  nicht.  Ich  will  ihn 
fragen.^  —  Nun,  was  sagte  er?*  —  Er  sagte,  er  mochte 
gern  heute  morgen  mit  Ihnen  spazieren  reiten ;  aber  er 
hat  einem  Freund  versprochen  ihn  zu  besuchen.^ 

4.— JJV   EINEM   RESTAURANT. 

Welche  Sorte  Wein^  wollen  Sie  bestellen?^  —  Ich 
weiss  nicht.  Burgunder?  —  Nein.  Man  hat  keinen 
guten  Burgunder  in  diesem  ^  Eestaurant.  Verlangen  ^ 
Sie  lieber  ^^  Bordeaux  "  oder  ^^  weissen  Wein !  Und  Sie, 
Herr  Alfred?  Welche  Sorte  Wein  wiinschen  Sie  zu 
nehmen?  —  Ich  will  keinen  Wein.  Ich  trinke^^  nie- 
mals  Wein.  Ich  befinde  mich  wohler  ^*  ohne  Wein.  — 
Kellner,  bringen  Sie  mir  zwei^^  Flaschen  Bordeaux, 
eine  ^^  Flasche  Sodawasser  und  eine  Tasse  Thee !  ^^ 


Note.  —  Study  the  Indicative  and  Conditional  of  Sein, 
page  500. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 
1  BrOO'-d'r,  brother.  —  2  H5-i'-te  mor'-g'n.    Lit. :  To-day  morn- 
ing; i.  c,  this  morning.  —  ^  Fra'-g'n,  ask,  —  ■*  What  did  he  say  ? 

6  Fer-s/i-pro'-Jk/i'n,  past  participle  of  versprecheii,  to  promise.  — 
Bg-zoo'-fcli-'n,  to  visit.  —  6  What  kind  of  wine? 

7  Order.  —  ^  In  de'-z'm  re-sto-ran'. 

»  Ask.  —  w  Rather.  —  n  Bor-do'.  —  12  Or.  —  is  Drink. 

"  I  feel  better.  Lit. :  I  find  myself  more-well. — The  personal  pro- 
nouns (mich,  dich,  ihn,  uns,  etc.),  when  used  in  a  reflexive  sense, 
are  rendered  in  English  by  myself,  himself,  ourselves,  etc. 

16  Bring  me.     Lit. :   Bring  ye  to-me Tsvi,  two. 

1*  I'-nS,  one,  —  i^  a  cup  of  tea. 


64  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

To  he  translated  and  written  into  German,  hut  also  to  he  recited  as 

a  conversation  in  the  class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see 

Directions  hefore  Part  I,) 

EXERCISES. 

l.—IN  A   RESTAURANT* 

What  will  you  (have)  for  breakfast?  —  Bring  me  a 
beefsteak  with  cresses/  some  rolls,^  butter,^  and  a  cup 
of  coffee.^  —  Waiter,  you  have  not  given  me  any 
napkin.^ — Beg  pardon,  sir.  There  it  is,^  by  the  side 
of  your  plate.^  —  You  are  right.^  —  What  will  your 
little  girl  ^  (have)  ?  —  Bring  her  ^  bread,^^  coffee,  and 
two  fried  eggs.^^  —  Very  well,  sir.  —  Bring  me  also  ^^  a 
small  ^^  bottle  of  white  wine  and  a  decanter  of  ice- 
water. 

2.  — A   TRir.i 

When^*  does  Mr.  Belmont  want  to  take  a  trip  to 
the  East  ?  —  Next  Spring,  I  believe.^^  —  Have  you  seen 


Aids  to   Writing. 
1  Kressen.  —  2  Brotchen,  briit'-cJi'n.  —  3  Butter,  boo'-t'r. 
4  Eine  Tasse  Kaffee,  ka'-f  a. 

6  You  have  to-me  no  napkin  (keine  Serviette)  given  (gegeben). 
«  Lit. :  She  iS  there,  etc.    Sie  ist  da,  neben  Ihrem  Teller. 

7  Sie  haben  recht,  ze  ha'-b'n  rSc/tt.     Lit. :   You  have  right. 

8  Tochterchen,  tuc/t'-t*r-c/i'n.  —  9  Ihr.    Lit. :  To-her. 
w  Brot.  —  11  Fried  eggs,  Spiegeleier,  s/ipe'-g'l-i'-Sr. 

12  To-me  also,  mir  auch.  —  i3  Kleine. 

14  When  (wann)   will  Mr.  Belmont  to  the  East  travel  (ri'-z'n). 

15  Nachsten  Fruhling,  glaube  ich,  nRc/jZ-st'ii  frii'-liii,  gla-o6'- 
b6  IcU.  —  •  In  einem  Restaurant;  or,  In  einer  Restauration  (rSs- 
ta-oo-ra-tsi-on').  —  f  Eine  Reise. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  65 

him?^  —  Yes.     I  saw  him  last  night  ^  at  a  reception. 

—  Did  you  speak  to  him?^ — Yes,  but  for  a  moment 
only.* 

3.  —INDISPOSITION* 

Sit  down  here.^  What  is  the  matter  with  you?" — 
I  feel  sick  at  my  stomach.  —  Will  you  (have)  a  glass 
of  wine  ?  ^  —  No,  thank  you.'^  I  never  ^  drink  wine.  — 
Only  a  glass  of  ice-water,  please.  Thanks;  I  feel  a 
little  better.^ 

4:.— BETWEEN   TWO   FRIENDS  A 

Come  (and)  have  a  drive  ^^  with  me}^  —  No,  thank 
you.     I  must  go  with   Mr.  Ellsworth.i2_^\/-l^a^  f^^r 

—  He  wants  to  make  some  purchases  ^^  and  order 
a  pair  of  shoes,^^  and  he  wishes  me  to  talk  German 
for  him.i*  —  Doesn't  he  speak  German ?^^  —  Not  one 
word.i^ 


Aids  to  Writing". 

1  Have  you  him  seen?  —  2  i  liave  him  last  night  ('gestern  abend) 
at  a  reception  (in  einer  Gesellschaft)  seen. 

8  Have  you  with  him  spolcen  (mit  ilim  gesprochen  ? 

4  Yes;   ])nt  only  (nur)  for   a   moment  (fur   einen    Augenblick, 
a-oo'-g'n-blik  ).  —  5  Setzen  Sie  sich  liier  (ze'-ts'n  ze  zic/t  her')! 
""s  Will  you  a  ghiss  of  wine  liave?—  '  Danke  shon.     Lit.:  thank 
beautifully.  —  8  I  drink  (trinke)  never  (niemals)  wine. 

^  To-me  is  a  little  better  (ein  wenig  besser). 

10  Come  (kommen  Sie)  and  drive  (fahren  Sie)  with  me  promenad- 
ing (spazieren).  —  ^  Mit  inir. 

12  I  must  with  Mr.  Ellsworth  (mit  Herrn)  go. 

13  He  will  some  (einige)  purchases  make  and  a  pair  of  shoes  (ein 
Paar  Schulie)  order  (bestellen). 

14  And  he  wishes  that  I  German  for  him  (fiir  ihn)  talk  shall 
(sprechen  soli). —  is  gpHclit  er  niclit  deutseli  (s/tpric/tt  — )? 
Lit. :  Speaks  he  not  German  ?  —  i6  Niclit  ein  Wort  (nic/it  in  vort). 

*  Unwohlsein,  don'-v51-zin'.—  f  Zwisclien  zwei  Freunden. 


66  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation  opposite,  until  thor* 

oughly  understood,  in  preparation  for  reading  aloud  and 

translating  in  class.  —  For  pronunciation,  see  page  7^. 

—  ©iiteit  ^JJorgen,  lieber  ^err  3:;f)om^fon.    2Bo  motlen 

—  9Zim,  laffen  ©ic  \m§>  nad)  bein  ^tergarten  gel;en. 

—  ©d)du.  ^a§  ift  gerabe,  tx)a§  tc^  it)uufd;te.  <BoUm 
tt)ir  eine  ®rofd)!e  ne^men? 

—  ©etmfe. 

—  ^rofrf)!e!    ©tnb  ©ie  frei? 

—  3a,  mein  §err. 

—  ga(;ren  ©ie  un§  nac^  bem  ^iergarjen! 

—  3d)  t)ermiite,  \v\x  tt)erben  ba§  Sranbenburger  X^or 
ii:)iebcrfe(;en. 

—  3a,  unb  gerabe  ^inburdjfa^rcn.  (5e(;en  ©ie,  tt)ir  finb 
fd)on  ba. 

—  SSie  ^od)  e§  ift!    Unb  nun  fe^en  tt)ir  ben  ©arten. 

—  ®ic§  ift  nic^t  ber  fd;dnftc  ^eil  be§  ^ar!^,  trofe  biefcr 
fd)dncn  ^dume  unb  ©een.  3l0cr  ift  biefe  breitc  gaf)r= 
ftraf^e  mitten  im  ^arfe  nid;t  ^rdc^tig?  3J?an  fawn  iydl;renb 
ber  ©aifon  gan^  Berlin  ^ier  fe(;en. 

—  2Ba^  (;dre  id;  ba  — 3}Jufif? 

—  3<5/  irf)  cjlaube.  ©ie  follten  ein  menic^  I;ier  t)erit)eiten, 
ba§  ^lon^ert  (;dren  unb  fe^en,  trie  fid)  ber  Berliner 
ami'ifiert. 


1  Lit.  :  the  animal-gar deti.    Anglice  :  Zoological  garden, 
a  Strictly  :  Beautiful  f 


THE    ARRIVAL.  67 

For  Self-Study,  should  be  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation, 
then  without  it,  and  when  thoroughly  understood, 
read  aloud  in  German. 

READING. 
BERLIN,— THE    ZOOLOGICAL    GARDEN. 

—  Good  morning,  {dear)  f  Mr,  Thompson.  Where 
will  we  to-day  {away)-go? 

—  Now,  let  {ye)  us  to  the  animal-garden^  go. 

—  Good.2  That  is  just  what  I  wished.  Will  we  a 
cab  take? 

—  Certainly. 

—  Cah  !     Are  you  free  ? 

—  Yes,  sir. 

—  Drive  {ye)-\  us  to  the  Zoological  Garden. 

—  I  suppose  we  will  the  Brandenburg  Gate  again- 
see. 

—  Yes,  and  just  right-through-ride.  See,  we  are 
already  there.  '*' 

—  How  high  it  is !     And  now  see  we  the  Garden. 

—  This  is  not  the  prettiest  part  of-the  park,  not- 
withstanding these  fine  trees  and  views.  But  is  the 
broad  drive  (in  the)  *  middle  in  the  park  not  beauti- 
ful ?     One  can  during  the  season  all  Berlin  here  see. 

—  What  do  I  hear  there  —  music? 

—  Yes.  I  believe  you  should  a  little  here  delay, 
the  concert  hear  and  see  how  himself  the  Berliner 
amuses. 


*  Words  in  brackets,  but  not  italicized,  are  not  used  in  German. 
t  Words  in  brackets  and  italisized  are  used  in  Ger.  but  not  in  Eng. 


68  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

—  3a,  ba§  mod^te  ic^  gern.^  Saffen  ©ie  bie  ©rof^fe 
fatten ! 

—  2Btr  molTen  im§  an  biefen  Xi^d)  fefeen.  .^ellner,  ^trei 
g(afd)en  (5oba=Simonabe ! 

—  3Ba§  fiir  )cl)onc  9}hifi! !  SSie  fe()r  bod)  bie  ®eut)d)en 
bie  Tli\\it  lieben !  Uitb  tt)ie  Diele  Seute  ()ier  fiiib !  33e= 
fonberg  fe^r  biele  Dffijiere. 

—  5lid)t  ine^r'  al§  getoo^nlid).  ©ie  miiffen  md;t  t^ergeffen, 
bafe  in  33erlin  Diel  TOUtdr  (iegt. 

—  ^ag  ift  angenfc^einlicf).  SBa^  flir  gro^e  fc^one  Seute 
[ie  finb ! 

—  3^^t  fasten  mir  an  ber  g^ora  t»orbei,  einem  ber 
grofeartigften  SBintergdrten  ©nro^ag  mit  ^'^rad)tt)Dllen  ^>a(nien 
nnb  ^flan5en  atler  %xt  dUd)  miUv  fiiblic^  ift  ber  joologifd^e 
©arten. 

—  2(ber,  fonnten  wit  fie  nid)t  an  einem  anbern  3::age 
fe(;en?    §ente  mdd)te  id)^  (i^()ar(otten6urg  feben. 

—  @eti:)i6.  SSir  fonnen  bie  g(ora  nnb  'i)m  ^oologifdjen 
©arten  morgen  ober  iibermorgen  fef)en.  £utfd)er !  gal^ren 
©ie  \m§>  nad)  ©l;arlottenbnrg ! .  .  .  . 

,—  21!) !  2)a  finb  Wix  in  ^barfottenbnrg.  2Bie  ©ie  U)iffen, 
ift  biefeio  fdibne  ©tdbtc^en  bie  ©omuxerrefiben^  ineter  reidicn 
Berliner.  ©e(;en  ©ie  mal  jenen  ^alaft,  lin!§.  @r*  ift^ 
t»on  griebrid)  bem  ©rften  erbant.  2lber  ^nerft  it)erben  \v\x 
ba§  9}?anfo(eum  anfe^en,  tt)eld;e§  ber  ^onigin  Snife  ^n  ®I;ren 
erridjtet  ift.    SSir  miiffen  bnrd)  bie  ©drten  fa(;ren,  urn  babin 

^n  fomnten ©e(;en  ©ie  jenen  gried)ifd;en  ^em^cl 

gerabe  t)or  nn^?  ®a§  ift  e§.  $ier  xniji  bie  Diel  gefeicrte 
^bnigin  Snife,  bie  9}hitter  be^  alten  ^aifer^  2Bin;elni,  Don 
ber  man  fagt,  bafe  fie  bie  fd)i)nfte  nnb  ebelfte  gilrftin  i(;rer 
3eit  wax. 

1  Anglice  :  I  would  like  that  very  much.  —  ^  Anglice:  stop  the  cab. 
8  Sti-ictly  :  might  I. —  ■*  Lit. :  lie.    See  p.  40,  n.  f.  —  6  Aug. :  was. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  69 

—  Yes,  that  might  I  luillingly}  Make  {ye)  f  the  cab 
stop.^ 

—  We  will  ourselves  at  this  table  sit.  Waiter,  two 
bottles  (of)  *  soda-lemonade ! 

What  (/or)t  beautiful  music!  How  much  indeed 
the  Germans  {the)-t  music  love!  And  how  many 
people  here  are  !     Especially,  very  many  officers. 

—  Not  more  as  usual.  You  must  not  forget  that  in 
Berlin  much  soldiery  is. 

—  That  is  evident.  What  {for)  large  fine  people 
they  are! 

—  Now,  go  we  to  the  collection-of-flowers  past,  one 
of  the  very-prettiest  winter-gardens  of-Europe  with 
magnificent  palm-trees  and  plants  of-all  sort.  Still 
further  southward  is  the  Zoological  Garden. 

—  But  could  we  them  not  some  other  day  see  ?  To- 
day, wished^  I  to-see  Charlottenburg. 

—  Certainly.  We  can  the  flowers  and  the  Zoological 
Garden  to-morrow  or  day-after  to-morrow  see.  Cab! 
Take  us  to  Charlottenburg 

—  Ah !  there  are  we  in  Charlottenburg.  As  you 
know,  is  this  pretty  little-town  the  summer-residence  of 
many  rich  Berliners.  (On  the)  left  see  that  palace. 
It  is^  built  by  Frederick  I.  But  first  will  we  the 
mausoleum  look-at  which  to  (the)  honor  of-the  Queen 
Louisa  built  isf'    We  must  through  the  gardens  go  to 

get  there Do  you  see  that  Greek  temple  just 

ahead  of  us?  That  is  it.  Here  rests  the  much  cele- 
brated Queen  Louisa,  the  mother  of-the  old  Emperor 
William,  of  whom  they  say  that  she  the  most  beautiful 
and  noblest  princess  of-her  time  was. 

*  Words  in  brackets,  but  not  italicized,  are  not  used  in  German. 
t  Words  in  brackets  and  italized  are  used  in  Ger.  but  not  in  Eng. 


70  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Memorize,  some  or  all  of  the  German  forms  of  letter-beginning 
N.  B.  —  I'hese  should  be  written  in  German  letters. 


Having"  witnessed,  so  often,  the  embarrassment  and  annoy- 
books  of  the  manner  in  which  to  begin  a  letter,  the  author  has 
mation. 

Berlin,  ben  10.  ^unt.t 
©ee^rter^  §err! 


^erren  (Somrner^  unb  Somp.,^  in  ^^\\)  3)orf. 

Sei^^ig,  ben*  6.  gebruar.§ 
3^t  genetgter  Sluftrag  mit  ^rief  i;)om,  etc. 


1  The  word  In  may  be  omitted.  —  2  Lit. :  Honored. 

*  Abbreviation  for  Compagnie.     Must  always  be  pronounced  in 
full,  however. —  ^  fije  word  den  may  be  omitted. 

*  K5-rSs-p5n-dSnts\    Also,  Briefwechsel  (bref -vSk  -s'l).  Lit.; 
Letter-exchange.  —  f  Yoo'-ne.  —  §  Fa'-broo-iir. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  71 

and  some  hours  afterward,  write  them  from  memory. 
For  models,  see  page  48. 


CORRESPONDENCE. 


ance  of  learners  because  left  in  ignorance  by  the  various  text- 
thought  it  well,  at  this  stage,  to  introduce  the  following  infor- 


THE    BEGINNING    OF    LETTERS. 
1.  — BUSINESS   LETTERS. 

Berlin,  the  10.^  June.f 
Mr.  William  Meyer,  in  Dresden, 
Dear 2  Sir! 


Messrs.  Sommers    and  Company,  in  New  York. 

Leipsic,  the  6.3  February. 
Your  esteemed  order  with  letter  from,  etc. 


1  stands  for  den  zehnten,  the  10th. 

2  Strictly :  Honored. 

8  Stands  for  den  sechsten,  the  6th. 

t  A  literal  counterpart  of  these  letter-beginnings  is  given  on  this 
page. 


72  DIE   ANKUNFT. 

2»  — 5(nt>ctc  SSriefe* 

<Ban  granci^fo,  ben  25.  Sum.* 
grftutein  (5Jretc^en  SJlutter, 

©ee^rteg  gmulein! 
Dber : 

STeuerfte^  grciutein! 

grau  Tl,  So^nig, 

©eei^rte  grau! 
Ober: 

^euerfte  grau! 

©ee^rter  $err! 


©§ifago,  ben  6.  gebruar.' 


aJliinc^en,  ben  4.*  3Jlai.t 


3*  — 93tiefe  an  95crtt)anbtc  unb  Stcunbc^ 

1.  9J^ein  (ieber  <Bo^n\  oder,  3Jieine  Uebe  S^od^ter! 

2.  £ieber  ^ater!   oder,  Siebe  9JJutter! 

3.  Siebfter  DnfeU  oder,  Siebfte  ^ante! 

4.  Neuter  greunblt  oder,  STeure  5reunbin!§ 

5.  Sieber  ^art!  oc^er,  £iebe§  ©retd^en! 


*  Read,  den  fiinf  und  zwanzigsten  (fiinf  dont  tsvan'-tsicli^ 
stSn),  tlie  25tlj ;  den  sechsten  (sSk'-st'n),  the  0th ;  den  vierten 
(fer'-t'n),  the  4th.  —  t  MI. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


73 


2.  — OTHER  LETTERS. 

San  Francisco,  the  25.  June. 
Miss  Margaret  MuUer, 

Honored  Miss! 
Or: 

Dearest  Miss! 


Chicago,  the  6.  February. 


Mrs.  M.  Hoehnig, 
Honored  Lady! 

Or: 

Dear  Lady! 

Mr.  Charles  Schaefer, 
Honored  Sir! 


Munich,  the  4.  Mai. 


3.  — LETTERS  TO  RELATIVES  AND  FRIENDS. 

1.  My  dear  Son!   oVy  My  dear  Daughter! 

2.  Dear  Father!   or,  Dear  Mother! 

3.  Dearest  Uncle!   or,  Dearest  Aunt! 

4.  Dear  Friend !  J   or.  Dear  Friend  !§ 

5.  Dear  Charles!   or,  Dear  Margaret! 


X  Or,  Teuerster  Freund,  Dearest  Friend. 
§  Or,  Teuerste  Freuncliii,  Dearest  Friend. 


74  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

PM  ON  UNCI  A  TION. 

B6r-len^ !  —  Dar  Ter^-gr^r'-t'n. 

Goo'-t'n  mor'-g'n,  le'-b'r  her  torn'-s'n.  Vo  vo'-l'n  ver 
li6-i'-te  tLin'-ga'-'n  ?  —  Noon,  la'-s'n  ze  66ns  nakh  dam 
ter'-gar'-t'n  ga'-'n.  —  Sli<in.  Das  ist  ge-ra'-de,  vas  ioh 
vunsli'-te.    Zo'-l'n  ver  i'-ne  drosli'-ke  na'-m'n  ?  —  Ge-vis'. 

—  Drosii'-ke.  Zint  ze  fri'  ?  —  Ya,  min  her'.  —  Fa'-r'n  ze 
66ns  nakh  dam  ter'-gar'-t'n.  —  Ioh  fer-moo'-te,  ver  var'- 
d'n  das  bran'-d'n-b66r'-g'r  tor  ve'-d'r-za'-'n.  —  Ya  66nt 
ge-ra'-de  tLin-d66rc7i'-fa'-r'n.     Za'-'n  ze,  ver  zint  stion  da. 

—  Ve  h.6kh'  es  ist !    CDOnt  noon'  za'-'n  ver  d§.n  gar'-t'n. 
Des  ist  nicht  dar  sh.1an'-ste  til  des  parks,  trots  de'-z'r 

sh.<i'-nen  bo-i'-me  66nt  za'-'n.  A'-b'r  ist  de'-ze  bri'-te  fSr'- 
s7itra'-se  mi'-t'n  im  par'-ke  nicht  preoTi'-ticTj  ?  Man 
kan  vii'-rent  dS.r  se-z6n'  gants  Ber-len'  lier  za'-'n. 

Vas  liU'-re  ioh  da  — moo-zek'? 

Ya,  ich  gla-66'-be,  ze  zol'-t'n  in  va'-nicTi  her  fer-vi'- 
len,  das  kon-tsert'  h6.-r'n  66nt  za'-'n  ve  zich  dar  ber-le'- 
n'r  a-mli-zert'.  —  Ya,  das  muc7i'-te  ich  gern.  La'-s'n  ze 
de  drosh'-ke  hal'-t'n.— Ver  vo'-l'n  66ns  an  de'-z'n  tish 
ze'-ts'n.  Kel'-n'r,  tsvi  fla'-sh'n  s6'-da-li-m6-na'-de. — Vas 
fur  sh<i'-ne  moo-zek'.  Ve  zar  dokh  de  do-it'-sh'n  de 
moo-zek'  le'-b'n.  OOnt  ve  fe'-le  16-i'-te  her  zint!  Be- 
zon'-d'rs  zar  fe'-le  6-fi-tse'-re. — Nicht  mar  als  ge-vun'- 
lich;  ze  mti'-s'n  nicTit  ier-ge'-s'n,  das  in  Ber-len'  fel  mi- 
li-t&r'  lecht.  —  Das  ist  a-66'-g'n-shin'-lic7i.  Vas  flir  gro'- 
se  sh<i'-ne  16-i'-te  ze  zint. — Yetst  fa'-r'n  ver  an  dar  F16'- 
ra  for-bi':  i'-nem  dSLr  gr5s'-ar'-tic?i-st'n  vin'-t'r-ger'-t'n 
6-i-ro'-pas  mit  prafe/it'-fo'-l'n  pal'-m'n  66nt  pflan'-ts'n 
a'-l'r  art.  Nokh'  vi'-t'r  ziit'-licTi  ist  dSLr  ts6-6-lo'-gi-she 
gar'-t'n.  — A'-b'r  kun'-t'n  ver  ze  nicTit  an  i'-nem  an'-d'rn 
ta'-ge  za'-'n.  —  Ge-vis',  ver  ku'-nen  de  fl6'-ra  66nt  dan 
ts6-6-16'-gi-sh'n  gar'-t'n  mor'-g'n  o'-d'r  ii'-br-mor'-g'n 
99L  -'i;,    K66t'-sh'r,  fa'-r'n  ze  66ns  nsikh  shar-16'-t'n-b66rc7*'. 


PARl^  I. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


DIE    AI^^KXJKFT. 


SECTION    IV. 


1. 

IN  THE  HOTEL. 

2. 

AT  BREAKFAST. 

3. 

GOING  TO  VISIT  A  FRIEND. 

A. 

THE  BREAKFAST;  THE  DISHES. 

5. 

IDIOMS;  THE  SEASONS. 

6. 

SMALL  AILMENTS. 

7. 

IN  A  RESTAURANT. 

8. 

BERLIN  ;  SCHLOSS,  MUSEUM^  etc. 

9. 

THE  ENDING  OF  LETFERS  (I). 

75 


76  DIE    ANKUNFT. 


IV. 

GERMAN. 

Und  direkt  in  das  Hotel  zum  Fruhstvlck 
fahren. 

Wohin  gehen  wir^  jetzt? 

Wir  gehen  direkt  in  das  Hotel  zum  Friihstiick. 

Ich  habe  Sie  nicht  verstanden.^ 

Ich  verstehe  nicht  sehr  gut^  deutsch. 

Ich   sagte   wir   gehen   direkt   in    das    Hotel    zum 
Friihstiick. 


2.  An  Ihrer  Stelle  wiirde  ich  vorziehen 
mein  Friilistuck  in  einer  Kestauration 
zn  nehmen. 


Nun,  was  wird  aus  dem  Gepack? 
Das  ist  wahr. 


NOTES. 

1  Wir  gehen,  we  are  going.  The  Germans  have  no  progressive 
form.      We  are  going  and  We  go  are  both  rendered  by  Wir  gehen. 

2  Ich  Juibe  Sie  nicht  verstanden.  Lit.  :  /  hai^e  yon  not  under- 
stood.—The  Germans  liavinj;  no  sucli  auxiliary  as  did,  use  haben 
instead,  in  ordinary  conversational  forms  such  as  this. 

*  Sehr  gut,  very  well.    Gut  =  good,  or  well. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


77 


IV, 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.    OOnt    di-rekt^    in    das 
ho-t^F  tsobm  frii^-sfetiik' 

fa'-r'n. 
Yetst. 


Jch  lia'-be  ze  nicht  fer- 
s/itan'-d'n. 

Ich  ver-s7ita'-0  nicht  zar 
goot  do-itsh. 

Ich  zakh'-te,  ver . 


And    go    straig-ht   to   the 
hotel  for  breakfast.^ 

Where  are  we  going  now  ?  ^ 
We   are  going  straight  to  the 

hotel  for  breakfast.* 
I  did  n't  understand  you.* 

I  do  not  understand  German 

very  well.^ 
I  said  we  are  going  straight  to 

the  hotel  for  breakfast. 


2.  An  e^-r6r  s7^t6''-16  viir^- 
d6  Ich  for^-tse'-'n  min 
frii^-sMiik  in  i^-n'r  r6- 
sta-db-ra-tsion^  tsdb  na-'- 
m'n. 


Das  ist  var. 


In  your  place,  I  would 
prefer  to  take  my  break- 
fast in  a  restaurant. 


Well,  what  about  the  baggage?® 
That's  so.' 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  And  straight  in  tlie  hotel  to-tlie  (zum,  for  zu  dem)  breakfast  go. 

2  Whither  go  we  now?  —  No  progressive  form  in  German.     See  p.  76. 
8  We  go  straight  in  the  hotel.  —  *  I  have  you  not  understood. 

6  I  understand  not  very  well  German.  Adjectives  of  nationality  in 
German  do  not  take  a  capital,  unless  used  as  nouns.  Thus:  Die 
deutsche  {not  2>eutsche)  Sprache. 

6  Well,  what  becomes  out-of  the  baggage? —  ^  That  is  true. 


78  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Jedenfalls  ist  es  das  beste. 

Es  ist  besser  in  das  Hotel  zu  gehen,  Zimmer  aus- 
zuwahlen^  und  ein  weiiig  auszuruhen/  ehe  wir 
friihstiicken. 

Sie  haben  recht. 

Ausserdem  sind  wir  jetzt  da.^ 

Herr  Vogel  spricht  sehr  gut  deutsch.  Er  wird 
mit  dem  Portier  sprechen. 


3.  Portier,  haben  Sie  Zimmer  fiir  uiis  bereit 
gehalten  ? 

Ja,  mein   Herr.     Aber  sie  sind  noch   nicht  ganz 

fertig. 
Wir  mussten  einige  neue     Teppiche    hineinlegei? 

lassen. 

Sie  werden  in  einer  halben  Stunde  fertig  sein. 

Vielleicht    wiirden    die    Damen    und    Herren    ihr 
Friihstiick  zuerst  nehmen? 

Schon.      Bitte,   sagen  Sie  uns,  wo   der  Speisesaal 

ist. 
Gerade  vor  Ihnen,  auf  der  anderen  Seite  des  Hofes 


NOTES. 

1  Aus«tewahlen,  aus^tcruhen.  Auswahlen,  a-dos'-va'-l'n,  and 
ausruhen,  a-oos'-roo  -»n,  are  '  separable ^  verbs.  When  used  with  zu,  in 
the  infinitive  form,  zu  is  inserted  between  the  prefix  aus,  and  the  verb. 

2  Wir  sind  jetzt  da.  Lit.:  We  are  Jtoiy  tliere.  —  Wlien  adverbs  of 
time  anil  place  occur  in  the  same  sentence,  the  adverb  of  time  precedes 
the  adverb  of  place. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


79 


Ya'-den-fals'  ist  es  das 
bes'-te. 

Es  ist  be'-s'r  in  das  lio-tel' 
tsoo  ga'-'n,  tsi'-m'r  a-oos'- 
tso6-va'-rn  dbnt  in""va'- 
nich  a-dbs'-tsoo-roo'-'n,  a'-e 
ver  — . 

Ze  h.a'-b'n  vecht'. 

A-oo'-s'r-dam'  zint  ver 
3;etst  da'. 

Ar  virt  mit  dam  p6r-ti-a' 
shpre'-dh'n. 


Any  way  it  is  best. 

It  is  better  to  go  to  the  hotel, 
select  (our)  rooms,  and  rest 
a  little  before  having  break- 

fast.i 

You  are  right. 

Besides  we  are  there  now. 

Mr.  Vogel  speaks  German  very 
well.  He  will  speak  to^  the 
porter. 


3.  P6r-ti-a^,  ha^-b'n  ze 
tsi^-m'r^ur  dons  b6-rit^ 
ge-haF-t'n? 

ii'-b'r  ze  zint  nbhh  nicTit 
gants  tev'-XXch. 

Ver  mdos-t'n  i'-ni-ge 
no-i'-e  te'-pi-c7ie  lii-nin'-la'- 
giTla'-s'n. 

Ze  var'-d'n  in  i'-n'r  hal'- 
b'n  s7itobn'-de  iev'-tlch  zin. 

Fl-llcht'*  vwr-d'n  de  da'- 
in"n  obnl  ber'-'n  er  frii'- 
sTitwk  tsoo-arst'  na'-m'n. 

Sbtin.  Bi'-te,  za'-g'n  ze 
dons  vo  dar  sTipi'-ze-zal'  ist. 

Ge-ra'-de  for'  e'-nen  a-<56f 
dar  an'-de-r'n  zi'-te  des  lio'- 
fes. 


Porter,  did  you  keep 
(some)  rooms  for  us?^ 

Yes,  sir ;  But  they  are  not  quite 
ready  yet. 

We  had  to  have  some  new  car- 
pets put  in. 

They  will  be  ready  in  half  an 

hour.* 
If  the  ladies  and    gentlemen 

would  take  their    breakfast 

first  ?s 
Very  well,  please  tell  us  where 

the  dining-room  is. 

Right  before  you  on  the  other 
side  of  the  court. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Before  we  breakfast.  —  2  With  the  porter. 
8  Have  you  rooms  for  us  ready  kept  ? 

4  They  will  in  a  half-hour  ready  be. 

5  Perhaps  would  the  ladies  and  gentlemen  their  breakfast  first  take? 
'•  Although  ie  strictly  is  long  (=e),  it  is  usually  pronounced  short 

(i),  in  vielleicht. 


80  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

4.   Gut,  lassen  Sie  uns  liinein  gehen! 

Setzen  Sie  sich  hierher,  meine  Damen  und  Herren 

Was  haben  Sie  zum  Friihstiick,  Kellner? 
Hier  ist  die  Speisekarte. 


5.  Ich  liebe,  ich  le^-b6.  I  love. 

du  liebst,  doo  lepst.  thou  lovest. 

er  {or  sie)  liebt,    ar  {or  ze)  lept.  he  {or  she)  loves. 

wir  lieben,  ver  le'-b'n.  we  love. 

ihr  liebt,  er  lept. 

Sie  lieben,  ze  le'-b'n. 

sie  lieben,  ze  le'-b'n.  they  love. 


you  love. 


6.  Was  woUen  Sie  haben,  Herr  Vogel? 

Ich  mochte  gern  eine  Tasse  Kaffee,  einige  Brot- 
chen  und  ein  weiches  Ei. 

Vielleicht^  wtirden   Sie  gern  erst  einige  Austern 

haben  ? 
Austern  mit  einem^  Glas  alten  Chablis? 

Entschuldigen  Sie,^  aber  ich  trinke  niemals  *  Wein. 


NOTES. 

1  Vielleicht,  perhaps,  and  similar  words  are  frequently  used  in 
German  in  order  to  give  the  sentence  some  special  shade  of  expression. 
In  this  case  vielleicht  makes  the  question  more  polite. 

2  Kinetn,  dative  of  ein,  governed  by  the  preposition  mit. 
8  Lit. :  Excuse  ye.  —  *  See  opposite  page,  note  4. 

*  Zum,  for  zu  dem.     Lit. :  to-the. 


4.  Goot,  la^-s'n  ze  dbns  hi- 

Ze'-ts'n  ze  zich  tier '-liar' — . 
Vas  lia'-b'n  ze  ts66m  frii'- 
Her  ist  de  s7tpi'-ze-kar'-te. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  81 

Well!    Let  us  go  in. 


Sit    down    there,    ladies    and 

gentlemen.^ 
Waiter,   what   have   you  for* 

breakfast  ? 
Here  is  the  bill  of  fare. 


5. 


Liebe  ich? 

liebst  du  ? 
liebt  er? 
lieben  wir? 
liebt  ihr? 
lieben  Sie  ? 
lieben  sie  ? 


Ie^-b6  ich. 

lepst  doo. 
lept  §Lr. 
le'-b'n  ver. 
lept  er.      | 
le'-b'n  ze.  j 


le'-b'n  ze. 


Do  I  love? 

doest  thou  love ' 
does  he  love  ? 
do  we  love  ? 

do  you  love  ? 

do  they  love  ? 


6.  Vas  v6^-rn  ze  ha^-b'n, 
li6r  Fo^-gr'l. 

Ich  much'-te  gem  i'-ne 
ta'-se  ka'-fa,  i'-ni-ge  briit'- 
ch'n  dont  in  vi'-c7ies  i. 

Fi-lic7it'  vwr'-d'n  ze  gem 
arst   i'-ni-ge   a-do'-st'rn. 

A-d6'-st'rn  mit  i'-nem 
gl^s  al'-t'n  sh.a-ble'  ? 

Ent-sbool'-di-gen  ze,  a'-b'r 
ich  triii'-ke  ne'-mals  vin. 


What  will  you  have,  Mr. 
Vogel? 

I  would   like  (to  have)  a  cap 

of  coffee,  some  rolls,  and  a 

soft  egg.  ^ 
Would  you  like  to  have  some 

oysters  first  ?^ 
Oysters,  with    a    glass    of   old 

Chablis? 
I  beg  your  pardon,  but  I  never 

drink  wine. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Sit  (you)  yourselves  here.  —  ^  I  would  (like)  very  much,  etc. 

3  Perhaps  would  you  willingly  first  some  oysters  have. 

4  I  drink  never  wine. — Notice  that  adverbs,  like  niemals,  nir- 
gends,  immer,  are  placed  after  tlie  verb,  instead  of  before.  The  Ger- 
mans never  can  say,  I  never  drink,  I  nlivajfs  read;  hut  only,  /  drhik 
never,  I  read  always,  ich  trinke  niemals,  ich  lese  (IS'-ze)  immer. 


82  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Meine  Gesundlieit  erlaubt  es  mir  nicht. 

Mein  Arzt  erlaubt  es  mir  nicht. 

Daiin   brin^en   Sie  uns    imr   ein    kleines    Flasch 
chen^  Weill,  Kelliier.     (See  page  84,  par.  9.) 


Note  —  Study  the  Weak  Conjugation, 


7.  Fraiilein^    Marie,    woUen    Sie    nicht    ein 
Kotelett  nelinien  ? 

Ein  Hammelkotelett  ?     Gem. 
Und  fiir  Sie,  gnadige  Frau? 

Fiir  mich  ein  Beefsteak. 

Dann,  Kellner,  bringen  Sie  uns  drei  Tassen  Kaf- 
fee,  einige  Brotchen^  und  ein  Dutzend  Austern. 

Danach  konnen  Sie  uns  ein  Hammelkotelett,  ein 
Beefsteak  mit  KartofFeln,  einige  Spiegeleier  und 
ein  halbes  Hiihnchen  ^  bringen.   (See  p.  84,  par.  9.) 


S,  Wohin  wiinschten '^  Sie  nach  dem  Friili- 
stucli  zu  gelien? 


NOTES. 

1  Das  Flaschchen,  das  Brotchen;  from  die  Plasche,  das 
Brot.  The  suffix  chen  (or,  lein)  is  added  to  express  diniiiuitioii. 
All  nouns  ending  in  chen  (or,  lein)  are  neuter.  I>as  Madchen  {the 
girl),  from  die  Magd  {the  maid);  das  Fraulein,  the  young  ludg. 

2  Sie  wiinscliten,  imp.  subj.  of  wiinsclien,  to  wish.  The  imp.  subj. 
is  often  used  in  Germ,  instead  of  the  first  conditiouMl  in  Eng.  Thus: 
Icli  wiinsclite,  /  wished,  instead  of,  Ich  wiirde  wunschen,  /  nunt/d 
wish.    And:  Wiinscliten  Sie,  instead  of,  Wiirden  Sie  ^vunscheu. 


Mi'-ne  ge-zoont'-tiit  er- 
la-c56pt'  es  mer  nicTit. 

Min  artst  er-la-oopt  es 
n:er  nicht. 

Dan  brin'-'n  ze  dons  noor 
ill  kli'-nes  flesh'-cTi'n  vin. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  83 

My  health  does  not  allow  me. 
My  physician  does  not  permit 


Then,   waiter,    bring    us    only 
a  small  bottle  of  wine.^ 


pages  507  and  508. 


7.  Fio-r-liii  Ma-re^  v6^- 
Tii  ze  uicht  in  ko-t'-16t^ 
iia^-in'ii. 

In  lia'-m'l-k5-t'-let'  ?  Gern. 

C5bnt  fiir  ze,  gnei'-di-ge 
fra-oo'  ? 

Fiir  mich  in  bef'-stak. 

Dan,  kel'-n'r,  briii'-'n  ze 
66ns  dri  ta-s'n  ka'-fa,  i'-ni- 
ge  brut'-cTi'n  66nt  in  d66- 
ts'nt  a-66'-st'rn. 

Da-nakh'  ku'-nen  ze  66ns 
in  h.a'-m'l-k6-t'-let',  in  bef''- 
stak  mit  kar-to'-fln,  i'- 
ni-ge  s7ipe'-g'l-i'-er  oont  in 
hal'-b's  h-lin'-cTi'n  brin'-'n. 


Miss  Marie,  take  a  chop, 
won't  you? 3 

A  mutton-chop,  then?* 
And  for  you,  madam  ?  ^ 

For  me,  a  beefsteak. 

Then,   waiter,   bring  iis    three 

cups    of   coffee,   some    rolls, 

and  a  dozen  oysters. 

After  that®  you  can  bring  us 
a  mutton-chop,  a  beefsteak, 
with  potatoes,  some  fried 
eggs,"^  and  for  me  the  wing 
of  a  chicken. 


8.    Vo-hin^    viinsh^-t'n    ze .  Where  would    you  want  ^ 
iisikh  dam .  I     to  go  after  breakfast? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  My  physician  permits  it  to-me  not.  —  Erlaubt,  from  erlauben, 
to  nlhm.  —  2  Then  bring  ye  to-ns  only  a  small  bottle. 

3  Will  voTi  not  a  chop  take?  — In  some  parts  of  Germany  a  chop  is 
called  Schopskotelett  (shups— ). 

4  A  iiuittoii-choi)?     Willingly. 
6  Orncioiis  woman,  or  Indy. 

6  Tlicreafter  can  you  us bring.  —  '  Mirror-Eggs. 

8  Where  to  wanted  you  after  the  breakfast  to  go  ? 


84  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

Zuerst     mochte    icJi    meinen     Freund    Waldstein 
besuchen.     (See  below,  paragraph  9.) 

Er  ist  nicht  zu  Hause. 
Was  sagen  Sie? 

Herr  Bell  schrieb  mir,  dass  er  ihn  sogleich  nach 
seiner  Ankunft  besuchte.    Er  war  nicht  zu  Hause. 


9.  INVERTED    AND 

I.  If,  in  a  German  sentence,  some  other  word  than  the  subjeci 
the  sentence   is   not  interrogative   (see   Interrogative  Sentences, 

After  that,  you  can  bring  us  a  mutton-chop  = 
First,  I  should  Hke  to  see  my  friend  = 

Of  course,  when  the  verb,  in  any  of  these  inverted  sentences, 

After  that,  he  brought  me  a  mutton-chop. 
First,  1  should  have  liked  to  see  my  friend. 

II.  This  placing  of  another  word  than  the  subject  at  the 
sizing  that  other  word.    Ex. :    He  is  building  a  house  =  Er  baut 

Bat :  He  is  building  a  house  = 

Likewise:  At  last,  we  are  on  our  way  to  the  hotels 

Exceptions  :  Note,  however,  that  if  one  of  the  conjunctions, 
is  present,  the  clause  is  not  inverted.     Thus: 

But,  they  are  not  yet  quite  ready  = 

III.  When  a  dependent  clause  precedes,  instead  of  following, 
subject  of  the  principal  clause  comes  after  the  verb  instead  of 

Til  go  with  you,  if  you  coine  = 
If  you  come,  Fll  go  with  you  — 


NOTES. 

*  Likewise:  For  he  has  built  a  house  =  denn  er  hat  ein  Haus 
gebaut  [not,  Hater);  and:  You  are  ri<;ht,  hut  I  did  not  want  to  sec 
him  =  Sie  haben  recht,  allein  ich  tviinschte  ihn  nicht  zu  sehen. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


85 


Tsoo-arst'  muc7i'-te  ich 
mi'-nen  fro-int  valt'-sTitin 
toe-zoo'-AjTi'nT 

Ar  ist  nicTit  tsoo  ha-oo'-ze. 

Vas  za'-g'n  ze? 

Her  Bel  shrep  mer,  das 
ar  en  zo-glic7i'  nakh  zi'-n'r 
an'-koonft'  he-z6okh'-te. 


I  should  like  first  to  call  on 
my  friend  VValdstein.i 

He  is  not  at  home. 

What  do  you  say? 

Mr.  Bell  wrote  me  that  he 
•called  on  him  as  soon  as  he 
arrived.^  He  was  not  at  home. 


EMPHATIC    FORMS. 

begins  the  clause,  the  subject  is  placed  after  the  verb,  even  if 
page  37).     Ex. : 

Danach  konnen  Sie  uns  ein  Hammelkotelett  bringen. 
Zuerst  mochte  ich  meinen  Freund  besuchen. 

is  in  a  compound  tense  the  subject  is  placed  after  the  mixiliary  : 

Danach  hat  er  mir  ein  Hammelkotelett  gehracht, 
Zuerst  hdtte  ich  gern  meinen  Freund  hesucht, 

beginning  of  a  sentence  is  often  done  for  the  purpose  of  empha- 
ein  Haus. 

Ein  Haus  baut  er, 

Endlich  sind  wir  auf  dem  Weg  zum  Hotel. 

und,  aber,  oder,  denn,  allein  {but),  and  sondern  (biit),f 

Aher  sie  sind  noch  nicht  ganz  fertig  {not,  sind  sie,  etc.).^ 

a  principal  clause,  the  *  inverted  order '  also  occurs ;  that  is,  the 
heforr.     Ex. : 

Ich  werde  mit  Ihnen  gehen,  wenn  Sie  kommen.  —  JBut : 
Wenn  Sie  kommen,  werde  ich  mit  Ihnen  gehen. 


NOTES. 

1  First,  would  I  my  friend  Waldstein  visit. 

2  Wrote  to-nie  that  l»e  liim  immediately  after  his  arrival  visited. 

f  For  the  difference  between  aber,  allein,  and  sondern,  see  p.  532. 


86  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

I<>.  Wie  sclimeckeii  Ihiien  cliose  Austern? 

Icli  meine,  sie  sind  ausgezeicliiiet. 

Herrn  Werner  scheinen  sie  iiicht  zu  schmecken.^ 

Im  Gegenteil.     Sie  sind  mir  gerade  recht. 

AVie  schmeckt  Frau  Walther  das  Beefsteak? 

Ich  finde  es  nicht  genug  durchgebraten. 

Der    Kellner    kann   es   ein    wenig    mehr    braten 

lassen. 
Nein,  danke  schon.      Es  ist  nicht  der  Miihe  wert. 


11.  Wariim  triiikeii  Sie  Ihren  Kaffee  nicht? 

Er^  ist  zu  warm.     Ich  trinke  niemals  KafFee,  wenn 

er  so  heiss  ist. 
Fraulein,  Sie  essen  ja  gar  nicht. 

Ich  bitte  sehr,  ich  habe  ganz  tiichtig  gegessen. 

Was  fehlt  Ihnen? 

Ich  befinde  mich  nicht  wohl. 

Ermiidet  von  der  Reise,  wahrscheinlich. 


NOTES. 

I  Wie  schmecken  Ihnen?  Lit.:  How  taste  to-you?  Anglice: 
How  do  yon  like?  When  to  like  refers  to  eatables  it  is  usually  given  by 
schmecken  or  gern  essen.  Tlius:  Wie  sclimecken  Ihnen  diese 
Austern?  or,  Essen  Sie  diese  Austern  gern?  Lit.:  Eat  ye  these 
oysters  willingly? —  ^  Er,  lit.:  he,  is  used  here  because  it  refers  to 
der  Kaflfee,  which  is  a  masculine  noun. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


87 


lO.    Ve   slini6Mt'n    e^-iien 
de-ze  a-ob^-st'ru  ? 

Ich  mi'^e  ze  zint  a-o6s'- 
ge-tsic7i'-net. 

Hern  Ver'-n'r  shi-nen  ze 
nicZit  tsoo  slime'-k'n. 

im  ga'-g'n-til'.  Ze  zint 
mer  ge-ra'-de  rec/it'. 

Ve  slimekt  fra-oo  Val'-t'r 
das  bef '-stak  ? 

Ich  fin '-de  es  rn.cht  ge- 
noocTi'  dobrc/i'-ge-bra'-t'n. 

Dar  kel'-n'r  kan  es  in 
va'-nic7i  mar  ko'-cTi'n. 

Nin,  dan'-ke  stitin.  Es  ist 
nicTit  dar  mii'-e  vart'. 


HoAV    do    you    like   these 
oysters  ?  ^ 

I  think  2  they  are  excellent. 

Mr.  Werner  does  not  seem  to 

like  them.* 
On  the  contrary,  they  just  suit 

me.* 
How  does   Mrs.   Walther  like 

the  beefsteak?^ 
I  find  it  a  little  rare.® 

The  waiter  can  have  it  broiled 
a  little  more. 

No,  thank  you.    It  is  not  worth 
while.' 


11.  Va-rdbni  trifi^-k'n   ze 
e^-r'n  ka^-fa  wlcht? 

Ar  ist  tsoo  varm. 

Fro-i'-lin,  ze  e'-s'n  ya  gar 
nicTitT 

Ich  bi'-te  zar,  Ich  ha'-be 
gants  tilch'-tich  ge-ge'-s'n. 

Vas  fait'  e'-nen? 

Ich  be-fin'-de  mich  nicht 
vol'. 

Er-mii'-det  fon  d'r  ri'-ze, 
var'-shin'-lic/i. 


Why   do    you    not    drink 
your  coifee? 

It  is  too  warm.     I  never  drink 
cofl'ee  when  it  is  hot. 

Miss,  you  are  not  eating.^ 

I  beg  your  pardon,  I  have  eaten 

quite  heartily. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 
I  don't  feel  well. 

The  fatigue  of  the  trip,  I  sup- 
pose.* 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

How  taste  to-you  these  oysters.  —  2  Strictly  :  I  mean. 

To  Mr.  Werner  seem  they  not  to  taste. 

In-the  contrary,  they  are  to-nie  just  riglit. 

How  tastes  to-Mrs.  Walther  tlie  beefsteak. 

Not  enouj^h  tlirongh-roasted.  —  ?  The  trouble. 

You  eat  indeed  not  at  all.  —  ^  Tired  from  the  trip,  probably. 


88 


DIE    ANKUNFT. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


I.  —  Das   Friihstuck, 


Das  erste  Friihstiick  (ar'-ste  fru'-sTitwk'), 
Das  zweite  Friihstiick  (tsvi'-te— ), 

Das  Brot  (brot), 

Der  Kaftee  (ka'-fa), 

Die  Chocolade  (sh.6-k6-la'-de), 

Ein  Beefsteak  (bef'-stak),  m., 

Gut  durchgebraten,  (d.(3brc7i'-ge-bra'-t'n), 

Nicht  gaiiz  durchgebraten, 

Das  Kotelett  (ko-t'-lef), 

Mit  Kartoffehi  (kar-to'-f'ln), 

Der  Pfeffer  (pfe'-fr), 

Das  Salz  (zalts), 

Hunger  haben  (li(56fi'-'r),    'I 

Hungrig  sein  (hoon'-ricTi),  J 

Durst  haben  (dc56rst),  1 

Durstig  sein  (dd6rs'-tic7t),  J 

Haben  Sie  Hunger  ?  1 

Sind  Sie  hungrig?      / 

Ich  bin  hungrig,^ 

Ich  bin  durstig,^ 

Ich  bin  nicht  durstig, 


(Early)  breakfast. 
(Second)  breakfast, 
{about  11  o'clock). 
The  bread. 
The  coffee. 
The  chocolate. 
A  beefsteak. 
Well  done. 
Medium  done. 
The  chop. 
With  potatoes. 
The  pepper. 
The  salt. 

To  be  hungry. 
To  be  thirsty. 

Are  you  hungry  ? 

I  am  hungry. 
I  am  thirsty. 
I  am  not  thirsty. 


1  Or,  Ich  habe  Hunger.—  2  Or,  Ich  habe  Durst. 


THE    ARRIVAL. 


89 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


II.  — Die   Geschirre.* 


Der  Teller  (tel'-'r), 

Das  Tellerchen  {te'-l'T-ch'n), 

Die  Untertasse  (oon'-t'r-ta'-se), 

Das  Salznapfchen  (zalts'-nepf -cTi'n), 

Die  Essigflasche  (e'-sic7i-fla'-slie), 

Der  Loffel  (lu'-f  1), 

Eiii  Theeloffel  (ta— ),  m., 

Ein  Suppenloffel,  m., 

Eii)  Loffel  voll,  (fol), 

Die  Gabel  (ga'-b'l), 

Das  Messer  (me'-s'r), 

Das  Couvert  (kd6-vert'),^ 

Die  Serviette  (zer-vye'-te), 

Das  Tischtuch  (tistL'-tooTijTi'). 

Die  Suppenschiissel, 

Der  Korkzieher  (kork'-tse'-er), 

Die  Ziickerschale  (tsd6'-k'r-slia'-le), 

Die  Pfefferbuchse  (pfe'-f  r-bwk'-se), 

Die  Olflasche  (<il'-fla'-slie), 

Das  Essig  iind  01  Service  (zer-ves'), 

Das  Eierbecher  (i'-er-be'-c>i  r), 

Der  Zahnstocher  (tsan'-siito' -kh^v), 


A  plate. 
A  dish. 
A  saucer. 
A  salt-cellar. 
The  vinegar-cruet. 
The  spoon. 
A  tea-spoon. 
A  large  spoon. 
A  spoonful. 
The  fork. 
The  knife. 
The  cover. 
The  napkin. 
The  table-cloth. 
The  soup-tureen. 
The  corkscrew. 
The  sugar-bowl. 
The  pepper-box. 
The  oil-cruet. 
The  (set  of)  casters. 
The  egg-cup. 
The  tooth-pick. 


1  Or,  das  Gedeck  (gS-dgk').  —  *  GS-shi'-re,  dishes. 


90 


DIE    ANKUNFT. 
III. 


In  dei*  Stadt  (sM^t),  In  town. 

Aiisi<erhalb  (a-oo'-s'r-lialp)  der  Stadt,  Out  of  town. 

Wo?  ^  Where? 

Boi  iriir,  At  my  house. 

Bei  iiieineni  Freunde,  At  my  friend's. 


IV. 


Die  Jahreszeiten  (ya^-r6s-tsi'-t*n).  The  seasons. 


Iin  ^  ooninior''*  (z5'-m'r), 
Iin  Herbst  (tierpst), 
Im  Winter  (vin'-t'r), 
Iin  Fruhliiig  (fru'-lin), 
Nachsten  Herbst,  Winter,  etc., 
Letzten  Herbst,  Winter,  etc.. 


In  summer. 

In  fall. 

In  winter. 

In  spring. 

Next  fall,  winter,  etc. 

Last  fall,  winter,  etc. 


V.  —  Expressions  with  Schmerzen,  etc 

Ich  babe  Kopfschmerzen  (kopf- 

slmaer'-ts'ii), 
Ich  habe  Zahnschmerzen  (tsan'— ), 

"      "     Halsschmerzen  (hals' — ), 
Er  hat  Ohrenschmerzen  (o'-r'n — ), 

"      "   Leibschmerzen  (lip' — ), 
Ihm  ist  iibel  (em  ist  iA'-b'l),^ 
Haben  Sie  einen  bosen  Arm  ?  * 
Thuen  Ihnen  die  Fiisse  weh  ?  * 


I  have  the  headache. 
"     *'       "    toothache. 
"     "      a  sore  throat. 
He  has  earache. 
"      "    stomach-ache. 
He  feels  sick. 
Is  your  arm  sore  ? 
Do  your  feet  hurt  you  ? 


1  Lit. :  in  the.    Im  is  a  contraction  of  in  and  dem. 

2  Notice  that  in  German  tlie  article  is  always  nsed  with  the  names 
of  seasons.     Summer,  in  Stimmer  =  Der  Sommer,  im  Sommer,  etc. 

'  To-him  is  ill  (  i.  e.,  illness).  —  ^  Have  you  a  sore  arm? 

*  Make  to-you  the  feet  pain  ?  Notice  that  with  parts  of  the  body  the 
article  is  often  used  instead  of  tlie  possessive  adjective.  Thus  :  3fy  ann 
hurts  me  =^  Mir  thut  der  Arm  well  (lit. :  to  me  makes  the  arm  pain). 


THE    ARRIVAL.  91 

To  he  studied  by  heart,  in  preparation  for  reciting  in  class.     (For 
Self -Study,  see  Directions  before  Part  I.) 

CONVERSATIONS. 

l.—DIE  SPEISEKARTE. 

Kellner,  konnen  wir  ein  Privatzimmer^  bekommen? 

—  Ja,  mein  Herr,  wolleii  Sie  gefalligst  in  die  erste  Etage 
hinaufgehen.2  —  Bringen  Sie  uns  die  Speisekarte.  — 
Hier  ist  sie,  mein  Herr.  —  Welche  Suppe  ^  wollen 
Sie  nehmen,  Herr  Werner  ?  —  Ich  nehme  keine  Suppe. 

—  Bringen  Sie  uns  drei  *  Tassen  Kaffee,  Brotchen, 
gerostetes  Brot^  und  Spiegeleier.  —  Bringen  Sie  uns 
audi  eine  Flasche  Tischwein^  und  eine  Sodawasser. 

2.-5TCff    WOHLBEFINDEN.* 

Wie  befinden  Sie  sich  heute  morgen?  —  Recht  gut/ 
danke  schon ;  und  Sie  selbst?  —  Ich  befinde  mich  so 
so^  seit  einigen  Tagen.^  Wie  geht  es  Ihrer  Frau 
Schwagerin?^^ — Es  geht  ihr  ausgezeichnet,  wie  immer.^^ 


Pronunciation  and   Translations. 

1  Pri-vat'-tsi'-m'r,  private  room. —  2  fn  de  Srs'-te  a-ta'-zhe  hi- 
na-6of'-ga'-'n,  go  uj)  to  the  second  floor.  In  Germany  the  first  floor 
is  called  Parterre,  par-ter',  and  the  second  floor,  die  erste  (lit. :  the 
first)  Etage,  or,  der  erste  Stock  (m.).  —  3  VeF-cJie  zoo'-pe,  what  soup. 

*  Dri,  three.—  5  Gg-rus'-te-tgs  brot,  toast.—  6  Tish'-vln'. 

7  Pretty  well.—  8  I  am  so  so.  —  ^  Zit  I'-ni-g'n  ta'-g'n,  since 
several  days.—  w  Ve  gat  gs  e'-rer  fra-00  shva'-ge-rin ?  how  is 
your  sister-in-law  ?—  n  A-oos'-ge-tsic/t'-net ;  — excellent  as  always. 

*  ZicJi  vol  be-fin'-d'n,  to  be  well.     Lit. :  To  find  one's  self  well. 


92  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

S.—NICHT   WOHL   AUSSEHEN* 

Wie  leidend^  Sie  doch^  aussehen!  —  In  der  That, 
mail  sagt  mir,^  dass  ich  seit  einigen  Tagen  nicht 
wohl  aussehe.  —  Was  fehlt  Ihnen  denn?*  —  Ich  habe 
Magenschmerzen  und  leide  an  Schlaflosigkeit.^ 

Ihr  Herr  Bruder  hinkt,  wie  mir  scheint.^  Was 
hat  er  denn?^  —  Er  hat  Fusschmerzen.^  Die  neuen 
Schuhe  driicken^  ihn. 

Friert^^  Ihre  Freundin  nicht?  Sie  zittert/^  wie 
mir  scheint.  —  Warten  Sie,  ich  will  sie  fragen.  — 
Frieren  Sie,  mein  Fraulein?  —  Nein,  ich  friere  nicht. 
Ich  weiss  nicht,  warum  ich  zittere.  —  Haben  Sie  nicht 
etwas  Fieber?^^  —  Das  kann  sein. 


Kote.  —  Study  the   Subjunctive,  etc.,  of  the  Weak 
Conjugation,  page  509. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Li'-dent,  suffering. 

2  To  be  sure.     Lit, :  yet. 

8  In  d'r  tat',  indeed  I  am  told. 

*  Lit. :  then;  not  to  be  translated  into  English. 

6  I  am  suffering  from  sleeplessness  (shlaf  15  -zic/i-kit). 
«  HiSkt,  is  limping  as  it  {to-me)  seems. 

"i  DSn.    Denn  (lit. :   then)  makes  the  question  more  urgent  and 
shows  more  interest  on  the  part  of  the  person  speaking. 
8  Pains  in  the  foot.  —  •  Drii'-k'n,  pinch. 

10  prert.    Is  not  your  friend  cold  ?  Lit, :  Feels-not-cold  your  friend, 

11  Tsi'-t'rt,  is  trembling.  —  12  Et'-vas  f e'-b'r,  some  fever. 

*  Niclit  vol  a-oos'-za'-'n,  lit. :  not  well  to  look. 


THE    ARKIVAL.  93 

To  he  translated  and  written  into  German;  hat  also  to  he  treated 

conversationally  in  the  class-room.     {For  Self-Study,  see 

Directions  he/ore  Bart  I.) 

EXERCISES. 

l.-THE   ORDER.* 

Waiter,  bring  us  two  plates  and  a  knife.  —  Here 
they  are/  sir !  —  What  will  you  have,  my  dear  lellow  ?  ^ 
I'll  take  a  beefsteak  with  potatoes.^  —  Waiter,  bring  us 
a  beefsteak  with  potatoes,  a  plain  chop,  a  cup  of  coffee 
(with  milk),*  a  cup  of  chocolate  with  bread  and  butter.^ 

2.  — AT    THE    TABLE. i 

Will  you  please  pass  me  the  knife  ?  ^  I  want  to  cut 
some  bread  J  —  Here  it  is.  —  Thank  you.  —  What  is 
the  matter  with  you?  You  do  not  eat.  —  I  am  not 
hungry  this  morning.^  I  have  a  headache  and  a  sore 
throat.  —  You  have  a  cold.^  —  Yes,  I  think  so.^^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 

1  Here  are  they. 

2  Mein  lieber  Preund. 

^  I  will  a  beefsteak  with  potatoes  take. 

4  Eine  Tasse  Kaffee.    In  Germany  coffee  need  not  be  ordered  with 
milk,  as  milk  is  always  brought  with  it. 

5  Butter,  boo'-t'r. 

6  Please,  will  you  to-me  the  knife  pass  (reichen,  rV-ch*n), 
^  I  will  (etwas)  bread  cut. 

8  I  am  to-day  morning  (See  p.  63)  not  hungry. 

9  Lit. :  You  have  yourself  (sicli)  got-cold  (erkaltet). 
10  Yes,  I  believe  (glaube,  g\a-oo'-be). 

*  Die  Bestellung,  be-s /ttg'-loon. 
1  Bel  Tisch,  bi  tisli'. 


94  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

3.— A    STROLL.* 

At  what  time  are  you  going  to  have  dinner  ?  ^  —  I'll 
take  dinner  at  one.^ — All  right;  I  can  take  mine  at 
one.^  —  Meanwhile,*  I  shall  go  and  call  upon  Mr. 
Rossler.*  —  After  that^  I  want  to  go  to  my  hatter's  ^ 
and  buy  a  summer  hat.^  —  Then  I  shall  take  '^  a  stroll 
in  the  Palais  Garden.^ — Well,  then,  we'll  meet  again 
at  one  here?^  —  Yes.  —  All  right;  good-by.^^  —  Good- 
by.io 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Um  welche  Zeit  (oom  \eV-che  tsit)  gehen  Sie  zum  Mittag- 
esseu  (mi'-tafc/t-e'-s'n)?     Lit.  :  at  which  time  go  you  to-the  dinner? 

2  Lit. :  I  will  at  one  (um  eins)  to  noon  eat  (zu  Mittag  essen). 
8  Lit. :  well ;  I  can  mine  (meines)  also  at  one  take  (nehmen). 

4  Meanwhile  (einstweilen,  inst'-vi'-Pn)  will  I  go  and  Mr.  Rossler 
visit. 

6  After  that  (danach)  must  I  to  my  hatter's  (zu  meinem  Hut- 
macher,  hoot'-ma'-ifc/i-'r)  go. 

6  Lit. :  and  a  summer  hat  (Sommerhut,  zo'-m'r-hoot),  buy. 

7  Lit. :  then  shall  I  (werde  ich). 

8  A  stroll  in  the  Palais  Garden  (in  dem  Palaisgarten,  pa-lS,'- 
gar'-t'n)  make. 

s  Lit.  :  well,  then,  will  we  (us)  at  one  here  again  meet  (treffen)? 
10  Adieu!  a-di-u\    This  is  really  the  French  word,  Adieu. 
*  Ein  Spaziergaug)  s/ipa-tser'-gaS', 


V 
\ 


THE    ARRIVAL.  95 

PRONTTNCIATION    OF   ItEADING    ON   FAGES  96-08. 

B6r-len^  —  Shlos  obnt  Moo-za^-dbm.    Pa-ld^  d6s  aF- 
t'n  Ki^-z'rs  ViF-helm. 

Goo'-t'n  mor'-g'n,  le-b'r  fro-int',  ve  lia'-b'n  ze  de  ars'- 
te  nakht  in  ber-len'  ge-sh.la'-f'n  ? 

Dan'-ke,  zar  goof. 

Dan  vo'-l'n  ver  glicTi  iia.kh  dam  fru'-sTitwk'  a-oof'-bre'- 
ch'n  obnt  i-ne  pro-me-na'-de  n'akh  dam  kt3.'-nic7i-li-c7i'n 
shlos  obnt  dam  al'-t'n  mob-za'-obm  ma'-7i;7i'n. 

O,  ya',  da'-mit  bin  ich  vol'-shten'-dich  in'-fer-sTitan'- 
d'n 

Za'-'n  ze,  des  ist  das  k-Q'-nicTi-li-cTte  sblbs.  De  bi'- 
d'n  grbs'-ar'-ti-g'n  grbb'-p'n,  veV-che  dan  in'-gan'  tsbb 
dam  shlos  tse'-r'n,  zint  de  be-riim'-t'n  ro'-se-ben'-di-g'r, 
vel'-cTie  in  pa'-t'rs-bbbrcTi  ge-gb'-s'n  obnt  dam  kta'-nicTi 
tre'-drich  vil'-belm  dam  fer'-t'n  fom  ki'-z'r  ni'-ko-la-obs 
fon  rbbs'-lant'  tsbbm  ge-sbenk'  ge-makhV  vdbr'-d'n.  Ver 
ver-d'n  s7ip§.'-t'r  in  das  sblos  gii'-'n  obnt  de  tsi'-m'r  an  - 
za'-'n.  Ze  zint  pvech'-tich,  be-z6n'-ders  dar  vi'-ie  zal' 
obnt  das  trbn'-tsi'-m'r.  A'-b'r  tsob'-arst'  mw'-s'n  ver 
nakJi  dam  al'-t'n  mob-za'-bbm  ga'-'n. 

Yst  de'-zes  nicTit  das  sblos  in  vel'-cTi'm  frli'-'r  de  vi'-se 
fra-bb'  bbm'-gin'? 

Ya  vol !  De  vi'-se  fra-bb  be-zdbA:7i'-te  das  shlos  ya'-des 
mal'  ven   in   k-Q.'-nic7i   a-bbs    dar    fa-me'-li-e    dar  hb'-'n- 

tso'-l'rn  s7iter'-b'n  z61'-te A'-b'r  yetst  mu'-s'n  ver 

i'-l'n. 

1st  das  mbb-za'-bbm  vit'  fon  her? 

Gar'  nicTit.  Za'-'n  ze  es  nicTtt  ge-ra'-de  ga'-g'n-u'-b'r? 
....  Za'-'n  ze,  her  zint'  ver  shbn.  Ver  ha'-b'n  ki'-ne 
tsit  bbm  de'-ze  bbn'-er-mes'-licTi  grb'-se  va'-ze  tsbb  be- 
za'-'n 


96  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

To  be  read  by  means  of  the  translation  opposite,  in  preparation 

for  reading  aloud  and   translating  in  class.     For 

pronunciation,  see  page  95. 

^aXa'x^  t>e^  alien  ^aiScx^  ^i(^elm« 

—  ©iiteu  9}?orgen,  Ueber  greunb,  tt)ie  ^abeu  ©ie  bie 
erfte  '^\a6:)i  \\\  Berlin  gefd)lafen? 

—  2)an!c,  fef)r  gut. 

—  ^aim  motlen  mir  gleid)  nad^  bem  5^u(;ftu(f  auf6red)en 
unb  eiue  ^roineuabe  nad)  bem  fom9Hd)en  6d)lofe  unb  bem 
alteu  3}hifeLim  mad;en. 

—  D,  ja,  bamit  bin  ic^  t)ol(ftanbig  eint)erftanben 

—  (Se^en  ©ie,  bie^  ift  ba^  fdnigUc^e  ©djlofe.  2)ie  beiben 
gro^artigen  @ru)3))en,  ujeld^e  ben  ^ingang  511  bem  ©d)(o6 
§ieren,  finb  bie  beriU;mten  9f?offebanbiger,  \m\d)z  m  ^eter^= 
burg  gegoffen  unb  bem  ^onig  griebrirf)  3Si(be(m  IV.  Dom 
^aifer  9Uco(au^  \:)m  Sf^ufelanb  pm  @efd)en!  gemadjt  tt)urben. 
2Bir  tuerben  f^ater  in  ^a^  ©rf)(ofe  get)en  unb  bie  3^'^^^"^^ 
anfe(;en.  6ie  finb  ^rcid^tig,  befonber^  ber  tDeifee  ©aal 
unb  "iiCi^  Xfjronjimmer.  Slber  ^uerft  miiffen  \v\x  nad)  bem 
alten  3}^ufeum  ge^en. 

—  3ft  biefe§  ni(f)t  bag  ©c^Iofe,  in  it)e(d)em  frii^er  bie 
„  SBeifee  grau  "  umging  ?  ^ 

—  3a  mi)l  ^ie  „  3Seifee  g^rau ''  befuc^te  ba§  <Sc^Io6 
jebe^maf,  menu  ein  ^onig  au§  ber  g^amilie  ber  ^o^en^oUern 
fterben  follte SIber  jetjt  miiffen  mir  eiten. 

—  3ft  bag  3Jiufeum  tt)eit  i^on  ^ier? 


1  Lit. :  went-about,  from  umgehen,  to  go-about. 


DIE    ANKUNFT.  97 

For  Self-Study,  the  German  text  should  be  read  by  means  of  the 

literal  translation  until  thoroughly  mastered,  then 

read  aloud  in  German. 

READING. 

BERLIN.  —THE     *  CASTLE '.*  — THE     MUSEUM,  t- 
THE    PALACE  OF  THE  OLD  EMPEROR  WILLIAM. 

—  Good  morning,  dear  friend,  how  have  you  the 
first  night  in  Berlin  slept? 

—  Thank-you,  very  good. 

— Then  will  we  at-once  after  the  breakfast  start  and 
a  walk  to  the  royal  '  castle '  and  to-the  old  museum 
make. 

^— Oh,  yes,  therewith  am  I  fully  agreed 

—  See  {ye),  this  is  the  royal  'castle'.  The  two  very- 
fine  groups  which  the  entrance  to  the  castle  adorn 
are  the  celebrated  horses-(and)-tamers,  which  in  Peters- 
burg cast,  and  to-the  King  Frederick  William  IV.  by- 
the  Czar  Nicholas  of  Russia  \o-tlie  present  made  were. 
We  will  later  in  the  'castle'  go  and  the  rooms  look- 
at.  They  are  magnificent,  especially  the  White  Hall 
and  the  thrcne-room.  But  first  must  we  to  the  old 
museum  go. 

—  Is  this  not  the  '  castle '  (m)  which  formerly  the 
White  Lady  haunted  ?  ^ 

—  Yes,  indeed.  The  White  Lady  visited  the  '  castle ' 
every  time  when  a  king  {out)  of-the  house  of-the  Hohen- 
zollern  to-die  was.^  ....  But  now  must  we  hasten. 

—  Is  the 


2  Lit.:  shoxdd,  or  was-to.—  *  Or,  Palace.—  t  Or,  picture-gallery. 


98  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

—  (5$ar  nidjt.  (SeE)en  (3ie  e^  nic^t  gerabe  gegeniiber  ?  .... 
Se^en  6ie,  ^ier  ftnb  tt)ir  fd)on.  2Bir  ^aben  feme  geit,  urn 
Diefe  imerme&Ud^  grofee  33afe  ^u  befe^en.  SSie  Sie  iDiffcn, 
ift  fie  au§  einem  ^(ocf  t)on  ©ranit  tjerfertigt.  Ibcr  (;icr 
ftet)en  it)ir  ttor  bem  alten  3Jlufeum.  (S§  ift  ein  pradjtigc^^ 
©ebciiibe,  md)t  twa^r?  ©§  ift  in  bem  reinften  gried;ifcben 
©tit  md)  bem  ^(an  i)on  ©ctjinfel  au^gefi'ibrt.^  Set^t  laffeu 
6ie  un§  biefe  fd)one  greitre^^e  t)inauf  get)en !  3d)  iuiinfd;te 
3(;nen  bie  berUt)mten  gre^fomalereien  ^  ber  ^^ort)alIe  be§  3}hi= 
feiimg  ^^u  ^eigen.  ©ie  finb  i)on  Sorneliu§  imb  feinen  6d)iilern 
nad)  (Bd)inM§>  (Sntn^iirfcn  gemalt.  ©ie  ftelleu^  befaimtUd;* 
bie  ©nttt)id(ung§gefd;id)te  Don  SBelt  unb  :^eben  bar.^ 

—  Saffen  ©ie  un§  t)ineinget)en ! 

—  §eute  i)ahtn  U)ir  feine  3^^^/  ^^^  S^nere  be§  9}?ufciim§ 
^^11  befudjen.  ©^  U)iirbe  un§  tDenigftenS  einen  (;alben  Tag 
foften.^  Saffen  ©ie  un§  iiber  bie  ©d^lof^bri'idc  ^  ^uriid 
get)en  unb  mt^  ber  ©tatue  griebrid)§  bc§  ©rofeeii  l">orbei 
bie  Siiibeii  t)inunter  fpa^ieren 

—  ^ier  finb  imx  tuieber  an  bem  ©tanbbitbe  5^iebrid)§ 
be!o  ©ro^en.  ^a§  ©ebdube,  ba»  ©ie  (infer  §anb  fet)en,  ift 
ber  ^salaft  beg  alten  <Raiferg. 

—  3Sie!  ^d)  gtaubte,  ta^  ber  alte  ^aifer  in  bem 
©d;(o^  rt)ot)nte. 

—  "HUm ;  ber  junge  ^aifer  *  woijnt  in  bem  ©cblo^,  aber 
ber  alte  Itaifer  t  tt)ot)nte  t)ier.  ®iefe§  erfte  J^enfter  ift  b.v?  - 
(;iftorifd)e  ©dfenfter,  an  bem  ber  alte  ^aifer  SBilbelm  jebcn 
Wiiiaa^  mit  feinem  )8oit  einen  ©rnfe  tDed)felte.  5J[bcr  n.ni 
miiffen  mir  bie  Sinben  l;inuntcr  gel;en  unb  bie  Sdben,  bio 
^otelg  unb  bie  2trtillerie=©d)ule  nal)e  bei  bem  ^ranben= 
burger  Xl)or  anfel)en. 


'   Lit. :  out- carried,  carried  (>nt. —  2  j^|t  •  frosco-paintings. 

3   I-'r  )in  darstellen,  to  represent,  a  'separable'  verb. 

*  Lit.:  kiioiviii'ilii. — 5  Lit.:  cos^ —  *  The  present  emperor. 


THE    AKRIVAL.  99 

—  Not  at-all.     See  ye  not  right  over-there See, 

here  are  we  already.  A¥e  have  no  time  this  enor- 
mously large  vase  to  look-at.  As  you  know,  is  itj 
out-of  one  block  of  granite  made.  But  here  stand  we 
before  the  old  gallery.  It  is  a  magnificent  building, 
is  it  not?  It  is  in  the  purest  Grecian  style,  according 
to-the  plan  of  Schinkel  executed.^  Now,  let  us  these 
fine,  broad-steps  up  go.  I  wished  to-you  the  celebrated 
frescos  2  of  the  portico  of-the  museum  to  show.  They 
are  by  Cornelius  and  his  pupils  after  Schinkel's  plans 
painted.  They  represent^,  as-you-know,^  the  history-of^ 
the-development  of  (the)  world  and  life. 

—  Let  us  in-go  ! 

—  To-day  have  we  no  time  the  interior  of  the 
museum  to  visit.  It  would  us  at-least  a  half  day 
take.^  Let  us  over  the  castle-bridge^  back-go,  and 
past  the  statue  of-Frederick  the  Great  down  the 
Linden  walk 

—  Here  are  we  again  at  the  statue  of  Frederick  the 
Great.  The  building  which  you  on-the-left-hand  see 
is  the  Palace  of-the  old  Kaiser. 

—  What !  I  thought  that  the  old  Kaiser  in  the 
*  castle'  lived. 

—  No.  The  young  Kaiser*  lives  in  the  'castle,^ 
but  the  old  Kaiser  t  lived  here.  This  first  window  is 
the  historical  corner-window,  at  which  the  old  Kaiser 
William  every  noon  with  his  people  a  greeting  ex- 
changed. But  now  must  we  the  Linden  down  go  and 
the  stores,  the  hotels,  and  the  artillery-school,  near 
by  the  Brandenburger  Gate  look-at. 


6  The  bridge  which  crosses  the  river,  and  thus  connects  the  "  castle" 
and  tlie  Unter  den  Linden.  —  "^  Lit. :  at  (an)  tlie  statue  of  Frederick  the 
Great  past  (vorbei).—  f  The  old  Emperor  William.  —  t  T^i*. :  She. 


100  DIE    ANKUNFT. 

These  letter  endings  should  be  learned  by  heart,  and  written  from 

!♦  — ^riefe  an  Srcunbe* 

1.  ©m^fangen  (5ie  'om  2lu§bru(f  freunbfc^aftUdier  ©e- 

finnung  Don 

3^rem    • 

^an§>  (5d)mitt. 

2.  ©m^fangen  ©ie  bie  ^erfic^erung  aufridjttger  greunb= 

fd^aft  'oon 

S^rem 

3.  (Sie  6eften0  griifeenb,^  t)erb(eibe  td^ 

gan^  ergebener 

4.  Mil  ^er^Ud^en  ©riifeen  t)erbleibe  id^ 

^ic^  (iebenbe  ©d)tt)efter. 
6.    3Jlit  bem  3Sunfd)e  auf^  red)t  balbige^^  ^Sicberfe^en 

2)ic^  innig  (iebenbe  3Jliitter. 


1  strictly  :  You  in-the-best-way  greeting. —  2  Strictly  :  On  right  soon. 
*  Lit.:  Letter  — oxc])ange.  — Also,  ©ricftuedjfcl. 


THE    ARRIVAL.  101 

memory,  either  in  class  or  at  home  some  hours  afterward. 

CORRESPONDENCE. 

1,— LETTERS   TO  FRIENDS. 


1.  Accept    the    expression    of    friendly    opinion  * 

from 

Your 

Hans  Schmitt. 

2.  Accept  (ye)  the  assurance  of-sincere  friendship 

from 

Your 

H.  S. 

3.  With  best  greetings,^  I  remain 

Your 

Quite  devoted 
H.  S. 

4.  With  affectionate  greetings,  I  remain 

Thy 

Thee  loving  sister. 

5.  With   the  wish    right    soon^    to-see-you    again, 

concludes 

Thy 

Thee  cordially  loving  mother. 


*  Literal  translations  of  letter  endings  are  here  given.    This  one 
answers  simply  to  :   Your  friend. 


ParI^  ii. 


HOTEL  AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


HOTEL  u:n^d  PE]srsio]sr^ 


SECTION     I. 


1. 

AT  THE  HOTEL. 

2. 

ROOMS,  MEALS,  etc. 

3. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  CASE. 

4. 

TOILET  ARTICLES,  FURNITURE. 

5. 

BATH-ROOM,  TOWELS,  SOAP,  etc. 

6. 

IN  THE  MORNING. 

7. 

TO  HAVE  A  ROOM  DONE. 

8. 

BERLIN :  OPERA  AND  THEATER. 

9. 

A  LETTER  FROM  BERLIN. 

103 


n* 


HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Man  hat  uiis  Zimmer  in  der  dritten  Etag^e  ^ 
g^egeben.  Aber  es  ist  ein  Fahrstuhl  da.  Und 
wo  logieren  Sie  ?  —  Wir  log^ieren  in  dein 
Entresol  ^  nnd  wir  haben  drei  Zimmer  niit 
Anssicht  auf  das  kaiserliche  Schloss. 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Ho-t6F  obnt  paii-zyon^.  —  Man  hat  CH>ns  tsi^'-in'r  in 
(lar  dri^-t'n  a-ta^-zh6  g6-g'a^-b'n.  A^-b'r  es  ist  in 
far^-sMool'  da.  OOnt  vo  lo-zhe^-r'n^  ze^?4— Ver  lo- 
zhe^-r'n  in  dam  ari-tr'-s61^  ^  obnt  ver  ha^-b'n  dri  tsi^- 
m'r  mit  a-dbs^-zicM'  a-obf  das  ki^-z6r-li-cM  shlos^. 


1  Also :  im  dritten  Stock  (s/»tok). 

2  The  German  word  is  Halbgeschoss,  but  is  rarely  used. 

8  Zh  denotes  the  soft  sound  of  s  in  the  English  word  pleasure. 
*  An  accent  on  a  word  of  one  syllable  means  that  the  word  must  be 
emphasized,  for  the  sake  of  clearness  or  euphony, 
5  The  It  <lenotes  the  hard  nasal  French  sound  of  an. 
104 


n. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 

They  have  given  us  rooms  on  the  third 
story.  But  there  is  an  elevator.  And  where 
are  you?  —  We  are  on  the  "entresol,"  and 
vre  have  three  rooms  facing  the  imperial 
palace. 

LITERAL   TRANSLATION. 

One^  has  to-iis  rooms  in-the  third  story  g-iven. 
But  it  is  an  elevator  there.  And  where  lodge  you? 
—  We  lodge  in-the  *  half-story'  and  we  have  three 
rooms  with  view  on  the  imperial  castle. 


1  Man  =  one,  people  (also  they,  and  even  we  and  you,  when  taken  in 
a  general  sense).  The  Germans  are  also  fond  of  using  man  with  the 
active  voice  instead  of  the  passive  voice  in  English,  especially  when 
referring  to  anything  habitual.  Thus  :  Man  sieht  viele  Amerikaner 
in  Deutschland  =  Many  Americans  are  seen  in  Germany  (lit.  :  One 
sees  many  Americans  in  Germany), 

105 


106  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 


I< 

GERMAN. 

1.  Mail  hat  uns  Zimmer  in  der  ersten  Etage 
gegehen. 

In  dem  Hotel,  in  welchem  wir  in  London  abge- 
stiegen  sind/  hat  man  uns  Zimmer  in  der  ersten 
Etage  gegeben.* 

Portier,  in  welcher  Etage  konnten  Sie  uns  logieren  ^ 

In  welcher   Etage  konnten  Sie  uns  vier  Zimmer 

geben  ? 
Das  kann  ich  Ihnen  wirklich  nicht  sagen. 

Ich  weiss  es  selbst  nicht. 
Ich  muss  den  Herrn  ^  rufen. 


2.  Guten  Tag,  mein  Herr.     Wiiiischten  Sie 
Zimmer  zu  mieten? 


NOTES. 

1  Wir  sind  abgestiegen.  Lit.  :  we  are  descended.  Intransitive 
verbs  (i.  e.,  verbs  whicb  do  not  take  any  object  in  the  accusative  case. 
see  p.  495)  when  expressing  motion  from  one  place  to  another,  are  conju- 
gated witli  the  auxiliary  sein,  to  be;  as,  Ich  bin  gegangen  =  /  have 
gone ;  Sind  Sie  gegangen  ?  =  Did  you  go  f  Er  ist  gef ahren  =  He 
has  driven.  Das  Kind  ist  aus  dem  Wagen  gef  alien  =  The  child  fell 
out  of  the  coach.     (See  }).  52,  note  1.) 

2  Herr  =  master,  the  usual  name  given  by  servants  to  their  employers. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


107 


I. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  Man  hat  obns  tsi^-m'r 
ill  dar  ar^-st'ii  a-ta^-zli6 
g'6-g'a^-b'ii. 

In    dam    iio-tel',    in    vel'- 


cTi'm  ver  in 
ge-s7ite'-g'n. 


Lon'-don    ap'- 


Por-tya',  in  vel'-ch.'r  a-ta'- 
zhe  kun'-t'n  ze  dons  lo-zlie'- 
r'n? 

Fer  tsi'-m'r  ga'-b'n  ? 

Das  kan  ich  e'-nen  virk'- 
lich  nicht  za'-g'n. 

Ich  vis  es  zelpst'  nicht. 

Ich  moos  dan  liern'  roo'- 
fn. 


2.  Goo^-t'n  tdkh''^  min  h6r^. 


Vunsli^-t*n    ze 
tsdb  me^-fn? 


tsi^-m'r 


They  have  g-iven  us  rooms 
on  the  first  story.^ 

At  the  hotel,  at  whicli  we  put 
up  in  London, 2  they  gave  us 
rooms  on  the  first  story. 

Porter,  on  what  story  could  you 
put  us?^ 

On  what  story  could  you  give 
us  four  rooms  ? 

I  really  cannot  tell  you.* 

I  myself  do  not  know.^ 

I  must  call  the  proprietor.^ 


Good   day,    sir.     Do   you 
want  to  take  rooms  V  ^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  In-the  first  story.  —  2>er,  dative  of  die,  governed  by  in, 

2  In  which  we  in  London  descended  are;  i.  e.,  have  got  down,  i.  e., 
out  of  the  carriage.  —  The  dative  Mvelchetn  is  governed  by  in. 

3  In    which    story    could    you   us   lodge.  —  The   (feminine)   dative, 
welcher,  is  governed  by  in.—  ^  That  can  I  to-you  really  not  say. 

5  I  know  it  (my)  self  not.  —  *  I  must  the  master  call. 
7  Zu  mieten,  to  hire,  to  rent.    Could  also  say,  nehmen,  nS'-m'n. 
Lit. :  to  take.  —  ••■  For  hat  man  instead  of  man  hat,  see  p.  84,  III. 


108  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Wie  viele  Zimmer  wiinschten^  Sie  zu  nehmen? 
Wir  mochten  vier  Zimmer  nehmen. 

Vier  Zimmer  mit  Betten  ?  * 

Nein.    Konnten^  Sie  uns  nicht  ein  Empfangszim- 

mer,  zwei  aneinanderstossende  Schlafzimmer  und 

ein  Boudoir  geben? 

Sehr  wohl,   mein   Herr,   das   konnte^  ich    Ihnen 

geben. 
Aber  das  Empfangszimmer  liegt  nach  dem  Hofe. 
Das  macht  nichts.     Or,  Das  thut  nichts. 


3,  Wo  konnten  Sie  uns  diese  Zimmer  geben? 

In  der  zweiten  Etage. 

Das  ist  zu  hoch. 

Meine  Frau  kann  nicht  so  hoch  hinaufsteigen. 

Konnten  Sie  uns  nicht  weiter  unten  Zimmer  geben? 

Ja  wohl,   mein   Herr.       Aber   ich   konnte   Ihnen 
nicht  mehr  als^  drei  Zimmer  geben. 

In  welcher  Etage? 


NOTES. 

1  Konnten,  Wunschten  and  Mochten,  imperfect  subjunctives 
(plural)  of  konnen,  wtinschen  and  mogen.  The  imperf.  subjunct.  of 
tliese  verbs  is  used  instead  of  the  present  indicative  (see  page  504),  whcn- 
evei-  it  is  desired  to  express  one's  self  more  politely  and  deferentially. 

2  Als  may  he  rendered  by  when,  ns,  or  than.  Ex. :  Als  ich  in  dem 
Wartesaal  war,  kam  er  =  When  I  was  in  the  waiting-room,,  he  came. 
Er  weiss  nicht  so  viel  als  du=  lie  doea  not  know  as  much  as  you  {do). 
Er  weiss  mehr  als  du  =  //e  knows  more  tJianyou  (do). 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


109 


Ve  fe'-le. 

Ver  mucTi'-t'n  fer. 

Mitbe'-t'n? 

In  em-pfafis'-tsi'-in'r,  tsvi 
an-i-nan'-d'r-s7ito'-s'n-de 
stilaf'-tsi-m'r  d6nt  in  bd6- 
doar'. 

Zar  vol'. 

LecTit  na.kh  dSLm  tio'-fe. 
Das  ma.kht^  nichts,  or  toot 
Yiichts. 


How  many  rooms  do  you 
want  to  take? 

"We  would  like  to  take  four 
rooms. 

Four  rooms,  with  beds  ?* 

No,  sir.  Could  you  not  give 
us  a  parlor  (or  reception- 
room),  two  bedrooms  adjoin- 
ing each  other, ^  and  a  dress- 
ing-room ? 

Yes,2  sir.  I  could  give  you 
that. 

But  the  parlor  is  in  the  back.* 
That  does  not  matter.* 


3.  Vo  kun''-t'n  ze  obns  de^'- 
z6  tsi^-m'r  gSi^-h'u. 

Tsvi'-t'n  a-ta'-ztie. 

Tsoo  loiokh. 

Mi'-ne  fra-o6  kan  nicht  zo 
liokh  h.i-na^d6f'-s7iti'-g'n. 

Vi'-t'r  don'-t'n  tsi'-m'r  gS'- 
b'n? 

Ya  vol',  min  lier.  A'-b'r 
nicht  mar'  als  dri'. 

In  veV-ch'T  a-ta'-zhe  ? 


Where  could  you  give  us 
these  rooms? 

On  the  second  story. 

It  is  too  high. 

My  wife   cannot  climb  up  so 

high. 
Could  you  not  give  us  rooms 

lower  (than  that)?^ 
Why,  certainly.    Only  •  I  could 

not  give  you  more  than  three 

rooms. 
On  what  story?' 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Two  at-one-another-joining  sleeping-rooms.  —2  Very  well.   See  p.  H4. 
8  Lies  towards  the  yard.     Dem  (lit. :  to-the),  dative  of  der,  gov- 
erned by  the  preposition  nach. 

4  That  makes  nothing,  or  does  nothing. 

5  Could  you  to-us  not  farther  below  rooms  give? 

6  Yes  well,  sir.     But 

^  In  which  story? 

*  Batten,  dative  plural  of  Belt,  governed  by  the  preposition  mit. 


110  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

In  der  ersten  Etage. 

Gut.     Dann    wollen    wir   uns    mit   drei   Zimmern 
^  begniigen.i 


4.  Wie  viel  werden  diese  Zimmer  kosteii? 

Fiinf  und  vierzig  Mark^  den  Tag,^  or  pro  Tag. 

Das  ist  sehr  teuer. 

Ich  kanii  Ihneii  billigere  Zimmer  geben. 
In  der  zweiten  Etage,  nicht  wahr? 
Nein,  mein  Herr.     In  der  Halbetage  (or,  Im  Zvvi- 
schenstock). 


5.  Zu  welchem  Preise? 

Dreissig  Mark  den  Tag. 

Und  die  Woche?     {Or,  Und  pro  Woche?) 

Lassen   Sie   uns   sehen.     Ich  wiirde  sie  Ihnen  fiir 

hundert   fiinf    und   siebzig    Mark    die    Woche  ^ 

lassen. 

Gut.      Ich    will    die     Zimmer   im   Zwischenstock 
nehmen. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Indicative  and  Conditional  of 


NOTES. 

1  Sich  begniigen,  to  be  satisfied,  is  a  reflexive  verb.    Ich  begniige 

mich  =  /  am  satisfied  (lit. :  /  content  myself),  etc.  —  See  page  84. 

2  Fiinf  und  vierzig  Mark  may  be  abreviatod  in  wiitiiitr,  to  45  3!. 
8  45  M.  den  Tag=45  marks  a  day.     Observe  tliat  in  rjcnnaii   tlic 

definite  article  is  used,  in  English  the  indefinite  article.     Tn  the  suuil 
way,  175  M.  die  Woche  =  175  marks  a  week  . 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


Ill 


In  d'r  ar'-st'n  a-ta'-zlie . 
Goot.     Dan  vo'-l'n    ver 
dons be-gnii'-g'n. 


4. »  Ve   fel   var^-d'n   de-z6 
tsr-m'r  kos^-t'n  ? 

Tiini^  dont  tiv'-tsich  mark 
dan  lakh.     Or,  pro  lakh. 
Das  ist  zar  to-i'-'r. 
E'-nen  bi'-li-ge-re. 
NicTit'  var? 

lialp'-a-ta'-zlie.      Or, 

tsvi'-sh'n-sTitok'. 


5.  Tsoo  Y^V-ch*m  pri''-z6? 

Dri'-sicTi  mark  dan  takh. 

CDOnt  de  ^b'-khel 

La'-s'n  ze  dons  za'-'n.  Ich 
■vuv'-de  ze  e'-nen  ftir  lidbn'- 
d'rt  fnnf  odnt  zep'-tsicTi 
mark  de  -vo'-khe  l^'-s'n. 


On  the  first  fioor.^ 
Well!     Then  we  will  do  with 
three  roonis.^ 


How   much   will   these 
rooms  cost? 

Forty-five  marks  a  day. 

That  is  very  dear. 
I  can  give  you  rooms  cheaper.^ 
On  the  second  floor,  is  it  not  ?  ^ 
No,  sir.     On  the  entresol.^ 


At  what  price  ?^ 

Thirty  marks  a  day. 
And  (how  much)  a  week  ?  ^ 
Let  us  see.     By   the   week,   I 
would  let  you  have  them  at 
one    hundred    and    seventy- 
five  marks,® 

Well !    I  '11  take  the  rooms  on 
the  entresol. 


Werden,  page  502. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Der  erstCM,  dative  {singular)  of  die  erste.  The  dative  is  governed 
here  by  the  prepos.  in.  —  2  Then  will  we  us  with  three  rooms  satisfy. 

3  Billig  (hV-lich),  cheap ;  billiger,  cheaper.  Nomi.  and  accu. : 
billigere.—  *  Not  true? —  5  Hall-floor,  or  between-story. 

6  At  whicli  price?—  7  And  the  week?—  8  I  would  them  to-you  for 
hundred  five  and  seventy  mark  the  week  let. 


112  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

6.    Wann    wunschen    die    Herrschaften  ^    zu 
speisen  ? 

Speisen  Sie  table  d'hote  oder  a  la  carte? 

Wir  speisen  table  d'hote. 

Um  wie  viel  Uhr  speisen  Sie? 

Das  erste  Friihstiick  von  sieben  bis  neun  Uhr. 

Das  zweite  Friihstiick  von  elf  bis  ein  Uhr. 

Um  sechs  Uhr  wird  das  Diner  serviert. 

Wie  viel  kostet  das? 

Zehn  Mark  die  Person. 

Aber  wir  haben  zwei  Kinder. 

Miissen  sie  so  viel  wie  Erwachsene  bezahlen? 

Nein,  Kinder  bezahlen  nur  die  Halfte. 

Schon.     Wir  wollen   um   sechs   Uhr  an  der  table 
d'hote  speisen. 


7.  THE    CASES 

In  German,  the  relation  of  words  is  often  expressed  by  an 
=  Der  Vater;  The  father  (as  the  direct  object  of  a  verb)  =  Dew. 

These   endings   (or   cases)  are   respectively   called:    The 
Genitive  (case  with  of),  and  the  dative  (case  with  to). 


NOTES. 

1  Die  Herrschaften,  instead  of  Sie.  The  direct  address  Sie  may 
occasionally  be  changed  to  an  indirect  address  by  using  some  title  or 
name  of  honor  instead.  As:  Wollen  Euere  Majestat  gnjidigst 
geruhen  (vo'-Pn  64'-'re  ma-ye-stat'  gna'-*iic/tst  ge-rob'-*n)  = 
M iif  if,  please  ynur  most  qraci<ni<i  innjrstif.  Darf  ich  (or,  more  poHtely 
still  :  dwrfte  ich)  die  Dameii  bitten  gefiilligst  hier  einzutreten 
—  May  I  beg  the  ladies  if-they-please  to-enter-here. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


113 


6.  Van  \uii^-sh*n  de  li6r^- 
shaf-t'n  tsdb  s/*pi^-z'ii? 

Tabl-dot'  o'-d'r  a  la  kart'  ? 

Ver  sTz-pi'-z'n. 
dbm  ve  fel  oor. 
Das  ar'-ste  frii'-sTitwk  von 
ze'-b'n  bis  no-in  oor. 
Von  elf  bis  in  oor. 

Virt  das  di-na  zer'-vert'. 

Tsan  mark'  de  per-zon'. 

Tsvi  kin'-d'r. 

Mw'-s'n    ze    z5    fel   ve    er- 
vak  -s'ne  be-tsa'-l'n  ? 

Noor  de  lielf  -te. 
Sli<in. 


When  do  you  want  to 
dine  ?  i 

Do  you  dine  at  the'^  table 
d'hote*  or  a  la  carte,-\  here? 

We  keep  a  table  dliote.^ 

What  are  the  hours  ?  * 

The  first  breakfast  from  seven 
till  nine  o'clock. 

The  second  breakfast  from 
eleven  till  one  o'clock. 

The  dinner  at  six.^ 

What  is  the  price  ?  ^ 

Ten  marks  a  person. 

But  we  have  two  children. 

Must    they  pay    as    much    as 

adults  ? 
No.    Children  pay   half  price 

only.' 
Well.    We  '11  dine  at  the  table 

d'hote  at  six  o'clock. 


IN    GERMAN. 

ending  instead  of  a  preposition.    Thus  :  The  father  {as  a  subject) 
Vater ;  Of  the  father  =  Des  Vaters ;  To  the  father  =  Dem  Vater. 

Nominative      {subject),  the  Accusative   {direct   object),     the 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  When  wish  the-ladies-and-gentlemen  to  dine? 

2  Dine  you  table  d'hdte,  etc.  —  »  We  dine  table  d'hdte. 

*  At  what  o'clock  dine  you? 

6  At  six  o'clock  becomes  the  dinner  served. 

6  How  much  costs  that? —  ''  Children  pay  only  the  half. 

*  French  expression.  —  f  French  expression.     Lit. :   at  (or  rathei^ 
hy)  the  card  {%.  e.,  the  menu  or  hill). 


114  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

The  Nominative*  is  used  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence  (or 

The  father  {subject)  calls  his  son 

The  son  {subject)  is  a  soldier  {predicate) 

The  Accusative^  is  used  as  the  direct  object  of  a  verb. 

The  father  calls  his  son  {direct  object) 
I  saw  the  gentleman  {direct  object) 

The  Genitive  (case  with  of;  as,  A  friend  of  tny  son,  Ein 
/  said  to  7ny  son,   Ich  sagte  TCi&mem  Sohne),  are  treated 

Note.  —  Observe  that  nouns  have  the  same  form  in  the  accusative 
called  weak  declension  (such  as  Herr),  which,  in  the  accusative, 
Herrw).  But  the  case  {nominative^  accusative,  or  otherwise)  is  usually 
noun.    Thus :  Nominative,  Der  Vater,  sein  Sohn  ;  Accusative,  Den  Vater 

PECULIAR    USES    OF    THE 

1.  Some  impersonal  verbs  govern   an  accusative  idio- 

Es  hungert  micJi  (hdon'-'rt) 
Es  durstet  7nich  (door'-stet) 
Es  friert  mich  (frerf) 

2.  A  few  transitive  verbs,  as  frozen,  to  ask;  lehren, 
two  accusatives,    Ex. : 

Ich  lehre  ihn  die  Musik  (moo-zek') 

3*  The  following  prepositions  govern  the  accusative ;  ^.  e., 

durch  {d66rch),  through,  by; 
fur  {filv),  for  ;  bis,  till,  until; 
gegen  (ga'-g'n),  towards,  to,  against; 


Examples 


Ich  sang  fiir  dew  Herrw- 
Wir  sassen  um  den  Tisch 


NOTES. 

*  The  nominative  (or  subject)  answers  to  the  question,  Who 
(wer)f  or  WfuU  {was)?  Ex.:  (1)  The  father  calls  his  son.  Question: 
Who  calls?  Answer:  The  father.  Father  is  the  nominative  {or  subject). 
(2)  The  sun  is  shining.  Question:  What  is  ski)  dug  f  Answer:  The  sun. 
Sun  is  the  nominative  (or  subject). 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  115 

as  a  predicate).     Examples : 

=  Der  Vater  ruft  seinen  Sohn.     (See  Note.) 
=  De/*  Sohn  (See  Note),  ist  tnein  JFreund, 

Examples : 

=  Der  Vater  ruft  seinen  Sohn,    (See  Note.) 
=  Ich  sail  den  Herin,     (See  Note.) 

Freund  meincs  Sohnes),  and  the  Dative  (case  with  to;  as, 
farther  on. 

as  in  the  nominative,  if  we  except  masculine  noutis  of  the  so- 

add  n  or  en  to  the  nominative  (Thus :  Nominative,  Herr ;  Accusative, 
shown  by  the  ending  of  the  article  or  adjective  accompanying  the 
seinen  Sohn. 

ACCUSATIVE    CASE. 

matically.    Examples : 

=  I  am  hungry  (Lit. :  it  hungers  me). 
=  I  am  thirsty  (Lit. :  it  thirsts  me). 
=  1  feel  cold  (Lit. :  it  freezes  me). 

to  teach;  heissen  and  nennen,  to  call,  name,  etc.,  govern 

=  T  teach  him  music. 

require  a  noun  after  them  to  be  in  the  accusative : 

ohne  (o'-ne),  without,  but  for. 
um  (oom),  about,  round,  at. 
wider  (ve'-d'r),  against. 

=  I  sang  for  the  gentleman. 
=  We  sat  around  the  table 


NOTES. 

t  The  accusative  (or  direct  object)  answers  to  the  question, 
Whom  {tven)  ?  or  What  (teas)  ?  Ex. :  (1)  The  fathei-  calls  his  son.  Ques- 
tion :  Whom  does  he  call  f  Answer :  His  son.  So7i  is  the  accusative  (or 
direct  object).  (2)  The  sun  warms  the  earth.  Question :  What  does  it 
warm?    Answer:    The  earth.     Earth  is  the  accusative  (or  dh-ect  object). 


116  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

4.  The    accusative    often    expresses    measure,    value. 

Das  kostet  einen  Thaler 
Warten  Sie  einew  Augenblick 

5.  The  accusative  is  also  used  to  express  the  time  when. 

6.  The  idiomatic  phrase,  Es  gieht,  there  is,  governs  the 

8,  Kellner,  haben  Sie  mein  Gepack  auf  mein 
Zimmer  tragen  lassen? 

Ja,  mein  Herr.     Ich  habe  es  vor  einem  Augen- 
blick liinauf  tragen  lassen. 
Sie  haben  diese  Reisetasche  vergessen. 

Welche  meinen  Sie? 

Die    kleine    dort.^     Warum    haben    Sie    sie   nicht 

hinauftragen  lassen  ? 
Ich  habe  sie  nicht  gesehen.    Sie  hatten  sie  hinter 

den  Tisch  gesetzt. 


Note.  — Study  the  Subjunctive,  etc.,  of 


9.    Warum    hat    uns    das    Zimmermadchen 
keine  Seife^  gebracht? 

Hat  sie  Ihnen  keine  Seife^  gebracht?^ 


NOTES. 

1  Lit. :  The  small  there ;  Anglice :  that  small  one.  The  word  one  or 
ones  as  used  in  English  after  adjectives  has  no  equivalent  in  German. 
My  little  ones  =  Meine  Kleinen.     Lit.  :  my  little. 

2  Keiue  Self e,  lit. :  no  soap  ;  Anglice :  not  any  soap.  The  Ger- 
mans do  not  say  literally  not  a,  not  any,  hut  only  no  (kein,  keine, 
keines,  lit.  :  no-one).  Thus  :  /  have  not  any  bread,  is  rendered  by: 
I  have  no  bread,  Ich  habe  kein  Brod. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


117 


length  of  timef  or  weight.     Examples : 

=  That  costs  one  dollar. 
=  Wait  a  moment.^ 

Thus :  Jeden  Abend  =  every  evening. 

accusative  case.    Ex.:  Es  giebt  einen  Gott=: There  is  a  God. 


8.  Kel^-ner,  ha^-b'n  ze 
mill  ge-pek^  a-dbf  iiiin 
tsi^-m'r  tra^-gr'ir  la^-s'ii  ? 

For  i'-nem  a-o6'-g'n-blik' 
lii-na-oof.  ^ 

De'-ze  ri'-ze-ta'  -sh.e  fer-ge'- 
s'n. 

Vel'-che  mi'-nen  ze? 

De  kli'-ne  dort.  Va-room' 
lia'-b'n  ze  ze  nicht. 

Ze  h.a'-t'n  ze  hin'-t'r  dan 
tish.'  ge-zetst'. 


Waiter,  have  you  had  my 
haggage  taken  up  to  my 
room  ?  ^ 

Yes,  sir.  I  have  had  it  taken 
up  a  moment  ago.^ 

You  forgot  this  carpet-bag.* 

Which  do  you  mean  ?  ^ 
That  small  one.®    Why  didn't 
you  have  it  carried  up  ? 

I  did  n't  see  it.'  You  had  put 
it  behind  the  desk. 


Haben  and  Sein,  page  499. 


9.  Va-r()()m''  hat  dons  das 
tsi^-m'r-mdt'-cT^'n  ki^-n6 
zV-fib  ge-hr^khV? 


Why  did  n't  the  chamber- 
maid bring-  us  soap?^ 

Didn't  she  bring'  you  soap? 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Lit. :  wait  ye  a  moment. 

2  Waiter  have  you  my  baggage  up-to  my  room  carry  let  ? 

*  I  have  it  before  (or  rather,  ago)  a  moment  hence-iip-carry  let. 

*  You  have  the  valise  forgotten. —  ^  Wliicih  one  mean  you? 

6  The  little  there.  —  ?  Gesehen,  gesetzt,  past  participles  of  sehen, 
setzen. —  8  Why  has  to-us  the  chambermaid  no  soap  brought?  Uns 
«=us,  or  to  us. —  ^  Gebracht,  past  part,  of  bringen,  an  irregul.  verb. 


118  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Meine  Frau   sagt  nein.     Sie  hat  in  den*  Seifen- 
napf  und  auf  den  *  Tisch  gesehen. 

Sie  kann  nirgends^  Seife  finden.    Senden  Sie  mil 
sogleich  ein  Stiickchen  Seife. 

Aber    senden    Sie    mir    keine    Mandelseife.      Ich 
nehme  lieber^  Kernseife. 


Note.  — Study  the  Declension  of  the  Adjective 


10.  Warum  hat  das  Zimmerniadchen  t  nn- 
sere  Ziimner  lieute  ^  niorgren  iiiclit  rein 
gemaclit  ?  Selien  Sie,  wie  staubig  alles 
ist. 

Sie    hat   wieder  einmal   vergessen    abzustauben. 

Ich  habe  ihr  gezeigt,  wie  sie  abstauben  sollte. 

Ich  werde  ihr  sogleich  sagen,  dass  *  sie  die  Zim- 
mer  fertig  machen  soil. 


NOTES. 

1  Nirgends  =  no«  anywhere,  niemand  =  ?io<  anybody,  kein  =  no?  awy, 

2  Liieber  {rather)  is  the  comparative  of  lieb  and  gern.  It  may  be 
added  to  a  verb  with  tlie  force  of  the  English  verb  to  prefer. 

8  Heute  morgen,  lit. :  to-day  morning,  =  this  morning,  heiite  abend 
=  this  night  or  this  evening,  heute  n'A<i\\\n\tt&,Q  =  this  afternoon. 

4  After  the  verb  sagen  (also  schreiben),  when  used  in  the  way  of 
command,  the  Germans  do  not  employ  the  infinitive  as  we  do.  They 
cannot  say  :  I  will  tell  her  to  make-tij>  tlie  roovm  ;  ])nt  use  sollen  (or, 
mdgen),  and  say  either:  I  will  tell  her.  she  tnu.st  (he  rooms  tiji  tnake 
(Ich  Trill  ihr  sagen,  sie  8olI  die  ZimnKM-  ferti;?  ninv1ien)\  or:  / 
will  tell  her  that  she  the  rooms  mahe-up  tmist, ....  dass  sie  die 
Zimmer  fertig  machen  soil. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


119 


Mi'-ne  fra-oo'  zakht  nin'. 
Ze  h.at  in  dan  zi'-f'n-napf 
dont  a-oof  dan  tish.' . 

Ze Zen'-d'n   ze    mer 

zo-glich'  in  sTttt^k'-cTi'n  zi'- 
ie. 

•  Ki'-ne  man'-d'l-zi'-fe 

le'-b'r  kern'-zi'-fe. 


My  wife  says  no.  She  looked 
into  the*  soap-dish  and  on 
the*  table. 

She  can't  find  any  soap  any- 
where.^ Send  me  a  cake  of 
soap  at  once. 

But  do  not  send  me  any  almond 
soap.2    I  prefer  castile  soap.^ 


without  an  Article,  pages  476,  477. 


10.  Das  tsF-m'r-mdt^- 
ch'n  dbn^-z6-re  tsi^-m'r 
ho-F-te    in6r^-g''n    nlcht 

riir'   ge-maA^/it^? 

ve    s7ita-ob^-bic7^    a^-16s 

ist.  ^ 

Ze  liat  ve'-d'r  in-mal'  fer- 

ge'-s'n  ap'-tsob-stito'-i-b'n. 
Ge-tsic7it',    ve    ze    ap'- 

slito-i'-b'n   z61'-te. 
De  tsi'-m'r   ier'-tich   ma'- 

kh'n  zol. 


Why  did  not  the  chamber- 
maid t  clean  our  rooms 
this  morning?^  See 
how  dusty  everything- ^ 
is. 

She  has  forgotten  to  dust  them, 

once  again. ^ 
I  have  shown  her  how  to  dust 

them."^ 
I  am  going  to  tell  her  to  (come 

and)  make  them  up  at  once.^ 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 

1  She  can  nowhere  soap  find.   Ein  Stuckchen.   Lit. :  a  small  piece. 

2  Not  any  almond  soap  =  no  (keiue)  almond  soap.    See  p.  116,  n.  2. 

8  I  take  rather  s^one-soap  (there  is  no  word  in  English  equivalent  to 
**Kern"  as  used  above). 

*  Why  has  the  chambermaid  our  rooms  to-day  morning  not  clean 
made?—  5  All. 

6  She  has  again  once  forgotten  off-to-dust.  Abstauben,  '  separable' 
verb.  —  7  How  she  ofF-dust  should. 

8  I  shall  her  at-once  tell,  that  she  the  rooms  ready  make  shall. 

*-  Den,  accusative  case  of  der,  governed  here  by  tlie  prepositions 
in  and  auf.     For  the  government  of  cases  by  prepositions,  see  p.  268. 

t  Ikis  Zimmermadchen.    See  i)age  82,  note  1. 


120  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 

Das   Zimmer. 

Die  Thiir  (tur), 

Das  Fenster  (fen'-st'r), 

Der  Teppicb  (te'-picT^), 

Der  Fussboden  ^  (foos'-bo'-d'n), 

Die  Decke  (de'-ke), 

Die  Wand  (vant), 

Der  Stuhl  (sTitool), 

Der  Schaukelstuhl  (slia-d6'-k'l — ), 

Das  Bett  (bet), 

Die  Matratze  (ma-tra'-tse), 

Die  Springfedermatratze  (sTZ'prifi'-fS.'- 

d'r-ma-tra'-tse) , 
Das  Betttuch  2  (het'-tookh'), 
Die  Bettdecke  (bet'-de'-ke), 
Das  Bolster  (pol'-st'r), 
Das  Kissen  (ki'-s'n), 
Die  Lampe  (lani'-pe), 
Ein  Lampenschirm  (lain'-pen-sh.irin'),m. 
Ein  Licht  (licht),  n., 
Ein  Leuchter  (16-ic7i'-t'r),  m., 
Ziindholzchen  (tswnt'-liiilts'-cTi'n), 
Streichholzchen  (sTitricTi'-liults'-cTi'n), 
Ein  Schwamm  (shvam),  m., 
Wichse  (vik'-se),  /., 
Ein  Handtuch  (hant-  tookh'), 
Eine  Serviette  (zer-vi-e'-te), 


The  door. 

The  window. 

The  carpet. 

The  floor. 

The  ceihng. 

The  wall. 

The  chair. 

The  rocking-chair. 

The  bed. 

The  mattress. 

The  spring-mattress. 
The  sheet. 
The  blanket. 
The  bolster. 
The  pillow. 
The  lamp. 
,A  lamp-shade. 
A  candle,  a  light. 
A  candle-stick. 
Matches. 

A  sponge. 
Blacking. 
A  towel. 
A  napkin. 


1  Lit. :  footbottom.  —  2  Ljt. :  bedcloth. 


HOTEL   AND    BOAEDING-HOUSE.  121 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 

VOKABELN. 
Die  Toilette  (toa-16^-t6). 


Der  Tisch  (tisli), 

Der  Waschtisch  (vasli'-tish.'), 

Die  Wasserhiihne  (va'-s'r-tL§.'-ne),  m., 

Der  Spiegel  (sTz-pe'-g'l), 

Die  Haarburste  (har'-bur'-ste), 

Die  Zahnbiirste  (tsan'-bwr'-ste), 

Die  Nagelbiirste  (na'-g'l-bwr'-ste), 

Die  Schuhbiirste  (sboo'-bwr'-ste), 

Die  Kleiderbiirste  (kli'-d'r-bwr'-ste), 

Die  Hutbiirste  (boot'-bwr'-ste), 

Die  Nagelfeile  (na'-g'l-fi'-le), 

Die  Puderquaste  (poo'-d'r-qua'-ste), 

Der  Kamm  (kam), 

Das  Staubkammchen  ^  (sTita-ddp'-kem'- 

cTi'n), 
Die  Pommade  (po-ma'-de), 
Das  Federniesser  (fa'-d'r-me'-s'r), 
Das  Badezimmer  (ba'-de-tsi'-ra'r), 
Sich  baden  (zicTi  ba'-d'n), 


The  table. 
The  wash-stand. 
The  faucets. 
The  mirror. 
The  hair-brush. 
The  tooth-brush. 
The  nail-brush. 
The  shoe-brush. 
The  clothes-brush. 
The  hat-brush. 
The  nail  polisher. 
The  powder-puff. 
The  comb. 

The  fine  comb. 
The  pomatum. 
The  penknife. 
The  bath-room. 
To  bathe. 


Wichsen  Sie  diese  Stiefel  (vik'-s'n),  Black  these  boots. 

Biirsten  Sie  meine  Kleider  aus  (bwr'-st'n 

a-dos),  Brush  my  clothes. 

Biigeln  ^  Sie  diese  Wasche  (bii'-g'ln),        Iron  this  linen. 
Bessern  Sie  diese  Striimpfe  aus  (be'-s'rn 

a-dos),  Mend  these  stockings. 


1  Lit. :  little  dust-comb.  —  2  Or,  Flatten,  ple'-t'n. 


122  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  he  learned    by  heart,  and  repeated  aloud  as  a  conversation, 

whether  for  self-study  or  preparation  for  the  class-room. 

{See  IHrections  before  Part  I,) 

CONVERSATIONS. 

l.—DIE   TOILETTE. 

Wo  haben  Sie  die  Haarbiifste  hingelegt/  Adolf  ?2 — . 
Ich  weiss  nicht.  Ich  habe  sie  seit  gestern  abend  ^ 
nicht  gebraucht.*  —  Wo  haben  Sie  sie  zuletzt^  gesehen? 
—  Ich  habe  sie  zuletzt  auf  dem  Waschtisch  gesehen. — 
Nun,  ist  sie  jetzt^  nicht  mehr  dort?  —  Nein.  Ich  kann 
sie  nirgends  finden.  —  Sehen  Sie  in  die  KommodeJ  — 
Sie  ist  nicht  in  diesem  Fach.^  —  Vielleicht  in  dem  da 
oben?^  —  Ja,  hier  ist  sie. 

2. -DIE    WASCHFRAU* 

Meine  Frau  mochte  gern  wissen/^  wo  sie  ihre^^ 
Wasche    biigeln     lassen     kann.  —  Wir     haben     eine 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Hin'-gS-lac/it'  =  (hence)  put. 

2  A'-dolf. 

3  Zit  ge'-st'rn  a'-b'nt  =  since  last  night. 

4  Ge-bra-dofc/i-t'  =  used. 

s  Tsoo-lgtst'=the  last  time. 

6  Ygtst  =  now.  ^ 

7  K6-mo'-de  =  cli est  of  drawers. 
*  Fafc/t  =  drawer. 

9  Fi-lie/it'  in  dSm'  da  o'-b'n=  perhaps  in  the  (i.  e.,  the  one)  above 
there.  —  i"  Vi'-s'n  =  to  know.  —  ^  Her. 

*•  Vash'-fra-oo',  lit.  :  washing  woman,  ==  laundress. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  123 

Waschfrau,  die  jedeii  Montag^  kommt  die  Wasche 
zu  holen.2  Anna!  War  sie  schon  da?  —  Neiii,  mein 
Herr,  noch  nicht.^  —  Bitte  schicken  Sie  sie  herauf,^ 
wenn  sie  konimt. — Sehr  wolil,  mein  Herr. 

3. -DAS  BADEZIMMER. 

Mein  Bruder  will  wissen,  wo  das  Badezimmer  ist. 
Er  mochte  heute  Nachmittag  ein  Bad  nehmen. — 
Das  Badezimmer  ist  auf  Ihrem  Korridor,  nahe  bei 
Ihrer  Thiir.^  —  Danke. 

A.~DER   MORGEN. 

Wie  haben  Sie  vergangene  Nacht  geschlafen?^  — 
Nicht  sehr  gut.  Ich  liatte  nicht  genug  Deckeii/  und 
die  Matratze  ist  zu  hart.  —  Das  thut  mir  sehr  leid.^ 
Ich  werde  Ihnen  fiir  heute  Abend  dickered  Deck  en 
und  eine  weichere^^  Matratze  schicken. 

Note.  —  Study  the  Declension  of  the  Adjective 
with  the  Definite  Article,  pages  477|  478. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Ya'"d'n  mon'-tafc/i. 

2  Tsoo  ho'-l'n  =  to  fetch,  to  take  away. 
■^  NoAj/i  iiic/it'  =  iiot  yet. 

4  Shi'-k'n  ze  ze  lie-ra-oof  =  send  her  up. 

5  Na'-e  bi  e'-rer  tur'  =  near  your  door. 

6  Fer-gan'-'ne  naA;7it  ge-shla'-f'n  =  how  did  you  sleep  last  night V 

7  Not  blankets  enough. 

8  Das  toot  mer  zar  lit',  lit. :  that  does  me  muoh  pain  •,  i.  e.,  i  am 
very  sorry  for  that. 

9  Di'-ke-re  =  thicker.  —  w  Vi'-c/«-e-re  =  softer. 


1.24  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  he  translated  and  written  into  German;  hut  also  to  he  recited 

as  a  conversation  in  the  class-room.    (^See  Directions 

before  Part  I,) 

EXERCISES. 

l.  —  TO    MAKE    UP  A    ROOM. 

Why  did  n't  the  servant  make  the  bed  yesterday  ?  ^ 
—  Did  she  not  make  it?*  That  is  not  possible.^  — 
Yes,  she  forgot  it.t  —  Why  did  you  not  ring  ?  ^  I  am 
going  to  speak  to  her.*  But  when  you  want  any- 
thing done  in  your  room  please  ring,  and  she  will 
come  at  once.^ 

^.-BAGGAGE. 

Please  have  my  trunks  brought  from  the  depot.^  — 
Please  give  me  your  baggage-check.  —  Let  me  see. 
I  cannot  find  it."  Ah,  here  it  is.^  Make  haste.^  I 
want  to  change  my  linen.^^ 


Aids  to   Translation. 


1  Why  has  the  maid  (das  Madchen)  yesterday  the  bed  not  made? 

2  Moglich,  vAVLch'-Weh.  —  3  Why  have  you  not  rung  (geschellt)  ? 

*  I  will  with  her  (mit  ihr)  speak. 

5  But  when  you  in  your  room  (in  Ihrem  Zimmer)  anything  want 
(etwas  brauchen),  ring  please  (so  schellen  Sie,  bitte),  and  she  will 
at-once  come.  —  ISec  page  84,  III. 

^  Please,  let  my  trunks  (meine  KoflFer)  from  the  (von  dem)  depot 
fetch  (abholen,  apMio'-Pn). 

7  I  can  /m;i  not  find.  —  8  Here  is  he.—  ^  Make  quick  (schnell). 

1**  I  must  my  linen  cluingc  (wechseln). 

*  Has  she  it  (es)  not  inadc.  —  f  She  has  it  forgotten. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  125 

3.  — CANDLES,   SHOES*   ETC. 

Waiter,  you  didn't  bring  me  any  candle.^  —  Beg 
your  pardon ,2  sir.  I  brought  you  a  candle.f — Where 
is  it?  —  I  put  it  on  the  washstand.^  —  Ah!  here  it  is. 
—  Very  well.  Now,  black  these  shoes  and  brush  my 
overcoat.* 


Note.  —  Study  the  Declension  of  the  Adjective  with 
the  Indefinite  Article,  pages  478,  479. 


4.  — THE   BATH. 

Waiter,  please  show  me  the  bath-room.^  —  There  it 
is,  sir.  Straight  before  you. — Bring  me  some  soap 
and  towels,^  please.  —  You  will  find  soap  and  towels 
in  the  bath-room,^  sir.  —  Ah !    Very  well.    Thank  you. 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Waiter,  you  have  to-nie  no  (kein)  candle  brought  (gebracht). 

2  Kntschuldigen  Sie,  gnt-shoor-di-g'n  ze.     Lit. :  Excuse  ye. 
8  I  have  it  on  the  (auf  den)  wash-stand  put  (gestellt). 

4  Meinen  Uberrock  {accusative,  because  the  object  of  the  verb). 

5  Where  the  bath-room  is. 

6  Handtiicher,  hant'-tii'-c/i'r. 

7  You  will  soap  and  towels  in  the  (in  dem)  bath-room  find. 
=  Lichte,  Schuhe,  etc. 

t  I  have  to-you  a  (ein)  candle  brought. 


126  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation  opposite,  then  without 

it,  in  preparation  for  reading  aloud  and  translating 

in  class.    For  Pronunciation,  see  page  132. 

Sefefttirf. 
£)^etn4(iu^  tint)  (^((lauf^iet^du^^ 

—  §aben  ©ie  Gillette  ^ur  ^eutigeu  ^orftetlun^  im  D:pern= 
l^au^  befomincn? 

—  2ln  ber  £affe  \viax  al(e§  au§t>erfauft,  bod;  ift  c^^^  luir 
gelungen/  Don  einem  §anb(er  ^ttjei  Gillette,  natiiiiid;  init 
bebeiitenbem  Slufgelb,^  ^u  er^alten. 

—  ®a§  freut  mid)  fe^r,^  benn  i(f)  mod)te  fel)r  gem  3}kl)cr= 
beer§  "^ro^^et"  ^oren,  befonber^  ba  9tiemann  unb  3}kri= 
anne  ^ranbt  bie  ^au^trollcn  fingen. 

—  2BeId)e§  ift  't^txm  bie  .ganblung  in  biefer  D*per? 

—  3d)  fann  S^^^n  ben  @ang  ber  ^anblung  fur;^  er= 
gd^Ien.  3ol)ann  Don  Set;ben,  ber  ©o(;n  einer  @aftf)au^= 
njirtin/  tt)irb  t?on  ben  SBiebertdufern  ^um  giU;rer  ermdMt 
unb  Id^t  fid)  nad)  ®inna(;rne  ber  ©tabt  9}Hinfter  im  bortigen 
®om  ^um  ^dnig  unb  ^ro^^eten  fronen.  Slber  nad)bent 
feine  ^raut  if)n  i:)erf(ud)t,  giebt  er  fid)  felbft  6ei  cineni 
©aftma^I  "iizn  ^ob.  ®ie  Dper  toirb  S^^i^^'i^  f^^^  gefaUen. 
2(ud)  ba§  D^ern^au^  felbft  it)irb  Sbncn  gef alien.  ^'§  iDurbe 
unter  griebrid)  bem  ©ro^en  erbaut,  unb  ^a^:>  ^antl)eon  iu>n 
2(tl)en  ift  babei  ^um  ^orbilb  genomnien.  ^!o  ift  ein  ^err= 
lic^eS  @ebdube. 

—  Urn  tDie  tjiel  Ul^r  beginnt  bie  ^orfteHung? 


1  strictly:  is  it  to-me  succeeded,     Anglice:  I  succeeded  in 

obtaining. —  2  j.jt. :  npon-money. —  ^  Anylice :  I  tun  very  glad  of  that. 
4  Strictly  :    very  willingly. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  127 

For  Self-Study,  should  be  read  by  means  of  the  translation,  then 

without  it,  and  when  thoroughly  understood,  read 

aloud  in  German. 

READING. 
THE    OPERA    AND    THEATER. 

—  Have  you  the  tickets  to  (the)  to-day's  represen- 
tation in  the  opera-house  gotten? 

—  At  the  ticket-office  was  all  oit^sold,  yet  to-me 
has^  it  succeeded^  from  a  dealer  two  tickets,  naturally 
with  (an)  important  premium,^  to  obtain. 

—  That  rejoices  me  very  (much),^  for  I  wished  very 
much  *  Meyerbeer's  "  Prophet "  to-hear,  especially 
as the  principal-parts  sing. 

—  What  is  the  plot  in  this  opera? 

—  I  can  to-you  the  whole  of-the  plot  shortly  relate. 
John  of  Leyden,  the  son  of  a  hotel-keeper,  becomes  by 
the  anabaptists  to  chief  elected  and  has  himself  after 
(the)  capture  of-the  city  (of)  Miinster  in  that-place's 
cathedral  as^  king  and  prophet  crowned.  He  disa- 
vowed his  mother,  and  after  his  betrothed  him  for- 
saken (has),^  gives  he  to-himself  a^  a  banquet^  the  death. 
The  opera  will  {to-)  you  much  please.  Also,  the  Opera- 
House  (it-)  self  will  {to-)  you  please.  It  was  under 
Frederick  the  Great  built,  and  the  Pantheon  of  Athens 
was'^^  as^^  model  taken.     It  is  a  magnificent  building. 

=— At  what  time  begins  the  play?^^ 


s  Wirt,  a  (male)  innkeeper,  a  host.    Wirtin,  a  (female)  innkeeper. 
hostess.—  6  Strictly  :  from.—  7  Strictly  :  io-the. 

8  Supply  hat, /tao,  understood. —  9  Strictly:  guest-repast. 
1°  Strictly :  is.  —  n  Strictly  :  to-the.  —  12  Strictly  :  representation. 


128  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

—  Urn  i)alh  ad^t.i  2)a  c§>  jet^t  gerabe  fed^g  ift,  fo  f^ahzn 
wit  norf)  3^^^  9^^119/  ^ii^^tt  fleinen  ©^a^iergaiig  511  tnad;eu. 
SSenn  ©ie  alfo  md)t  gu  mube  finb,  fo  iDoUen  ^t)ir  md)  bem 
©etibarmen  3}Zar!t  ge^en  unb  ba§  ©c^auf^iet^au^  unb  bag 
©d;iKerben!inal  befef)en 

—  ®a§  ift  it)ir!Iid)  ein  fc^dner  ^lat^,  nid^t  \v>ai)x?  §ier 
ift  bag  ^eufrnal  unfereg  grofeen  ^id)terg  griebrirf)  ©d)i(Ier. 
Slber  ©driller  mar  md)t  nur  ber  grofete  beutfd)e  ®id)ter  nac^ 
©oct^e,  er  ix)ar  auc^  ein  ebler  unb  gnter  9)Jenfd;.^  (Sg  tDar 
fiir  ^eutfd)Ianb  n)ie  flir  bie  Qan^c  SBelt  ein  grower  ^erluft^ 
ba^  er  fo  friil;  ftarb. 

—  SBann  ift  er  h^nn  geftorben? 

—  @r  ftarb  im  3a(;re  1805,  im  3llter  'oon  fecf)g  unb 
Dier^^ig  3al;ren,  nad)bem  er  eben  bie  ^erle  feiner  bramatifd)en 
^id;tungen,  SSil^elnt  Xdl,  Dollenbet  (;atte.  ©ie  miffen,  ba^ 
fein  erfteg  ©tild,  tx)eld)eg  eine  un6efd)rei6(id)e  ^egeifterung, 
befonberg  unter  ber  ^ugenb  ®eutfd)(anbg  ^ert)orrief,  bie 
S^iauber  maren. 

—  '^a.  ^onnten  (3ie  ntir  mo(;(  angeben,  it)elc^e  Qbee 
ben  Sf^aubern  ^u  ©runbe  liegt? 

—  ^ie  9?duber  entl;a(ten  bie  ©efdjic^te  ^arl  Tloov^, 
gran^  Tloov  ija^f^^  fcinen  (dteren  ^ruber  ^arl  unb  faJ3t^^ 
ben  ^lan,  biefen  ^u  berberben  unb  fic^  guin  §errn  beg 
§aufeg  ^u  madden.  ®egl;alb  betiic^t^^  er  feinen  33ater  unb 
feinen  ^ruber.  £arl  g(aubt,^i  'Da^  fein  ^ater  ii)n  t)erf(ud)t 
i)aU,  unb  gel;t,  an  ber  3}^enfc^(;eit  tjerpeifelnb,  unter  bie 
9iduber,  nad^  benen  ha^  ©rama  benannt  ift. 


1  strictly  :  at  half  eight.  —  2  Anglice  :  short. 
8  Gendarmen,  a  kind  of  mounted  police. —  ■*  Strictly:  place. 
6  Mensch.—  «  The  Germans  may  use  either  the  po-fect :  When  did 
he  die?    Or,  the  simple  past  tense  {imperfect) :  Wlien  died  hef 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  129 

—  At  half-past  seveii.^  As  it  now  exactly  six  is, 
so  have  we  yet  time  enough  a  littW^  walk  to  make. 
If  you  indeed  not  too  tired  are,  so  will  we  to  the 
Gendarmes^  market-place  go,  and  the  theater  and  the 
Schiller-monument  see 

—  That  is  indeed  a  fine  square,*  isn't  it?  Here  is 
the  monument  of  our  great  poet,  Frederick  Schiller. 
But  Schiller  was  not  only  the  greatest  German  poet 
after  Goethe,  he  was  also  a  noble  {and)  good  man.^ 
It  was  for  Germany,  as  for  the  whole  world,  a  great 
loss  that  he  so  soon  died. 

—  When  has  he  then  died?^ 

—  He  died  in-the  year  1805  m-the  age  of  six-and- 
forty  years,  after  he  the  gem  ^  of-his  dramatic  poetical 
works,  "William  Tell,"  completed  had.  You  know 
that  his  first  piece,  which  an  immediate  enthusiasm 
especially  among^  the  youth  of-Germany  called-forth, 
"The  Robbers"  was. 

—  Yes.  Could  you  to-me  kindly  indicate  what  idea 
to  "the  Robbers"  as^  plan  'is?io 

—  "  The  Robbers  "  contain  the  history  of  Karl  Moor. 
Franz  Moor  hates  ^^  his  elder  brother  Karl,  and  con- 
ceives^^ the  plan  the-latter^^  to  kill  and  himself  io-the 
lord  of-the  family  ^^  to   make.     Therefore  belies  ^^  he 

Karl  believes  11  that   his  father  him  forsaken 

has,ii  and  goes,  of  (the)  mankind   despairing,  among 
(the)  robbers,  after  whom  the  drama  is  named. 


1  strictly :  pearl.  —  8  Strictly  :  under.  —  ^  Strictly :  to. 
1^  Strictly  :  lies.  —  ^i  Notice  tlie  use  of  tlie  present  indicative  instead 
of  a  past  tense.     This  is  frequent  in  German  in  narrating. 
12  Strictly  :  this-one.  —  13  Strictly  :  house. 


130 


HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 


S!vtveipvnbeni* 


^^'^^i^/^^^^Zf^^'^CfS.^^*^^    t^    /^^^t^i^J^-9^  /^(^jy 


'^#^y4-r'^  CA^C'*'^^^^^^^^  -x^i'*'-^ 


^^ 


^"^f^^^^t^i^-^  --?a 


-^^^^^^A^-'tyT.^*'^       ^tl'-l^it^'Z.^^^  .^^t^^^-t^^^^i^-  .       0^t^'^^^yt^-C^e/'ii'^^f<f^^^S^»^-^ 


'C-^/^- ^^-*^^ji.^<f^y^f^^^^  C^^'-i'f^ClM' 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  131 


^!^f^it-<^ 


,..^yu^M.€^onZ  ^=,JJi^< 


DIRECTIONS. 

Read  and  translate  the  above  letter,  after  which  copy  it  in 
German  script, — learn  it  by  heart,  and  some  hour  or  two  after- 
ward write  it  out  again  from  memory.  In  case  the  form  of  any 
letters  is  forgotten,  consult  the  written  alphabet,  pages  48  and  49. 

TKANSI.ATION. 

1 3  promised  to  write  you  at  once  on  my  arrival  in  B.,  and  I 
will  keep  my  word.  We  arrived  here  this  morning  safe  and 
happy,  but  tired  to  death.  So  you  must  excuse  me  if  I  send 
you  only  a  word  or  two.  As  soon  (as)  it  is  possible  {to  me),  I 
shall  report  our  adventures  to  you  at  length.  With  kind  re- 
gards for  you  and  your  family,  I  remain,  sincerely  your  friend. 

Literal  Translation.  —  You  have  from  me  the  promise 
received  that  I  immediately  after  my  arrival  in  Berlin  write 
would.^  ....  We  came  to-day  morning-here  on are  how- 
ever dead-tired.     Therefore  pardon  ye will  I  to  you 

exhaustively  over  our  experience  report. 

Pronunciation.  —  Fer-s7ipre'-c7i'n zo-glic7i' vort' 

hal'-t'n.     Ka'-m'n    ho-i'-te    mor'-g'n   glwk'-licTi    oont   ge- 

zd6nt' tot'-mii'-de fer-tsi'-'n par  tsi'-l'n 

zen'-de.     Zo-balt' rnucTi'-licTi a-dos'-fiir'-licTi 

er-lap'-ni-se  be-ric7t'-t'n.     Herts'-li-c7i'n  grii'-s'n e'-ri- 

g'n   fer-bli'-be a-dbf'-ric7i'-ti-g'r  fro-int,    al'-brec7it. 


1  In  letters,  names  of  cities  or  persons  are  usually  written  in  Roman 
('".  c,  English)  cliaracters, —  ^  xhe  pronouns  of  the  second  person  {Sie, 
IJineriy  Ihrige,  Ihr,  etc.)  must  always  be  written  with  capitals. 

3  The  Germans  dislike  to  begin  a  letter  with  the  word  ich.  They 
generally  use  some  turn  of  phrase  to  avoid  this  [see  lit.  transl.).  Notice 
that  icli  is  never  written  with  a  capital,  unless  it  begins  a  sentence. 


132  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Ha'-b'n  ze  bi-li-e'-te  tsobr  h.6-i'-ti-g'n  tov'-shte'-lobfi  im 
o'-p'rn-lia-66s'  be-ko'-men. 

An  dar  ka'-se  var  a'-les  a-dos'-fer-ka-doft',  dokh  ist  es 
mer  ge-loon'-'n  fon  i'-nem  h.ent'-ler  tsvi  bi-li-e'-te,  na- 
tur'-licTi  mit  be-do-i'-ten-d'm  a-oof'-gelt'  tsoo  er-h.al'-t'n. 

Das  fro-it  rciich  zar',  den  ich  miich'-te  zar  gem  mi'- 
er-bars'  pro-fat'  h.<i'-r'n,  be-z6n'-d'rs  da  ne'-man  dont 
ma-ri-a'-ne  brant'  de  ba-oopt'-ro'-len  zin'-'n. 

Vel'-cTies  ist  den  de  bant'-lobii  in  de'-z'r  o'-p'r. 

Ich  kan  e'-nen  dan  gan  dar  h.ant'-ld6n  koorts  er- 
tsa'-l'n.  Y5-h.an'  fon  li'-d'n,  dar  zon  i'-n'r  gast'-lia-d6s'- 
vir'-tin  virt  fon  dan  ve'-d'r-to-i'-f'rn  tsoom  fli'-rer  er- 
vdlt',  dbnt  lest  zich  nakh  in'-na'-me  dar  sTitat  milns'- 
t'r  im  dor'-ti-g'n  dom  tsobm  ku-nic7i  dont  pro-fa'-t'n 
krd'-nen.  A'-b'r  nakh-daim.'  zi'-ne  bra-dot  en  fer- 
ilookht',  gebt  ar  zich  zelpst  bi  i'-nem  gast'-mal'  dan 
t5t'.  De  o'-p'r  virt  e'-nen  zar  ge-fa'-l'n,  a-obkh  das  o'- 
p'rn-h.a-<56s'  zelpst'  virt  e'-nen  ge-fa'-l'n.  Es  vdor'-de 
don'-t'r  fre'-dricTi  dam  gro'-s'n  er-ba-oot',  dont  das  pan'- 
ta-6n  fon  a-tan'  ist  da-bi'  tsdom  for'-bilt'  ge-no'-m'n. 
Es  ist  in  h.er'-li-c7ies  ge-bo-i'-de. 

(DOm  ve  fel  dor  be-gint'  de  f or'-sTite'-ldoii  ? 

C30m  lialp  akht'.  Da  es  yetst  gra'-de  zeks  ist,  zo 
ba'-b'n  ver  nokh  tsit  ge-n^kh'  i'-nen  kli'-nen  sTipa- 
tser'-gaii'  tsdd  ma'-fe/i'n.  Ven  ze  al'-zo  nicTit  tsdo  mii'- 
de  zint,  zo  vo'-l'n  ver  nakh  dam  zbafi-dar'-men  markt 
ga'-'n  dont  das  s7ia-d6'-s7ipel-h.a-d6s'  dont  das  sbi'-rr- 
denk'-mal'  be-za'-'n 

Das  ist  virk'-licTi  in  sbu'-ner  plats',  nicTit  var?  Her 
Ist  das  deiik'-mal'  don'-z'rs  grd'-s'n  dicTi'-t'rs  fre'-dricTi 
shi'-l'r 


Part  IL 


HOTEL   AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


HOTEL   UXD    PEXSI0:N^< 


SECTION     II. 


1. 

IN  A  BOARDING-HOUSE. 

2. 

AT  THE  TABLE. 

3. 

THE  LAUNDRESS. 

A. 

NO  EMPHATIC  NOR  PROGRESSIVE  FORMS. 

5. 

THE  FAMILY;  THE  HOUSE. 

6. 

ABOUT  SILVER-WARE. 

7. 

THE  "THREE  OUESTIONS." 

8. 

THE  ENDING  OF  LETTtRS  (II). 

13S 


134  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 


II. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Aber  es  ist  ein  ralirsluhl  da.^ 

Da  habeii  Sie  es  gliicklich  getrofFen.  (See  p.  84,  I.j 
In  meinem  Hotel  ist  kein  Fahrstuhl. 

An  Ihrer  Stelle  wiirde  ich  nicht  in  einem  solchen^ 
Hotel  bleiben. 

Ich  rate  Ihnen  in  eine  Pension  zu  gehen. 

Man  ist  da  wie  zu  Hause. 

Das  ist  wahr.     Und  man^  spricht  mehr  deutsch. 

An  der  Ecke  der  Strasse  ist  eine  gute*  Pension. 


2.  Ist  es  eine  deutsche*  Pension  ?t 

Ja  wohl. 

Das  ist  mir  lieb.     Or,  Das  freut  mich  (sehr).tt 


NOTES. 

1  Es  ist  ein  Falirstuhl  da,  instead  of  Ein  Fahrstuhl  ist  da. 

2  In  einein  solchen  Hotel,  lit. :  in  a  such  hotel,  is  more  couinion 
than  In  solch  einem  Hotel,  lit. :  in  such  a  hotel.  —See  paf3;e  84,  I. 

8  Man  spricht  mehr  deutsch.     The  English  passive  voice  is  fre- 
quently rendered  by  the  active  voice  with  man  {(me)  in  German. 

*  Pension  is  feminine.    Hence  tlie  fern,  adjective  forms  :  eine,  gute. 


HOTEL    AND    BOAKDING-HOUSE. 


135 


II. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  A^-b'r   es   ist   in    Far^- 
sMool'  da. 

Gluk'-licTi  ge-tro'-f  n. 

In  mi'-nem  lio-tel'. 

An  e'-rer  s7ite'-le  vwr'-de 
ic7i  nicht  in  i'-nem  zoV-ch'n 
ho-tel'  bli'-b'n. 

Ich  ra'-te  e'-nen  in  i'-ne 
pan-syon', 

Ve  tsoo  ha-do'-ze. 

Shpricht  mar  do-itsh.'. 

An  d'r  e'-ke  d'r  s7itra'-se. 


But  there  is  an  elevator.^ 

You  are  very  fortunate.^ 
At  my  hotel  there  is  do  eleva- 
tor. 
In  your  place  I  wouldn't  stay 
in  such  a  hotel, 

I  advise  you  to  go  to  a  board- 
ing-house. 

You  feel  more  at  home.^ 

That  is  true.  And  more  Ger- 
man is  spoken  there.* 

There  isagood^  boarding-house 
at  the  corner  of  the  street. 


2.     I^-n6    d6-i^-tsh6    pan- 
syon^  ?        ^ 

Ya  vol'. 

Das  ist  mer  lep',  or  fro-it' 
mich  zar.  ^ 


Is  it  a  German  boarding"- 
liouse  ?  t 

Certainly. 

I  am  glad  of  it.^ 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  But  it  (i.  e.,  there)  is  a  riding-chair  there.    Es  is  often  used  for  there. 

2  There  have  you  it  hickily  met.     For  inverted  order,  see  page  84. 

3  One  is  there  Hke  at  lionie.  —  ^  And  one  speaks  more  German. 

s  That  is  to-ino  agrceal^lc  ;  or,  Tliat  rejoices  nic  very  much  (Lit. :  very), 
t  Also  Kosthaus,  kost'-ha-oos  ,  neuter.     Eiii  gutes  Kosthaus. 
ft  Sehr  {very  vmch)  is  generall}^  used,  but  7nay  be  omitted. 


136  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Ich  will  sogleich  hingehen.     Ich  muss  die  Sache 
so  bald  als  moglich  erledigen. 

Konnten  Sie  nicht  mit  mir  gehen? 
Sie   wissen,   ich   spreche   nicht   gut   deutsch.      Or, 
Sie  wissen,  dass  ich  nicht  gut  deutsch  spreche.^ 
Schon  gut.     Ich  gehe  mit. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Strong  Declension, 


3.  Guten  Tag^,  Frau  N.    Ich  mochte  fragen, 
ob  Sie  iioch  Pensionare  *  auf  neliinen. 

Ja,  mein  Herr.     Aber  wir  haben   augenblicklich 

nur  sehr  wenig  Platz. 
Das    ist    schade.     Denn^    meine    Frau    und    ich 

wollten  uns  bei  Ihnen  in  Pension  geben. 

Wenn  Sie  sich  mit  drei  Zimmern  in  der  vierten 
Etage  begniigen  wollten  — , 

Ich  glaube  nicht,  dass  meine  Frau  so  hoch  hin- 

aufsteigen  will. 
Aber  jedenfalls  zeigen  Sie  mir  die  Zimmer,  bitte. 


NOTES. 

1  Dass  is  often  omitted  from  between  two  clauses.  In  that  case, 
the  secondary  clause  does  not  follow  the  rule  p^iven  on  page  36,  about 
the  position  of  tlie  verl).  Tims-  Wltlt  dass:  Sie  wissen,  dass  ich 
nicht  gut  deutsch  spreche  ( m-h  af  the  r,nl  nf  n,c  chua^e).  Without 
dass:  Sie  wissen,  icli  spveehe  nicht  j^nt  deutscli  (no  inversion). 

'^  Notice  that  after  denn,  no  inversion  takes  place.     See  page  84. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


137 


Zo-glic7i'  h.in'-ga'-'n  .  .  ,  . 
zo  bait'  als  mUch'-lich  er- 
la'-di-g'n. 


Ze  vi'-s'n,  ich  sh-pre'-ohe. 


Stion   goof.      Ich   ga'-e 
mit'. 


I  '11  go  at  once.  I  want  to  have 
done  with  it  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible.^ 

Could  you  not  go  with  me  ? 

You  know  I  don't  speak  Ger- 
man very  well. 

All  right.    I  '11  go  with  you.^ 


pages  466  and  467. 


3.  Goo^-t'n  tsikh\  tch 
niuc/*^-t6  fra^-g'n,  op  ze 
wokh  p^ii-sy6-n4^-r6 
a-obf-iia'-in'n. 

A-d6'-g'n-blik'-lic7i     noor 
zar^va'-nic7i  plats. 

Das  ist  sha'-de.  .  .  .  .  bi  e'- 
nen  in  pan-sy-on'  ga'-b'n. 

In  d'r  fer'-t'n  a-ta'-zh.e  be- 
gnii  -g'n  vol'-t'n. 

Zo    tiokh    h.i-na-d6f'-s7iti'- 
g'n  vil.  "" 

A'-b'r  ya'-d'n-fals'  tsi'-g'n 
ze  mer. 


Good  day,  Mrs.  N.  I 
should  like  to  know  if 
you  would  take  any 
more  boarders  ?3 

Yes,  sir.  But  we  have  very 
little  room  at  present. 

That's  too  bad.     My  wife  and 

I  wanted  to  come  and  board 

with  you.* 
If  you  were  willing  to  do  with 

three  rooms   on  the    fourth 

floor.^ 
I  don't  think*  my  wife  would 

climb  up  so  high. 
But  in  any  case  show  me  the* 

rooms,  please. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  I  will  at-once  there  go.    I  must  the  matter  as  soon  as  possible 
settle. —  2  Indeed,  good.     I  go  with. 

*  I  might  ask  if  you  still  boarders  take  in  ? 

*  That  is  pity.     For  my  wife  and  I  wanted  ourselves  in  board  give 
with  you.    Also :  in  Kost  geben  —  ^  if  yQ^^  yourself satisfy  would. 

8  I  believe  not  that,  etc.  —  *  Also,  Kostganger  (kost'-gSn'-'r). 


138  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

4.  Wollen  Sie  gefalligst  vorangehen  ?     Ich 
will  Ihiieii  die  Ziiiimer  zeigeii. 

Sieh   da!     Die  Mobel   in   dem   vorderen   Zimmer 

sind  von  Mahagoni. 
Im  Schlafzimmer  sind  die  Mobel  von  Nussbaum. 

In  dem  Bett  ist  keine  Springfedermatratze. 

Entschuldigen  Sie,  mein  Herr,  es  ist  eine  darin, 
Sehen  Sie  nur  genau  naeh. 

Sie   liaben   recht.      Ich   hatte   mich   geirrt.      Wie 

viele  Zimmer  sind  hier? 
Drei  Zimmer  und  ein  Alkoven. 

Das  passte^  ja  gerade. 

Wiinschen  Sie  das  Hinterzimmer  zu  sehen? 

Ja  wohl.2     Haben  Sie  keinen  Ofenschirm  darin? 

Oh  ja.^    Aber  er  ist  augenblicklich  im  Souterrain. 

Lassen  Sie  ihn  sogleich  heranfbringen,  bitte. 

Gehoren  die  Bilder  zum*  Zimmer? 


NOTES. 

1  Passte  {might  suit),  imperfect  subjunctive  of  passen,  to  suit.  The 
imperfect  subjunctive  is  used  here  instead  of  the  first  conditional  (wiirde 
passen).  However,  one  could  say  just  as  well :  Das  tviirde  ja  gerade 
jtassefi, 

2  Ja  wohl  (lit. :  yes,  indeed)  is  a  somewhat  stroni^cr  dn-m  of  afltirma- 
tion  than  ja  alone.  It  corresponds  to  tlie  Enj;lish  ccrtalnhj,  or  yes,  sir. 
It  is  used  in  answer  to  affirmative  questions. 

8  Oh  ja  (lit. :  Oh,  yes)  is  a  stronger  form  of  affirmation  than  ja 
alone.    It  is  used  in  answer  to  negative  questions. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


139 


4.    Ge-f^'-lichst   fo-ran 
ga  -'n  ?  .  .  .  .  tsi^-g'n. 


Ze  da' !     De  Tn<i'-b'l 
fon  ma-lia-go'-ne. 


Fon  noos'-ba-66in'. 

STtpring'-fa'-d'r-ina-tra'- 
tse. 

Ent-slidol'-di-g'n    ze 

Za'-'n  ze  noor  ge-na-oo' 
n'akh.  ^ 

Mich  ge-irt'.    Ve  fe'-le. 

In  al'-ko-f  n. 


Hin'-t'r-tsi'-m'r. 

Ki'-nen  o'-fn-shirm'  da- 
rin  ? 

O  ya' a-oo'-g'n-blik'- 

lich  im  soo-te-rin'.6 

Zo-glic 7i'    tie-ra-dof'-brifi'- 
'n. 
Ge-h.O.'-r'n  de  bil'-d'r. 


Will  you  please  g-o  ahead? 
I  Avill  show  you  the 
rooms. 

See!  The  furinture  in  the 
front  room  is  of  mahogany.^ 

In  the  bedroom  the  farniture 
is  of  walnut  (Ut. :  nut-tree). 

There  is  no  spring  mattress  in 
the  bed. 

Pardon  me,  sir.  There  is  one.^ 
Just  look  closely  for  it.^ 

You  are  right.  I  was  mistaken.^ 
How  many  rooms  are  here  ? 

(There  are)  three  rooms  and 
an  alcove. 

That  would  just  suit  us.* 

Do  you  wish  to  see  the  back- 
room? 

Yes,  sir.  Is  there  no  screen 
for  that  fire-place?^ 

Yes,  sir.  But  it  is  in  the  base- 
ment just  now. 

Please  have  it  brought  up  at 
once.' 

Do  the  pictures  belong  to  the 
room? 


LITERAL.   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  See  there!  The  pieces-of-furniture  in  the  fore-room  are  of  ma- 
hogany. —  ^  It  (i.  e.,  there)  is  one  tliere-in.  Look  (ye)  only  closely 
after  (i.  e.,  to-it). 

8  You  have  right.     I  liad  myself  mistaken. 

*  That  might-suit  indeed  exactly. 

s  Have  you  no  stove-screen  therein? 

6  The  exact  pronunciation  of  Souterrnhi  cannot  be  given  in  German 
sounds.     It  is  tlie  same  as  in  tlie  French  (soo-teh-rin'). 

^  Let  {you)  him  at-once  here-up-bring,  please.  —  *  See  p.  530. 


140  HOTEL    UNI)    PENSION. 

Alle,  ausser  diesem  Gemalde^  und  jenem  Kupfer- 
stich.  * 


5.  Wie  viel  wiirden  Sie  f 'iir  Kost  und  Logis 
in  diesen  Zimmern  reclmen? 

Wiinschen    Sie    dieselben  *    pro    Monat  oder  pro 

Woche  zu  nehmen? 
Pro  Woche. 
Fiir    Sie    und    Ihre    Frau   Gemahlin^   wiirde  die 

Pension  hundert  und  sechzig  Mark  die  Woche 

betragen. 
Das  ist  furchtbar  teuer. 
Aber  unser  Mittagstisch  ist  erster  Klasse. 

Ich   lasse  die   Zimmer  alle   Tage   fegen    und   die 
Betten  zweimal  jede  Woche  frisch  iiberziehen. 

Gut.     Ich   will  es  auf  eine  Woche  probieren,  or 
versuchen. 


6.  Es  ist  angerichtet.  t 

Lassen    Sie    uns    hinuntergehen,^   meine   Herren. 
Es  ist  serviert. 


NOTES. 

1  Gemalde,  oil  painting.     Picture,  in  general,  =Bild. 

2  Ihre  Frau  Gemahlin  (lit. :  your  wife  consort),  is  generally  used 
when  speaking  to  equals  or  superiors  about  their  wife.  But  when 
speaking  of  one's  own  wife,  one  says  onlj'  Meine  Frau. 

8  Sinunter,  hinein,  hinahy  etc.,  express  motion  awdy  from  the 
person  who  is  speaking,  wliile  herunier,  herein^  herahj  etc.,  imply 
motion  toward  the  person  speaking.  Ex. :  Gelien  Sie  /tlnunter.  Go 
down;    Kommen  Sie  lierauf,  Come  tip.  —  *  Also.  Stahlstich. 

t  Past  Part,  of  anrichten,  to  prepare.  — also  :  Es  1st  serviert. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


141 


A-le,   a-ob  -s'r  de'-zem  ge- 
mkl'-de  ."T  .  .  koo'-pf  r-s7itic7i' 


All,  except  this  painting  and 
that   engraving.^ 


5.  Ve  fel  vur^-d'n  ze  fur 
kost  dont  16-zhe^  in  de^- 
zeii  tsF-ni'rii  rec/t^-nen  ? 

De-zel'-bn  pro  mo'-nat  o-' 
d'r  pro  -vo'-khe  ? 

Fiir   ze   dbnt    e'-re    fra-d6 

ge-ma''-lin h-don'-dTrt 

dont  zech'-tsich  mark  be- 
tra'-g'n. 

FoorcTit'-bar  to-i'-er. 

A'-b'r  don'-z'r  mi^-takhs- 
tish'. 

A'-le  ta'-ge  fa'-g'n  dont 
tsvi'-mal  de  be''-t'n  ya'-de 
■vo'-khe  frish  ii'-b'r-tse'-'n. 

Pro-be'-r'n,  or  iev-zoo'-kh'Ti. 


What  would  you  charge 
for  board  and  rooms  ?2 

Do  you  want  them*  by  the 
month  or  by  the  week? 

By  the  week. 

For  yourself  and  wife,  the 
board  would  be  one  hundred 
and  sixty  marks  a  week.* 

That 's  frightfully  dear. 

But  we  keep  a  first-class  table.* 

I  have  the  rooms  swept  twice 
every  day,  and  clean  sheets 
put  on  twice  a  week.* 

Well,  I  '11  try  it  for  a  week. 


6.  Es  ist  ^n^-g-e-ric/i'-tet. 

Hi-noon'-t'r-ga'-'n. 
Zer-vert^ 


Dinner  is  served.^ 

Let   us   go    down,   gentlemen. 
Dinner  is  served. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  DieseiH;  jenem,  dative  of  diesc,  jenc,  governed  here  by  the 
preposition,  ausser,  —  2  How  much  would  you  food  and  lodging  in 
these  rooms  count  {or,  reckon)?  —  ^  For  you  and  your  Mrs.  (spouse) 
would  the  board  hundred  and  sixty  mark  the  week  amount.  See  p.  84,1. 

4  And  tlie  beds  twice  each  week  fresh  to-cover-over. 

5  But  our  midday-table  is  of  first-class.  Notice  the  genitive,  erster 
(lit.:  o/-first),  instead  of  the  nominative,  erstc  (simply:  first). 

6  It  is  served.  —  •=•  Dieselben  {the  same)  is  used  here  instead  of  sie 
{them),  in  order  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  word  sie. 


142  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Setzen  Sie  sich  hierher,  mein  Herr. 

Auf  diese  Seite? 

Nein,  niein  Herr,  auf  die  andere  Seite. 

Wollen  Sie  Suppe  iiehmen? 

Ja,  bitte. 


Darf  ich   Ihnen   vielleicht^   etwas   Fisch 
aiibieten  ? 

Nein,  ich  daiike  schon.     Aber  vielleicht^  wiirden 

Sie  mir  ein  Scheibchen  ^  von  jenem   Hammel- 

braten  abschneiden. 
Er  sieht  wirklich  appetitlich  aus.^ 
Wollen  Sie   so   freundlich   sein   mir  das   Brot  zu 

reichen.     Or:  Bitte  reichen  Sie  mir  das  Brot. 
Bitte  reichen  Sie  mir  das  Salz.     Ah,  entschuldigen 

Sie,  es  ist  auf  dieser  Seite.  * 
Wollen  Sie  so  freundlich  sein  mir  die  Butter  zu 

reichen  ? 
Gewiss,  sehr  gem. 
Darf  ich  fragen,  ob   die   Herrschaften  f  etwas  zu 

trinken  wiinschen? 

Nein,    danke    schon.     Geben    Sie    mir    nur    eine 
Tasse  Kaffee. 


NOTES. 

1  Such  words  as  vielleicht  [perhaps),  doch  {yet),  nur  {only),  etc., 
are  often  used  in  German  merely  to  make  a  sentence  stronger,  or,  as 
liere,  more  polite.—  ^  Or,  ein  Stuc^  a jnece. 

8  From  aussehen,  to  look,  i.  e.,  to  appear ;  a  separable  verb, 
*  Auf  governs  the  dative  (dieser),  here,  because  no  motion  is  implied. 
Wliere   motion    [from  one  ])J<trr   to   (tuothrr)   is   im])lie(l,  aiif  governs 
the  accusative.     (See  second  sentence,  this   page:   Auf   diese  SeitCt 
See  pages  2G8,  269. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


143 


Ze'-ts'n  ze  zicTi  her'-liar' 
A-o6f  de'-ze  zi'-te? 

Zoo'-pe  na'-men? 


7.  Darf  ich  e^-nen  f  i-lic^t^ 
6t^-vas  f ish^  an^-be  -t'n  ? 

Nin,  ich  dafi'-ke  stLiin.  .  . 
,  .  in  ship'-cTt'n  fon  ya'-nem 
tia'-m  l-bra'-t'n  ap'-stini'- 
d'n. 

Zet  virk'-licTi  a-pe-tet'-lic7i. 

In  shtuk.'-ch'n  brot. 

Hi'-ch'TL  ze  mer. 

Bi'-te,  vV-ch'n  ze  mer  das 
zalts' a-oof  de'-z'r  zi'-te. 

Vwr'-d'n  ze  vol  de  gti'-te 
ha'-b'n. 

Ge-vis',  zar  gern'. 

.Darf  icJi  fra'-g'n,  op  de 
lier'-sh.af'-t'n. 

I'-ne  ta'-se  ka'-fa. 


Sit  down  hei'o,  .sir.^ 
On  this  side? 
No  sir,  on  the  other  side. 
Will  you  take  soup  ? 
If  you  please. 


May  I  offer  you  some 
fish?^ 

No,  thank  you.  But  would  you 
cut  me  a  (small)  slice  of  that 
leg  of  mutton.^ 

It  looks  really  appetizing. 
Will  you  have  the  kindness* 
to  pass  me  the  bread.* 

Please  pass  me  the  salt.  Ah. 
excuse  me,  it  is  on  this  side. 

Would  you  have  the  kindness  * 
to  pass  me  the  butter? 

Certainly,  sir.^ 

May  I  ask  if  the  ladies  and 
gentlemen  f  wish  something 
to  drink? 

No,  thanks.  Just  give  me  a 
cup  of  coffee. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Seat  yonrself  here;  or,  Please  take  liere  (your)  place.  Also :  Bitte, 
nehmen  Sie  hier  Platz.  —  2  Uare  I  to-you  perhaps  some  fish  offer? 

3  No,  I  thank  heautlfully.  But  perhaps  would  you  to-ine  a  slice  of 
that  mutton-roast  off-cut.  —  ■*  Will  you  bo  friendly  be  to-me  the  bread 
to  liand.  —  5  Certainly,  very  wi]linglJ^ —  *  Also,  but  not  frequent: 
Wollen  Sie  wohl  die  Giite  habeu  mir,  etc. 

t  Herrschaf t  =  dominion,  or  the  lord  or  lady  of  a  manor-house. 
Pie  Herrschaf  teu :  the  ladies  and  gentlemen. 


144  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Darf  ich  Ihnen  vielleicht  ein  Stiickchen  Melone 

anbieten  ? 
Ja,  bitte. 


8.  Hat  die  Waschfrau  meine  Wasche  nocli 
niclit  gebracht? 

Entschuldigen  f  gnadige  Frau,  sie  hat  die  Wasche 

zuriickgebracht. 
Wo  ist  sie? 

Ich  habe  sie  hinaufgenommen. 
Schon.     Wiirden  Sie  wohP  mit  mir  hinaufgehen^ 

und  sehen,  ob  alles  stimmt? 
Sehr  gern,  gnadige  Frau. 


9.  Sehen  Sie,  dort  auf    dem  kleinen  riinden 
Tiscli  ist  sie.^ 

Lassen  Sie  uns  sehen,  ob  alles  richtig  ist. 

Nein.     Ich   vermisse   ein    gesticktes    Taschentuch 
und  zwei  Damenkragen. 

Es    fehlen    auch    drei    Paar     Manschetten    von* 

meinem  Mann. 
Vergessen  Sie^  nicht  nach*  diesen  Sachen  zu  fragen. 

Gewiss,  gnadige   Frau,  ich  werde   es   nicht   ver- 
gessen. 

NOTES. 

1  Wohl,  like  vielleicht,  is  often  used  to  make  questions  more 
polite  and  deferential. —  2  jarfnauf,  because  the  motion  is  away  from 
ihe  place  where  the  speaker  is.  —  8  gee  page  84. 

*  Mit,  von,  nach,  prepositions  governing  the  dative  case. 

s  See  section  10,  on  following  page.  — fAbbr.  for  Entschuldigen  Sie. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


145 


In    sTitwk'-cTi'n    me-lo'-ne 
an'-be'-t'n  ? 


8.  Hat  de  vash^-fra-c)b^ 
1111^-116  ve^she  ....  nlcht 
ge-hrakht^  ? 

Ent-slidol^-di-g'n    gn^  -di- 
ge  fra-oo. 

Hi-na-oof'-ge-no'-m'n. 

Hi-na-oof'-ga'-'n  dbnt  za'n 
op  a'-les  sTitimt'  ? 

Zar    gern',    gn§.'-di-ge 
fra-oo'. 


9.  Za^-'n  ze  dort  a-^dbf 
dam  kli^-n6n  rdbn'^d'n 
tish''  ist  ze. 


Ich  fer-mi'-se  in  ge-sMik'- 
tes  ta'-sh.'n-too7^7i'  dont  tsvi 
da'-men-kra'-g'n. 

Es  fa'-l'n  a-dibkh  dri  par 
man-slie'-t'n.^ 

'Nakh  de'-zen  za.'-kh'ii  tsob 
fra'-g'n. 
Ge-vis'   gn§.'-di-ge    fra-oo. 


May  I  offer  you  a  slice  of  this 

melon  ?  * 
Yes,  please.f 


Has  the  laundress  not  yet 
brought  my  linen? 

I  beg  your  pardon,  madam,  she 

has  brought  it  back. 
Where  is  it  ? 
I  have  taken  it  up  stairs.^ 

Well !    Would  you  go  up  with 
me  and  see  if  it  is  all  right  ?  ^ 

Certainly,  madam. 


See!  there  it  is  on  the 
small,  round  table. 

Let  us  see  if  the  full  count  is 
there.^  . 

No.  I  miss  an  embroidered 
handkerchief  and  two  ladies' 
collars. 

Three  pairs  of  cuffs  of  my  hus- 
band are  also  missing.* 


Don't  forget   to   inquire 

these  things. 
No,  madam,  I  wont.^ 


after 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  I  have  it  up-there  taken. 

2  And  see  if  all  tunes  (or  ratlier,  agrees ;  that  is,  is  agreeable). 

3  If  all  correct  is. —  ^  it  (i,  e.,  there)  lacks  also  three  pair  cuffs  of 
my  man.  —  ^  Certainly,  madam,  I  shall  it  not  forget. 

*  A  small-piece  riielon.     ISee  page  179.  —  f  Yes,  pray. 


146  HOTEL    VND    PENSION. 

lO  NO    EMPHATIC    NOR    PROGRESSIVE 

The  Germans  have  neither  the  emphatic  form  (^T  do  write) 
say,  in  either  case,  I  write,  Icli  sclireibe.  Likewise,  in 
writing  f  but  must  say,  in  either  case,   Write  you,  Schreiben 

With  negations  the  construction  is  the  same.  Instead  of, 
write  not,  Ich  schreibe  niclit.  Or,  with  questions,  instead 
say,  in  either  case,   Write  you  not?  Schreibeii  Sie  niclit? 

Observe,  however,  tliat  when  in  a  negative  clause  the  verb 
negative,  whether  it  be  nicht,  nieinals   {never),   nirg-encls 
I  have  not  the  book  =  Ich  habe  das  Buch  nicht. 
When  the  verb  stands  in  a  compound  tense,  the  negative 

I  have  not  seen  the  book  for  a  week. 
I  shall  never  forget  it. 


11.  Haben  Sie  geschellt?t 

Haben  gnadige  Frau  geschellt? 

Ja.     Marie  hat  meine  Schuhe  nicht  geputzt. 

Und   ich   hatte  dem  Johann   die  Stiefel  meines 

Bruders  zu  wichsen  gegeben.* 
Und  er  hat  vergessen,  sie  zu  wichsen  *  und  die 

Kleider  meines  Sohnes  auszubiirsten.* 


NOTES. 

*  When  a  verb  in  a  compound  tense  has  an  infinitive  dependent  upon 
it,  the  usual  construction  is  observed  (see  page  36).  That  is  to  say,  in 
a  principal  clause,  for  instance,  the  past  participle  comes  at  the  end 
of  the  clause,  while  the  infinitive  immediately  precedes  it.  Ex. :  Und 
ich  hatte  dem  Johann  die  Stiefel  meines  BiMiders  zu  tvichsen 
gegeben.  However,  if  the  infinitive  has  (in  object,  the  usual  construction 
is  no  longer  followed ;  hut  t/ie  past  participle  comes  just  wJiere  it  would  in 
English,  wliile  t/ie  infinitive  ends  the  clatise.  Ex. :  He  lias  f(>ra;otten  to 
black  {infinitive)  my  boots  {object  of  the  infinitive).  Er  hat  vergessen 
{past  participle)  meine  Stiefel  zu  tvichseti  {infinitive). 


HOTEL    AIS'D    BOARDIAG-HOUSE. 


147 


FORMS    IN    GERMAN. 

nor  the  progressive  form  (/  am  ivriting).  They  can  only- 
questions,  they  cannot  say,  Do  you  write  f  nor,  Are  you 
Sie? 

I  do  not  write,  or  I  am  not  writing,  the  Germans  say  only,  I 
of,  Do  you  not  write?  or,  Are  you  not  writing f  they  can  only 


has  an  object  (Ex. :  I  have  not  the  booh;  I  do  not  forget  it),  the 
{nowhere),  or  any  other,  always  comes  after  the  object.     Ex. : 

I  do  not  forget  it  =  Ich  vergesse  es  nicJit. 
goes  with  the  infinitive  or  participle  to  the  end  of  the  sentence. 
Ich  habe  das  Buch  seit  einer  Woche  nicht  gesehen. 
Ich  werde  es  nie  vergessen. 


11.  Ha^-b'n  ze  g6-sh6ir. 

Gna'-di:ge  fra-d6. 

Ma-re'  . . .  nicht  ge-p<56tst'. 

Yo-han'  t s7ite'-f  1 .  .  .  . 

vik'-s'n. 


Fer-ge'-s'n 
bt^rs'-t'n. 


.  a-d6s'-tsoo- 


Did  you  ringr?^ 

Did  madam  ring?^ 

Yes.   Mary  has  not  cleaned  my 

shoes. 
And  I  had  given  my  boots  to 

John  to  black  (them).^ 

And  he  has  forg.  to  black  them 
and  to  br.  my  son's  clothes.^ 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Notice  how  the  Germans,  having  no  sucli  auxiliary  as  did,  change 
did  into  have.     Thus :  IHd  you  ring  f  becomes.  Have  you  rung  ? 

2  Have  worthy  lady  rung  ?     Form  of  expression  used  by  servants. 

3  Could  say,  meines  Bruders  Stiefel,  instead  of  die  Stiefel 
meines  Bruders.  But  the  Germans  do  not  usually  employ  that  form 
of  tlie  possessive,  except  in  poetry. 

4  And  I  liad  to  {the)  Jolm  the  boots  of  my  brother  to  black  given. 

5  And  he  lias  for<j:otten  tliem  to  black  and  my  son's  clothes  (out)  to 
brusli.  —  f  Or.  gekliiigelt,  ge-kliK'-'lt. 

X  Pron. :  Jo-lian'.    But  in  Saxony,  it  is  mostly  pronounced  Jo'-han. 


148  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Ich  hatte  es  Ihnen  doch  gesagt. 
Aber  bitte  geben  Sie  mir  die  Sachen.     Sie  solleii 
sie  sogleich  rein  machen. 

Johann,  wichsen  Sie  diese  Stiefel  und  biirsten  Sie 
diese  Kleider  aus,  aber  so  schnell  wie  Sie  nur 
konnen. 

Marie,  putzen  Sie  diese  Schuhe! 


12.  THE    PLACE    OF    PRONOUN-OBJECTS 

I. -WHEN   THERE   IS   ONLY 

Observe    that    the   pefsonal   pronoun-ohjects  \  [micli 

liim),  sie  (Jier),  ihr  {to  her),  es  (^7),  uns  {us,  to  us),  eucli  {you, 
immediately /o/Zoiy  the  verb  (or,  in  inverted  sentences,  the  sub- 

English  :  He  gave  me  the  things,  f    Or, 
He  gave  the  things  to  me, 

English  :  Did  my  brother  give  you  the  things  ?    Or, 
Did  my  brother  give  the  things  to  you  ? 


II. -WHEN   THERE  ARE   TWO 

When  there  are  two  pronoun-objects  in  the  same  clause, 

English  :  I  have  told  you  (about)  it, 
English  :  He  did  n't  send  Tiim  to-me. 


NOTES. 

*  The  subject  answers  to  the  question  whol  or,  ivhat?  Ex.:  (1) 
He  gave  me.  Question:  Who  gavef  Answer:  He.  He  is  the  subject. 
(2)  That  worries  me.  Question:  What  ivorries  you  f  Ans. :  That.  That 
is  tlie  subject.    See  i>age  114,  note  *. 

t  The  accusative  (or  direct  object)  answers  to  the  question 
whom?  or,  what?  Ex.:  He  sent  him.  Question:  Whom  did  he  seiid f 
Answer:  Him.     Him  is  accusative  or  direct  object.     The  dative  {or  in- 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


149 


Es  e'-nen  doch  ge-zakht. 

Ga'-b'n  ze  mer  de  za^-kh'n 
.  . . .  z6-glich'  Tin'  ■ma.'-kh'n. 


Bwrs'-t'n  ze  .  .  .  .  a-dos 
zo  slinel'  ve  ze  noor. 


Pd6'-ts'n. 


Yet  I  had  told  them  to  do  it> 

But  give  them  to  me.'^    I  am 

going  to  have  them  to  do  it 

at  once.^ 
John,   black   these   boots    and 

brush  these  clothes  as  quick 

as  you  can. 

Mary,  clean  these  shoes. 


IN    GERMAN. 


ONE  PRONOUN-OBJECT. 


(me),  mir  (to  me),  dich  {thee),  dir  {to  the),  ihn  {hiw),  ihm  {to 
to  you),  Sie  {you,  or  they),  Ihnen  {to  you),  ihnen  {to  them)] 
ject).  *Ex. : 

German,  always :  He  gave  to-rne  the  things. 

Er  hat  mir  die  Sachen  gegeben. 

German,  always :  Has  my  brother  to-you  the  things  given  ? 
Hat  mein  Bruder  Ihnen  die  Sachen  ge- 
geben ? 

PRONOUN-OBJECTS. 
the  accusative^  generally  precedes  the  dative,  f    Ex. : 

German  :  Ich  habe  es  {nee.)  Ihnen  {((at.)  gesagt. 
German  :  Er  hat  ihn  {cicc.)  mir  {dat.)  nicht  gesandt.  | 


NOTES. 

direct  object)  answers  to  the  question  to  whom?  or,  to  what?  Ex. : 
He  sent  to  me.  Question  :  To  whom  did  he  send  ?  Ans, :  To  me.  To  me 
is  (tnir)  the  dative.    See  page  115,  note  f. 

1  I  had  it  to-you  yet  told.  —  2  But  (I)  pray,  give  {ye)  to-nie  the 
things.  —  3  They  shall  tliem  at  once  clean  make. —  X  However,  with 
mir  and  dir,  the  accusative  may  either  precede  or  follow.  Ex.:  Er 
hat  es  mir  gesagt;  or,  Er  hat  mir  es  (or,  mtr*s)  gesagt. 


150  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Die  Familie.* 


Die  Eltern  (el'-t'rn), 

Der  Vater  (fa'-t'r), 

Die  Mutter  (mob'-t'r), 

Der  Schwieger vater  (stive'-g'r— ), 

Die  Schwiegermutter, 

Der  Mann,^ 

Die  Frau,2 

Der  Gross  vater  (gros' — ), 

Die  Grossmutter, 

Der  Onkel  (on'-k'l), 

Die  Xante  (tan'-te), 

Der,  die  Pate  (pa'-te), 

Die  Kinder  (kin'-d'r), 

Der  Sohn  (zon), 

Die  Tochter  (tokh'-Vr), 

Der  Knabe  (kna'-be), 

Das  Madchen  (mat'-cTi'n), 

Der  Enkel  (en'-k'l), 

Die  Enkelin. 

Der  Schwiegersohn, 

Die  Schwiegertochter, 

Der  Neffe  (ne'-fe), 

Die  Nichte  (nich'-te), 

Der  Vetter  (fe'-t'r), 

Die  Cousine  (koo-ze'-ne), 


Parents. 

The  father. 

The  mother. 

The  father-in-law. 

The  mother-in-law. 

The  husband. 

The  wife. 

The  grandfather. 

The  grandmother. 

The  uncle. 

The  aunt. 

The  godfather,  godmother 

The  children. 

The  son. 

The  daughter. 

The  boy. 

The  girl. 

The  grandson. 

The  granddaughter. 

The  son-in-law. 

The  daughter-in-law. 

The  nephew. 

The  niece. 

The  (male)  cousin. 

The  {feynalc)  cousin. 


1  Or,  more  rarely,  der  Ehemann  (a'-e-nian').  Also.  Oatte  (ga'- 
tg). —  2  Or,  more  rarely,  die  Ehefraii.  Also,  Gattin  (ga'-tiii).  For 
tlie  expressions  Ihr  Herr  Gemahl,  Ihre  Fran  Gemalilin,  see  ]).  155, 

*  Fa-me'-li-g. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  151 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart, 

VOKABELN. 

Die  Tag-eszeit,* 

Es  ist  zwolf  Uhr  (tsvulf),  It  is  twelve  o'clock. 

Es  ist  ein  Uhr,^  It  is  one  o'clock. 

Fiinf  Minuteii  nach  eins,^  Five  minutes  past  one. 

Zehn  Minuten  nach  zvvei  (Lsan),^  Ten  minutes  past  two. 

Ein  viertel  auf  drei  (fir'-t'l),  Quarter  past  two. 

In  zelm  Minuten  halb  fiini/         Twenty  minutes  past  four. 

In  fiinf  Minuten  halb  sechs,s|     Twenty-five  minutes  past  five. 

Halb  sieben  (lialp  ze'-b'n),f        Half-past  six. 

Fiinf  Minuten  nach  halb  sieben,^  Twenty-five  minutes  to  seven. 

Zehn  Minuten  nach  halb  achtJI  Twenty  minutes  to  eight. 

Drei  viertel  auf  neun  (no-in),    Quarter  to  nine. 

Zehn  Minuten  vor  zehn,^  Ten  minutes  to  ten. 

Fiinf  Minuten  vor  elf  (elf),*  Five  minutes  to  eleven. 

Gegen  Mitternacht,|  Nearly  midnight. 


Eine  Uhr  (oor),  A  watch,  clock. 

Ihre  Uhr  geht nach,^'*  Your  watch  is slow. 

Ihre  Uhr  geht vor,^®  Your  watch  is fast. 

Sie  ^^  geht  richtig  {rich'-tich),  It  goes  right. 


I  Or,  es  ist  eins  (Ins).  —  2  Or,  iiber  eins.     Lit. :  over  one. 

3  Or,  iiber  zwei  (tsvi).  —  •*  Lit. :  in  ten  minutes  half-five.  Also, 
zwanzigt  Minuten  nach  vier.f  —  ^  Lit.:  in  five  minutes  half  (of ) 
six.     Also:  fiinf  Minuten  vor  halb  sechs. 

6  Or,  iiber  halb  sieben.—  ''  Or,  uber  halb  acht. 

8  Or,  in  zehn  31inuten  zehn.—  ^  Or,  in  fiinf  3Iinuten  elf. 

^^  From  nachgehen  (nafc/i/-ga'-'n),  vorgehen,  separable  verbs, 

II  Lit.  :  she,  b;'cause  die  Ulir  is  feminine. 

*  Ta'-ges-tsif,  tim(^  of  day.  —  f  Lit. :  half  ^)f)  seven.  -  +  Tsvan'- 
tsich  .....  f er zeks afelit gX'-g'n  mi'-Vr-ndkht', 


152  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  recited  as  a  real  conversation.     (For 
Self-Study,  see  Directions  before  Part  I,) 

CONVERSATIONS. 

1,—  VON  DER   ZEIT. 

Welche  Zeit  ist  es^  auf^  Hirer  Uhr?  —  Es  ist  drei 
viertel  auf  zwei.  Aber  ich  glaube,  meine  Uhr  geht 
nach.^  —  Wie  viel  geht  sie  nach?  —  Ich  glaube,  dass 
sie  zehn  Minuten  nachgeht.  Aber  haben  Sie  Ilire 
Uhr  nicht  mehr?* — Doch,^  ich  habe  sie  noch.^  Ich 
habe  sie  nur  gestern  abend  aufzuziehen^  vergessen. 

2.  —  FORTSETZUNG. 

Entschuldigen  Sie;  konnten  Sie  mir  vielleicht  sagen, 
wie  viel  Uhr  es  ist?  —  Es  ist  zehn  Minuten  iiber  halb- 
zehn  auf  meiner  Uhr.  —  Geht  sie  richtig?  —  Sie  geht 
nicht  sehr  richtig,  aber  jetzt  geht  sie  auf  die  Minute.^ 
Ich  habe  sie  im  Vorbeigehen^  nach  der  Rathausulir  ^^ 
gestellt."     Geht  Ihre   Uhr   nicht?  —  Nein,  die   Feder 


Pronunciation   and   Translations. 

1  Or,  Wie  spiit  ist  es?     Lit. :  liow  late  is  it?  —  2  By  (lit. :  on). 

8  Or,  Dass  meine  Uhr  nachgeht.  Notice  that  the  'separahle' 
verb  nrtc/igeht,  which,  in  a  principal  clause,  separates  into  geht 
nach  {see  preceding  sentence),  remains  unseparated  in  a  dependent  clause 
(clause  beginning  witli  dass,  als,  etc.). 

4  No  more,  no  longer.  —  ^  Doch  is  used  instead  of  ja,  as  an  affir- 
mative answer  to  a  negative  pr()j)osition. —  ^  Still. 

7  From  aufziehen,  to  wind  up.     Lit. :  to  draw  up. 

8  It  goes  right.     Tiit. :  it  goes  on  the  minute. 

9  Im  for-bi'-ga'-'n,  in  passing.     Lit.:  in  past  going. 
10  Rat'-ha-oos  -oor'.  City  Hall  clock. —  "  Regulated. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  153 

ist  zerbrochen.^  Ich  muss  sie  zu  einem  Uhrmacher^ 
bringen,  um^  sie  repariereii^  zu^  lassen.  —  Dann  gehen 
Sie  zu  meinem  Uhrmacher,  Theodor  Wolff,  Unter  den 

Linden  No.  63 Aber  es  ist  spiit,     Ich  muss  Sie 

verlassen.^    Leben  Sie  wohl.^ 

3.—SILBERZEUG* 

Wo  haben  Sie  diese  Bestecke"  gekauft?  —  Welche 
meinen  Sie  ?  Die  silbernen  ?  —  Ja,  diese  da.  —  Ich 
habe  sie  nicht  gekauft.  Man  hat  sie  mir  geschenkt.^ 
Es  ist  ein  Weihnachtsgeschenk,^  das  ^^  mir  meine  Pate 
gemacht  hat.  Gefallen  sie  Ihnen?  —  Ich  finde  sie 
wirkHch  sehr  hiibsch.^^  Von  welcher  Firma^^  sind 
sie  denn?  —  Sie  sind  in  dem  Silberwarengeschaft  von 
Gebriider  Friedlander  ^^  gekauft  worden.  —  Das  kenne 
ich  nicht.  Wo  ist  das?  —  Es  ist  auf  dem  Schloss- 
platz.^*  —  Richtig;  jetzt  erinnere  ich  mich.^^  Da  will 
ich  auch  hin;^'^  ich  muss  ein  Geschenk  fiir  meine 
kleine  Nichte  kaufen.  —  Gut,  lassen  Sie  uns  morgen 
zusammen  hingehen.  —  Morgen,  um  wie  viel  Uhr?  — 
Um  zwolf  Uhr.i7 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  FS'-d'r,  spring;  tsgr-bro'-fc/i-'n,  broken.—  2  Watchmaker. 

3  Um  zu,  in  order  to.  —  ^  Re-pa-re'-ren,  to  mend, 

s  Fer-la'-s'n,  (to)  leave. —  ^  \At.:  live  {ye)  well;  i.  e.,  farewell. 

7  Be-s/i-te'-ke,  silver  {i.  e.,  knives,  spoons,  and  forks).     Lit.:  these 
'cases.' —  8  Geschenkt  from   schenken,  shgii'-k'n,  to  present,  to 
give  as  a  present.  —  9  VF-nafc/its-ge-sheiak',  Christmas  present, 
i"  Das,  used  here  instead  of  welches,  which.  —  n  Hicpsh,  pretty. 
12  House,  or  "make." —  13  Gebriider,  brothers.     Used  only  as  here. 
14  Castle  place. —  i^  Now  I  remember.     Lit. :  now  remind  I  myself . 
16  Supply  the  verb  gehen.     Lit. :  there  will  I  also  hence  (go). 
I'  Or,  zu  Mittag. —  ■■  Zil'-b'r-tso-ic/i',  silverware.   Lit.:  nWwQv-stuff. 


154  HOTEL    UNI)    PENSION. 

To  he  translated  and  written   Into  German,  hid  also  to  he  recited 

orally  in  the  class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see  Directions 

be/ore  Part  I. ) 

EXERCISES. 

l.—AT   THE    TABLE* 

The  soup  is  served.  —  Will  you  take  soup  ?  —  If 
you  please,^  madam.  —  John,  take  this  off',^  and  bring 
us  the  leg  of  lamb,^  with  the  beans  ^  and  cauliflower.^ 

—  John,  you  have  forgotten  to  put  on^  the  salt-cellar 
and  the  pepper-box.  —  Shall  I  offer  you  a  slice  ^  of 
this  leg  of  lamb  ?  —  Yes,  please.  It  looks  very  appe- 
tizing.^—  Mr.  Klaus,  would  you  have  the  kindness  to 
carve ^  this  leg  of  lamb?  —  Certainly,  madam.  —  In 
the  meanwhile,  I'll  help  your  wifef  to  the  spinacli.^^ 

—  Not  any  for  me,  thank  you.^^  —  Do  you  like  lean  ?  ^^ 
Yes,  give  me  some  of  the  lean,^^  if  you  please 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Wenn  ich  bitten  darf.     Lit.:  if  T  beg  may. 

2  Nehmen  Sie  dies  fort.—  3  Die  Lammkeule. 

*  Die  Bohnen. —  ^  Der  Blumenltohl;  has  no  plural. 

6  Lit. :  you  have  forgotten  tlie  salt-cellar,  etc.,  to  put  on  (hinzu- 
stellen).  Could  also  say,  simply:  You  have  the  salt-cellar  and  the 
})epper-box  forgotten.  —  '  Dare  T  to  you offer? 

8  Appetitlich,  a-pg-tet'-lic/i..  -  ^  Vorzuschneiden,  for'-tsdo- 
shni'-d'n,  from  vorschneideii,  a  ' xepdralde''  verl).  Also,  zu  tran- 
chieren  (traii-she'-r'n).  —  ^  Mittlerweile  will  ich  Hirer  Fran 
Spinat  vorlegen.  Lit.  :  luranwhiK'  will  1  to-yowv  wife  .  . .  before-lay. 
ii  Nicht  fUr  mich,  not  for  iiu'.  —  i-  Maj;eres  Fleisch;  or,  simply, 
mager,  —  ^^  Etwas  mageres.  —  *  Bei  Tisch.  —  f  See  note  §,  opp.  p. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  155 

Do  you  know  that  Mrs.  Vogel's  brother-in- 
law  has  already  left  ^  the  city  ?  —  Yes.  Albert's  god- 
father called  at  his  house  yesterday.^  He  had  left  the 
city  day  before  yesterday  with  his  wife  and  children.^ 
—  Where  did  they  go?*  —  They  have  gone  to  Rome 
for^  (a)  few^  days.  After  that,t  they  are  going  (to) 
stay^  two  weeks  in  Florence  with^  their  grandfather. 


Note.  —  Study  the  compound  tenses  of  Werden,  p.  503. 


2.  — ABOUT  A    WATCH. 

Look !  ^  My  uncle  bought  me  a  watch  yesterday.^ 
—  How  beautiful  1^0  Where  did  he  buy  it?ii— At 
Tiffany's.  —  At  Tiffany's  here,  in  Berlin?  — Yes,  he 
has  a  branch  %  here.  I  '11  take  you  to  the  store  to- 
morrow morning ?^^ — All  right.     At  what  time?  .  .  .  . 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  That  Mrs.-V.'s  brotlier-in-ljuv  the  city  already  left  (verlassen)  has 

'^  Was  yesterday  at  his  liouse  (an  seinem  Haus). 

8  He  had  the  city  day-before-yesterday  (vorgestern)  with  his  {femi- 
nine^ dative)  wife  and  his  {neuter,  dative)  children  left.  His.  The  article 
or  possessive  adjective  is  repeated  in  German  before  consecutive  nouns, 
if  of  different  genders  or  numbers.  —  ■*  Auf ,  with  the  accusative. 

5  Einige.  -  ^  T^it. :  will  they stay. —  ^  Bei  (with  dative  case). 

8  Sieh,  ze.  —  ^  Lit. :  my  uncle  has  to-me  yesterday  a  watch  bought. 
ii»  Wie  schon.  —  "  Lit.  :  Where  has  he  it  (lit. :  her)  bought? 
12  I  will  you  to-morrow  morning  (morgen  friih)  after  to-the  store 
take.—  *  Wo  sind  (lit.:  are)  sie  hingegangen? 

t  Danach.  —  %  Zweiggeschaf t  (tsvie/i/-ge-sheft').  —  ^  Your 
wife  =  Ilire  Fran  or  (more  politely)  Ihre  Fran  Gemahlin  (lit. :  your 
lad;/  conaorf^.  Likewise,  Yoitr  husband  =  lhr  Mann,  or  (n\ore  politely) 
Ihr  Herr  Gemalil.     The  latter  forms  are  (piite  frequent. 


156  HOTEL    VND    PENSION. 

To  be   read   by  means   of   the  translation  on  opposite  page,  in 

preparation  for  reading  aloud  and  translating 

in  class. 


—  ^^riebri^  ber  @rofee  ^flegte  jebe^mal,  tt>enn  er  etnen 
neuen  ©olbaten^  in  einent  fdner  ©arberegimenter  ^  erblidte, 
benfelben  an^ureben^  unb  folgenbe  brei  grageu  an  i^n  5U 
rid)ten : 

—  2Bie  alt  bift  bu?* 

—  3Bie  (ange  bienft  bii  fc^on? 

—  ^efommft  bii  ^i'mftUd;^  beinen  (Sotb^  unb  bein  ^rot? 

—  C^inft  mar  ein  junger  gran^ofe  ^  in  eine§  ber  @arberegi= 
menter  eingetreten.'  ^er  ^au^tmann  benfelben  ijatU  xi)n  ini 
\)ovan§>  barauf  aufnter!fant  gemad;t/  ha^  ber  £dnig  i()n 
nac^ften^^  fragen  !onne,t  i»ib  ba  er  fein  ^eutfd;  Derftanb, 
i(;m  anent^fof)(en/^  bie  2lnti:)orten "  auf  biefe  brei  gragen 
fic^  in  beutfd)er  (5:prad)e  ein^u^rcigen.^^  ^alb  barauf  fanb 
eine  9iet>ue^^  ber  ^ruj^!pen  ftatt,  unb  al§>  ber  Slonig  ben 
neuen  ©olbaten  erblidte,  trat  ^*  er  an  x^n  ^eran/*  uin  bie 
geU)of)n(icJ)en  ^^  gragen  gu  t^un.  S^if^tt^S  P^Q*  ber  £dnig 
aber  bie^mal  mit  ber  p)z[tm  ?^rage  an. 


1  Zol'-da'-t'n.  —  2  Gar'-de-ra-gi-men'-t'r. 

8  An'-tsdo-ra-d'n;  anreden  is  a  'separable'  compound  verb.    For 
the  position  of  zu,  see  page  234,  note  1. 

*  Notice  how  the  king,  speaking  with  his  soldiers,  uses  du. 

6  PiiSkt'-lic/t.—  6  Zolt. 

7  Fran-tso'-zS In'-gg-trS'-t'ii,  from  eintreten  (in'-trX  -t'n). 

8  A-dof'-merk'-sam.     Strictly  :  attentive  made.  —  ^  Nac/t'-stSns. 
10  An'-Sm-pfo'-len.—  n  Ant'-vor'-t'n. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  157 

For  Self-Study,  the  German  text  should  he  read  by  means  of  the 

literal  translation  until  thoroughly  mastered,  then 

read  aloud  in  German. 


READING. 

— N 

THE    THREE    QUESTIONS. 

—  Frederick  the  Great  used  every-time,  when  he  a 
new  soldier  in  one  of-his  regiments-of-the  guard  dis- 
covered, the-same  to-address  and  (the)  following  three 
questions  to  him  to  put: 

—  How  old  art  thou  ? 

—  How  long  servest  thou  already? 

—  Receivest  thou  punctually  thy  pay  and  {thy)  bread? 

—  Once  was  a  young  Frenchman  in  one  of-tlie  regi- 
ments-of-the guard  entered.  The  captain  of-the  same 
liad  him  in-tlie  advance  thereupon  notified,  that  the 
king  him  very-soon  question  could,  and  as  he  no  Ger- 
man understood,  ^o-him  advised  the  answers  to  these 
three  questions  (upon)  himself  in  German  to-impress. 
Soon  thereupon  found  a  review  of-the  troops  place,  and 
as  the  king  the  new  soldier  spied,  walked  he  to  him  up, 
in-order  the  usual  questions  to  make.  As-it-happened,^^ 
began  the  king,  however}'  this  time  with  ..... 


12  In'-tsoo-pra'-g'n,  from  einpragen.  —  i3  Rg-vii'. 

1^  Trat' he-ran',  imperfect  of  herantreten,  'separable^  verb. 

When  '  sep<imhle^  verbs  are  used  in  a  principal  clause,  the  prefix 
(heran^  or  an,  or  aus,  or  auf,  etc.)  is  placed  after  the  verb  and  at  the 
end  of  the  clause. 

15  Ge-vun'-li-c/i'n.  —  16  Strictly  :  accidentally.  —  i?"  Strictly :  hut. 

*  Fing an,  imperfect  of  anfangen,  irregular  and  separable 

verb. 


158  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

—  „2Bie  (ange  bienft  bii  fc^on?"  fagte  er  ^u  i^m. 

—  „©m   mio  iwan^xQ^  3a^re!"   autiDortete  ber  jimge 

—  ^er  ^ditig  erftaimt,^  fragte  tt)eiter:  „3Sie  alt  bift  bu 

— ,,  ©in  ^ierteljabr ! "  Derfet^te^  ber  ©efragte. 

—  „9^un  U)a(;r^>aftic3/' ^  erimberte  ber  ^onig,  „entU)eber 
(;a)t  bu  ben  ^erftanb^  i^erloren^  ober  id)/' 

—  „2iae  beibe,  ©m.  m-ijeftdt!"^  antmortete  ber  ©olbat, 
meldjer  biefe  3Sorte  beic  £dnig§  fiir  bie  britte  grage 
l;ie(t.8 

— ''^un  ha§>  ift  it)ir!ac^  ba§  erftc  9}^a(/'  fagte  ber  ^onig, 
„bafe  id)  in  ©egemuart^  ineiner  gefainten^^  @arbe  fiir  l>er= 
riidt^i  erfldrt  U)erbe.     ^^erfte(;ft  'i)n  mid)  benn  gar  nid)t?" 

—  ®er  (Solbat,  beffen^''^  ^^orrat^^  an  ^eutfd;  jet^t  er^ 
fd^opft^*  iyar,  fd)tDieg^^  ftiU.  2l[§  ber  ^onig  aber  feine 
gragen  erneuerte,  antoortete  er  i^tn  auf  fran^ofifd),  t>a\] 
er  gar  fein  ®eutfd)  l>erftel;e.^^  griebrid)  iad)U^''  (;cr-^{id)^^ 
iiber  beu  brodigen^^  ^^orfall,  !(o^fte  bem  jungen^  gremb= 
ling  frcimblid)  auf  bie  ©d)u(ter'^^  unb  em^fal)!  i[;m,  fetnen 
bienft  ^iuiftlid;  ^u  \)errid)ten/2  aber  and)  ja  bie  beutfd)c 
(3prad;e  5U  lernen. 


1  Tsvan'-tsic/t.  —  2  Er-s/ita-ooiit'. 

3  Fer-zets'-te,  iin])erfect  of  versetzen.  —  4  Var-haf'-tic/t. 

5  Fer-s/itant'.  —  ^  Past  jiarticiple  of  verlieren. 

7  O-i'-'re   mii-ye-stat'.     Observe  that,   in    writing,  Euere,  when 
connected  with  Majestiit,  becomes  abbreviated  into  Ew. 

8  From  halteii,  see  pa-ie  517.—  ^  Ga'-g'ii-vart'. 
1"  Ge-zam'-t'ii.  —  n  Fer-riikt'. 

1--2  Der,  who,  (lessen,  of  wlioni,  whose.—  13  For'-rat'. 
14  Er-shupft'.—  i5  Shvec/r,  imperfect  of  schweigen,  an  irregular 
verb. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  159 

—  "How  long  serves!  thou  already?"  said  he  to-him. 
— "  One  and  twenty  years !  "  answered  the  young 

Frenchraan. 

—  The  king  astonished,  asked  further:  "How  old 
art  thou,  then?" 

—  "Three  months!^  answered  the  questioned-one. 
— "  Then,  indeed,"  replied  the   king,   "  either  hast 

thou  the  understanding  lost,  or  I." 

—  "  {All)  both,  your  majesty !  "  answered  the  soldier, 
who  these  words  of  the  king  for  the  third  question 
took.24 

—  "  Now,  that  is  really  the  first  time,"  said  the  king, 
"that  I,  in  presence  of  my  assembled  guard,  (for)  crazy 
declared  was.    Understandest  thou  me  then  at-all  not?  " 

—  The  soldier,  whose  stock  of  German  now  ex- 
hausted was,  was-silent  entirely.'^  As  the  king  hoiuever 
his  questions  renewed,  answered  he  ^o-him  in  French, 
that  he  quite  no  German  understood.  Frederick 
laughed  heartily  over  the  ludicrous  affair,^^  patted  the 
young  stranger  with-friendliness  on  the  shoulder  and 
recommended^^  him,^  his  service  punctually  to  per- 
form, but  also  indeed  the  German  tongue  to  learn. 


16  Verstehe  is  in  the  subjunctive  present.  For  the  use  of  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  see  pages  340,  341. 

J'  Lafc/i'-te,  imperfect  of  lachen.—  is  Herts'-lic/i. 
I'J  D*r6'-li-g'n.  —  20  Ydon'-'n.—  21  Shool'-t'r. 

2-  Fer-rTc/i'-t'n,  inseparable  compound  verb. 

-^  Strictly:  a  qnarter-yenr. —  24  Strictly:  held. 

25  Strictly:  quietly,  calmhj. —  26  Or,  incident. 

2"  Empfahl,  imperfect  of  empfehlen.  Empfehlen,  is  an  insepa- 
rnhle  verb.  That  is  to  say.  its  prefix  emp,  is  never  separated  from  tlio 
rest  of  the  word.  —  28  Strictly  ;  «o-him. 


160  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Let  the  learner  read  these  over,  copy  them  off,  and  then  select  three 
out  looking  at  the  hook,  some  hours  afterward.    For  model  of  German 


Sptrefppn^ett|♦ 

1.  3rc^tung§i?oII.* 

2.  3c^  t)erb(ei6e  ac^tung§t>o((, 

3^r  er^ebeuer  Wiener. 

3.  3d^  ^abe  bte  ©^re  ^u  ^eic^nenf  a(§^ 

3^r  ergebenfter  Wiener. 

4.  gd^  bitte  6ie,  bie^erfic^erung  unferer  Dor^ugUc^en 
god)ad)tung  §u  gene^migen.J 

5.  @eneC;migen   <Bk,^  meine   ^erren,   bie   S8erficf)erung 
anferer  i;)olIfommenen  (^rgeben()eit.§ 

6.  ©ene^migen  ©ie,^  meiu  §err,  'i>^n  2lugbrudf||  meiner 
:)or5uglid;en  §od)ad;timg.^ 


1  To  sign  as.    See  page  100. 

*  Or,  empf  angen  Sie.  —  »  Strictly  :  high  respect. 

*  A*li'-t6oSs-f6r.—  t  Tsic/>'-n$a, 


HOTEL    AND    BOAKDING-HOUSE.  161 

or  four  to  memorize.     These  he  should  write  in  German  script,  with- 
letters,  see  pages  48  and  49. 


CORRESPONDENCE. 


THE    ENDING    OF    LETTERS. 


2. -BUSINESS   LETTERS. 


1.  I  am  very  respectfully  yours. 

2.  I  am,  sir, 

Your  obedient  servant. 

3.  I  have  the  honor  to  be,^  sir, 

Your  devoted  servant. 

4.  I  pray  you  to  accept  the  assurance  of  our  perfect 
consideration. 

5.  Accept,  gentlemen,  the  assurance  of  our  perfect 
devotedness. 

6.  Please,  sir,  accept  the  expression  of  my  distin- 
guished consideration. 


I  Fer-zic/i'-'rdbn'  oon'-z'-rer  for-tsii'-gli-c/i-'n  lidkh'-akh'-tobii 
tsoo  ge-na'-mi-g'n. 

§  ()Oii'-z*rer  fol'-ko'-m'-nen  er-ga'-b'n-hit.—  ||  A-oos'-drdok' 


162  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Learn  the  following  seritences. 

SOME    IDIOMATIC    PHRASES. 


Don't  mention  it  I 


Das  ist  schade  (siia'-de).         It  is  a  pity. 

Das  schadet  nichts.     ) 

Bitte  sehr  (bi-te  zar'). ) 

Ich  nehme  mir  die  Freiheit.  I  take  the  liberty.^ 

Das  ist  schon  (shun).  That 's  right. 

Darf  ich  Sie  um  ein  Glas  May  I  ask  you  for  a  glass 

Wasser  bitten  ?  of  water  ? 

Wie  heissen  Sie  (lii'-s'n  ze)?  What  is  your  name? 
Ich  heisse  Smith.  My  name  is  Smith. 

Wo  gehen  Sie  hin  ?  Where  are  you  going  ?  ^ 

Ich  gehe  nach  der  Konigs-  I  am  going  to  King  Street. 

strasse. 
Ist  es  sehr  weit  (vif)  ?  Is  it  very  far  (off)  ? 

Nein,  es  ist  hier  dicht  dabei.  No,  it  is  close  to  us.^ 
Haben  Sie  heute  abend  et-  Have  you  any  engagement 

was  {or,  Jamil . :  was)  vor  ?       for  to-night  ? 
Ich  wiirde  gern  mit  Ihnen  I  shall  be  happy  to  take  a 

einen    Spaziergang    ma-       walk  with  you. 

chen. 
Ich  mochte  gern  mit  Ihnen  I  wish  lo  speak  to  you. 

sprechen. 
Das  eilt  gar  nicht  (nt).  There  is  no  great  hurry. 

Was  giebt's  (or,  was  ist  los)?  What  is  the  matter?^ 
Was  bedeutet  das?^  What  does  that  mean? 


1  Lit.  :  I  take  to-me  the  liberty.  —  2  j  if   •  iifjicrc  r/n  you  hither? 

3  Lit. :  here  close  thereby.  —  <  Pron. :  vas  gept's.  —  5  Be-do-i'-tet. 


ParI^  II. 


HOTEL   AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


HOTEL  UKD  PE:N^sio:sr. 


SECTION     III. 


1. 

RENTING  UNFURNISHED  ROOMS. 

2. 

TO  ASK  ONE'S  WAY. 

3. 

THE  GERMAN  GENITIVE. 

4. 

THE  NUMBERS. 

5. 

MEETING  A  FRIEND. 

6. 

DEPARTURE  FROM  THE  HOTEL. 

7. 

A  STRANGER  IN  POTSDAM. 

8. 

HOW  TO  DIRECT  A  LETTER. 

les 


164  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 


GERMAN. 

1.  Wir  sind  im  Entresol. 

Das  ist  viel  besser. 

Ich  mochte  nicht  so  hoch  wohnen. 

Was  wollen  Sie  machen?  Ich  hatte  von  Wien 
aus^  geschrieben,*  man  mochte  mir  Zimmer  in 
der  Bel-Etage^  bereit  halten.^ 

Nun? 

Nun,  und  wie  ich  angekommen^  bin,  hat  man^ 
mich  auf  den  dritten  Stock  gebracht. 


Note.  — Study  the  Passive  Voice, 


2.   Ich   wiirde    sofort   in    ein   andres   Hotel 
gelien. 

Das  wiirde  ich^  auch  thun. 


NOTES. 

1  Von  Wien  aus.    Aus  is  pleonastic  and  could  be  left  out. 

2  Die  Bel-Etage;   or,  die  erste  Etage.  —  »  Or,  dass  man  mir 

Zimmer bereit  lialten  moclite.   Or,  simply,  Ich  hatte 

aus  geschrieben,  mir  Zimmer bereit  zu  lialten. 

-*  Angekommen,  past  jiarticiple  of  ankommen,  separable  verb. 
Separable  verbs  in  tbe  past  participle,  insert  ge  between  the  prefix  and 
the  verb.  —  5  Observe  tlie  construction.    See  page  84. 

*  Past  participle  of  schreiben,  a  'strong'  verb. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


165 


ni. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1,  Ver  zint  im  an^-tr'-s6F. 

Zo  liokh  vo'-nen. 

Fon  ven'  a-obs  ge-slire'- 
ben ....  bel'-aL^a'-ztie  be-rit' 
hal'-t'n. 

Noon. 

Ve  ich  an'-ge-ko'-men  bin 
....  ge-bra7i;?it'. 


We  are  on  the  entresol. 

That 's  much  better. 

I  wouldn't  go  up  as  high  as 

that.i 
What  could  you  do?^     I  had 

written  them  from  Vienna  tc 

keep  me  rooms  on  the  first 

floor.* 
Well? 
Well,  when  I  got  here  they  put 

me  on  the  third  story.* 


page  510. 


2.  Ich  vvir^-d6  zo-fort^  in 
in  g,n^-dr6s  ho-t6F  ga^-'n. 


I  'd  change  my  hotel  right 
away.^ 

So  would  L« 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 

1  T  wouldn't  so  high  live. 

2  What  will  you  do? 

8  I  liad  from  Vienna  (out)  written,  one  might  to-me  rooms  in  the 
first  floor  ready  keep. 

4  Now,  and  as  I  arrived  have  (lit. :   am)  has  one  me  on  the  thir(^ 
story  brought. 

5  I  would  at  once  in  another  hotel  go. 

6  That  would  I  also  do. 


166  HOTEL    AND    PENSION. 

Aber  ich  will  eine  Privatwohnung  nehmen. 

Eine   moblierte   Wohimng?     Ich   weiss/  was   Sie 

wollen. 
Nein.     Eine  unmoblierte  ^  Wohnung. 

Wie  so? 

Weil  ich  fiir  immer  in  Berlin  bleiben  will. 

Das  ist  freilich  ganz  etwas  anderes. 

In  diesem  Fall  miissen  wir  eine  Wohnung  such  en. 

Ich   gehe   grade   zu   einem    Borsenmakler   in    der 

Behrenstrasse. 
Wollen  Sie  mit  mir  kommen?     Wir  konnen  uns 

unterwegs  umsehen. 
Das  passt  mir  grade. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Strong  Declension, 


3.  Wissen  Sie,  wo  die  Behrenstrasse  ist? 

Nicht  genau.     Wir  miissen  uns  erkundigen. 

Ah !     Da  ist  ein  Schutzmann. 
Entschuldigen   Sie.     Wie  kommen  wir  nach   der 
Behrenstrasse  ?  ^ 


NOTES. 

1  From  wissen,  to  hww.    Ich  weiss,  du  weisst,  er  weiss;  wir 
wissen,  ihr  w^isst,  sie  w^issen. 

2  In  most  words,  compounded   with  the  negative  prefix  un,  the 
accent  is  on  the  prefix. 

3  Or,  Welches  ist  der  nachste  (nearest)  Weg  nach  der  Behren- 
strasse ? 


HOTEL    AND    BOAIIDJNG-HOUSE. 


16V 


Pri-va.t/-vo'-nd6n. 


Mu-bler'-te. 


OOn'-mu-bler'-te. 


Fri'-lich. 
In  de'-zem  faV. 
Gra'-de   b<ir'-z'n-ma'-krr 
.  .  .  ,  Ba'-r'n. 

C30n^-t'r-vac7is'    66in'-za'- 


Past. 


Bat  I  want  to  find  a«  apart- 
ment. 

A  furnished  apartment  ?  I  have 
just  what  you  want.^ 

No.      An    unfurnished    apart- 
ment. 
How  is  that? 2 

Because  I  want  to  stay  perma- 
nently^ in  BerUn. 

That 's  a  difterent  thing. '^ 

In  that  case  we  have  to  look. 

I  am  just  going  to  a  broker's 
in  Behren  Street. 


Will  you  come  with  me? 

will  look  ^  on  the  way. 
That  will  just  suit  me.® 


We 


Classes  II.  and  III.,  pages  468  and  469. 


3.  VF-s'ii    ze   vo   de  Ba^- 
r'ii-s7itra^-s6  ist? 

Ge-na-oo' er-koon'-di- 

g'n. 
Shoots' -man'. 
E  n  t-sliool'-di-g'  n. 


Do  you  kiiOAV  where  Belir- 
enstrtisse  is  ? 

Not  exactly.     We  shall  have  to 

ask.'^ 
Ah  !     Here  is  a  policeman. 
I  beg  pardon.     Which    is   the 

way  to  Behrenstrasse  ?  ® 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  I  know  what  you  want.  —  2  How  so? —  3  For  ever. 

4  Tliat  is  {indeed)  entirely  something  different. 

5  (Ourselves)  abont-look. 

6  That  suits  me  exactly. 

7  We  have  to  [ourselves)  inquire. 

8  Excuse  ye.     How  do  we  go  (lit. :  come  we)  to  the  Behrenstrasse, 


168  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Gehen  Sie  die  dritte  Strasse  links;  dann  geher 
Sie  grade  aus.  Es  ist  die  fiinfte  Strasse  zui 
Rechten. 

Danke  sehr. 

Sielie  da!     Hier  haben  wir,  was  wir  wollen. 

Was  meinen  Sie? 

Sehen  Sie  den  Zettel  am  Haus? 

Was  stelit  darauf?^ 

Lassen  Sie  uns  sehen: — Wohnungen  zu  vermieten, 
mobliert  oder  unmobliert. 

Das  suchen  wir  grade.    Gehen  wir  hinein! 


Guten  Morgeii,  meine  Herren.    Was  stelit 
zu  Ihren  Diensten?^ 

Sie  haben  Zimmer  zu  vermieten? 

Ja,  mein  Herr.    Wiinschten^  Sie  dieselben  mobliert 
oder  unmobliert. 

Ich  mochte  sie  gern  selbst  moblieren. 

Nun,  ich  konnte^  Ihnen  eine  unmoblierte  Woh- 
nung  in  der  zweiten  Etage  vermieten. 


NOTES. 

1  Germans  generally  translate  on  it  (or,  on  them),  to  it,  (or,  to  them), 
with  it  (or,  with  them),  of  it  (or,  of  them),  etc.,  by  darauf,  damit, 
da  von,  dazu,  etc.,  using,  instead  of  the  pronoun,  the  adverb  da  (before 
vowels,  dar)  combined  with  a  preposition  (aiif,  on;  zu,  to;  etc.). 

2  Or,  Womit  kann  ich  Ihnen  dienen?  \At.  :  wha-ewith  can  I  you 
serve  f    Or,  less  politely.  Was  wiinschen  Sie  ? 

8  Observe  the  use  of  imperfect  subjunctive  instead  of  the  present 
indicative,  to  render  the  expression  more  deferential. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


169 


Dri'-te  ....  links' 
te  .  .  .  .  recTi'-t'n. 


.  iiini' 


Ze'-e  da'. 

Vas  mi'-nen  ze? 

Tse'-t'l. 

Dar-a-oof. 

Vo'-noofi-'n  tsd6  fer-me'- 
t'li,  mu'-blert'  o'-d'r  dbn'- 
md-blert'. 


4.  Goo^-t'n  m6r^-g'n,  mi^- 
116  h6r^-'n.  Vas  shtat^ 
tsoo  e^-ren  deii^-st'n? 

Ya,  min  tier'. 


^elpst'  m-a-ble'-r'n. 
(DOn'-mii-bler'-te. 


Take  the  third  to  the  left,^  niid 
then  go  straight  ahead. ^  It 's 
the  fifth  turning  to  the  right.® 

Many  thanks.* 

See !  there's  ^  what  we  want. 

What  do  you  mean  ? 

Do  you  see  that  bill  out  ?  ^ 
What  is  there  on  it  ?  ^ 

Let  us  see.  Apartments  to  let, 
furnished  or  unfurnished. 

That 's  exactly  what  we  want.^ 
Let  us  go  in.® 


Good  morning',  gentle- 
men. What  do  you 
wish  ?  i'^ 

You  have  apartments  to  let? 

Yes,  sir.  Would  you  want^^ 
them  furnished  or  unfur- 
nished ? 

I  would  like  to  furnish  them 
myself.^^ 

Well,  I  could  ^3  rent  you  an  un- 
furnished apartment  on  the" 
second  floor. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Go  iyoti)  the  third  street  left.  —  2  Straight  out. 

8  To-the  right.    (Zur  =  zuder.) 
4  (I)  thank  (you)  much. 

6  There  have  we,  etc.  —  6  On  the  house. 

7  What  stands  on-it.  —  «  That  look  we  just  (for). 

9  Go-we  in.—  10  What  stands  to  your  services? 
u  Might-want  you  the-sanie.  —  12  Self. 

18  I  might-be-able.  —  "  In  the. 


170  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Das   ist   etwas   hoch.     Aber   icli   glaube,   es   wird 

gehen. 
Bitte  bemiihen  Sie  sich  nach  oben,^  gentlemen. 

Wie,  Sie  sprechen  englisch? 
Nein,  ich  spreche  es  nicht  mehr. 

Friiher  sprach  ich  es  ein  wenig. 


5.   Aber   Sie   fuliren    viiis  ja^    in    die    dritte 
Etage. 

Entschuldigen  Sie,  mein  Herr.  Erst  kommt  das 
Parterre,^  dann  die  erste  Etage,  und  endlich  die 
zweite  Etage,  wo  wir  jetzt  sind. 

Ich  bin  ganz  ausser  Atem. 

Da  sind  wir,  meine  Herren. 

Ah!     Das  ist  also  die  Wohnung?    Sie  gefallt  mir 

nicht  sehr. 
Ich   mochte    eine   kleinere   Wohnung    haben,   die 

weniger  zu  moblieren  kostet. 

Gut,  wollen  Sie  noch  eine  Etage  hoher  gehen? 


NOTES. 

1  Or,  bemiihen  Sie  sich  hinauf  (or,  herauf);  sich  hinauf  be- 
niuhen^  to  walk  up;  sich  hinuuter  (or,  herunter)  bemiihen,  to 

come  (or  go)  down.     Lit. :  one's  self  down  to-trotihle,  etc. 

2  Ja  is  often  inserted  as  an  exi)letive,  to  add  emphasis.    It  is  as  if 
wc  said,  liere  :  You  are  really  taking  us  to  the  third  story. 

3  From  the  French  word,  parterre. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


171 


Et'-vas  Yiohh'. 

Be-mii'-'n 5'-b'n. 

Ze  sTipre'-cTi'n  eii'-lish.? 

Ich  sJipre'-che  es  nicht 
mar'. 

Irii'-'r  shprakh  ich  es  in 
va'-nich. 


That 's  a  little  ^  high  (up). 
I  think  it  would  do.^ 


But 


5.  A^-b'r  ze  fii^-r'n  dons 
ja  in  cle  dri^-t6  a-ta^- 
zli6. 

Erio-siiool'-di-g'n    ze 

arst' par-ter' ent'- 

lich,  de  tsvi'-te. 


A-oo'-s'r  a'-t'm. 

Ge-felt'. 

Va'-ni-g'r kos'-tet. 


Please  walk  up  stairs,*  gentle- 
men. 
What,  you  (can)  speak  English? 
No  (sir),  I  do  not  speak  it  now.'* 

Formerly,  I  used  to  speak  a 
little.^ 


H<i'-'r. 


But  yon  are  taking"  ns  ^  to 
the  third  story. 

I  beg  your  pardon,  sir.  First, 
there  is'  the  ground-floor, 
then  the  first  floor,  and  then 
the  second,  where  we  ;ire 
now. 

Well!    I  am  all  out  of^  breath. 

We  are  there  now,  gentlemen. 

Ah!  that  is  the  apartment.  I 
don't  like  it  very  well.* 

I  would  like  one  somewhat 
smaller  ^^  and  less  expensive 
to  furnish. ^^ 

Well,  would  you  ^^  go  one  story 
higher  ? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Something ;  i.  e.,  somewhat.  —  '-^  It  will  go. 
8  Trouble  yourselves  [to)  upstairs.  —  *  I  speak  it  no  more. 
6  Spoke  I  it  a  little.  —  ^  You  lead  us.  —  "^  First  comes,  etc. 
8  Out-of. —  9  It  pleases  {to)  me  not  much. 
1"  I  would-like  a  smaller  apartment  to-have. 
11  Which  less  to  furnish  costs.—  12  Wjn  you? 


172  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Noch  eine  Etage?     Ich  weiss  wirklich  nicht. 

1st  die  Wohnung  kleiner? 

Ja,  mein  Herr,  kleiner  und  billiger. 

Zeigen  Sie  sie  mir?^ 
Bitte  kommen  Sie! 


6.  Es  ist  sehr  dunkel  auf  dieser  Treppe. 

Halten  Sie  sich  am  Gelander  fest. 

Das  heisst^  auf  deutsch  ein  Gelander? 

Ja.     Aber  hier  ist  die  Wohnung. 

Sie  sehen,  der  Salon  geht  auf  die  Strasse,  wahrend 
die  Schlafzimmer  und  die  Kiiche  auf  den  Hof 
gehen. 

Ich  wiirde  diese  Wohnung  nehmen,  aber  sie 
scheint  mir  kaum  gross  genug  zu  sein. 

Warum  nehmen  Sie  nicht  die  in  der  dritten 
Etage? 


NOTES. 

J-  Also  :  Zeigen  Sie  mir  dieselbe,  lit. :  snow  me  (he-same.  —  Not  so 
coniMion  in  familiar  conversation,  however. 

2  Heissen^  used  intransitively,  =^o  call^  to  name,  to  hid.  For  in- 
stance :  /  bade  him  come  in,  ich  hiess  ihn  hereinkommen.  In  an 
intransitive  sense,  heissen  corresponds  to  the  English  to  be  called. 
Thus:  Wie  heissen  Sie?  (lit.:  how  are  you  called ?)  =  what  is  your 
namef  Das  heist  =  that  is  to  say.  Was  soil  das  heissen?  (lit.: 
what  must  that  be  called f)  =  what  is  the  meaning  of  that?  Es  heisst=<7 
is  said ;  people  say. 


HOTEL   AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


178 


Nokh'. 

Kli'-ner. 
Bi'-li-ger, 

Tsi'-gen  ze  ze  mer. 


Another    story!      I    scarcely 

know.^ 
Is  the  apartment  smaller? 
Yes,   sir,    (the    apartment '  is) 

smaller  and  cheaper. 
Well,  you  might  show  it  to  me.^ 
Very  well,  sir ;  let  us  go  up  to 

it.« 


zar    ddbii^-k'l 
•zer  tr6^-p6. 

.  .  .  am  ge-len'- 


6.     Es    ist 

Hal'-t'n  .  . 
d'r  fest. 
Hist'. 


Sa-16n' v^'-rent 

kti  -che tLOf. 

Sliint k?i-d6in  gros'. 


De'. 


These    stairs   are   very 
dark.^ 

Hold  on  to  the  baluster.^ 


You  call  that«  "Gelander"  in 
German  ? 

Yes,  sir.  But  here  is  the  apart- 
ment. 

You  see  the  parlor  windoAvs 
open  on  "^  the  street,  while  the 
sleeping-rooms  and  kitchen 
are  facing'  the  yard. 

I  would  decide  for^  this  one; 
but  it  scarcely  seems  to  me 
to  be  large  enough.® 

Why  would  you  not  take  the 
one  on  the  third  floor? 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  I  know  really  not. 

2  Show  (you)  it  to-me. 
8  Please  qome  (you). 

4  It  is  very  dark  on  these  stairs. 

5  Hold  iyou)  yourself  on  the  baluster  ifaM). 

6  That  is  called. 
^  Go  on. 

8  I  would  take. 

8  It  seems  to-me  scarcely  large  enough  to  be. 


174  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

7.  THE    GENITIVE    CASE 

Tlie  genitive  of  nouns  in  German  is  used  with  most  of  the 
other  through  the  preposition  of. 

The  genitive  of  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  is  formed, 
tlie  noun  belongs)  one  of  the  endings  es,  s,  en,  or  n  to  the 

Tlie  genitive  of  ferninine  nouns  is  the  same  in  form  as 

MASCULINE. 

NOMINATIVE.  GENITIVE. 

Det**  Mann.  Des*  Mannes. 

De^  Vater.  Des  Vaters. 

Der  Fiirst.  Des  Fiirstew. 

Der  Knabe.  Des  Knabe^.  f 


8.  Selien  Sie  die  vielen  Wandsclirauke  liier, 

Ja,  das  ist  sehr  bequem. 

A¥ie  lange  sind   die  Korridore  des  Abends  %   er- 

leuchtet. 
Bis  Mitternacht. 
Wie  viel  betragt^  die  Miete?^ 
Zwolf  hundert  Mark  das  Vierteljahr. 

Das  ist  fiirchterlich  teuer. 

Sie  miissen  bedenken,  mein  Herr,  dass  die  Woh- 
nung  ganz  in  der  Nahe  der  Linden,  der  Theater 
und  der  Borse  ist.  Dies  ist  das  schonste  Stadt- 
viertel  in  Berlin. 


NOTES. 

1  From  betragen,  to  amount ;  sieh  betragen,  to  conduct  one's  self, 
to  behave.  —  ^  Qr,  wie  hoch  ist  die  Miete  ?  how  high  is  the  rent  ? 

*  As  seen  here,  the  article  agrees  in  case  and  gender  with  its  noun, 
taking  on  a  nominative  (der,  die  or  das),  genitive,  dative  or  accusative 
ending,  in  the  masculine,  feminine  or  neuter,  according  to  the  gender 
and  case  of  its  noun. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


175 


WITH    GERMAN    NOUNS. 

meanings  in  which,  in  EngUsh,  one  noun  is  connected  with  the 

in  the  singular,  by  adding  (according  to  the  class  to  which 

nominative. 

the  nominative.    Examples : 

NEUTEB. 

NOMINATIVE.  GENITIVE. 


Das  *  Kind. 
Das  Madchen. 

Die  Frau.* 


FEMININE. 


Des  ^  Kindes.  f 
Des  Madchens. 

Ber"^  Frau.f 


8.  De  fe^-16ii  vanr-slir^n'- 
ke. 

Be-kvam'. 

Laii'-e ko'-ri-do-re 

er-16-ic7i'-tet. 

Bis  nii'-t'r-na?^7it'. 
Be-trelcTit'  de  me'-te. 
Tsvulf'-tLOon'-d'rt    mark 

fir'-t'l-yar'. 

TiiTc7i'-Vr-lich  to-i'-'r. 

Be-den'-k'n in   d'r 

n§.'-e te-a'-t'r 

blar'-ze  .  .  .  StLtin'-ste  sTitat'- 
fir'-t'l. 


You  see  there  is  abundant 
closet  space.^ 

Yes,  that  is  very  convenient. 
How  late  ^  are  the  halls  lighted 
at  night  ? 

Till  midnight,  sir. 

What  is  the  rent  ?  » 

Twelve    hundred     marks    per 

quarter. 
It 's  frightfully  dear. 

Remember,  sir,  that  the  apart- 
ment is  right  ^  by  the  theater 
and  Exchange.^  This  is  the 
nicest  quarter  in  Berlin. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  See  (you)  the  many  closets  (lit. :  wall-presses)  here. 

2  How  long  are  the  halls  o/-the  evening  lighted? 

8  How  much  amounts  the  rent?  —  •*  Also,  liegt.    Lit. :  lies  (i.  e., 
situated) .  —  5  Quite  in  the  neighborhood  of. 

t  The  genitive  plural  of  all  nouns  is  like  their  nominative  plural. 
J  Des  Abends.    Strictly  :  o/ the  evening.    See  page  178. 


176  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Der  Eigentiimer  hat  alles  neu  machen  lassen.^ 

Dazu  wird  das  Haus  sehr  gut  in  Ordnung  ge- 
halten. 

Alles  das  ist  zu  beriicksichtigen. 

Gut!  Ich  will  die  Wohnung  nehmen.  Aber  icli 
brauche  einen  Schliissel.  Ich  bin  ein  Journalist 
und  muss  wahrend  der  Nacht  arbeiten.* 

Gewiss!  Ich  will  Ihnen  einen  Schliissel  geben. 
Wir  haben  friiher  einen  Journalisten  gehabt, 
der  auch  wahrend  eines  TeUesf  der  Nacht 
arbeitete,  aber  er  schrieb  hier,  zu  Hause. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Strong  Declension, 


NOTES. 

1  The  past  participle  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  (konnen,  wollen, 
miissen  mogen,  sollen,  durfen),  and  the  verbs  (selien,  lioren, 
heissen,  helfen,  machen  and  lassen),  is  changed  into  the  intinitive, 
whenever  it  has  dependent  upon  it  another  verb  in  the  infinitive. 
Ex. :  Er  hat  das  Buch  auf  dem  Tisch  gelussen  {no  infinitive 
depending  on  gelassen).  But :  Er  hat  das  Buch  auf  dem  Tisch 
liegen  lassen  (the  infinitive  liegen  depending  on  lassen. 

*  Der  Nacht,  genitive  of  die  Nacht.  The  genitive  is  governed 
liere  by  the  prep,  wahrend.     See  Government  of  the  Genitive,  page  178. 

t  Eines  Teiles,  genitive  of  ein  Teil.  The  genitive  is  governed 
here  by  the  prep,  wahrend.    See  Government  of  the  Genitive,  page  178. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


177 


f'-g'n-tli'-in'r no-i'. 

Da-tsoo' in  6rt'-nd6n 

ge-lial'-t'n. 

Tsdo  be-mk'-zic7j'-ti-g'n. 

Ich    bra-o6'-A;7je     i'-nen 

sh-lu'-s'l zliobr-na-list' 

naA^Tit ar'-bi'-t'n. 

Gre-vis' ar  shrep. 


The  landlord  has  had  every- 
thing refitted  anew.^ 

Moreover,  the  house  is  very 
well  kept.^ 

All  that  is  to  be  considered.^ 
Very  well !  I  'il  take  the  apart- 
ment. But  I  need  a  key.  1 
am  a  newspaper  man,  and 
must  write  in  the  night.* 
Certainly !  I  '11  give  you  a 
night-key.  We  had  a  news- 
paper man  before,^  and  he  ^ 
also  had  to  work  part  of  the 
night.  But  he  wrote''  here 
in  the  house. 


Classes  IV.  and  V.,  pages  470,  and  471. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Has  everything  new  make  {i.  c,  to  be  made)  let. 

2  Moreover,  is  the  house  very  well  in  order  kept.  — See  page  84,  I. 

8  Is  to  consider.  In  English,  the  infinitive  used  after  to  be,  is  the 
infinitive  passive.  In  German,  the  infinitive  used  after  sein  must  be 
tlie  infinitive  active.  Thus,  English  :  His  death  is  to  be  feared;  German : 
Sein  Tod  ist  nfu  furchten.     Lit. :  his  death  is  to  fear. 

4  I  must  during  o/-the  night  work. 

6  Friiher,  earlier,  or  before ;  comparative  of  f riih,  early. 

6  We  have  formerly  a  journalist  had  who  also  during,  etc.  —  Notice 
the  use  of  der  (lit. :  the)  instead  of  welcher. 

7  He  wrote,  er  schrieb,  imperfect  of  schreiben. 


178  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

USE    OF    THE    GENITIVE    IN    GERMAN. 

As  already  stated  on  page  174,  the  genitive  is  used  in  most 
of  the  meanings  in  which,  in  EngUsh,  one  noun  is  connected 
with  another  through  the  preposition  of. 

Note  1.  —  Sometimes  when  of  is  used  in  EngUsh,  it  may  be 
rendered  either  by  the  genitive,  in  the  regular  way,  or  by  the 
dative  with  the  preposition  von,     Ex. : 

,,    ,      ^,      ,    ,      ,         (Die  Biicher  meines  Bruders  (r/e^i.)/  ^r, 
My  brother's  books  = -^  ^^.    ^..  ,  .  „      /     f    ,s 

(  Die  Bucher  von  menieaw  Bruder  {dat.). 

Note  2.  —  The  genitive  is  often  used  to  express  time  in  an 

indefinite  way.     Thus  : 

One  day  =  Eines  Tages. 

In  the  morning  =  Des  Morgens. 

In  the  Winter  =  Des  Winters."^ 

Note  3.  —  The  Germans  have  no  possessive  case.    They 

cannot  say,  The  teacher's  hook,  My  father's  coat,  but  only : 

The  book  of  the  teacher.        Das  Buch  des  Lehrers. 

The  coat  of  my  father,  Der  Rock  meines  Vaters.  % 


GOVERNMENT    OF    THE    GENITIVE. 

(1)  By  Prepositions.  —  Some  prepositions  require  the  noun 
follov/ing  them  to  be  in  the  genitive.  For  full  list  of  these,  see 
page  430.  The  most  frequent  are  statt  (or  anstatt).  instead; 
trotz,f  in  spite  of;  wahrend,  during ;  and  wegen,  on  account 
of.    Ex.: 

Instead  of  a  book  =  Anstatt  eines  Buches. 

In  spite  of  the  rain  =  Trotz  des  Regens. 

During  the  night  =  Wahrend  der  Nacht. 

During  the  Summer  =  Wahrend  des  Sommers. 


*  When  the  time  is  exjjressed  definitely,  the  accusative  is  used. 
Ex, :  On  that  day  =Jene»i  Tag.    See  page  116. 

t  Trotz,  however,  frequently  governs  tlie  dative  as  well  as  the 
genitive.     Plx. :  Trotz  dewi  Regen;  or,  Trotz  des  Regens. 

X  In  poetry,  liowev  m-,  the  p  isscs.sive  case  is  frequently  used.  Thus: 
Des  Todes  riilirendes  Bild,  the  pathetic  figure  of  dcdfli.  Also,  with 
proper  noiuis.  Thus  :  Ilerrn  xuul  Frau  Heines  Ziiiiiuer,  the  room  of 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  U<  Inc.     Sec  p.  2U. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  179 

(2)  By  Verbs.  —  Some  German  verbs  require  their  objects  to 
he  in  the  genitive.  Such  are:  gedenken,  to  remember;  be- 
diirfen,  to  need;  schonen,  to  spare ;  etc.     Ex. : 

Eemember  me  =  Gedenke  meiner  (lit. :  remember  o/-me). 
I  need  help  =  Ich  bedarf  der*  Hiilfe  (Ut. :  I  need  o/-the  help).^ 

1=  Some  verbs  (such  as  ariklagen^  etc.)  require  persons  in 
the  accusative,  and  things  in  the  genitive,     Ex. : 

Er  klagte  fnich  dcs  Betrugs  an=  He  charged  me  with  fraud. 

2.  Some  reflexive  verbs  as,  sich  eriimern,  to  remember  (lit. : 
one^s  self  to  remember) ;  sich  erbarmeii,  to  have  mercy  on 
(lit. :  one's  self  to-move-to-pity) ,  also  take  their  second  object  in 
the  genitive,     Ex.: 

I  remember  that  day  =  Ich  erinnere  mich  jenes  Tages.^ 
God  has  mercy  on  the  sinner  =  Gott  erbarmt  sich  des  Siinders.^ 


OMISSION    OF    THE    GENITIVE. 

I.  —  A  noun  following  nouns  expressing  ^neasure,  weight, 
numbers  and  quantify  is  not  placed  in  the  genitive,  and,  in 
fact,  remains  invariable.     Thus  : 

A  bottle  of  wine  =  Eine  Flasche  Wein  (lit. :  a  bottle  wine). 

This,  however,  is  not  the  case  if  the  second  noun  is  preceded 
by  an  adjective.     It  is  then  placed  in  the  genitive,     Ex. : 

A  bottle  of  this  wine=Eine  Flasche  dieses  Weins  (lit.:  o/-thisw.). 

II.  —  Likewise,  when  naming  cities  or  countries,  of  is  not 
expressed  at  all  (/.  e.,  no  genitive  is  used).     Ex. : 

Die  Stadt  Berlin  (lit. :  The  city  Berlin)  =  The  city  of  Berlin. 
Das  Konigreich  England  (lit. :  The  kingdom  England)  =  The 
kingdom  of  England. 


1  Bediirfen  and  schonen  govern  the  accusative  as  well.  So  we  say 
indifferently:  Ich  bedarf  der  Hiilfe  (lit.:  I  need  q/-the  help);  or, 
Icli  bedarf  die  Ilulfe  (lit. :  T  need  the  help;  accusative). 

2  Lit. :  I  remember  me  o/-tluit  day.  x 

3  Lit. :  God  himself  moves-to-pity  o/-the  sinner.  Notice  the  genitive 
ending  on  the  noun  Sunders,  as  well  as  on  the  article  des. 


180  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Grundzahlen.* 


Eins,» 

ins, 

1 

Ein  und  zwanzig,' 

21 

Zwei, 

tsvi, 

2 

Zwei  und  zwanzig, 

22 

Drei, 

dil, 

3 

Drei  und  zwanzig, 

23 

Vier, 

fer, 

4 

Vier  und  zwanzig. 

24 

Funf, 

fi^nf, 

5 

Fiinf  und  zwanzig, 

25 

Sechs, 

zeks, 

6 

Sechs  und  zwanzig. 

26 

Sieben, 

ze'-b'n, 

7 

Sieben  und  zwanzig. 

27 

Acht, 

akht, 

8 

Acht  und  zwanzig. 

28 

Neun, 

no-in, 

9 

Neun  und  zwanzig, 

29 

Zehn, 

tsan, 

10 

Dreissig,^     dri'-sicTt, 

30 

Elf, 

elf, 

11 

Ein  und  dreissig. 

31 

Zwolf, 

tsvulf, 

12 

Zwei  und  dreissig, 

32 

Dreizehn, 

dri'-tsan, 

13 

Drei  und  dreissig, 

33 

Vierzehn, 

fir'-tsan,2 

14 

Vier  und  dreissig, 

34 

Fiinfzehn, 

funf'-tsan, 

15 

Funf  und  dreissig,  etc., 

35 

Sechzehn, 

zecTi'-tsan, 

16 

Vierzig,2    tlr'-tsich, 

40 

Siebzehii, 

zep'-tsan, 

17 

Ein  und  vierzig. 

41 

Achtzehn, 

aA:7tt'-tsan, 

18 

Zwei  und  vierzig. 

42 

Neun  zehn, 

no-in'-tsan, 

19 

Drei  und  vierzig, 

43 

Zwanzig, 

tsvan'-tsicTj, 

20 

Vier  und  vierzig, 

44 

1  Ein,  eine,  ein  (before  a  noun),  or  einer,  eine,  eins  (when  used 
without  a  noun),  is  declined  like  the  indefinite  article.  In  counting, 
the  neuter  form  eins  is  always  used.  As  to  the  other  cardinal 
numbers,  they  are  usually  undeclined  (t.  e.,  invariable). 

2  Observe  the  short  sound  of  i,  although  it  is  written  ie, 

8  The  Germans  never  say,  as  in  English,  twenty-one,  etc.,  but  ein 
und  zwanzig  {one  and  twenty),  etc. 

4  In  dreissig,  the  syllable  zig  has  become  ssig.  —  *  Groont'-tsa'- 
I'n,  Cardinal  numerals.     Lit. :  ground  {or  foundation)  numbers. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  181 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOCABULARY. 
Cardinal  Numbers. 


Funfzig, 

funf'-tsicTt, 

50 

Ein  und  funfzig,  etc., 

in  oont  funf -tsicA, 

61 

Sechzig, 

zech'-tsich, 

60 

Ein  und  sechzig,  etc., 

in  oont  zech'-tsich. 

61 

Siebzig,^ 

zep'-tsich, 

70 

Achtzig, 

akhV-tsich, 

80 

Neunzig, 

no-in'-tsich, 

90 

HLindert,^ 

hoSn'-d'rt, 

100 

Hundert  und  eins,^ 

oont  ins, 

101 

Hundert  und  zwei,  etc.,* 

oont  tsvi, 

102 

Zweihundert, 

tsvi'-lid6n'-d'rt, 

200 

Dreihundert, 

dri'-hdon'-d'rt, 

300 

Vierhundert, 

fer'-tLobn'-d'rt, 

400 

Funf  hundert, 

fiinf'-tioon'-d'rt. 

500 

Tausend,^ 

ta^^'-z'nt, 

1000 

Zweitausend, 

tsvi'-ta-oo'-z'nt, 

2000 

Hunderttausend, 

100,000 

Eine  Million, 

i'-ne  ini-li-5n', 

A  million 

Eintausendachthundert  (i 

und)  ^  neun  und  achtzig,® 

1889 

1  Or,  siebenzig,  ze'-Vn-tsicI*.  —  «  The  English,  a  hundred,  a  thon- 
%and,  are  expressed  in  German  without  the  article  :  hundert,  tausend 
[never,  ein  hundert,  ein  tausend;  except  in  dates).  Hundert  and 
tausend,  when  nouns,  are  declinable  (i.  e.,  variable).  Hunderte, 
hundreds,  der  Tausende,  of  tlie  tliousands, 

3  Or,  hundert  eins,  etc.,  without  und. 

4  One  hundred  and  twenty-one  =  hundert  ein  und  zwanzig,  etc.; 
one  hundred  and  thirty  =  hundert  ein  und  dreissig,  etc. 

5  Und  may  1)c  used  or  omniited. 

6  Or,  achtzehnhuudert  neun  und  achtzig. 


182  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

The  following  vocabulary  to  be  learned  by  heart. 


Derierste,t        The    1st 

])er  1  zweite,f        * 

'        2d 

Der  1  dritte,t 

'        3d 

Der  ^  vierte,t         ' 

'      4th 

Der  fiiiifte,!          ' 

'      5th 

Der  sechste,t        * 

'      6tli 

Der  siebente,t       ' 

'      7th 

Der  achte,2            * 

'      8th 

Der  neunte,           ' 

'      9th 

Der  zehnte,            ' 

'    10th 

Der  elfte, 

'  nth 

Der  zwolfte,           ' 

'    12th 

Der  dreizehnte,     ' 

'    13th 

Der  vierzebnte,     ' 

*    14th 

Der  funfzehnte,    ' 

*    15th 

Der  sechzehnte,    ' 

'    16th 

Der  siebzehnte,     ' 

'    17th 

Der  acbtzehnte,    ' 

'    18th 

VOKABELN. 
The  Ordinal  Numbers.* 


Der  neunzehnte,  The    19th 

Der  zwanzigste,f  "  20th 

Der  ein  und  zwanzigste,^  "  21st 

Der  zwei  und  zwanzigste,  "  22d 

Der  dreissigste,  "  30th 

Der  ein  und  dreissigste,  etc.,  "  31st 

Der  vierzigste,  etc.,"j"  ".  40th 

Der  fihifzigste,  etc.,t  "  50th 

Der  sechzigste,  etc.,f  "  60th 

Der  siebzigste,  etc.,f  "  70th 

Der  achtzigste,  etc.,  "  80th 

Der  neunzigste,  etc.,  "  90th 

Der  hundertste,          .  "  lOOtli 

Der  hundert  und  erste,  "  101st 

Der  zwei  hundertste,  "  200th 

Der  tausendste,  "  1000th 

Der  zwei  tausendste,  "  2000th 

Der  letzte  (lets'-te),  "  last. 


1  Before  feminine  nouns,  der  is,  of  course,  changed  to  die ;  and 
before  neuter  nouns,  to  das.    Der  dritte,  instead  of  der  dreite. 

2  Der  achte  (one  t),  instead  of  der  achtte. 

8  In  compound  numbers  the  last  only  can  be  an  ordinal :  Der 
hundert  vier  und  zwanzigs*e,  tlie  124tli. 

*  The  Ordinal  Numbers  (Ordnungzahlen,  ort'-nooiis-tsii  -I'n),  are 
formed  from  tlie  Cardinal  Numbers,  (1)  by  suffixing  te,  from  zwei  to 
neunzehn;  (2)  by  suffixing  ste,  from  zwanzig  upward. 

t  Pronunce. :  Srs'-te,  tsvi'-te,  dri'-te,  funf'-te,  fer'-te,  sek'-stS, 
ze'-ben-tS,  afc/t'-tS,  ....  tsvan'-tsif/t-ste,  ....  fir'-tsTc/i-s*tej, .  .  , , 
funf'-tsic/f-ste,  ....  zec/^'-tsic/t-ste, ....  zep'-tsic/t-ste» 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  183 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart 


VOCABULARY. 
Ordinal  Adverbs. 


Erstens  (ars  -t'ns), 
Zweitens  (tsvi'-t'ns), 
Drittens, 


First. 

Secondly. 

Thirdly. 


Viertens, 

Zehntens, 

Elftens, 


Fourthly. 

Tenthly. 

Eleventhly. 


Fractional  Numbers 

Die  Halfte  (de  lielf'-te),i 

Ein  halb  (in  lialp'),^ 

Anderthalb  (an'-d'rt-lialp'),' 

Drittehalb  (dri'-t'-lialp'), 

Viertehalb,  etc.,  (fer'-t'-lialp'), 

Ein  drittel  (dri'-t'l), 

Ein  viertel  (fir'-t'l), 

Ein   fiinftel  (fwnf'-t'l), 

Drei  achtel  (akh'-Vl), 

Vier  hundertstel  (h.d6n'-dert-st'l), 

Sieben  tausendstel  (ta-oo'-zent-st'l), 


The  half.i 

A  half. 

One  and  a  half. 

Two  and  a  half. 

Three  and  a  half. 

A  third. 

A  fourth. 

A  fifth. 

Three-eighths. 

Four-hundredths. 

Seven-thousandths. 


Einmal  (in'-mal),  Once.*  Allemal  (a'-le — ),  At  all  times. 
Zweimal  (tsvi'-mal),  Twice.  Jedesmal  (ya'-des),  Every  time. 
Dreimal  (dri'-mal),     Thrice.  Manchesmal,*  Many  times. 


1  Die  Halfte  is  a  noun. —  2  Halb  is  an  adjective  and  is  placed 
after  tlie  article:  ein  halber  Tag,  half  a  day. 

s  Instead  of  ^weitehalb.  The  old  Ibrni  for  the  second,  was  der 
aiidere  (lit. :  the  other).  This  acconnts  for  the  form  atulertlvaXX) 
(an  abbreviation  for  ein  tmd  das  andere  halb.  Lit. :  one  and  the 
other  half)  instead  of  istveitehnlh, 

4  Distinguisli  ein'mal,  once,  from  einmal',  once  upon  a  time;  the 
only  difference  between  them  being  in  the  place  of  the  accent. 

••••  Man'-c/igs. 


184  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  he  learned  hy  heart,  and  recited  as  a  real  conversation.     {For 
Self-Study,  see  Directions  before  Part  I,) 

CONVERSATIONS. 

l.-BEGEGNUNG  AUF  DER  STRASSE* 

Nun,  haben  Sie  eine  Wohnung  gefundeii?  —  Nein, 
ich  will  vorlaufigi  im  Grand  Hotel  bleiben.  Besuchen^ 
Sie  mich  doch  morgen !  —  Ich  mochte  wolil,  aber  ich 
kann  nicht.  —  Wann  konnten  Sie  denn  kommen?  — 
Ich  glaube,  ich  konnte  Donnerstag^  oder  Freitag 
kommen.  —  Nun  gut,  ich  erwarte  Sie.  Halten  Sie 
aber  Wort.  —  Ja,  Sie  konnen  sicher  auf  mich  rech- 
nen.* — Also,^  auf  Wiedersehen!  Meine  Empfehlungen^ 
an  Ihre  Frau  Gemahlin.  —  Danke,  ich  werde  es  be- 
stellen.''  Auf  Wiedersehen.  —  Empfehlen  Sie  mich 
Ihrer  Frau  Schwagerin.^ 

^.-REISEN. 

Warum  will  Ihre  Freundin  diesen  Sommer  nicht 
mit  uns  nach  Italien  ^  reisen  ?  —  Sie  wollte  wohl,  aber 
sie  kann  Berlin  nicht  verlassen. — Will  sie  nicht  noch 


Pronunciation   and  Translations. 

1  For'-lo-T-fic/i,  provisorily  ;  i.  e.,  for  the  present. 

2  Be-zoo'-/:/*,'ii,  to  visit,  to  call  on. 

3  Do'-n*rs-tafc/i.',  Tliursday  ;  Fri'-tafc/«/,  Friday. 

•*  Count,  <lei)end. —  ^  go;    'Wdl ! —  6  (jomplitncnts,  respects. 
^  Deliver  it.  —  8  Remember  nie  to  your  sister-in-law.     Lit.:  remem- 
ber me  to  your  lady  sister-ill-law. —  ^  I-ta'-li-eu. 
*  Be-gSe/i-'-iidon,  meeting  upon  the  street. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HQUSE.  185 

nach  Rom  und  Florenz^  gehen,  bevor  sie  nacli 
Amerika  ziiruckkehrt  ?  —  Doch,  mein  Herr.  Aber  sie 
gedenkt'-^  erst  im  Herbst  zu  gehen.  —  Und  sie  will 
audi  nach  Spanien^  reisen?  —  Spricht  sie  nicht  gut 
spanisch  ?  —  Sie  versteht  es  ein  wenig,  aber  sie  spricht 
es  nicht  gut.  —  Man  hatte  mir  gesagt,  dass  sie  es  gut 
spreche.  —  Das  ist  aber  ein  Irrthum.  Ich  weiss,  das 
sie  es  nur  gebrochen  spricht. 


Note.  — Study  the  Strong  Conjugation,  pages  511,  512. 


3.  —  F0RTSETZUNG. 

Den  wievielten  haben  wir  heute  ?  *  —  Wir  haben 
heute  den  fiinfzehnten. — Wie  die  Zeit  vergeht.^  Nun 
ist  schon  ein  Vierteljahr  um.^  —  Wann  denken  Sie 
nach  den  Vereinigten  Staaten  zuriickzukehren  ?  —  Wir 
wollen  am  ersten  Januar  1890^  wieder  in  New- York 
sein.  —  Sie  haben  noch  viel  in  Europa  zu  sehen. — 
Das  glaube  ich  gern.  Und  dann  wollen  wir  noch 
nach  Tunis  ^  und  Marocco.^  —  In  diesem  Fall  rate 
ich  Ihnen,  keine  Zeit  zu  verlieren. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Flo-rents'.—  2  Or,  denkt,  thinks,  intends.—  3  SIrpa'-ni-gn. 

4  Or,  der  wievielte  ist  heute?  what  day  of  the  month  is  it? 

5  Fer-gat%  passes.     Lit. :  6?/-goes. 

6  Lit. :  around;  i.  e.,  over,  expired. 

7  Or,    simply,    den    ersten    Januar    1890    (eintausendacht- 
hundert  (und)  neunzig. 

8  Too'-nis.—  9  Ma-ro'-ko. 


186  HOTEL    UND    TENSION.  ^ 

A. -ADDITION.    SUBTRACTION,    MULTIPLICATION  AND 
DIVISION* 

In  this  paragraph  the  answers  will  be  left  blank,  so  as  to  exercise  the  pupil. 

This  drill  can  of  course  be  enlarged  upon  at  will  by  the 

teacher  or  self-learner. " 

Wie  viel  ist  drei  und  zwanzig  und  zwei  und 
fiinfzig  ?  ^  Drei  und  zwanzig  und  zwei  und  fiinfzig 
ist  — .  Wie  viel  bleibt  iibrig,^  wenn  man  zwolf  von 
vier  und  neunzig  abzieht?^  —  Zwolf  von  vier  und 
neunzig,  bleibt  — .  Wie  viel  ist  achtzehn  malfvier? 
—  Achtzehn  multipliziert  mit  vier  ist  — .  Wie  oft  ist 
fiinf  in  hundert  und  dreissig  enthalten  ?  ^  —  Fiinf  ist 
in  hundert  und  dreissig mal  enthalten. 


Pronunciation  and   Translations. 

1  Blipt  ii'-bric/i,  is  left.     Lit. :  remains  left. 

2  Or,  subtrahiert,  zoop-tra-hert'. 

3  Contained.  The  Germans  can  also  say  :  Wie  viel  ist  hundert 
und  dreissig,  dividiert  (de-vi-derf,  divided)  dureli  fiinf?  Hun- 
dert und  dreissig,  dividiert  durcli  fiinf,  ist 

*  A'-di-tsi-on,  zoop'-trak-tsi-on,  mool'-ti-pli-ka-tsi-on,  de'- 
ve-zX-on. 

t  Mal  =  time,  or  times,  in  the  sense  of  separate  times  or  instances. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  187 

To  he  translated  and  written  into  German;   hut  also  to  he  recited 

conversationally  in  the  class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see 

Directions  before  Part  I,) 

EXERCISES. 

l.  —  TO   HIRE    ROOMS* 

Good  morning,  sir.  Do  you  have  any  rooms  to 
let?  —  Yes,  sir.  We  have  a  furnished  room  on  the 
third  story.  —  That  is  a  little  high  (up).  But  let  us  ^ 
go  up  and  see  it.f  —  The  room  suits  me  pretty  well. 
What  would  be^  the  rent?  —  How  do  you  wish  to 
hire  the  room,  by  the  week^  or  by  the  month?*  — 
By   the   week.  —  It   would    be    fifty   marks    a   week. 

—  That's   very  high.  —  But   remember   it  is  a  front 
room^  and  facing  the  Linden. 

2.- THE    VISIT.X 

Ah !  here  you  are  at  last.^  How  do  you  do  this 
morning?  —  Very  well,  thank   you.      And   yourself? 

—  Not  very  well.     I  have  a  eold.^  —  I  am  very  sorry .^ 


Aids   to  Translation. 

1  Lassen  Sie  uns;  or,  Wir  wollen.     (Lit. :   We  will.) 

2  Lit. :  What  were,  ware  (imperfect  subjunctive,  used  instead  of  tlie 
lirst  conditional).  —  Could  also  say:  What  would  (wiirde)  the  rent  be 
(sein)?     iSfot  frequent. —  Also  :  What  will  (wird)  the  rent  be? 

3  Wochentlich,  vii'-e/t'nt-lic/t. 

4  Monatlich.—  5  Vorderzinimer. —  6  Endlich. 

7  Ich  liabe  mich  erkaltet.—  «  Das  thut  mir  selir  leid  (lit). 
Lit. :   It  does  me  much  sorrow. 

•■■  Zimmer  zu  mieten  (me'-t'n).—  f  Lit.  :  It  visit.  —  In  German, 
the  object  always  precedes  the  infinitive.  —  |  Besuch. 


188  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

But  how  beautiful  everything  is  ^  in  this  hotel  1 

—  Have  you  seen  the  parlors?^  —  I  saw  them  as  I 
came  up.^  The  dining-room,^  too,  is  very  large.  — 
Yes.  You  know  there  is  room  in  it  for  six  hundred 
persons.^  Then  the  hotel  is  lighted  by  four  thousand 
gas-jets.^  —  It  is  wonderful!"^. 

Well,  I  must  leave  you.  It  is  twenty  minutes  to 
three,  and  I  have  an  engagement.^  When  will  you 
come  to  see^  me?  —  I  do  not  know.  I  am  going  to 
leave  ^^  Berlin  to-morrow.  —  What !  so  soon  ?  ^^  Where 
are  you  going? — I  am  going  to  Switzerland  to  spend 
ten  days  or  so,^  and  after  that,  I  go  to  London  on 
business.^^  —  When  do  you  intend  to  return?! — In  a 
month   from  now.^*  —  Well,  come  and  see  me  then. 

3.- DEPARTURE  FROM  THE  HOTEL. 

What  do  you  wish,  sir  ?  —  Please  make  out  my 
account.^^    I  want  (to)  leave  ^^  to-morrow  morning.  — 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Is  everything.  —  2  Have  you  the  parlors  (die  Gesellschaftszim- 
mer,  ge-zel'-) seen ? —  s  i  have  them  as  I  came  up  (heraufkam)  seen. 

^  Speisesaal  {masc).  — 5  You  must  know  that  six  hundred  persons 
in  it  (darin,  see  page  1G8,  note  1)  room  (Platz,  plats')  liave. 

«  Then  is  the  hotel  by  (durch)  four  thousand  gas-jets  (Gasflam- 
men)  lighted  (erleuchtet,  er-16-ic/i'-tgt).  —  See  page  84,  I. 

7  Grossartig.—  ^  Rendez-vous  [ncut.),  ran-da-voo'. 

9  To  come  to  see,  besuchen.  —  lo  I  leave.  —  ^^  Bald. 

12  I  go  for  (auf ;  lit.  :  on)  about  (ungefahr,66n'-ge-far')tcn  days  to 
(nach  der)  Switzerland.  —  ^3  inCJeschaften.  —  i* '|\).(i;iy  i,j  f,,,,,.  weeks 
(vier  Wocheii).—  i^  Make  {you)  to-n»e  the  account.—  i6  Abreiseu. 

t  When  {Sec  u.  ■••,  opp.  page)  think  you  (denken  Sie)  back  to  come? 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  189 

Very  well,  sir.  By^  what  train  do  you  wish  to 
leave? — By  the  eight  o'clock  train.  —  Please  have 
my  trunks  brought  down.^  —  Very  well.  Must  we 
send  them  to  the  depot  and  have  them  checked?^ — 
Yes,  please  have  them  checked  for  Leipsic*  —  At 
what  o'clock  do  you  wish  to  start  ?^  —  I  must  leave 
the  hotel  at   quarter  to   eight.      Wake  me  (up)   on 

time^ 

What  time  is  it?  —  It  is  half-past  seven.  —  Then  I 
must  be  off,^  or  I  will  not^  catch  the  train.  Have 
you  brought  my  trunks  down  ?  ^  —  Yes,  sir.  —  Very 
well.  Here  is  something  for  you.  —  Thank  you,  sir, 
and  bon  voyage}^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Mit.  —  2  Please  let  {ye)  my  trunks  down  (fterunter,  the  speaker  is 
down  stairs)  bring. 

8  Shall  (sollen)  we  them  to-the  depot  send  (schicken)  and  tlieni 
up-gi  ve  ? 

4  Please  give  (ye)  them  up  for  Leipsic.    For  Leipsic  =  nach  L.eipzig, 
lip'-tsic/*. 

5  To  start,  aufbrechen,  separable  verb.    Lit. :  to  break  up  camp,  so 
to  speak. 

6  Wecken  Sie  mich  zur  rechten  Zeit. 

7  I  must  forth  (fort).—  8  Or,  I  will  the  train  not  meet. 

9  Have  you  my  trunks  down  brought? 

10  Gluckliche  Reise  (gliik'-li-c/ie  ri'-ze) ! 

*  When,  if  interrogative,  as  it  is  here,  =  Wann. 


190  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation,  then  without  it,  in 

preparation  for  reading  aloud  and  translating 

in  class. 


«efeftttrf. 
mn  ^tem^cv  in  ^^oi^^am* 

—  ^a  finb  tmr  in  ^ot-Sbam,  bcin*  ^erfatUe^  2)eutfc^Ianb§. 

—  Qa,  aber  junad^ft  miiffen  wit  eincn  gut)rer  ne(;men. 

—  ©ie  it)unfd;eu  eiiien  gul;rcr  burd;  ^ot^bant,  nteine 
§erren  ? 

—  3a,  tt)ie  'Old  Derlangen  ©ie?  ©ec^g  SJJarf?  @ut,  id; 
bin  bamit  eint)erftanben.^ 

—  ^fiun,  tt)o  gcl;eu  it)ir  ^uerft  ^in? 

—  SKir  rt)otten  ^uerft  nacf)  bem  ^arf  imb  bem  ©d;lo6 
©an^fouci  fa(;ren 

—  D,  tt)eld)  (;errlid)er  ©))ringbrunnen ! 

—  Qa,  U)ir  finb  je^t  in  bem  ^arf  Don  San^fonci,  nnb 
biefe  breite  fdjone  2(llee  fiU;rt  nn^  bircft  nad)  bem  ©d)(o^. 
.  .  .  .  9fiun  miiffen  imr  mi^fteigen^  nnb  biefe  ^rad)tDoIIe 
"^re^^e  ^  (;inanfge()en. 

—  3ft  ba§  ba§  <Bd)io^  iiber  ber  ^rep^e?*  3a.  mk 
niebrig  e^  tft,  e§  (;at  ja  nnr  ein  ©todmcr!! 

—  ^a§  ift  it)a^r,  aber  ift  bie  ©an(en(;alle  nidjt  ()errlid)? 

—  3^ ^^^  td;  bin  gan^  anfeer  Item.    2Sir  iPoUcn 

(;ier  oben^  ein  wmiQ  an§ruf)en,  bel>or  imr  in  ba§  ©djlo^ 

f)ineinge(;en SBiffen  ©ie,  \va^  ha^  bort  am  ©nbe 

ber  ^erraffe  ift? 


1  strictly  •  Tarn  therewith  agreed.  —  2  gt. :  now  must  we  out-step, 
3  St. :  steps.  —  4  St.  :  over  the  steps.  —  ^  yt. :  up  stairs,  above. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  191 

For  Self-Study,  should  be  read  by  means  of  the  translation,  theti 

without  it,  and  when  thoroughly  uiiderstood,  read 

aloud  in  German. 


READING. 
A    STRANGER    IN     POTSDAM. 

—  Here  we  are  in  Potsdam,  the*  Versailles  of-Germany. 

—  Yes,  but  first  must  we  a  guide  take. 

—  You    wish    a    guide    through    Potsdam,    gentle- 
men? 

—  Yes,  how  much  do  you  ask  ?     Six  marks  ?     Very 
well,  I  am  willing.^ 

—  Now  where  go  we  first  (hence)? 

—  We  will   first  to  the  park   and   the   palace   (of) 
Sans  Souci  drive 

—  Oh,  what  a  magnificent  fountain! 

—  Yes.     We  are  now  in  the  park  of  Sans  Souci,  and 
this  broad,  beautiful   avenue   takes  us  straight  to-the 

palace Now  must  we  leave  our  carriage,  and 

this  magnificent  staircase  up-go. 

—  Is  that  the  palace  at-the-top-of  the  steps?     Yes. 
How  low  it  is !     It  has  {indeed)  only  one  story ! 

—  That  is  true ;  but  is  the  colonnade  not  beautiful  ? 

—  Yes But  I  am  quite  out-of  breath.    We  will 

up-here    a  little  (while)  rest,  before  we  in   the   castle 

in-go Know  you,  what  that  there  at-the  end 

of-the  terrace  is? 


*  Potsdam  aftor  in  is  in  the  dative.    Hence,  dem,  which  is  in 
apposition  to  Potsdam,  is  put  in  the  dative,  to  agree  with  it. 


192  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

—  ^ort  lie§  gncbnc(>  ber  (^rof^c  fciuc  SieMingg^jferbe 
imb  §iuibe^  begraben.  33efaimtltd;  brii(fte*  a  in  feiiicm 
2^eftamente  hm  2Bimfd)  aii^,*  an  berfelbeu  ©telle  beerbigt  511 
luerben.  ^a§  ift  allerbingg  lad)erlid).  Slber  ein  3JJenfdl), 
bcr  feine  Xl^iere  fo  lieb  ^atte,^  luiiBte  t  ^in  gutc§  ^eq  l;aben. 

—  ®a§  benfe  tc^  mid) 8ollen  tx)ir  mm  in  ba§ 

Bdjio^  gc^en?    gd^  l;abe  gel;brt,  "oa^  g^iebric^  ber  ©ro^e 
faft  intnier^  l;ier  lebte. 

—  (Sr  t)erbrad)te  l;ier  eincn  gro^en  ^cil  feiner  3^^^/  ii'^^ 
man  l)at  feine  gimmer  unDercinbert  gelaffen.*  6el;en  ©ie 
ba  bie  Ul)r?  griebrid;  ber  ©ro^e  ^flegte  fie  felOft  anfjn^ 
^ie(;en,  nnb  im  Slugenblid  feine^  2:^obe^  foil  fie  fte^en 
geblieben  fein^ 

^2Ba»  i)at  biefe  9Binbmiil)le  gerabe  Dor  xm§>  ju  bebenten?^ 

—  ^a^5  ift  bie  beriil)mte  ^Binbmi'i^le,  ioelc^e  griebrid;  ber 
©roge  jn  fanfen  iDunfd;te.  ©r  ioollte  fie  bann  nieberrei^en 
lajfcn,  toeil  fie  il;m  bie  2lu^fid;t  an  jener  (Beite  be§  ©cbloffe^ 
iDcgna^mJ  imb  "oa^)  ©erdnfd;  ber  Tliiijk  iijn  bei  ber  Slrbeit 
ftorte.  ®er  3Jliiller  toeigerte^  fid)  fie  ^n  berfmifen.  ^a 
brol;te  ber  £dnig,  er  miirbe  fie  ahhxcd^m  laffen,  ol;ne  il)n 
ioeiter^  jn  fragen.  ^er  nnerfd)rodene  SJliiller  antli^ortete : 
„3a,  \mnn  nur  ha§>  Jlmmnergerid)t  in  Berlin  ni6t  ioare." 
^ie  freimiitige  ©^rad)e  be§  Mnikt§>  gefiel  bent  5ldnig. 
„  9hm  gnt/'  fagte  er,  „  gel)t  nnr,  wiv  tootten  fd;on  fel)en, 
toie  \mv  miteinanber  fertig  iuerben!"  nnb  Dom  Slbbred^en 

ber  9}Ml)le  toar  nie  toieber  bie  D^iebe Slber  toir  miiffen 

nnn    eilen,    benn    fonft    fonnen    toir    nid;t    md)v    alle^ 
fe^en. 

1  strictly  :  Frederick  the  Great  his  pet-horses,  etc. 

2  Strictly  •.  so  dear  had,  i.  e.,  held.  —  3  Strictly  :  almost  always. 

*  Anglice:  his  rooms  have  been  left  as  tliey  were.  The  Germans 
prefer  to  use  the  active  voice  witli  man,  instead  of  the  passive,  when- 
ever possil)le.  —  *  From  ausdriicken,  to  r.ry>?v'.s.'^,  n  separable  verb. 

t  Imperfect  of  niiissen. —  |  From  wegnehmen. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  193 

—  There  lie  Frederick  the  Great's^  pet  horses  and 
dogs  buried.  As-is-kiiown  expressed  he  in  his  will 
the  desire  (out),  in  the-same  place  buried  to  be.  That 
is  doubtless  ridiculous.  But  a  man,  who  his  beasts  so 
loved,^  must  a  good  heart  have  (had). 

—  That  believe  I  also Shall  we  now  in  the 

palace  go?  I  have  heard  that  Frederick  the  Great 
almost  exclusively^  here  lived. 

—  He  spent  here  a  great  part  of-his  time,  and  they 
have  his  rooms  unchanged  left.^  See  you  there  the 
clock?  Frederick  the  Great  used  it  himself  to-wind, 
and  m-the  moment  of-his  death  the  clock  is  said  to 
have  stopped  still  ^ 

—  What  is  that  windmill  right  before  us,  anyway  f  ^ 

—  That  is  the  famous  windmill He  wanted 

it  then  demolished  to  have,  because  it  to-him  the 
view  on  that  side  of-the  castle  obstructed,  and  the  noise 
of-the  mill  him  (when)  at  (the)  work  disturbed.  The 
miller  refused''  it  to  sell.  Then  threatened  the  king 
(that)  he  would  it  tear-down  let  without  him  any- 
more^ to-ask.  The  fearless  miller  answered:  "Yes,  if 
only  the  court-of-justice  in  Berlin  not  were ! "  The 
frank  speech  of-the  miller  pleased  (^o)-the  king.  "  Very 
good,"  said  he,  "  go  ahead,^  we  will  indeed  see,  how  we 
together  get  along  !"^^  and  of-the  tearing-down  of-the 

mill  was  never  again  any  talk^^ But  we  must 

now  make-haste  or  else  will  we  not  be  able  everything 
to  see.^2 


5  strictly:  shall  it  stopped-still  have  (strictly:  be).  —  For  use  of  sein 
with  bleiben,  etc.,  see  page 

6  Strictly  :  what  has  that  mill to  portend? 

7  Strictly  :  denied  himself;  from  sich  weigern.  —  8  Strictly  :  farther. 
^  Strictly  :  go  onli/. —  w  How  we  oiie-with-the  other  ready  hecome. 

11  Strictly :  the  talk.  —  i2  Strictly  :  for  else  can  we  not  more  all  see. 


194  HOTEL    VND    PENSION. 


^ricfabrcffctt* 

1.    ^errni  ^r.^  ma^  SSet^ 
Berlin,  3B., 

2Binterfelbftra§e,  24. 


2.    §errn^  ^ireftor^  griebrid;  SBagner, 
©re^ben,  dl, 

gorftftragc,  25. 


3.    ^errn  9?ubo(f  Sowing,  Jlaufmaun,^ 
£ubt»igftra6e. 


4.    grdulein  ©opHe  @ro§met)er, 
9fJeit)  ?)orf, 

^ier  inib  funf^igfte  ©trafee,  Dft,  3^o.  3, 
RSereinigte  ©taaten, 
2(mertfa. 


1  Lit. :  to-Mr. ;  the  dative,  as  seen  here,  being  used  in  addressing  a 
letter. 

2  Observe  that  the  Germans,  in  addressing  a  letter  as  well  as  in 
speaking,  add  the  word  Herr  to  titles. 

8  Mercliant. 

4  Mun'-ch'n,  Munich. 


Part  IL 


HOTEL   AND    BOARDING-HOUSE, 


HOTEL   UIsTD   PE]SrSIOK. 


•o^» 


SECTION    IV. 


1.  IN  THE  RESTAURANT. 

2.  THE  GERMAN  DATIVE. 

3.  A  MATTER  OF  MONEY. 

4.  THE  BILL  OF  FARE. 

5.  AT  THE  TABLE. 

6.  IN  A  FURNITURE  STORE. 

7.  TO  START  FROM  THE  HOTEL. 

8.  IN  FRANKFORT-ON-THE-MAIN. 

9.  A  LETTER  TO  THE  HOTEL  KAISERHOF. 


195 


196  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 


IV. 


GERMAN. 

Wir  haben  drei  Ziinmer,  welclie  auf  die 
Linden  gelien. 

Siehe  da!     Herr  Schulz! 

Ach  ja,  wir  hatten  verabredet/  uns  um  elf  Uhr 
hier  zu  *  trefFen.^ 

Guten  Morgen,  meine  Herrert!   Wie  geht  es  Ihnen? 

Sehr  gut.     Und  Ihnen? 
Ich  befinde  mich  ausgezeichnet. 
Das  sieht  man  Ihnen  an.^    • 
Nun,  wo  wollen  wir  frfihstucken? 

Bei  Borchart,  natiirlich. 
Unter  den  Linden? 
Ja.     Passt  Ihnen  das? 

Ich  bin  noch  nicht  da  gewesen.     Isst*  man   da 
gut? 


NOTES. 

1  Verabreden,  to  agree,  is  also  used  as  a  reflexive  verb  {sich  ver- 
abreden. 

'^  Treffen,  to  hit,  to  meet ;  sich  treffen,  to  meet  each  other. 

*  From  ansehen  (separable  verb),  to  look  at,  to  perceive.  Ansehen 
governs  the  dative.  Thus:  To  see  (or  preceive}= 'Einem  ansehen. 
Note  tlie  expression  :  Ein  angesehener  Mann,  a  man  of  hicjh  standing. 

4  Distinguisli  (in  writing)  er  isst,  he  eats  jfroin  essen  (e'-s'n),  to 
eat],  from  er  ist,  he  is.     In  pronuneiation  they  do  not  dider. 

*  For  the  use  of  zu  before  the  infinitive,  see  page  200,  note  *. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


197 


IV. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

1.  Vir  iia^-b'ii  dri  tsF-m'r 
v6F-r/te  a-dbf  de  Liii^- 
d'li  g^a^-'nr 

Ze'-e  da'  .....  shoolts. 

Kkh  ya' fer-ap'-ra'-det 

.  . ".  .  .  tre'-f  n. 


Ve  gat'  es  e'-nen? 


A-obs  '-ge-tsic7i'  -net. 

zit. 

Frli'-sTitw'-k'n. 
Bor'-cTiart  na-tur  -\loh. 

Past'. 
1st'. 


TRANSLATION. 

We  have  tliree  rooms  fac- 
ing on  the  Linden. 

There  is  Mr.  Schulz'.i 

Why,  yes.  I  had  an  appoint- 
ment with  him  here  at 
eleven.2 

Good  morning,  gentlemen. 
How  do  you  do  (this  morn- 
ing)? 

Very  well.     And  yourself? 

I  am  very  well,  indeed.^ 

You  look  like  it.* 

Well!  Where  shall  we  (go 
and)  breakfast? 

At  Borchart's,  shall  we  not?^ 

Unter  den  Linden  ? 

Yes.     Will  that  suit  you  ?  « 

I  have  never  gone  there.  Is  it 
a  good  place  ? '' 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Look  {there)!  Mr.  Schulz !  Siehe  (the  2d  pers.  sing,  of  the  im- 
perative) is  the  familiar  form,  and  is  used  liere  becanse  tlie  expression 
siehe  da  is  really  a  part  of  the  e.xclanuitory  plmise,  Tliere  is  Mr. 
Sd'uh  !  Look!  used  independently,  would  be  Selien  Siel  or  Sehen 
Sie  da!  unless  addressing  someone  with  wlioni  we  were  very  funuhar. 

'^  Oh,  yes.     We  had  agreed  (ourselves)  at  eleven  here  to-nieet. 

3  I  find  myself  excellently.  —  ^  That  sees  one  to-you  on. 

5  Of  course  (strictly  :  naturally). —  ^  Suits  to  you  that. 

7  I  have  (strictly  :  am)  not  yet  there  been.     Eats  one  there  well? 


198  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Welche  Frage!    Wiirde  ich  sonst  hingehen?^ 

1 


Note.  —  Study  the  Weak  Declension, 


3.  Kellner!    Bitte,  die  Speisekarte! 

Bringeii  Sie  uns  drei  Beefsteak  mit  Champignons 

Wie  wiinschen  die  Herren  sie  zubereitet?^ 

Englisch^  bitte. 

Was  fiir  Gemiise  wiinschen  die  Herren? 

Was  halten  Sie  da  von? 

Lassen  Sie  uns    BratkartofFeln   und   Blumenkohl 
nehmen ! 

Und  welche  Sorte  Wein? 
Drei  Flaschen  Riidesheimer.^ 


3.  WS,hrend  des  Essens*  mochte  ich  mit 
Ihneii  eine  kleine  Geschaftsangeleg^eii- 
heit  bespreclien. 

Das  ware? 


NOTES. 

1  Observe  that  in  separ.  comp.  verbs  the  prefix  always  has  the  accent. 

2  The  Germans  generally  eat  their  beefsteak  well  done.  They  call 
rare  beefsteak,  English  beefsteak. 

8  After  nouns  of  measure,  weight,  and  number,  the  Germans  do  not 
put  the  following  noun  in  the  genitive.  Thus:  Ein  Pfund  Butter, 
a  pound  of  butter.     See  page  179. 

4  P'or  prepositions  governing  the  genitive,  see  page  178. 


HOTEL    AND    BOAKDING-HOUSE. 


199 


Zonst  h-in'-ga'-'n. 


What  (a)  question!     Would  I 
go  there  otherwise  ?  * 


pages  472  and  473. 


2.  K^F-ii'r!      Br-t6,    de 
s7fpi^-ze-kar'-te. 

Bel'-stak    mit    slian-pe- 
fion . 
Tsoo'-be-ri'-tet. 


Ge-mti'-ze. 

Vas  hal'-t'n  ze'  —  . 

Brat'-kar-to'-f'ln  66nt 
bloo'-men-kol'. 

Z6r'-te  vin'. 
Rii'-des-lii'-in'r. 


Waiter,  the  bill  of  fare,  if 
you  please!^ 

Bring  us  three  beefsteaks,  with 
mushrooms. 

How  would  the  gentlemen  like 
to  have  them  ?  ^ 

Rare.-* 

What  vegetables  would  you 
like? 

What  do  you  say,  (my  dear 
fellow)  ?'i 

(Well!)  Let  us  take  (some) 
fried  potatoes  and  cauli- 
flower. 

And  what  kind  (of)  wine  ? 

Three  bottles  (of)  Riidesheimer. 


3.  Vii^-r6nt  d6s  6^-s'iis 
m\ich^-t^  ich  iiiit  e^-ii6n 
i^-n6  kli^-n6  g6-sh6fts^- 
au -ge-la-g"'ii-hit    b6- 


While  we  are  eating-,  iny 
dear  fellow,  I  woiiUl  like 
to  speak  to  you  about  a 
matter  of  business.^ 

What  is  it  ?  ^ 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Would  I  otherwise  there-go  ? 

2  Please  the  bill  of  fare  (lit. :  eating-card). 

3  How  wish  the  gentlemen  them  prepared? 

4  English.     See  note  2,  opposite  page. 

6  What  think  you  (lit. :  hold  you)  of-it? 

s  During  the  dinner  might  I  with  you  a  slight   business   matter 
bespeak?  —  ?  That  might-be ? 


200  HOTEL    UND    TExXSiON. 

Ich  habe  einen  Wechsel. 

Auf  wen  ist  er  ausgestellt? 

Er  ist  auf  die  Zentralbank  ausgestellt. 

Nun? 

Die  Bank  hat  heute  morgen  falliert.^ 

Dann    lassen    Sie    Ihren    Wechsel    sogleich    pro- 

testieren. 
Ich  habe  keine  Zeit  dazu.^ 
Ich  will  noch  heute  abend  nach  Verona  abreisen. 

Ich  koinme  in  eine  schone  Verlegenheit. 


4.  Und  ich  weiss  mir  niclit  zu  *  helfen,^ 

Ich  will  Ihnen  aus  der  Verlegenheit  helfen. 

Inwiefern  ? 

Ich  kann  Ihnen  fiinf  hundert  Mark  borgen. 

Wie!  dass  wollten  Sie  thun? 

Gewiss,  hier  sind  drej,  hundert  Mark  in  Schei- 
nen,^  hundert  in  Zwanzigmarkstiicken  und  ein 
Wechsel  von  hundert  Mark  auf  das  beste 
Bankhaus  in  Berlin. 

Da  nehmen  Sie  mir  einen  Stein  vom  Herzen. 


NOTES. 

1  The  perfect  tense  is  often  employed  (Ex. :  I  have  failed^  etc.)  in 
German,  where  the  preterit  (Ex.  :  I  failed,  etc.)  is  used  in  English. 

2  Dazu,  to  that,  to  it,    See  page  161,  note  1. 

8  Helfen,  literal :  to  help,  governs  the  dative  in  German,  although 
in  English  it  is  a  transitive  verb.    See  page  206,  note  1. 

*  Zu  is  used  before  an  infinitive  after  other  verbs.  Observe,  how- 
ever, that  it  is  not  used  after  the  modal  auxiliaries  (konnen,  wollen, 
miissen,  mogen,  sollen,  and  durfen),  nor  after  the  verbs  horen, 
fiihleii,  lernen,  lehreii,  heissen,  helfen,  machen,  and  lassen. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


201 


Vek'-s'l. 

I  have  a  letter  of  credit. 

A-66s'-ge-s7itelt'. 

On  whom  is  it  ?  ^ 

Tsen-tral'-bank'. 

On  the  Zentralhank. 

What  is  that? 

Fa-lert'. 

The  bank  failed  this  morning. 

Z6-g]ich' pr5-tes-te'- 

r'n. 

Have  your  letter  of  credit  pro- 
tested without  delay.2 

Da-tsoo'. 

I  have  no  time. 

I  want  to  start  for  Verona  this 

Fer-la'-g'n-mt. 

very  morning.^ 
I  am  in  a  pretty  fix ! 

4.  OOiit  IcJi  vis  mer  nlcht 
tsdb  li6F-f' n. 


Bor'-g'n. 

Shi'-nen tsvan'-tsicTi- 

mark'-sTitw'-k'n bank'- 

ba-e&s'. 


I'-nen  shtln.'  fom  her'-ts'n. 


And  I  do  not  know  how 
to  get  out  of  it.^ 

I  '11  help  you  out.f 

How?* 

I  can  lend  you  500  marks. 

What !     You  would  do  that? 

Why  not?^  See,  here  are  three 
hundred  marks  in  bills,'' hun- 
dred in  crowns,^  and  a  draft 
for  another  hundred  on  the 
best  banker  in  Berlin. 

You  get  me  out  of  a  bad  scrape.® 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  On  whom  is  lie  (der  Wechsel)  drawn  (lit. :  exposed,  or  put  off). 

2  Then  let  (you)  your  letter  of  credit  directly  protest  {i.  e.,  to  be  pro- 
tested).—  8  I  ^^\\\  still  to-day  evening  to  Verona  leave. 

*  I  come  in  a  beautiful  embarrassment. 

5  And  I  know  ^o-myself  not  to  help.  —  ^  Surely,  certainly. 

7  Or,  Papiergeld  (pa-per'-gSlf),  paper  money. 

8  Also,  in  Kronen. 

8  There  take  you  to-nie  a  stone  from  the  heart.  —  *  In-how-far. 
t  I  will  to-you  out  of-the  difficulty  help. 


202  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

Ich  weiss  nicht,  wie  icli  Ihnen  danken  soll.^ 

Keine  Ursache. 

An  meiner  Stelle  wiirden  Sie  dasselbe  thun. 


5.  THE    DATIVE    CASE 

The  dative  case  corresponds   to  the  use  of  the  English 
expressed  or  understood,  as  in  I  sent  you  a  letter.     You,  here  = 

I  gave  a  book  to  the  boy  = 
I  wrote  to  you  = 

MASCULINE    AND    NEUTER    FORM    OF    THE 

1.  —  Masculine    and   Neuter   nouns  which  form  their 
take  e  in  the  dative.     Thus  : 

NoM. :   Der   Mann,  the  man.     Das  Weib,  the  woman.    Gen.  ; 
Dem  Manne,  to  the  man.     Dem  Wei  be,  to  the  ivoman. 

2.  —  Masculine  and  Neuter  nouns,  which  form  their 
Hke  the  nominative  in  the  dative  singular.    Thus : 

NoM. :  Der  Vater,  the  father.    Gen.  :  Des  Vaters,  of  the  father. 

3.  —  Masculine  nouns,  which  form  their  genitive  sing- 
dative.     Thus : 

Nominative.  Genitive. 

Der  Fiirst,  the  prince.  Des  Fiirstcw,  of  the  prince. 

Der  Knabe,  the  boy.  Des  Knaben,  of  the  boy. 

4.  — Feminine  nouns   have    no   ending   in    the   dative 

none  in  the  genitive.     Ex. : 

--  Nominative.  Genitive. 

Die  Frau,  the  lady.  Der  Frau,  of  the  lady. 

Die  Tochter,  the  daughter.  Der  Tochter,  of  the  daughter. 


NOTES. 

1  The  infinitive  after  how,  tvltat  and  where  may  be  translated 
into  German  by  an  infinitive  witli  sollen,  miissen  or  konnen.  Ex. : 
I  do  not  know  wliere  to  go=  Ich  weiss  nicht,  wohin  ich  gehen  soil 

(I  know  not  where-to  I  go  shall). 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  203 


Ich   vis'  nicTit    ve    Ich   e' 
nen. 
Ki'-ne  ooT'-zQi'-hhe. 
An  mi'-ner  s7ite'-le. 


1  do  not  know  ,how  to  thank 

yoii.i 
Don't  mention  it.^ 

In  my  place  you  would  do  the 
same  thing.  (See  page  84,  I.) 


IN    GERMAN. 

noun,  pronoun,  or  adjective,  with   to.     (Of  course   to  may  be 
to-you.)    Ex. : 

Ich  gab  dem  Knaben  ein  Buch. 
Ich  schrieb  Ihnen. 

DATIVE    WITH    SINGULAR    NOUNS.* 
genitive,  in  the  singular,  by  adding  es  to  the  nominative, 

Des  Manncs,  of  the  man.    Des  Weibcs,  of  the  ivomen.    Dat.  : 

genitive  singular  by  adding  s  to  the  nominative,  are  exactly 

Dat.  :  Dem  Vater,  to  the  father. 

ular  by   adding  en  (or  n),  retain   this  ending  also  in   the 

Dative. 
Dem  Fiirsten-,  to  the  prince. 
Dem  Knaben,  to  the  boy. 

singular.    We  have  already  seen  (page  74)  that  they  have 

Dative. 
Der  Frau,  to  the  lady. 
Der  Tochter,  to  the  daughter.* 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  How  I  to  you  thank  shall.  —  ^  No  reason  ;  no  cause. 
*  In  the  dative  plural  all  nouns  end  in  n,  en  or  ern,  according  to 
the  declension. 


204  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

6.  Aber  Sie  trinken  (ja)*  gar  nichts.^ 

Dieser  Riidesheimer  liegt   schon   zelin   Jahre   auf 

Flaschen. 
Sie  miisseii  wissen,  dass  dies  liier  einer  der  besten 

Keller  in  Berlin  ist. 
Ich  danke,  Sie  schenken  mir  zu  oft  ein. 

Dieser  Wein  schadet  Ihnen  nichts. 
Danke.     Ich  trinke  wirklich  nicht  mehr. 

Sie  essen  ja*  aber  auch  nicht. 

Ich    muss    gestehen,    diese    Wechselangelegenheit 

hat  mir  den  Appetit  benommen.^ 
Aber  warum  denn  ?     Sie  verlieren  (ja)  nichts  dabei. 

Das  weiss  ich  wohl.     Aber  wo  soil  ich  nun  Gelder 

hernehmen  ? 
Schreiben  Sie  auf  der  Stelle  an  Ihre  Bankiers  in 

New  York. 
Sie  werden  Ihnen  sofort  einen  Wechsel  auf  irgend 

ein  andres  Haus  schicken. 
Kellner,  die  Rechnung,  bitte. 
Hier,   meine   Herren.      Bitte    zahlen    Sie   an    der 

Kasse. 
Gut.    Dies  ist  fiir  Sie,  Kellner. 


NOTES. 

1  Gar  nichts,  nothing  at  nil.     JAt.  :  entirely,  nothing. 

2  From    benehmen,    bS-na'-nti'ii,    to    take   nwnif,    an    inseparable 
verb.    Those  verbs  wliich  have  as  prefixes  be,  ent  (einp),  er,  ge,  ver, 

wider  and  zer  are  Inseparable  in  all  the  tenses.     Moreover,  tliey  do  not 
take   the  sign  ge  in  tlie  i)ast  participle.     Tlius  :   Abgelien,  to  drjxvrt 
(separable  yerh).     Past  part.-  abgegangeu  (<h'/><"-'eiJ\     Vei'ljeren, /o 
lose  (inseparable  \erh).^  Past  pait.  :  verloreii, /o.sMjk' xd 
*  Ja  {indeed)  simply  adds  emphasis,  and  may  be  omitic*' 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


205 


6.  A^-b'r   ze   triu^-k'n    ya 
gar^  nic/its. 


Bes'-t'n  ke'-l'r. 
Slien'-k'n tsoo  6ft'. 

Sha'-det. 
Virk'-licTi. 

E'-s'n. 

Ge-s7ita'-'n a-pe-tet' 

be-no'-men. 

Fer-le'-ren  dbhh  nicTits'. 
Har'-na'-men. 


A-oof   d'r   s?ite'-le 
ban-ki-as'. 
Zo-fort'. 


RecTi'-ndbii. 

Tsa'-In  ze  an  d'r  ka'- 


But  you  do  not  drink 
anything-. 

This  Rudesheimer  has  been 
bottled  ten  years. ^ 

You  know  they  have  one  of  the 
finest  cellars  in  Berlin  here. 

Thank  you.  You  are  giving 
me  too  much. 2 

This  wine  will  not  hurt  you.^ 

Thank  you,  I  will  not  drink 
any  more.* 

But  you  don't  eat  anything* 
either. 

I  admit  this  letter  of  credit  busi- 
ness takes  my  appetite  away.^ 

The  idea !  Why,  you  do  not 
lose  anything  by  it.' 

I  know.  But  where  shall  I 
find  funds  now?' 

Write  at  once  *  to  your  bankers 
in  New  York. 

They'll  send  you  a  draft  on 
some  other  house  at  once.* 

Waiter!  the  bill,  if  you  please. 
Here  (it  is),  gentlemen.    Please 

pay  at  the  counter.^*^ 
All  right. ^^    Here  is  something 

for  you,  waiter.^2 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Lies  {already)  ten  years  on  bottles.  —  2  You  pour  to-nie  too  often  in. 
8  Harms  {to-)  you  nothing.  —  ^  I  drink  really  not  more. 
5  I  must  admit  this  letter-of-credit-affair  lias  <o-me  the  appetite 
taken  away.  —  6  But  why,  then  !    You  lose  indeed  nothing  thereby. 
"^  That  know  I  well.     But  where  shall  I  now  funds  get? 
8  On  the  spot.  —  ^  A  draft  on  some  another  house  send. 
10  Cash.  —  11  Well.  —  12  This  is  for  you. 
*  You  eat  indeed  but  also  not. 


206 


HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 


USE    OF    THE    DATIVE    IN    GERMAN. 

I.-THE  DATIVE  WITH    INTRANSITIVE  VERBS. 

Many  verbs  which  in  English  take  a  direct  object  {i.  e.,  an 
object  without  any  preposition  expressed  or  understood)  govern 
the  dative  (case  with  to)  in  German.    Thus: 

I  beheve  my  friend. 
( I  beUeve  fo-my  friend. 
'  (  Ich  glaube  meinewt  Freunde, 

English  :    We  met  him  in  London. 

^  (  We  met  ^o-him  in  London. 

German 


English 
German : 


English 
German ; 


(  Wir  begegneten  ihw*  in  London. 

Serve  thy  king. 
(  Serve  to-i\\y  king. 
(  Diene  dQiuem  Konig. 


Of  these  verbs  the  principal  are  the  following : 


Antworten, 

Begegnen, 

Dienen, 

Folgen, 

Gefallen, 

Gehorchen, 

Glauben, 


to  answer, 
to  meet, 
to  serve, 
to  follow, 
to  please, 
to  obey, 
to  believe. 


Gleichen, 

Helfen, 

Missfallen, 

Raten, 

Schmeicheln, 

Verzeihen, 

Widerstehen, 


to  resemble, 
to  help, 
to  displease, 
to  advise, 
to  flatter, 
to  pardon, 
to  resist. 


2.- THE  DATIVE  WITH  TRANSITIVE  VERBS. 

A  large  number  of  transitive  verbs  have  two  objects,  one  of 
these  being  in  the  dccusative  (no  preposition),  and  the  other  in 
the  dative  (case  with  the  preposition  '  to '  expressed  or  understood). 
The  object  in  the  dative  generally  precedes  the  object  in  the 
accusative.    Thus : 

Ich  schreibe  meinem  Vater  eincn  Brief. 

But  when  the  accusative  happens  to  be  a  personal  pronoun, 
it  precedes  the  dative.     Ex. : 

Ich  gebe  es  de'mem  Bruder=  I  give  it  to  thy  brother. 
I  sent  him  to  y<ui=  Icli  babe  ihn  Ihnen  gesandt. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  207 


3.-USE  OF  THE  DATIVE  AFTER   PREPOSITIONS. 

About  twenty  prepositions  govern  the  dative.     The  full  list 
is  given  later  on.     The  most  frequently  used  are : 

Aus,  oat  of,  from;  mit,  with;  \on.,  from,  of. 
Bei»  near,  ivith,  by,  at;  nach^  after;  zu,  to,  at. 

They  can  be  easily  remembered  by  memorizing  the  follow^ 
ing  verses : 

Nach  dir  sclimacht"  ich,  siu  dir  ell'  icli,  du  geliebte  Quelle  dn, 
/1ms  dir  schopf  ich,  bei  dir  vveil'  ich,  seh  dem  Spiel  der  Wellen 

zu, 
Mit  dir  scherz'  ich,  von  dir  lern'  ich  heiter  durch  das  Leben 

wallen, 
Angelacht  von  Friihlingsblumen    und    begriisst  von  Nachti- 
gallen.* 

4. -USE  OF  THE  DATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN   ADJECTIVES. 

The  following  adjectives  govern  their  nouns  {or  pronouns)  in 
the  dative : 

Ahnlich  (an'-licTi),  like. 

Angenehm  (an'-ge-nam'),  agreeable. 

Gehorsam  (ge-h.5r'-za.m),  obedient. 

Heilsam  (liil'-zam),  healthful. 

Niitzlich  (nilts'-licTi),  useful. 

Schadlich  (sh.at'-lic7i),  hurtful.  Ex.: 

The  son  is  like  his  father  =  Der  Sohn  ist  seinejti  Vater  ahnlich. 

(Lit. :  to-his  father  like). 
You  resemble  him  =  Sie  sind  ihm  ahnlich. 
This  book  is  useful  to  my  brother  =  Dieses  Buch  ist  Tnemein 

Bruder  nutzlich,f 


*  After  thee  do  I  long,  to  thee  hasten,  thou  beloved  spring  thon, 
Out  of  thee  do  I  drink  (lit. :  draw),  with  thee  loiter,    and  look 

on  the  play  of  the  waves. 
With  thee  do  I  jest,  from  thee  do  I  learn  serenely  through  life 

to  travel, 
Smiled  upon  by  spring-blossoms,  and  by  greeted  nightingales, 
t  Notice  that  the  adjective  governing  the  dative  follows  always. 


208  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


I.— Das  Mittagsessen.* 


Eine  Bouillon  (boo'-lyon), 
Eine  Suppe  (zoo'-pe), 
Nudelsuppe  (noo'-d'l— ), 
Gemiisesuppe  (ge-mii'-ze — ), 


Nebenfferichte,! 

Ein  Dutzend  Austern,^ 
Melone  (me-lo'-ne),/., 
Artischocken  (ar-ti-sho'-k'n),  /., 
Radieschen  (ra-des'-c7i'n),  n., 
Uanseleberpastete,*/., 
Wiirstchen  (vwrst'-cTi'n), 

Fisch, 

Eine  Forelle  (fo-re'-le), 

Ein  Lachs  (laks),  m., 

Eine  gebackene  Seezunge,* 

Eine  Makrele  (ma-kra'-le), 

Ein  Aal  (al),  m. ;  Ein  Hering  (ha'-rifi), 


Eier  (i^-'r),  n., 

Spiegel  eier  (s7ipe'-g'l-i'-'r), 

Weiche,  harte  (vi'-cTie,  tiar'-te)  Eier, 

Ruhreier  (riir'-i'-'r), 


Soups. 

A  broth. 
Soup. 

Vermicelli  soup. 
Vegetable  soup. 

Side  dishes. 

A  dozen  oysters. 
A  slice  of  melon. 
Artichokes. 
Radishes. 
Goose  liver  pie. 
Sausages. 

Fish. 

A  trout. 
Salmon. 
A  fried  sole. 
A  mackerel, 
m.,  An  eel ;  A  herring. 

Eggs. 

Fried  eggs. 

Soft,  hard-(boiled)  - 

Scrambled  eggs. 


1  NS'-b'n-gg-ric/i'-tS.    Also,  Vorgerichte.    Also :   Hors  d'oeu- 

vres  (or  dii'-vr').  —  2  Dob'-tsent  a-dos'-t*rn geii'-ze-13'-b'r- 

pas-ta'-tS g?-ba'-kg-ng  za'-tsoo3  -g. 

*  Or,  Setzeier  (zets'-i'-'r).—  *  Or,  Diner  (de-na'). 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE. 


209 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


II.  — Das  Mittag-sessen, 


Gefliigel  (g^-flii^-g'l),  n., 

Ein  Kapaun  (ka-pa-oon^), 
Eine  Taube  (mit  Erbsen),^ 
Huhnersalat  (liu'-n'r-za-lat'), 
Ein  Huhn  in  Mayonnaise,^  n., 
Ein  Rebhuhn  ^  (mit  Kohl),  n., 
Eine  wilde  Ente  (vil'-de  en'-te), 
Eine  Gans  (gans), 


Poultry, 

A  capon. 

A  pigeon  (with  peas). 

A  chicken  salad. 

A  chicken  mayonnaise. 

A  partridge  (with  cabbage), 

A  wild  duck. 

A  goose. 


Wildbret  (vilt^-br^t),  n.,  Game. 

Hasenbraten  (ha'-zen-bra'-t'n),  m.,  Roast  hare. 
Hasenpfeffer  (— pfe'-fr),  m.,  A  jugged  hare. 

Rehkeule  (ra'-ko-i'-le),/.,  Haunch  of  venison. 

Wildschweinskopf,*  m.,  Wild  hog's  head. 


Rindfleisch,  Hammelfleisch,^ 
u.  s.  w.,*^ 

Schmorbraten  (slimor'-bra'-t' n),' 

Filet  in  Maderasauce,® 

Roast  Beef  mit  Kartoffeln,® 

Hammelkotelett, 

Nierenschnitten  (ne'-ren-slini'-t'n),  Kidneys. 

Kalbskopf  (k^lps'-kopf  ),  m.,  Calf's  head 


Beef,  mutton,  etc. 

Beef-a-la-mode. 
Fillet  with  Madeira. 
Roast  beef  and  potatoes. 
Mutton-chop. 


1  Ta-oo'-be  mit  Srp'-s'n.  —  2  Hoon  in  ma-yo-na'-ze. 

3  Rep'-hoon'.—  ^  Vilt'-shvins-kopf  .—  5  Rint'-flisli,  ha'-m'l- 

6  U.  s.  w.,  for  mid  so  weiter,  and  so  forth. 

7  Or,  boeiif  a  la  mode. —  »  Fe-la'  in  ma-da'-ra  so'-se. 
10  R5st'-bef Kar-t6'-£'ln. 


210 


HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 
III.  — Das  Mittagsessen, 


Zwischeiig-erichte, 

Eiii  Eierauflauf  (i'-'r-a-oof -la-d6f), 
Eine  Omelette  ^  mit  Rum,® 
Vanillensahne,*  /., 


Gemiise,  n., 

Griine  Erbsen  (grii'-ne  §Lrp -s'n),/.* 

Bratkartoffeln,  /.,* 

Spargel  (s7ipar'-g'l),  m., 

Mohreii  (m<i'-r'n),  /.,* 

Kohlriiben  (kol'-rli'-b'n),  /.,* 

Rote  Riiben,  /., 

Blumenkohl,  m., 

Sauerkraut  (za-d6'-'r-kra-d6t'),  n., 

Weisse  Bohnen  (vi'-se  bo'-nen), 

Griine  Bohnen,  /, 

Spinat  (shpi-naV),  m., 

Gurken  (gd6r'-k'n),  /., 


palate  (z8i-la^-t6),  m., 

Kopfsalat  (kopf'-za-laf),  m., 
Endiviensalat  (en-de'-vi-en — ),  m., 
Hummersalat  (hdb'-m'r — ),  m., 


Relishes.* 

Puffed  omelet. 
Omelet,  with  rum. 
Vanilla  cream. 

Vegetables. 

Green  peas. 

Fried  potatoes. 

Asparagus. 

Carrots. 

Turnips. 

Beets. 

Cauliflower. 

Sourkrout. 

White  beans. 

French  beans. 

Spinach. 

Cucumbers. 

Salads. 

Lettuce. 
Chickory  salad. 
Lobster  salad. 


1  Tsvi'-sh'n-gg-rTcJi'-tg.     Lit. :    Between-dishes.  —  2  Or,  ein  Eier* 
kuciien,  m.  — 3  O-m'-let'  init  room'.— 4  Va-ni'-lT-eii-za'-ne. 
*  Eine  Erbse.  —  Eine  Kartoffel.  —  Eine  MolireT— jEtite  Riibe. 


HOTEL    AND    BOAKDING-HOUiSE. 


211 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


IV.  — Das  Mittagrsessen. 


Backwerk  und  Naclitisch,i 

Pastetchen  (pas-tat'-cTi'n), 
Kirschentorte  (kir'-sli'n-tor'-te),  /., 
Apfelkuchen  (ap'-f  l-k6o'-A:7i'n),  m., 
RaChmkase  (ram'-k§.'-ze),  m., 
Schweizerkase  (stivi'-ts'r— ),  m., 
Eingemachte  Pflaumen,^  /., 
Pfirsich-Kompott,*  /., 
Aprikosen-Marmelade,*  /., 
Gebackene  Apfelschnitte,®  /., 
Ananas  (a'-na-nas),  /., 
Apfel  (ep'-fl),  m,, 
Pflaumen  (pf la-do' -men),  /.,     - 
Birnen  (bir'-nen),  /., 
Johannisbeeren  (yo-tia'-nis-ba'-r'n), 
Erdbeeren  (arV— ),/., 
Himbeeren  (him'  — ),  /., 
Weintrauben  (vin'-tra-oo'-b'n),  /., 
Niisse  (nn'-se),  /., 
Haselniisse  (h.a'-zel-nu'-se),  /., 


Pastries  and  desserts. 

Patties. 

Cherry- tart. 

Apple-pie. 

Cream  cheese. 

Gruyere. 

Stewed  prunes. 

Stewed  peaches. 

Marmalade  of  apricots. 

Apple-fritters. 

A  pine-apple. 

Apples. 

Prunes. 

Pears. 

Currants. 

Strawberries. 

Raspberries. 

A  bunch  of  grapes. 

Nuts. 

Hazel-nuts. 


1  Bak'-vSrk'  oont  niifc/i'-tish. 

2  Tn'-ge-mafc/t  -te  pfla-oo'-men. 

3  PfTr'-zic/i-kom-pot ."" 

4  A-pri-ko'-z'n  uiar-ine-lii'-dS. 

5  Ge-ba'-k'iie  ap'-t'l-shni'-te. 


212  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  conversation, 

whether  for  self -study  or  preparation  for  the  class-room. 

{See  also  IHrecUons,  before  Part  I.) 

CONVERSATIONS. 

l.-DAS  MITTAGSESSEN. 

Nun!  Was  fiir  Suppe  sollen  wir  nehmen?  —  Eine 
Nudelsuppe,  wenn  es  Ihiien  recht  ist.^  —  Das  ist  mir 
ganz  recht.^  Und  Austern,  nicht  wahr  ?  ^  —  Nicht  fur 
mich.  Ich  nehme  lieber*  Sardinen.  —  Und  was  fiir 
Fisch  ?  —  Wir  wollen  eine  Forelle  nehmen.  —  Gut. 
Kellner!  Bringen  Sie  uns  zweimal  Nudelsuppe,  ein 
Dutzend  Austern,  Sardinen  und  eine  Forelle.  Das 
andere  werden  wir^  nachher  bestellen.^ 

2.—BEIM  MOBELHANDLER* 

Ich  mochte  gern  Mobel  fiir  meine  Wohnung  kaufen. 
—  AViinschten  Sie  vielleicht  Mahagoni^  Mobel?  —  Ich 
mochte  geschmackvolle,^  aber  nicht  zu  teure  Mobel. 


Pronunciation   and  Translations. 

1  If  it  suits  you.    If  you  wish,  if  you  like.     Lit. :  If  it  to-you  rigid  is. 

2  Yes,  please.     Yes,  I  would  like  it.     Lit. :   That  is  to-nie  quite  right. 

*  And  oysters,  too.     Lit. :  and  oysters ;  not  true  f 

*  I  prefer.     Lit. :   I  take  more-willingly.    Lieber   is  tlie  irregular 
comparative  of  the  adverb  gern. 

^  For  tliis  construction,  see  j)age  84,  Sect.  9. 

6  Bestellen,  to  order. 

7  Ma-ha-g5'.ne.  —  8  G5-shm^k'-f 61',  tasteful. 

*  At  the  furniture  store.     Lit. :  at  the  furniture  dealer's. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  213 

—  Gut;  ich  habe  eine  Zimmereinrichtung ^  in  Ma- 
hagoni,  die  Ihnen  gewiss  gefallen  wird.  —  Was  gehort 
zu  der  Einrichtung  ?  ^  —  Sechs  Sessel,  zwolf  Stiihle, 
ein  Sofa  ^  und  ein  Tischchen.  —  Da  ist  noch  eine 
Etagere/  die  sehr  gut  dazu  passen  wiirde.^  —  Wie  viel 
verlangen  Sie  fiir  alles?  —  Das  wiirde  siebenhundert 
Mark  kosten.  —  Ach,  das  ist  zu  teuer.  Sie  miissen  es 
mir  etwas  billiger  lassen.^  —  Nun  gut,  sagen  wir 
sechshundert  und  fiinfzig  Mark. 


Note.  —  Study  the   Subjunctive,  etc.,  of  the 
Strong  Conjugation,  page  513. 


3.  — DIE  ZEIT. 

Um  wie  viel  Uhr  wollen  gnadige  Frau  ausgehen? 
—  Ich  mochte  ein  viertel  zwolf  ausgehen.  Wie  viel 
Uhr  ist  es  jetzt?  —  Die  Uhr  steht,^  gnadige  Frau. — 
So  sehen  Sie  auf  Ihre  Uhr.  —  Ich  habe  meine  nicht 
bei  mir.  —  Dann  sehen  Sie  auf  die  Uhr  in  der  Bib- 
liothek.^ 


Pronunciation   and   Translations. 

1  I'-ne  tsi'-rn'r-in'-ric/i-tooii.     Lit. :  a  parlor  set. 

2  What  does  it  consist  of  ?  Lit.:  what  belongs  to  the  set?  Notice: 
Wem  gehort  dieses  Haus?  W^lio  owns  this  honse?  Es  gehort 
sich,  class It  is  becoming  that 

3  Z5'-fa,  sofa.—  ^  A-ta-zha'-re,  an  Etagere,  a  'what-not.'' 

5  Lit. :  which  verj'  well  to-it  (see  p.  161,  note  1)  fit  w6iTldr% 

6  Lit. :  you  mii.st  it  to-me  somewhat  cheaper  let  (have). 

^  S/itat',  has  stopped.     Lit. :  stands.  —  8  Bi-bli-o-tak',  library, 


214  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

To  be  translated  and  written  out  in  German,  bid  also  to  be  recited 

orally  in  the  class-room.    {For  Self-Study,  see  Directions 

be/ore  Part  I, 

EXERCISES. 

I.- IN  THE  HOTEL. 

John,  have  you  taken  those  towels  up  to  Mr.  and 
and  Mrs.  Heine's  room?^  —  Yes,  sir;  I  took  them  up 
to  them  a  moment  ago.^ 

John,  you  did  'nt  brush  my  overcoat.^  —  Yes,  sir ;  I 
brushed  it.  —  You  didn't  bring  it  up.*  —  Why,  3^es, 
sir;  I  brought  it  to  you.  —  I  don't  see  it  anywhere.^ 
I  hung  it  in  your  wardrobe.^  —  Ah,  here  it  is. 

2.  — TO   START  FROM   THE  HOTEL.* 

Please  make  up  my  account;  I  want  to  leave  to- 
morrow morning.  —  Very  well,  sir.  At  what  time 
do  you  intend   to  leave  ?^  —  Please  order  ^  the  car- 


Aids  to  Translation. 

1  Have  yoii  those  towels  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Heine's  room  (auf  Herrn 
und  Frau  Heines  Ziminer)  up-brought  (hinauf gebracht)  ? 

'^  You  have  my  overcoat  not  brushed  (geputz). 

8  I  have  them  to-them  this  moment  (diesen  Augenblick,  accusa- 
tive of  time)  up  brought. 

4  You  have  him  not  up  (Jicrauf)  brought. 

6  I  can  him  nowliere  (uirgends)  see. 

6  I  liave  him  in  your  wardrobe  (Kleiderschrank)  hung  (gehangt, 

gg-hgato. 

"  At  how  mucli  o'clock  intend  you  to-start? 

8  To  order,  bestellen. 

*  Aufbruch,  or  Abreise  aus  dem  Hotel. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  215 

riage  for  six  o'clock  precisely.^  I  want  to  take  the 
half-past  six  train  for  Brussels.^  —  Very  well,  sir. — 
Wake  me  (up)  at  five  o'clock,  and  have  my  baggage 
brought  down.^  I  would  not  miss  the  train  for 
anything* 


Note.  —  Study  the  Auxiliary  Kbnnen  and  Wollen, 
page  504. 


3.  — AT    THE    TABLE. 

What  shall  we  take  in  the  way  of  dessert?^  — 
Well,  let  us  take  (some)  prunes  and  stewed  apricots. 
— I  think  I  will  rather*  take  (some)  apple-fritters. — 
Very  well.  Now,  shall  we  take  coffee  here  or  at  the 
coffee-house?^  —  Let  us  take  it  at  the  coffee-house.^ 
It  is  much  better  there  than  here.  ^  —  Very  well  then. 
Waiter!  Bring  us  (some)^  prunes,  stewed  apricots, 
and  apple-fritters.  —  Very  well,  gentlemen.^^ 


Aids  to  Translations. 

1  Auf  punkt  (poonkt),  sechs  Uhr. 

2  For  Brussels,  nach  Briissel  (brie'-s'l). 

8  And  let-{you)  my  baggage  down  (/i.erunter)-bring. 

*  Not for  anything,  ja  nicht.     Lit. :  I  might  the  train  indeed 

not  (ja  nicht)  miss  (verfehlen,  f er-fa'-Pn). 

6  In  the  way  of  dessert,  zum  Nachtisch  (or,  Dessert,  de-sarO. 

«  Shall  we  {the)  coffee  here  or  at  the  (im)  coffee-house  drink? 
^  We  will  him  (der  KafFee)  at  the  coffee-house  drink. 
8  He  is  there  (dort)  better  than  here. 

8  Words  in  parenthesis,  in  the  exercises,  are  not  to  be  translated 
into  German, 
w  My  sirs. —  "-•■  Ich  nehme  lieber,  lit.  :  I  take  rather. 


216  HOTEL    UND    TENSION. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation  opposite,  then  without 

it  J  in  preparation  for  reading  aloud  and  translating 

in  class. 

fjtitnfftttt  ant  9W<iln** 

—  SSillfommen,  lieber  Softer,  in  imferm  dim  granffurt. 

—  3d)  freue  mid)  fe(;r,  ©ie  U)iebei;^ufel;en,  aber  3l)r  alte^ 
granffurt  ift,  mic  e^5  fdjeint,  ein  rcd)t  ncue§  Jyranffiirt  (}c= 
tuorben.  3^^  ftmme  iiber  bie  8d)i3n(;citcn/  bic  mir  id;on 
beiin  (Sinfal^ren^  in  ben  ^a(;n(;of  begei-jnetcu. 

—  3a,  iuir  finb  and;  nidjt  menitj  ftol^  auf  biefc^  nencfte 
33aun)er!/  unfern  Sentra(=^a[;n(;of. 

—  ^^hm  nni6  id;  3^"^!^  oi^<^  cinen  g^rennb,  §crrn  ^i)rncr, 
Dorftellcn/  bent  id)  iierf^rod)cn^  I;abe,  bie  8tabt  griinblid;^ 
^n  ^eigen. 

—  ©5  frent  mid)  fefjr,  ©ie  fennen  ^n  ternen.  3^)  ^^^^^ 
3f;nen  alle§  (Sefjen^toerte  jeigen.  Slber  ^nerft  miiffen  <B\<i 
mit  mir  friU;ftiiden. 

—  ^anfe  fd;i3n,  ©ie  finb  fe^r  freunblid;. 

—  ©e^en  ©ie  fid;  l;icr(;cr,  ^oftor,  nnb  (Bie,  §err  .'Rijrner, 

ne(;men  ©ie  ^n  meiner  9^ed;ten  ^(a^ ©ie  tmffen,  baft 

Ravi  ber  ©ro^e^  (;ier  ein  ©d)(o6  (;atte,  imb  'Da^  gmnffuvt 
im  9.  t  3«Wi"^^^^t  bie  it)id;tigfte  §anbel^)tat)t  :Dcut]d;= 
(anb§  \mv.  ©ie  ift  and)  I;ente  nod;  ein  fe(;r  bebeutenber 
$anbe(^p(a^.  2Bie  ©ie  miffen,  ftammt^  bie  gamilie  dioti)'' 
fd;i(b  t)on  f)ier. 


1  Shfiii'-hi-t'ii.—  2  Tn'-fii'-r'n.  —  3  Ba-oo'-vgrk'. 

*  For'-s/itg'-l'n.—  5  Fgr-sJipro'-fc/f'n*.—  6  Grient'-lic/i. 

^  Charles  tlie  Great.   Anglice:  Charleina-jjiu'.  —  «  Strictly:  originates 
the  family  Rothschild  from  here.  —  *  Frank'-fdort  am  min'. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  217 

For  Self-Study,  should  be  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation, 

then  without  it,  and  when  thoroughly  understood,  read 

aloud  in  German. 

READING. 
FRAN  KFORT-ON -THE- MAIN. 

—  Welcome,  dear  doctor,  in  our  old  Frankfort. 

—  I  am  very  glad  %  you  again-to-see.  But  your  old 
Frankfort  is,  as  it  seems  (to  me),  a  right  new  Frank- 
fort become.  I  wonder  over  the  beauty,  which  me^ 
already  as  I  landed  here^  in  the  railroad-depot  met. 

—  Yes,  we  are  also  not  (a)  little  proud  over  this 
new  building,  our  Central  Railroad-depot. 

—  (But)  now  must  I  to-you  also  a  friend,  Mr. 
Korner,  introduce,  to-whom  ^  I  promised  have  the 
city  thoroughly  to  show. 

—  I  am  very  glad  you  *  to-know  {to  learn)!'  I  will 
to-you  all  (that  is)  worth-seeing  show.  But  first  must 
you  with  me  breakfast. 

—  Thanks,  many.     You  are  very  kind. 

—  Set  ye  yourself  here,  doctor,  and  you,  Herr  Korner, 

take  ye  to   my   right   place You   know   tliat 

Charlemagne  here  a  palace  had,  and  that  Frankfort 
in  the  ninth  century  the  most  important  mercantile- 
city  of-Germany  was.  It  is  also-to-day  yet  a  very 
important  manufacturing  place.  As  you  know,  the 
family  Rothschild  originate  from  here. 


^  strictly :  to-vae.  —  ^  Strictly  :  hy-the  incoming. 

3  Strictly:  io-the;  i.e.,  to  the  which.     Anglice :  to-whom. 

*  Strictly:  It  rejoices  ine.  —  ^  Anglice:  to  mal?e  your  acquaintance. 

t  For,  im  neunten.  —  X  Strictly :  I  rejoice  myself  very. 


218  HOTEL    UND    PENSION. 

—  ^a^  mufete  id;  nod)  ind)t. 

—  3^r  morgen  will  id;  ^\:)\Kn  in  ber  Qubengaffe  ba^ 
©eburt^^mi^  bcr  ^Jtot(;[d)i(b§  ^eigen.  §cute  nadimittag 
ntdd)te  id),  ba§  ©ie  hen  ^oni  fet)en.*  ©c  ift  ein  im^o= 
fanteg  ^aun^erf  bc§  13.^  3^^^^;iinbert^.  ^or  bem  $od;= 
altar  ber  2Ba(;lfa^eIIe  tDnrben  bie  Jlaifer  ^onrab  I.  unb 
gran^  II.  gefront.  ^er  ^om  ift  iibrigen^  aud^  ber  ^Bdjan- 
piai^  ber  le^en  <Scene  be§  ^iftor  §ngofd;en  !Drama§  „  ^er= 
nani",  in  tt)elcf)er  ^arl  V.  gum  5^aifer  ®eutfd)(anbg  erit)d(;(t 
it)irb. 

—  D,  bag  ift  ja  fel^r  tntereffant.  2l6er  ic^  ba^te,  bie 
^aifer  feien^  im  9^omer  gefront  tDorben. 

—  ©ie  irren.^  ^er  dtbrmx  entl)a(t  bie  ^ortrait^  aller 
^aifer,  melcbe  in  granffurt  gefront  vourben.  ^a(;er  ne(;nten 
(5ie  tt)of)l  an,^  ba§  bie  ^ri^nungen  auc^  im  D^omer  ftatt= 
fanben. 

—  2)a§  "oad^U  id),  '^^m  ^aifer^ortrait^  ^^  im  9?omer  bilben 
iibrigeng  eine  fe(;r  tntereffante  ©ammlung.^^ 

—  3a,  aber  fimftlerifd)  finb  fie  nid;t  bebeutenb.  ^agegen 
rt)ill  id)  ©ie  l)eute  nad;mittag  in  bag  ©tabe(=3Kufeum  fuf)ren 
it)e(c^eg  manc^  tijertDotteg  ©emcilbe  ent^cdt,  befonberg  einige 
^ilber  ber  §olldnbifd)en  unb  gldmifc^en  (Sd)ule. 

—  ©inb  aud^  (5fu(:pturen^  bort? 

—  9^id;t  i)ie( ;  aber  bie  Stabt  ^at  and)  barin  einigeg  auf= 
gumeifen,  rt)ag  man  anbergtt)o^^  nid;t  fe(;en  !ann. 

—  Bk  benfen  it)o^(  an  bie  berii^mte  2lriabne?^* 

—  3<^^i^^^/  ^i^  miiffen  ©ie  fic^er  fel)en ;  fie  ift  eine  gang 
t)errlid;e  6c^ij|)fung.^^    TlovQm  merben  mir  fie  befud;en. 


1  Gasse  =  street. —  ^  Strictly,  the  birth -house  of-the  Rothschild, 
8  Anglice:  tliis  afternoon. —  *  Strictly:  wish  I  tliat  you  the  cathedral 
e.  —  fi  For,  dreizehnten. —  «  Subjunctive  of  to-he.     Lit. :  may  he. 
7  Strictly ;  you  err.  —  *  Strictly :  tlierefrom  take  you  probably  an. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  219 

—  That  knew  I  not  yet. 

—  Yes.  To-morrow  will  I  to-you  in  the  Juden- 
gasse/  the  house  where  the  Rothschild  was  born^ 
show.  To-day  ajternoon^  I  wish  you  to  see  the 
cathedral.*  It  is  an  imposing  edifice  of-the  thirteenth 
century.  Before  the  high-altar  of-the  election-chapel 
were  the  Emperors  Conrad  I.  and  Francis  II.  crowned. 
The  cathedral  is  besides  also  the  spot  of  the  last 
scenes  of-the  Victor  Hugo  drama  (of)  Hernani,  in  which 
Charles  V.  to-the  Emperor  of-Germany  elected  is. 

—  Oh,  that  is  indeed  very  interesting.  But  I  thought 
the  emperors  were^  in-the  city-hall  crowned  (become). 

—  You  are-mistaken.''  The  town-hall  contains  the 
portraits  of-all  (the)  emperors  which  in  Frankfort 
crowned  were.  Therefrom  you  came  to  believe^  that 
the  coronations  also  in-the  city-hall  took-place. 

— That's  what  I  thought.^  These  emperors'-portraits 
in  the  city-hall  form,  however,  a  very 

— Yes,  but  artistically  are  they  not  important.  How- 
ever, will  I  you  to-day  afternoon  in  the  Stiidel  Museum 
take,  which  many  worthy  paintings  contains,  especially 
some  pictures  o/-the  Dutch  and  Flemish  schools. 

—  Are  also  pieces-of-sculpture  there? 

—  Not  many ;  but  the  city  has  also  herein  some- 
thing to-show  which  one  elsewhere  not  see  can. 

—  You  mean  the  celebrated  Ariadne? 

— Certainly,  //er  must  you  surely  see ;  she  is  a  quite 
masterly  work.     To-morrow  will  we  her  visit. 


9  Dafc/t-tg,  imperfect  of  denken.     Lit. :  That  thought  I. 
i'^  Por-tra'. —  ^  Zaiu'-lobii;  collection. —  ^'^  Skdolp-too'-r'n. 
13  Aii'-cl'rs-vo'.  —  ^^  A-ri-at'-ne. 
15  Her'-li-c/te  shiip'-fdou. 


220  HOTEL    UNO    PENSION. 


-^^^^^<><^'W-^^^^^=*^^^^!^^^***'-^^^<:^ 


:;<4i^j3,»Si^^^<^><^^<^^^><^^^ii*' 


-t^W^^^t^^^   7^<^t/e^eJ(^l^^^^s'^<^^'^'^^<^^f^i^^ 


■'.'^^>i^/ii'fV*^i-^ 


OL^'i^'^^^e^i^^  ..<^^^^  «»^^tW^^^-<>J^'<^t-^^^^>^^^W*i<^^-^<' 


1  Deren,  their  (lit, :  of  those).  See  p.  490.  Also,  ihrer.  —  «  See  p.  164. 


HOTEL    AND    BOARDING-HOUSE.  221 


-^ft-'/^^^^t'*-^^ 


'^^/t^^t-st-*-^^ 


"^^^H^iH^f^ 


Qyc^n^cz^pt/^z-  o-*^ 


Uy&tC^^. 


DIRECTIONS. 


Read  and  translate  the  above  letter,  after  which  copy  it  off, 
then  learn  it  by  heart,  and  some  hour  or  two  afterward  write  it 
again  in  German  script  from  memory.  For  samples  of  letters, 
etc.,  see  Written  Alphabet,  pages  48  and  49. 

TRANSLATION. 

Mr.  N.,  Proprietor  of  the  H.  K.  —  I  leave  here  on  the  15th 
inst.,  with  Mrs.  D.,  my  two  children,  and  their  ^  maid,  expecting 
to  arrive  in  Berlin  about  the  25th.  I  (write  to)  ask  you  to  re- 
serve for  us,  for  the  date  mentioned,  three  rooms  in  the  second 
or  third  story,  and  facing  the  Zietenplatz,  if  possible.  I  shall 
telegraph  you  from  London  ^  the  day  and  hour  of  our  arrival  in 
Berlin.  Please  send  a  carriage  to  meet  us  at  the  Hamburger 
depot.     I  remain,  very  respectfully  yours,  — 

Literal  Translation.  —  The  fifth  June.  I  will  on  the  15th 
of  this,  with  my  wife,  my  two  children,  and  of  them  ^  (the)  maid 

from  here  leave,  and  think I  pray  you  therefore  to-us 

from-the  25th  on where  possible,  toward  the  Zietenplatz 

outward,  to-reserve   to-please Please   let  ye  us  with  a 

carriage  from  the  Hamburger  depot  fetch.     Respectfully,  J.  D. 

Pronunciation.  —  Be-zit'-s'r ge-ar'-t'r  her' am 

fiinf-tsan-t'ii  de'-zes oont  da  -r'n  bo'-ne  fon  tier 

ap'-ri'-z'n 6on'-ge-f§.r'  am  fiinf-oont-tsvan'-tsicTi-st'ii 

dons  fom  funf-oont-tsvan'-tsic/i-st'n tse'-t'n- 

plats' ta-le-gra-fe'-r'n ap'-li5'-l'n.    A.kh'-to6ns- 

fol'. 


Part  III. 


THE    WEATHER     AND    THE    CITY. 


DAS  WETTER  UND  DIE   STADT 


••o^« 


SECTION    I. 


1. 

— « — — 

ABOUT  THE  WEATHER. 

2. 

SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE  VERBS. 

3. 

THE  DAYS,  MONTHS,  etc. 

4. 

THE  EXCHANGE. 

5. 

ON  RISING. 

6. 

AT  A  MONEY  BROKER'S. 

7. 

A  WALK  THROUGH  DRESDEN  (I). 

8. 

FORM  OF  DRAFT. 

223 


m. 


DAS     WETTER     UND     DIE     STADT. 

Ich  moclite^  lieute  g^erii  ausgeheii;  aber 
wenii  sich  das  Wetter  bis  ^  Mittag^  iiicht 
aufklart,  werden  wir  zu  Haiise^  bleiben 
miissen. 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Ich  much^'t^  h6-i^-t6  gr^rii  a-dbs^'-gra'-'n ;  a^'-b'r  v6n 
zich  das  v6^-t'r  bis  mV-tiikh  nicht  a-()<)f-kldrt',  var^- 
d'n  ver  tsoo  li^-db^-z6  bli^-b'n   inii^-s'n. 


1  Imperfect  subjunctive  of  mogen,  to  he  willing,  to  desire,  etc. 

2  Bis  {till,  until)  is  a  preposition  and  governs  the  accusative.  Bis, 
however,  is  often  used  adverbially  with  other  prepositions,  in  the  sense 
of  to,  as  far  as.  Thus :  Bis  nach  Rom  =  ns  far  as  Rome ;  Bis  zur 
Qrenze  (gr^n'-ts^)  =  to  the  frontier ;  Bis  auf  die  H&ut^^  to  the  skin. 

224 


III. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 

I  should  like  to  go  out  to-day;  but  if 
the  weather  does  not  clear  up  before 
twelve,  we  shall  have  to  stay  at  home.* 


LITERAL  TRANSLATION. 

I  might  to-day  willingly  out-go,  but  if  itself  the 
weather  till  noon  not  up-clears,  shall  we  at-home 
(to)  stay  be-obliged. 


8  Or,  zu  Haus.    Words  of  one  syllable  may  drop  the  dative  ending 
(e),  or  retain  it,  at  the  option  of  the  speaker. 

*  Zu  Hause  bleiben,  to  stay  at  home;  but,  nach  Hause  gehen, 

to  go  home.     T/ii  answers  to  the  qnestioii  ivliere,  not  whither.     Never  say 
zu  Hause  gehen,  although  many  Germans  incorrectly  do  so. 

226 


226  THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 

I. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Ich  mochte  gem  mit  Ihnen  ausgehen. 

Aber  das  Wetter  ist  so  schlecht. 

Und  die  Strassen  sind  so  nass. 

Und  ich  gehe  nie  aus,  wenn  es  regnet. 

Sie  konnten  ja  Ihre  Gummischuhe  anziehen.^ 
Ich  habe  mir  noch  keine  Gummischuhe  gekauft. 

Und    gestern    abend,    als    ich    aus    dem    Theater 

kam,  habe  ich  aucb  noch  meinen  Regenschirm 

verloren. 
Ich  mochte  es'^  nicht  wagen,  so  auszugehen.* 
Ihr   Vetterf    konnte    Ihnen   seine  Gummischuhe 

leihen. 
Ach   ja,   Alfred,   du   wiirdest   mir    einen   grossen 

Gefallen  thuen. 
Aber  ich  fiirchte,  sie  werden  dir  zu  klein  sein. 


NOTES. 

1  Anziehen  and  ausziehen  are  the  words  generally  used  to  express 
to  put  on,  to  take  off.  \\\\i  note  tlie  followinj:^  exceptions :  To  put  on  one's 
hat  =  Den  Hut  atifsetiseu  (a-oof -ze'-ts*n) ;  To  take  off  ones  hat  =  Den 
Hut  absetzen  (ap'-zg'-ts'n)r^  To  put  on  a  collar  =  Den  Kragen  tiin- 
binden;  To  take  off  a  collar  =  T>en  Kragen  abbinden, —  To  put  on 
Jeivcfs  =  Den  Schmuek  (lit. :  adornment)  anlegen  ;  To  take  off  jewels 
=  Den  Schmuek  ablegen. 

•-'•  Es  is  frecjuently  used  to  refer  to  an  infinitive  following  it.  Thus: 
Ich  bereue  es  nicht,  das  gethan  zu  haben,  I  d(^  not  repent  to  have 
done  that.     Lit.:  I  repent  it  not  that  done  io-have. 


DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 


227 


I. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  Ich  much^'t^  g"6rii  mit 
e^-n6n  a-obs^-ga'-'n. 

De  sTitra'-s'n  zint  zo  nas'. 
Ne  a-oos  ven  es  rach'-net. 

Gob'-me-slioo'-e  an'-tse'-'n. 


A-d6s  dam  te-a'-t'r  .  .  . 
kam' ra'-g'n-sliirm' 


Va'-g'n  zo'. 
Fe'-t'r li'-'n. 


Al'-fret'   .   .   . 
t66'-'n. 

Ich  iuTch'-te. 


ge-fa'-l'n 


I  would  very  much  like  to 
go  out  with  you.i 

But  the  weather  is  so  bad. 
The  streets  are  so  wet. 

And  I  never  go  out  when  it 
rains. 

You  could  put  on  your  rubbers. 

I  haven't  bought  any  rubbers 
yet. 

And  last  night  I  lost  my  um- 
brella on  my  way  from  the 
theater.^ 

I  am  afraid  to  go  out  this  way.* 
But    your  cousin    could    lend 
you  his  rubbers. 

Yes,  Alfred.  You'll  greatly 
oblige  me.* 

But  I  am  afraid  they  will,  etc.^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  T  might  (i.  e.,  would)  willingly  with  you  go.  —  Notice  the  dative 
Ihnen  after  mit. 

■■^  And  yesterday  evening,  when  I  out  the  theater  came,  have  I 
moreover  my  umbrella  lost. 

3  I  might  (i.  e.,  would)  it  not  dare,  so  out-to-go. 

^  You  would  to-me  a  great  favor  do. 

*  But  I  fear,  they  will  to  you  {i.  e.,  for  you)  too  small  be. 

*  From  ausgehen,  a  separable  verb. 

t  Ihr  Vetter^your  (male)  cousin.  Hire  Cousine  (Koo-ze'-nS), 
your  (female)  cousin.     Sec  page  150. 


228  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Wie  kannst  du  so  etwas  behaupten? 
Du  machst  dich  iiber  mich  lustig.     Or, 

Du  hast  mich  zum  besten. 


3.  Nun!    Willst  du  sie  mir^  leihen? 

Was    willst    du,  —  meine     Gummischuhe     und 

meinen^  Regenschirm  ? 
Ja,  natiirlich. 
Wann  gehst  du  aus?^ 
Ich  gehe  gleich  aus. 
Nun,  so  will  ich  sie  dir^  gleich  holen  lassen. 

Johann,  gehen  Sie  auf  mein  Zimmer! 
Meine  neuen  Gummischuhe  sind  unter  dem  Bett, 
und  mein  Regenschirm  steht  im  Kleiderschrank. 

Bringen  Sie  beides  herunter! 


3.   Sie  haben  ihm  aber*  den  Schliissel  niclit 
gegeben. 

Nein. 


NOTES. 

1  For  the  position  of  the  personal  pronoun  objects,  see  p.  148, 

2  When  two  or  more  nouns  follow  each  other,  the  possessive  adjec- 
tives are  repeated  before  each,  if  they  are  of  different  gender  or  number : 
My  rubbers  and  my  umbrella. 

8  Or,  if  not  speaking  ftimiliarly  :  Wann  gehen  Sie  aus? 

*  Aber,  doch,  nur,  wohl,  etc.,  are  often  used  in  German,  where 
no  corresponding  word  is  used  in  English.  They  simply  add  strength 
to  the  expression. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


229 


Zo'  et'-vas  be-lia-cJop'-t'n. 

Doo   makhst loos'- 

tich. 

Doo  liast  mich  tsoom 
bes  -t'n. 


2.  Noon!    Vilst    doo    ze 
mer  li^-'n. 


Ya,  Yia-tixT'-lich. 
Van  gast  doo  a-dos? 


Yo-lian'. 

(DOn'-t'r   dam   bet' 
kli  -d'r-shrank'. 


How  can  you  speak  that  way?^ 
You  are  mocking  me.^     Or, 

You  are  making  fun  of  me.* 


Bi'-des. 


Well !  Will  you  lend  them 
to  me  ? 

What  do  you  mean,*  —  my 
rubbers  and^  umbrella? 

Why,  of  course. 

When  are  you  going  out  ? 

I  am  going  out  right  away. 

Well,  then,  I'll«  have  them 
brought  to  you  at  once."^ 

John,  go  up  to  my  room.^ 
You  will  find  my  rubbers  under 

the  bed,  and  my  umbrella  in 

the  closet.* 
Bring  them  down.^*> 


3.  Ze  ha^-b'n  em  a^-b'r 
dan  shlii^-s'l  uicht  g6- 
ga^-b'n. 


You  didn't  give  him  your 
key. 

No.    I  did  n't  give  it  to  him.* 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  How  can  you  so  something  {i.  e.,  sncli  a  thing)  affirm  (be- 
haupten)?—  ^  You  make  (yourself)  over  (i.  e.,  at)  me  merry. 

3  You  have  me  to-the  best.  —  ^  What  will  you?—  5  And  my. 

6  Now  so  will  I. —  "^  I  will  them  to-you  at-once  fetch  let. 

8  Go  upon  my  room. —  ^  My  new  rubbers  are  under  tlie  bed,  and 
my  umbrella  stands  in  the  closet. —  i"  Bring  (ye)  both  down. 

*  Simply,  No.  German  answers  are  made  by  the  use  of  ja  or  nein 
only,  much  oftener  than  is  the  case  in  English. 


230  DAS    WETTER    UNI)    DIE    RTADT. 

Dann  wird*  er  nicht  in  Ihr  Zimmer  koiinen.^ 

Hat  er  nicht  einen  Hauptschliissel  ? 

Das  ist  wahr. 

A  propos,2  haben  Sie  Herrn  Frank  dieser  Tage* 

gesehen  ? 
Nein.     Ich   weiss   nicht,   was   aus   ihm ,  geworden 

ist. 
Warum  besuchen  Sie  ihn  nicht? 
Er  miisste^  erst  zu  mir  kommen. 

Ich  bin  so   beschaftigt,  dass   ich   nicht  weiss,   wo 

mir  der  Kopf  steht.* 
Aber  wenn  man  Sie  besuchen  will,  trifFt  man  Sie 

nie  zu  Hause. 
Mich !     Sie  scherzen.     Ich   komme  ja   kaum   vor 

die  Thiir. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Mixed  Declension, 


NOTES. 

1  Konnen,  as  seen  here,  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  gehen 
konnen. 

^  From  the  French,  d.  propos.  Purely  German  phrases  for  Bi/  the 
way  are:  (1)  Was  ich  noch  sagen  wollte,  lit.:  What  T  besides  tell 
wanted.    (2)  Da  f allt  mir  ein,  lit. :  There  occurs  to-me  f str. :  falls  to-me  in). 

8  Er  miisste,  he  should  {be  obliged),  imperfect  subjunctive  of  miis- 
sen. 

4  Idiomatic  expression.  Other  phrases  with  Kopf,  are :  Aufseineni 
Kopfe  bestehen,  to  be  obstinate ;  Das  will  luir  uiclit  in  den  Kopf, 
/  canH  get  it  into  my  head;  Jemandem  den  Kopf  waschen,  to  (jive 
a  good  scolding ;  Den  Kopf  verlieren,  to  lose  one's  senses. 

*  See  page  20,  note  1. 


THE    WEATHER 

Dan  virt  ar  nicht. 

Ha-oopt'-slilu'-s'l. 
Das  ist  var'. 
A-pro-po' frank. 


AND    THE    CITY. 


231 


Ar  mws'-te  arst  tsoo 
mer'. 

Zo'  be-slief -ticTit vo 

mer  dar  kopf  sTz-tat. 


Trift  man. 

Ze  sher-ts'n 
lor  de  tiir^ 


ka-d6m 


He  will  not  be  able  to  open  the 

door.^ 
Has  n't  he  his  skeleton  key  ? 
That 's  true. 

By  the  way,  have  you  seen  Mr. 

Frank  lately.^ 
I?     No.      I   don't  know   what 

has  become  of  him.^ 
Why    don't    you    go   and   see 

him  ?  4 
He  ought  to  come  and  see  me.^ 

I  am  so  busy,  I  don't  know® 
what  to  do.' 

But  you    are    never  in   when 
people  call  on  you.^ 

I !     You  are  joking.    I  scarcely 
ever  go  out.® 


page  474. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Then  will  he  not  in  your  room  {to  go)  be-able. 

2  These  days;  or,  more  strictly  :  o/-these  days.     Time,  in  an  indefi- 
nite way,  is  expressed  by  the  genitive.     Seepage 

3  What  (out)  of  him  become  is.    Geworden,  past  part,  of  werden. 


4  Why  visit  you  him  not?    ^Besuchen,  an  '  i/jseparable '  verb, 
page  234. 

5  He  ought  (lit. :  must)  first  to  me  (to)  come. 

6  I  am  so  very  busy,   that  I  know  not  where  to-me  the 
stands. 

7  Where  to-me  tlie  head  stands. 

8  But  when  one  you  visit  will,  meets  one  you  never  at  home. 
'■^  I  come  yes  (i.  e.,  indeed)  scarcely  before  the  door. 


fee' 


head 


232  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

5.  Wann^wollen  Sie  ihii  besuchen? 

Ich  weiss  nicht.     Hat  er  noch  die  alte  Wohnung  ? 

Ja,  aber   ich    weiss    nicht,    ob   er    heute  friih   zu 

Hause  sein  wird. 
Nun,  ich  kann  ja  einmal  *  vorbeigehen. 
Gut!     Gehen  Sie  vorbei. 
Sagen  Sie  einmal,*  hat   Ihre  Frau  Gemahlin  die 

Muster  bekommen? 


6.  IVeiii,  man  hat  sie  ihr^  noch  nicht  zuge- 
schickt.^ 

Das  begreife  ich  nicht. 

Ich  hatte  es  den  Leuten  doch  so  dringHch  gemacht. 

Gewohnlich  schicken  sie  die  Sachen  sehr  piinkt- 

Hch  zu. 
Da  kommt  Johann ;  der  bringt  die  Sachen  gewiss. 

Nein,  er  hat  sie  nicht. 


7.  Johann,  warnm  haben  Sie  uns  die  Saclien 
nidlit  lieruntergebraclit  ?  * 

Ich  habe  sie  iiberall  gesucht. 


NOTES. 

1  When,  in  interrogative  sentences,  =  wann.  Elsewhere,  when  = 
weun  (or  sometimes:  als).  Ex.:  (1)  Wann  Avollen  Sie  ihn  be- 
suchen?  (2)  Ich  will  ihn  besuchen,  ivenn  ich  weiss,  dass  er 
zu  Hause  ist.  —  For  tlie  use  of  als,  see  page  443,  note  f. 

2  When  there  are  two  pronoun-objects  in  the  same  clause,  the  accu- 
sative precedes  the  dative.    See  page  148. 

8  From  zuschicken,  'separable'  verb. 

*  From  herunterbrinsreB-  'senarable'  verb. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


;33 


5.    Van  vo^-rn  ze  en  b6- 

De  al'-te  vo'-ndoii. 


6p 


zin  virt. 


In-mal'  *  f or-bi'-ga'-'n. 

For-bi'. 

Md6s'-t'r  be-ko'-m'n. 


6.    Man   hat   ze    er   nokh 
uichV  tsoo^-g6-shikt'. 

Das  be-gri'-fe. 

Zo  driii'-licTi. 

Ge-v<in'-lic7i pwnkt'- 

lich. 

Ge-vis'. 

Ar  liat  ze  nicTit'. 


7.  Va^-rdbm  ha^-b'n  ze 
obns  de  zsi^-kh'n  nlcht 
li6-robn^-t'r  g-e-braA:7it'  ? 

ij'-b'r-al'  ge-zoo7^7it'. 


Well,    now!     When    will 
you  go  and  see  hini?i 

I  scarcely  know.     Does  he  live 

in  the  same  house  ?  ^ 
Yes,  but  I  don't  know  if  he  is  ^ 

at  home  this  morning. 

Well,  I  '11  call  that  way.* 
Very  well.     Call  there. 
But,  say,  have  they  sent  those 
samples  to  your  wife? 


They  have  not  sent  them 
to  her  yet. 

I  don't  understand  how  that  is.^ 

I  had  told  them  so  particularly 

about  it.^ 
They    usually    send    things 

promptly. 

Ah !  here  is  John  bringing  the 

things  (you  want). 
Why,    no.      He    hasn't    (got) 

them. 


John,  why  haven't  you 
broug-ht  them  down  (to 
us)? 

I  looked  for  them  in  every 
corner.' 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  When  will  you  liim  visit? 

2  Has  he  still  the  old  dwelling? 

8  Will  be.  —  ^  I  can  indeed  once  past-go. 

5  That  understand  I  not. 

6  I  liad  it  to-the  people  however  so  urgent  made. 

7  I  have  them  everywhere  sought, 

*  Notice  the  difference  in  accent  and  meaning.    Einmal  (in-inar)  = 
once ;  i.  e.,  one  day.    But  einmal  (iii'-inal)  =  once ;  i.  c,  one  time. 


234  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Ich  habe  sie  nirgends  finden  konnen.^ 
Warten   Sie,  mein   Freund.     Ich    will    sie    Ihnen 
selbst  holen. 


8.  SEPARABLE 

Separable  verbs  are  formed  of  simple  verbs  (as :  reden, 
vor,  ab,  her,  hin,  tceg,  zuriicJc,  etc.)  *     Ex. :    Gehen,  to 

listen,  to  stop;  etc. 

The  prefix  of  separable  verbs  receives  the  primary  accent. 
CASES    WHEN    THE    PREFIX    IS 

1.  When  zu  is  used  with  the  infinitive  of  separable  verbs,  it 

When  do  you  expect  to  leave  ?  = 

2.  The  sign  of  the  past  participle,  ge,  is  likewise  inserted 

He  left  for  Dresden  yesterday  = 

3.  When,  in  a  principal  clause,  a  separable  verb  is  in  a 
the  end  of  the  clause.     Ex. : 

He  started  for  Dresden  yesterday  = 
He  arrives  in  Dresden  to-day  = 

But  if  the  verb  is  in  a  compound  tense  (whether  with  the 
whole,  infinitive  or  past  participle,  coming  at  the  end  of  the 

1.  (With  the  infinitive)  He  will  arrive  at  Munich  to-day  = 

2.  (With  the  past  part.)  He  started  for  Vienna  yesterday  = 

CASES    WHEN    THE    PREFIX    IS    NOT 

1.  It  has  just  been  seen  that  no  separation  takes  plnce  when 

2.  Likewise,  when  the  verb  is  in  the  present  participle, 
(present  participle  of  abschreiben) ;  hinabrollend,  roUlng 
(pres.  part,  of  vorstellen),  etc. ;  the  prefixes,  ab,  hinab,  vor. 


1  The  infinitive,  konnen,  is  used  here  instead  of  the  past  participle 
(gekonnt).    See  p.  170,  note  1.  —  *  For  full  list  of  these,  see  Grammar. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  235 


Nir'-gents. 
Zelpst . 


I  can't  find  them  anywhere.^ 

Wait,    my    dear    fellow.      I  '11 
bring  them  to  you  myself. 


VERBS. 

horen,  gehen,  etc.)  and  a  prefix  (as :  an,  aiif,  aus,  mit, 
go;   ahgeheUf   to  go  away;  horetif   to  hear;   aufhoren,   to 

Thus:  ankommen  an^-ko'-ni'n ;  abreisen  ap^-ri'-z'n. 

SEPARATED    FROM    THE    VERB. 

is  mserted  between  the  prefix  and  the  simple  verb.     Ex. : 

Wann  denken  Sie  abst^reisen  ? 
between  the  prefix  and  the  simple  verb.     Ex. : 

Er  ist  gestern  nach  Dresden  abgrereist. 
simple  tense,  the  prefix  is  separated  from  it  and  placed  at 

Er  reiste  gestern  nach  Dresden  ah, 
Er  kotn^nt  heute  in  Dresden  an, 

infinitive  or  past  participle),  no  such  separation  takes  place,  the 
clause,  according  to  the  usual  German  construction.     Ex. : 
Er  wird  heute  in  Miinchen  ankommen, 
Er  ist  gestern  nach  Wien  abgereist,\ 

SEPARATED    FROM    THE    VERB. 

the  verb  is  in  a  compound  tense, 

no  separation  ever  takes  place.  Thus,  in  abscJireibend,  copying 
down  (pres.  part,  of  hinabrollen) ;  vorstellend,  introducing 
etc.,  are  never  separated  from  the  rest  of  the  verb. 


'■  1  have  tliem  nowhere  to-find  been  able. 

•f-  For  complete  treatment  of  separable  verbs,  see  Grammar. 


236  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

3.  The  following  prefixes,  he,  einp,  ent,  er,  ge,  ver,  zet\ 

which  they  are  attached.    Ex. : 

He  lost  his  money  yesterday  = 

He  receives  his  reward  now  = 

N.  B.  —  The  verbs  preceded  by  the  prefixes  be,  emp,  ent, 

Furthermore,  their  past  participle  never  takes  the  usual  sign 

rewarded;  Empfangen,  to  receive;  empfangen  {never:  emp- 

Likewise,  their  infinitive  never  inserts  the  sign  zu.     Thus : 

be«««lohnen) ;    To   receive  =  Empfangen,   or   sometimes,   zu 


Note.  —  Study  the  separable  verb 


9.  Da  siiid  meine  Grumiiiischuhe.  Aber  ich 
kanii  meiiien  Regenschirm  iiicht  fin- 
den. 

Da  steht  er  ja  in  der  Ecke. 

Der^  gehort  mir  nicht. 

Ich  weiss  nicht,  wem  er  gehort. 

Es  hat  ihn  jemand^  hier  stehen  lassen.^ 

Lassen  Sie  einmal  sehen. 

Aber,  Heber  Freund,  das*  ist  ja  der  meinige,^ 

Der  Ihrige!     Das  ist  nicht  moglich. 

Der  Ihrige  hatte  einen  Griff  von  Elfenbein. 

Der  alte,  ja. 


NOTES. 

1  Der  (ht. :  the)  is  sometimes  used  in  place  of  the  demonstrative 
pronoun  (dieser,  this;  or  jener,  that).  In  that  case  it  is  accented 
more  strongly  than  usual. 

2  Lit. :  There  has  some  one  left  it  here ;  instead  of,  Some  one  has  left 
it  here.  Es  (Ht, :  it)  is  frequently  used  thus  in  the  sense  of  there,  the 
real  subject  (here,  jemand)  coming  later  on  in  the  sentence. 

8  For  lassen  [infimtive)  instead  of  gelassen  {past  part.).    See  p.  176. 

*  The  neuter  form  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun  (das,  that)  is  used 
in  referring  to  nouns  of  any  gender.  Dies,  this,  is  used  in  the  same 
way.  Thus:  That  (or:  This)  i^  your  umbrella  =  1)0,8  (or  dies)  ist  Ihr 
Regensdiirm.  —  ^  Or,  das  ist  ja  meiner.    See  p.       ,  Qrammar. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


237 


and  wider  are  never  separated,  in  any  tense,  from  the  verb  to 

Er  verier  gestern  sein  Geld. 
Er  empfdngt  jetzt  seinen  Lohn. 
er,  ge,  ver,  zer,  and  wider  are  called  inseparable  verbs. 

ye.     Thus:  Belohnen,  to  reward ;  belohnt  {never:  be^elohnt), 
^efangen),  received ;  etc. 

To  reward  =  Belohnetif  or  sometimes,  zu  beloHnen  (never: 
enipfangen  (never:  empiSJttfangen). 


Ankommen,  page,  522 < 


9.    Da   zint   mi^-ne   grdb^- 

me-shoo'-6 ra^-g-'n- 

shirm'. 

In  dar  e'-ke, 

Dar  ge-tL<irt'. 

Vam. 

Ya'-mant  h.er  sTita'-'n. 

In-mal', 

D'r  mi'-ni-ge. 

E'-ri-ge. 

I'-nen  grif  fon  el'-f  n-bin'. 


Here  are  my  rubbers.  But 
I  can't  find  my  umbrella. 


There  it  is  in  the  corner.^ 
That  is  not  mine.* 
I  don't  know  where  it  is. 
Somebody  has  left  it  here.' 

Let  us  see.'* 

Why,  that  is  mine.^ 

Yours.*    That  is  not  possible. 

Yours  had  an  ivory  handle.' 

The  old  one,^ — yes. 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 

1  There  stands  he  {der  Schirni,  masculine)  indeed.  — See  page  84,  I. 

2  That  belongs  to-me  not. 

3  There  has  him  (see  note  1)  somebody  here  stand  let. 

4  Let  ye  once  see. 

5  That  is  the  mine.  —  «  The  yonrs. 

7  The  yours  had  a  handle  of  ivory.  See  p.  178,  n.  3.  —  Elf enbeln, 
literally  =  elephant-bone. 

8  Tlie  old.  —The  Germans  do  not  use  the  word  one  in  such  expres- 
sions, TIjus:  the  little  one  =  der  kleine  (lit.:  the  little);  the  young  one 
=  der  Junge  (lit. :  the  young).  —  Likewise,  der  alte  =  the  old  {one) ;  der 
Alte  —  the  old  {man) ;  etc.,  etc. 


238  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Aber  das^  ist  eiri  neuer,  den  ich  vor  acht  Tagen 
unten  in  der  Stadt  gekauft  habe. 

Heute  friih  habe  ich  ihn  iiberall  gesucht. 

Da   ich   ihn   nicht   finden    konnte,   habe    ich    ge- 

glaubt,  ich   hiitte  ^   ihn  gestern  abend  verloren, 

als  ich  aus  dem  Theater  kam. 
Nun,  wenn  dies^   Ihr   Schirm   ist,  dann  sind  Sie 

ja  aus  aller  Verlegenheit. 
Das    bin    ich    wirkHch.      Nun,    PhiHpp,    ich    bin 

bereit.     Lass  uns  gehen. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Strong  Verbs,  Class  I., 


10.  Wenn  jeniand  nach  mir  fragen^  sollte, 
Alfred,  so  sag^e,  dass  ich  um  funf  zu- 
riick  sein  werde. 

Gut,  aber  bleibe  nicht  langer. 
Nein,  ich  komme  piinktlich  wieder. 

Der  Herr,  der  vorgestern  hier  war,  will   heute 
wiederkommen. 

Was  wollte  er  von  mir? 

Ich  glaube,  er  will  dir  sein  Haus  verkaufen. 


NOTES. 

1  Notice  that  when  dass  is  omitted  from  a  dependent  clause,  the 
verb,  which  then  is  not  placed  at  the  end  (see  page  136,  note  1),  is 
generally  in  the  subjunctive.  —  2  See  page  236,  note  4. 

8  Fragen  nach,  fo  rts^• /«■>/•.  — Notice  the  idiomatic  expressions:  Es 
fragt  sicli,  it  is  the  (juestion  (lit.:  it  asks  itself);  Ich  frage  nichts 
danach,  /  dont  care  for  it  (lit.:  /  ask  nothiiu/  afUr-thai). 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


239 


In  no-i'-'r oon'-t'n  in 

der  s/itat'. 

LT-b'r-al'  ge-z6okht'. 
Te-a'-t'r. 

A-o6s  a'-l'r  fer-la'-g'n-tiit. 
Fi'-lip  ....  las  dbns  ga'-'n. 


But  this  is  a  new  (one)  which  ^ 
I  bought  down  town  a  week 
ago. 

I  looked  for  it  everywhere  this 
morning. 

And  as  I  couldn't  find  it,  I 
bought  one  last  night  on  my 
way  from  the  theater. 

Well,  if  that  is  your  umbrella 
you  are  all  right.^ 

Yes,  indeed.8  Well,  Philip,  I 
am  ready.     Let  us  go. 


page  514. 


to,  V6n  ya-maiit  nakh 
mer  fra^-g-'n  z6F-t6,  aF- 
fr6t ,  zo  za^-ge  das  ich 
dbiii  fiinf 

Bli'-be  nicht  len'-'r. 


For'-ges'-t'rn 
ko'-men. 


Fer-ka-66'-fn. 


ve'-d'r- 


Alfred,  if  any  one  should 
(come  and)  ask  for  nie, 
say  that  I  shall  be  back 
at  five  o'clock. 

Very   well,   but  do    not   cunie 

later.'* 
No.     I  '11   be  back   exactly  on 

time. 
The  gentleman  who  called  to 

see  you  day  before  yesterdn y  ^ 

was  going  to  return  to-day.* 
What  does  he  want  with  me  ? 
I  think  he  wants  to  sell  you 

his  house.'' 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Which  (strictly  :  the)  I  ago  eight  days  down  in  the  town  bought 
have.  —  Notice  that  which  can  never  be  omitted  in  German. 

2  If  that  your  umbrella  is,  then  are  you  indeed  out  of  every  embar- 
rassment.—  8  That  am  I  really. —  *  But  stay  not  longer,  or  {not 
familiar) :  Bleiben  Sie  nicht,  etc.  —  ^  "Who  day  before  y.  here  was. 

c  Will  to-dav  again  come.  —  "^  He  will  to-thee  his  house  sell. 


240  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Er  wird  es  fiir  den  Preis,  den  ich  zahlen  wiirde, 

nicht  verkaufen. 
0  ja,  wenn  du  alles  baar  bezahlst.     Er  braucht^ 

Geld. 
Nun,  wir  wollen  'mal  *  sehen. 
Gut.    Auf  Wiedersehen !     Sei  aber  piinktlich  hier ! 

Aber  jetzt  miissen  wir  fort.     Der  Zug  geht^  um 
zehn  Uhr  ab,  und  es  ist  gerade  halb  zehn. 

Um  wie  viel  Uhr  geht^  der  Zug  ab? 
Ich  sagte,  dass  er  um  zehn  Uhr  abgeht.^ 
Sie  haben  recht.    Sie  miissen  gleich  fort. 


NOTES. 

1  From  brauchen,  to  need,  to  want,  to  /ac^.  — "Note  the  following 
expressions :  Er  braucht  nicht  zu  befiirchten,  dass  .  .  .  . ,  He  need 
not  fear  that  .  .  .  .  ,  etc.  Sie  brauchen  nur  zu  sprechen,  You  have  hut 
to  speak.  Sometimes  brauchen  is  used  instead  of  gebrauchen,  to 
use.  Thus  :  Das  ist  nicht  zu  brauchen.  That  is  of  no  iise  (lit.:  that 
is  not  to  want). 

2  Indicative  present.  Hence,  the  prefix  ab  is  found  at  the  end  of 
the  clause. 

«  Indicative  present.  But  the  prefix  is  not  separated  from  the  verb, 
because  the  verb  is  here  in  a  dependent  clause.  Were  dass  omitted, 
however,  and  the  clause  no  longer  a  dependent  one,  the  order  would 
be:  Ich  sagte,  er  geht  um  zehn  Uhr  ab. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


241 


Tsa'-rn. 

Bar     be-tsalst' 

hra-obkht  gelt'. 

Mai. 

A-oof    ve'-d'r-za'-'n 

pwnkt'-licTi. 

Yetst  rau'-s'n  ver  fort'. 
Dar  tsookh  gat  (56in  tsan 
oor  ap'. 


Zakh'-te ap'-gat'. 


Ze  tia'-b'n  TechV . 
fort. 


glicTi 


He  would  never  sell  it  for  what 
I  would  pay.* 

Yes,  if   you  paid  cash.^     He 
needs  funds. 

Well,  we  '11  see.8 

Very  well, — good-by.*    Be  here 

without  fail.^ 
But  now  we  must  go.*     The 

train  goes   at    ten    o'clock,' 

and  it    is    already   half-past 

nine. 
At  what  time  does  the  train 

start?  8 
I  said  the  train  starts  at  ten 

o'clock.® 
You  are  right.    You  must  be 

off  at  once.io 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  For  the  price  which  I  pay  would. 

2  If  you  all  cash  paid. 
8  We  will  {once)  see. 

4  Upon  again-seeing. 

5  Be  but  punctually  here. 

6  Must  we  forth.    Or:  Miissen  wir  fortgehen. 

7  Goes  at  ten  o'clock  off. 

8  At  what  hour  goes  the  train  off. 

9  I  said  that  the  train  at  ten  o'clock  away-goes. 

10  You  liave  right.     You  must  immediately  forth. 
*  In  familiar  conversation,  the  Germans  often  abbreviate  einmal 
into  mal.    Sag  'mal,  or,  Sagen  Sie  'mal=>Sfay. 


242 


DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


I.  — Die  Tage. 


Soiintag  (zonMafe^), 

Montag  (mon'-taikh'), 
Dienstag  (dens'- taT^Ti'), 
Mittvvoch  (miV-vokh'), 
Donnerstag  (do'-n'rs-ta^Ti'), 
Freitag  (tri'-tOikh'), 
Sonnabend  (z6n'-a'-b'nt), 
Sainstag  (zams'-taT^^'), 


Naclisten  Montag"  ^  (ndcfe^-st'n), 

Vorigen  Montag^  (fo'-ri-gen), 
Am^  Montag, 
Des  Montags,* 


Vorg-estern  (f  or^'-gfes  -t'rn), 

Morgen  (mor'-g'n), 

Ubermorgen  (u'-b'r-mor'-g'n), 

Nachste  Woche, 

Vorige  Woche, 

Eine  Woche,  or  acht  Tage, 

Zvvei  Wochen,  or  vierzehn  Tage, 

Vor  vierzehn  Tagen, 


Sunday. 

Monday. 

Tuesday. 

Wednesday. 

Thursday, 

Friday. 

Saturday. 

Next  Monday. 

Last  Monday. 
On  Monday 
On  Mondays.^ 

Day  before  yesterday. 

To-morrow. 

Day  after  to-morrow. 

Next  week. 

Last  week. 

One  week. 

Two  weeks. 

Two  weeks  ago. 


1  Accusative  of  time.  —  2  Or,  letzten  Montag ;  or,  vergangenen 
Montag. —  8  Instead  of  an  dem  Montag  (lit.:  on  the  Monday). 
The  names  of  tlie  clays  of  the  week  usually  take  the  definite  article. 

4  Or  simply,  Montags;  without  the  article.  {Genitive  of  time.  See 
page  ITS). —  ^  Meaning,  on  evtry  Monday. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  243 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


II.— Die  Monate. 


Januar  (ya^-ndb-ar), 

January. 

Februar  (fa'-brdo-ar), 

February. 

Miirz  (merts), 

March. 

April  (a-prir), 

April. 

Mai  (mi), 

May. 

Juni  (ypo'-ne)^ 

June. 

Juli  (yoo'-le), 

July. 

August  (a-oo-goost'), 

August. 

September  (zep-tem'-b'r), 

September. 

Oktober  (6k-to'-b'r), 

October. 

November  (no-veni'-b'r), 

November. 

Dezember  (da-tsem'-b'r), 

December. 

Im  1  Januar, 

In  January. 

Die  Festtage  (f6st^-ta'-gr6), 

The  holidays. 

Weihnachteu  ^  (vi'-na7^?i-t'n), 

Christmas. 

Neujahr  (no-i'-yar'). 

New  Year. 

Fastnacht  (fasV-nakht'), 

Shrove-Tuesday. 

Karfreitag  (kar'-fri'-taT^Tj), 

Good-Friday. 

Ostern  2  (os'-t'rn), 

Easter. 

Pfingsten2(pfin'-st'n), 

Whitsunday. 

1  Instead  of,  in  efetn  Januar  (lit. :  in  the  January).  Observe  that, 
in  German,  tlie  names  of  the  months  are  generally  used  with  the  defi- 
nite article.  —  '■^  Weihnachten,  Ostern,  and  Pfingsten  are  plurals. 
But  in  using  these  nouns  the  word  Fest,  festival,  holiday,  is  under- 
stood; they  therefore  take  the  verb  in  tlie  singular:  Ostern  ist  ge- 
kommen,  Easter  has  arrived.  —  Tliese  words  are  not  used  with  the 
article:  Zu  Welhnachten,  vor  Ostern,  nach  Pfingsten. 


244 


DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 


The  foUomng  vocabulary  to  be  learned  by  hea/rt. 


III.— Das  Datum.* 


Den  wievielten  haben  wir  ?  * 

Heute  ist  der  zehnte, 

Lassen  Sie  sehen, 

Das  ist  richtig, 

Was  haben  wir  heute  fiir  einen 

Tag? 
Heute  ist  Donnerstag, 
Sie  irren  sich, 
Es  ist  erst  2  Mittwoch, 
Bitte  um  Verzeihung.    Sehen 

Sie  auf  den  Kalender,* 
Sie  haben  recht, 
Gestern  war  Dienstag, 
Morgen  ist  Donnerstag, 
Gestern  war  der  neunte, 
Morgen  ist  der  elfte, 
Das  ist  recht, 

Ich  kann  keine  Daten  behalten,! 
Mein  Gedachtnis  fiir  Daten  ist 

immer  sehr  schlecht  gewesen, 


What  day  of  the  month  have 

we? 
It 's  to-day  the  tenth. 
Let  me  see. 
That 's  right. 

What  day  of  the  week  have  we? 

To-day  is  Thursday. 

You  are  mistaken. 

It  is  only  Wednesday. 

Beg  pardon.  Look  at  the  cal- 
endar. 

You  are  right. 

Yesterday  was  Tuesday. 

To-morrow  will  be  Thursday. 

Yesterday  was  the  9tb. 

To-morrow  will  be  the  11th. 

That 's  right. 

I  never  can  remember  dates. 

My  memory  for  dates  has  al- 
ways been  very  poor. 


1  Or,  der  wievielte  ist  heute. 

2  When  only  is  used  with  notions  of  time,  it  is  rendered  by  erst,  not 
by  nur.  Used  as  an  adjective,  it  is  to  be  translated  by  einzig:  His 
only  son,  sein  einziger  Sohn.  —  8  Ka-lSn'-d'r. 

*  Dais  da'-toom.     Lit. ;  the  date.     Plural :  die  Dateu. 
t  Lit. :  I  can  no  dates  retain. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


245 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


IV.— Die  Borse.* 

Aiif  der  Borse,  On  'Change.f 

Ein  Makler  (mak'-l'r),  A  (stock)  broker. 

Ein  Wechsler  (veks'-l'r),  A  money  broker. 

Die  Hausse  ^  (lio'-se),  The  rise. 

Die  Baisse  ^  (ba'-se),  The  fall. 

Aktien  «  (ak'-tsi-en),  /.,  Stocks. 

Gold  (golt),  n.,  Gold. 

In  Gold,  In  gold. 

Silber  (zil'-b'r),  n.,  Silver. 

Deutsches  Geld,  German  money. 

In  Silber,  In  silver. 

Das  Klein-geld  *  (klin'-gelt').  Small  change. 

Eine  Bank-note  (baflk'-no'-te),  A  bank-note. 
Ein  Schuldschein  (shoolt'-slim'),  m.,        A  bond,  a  note. 

Ein  Wechsel  (vek  -s'l),  m.,^  A  draft. 

Ein  Kreditbrief  (kre-dit'-bref ),  m.,            A  letter  of  credit. 
Zahlbar  auf  Sicht  (tsal'-bar  a-66f  zichV),  Payable  on  sight. 

Leihen  (Li'-'n),  To  borrow.  J 

Leihen,  To  lend. 


1  Or,  das  Steigen  (s/iti'-g'n)  der  Kurse  (kdor'-ze),  the  rising  of 
the  course. 

*^  Or,  das  Fallen  (fa'-l*n)  der  Kurse,  the  falling  of  the  course. 
8  From  die  Aktie  (ak'-tsi-e).- 

*  Or,  Scheidemiinze,  shl'^le-mien'-tse. 
^  Or,  eine  Tratte  (tra'-tg). 

*  De  Bur'-ze,  the  Exchange.  —  f  Or,  on  "the  street." 
t  Also,  borgen. 


246  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  recited  as  a  conversation,  ivhether  for 

Self-Study  or  preparation  for  the  class-room.     (See 

Directions  before  Part  I,) 

GESPRACHE.t 

l.  —  DAS  AUFSTEHEN* 

Herr  Klein,  stehen  Sie  auf !  Sie  wollten  um  sieben 
Uhr  geweckt  sein.  —  Was,  es  ist  schon  sieben  Uhr  ?  — 
Ja,  es  ist  fiinf  Minuten  iiber  sieben.  —  Gut,  ich  werde 
gleich  aufstehen.  —  Wollen  Sie  nicht  Ihren  Schlaf- 
rock  ^  anziehen  ?  —  Nein,  geben  Sie  mir  meine  Bein- 
kleider.2 — Hier  sind  sie.  —  Ich  kann  meine  PantofFeln^ 
nicht  finden.  Ich  weiss  nicht,  wo  ich  sie  hingestellt 
habe.  —  Da  sind  sie,  neben  dem  Waschtisch.^ — Johann, 
giessen^  Sie  mir  warmes  Wasser  ins  Waschbecken,^ 
ich  will  mich  waschen.  —  Nachher  will  ich  niich 
rasieren.'  —  Wollen  Sie  mir  mein  Rasiermesser  ^  und 
den  Rasierpinsel  ^  reichen?^^ — Gut.  Nun  bringen  Sie 
mir  noch  ein  Handtuch.^^  —  Danke.  Bitte,  giessen 
Sie  etwas  kaltes  Wasser  ins  Waschbecken.  —  Hier. — 
Wo  ist   der  Kamm  ?  ^  —  Ich   habe  ihn   seit   western 


to^ 


Pronunciation   and   Translations. 

1  Shlaf'-rok',  morning-gown.—  2  Biu'-kli'-d'r,  pantaloons. 
8  Pan-to'-f'ln,  slippers.  —  ^  Vash'-tisli ,  wash-stand. 
6  Pour  out. —  ^  Basin. —  ^  Ra-ze'-r'n,  to  shave. 
8  Ra-zer'-mg'-s'r,  razor.  —  ^  Slitivinu-brnsli.  —  w  Pass. 
11  Towel.  —  12  Cotnb.  —  -  A-oof'-s/fta-'n,  to  rise. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CTrY.  247 

abend  nicht  gesehen.  —  Da  ist  er.     Er  war  h inter  die 
Kommode^  gef alien. 

il,  -  FORTSETZUNG. 

Welche  Schuhe  wollen  Sie  anziehen  ?  —  Ich  weiss 
nicht.  —  Ich  glaube,  Sie  wiirden  gut  thun,  Ihre 
Schuhe  mit  Doppelsohlen  ^  anzuziehen,  denn  es  ist 
schlechtes  Wetter.  —  Nein.  Geben  Sie  mir  nieine 
Scliniirstiefel.^  —  Aber,  mein  Herr,  die  Sohlen  sind 
ja  ganz  zerrissen.*  —  Dann  lassen  Sie  noch  heute  neue 
Sohlen  auflegen.^  —  Gut,  ich  werde  es  besorgen.  — 
Aber  sagen  Sie  dem  Schuhmacher,  er  miisste  die 
Stiefel  bis  iibermorgen  friih  sicher  wiederbringen. 

3.-BEI   EINEM    WECHSLER. 

Konnten  Sie  mir  wohl  fiir  diese  Hundert-Dollar- 
Note  deutsches  Geld  geben? — Entschuldigen  Sie,  mein 
Herr,  wir  nehmen  keine  Banknoten.  Sie  finden  ein 
Geschaft,^  das  Banknoten  nimmt,  in  der  Briiderstrasse^ 
No.  272.  —  Das  ist  schrecklich  ^  weit.  —  Allerdings.^ 
Sie  batten  besser  Gold  mitgebracht,  oder  noch  besser 
einen  Kreditbrief. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Ko-mo'-de,  a  chest  of  drawers. —  2  D6'-p'l-zo -Pn,  double  soles. 
3  Shniir'-s/i-te'-f'l,  lacing  boots. —  ^  Tser-ri'-s'n,  from   zerreis- 
sen,  inseparable  compound  verb.     To  tear,  wear  imi. 
5  A-dof'-la  -g'ji,  to  put  on.  —  6  Ge-slieft',  lousiness. 
7  Bru'-d'r-s/jtia-se.— 8  Slnek'-lic/f,  terribly. 
9  A'-Pi-diiis  ,  iihlied.—  f  Ge-s/ipra'-e/tc. 


248  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  he  translated  and  written  into  German ;   but  also  to  be  recited 

orally  in  the  class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see 

Directions  before  Part  I,) 

EXERCISES. 

1.- ABOUT   SAMPLES. 

Did  Mr.  Macy  send  you  those  samples  of  silk?^  — 
No,  he  has  not  sent  them  to  me  yet.^  —  I  told  him  to 
do  so  day  before  yesterday.^ — Please  call  on  him 
to-day,*  and  ask  him  why  he  has  not  sent  them  yet?^ 
Tell  him  I  must  have  them  before  to-night.^ 

2.  — SAME   SUBJECT. 

Why  didn't  you  send  those  samples  of  silk  to  Mr. 
Lovell?^  —  (Why),  I  sent  them  to  him  yesterday. — 
He  has  not  received  them. — That's  impossible.  When 
did  you  see  him?  —  I  saw  him  this  very  morning. 
—  Well,  wait  a  minute.  I  am  going  to  have  them 
sent  to  him  at  once.^ 


Aids   to  Translation. 


1  Has  to-yoii  Mr.  Macy  the  samples  of  silk  (Seidenmuster,  z.V- 
d'n-nioos'-t'r)  sent. 

2  He  has  tliem  not  yet  sent. 

8  I  have  it  to-liini  however  (doch)  day  before  yesterday  ordered 
(aufgetragen,  a-dof'-ge-tra'-g'n). 

*  Please  pass  to-day  thereby  (gehen  Sie  vorbei). 

fi  Why  he  them  ncjl  yet  sent  has? 

®  That  I  them  before  to-night  have  must. 

'  Why  have  you  these  samples  of  silk  to  Mr.  Lovell  not  sent? 

8  I  will  them  to-him  at-once  send  let. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  249 

3.  —  INFORMA  TION* 

(Beg)  pardon/  sir ;  would  you  please  tell  me  where 
the  Gerson  is?  —  I  am  very  sorry,  but  I  do  not  know 
exactly.^  Ask  that  policeman.  He  will  be  able  to 
tell  you.^ 

What  day  of  the  month  have  we?  —  It's  to-day, 
the  10th.  —  Isn't  Mr.  Miiller's  note  payable  to-day?* 
—  Let  me  see.  August  21st,  1889.  That's  right. — 
Now,  what  day  of  the  week  have  we?  —  It's  to-day, 
Tuesday. 

4.  -  A r   A    MONEY-BROKER'S. 

Would  you  have  the  kindness  to  give  me  German 
money  for  these  twenty-dollar  pieces?  —  How  would 
you  like  to  have  them  ?  ^  In  gold,  or  bank  bills  ?  — 
In  gold,  if  you  please. 

Why,  you  give  me  only  two  hundred  and  forty 
marks! — That's  right.  —  But  two  hundred  and  forty 
marks  are  not  worth  ^  sixty  dollars.^  —  No,  sir.  But 
there  is  the  bulletin.^     You  will  see  the  rate  on  it.^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Verzeiliung. 

2  I  know  it  (es)  not  exactly. 

3  Er  ^vird  es  Ihnen  sagen  konnen. 

•*  1st  Herrii  3Iullers  Note  heute  nicht  fallig? 

s  Wie  mochten  Sie  es  haben? 

6  Are  not  sixty  dollars  worth  (wert,  vSrt). 

"^  Kurszettel,  koors'-tse'-t'l. 

8  You  will  see  the  rate  (Kurs,  masc.)  upon  it  (darauf) 

*  Auskunft  (a-oos'-koonff). 


250  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation  opposite,  then  withoui 
it,  in  preparation  for  reading  aloud  and  translating 


—  (gnb(id)  aii§  bem  $otel !  Set^t  tt)ollen  tt)ir  'tia^  beutfc^e 
glorenj*  nd(;er  befefjen! 

—  3Ste  anber^  fief)t  je|t  atte^  au§/  alg  geftern  abenb, 
ii)ie  iDir  anfamen. 

—  9lid)t  tt)aE)r?  Slber  ift  ba§  ni(f)t  eine  fonberBare 
beiit|d;e  ©tabt? 

—  2Bie  fo? 

—  3^  meine,  e§  fie^t  e^cr  tt)ie  eine  ameri!amfrf)e  al§ 
Une  eine  beutfd)e  ©tabt  au§.  ©e^en  (Sie  bocB  biefe  Saben !  * 
©elite  man  nidjt  glauben,  man  fei  in  SfJetx)  3)orf? 

—  ©ie  \:fCihzn  red)t;  unb,  tt)ie  ©ie  tt)iffen,  ift  tt)ir!lid) 
eine  gro^e  ameri!anifd)e  £olonie  *  bier. 

—  ®a§  \:)<xhz  id)  ge^ort.  Slber  tt)a§  ift  ba§  fiir  ein 
biifterec  ©ebdnbe  gerabe  bor  un§? 

—  !Da^  ift  bag  5li3niglic^e  <od)(o§,  in  it)eld)em  fic^  ba§ 
beriil)mte  ©riine  @eit)dlbe*  befinbet. 

—  ®ag  @rune  @e^i:)oIbe?  SSe(cf)  merfmiirbiger  ^  ^3Jame! 
SSarum  ^eifet  e^  fo?^ 

—  SSeil  bie  9?dnme  urf^riinglid;  grim  bemalt  tuaren. 

—  :^affen  ©ie  un§  ()ineingel)en ! 


1  From  aussehen,  to  look;  separable  verb.—  2  Strictly :  than. 
8  Stric'tlv  :    i.:si'.:rd(ii/  evening.     When  the  night  is  meant,  last  night=^ 
die  vorige  Nacht.  —  ^  Strictly  ;  pji^  b^  in  New  York. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  251 

jpbr  Self-Study,  should  he  read  by  means  of  the  translation,  then 

without  it,  and  when  thoroughly  understood  read 

aloud  in  German. 

READING. 
A  WALK  THROUGH  DRESDEN. 

—  At  last  (here  we  are)  out  of-the  hotel!  Now, 
will  we  the  German  Florence  nearer  see! 

—  How  different  looks  now  everything  (out)  ^  from 
last^  night  ^  when  we  arrived. 

—  Doesn't  it?  But  is  this  not  a  singular  German 
town? 

—  How  so? 

—  I  mean  it  looks  rather  as  an  American  than 
as  a  German  city  (out).  See  ye  (only)  those  stores! 
Would  one  not  believe  one  was^  in  New  York?* 

—  You  are  right;  and,  as  you  know,  (there)  is  in- 
deed a  large  American  colony  here. 

—  That  have  I  heard.  But  what  is  that  (for  a) 
dark  building  right  before  us? 

—  That  is  the  royal  palace,  in  which  are  (found) 
the  celebrated  Green  Vault. 

—  The  Green  Vault !  What  (a)  funny  ^  name !  Why 
is  it-called  ^  so  ? 

—  Because  the  rooms  originally  green  painted  were. 

—  Let  us  go-in. 


s  Strictly  :  remarkable.  —  6  Strictly  :  Why  is-called  it  so. 
*  Flo-rents' ....  la'-d'n  ....  no-i'-york  ....  ko-lo-ne' 
grii'-iie  ge-vul'-be. 


252  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

—  3hir  ©ebulbP  S)a5U  (;abeix  tt)ir  feine  3^^^-  2Bir 
motleix  im§  ^eiite  luir  bie  tDidjtigften  ^imfte  t)on  aufeeu 
befef)en.  Ubrigen^^  mxh  '^ijmn^  bag  ©rime  @ert)d(be  gc= 
n)i6  fe^r  gut  gefatlen.  ®er  9ieid)tum  an  5lunftU)er!cn  * 
unb  ©d)mu(lfad)en,t  it)elc^e  eg  entf)alt,  tft  unge(;eiier. 
%Mn  in  einem  S^auin  befinben  fid)*  3uU)e(en  im  3Bert 
t)on  fiinfte(;n  SJlidionen  dollar.  3n  einem  anbem  ift  eine 
^erle  ^u  fe^en  fo  gro^  rt)ie  ein  §iil;nerei 

—  2Ba§  ift  bag^  fiir  ein  grofeeg  ©ebdube  bort  briiben? 

—  ^ag  ift  ber  3^tnger,t  in  bem  fid;  tjerfdjiebene  3Jhifeen| 
befinben/  imter  anberen  bie  beriU;mte  ©emalbegatterie.t  2Bie 
©ie  tt)iffen,  entfjdit  biefelbe  bie  fjerrlic^ften  £unftfdf)d^e,  J 
itamentlid)  bie  6trtimfd)e  SJlabonna  t>on  diapl)ad,t  bie  be= 
ri'i^mte  §o(beinfd)c  3}Zabonna,J  (Eorreggiog  33u§enbe  Tlaa^ha- 
UnaX  unb  (Earlo  ©olcegt  ^Jleiftemer!,  bie  fjeilige  (EdciUe. 
3Bir  tt)ol[en  bie  @emdlbegatlerie  iibermorgen  befuc^en,  bann 
trerben  6ie  ©etegen^eit  ^ahm,  biefe  ^unfttcerfe  ^u  beicun; 
bern. 

—  3Sag  fiir  eine  fd)dne  ^ird^e  er^ebt  fic^'  "oa  ^u  unfrer 

—  ®ag  ift  bie  fat[;o(ifc^e  ^offircfje.  3n  berfelben  finbet 
aik  Sonnnmb  g^efttagej  grofee  3Jieffe  ftatt/  bei  ber  ©ie  eine 
augge^eid)nete  Mrdjenmufif  ^oren  !i3nnen. 

—  Unb  jeneg  f(f)5ne  ©ebdube  ^ur  Sinfen  mit  ben  Statuent 
•i)on  ©c^iHer  unb  ©oet^ej  ift  t)ernmtUc^  ein  2^(;eater. 

—  Qa,  unb  p)ax  eing  ber  fd)onften  ber  SSeft.  2)ie 
anberen  ©tatuen,  bie  ©ie  fe^en,  ftellen  Bop^ofk^,  ©uri^ibeg 
unb  ^Jloliere  bar. 


1  strictly  :  only  patience.  —  2  Strictly :  moreover.  —  8  Strictly  :  to-you. 

4  Strictly  :  fijid  themselves.  —  5  Strictly  :  what  is  that? 

«  Strictly:  themselves  various  museums  find. —  ^  Strictly:  raises  itself . 

8  Strictly  :  findit  ....  place. —  *  Kdonst'-v8r'-k'n, 

i  ShiTi6bk'-za'-/r/i'ii. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  253 

—  Not  so  fast  I  ^  Therefor  have  we  no  time.  We 
vvant  {ourselves)  to-day  only  the  most-important  points 
from  the-outside  to-look-at.  However ,2  will  you  ^  the 
Green  Vault  certainly  very  v/ell  please.  The  wealth 
in  works-of-art  and  jewelry  which  it  contains  is  enor- 
mous. Only  in  one  room  are  foimd^  jt^wels  in-ihe 
value  of  fifteen  million  dollars.  In  another  is  a  pearl 
to  see  so  large  as  a  hen's  egg 

—  What^  is  that  for  a  large  building  there  over? 

—  That  is  the  Zwinger,  in  which  various  museums 
are  found,^ — among  others  the  famous  picture-gallery. 
As  you  know,  contains  the-same  (the)  most-precious 
art-treasures,  namely  the  Sistine  Madonna  of  Raphael, 
the  celebrated  Holbein's  Madonna,  Correggio's  recum- 
bent Magdalen,  and  Carlo  Dolce's  masterpiece  (tJte) 
Saint-Cecilia.  We  will  the  picture-gallery  day-after- 
to-morrow  visit,  then  will  you  (an)  opportunity  have 
these  art-works  to  admire. 

—  What  {for  a)  beautiful  church  rises  ^  there  to 
our  right? 

—  That  is  the  Catholic  court-church.  In-the-same 
takes^all  Sundays-and  feast-days  high  mass  place,  at 
which  you  (a)  most-excellent  chant-music  hear  can. 

—  And  that  fine  building  to-the  left,  w4tli  the  statues 
of  Schiller  and  Goethe,  is  undoubtedly  a  theater. 

—  Yes,  and  indeed  one  of-the  most-beautiful  of- 
the  world.  The  other  statues  which  you  see  represent 
Sophocles,  Euripides,  and  Moliere  (there). 


t  Tsviii'-'r  ....  moo-za'-en  ....  ge-mal'-dg-ga'-le-re' ....  hSr'- 
lic/i-st'ii  koonst'-shet'-se  ....  ziks-te'-nT-she  ma-do'-na  foil  ra'- 
fa-eF.  . .  .  hol'-biii  -she  ....  ko-re'-dzhi-os  ....  dol'-tshas  ..... 
hi'-li-ge  tsa-tse'-li-e  ....  zon'-oont  fest'^ta'-ge  ....  slita'-to6'-en 
....  gu'-te.  ^ 


254  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

<Bidfttt>t^ftU^  —  SIGHT  DRAFT. 
DIBECTIONS.  —  Follow  directions  already  given  on  page  221. 


t^iZ^Z^Z^, 


'■ir-ZY^Pi^. 


TRANSLATION.  —  At  (lit.:  hy)  sight,  please  pay  against  this 

sole  (bill  of)  exchange, the  sum  of  1500  marks,  and 

charge*  my  account  (therewith).    Value  received. * 


1  Pron.:  zicM'-vek -s'l.  -  2  Pron. ;   zo-la'-vek -s'l;   b^.las'-t'n 

(lit. :  to-debit) ;  vSrt,  etc.  (lit. :  worth  from  Mr.  Ji.  received). 


Part^  III. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


DAS  WETTER  UKD  DIE  STADT, 


•o^o* 


SECTION    II. 


1.  ABOUT  THE  WEATHER. 

2.  PREPOS.  WITH  DATIVE  AND  ACCUSAT. 

3.  VOCABULARY :  THE  WEATHER,  etc. 
A.  A  VISIT. 

5.  GOING  SKATING. 

6.  MEETING  AN  ACQUAINTANCE. 

7.  A  WALK  THROUGH  DRESDEN  (II). 

8.  A  LETTER  OF  THANKS. 


255 


256  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

n. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Aber  wenn  sich  das  Wetter  bis  Mittag 
nicht  auf klart,  werde  ich  es  iiicht  thuen 
konnen. 

Was  machen  Sie  da? 

Ich  laute  dem  Diener.^     Ich  will  mir  meine  Stiefel 
wichsen  lassen,  bevor^  ich  ausgehe. 

Ich  rate  Ihnen,  heute  niorgen  nicht  auszugehen. 

Sehen  Sie  doch.     Es  wird  ganz  dunkel. 

Wie  langweilig!    Alle  Tage  schlechtes  Wetter!^ 


2,  Wir  haben*  schlechtes  Wetter,  so  lange 
wir  hier  sind.* 

Die  erste  Woche  hat  es  geregnet. 

Die  zweite  Woche  hat  es  fast  alle  Tage  geschneit. 


NOTES. 

1  Der  Diener,  the  {male)  servant;  die  Dienerin,  the  {female)  serv- 
ant.   See  page  9,  note  3. 

2  Bevor  =  fte/ore,  when  used  as  a  conjunction.  When  used  as  a 
preposition  {i.e.,  before  a  noun),  hefore  =  \or» 

8  Instead  of:  Wie  langweilig  ist  es,  Alle  Tage  ist  schlechtes 
Wetter. —  ^  In  German  the  present  is  used  (instead  of  the  past  tense)  to 
express  whatever  action  is  still  going  on  at  tlie  time  we  speak.  Thus, 
the  sentence  above  means,  that  we  have  had  {and  still  have]  bad  weather. 


THE    VVEATHEli    AND    THE    CITY. 


257 


n. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  A^-b'r  veil  zAch  das  ve^- 
t'r  bis  iwY'tiikh  iiic/tt 
a-obf -klait ,  var^-de  Ich 
es  iiicM  too^-'n  ku^-n6n. 

Vas  ma'-A:7i'n  ze  da'. 
Ich  16-i'-te  ....  de'-ner  .... 
s7ite'-f l"vik'-s'n  ....  be-for'. 

Ra'-te. 

Gants  ddoii'-k'l. 

Ve  lan'-vi'-licTi . .  .  siilecTi'- 
tes. 


2.  Ver  ha^-b'ii  sbl6c7t^-t6s 
ve^-t'r  z6  laii^-6  ver  her^ 
ziiit. 

Ge-rac/i'-net. 

Fast  a'le  ta'-ge  ge-stmit'. 


But  if  the  weather  does 
not  clear  up  before  noon, 
I  shall  not  be  able  to  do 
so. 

What  are  you  doing? 

I  am.  ringing  for  the  servant.^ 

I   want    to    have    my   boots 

blacked  ^  before  I  go  out. 
I  advise  you  not  to  go  out  this 

morning.^ 
See.    The  weather  is  clouding 

up.'* 
What  an  annoyance  !  ^     Every 

day  (we  have)  bad  weather. 


We  have  had  bad  weather 
since  we've  been  here. 

The  first  week  it  rained.'' 
The    second  it  snowed  nearly 
every  day. 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 

1  I  ring  to-the  servant, 

2  I  will  to-me  my  boots  black  let. 

3  I  advise  to-you.     See  page  206,  paragraph  1. 
*  It  becomes  quite  dark. 

5  How  tedious  {or,  irksome). 

6  We  have  bad  weather  so  long  we  here  are. 
page.) 

7  The  first  week  has  it  rained. 


(See  note  4,  opposite 


258  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

In  der  dritten  Woche  haben  wir  nur  am  Montag 
und  Dienstag  schones  Wetter  gehabt. 

Am  Mittwoch  hat  es  geregnet. 

Und  heute  regnet  es  noch.^ 

Sie  irren  sich,^  es  regnet  nicht. 

Das  ist  wahr,  ich  babe  mich  gb'icklicherweise 
geirrt. 

Aber  es  ist  so  dunkel,  dass  ich  glaubte,  es  regnete. 


3.  Wie  ist  das  Wetter  draussen,  Herr  X.? 
Noch  regnet  es  nicht. 

Aber  es  wird  nicht  lange  dauern.     Es  wird  immer 

dunkler. 
Sehen  Sie,  wie  der  Himmel  sich  bezieht.^ 

Wahrhaftig;   man  kann  bald  nichts  mehr  sehen. 

Es  wird  im  AugenbHck  regnen. 
Das  Wetter  wird  gleich  losbrechen. 

Ich  wusste  es  ja,  dass  es  regnen  wiirde. 


NOTES. 

1  Notice  the  inversion,  because  heute  ])egins  the  sentence.   See  p.  84. 

2  Or,  simply,  Sie  irren.  lrren  =  to  err,  to  stray,  to  wander,  to  be  mis- 
taken; but  in  the  last  meaning  the  reflexive  form  of  the  verb  {sich 
irren)  is  mostly  used. 

8  Or,  wie  der  Himmel  sich  bewollit  (bS-vullctO,  lit.:  clouds 
itself.  Or,  wie  die  Wollcen  heraufkonimen,  Ikhc  (he  chmds  arc 
couiing-up.  Tsed  in  a  metapliorical  sense,  sich  bezielien  =  <'>  refer. 
Ex. :  Ich  beziehe  mieli  auf  Herrn  X.,  I  refer  to  Mr.  X. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


259 


Siiii'-nes  ve'-t'r. 


Ze  i'-ren  zicTi. 
GltZk'-li-c7i'r-vi'-ze. 


The  third  we  had  sunny  days  on 
Monday  and  Tuesday  only.^ 
On  Wednesday  it  rained. 
And  to-day  it  is  raining  yet. 

You  are  mistaken.     It  is  not.'^ 
That's    so.      I   was    mistaken, 

fortunately. 
But  it  is  so  dark,  I  thought  it 

must  be  raining. 


3.    Ve    ist    das    v6^-t'r 

dra-db^-s'n nokh 

raci^^-ii6t  6s  iiicht. 

NicTtt  lan'-e  da-oo'-'rn. 

Ve    d'r    lii'-m'l    zich    be- 
tset'. 
Var-haf'-ticTi. 

Im  a-oo'-g'n-blik'. 
Ij5s'-bre'-c7i'n. 

V66s'-te. 


How  is  the  weather  out- 
side, Mr.  X.?  It  is  not 
raining  yet. 

But   it  will   rain   before  long.^ 

The  weather  is  clouding  up."* 
See    how    cloudy    the    sky    is 

getting.5 
Yes.     It's   so  dark  you   can't 

see  anything.® 
It  will  rain  in  a  moment. 
The  storm  will  be  down  upon 

us."^ 
I  knew  it  would  rain  any  way. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  In  the  third  week  have  we  only  on  Monday  and  Tuesday  beautiful 
weather  had. 

2  It  rains  not.  The  Germans  cannot  say  simply  it  is,  it  does,  he 
does,  etc.,  referring  to  a  preceding  verb.  They  must  say  :  it  is  raining 
(lit. :  it  rains) ;  it  does  rain  (lit. :  it  rains) ,  he  does  go  (lit. :  it  goes),  etc. 

8  But  it  will  not  long  last.  —  ^  U  becomes  always  darker, 
s  How  the  sky  itself  covers.  —  6  One  can  nearly  (lit. :  soon)  nothing 
more  see.  —  J"  The  weather  will  directly  forth-break. 


260  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Gestern  scliien  ^  die  Sonne  wahrend  des  Regens, 
und  das  ist  immer  ein  sicheres  Zeichen,  dass 
es  am  nachsten  Tag  regnen  wird. 

So  sagt  man. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Strong  Verbs,  Class  II., 


Ich    rate    Ihiieii,   bei    diesem    schlechten 
Wetter  nicht  auszugelieii. 

Aber   wenn   Sie   ausguhen,    ziehen   Sie   sich  recht 
warm  an. — Or:  Sehen  Sie  sich  wohl  vor.^ 

Wie   schade;    mein    Regenmantel   ist   ganz   abge- 
tragen.     Ich  kann  nicht  mehr  damit  gehen. 

Nehmen  Sie  doch  den  meinigen.^ 

Aber  warum  lassen  Sie  denn  Ihren  Wagen  nicht 

kommen  ? 
Weil  ein  Hinterrad  zerbrochen*  ist. 

Johann  soil  es  heute  noch  reparieren  lassen. 

Dann  benutzen  f  Sie  den  meinigen.^ 


NOTES. 

1  Schien,  imperfect  of  scheinen,  to  sliine. 

'^  Vorsehen,  reflexive  verb,  to  take  care.  There  are  many  reflexive 
verbs  in  German,  which  are  not  reflexive  in  Englisli.  Some  of  those 
most  in  nse  are:  sich  belinden;  sich  erinnern  (5r-i'-n'rn),  to  recol- 
lect; sich  fiirchten,  to  he  afraid;  sich  irren;  sich  schamen  (sh^'- 
m'n,  to  he  ashamed;  sich  betrageii,  to  hehave ;  sich  entschliessen 
(Snt-shle'-s'n),  to  make  up  one's  mind;  sich  freueii,  to  rejoice,  to  he 
(jlad ;  sich  setzen,  to  sit  down;  sich  weigern  (vi'-g'rn),  to  refuse; 
sich  erholen,  to  recover. 

3  Accusative  of  der  meinige.  Also :  den  fneinen,  accusative  of 
der  tneine. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


261 


Shen  . 
tsi'-ch'n. 


zo -ne m 


Zo  za.kht'  man. 


The  sun  was  shining  yesterday 
while  it  was  raining,^  and 
that 's  a  sure  sign  of  rain  for 
the  next  day.^ 

That 's  what  they  say.* 


page  515. 


4.  Ich  ra^-t6  e^-n6n  bi  de^- 
zem  sMech^'Vn  v6^-t'r 
jiicht  a-obs^-tsob-g'a -'ii. 

Vol  ioT\ 


Slia'-de  ....  ra'-g'n-man'- 
t'l  ap'-ge-tra'-g'n. 


E'-ren  va'-g'n. 

Das  liin'-ter-rat'  tser-bro'- 

Ra-pa-re'-ren. 

Be-ndo'-ts'n. 


I  advise  you  not  to  go  out 
in  such  bad  weather. 

But    if  you  do  go   out,   wrap 

yourself  up  well."* —  Or:  Take 

care  of  yourself.^ 
It 's  too  bad.*    My  rubber  cloak 

is  entirely  worn  out.     I  can't 

wear  it  any  more."^ 
Take  mine. 
Any  way,  why  don't  you  order 

your  carriage  ?  ^ 
One    of    the    hind    wheels    is 

broken.* 
John  is  to  have  it  repaired  to- 

day.io 
Well,  take  mine  then." 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Yesterday  shone  the  sun  during  the  rain. 

•2  A  sure  sign  that  it  on  the  next  day  rain  will.  —  »  So  says  one. 

•1  Di-ess  ye  yourself  very  warmly.     Anzielien,  to  dress. 

5  Provide  (ye)  for  yourself  well.     Vorsehen,  to  provide  for. 

6  How  pity.—  7  I  can  no  more  therewith  (with-it)  go. 

8  But  why  let  you  {then)  your  carriage  not  come? 

9  Because  one  hind-wheel  broken  is. 

10  .Tolin  sliall  it  to-day  still  repair  let. 

11  Tlien  use  (ye)  the  mine. 

^  From  zerbreclien,  an  inseparable  verb. 
t  Or,  beniitzen. 


262  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

5.   Hiinmel!    Das  war  ein  Schlag! 

Seheii  Sie,  wie  es  blitzt! 

Natiirlich  werde  ich  jetzt  nicht  ausgehen. 

Das    glanbe    ich    gern.      Es    giesst    ja    wie    mit 
Kannen.^ 


6.  Wer    steigt    da    driiben    an    dem    Hause 
aus? 

Ich  glaube  wahrhaftig,  es  ist  Ihr  Schwager. 

Allerdings,  das  ist  sein  Wagen. 

Der  Kutscher  hat  sich  im  Plans  geirrt. 

Kein  Wunder,  bei  solchem^  Wetter! 
Sehen  Sie!     Da  kommt  er  iiber  die  Strasse. 

Ich  mochte  wissen,  was   ihn    bei   einem   solchen^ 

Wetter  hierher  fiihrt. 
Guten  Morgen,  Schwagerin,  wie  geht  es  Ihnen? 

Danke,  ausgezeichnet,  aber  ich   bin  um  Sie^  be- 

sorgt. 
Sie  sind  ja  bis*  auf  die  Haut  nass. 


NOTES. 

1  Idiomatic  expression.  Also  (in  some  parts  of  Germany \ :  Es 
giesst  mit  Mulden  (moor-d'ii).  Lit. :  it  pours  {as)  with  (i.  e.,  out  of) 
trm/s  (or  troughs). 

2  Solch,  such  is  also  used  with  tlie  indefinite  article,  the  latter 
either  preceding  it,  as:  bei  einem  solcheu  "Wetter;  or  following  it, 
as  in  lOnglish  :  bei  solch  einem  Wetter.  Notice  that  in  the  latter 
case,  solch  is  undeclinable. 

3  The  preposition  um  governs  the  accusative.  Hence,  here,  um 
SiCf  not  um  Ilinen.    See  page  114. 

*  Bis  is  often  used  thus  with  prepositions,  to  express  limit. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


263 


5.    HK-m'l!     Das^  var    in 

Es  blitst'. 
Na-tlir'-licTi. 

Es  gest ka'-nen. 


6.  Var  shticht  drii^-b'n  an 
dam  lia-ob^-ze  a-dbs^? 

Var-liaf'-tic7i. 

A'-lT-dins'. 
Kc5bt'-sii'r. 

Voon'-d'r zoV-ch'm. 


Her'-har' 


Shv^'-ge-rin. 


A-oos'-ge-tsic7i'-nSt  . 
ze'be-zorcTit'. 

A-oof  de  lia-oot'  nas. 


Goodness!  What  a  clap 
of  thunder !  ^ 

How  it  is  lightning ! 

Really,  I  am  not  going  out 
now.^ 

I  should  think  so.  It  is  pour- 
ing down.^ 


Who  is  that  getting-  out  of 
a  carriage  at  the  door 
of  the  house  opposite  ?  * 

I    really    think    it    is    your 

brother-in-law. 
Why,  it  is  his  turn-out. 
The    coachman    mistook    the 

house.** 
Well in  such  a  storm  ! 

But  there  he  is  coming  on  this 

side.® 
I  wonder  why  he  comes  here 

in  such  weather.' 

Good     morning,    sister-in-law. 

How  are  you? 
I  am  very  well  indeed.     But  I 

fear  for  your  health.^ 
You  are  wet  to  the  skin. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

^  Heaven  !     That  was  a  stroke ! 

2  Of  course  (lit. :  naturally)  shall  1  now  not  out-go. 

3  That  helieve  I  willingly.     It  pours  indeed  as  with  {i.  e.,  out  of) 
jups. 

4  Who  gets  (lit. :  climbs)  there  on  the  other  side  at  (the  door  of) 
tlie  house  out  (of  a  carriage). 

5  The  coachman  has  himself  in-the  house  mistaken. 

6  There  comes  lie  over  tlie  street. 

7  I  viight  know  wliat  liim  by  such  a  weather  hither  leads. 
^  I  am  about  you  anxious. 


264  DAS    WEITER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Sie  werden  sich  sicher  erkalten.^ 
Sehen  Sie,  Sie  miissen  schon  niesen. 
Ja.     Aber  es  regnet  auch^  mit  Mulden.^ 

Ich  bin  nur  liber  die  Strasse  gegangen  und  bin 
durch  und  durch  nass  geworden. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Personal  Pronouns, 


7.  Glauben    Sie,    dass    es    den   ganzen    Tag* 
regnen  wird? 

Ich  glaube  wenigstens,  dass  es  vor  Mittag  nicht 

aufhoren  wird. 
Kommen   Sie   an   den   Ofen^  und  trocknen^   Sie 

sich. 
Ziehen  Sie  Ihre  Schuhe  aus. 
Meine  Pantoffehi  sind  Ihnen  zu  klein,  aber  mein 

Bruder  kann  Ihnen  seine  geben. 

Ziehen    Sie    sie     unterdes     an,     wahrend^    Ihre 

Schuhe  trocknen.^ 
Aber  ich  store  Sie. 
Sie  storen  uns  durchaus  nicht. 


NOTES. 

1  Sich  erkalten,  to  take  cold.    For  verbs  which  are  reflexive  in 
German,  but  not  in  English,  see  page  260,  note  2. 

2  Auch  {also)  simply  gives  emphasis  to  tlie  sentence  here. 

8  See  page  262,  note  1.  —  •*  Den  ganzen  Tag.     Notice  the  use  of 
the  accusative,  to  express  length  of  time.    See  page  116. 

5  For  the  accusative  with  the  preposition  an,  see  page  268. 

6  Trocknen  is  used  ritlier  as  a  transitive  verb  with  the  sense  of  'to 
make  dry,'  or  ns  an  iiitraiisitive  with  the  sense  of  'to  grotv  dry.'' 

^  Wahrend,  as  a  preposition  (t.  e.,  used  before  a  noun)  =  during.    As 
a  conjunction,  wahrend  =  while. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


265 


Er-kel'-t'n. 
Ne  -z'n. 
Mobl'-d'ii. 

Nas'. 


You  are  sure  to  take  cold.^ 
See !  You  are  sneezing  already.^ 
That 's  so.     But  it  is  just  pour- 
ing down  rain.^ 
And  I  got  all  wet  simply  com- 
ing across  the  sidewalk.* 


page  483. 


7.  Gla-db''-b'n  ze  das  6s 
dan  gan^-ts'ii  tsikh  rach^- 
11611  virt? 

Va'-nic7i-st'ns a-oof- 

O'-f  n trok'-nen. 


Pan-to'-fln. 

dbn'-t'r-des v^'-rent. 

Sht^'-re. 
DooTch'-a-oos'. 


Do  you  think  it  will  rain 
tlie  whole  day?t 

I   think    it  will    rain    all    the 
morning  any  way.* 

Come  (near)  to  the  fire  and  dry 

yourself. 
Take  off  your  shoes.  % 
My  slippers  are  too  small  for 

you,    but    my    brother    will 

lend  you  his.^ 
Put  them  on  *  while  yours  are 

drying. 

But  I  disturb  you. 

You  do  not  disturb  us  at  all.^ 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  You  will  siirely  take  cold. 

2  You  must  already  sneeze.     Or,  simply:  Sie  niesen  schon. 

8  I  am  {Anglice :  have)  only  over  the  street  gone  and  am  {Anglice. 
liave)  through  and  through  wet  become. 

4  I  believe  at-least  that  it  before  noon  not  cease  will. 
6  Are  to-you  too  small,  but  my  brotlier  can,  etc. 

6  Put  (you)  them  (meanwhile)  on  (lit. :  draw-on), 

7  You  disturb  us  throughout  not  {i.  e.,  by  no  means). 
*  It  rains  also  (as)  with  troughs. 

t  Believe  you  that  it rain  will?  —  |  Draw  ye  your  shoes  out. 


'iQ^  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

8.    Al)er    wariiiii     sind     Sie    bei    einem    so 
scliauderhaften  Regeii  gekommen? 

Es  regnete  nicht,  als  ich  fortfuhr. 

Wo  wollen  Sie  von  hier  aus  *  hin  ? 

Ich   wollte    Ihre    Freundin,   Fraulein    Kaufmann, 

besuchen. 
Und  ich  wollte  Sie  bitten,  mitzukommen. 

Und   dann   konnen  wir  dort   den   Abend   zusam- 

men  verbringen. 
Ich    mochte    gern    mit    Ihnen    gehen,    aber    bei 

diesem  Wetter  ist  es  unmoglich.^ 

Nein,  das  geht^  wirklich  nicht. 

Aber  seien  Sie  so  gut  Fraulein  Kaufmann's  Buch 

mitzunehmen.      Ich    habe    es    schon    durchge- 

lesen. 


Note.  —  Study  the  declension  of  Proper  Nouns, 


NOTES. 

1  Unmoglich,  according  to  the  rules  of  accentuation  (see  page  xx), 
should  take  the  primary  accent  on  the  prefix  iin,  as  given  on  the 
opposite  page,  but  the  pronunciation  don'-muc/i'-lic/t  is  really  more 
common. 

2  Notice  the  idiomatic  use  of  gehen.  Other  idiomatic  phrases  are: 
Wie  geht  es?  JIoiv  do  you  do?  Wie  geht  es  mit  Ihnen?  How  are 
you  getting  on?    Es  geht  inir  sehlecht,  I  am  Hi,  etc. 

*  As  already  seen,  aus  is  often  used  as  an  expletive  (i.  ^.,  merely  to 
add  strength  to  the  expression), 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


267 


8.  A^-b'r  va-rooiii^  ziiit  ze 
bi  i^-iiem  zo  sha-db^-d'r- 
haf -t'li  ra^-g-'ii  ^g6^-k6'- 
m6n  ? 

Fort'-foor'. 

Ton  lier'  a-dos  tiiii'. 
Fro-i'-lin. 


Tsoo-za'-men  fer-brifi'-'n. 


OOn'-ra-eLch'-lich. 


Mit'-tsdb-na'-men. 


But  why  did  you  come  in 
such  a  terrible  shower 
as  this  ?  i 

It    was    not    raining    when    I 

started.^ 
Where    are   you    going  when 

you  leave  us?^ 
I  was  going*  to  call   on  your 

friend,  Miss  Kaufmann. 

And  I  was  coming  after  you  to 
have  you  go  with  me.* 

And  then  we  '11  spend  the  even- 
ing together.^ 

I  should  very  much  like  to 
go  with  you.  But  in  such 
weather  it  isn't  possible.^ 

No,  it  is  not  possible."^ 

But  be  good  enough  to  take 
Miss  Kaufmann's  book  with 
(you).  I  have  already  read 
it  through. 


page  475. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  But  why  have  (lit. :  are)  you  by  a  so  terrible  rain  come? 

2  It  rained  not  when  I  away-drove. — Observe  that  tlie  Germans 
have  no  progressive  form  and  hence  cannot  say,  It  is  mining,  It  was 
raining ;  but  can  only  say,  It  rains,  It  rained.     See  page 

3  Wbere  will  you  from  liere  out  to?     (See  note*,' opposite  page.) 

4  And  T  would  you  beg  with-to-come. 

5  And  then  can  we  there  tbe  evening  together  spend. 

6  But  by  this  weatber  is  it  impossible. 

7  No,  tbat  goes  really  not.  —  *  I  wanted. 


268  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

RECAPITULATION    OF    THE    GOVERNMENT    OF    CASES    BY 
PREPOSITIONS. 

We  have  already  seen  : 

1.  That  the  prepositions  governing  the  accusative  case 

are : 

durchf  through,  by.  ohne,  without,  hut,  for. 

fiir,  for.  uin,  about,  round,  at. 

gegen,  towards,  against.  wider,  against.^ 

2.  That  the  prepositions  governing  the  genitive  case  most 
frequently  used,  are : 

stattf  or  anstattf  instead.  trotz,  in  spite  of. 

wegen,  on  account  of.  wdhrend,  during. 

3.  That  the  prepositions  ji^overning  the  dative  case  most 
frequently  used,  are: 

aus,  Old  of,  from.  mit,  with.  von,  from,  of 

bei,  near,  tuith,  by,  at.         na^h,  after.  zu,  to,  at. 


BUT  NINE  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERN  SOMETIMES  THE  DATIVE 
AND  SOMETIMES  THE  ACCUSATIVE  CASE. 

They  are: 

an,  on,  in.  in,  in,  into.  unter,  under. 

auf,  on,  upon.  neben,  near.  vor,  before. 

hinter,  behind.  ilber,  over.  zivischen,  between. 

Notice  that  these  are  all  prepositions  of  place,  although  they 
are  also  used  to  express  other  relations,  as  of  time,  etc. 

They  govern  the  dative  when  no  motion  is  implied.    They 


Also,  bis,  until,  iui.l  souder,  without  (not  frequent). 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  269 

govern  the  accusative  when  motion  from  one  place  to  another 
is  impHed. 

Or,  to  put  it  differently,  they  govern  the  dative,  when  they 
answer  the  question  ivhere  {wo) ;  *  and  the  accusative,  when 
they  answer  the  question  wJutJicr  (wohin)."^    Examples : 

Note  that  in  the  following-  sentences,  the  ones  marked  1. 
answer  to  the  question  whoi^e,  while  those  marked  2.  answer 
to  the  question  -whither.    Ex. : 

1.  We  were  behind  the  mountain  =  Wir  waren  hinter  detn  Berg. 

2.  We  went  behind  the  mountain  =  Wir  gingen  hinter  den  Berg. 

1.  Fish  live  in  water  =  Die  Fische  leben  in  dem  Was- 

ser. 

2.  The  child  fell  in,  etc.=  Das  Kind  fiel  in  das  Wasser. 

1.  The  garden  is  near  the  house  =   Der    Garten    ist    neben    de>n 

Haus. 

2.  I  brought  it  near  {to)  the  house  =  Ich  brachte  es  neben  das  Haus. 

1.  My  shoes  are  under  the  bed=     Meine  Schuhe  sind  unter  detn 

Bett. 

2.  Put  my  shoes  under  the  bed  =    Setze  meine  Schuhe  unter  das 

Bett. 

1.  A  tree  stands  before  the  castle  ='Em    Baum    steht    vor    dem 

Schloss.f 

2.  The  peasant  went  before,  etc.  =  Der    Bauer    ging    vor    das 

Schloss.f 

1.  The  picture  hangs  betw.  the  w.  =  Das  Bild  hangt  zwischen  den 

Fenstern. 

2.  Hang  the  pictures  betw.  the  w.  =  Hange  das  Bild  zwischen  die 

Fenster. 


*  In  putting  the  question  where  or  whither,  be  careful  not  to  con- 
found their  real  meaning.  For  instance,  when  speaking  of  going,  do 
not  say  ^vhere,  as  usually  done  in  colloquial  phrases  in  English,  but 
whither. 

t  Notice  that  in  order  to  have  the  accusative,  there  must  be  motion 
toward  the  p]Hce  spoken  of.  Thus:  The  peasants  dance  before  the  castle 
would  1)0.  Die  Bauern  tanzen  vor  dem  Schloss  (not  das),  be- 
cause, ultliough  they  are  moving,  the  motion  is  not  toward  the  castle. 


270 


DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart 


VOKABELN. 


Das  Wetter. 


Es  ist  schones  Wetter, 

**    "  schlechtes  Wetter, 

"    "  herrliches^      " 

"    "  schauderhaftes  Wetter, 

"    "  trubes^  " 

Or,  simply : 
Es  ist  schon, 

"  schlecht, 

''  prachtvoll,' 

"  feucht,*  trocken, 

"  warm,  kalt, 

"  schwiil,^ 

'*  hell,  dunkel, 

"  windig,* 

"  ein  eiskalter  Wind,' 

"  neblig,^ 

"  schinutzig,® 

"  staubig,io 

"  stiirmisch,^^ 

"  eine  driickende  Hitze,*'* 

"  kuhl, 


It  is  nice  weather. 
*'  "  bad 

"  "  splendid  weather. 
*'  "  atrocious      " 
"  "  gloomy  " 

The  weather  is  fine. 
"  bad. 

"  "        "  splendid. 

"  "        "  damp,  dry. 

"  "        "  warm,  cold 

"        -  muggy. 
It  is  daylight,  dark. 
It  is  windy. 
The  wind  is  icy  cold. 
It  is  foggy. 
"  "  muddy. 
«  "  dusty. 
"  "  stormy. 
"  "  sultry. 
"  "  cool. 


1  Her'-li-e/igs.  —  *^  Tru'-bes. 

3  Prafc/it'-fol'.  —  4  f6-Tc/it. 

6  Shvul.  —  6  Vln'-dTc/i. 

7  Is'-kal -t'r  Vint.—  «  Na'-l>lhl». 

••  S/fiiioo'-t  T«/i.  —  i'>  SI#ta-oo'-bic/i, 

u  S/ttter'-mish.—  '■:  Di-ii'-k'n-de  hV.ts^ 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  271 


The  following  vocabulary  to  be  learned  by  heart. 


VOCABULARY. 


The  Weather. 


Es  regnet, 

Es  schneit, 

Es  hagelt,* 

Es  graupelt,* 

Es  friert, 

Es  taut,8 

Es  bat  geregnet, 

Es  regnete, 

Es  hat  geschneit, 

Es  schneite, 

Es  fangt  an  zu  frieren, 

Das  Wetter  bessert  ^  sich, 

Es  wild  bald  regnen, 

Es  wird  schlechtes  Wetter, 

Welches  Wetter !  » 

Wie  schones  Wetter! 

Welch  ^  schauderhaftes  Wetter ! 

Welche  Hitze !  ^o 


It  rains. 

It  is  snowing. 

"  "  hailing. 

"  "  sleeting. 

"  "  freezing. 

"  "  thawing. 
It  rained. 
It  was  raiiiing. 
It  snowed. 
It  was  snowing. 
It  is  going  to  freeze.* 
The  weather  is  improving.® 
It 's  going  to  rain.® 
The  weather  is  getting  bad.' 
What  weather  I  * 
"     fine  weather! 
"    frightful  weather  1 
How  hot  it  is !  i® 


1  Ha'-g'lt.  —  2  Gra-oo'-p'lt.  —  s  Ta-oot. 

^  Lit. :  it  begins  to  freeze.  —  5  Lit. :  the  weather  betters  itself. 
6  Lit.  :  it  will  soon  rain.  —  '  Lit.:  it  becomes  bad  weather. 

8  Or,  Welch  eiii  Wetter.  —  Observe  that  before  eiii,  or  any  adjec- 
tive, especially  when  used  in  an  exclamatory  way,  welch  has  no 
ending.  The  same  rule  applies  to  solch  (such  a),  and  manch  (many 
a). 

9  Could  also  say  :  Was  fiir  ein  Wetter!     Lit.:  ivhat  for  a  weather ! 
^0  Lit. :  what  heat !  —  -^  Lit. :  the  wejither  betters  itself. 


272  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  he  learned  by  heart,  and  then  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  con- 
versation, whether  for  self-study  or  preparation  for  the  class- 
room,   [See  also  Directions  before  Part  I,) 

GESPRACHE. 

l.  —  VOM    WETTER. 

Wie  warm  ist  es  heute !  —  Nicht  wahr  ?  Es  ist  den 
ganzen  Sommer  nicht  so  warm  gewesen.  —  Gehen 
Sie  nicht  so  schnell.^  Ich  bin  wassernass.^  —  Ja,  das 
bringt  in  Schweiss.^ 

Was  haben  Sie  denn?  —  Dieser  Wagen  hat  mich 
bespritzt.*     Mein  neues  Kleid  ist  ganz  voll  Schmutz.^ 

—  Was  fiir  ein  Wetter !  Heute  friih  schien  *  die 
Sonne,  und  jetzt  giesst  es  mit  Kannen.  —  Lassen  Sie 
uns  untertreten  ^ 

Kutscher,  sind  Sie  besetzt?^ — Nein,  Madam.^ — Ich 
nehme  Sie  nach  der  Zeit.^    Sehen  Sie  auf  Ihre  Uhr. 

—  Warum  nehmen  Sie  ihn  nicht  fiir  die  Fahrt?^^ — 
Weil  ich  Sie  erst  zu  Frau  von  Korf  fiihren  will 
.....  Kutscher,  Wilhelmstrasse,  Nummer  235. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Do  not  walk  so  fast.  —  2  Va'-s'r-uas'  (lit. :  water-wet),  wet 
through. —  8  It  makes  one  })erspiro.  Lit.:  Yes,  that  brings  in  per- 
spiration.— 4  From  bespritzen  (bg-s/i-pri'-ts'n),  to  spatter.  —  6  Voll 
Schmutz  (fol  shmootsO,  full  (of;  mud.  The  adjective  voll  really 
governs  the  genitive  case :  voll  des  Lobes,  voll  des  Schmutzes. 
However,  the  noun  after  voll  remains  frtHiuciitly  indeclinable. 

«  C)t)n'-t»r-tra'-t'n,  get  under  shelter.  —  ^  Be-zStst',  engaged. 

8  Ma-dam'.—  ^  By  the  hour.     Lit. :  according  to-the  time. 

w  Fart,  by  the  drive.    Lit. :  for  the  trip.  —  *  Imperfect  of  scheinen. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  273 

Note.  — Study  the  Aux.  Miissen  and  Mdgen,  p.  505. 


3.  —  VERGEBLICHER    BESUCH* 

1st  Frail  von  Korf  zu  Hause?  —  Nein,  Madam,  sie 
ist  nicht  zu  Hause.  —  Wie  schade  !  —  Aber  die  gna- 
dige  Frau  wird  bald  zuriick  kommen.  Wollen  Sie 
nicht  gefalligst  eintreten  ^  und  Platz  nehmen.  —  Nein, 
wir  konnen  nicht  warten.  Bitte  geben  Sie  ihr  diese 
Karten  und  sagen  Sie  ihr,  dass  wir  es  sehr  bedau- 
ern^  sie  nicht  angetroffen^  zu  haben. 

4=.  —  N0CH   EIN  BESUCH. 

1st  Frau  von  Korf  zu  sprechen?*  —  Ja,  Madam. 
Bitte  bemiihen  Sie  sich^  in  den  Salon. 

Ah,  guten  Morgen,  meine  Liebe.^  Wie  freue  ich 
mich  Sie  zu  sehen.  —  Ich  store  Sie  doch  nicht.  —  Nein, 
durchaus  nicht,  bitte  nehmen  Sie  Platz. 

Was  fiir  ein  herrliches  Wetter,  nicht  wahr?  —  Ja 
wirklich.  Aber  die  Tage  nehmen  schon  ab.'^  Es 
wird  schon  ganz  dunkel.  Johann,  machen  Sie  Licht,^ 
man  kann  nichts  mehr  sehen. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 
1  In'-trS'-t'n,  to  step  in.  —  2  BS-da-oo'-'rn,  to  regret. 
3  Angetroffen  (an'-ge-tro  -f  n),  past  i)art.  of  antreifen,  to  meet,  to 
find.  —  4  At  home.     Lit. :  to  speak  {i.  e.,  to  be  spoken  witli). 

5  Please  step  into  the  parlor.  Lit. :  please  trouble  yourself  in  the  parlor. 
See  page  170. 

6  My  dear. — Liebe  is  really  an  adjective.  But  adjectives  used  as 
substantives  are  written  with  a  capital,  and  if  preceded  by  the  definite 
article,  follow  the  Weak  Declension. 

7  Abnehmen,  to  diminish.     Anglice:  The  days  are  getting  shorter. 

8  Anglice:  Light  up. —  *  Fer-g3b'-li-c/i.'r  be-zoofc/t',  useless  visit. 


274  DAS    WETTER    VND    DIE    STADT. 

To  be  translated  and  written  into   German,  but  also  to  be  treated 

orally  in  the  class-room.     {For  Self-Study,  see  Directions, 

be/ore  I*art  I,) 

EXERCISES. 

1.- ABOUT    THE    WEATHER. 

How  is  the  weather  to-day?  —  It  is  splendid.  Get 
up;  we'll  (go  and)  take  a  walk.^  —  I  cannot.  I  must 
go  down  town  and  buy  a  trunk.  —  What  for?^  —  I 
want  to  take  the  3:45  train  to-morrow  afternoon. 
To  what  store  would  you  advise  me  to  go?  —  Go  to 
Lissauer's.     They  sell  very  cheap. 

2. -SKATING,    ETC. 

The  weather  is  improving. — Yes,  but  it  is  freezing 
still.  Let  us  (go  and)  skate  on  the  Rousseau  Island.^ 
—  I  am  willing.  But  I  haven't  any  skates.  —  You 
can  hire*  a  pair  over  there.  —  All  right,^  let  us  go. 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Stehen  Sie  auf ;  wir  wollen  einen  Spaziergang  machen. 

2  Wofur  <vo-fur'),  lit. :  wherefore.  Was  {tvhat),  relatively  or  inter- 
rogatively L'sed  is  rarely  combined  with  prepositions,  but  the  adverb 
wo  is  used  instead.  Thus:  wozu  {not  was  zu),  to  what;  wodurch, 
f)i/  what ;  woniit,  with  what;  wofiir,  what  for ;  wovon,  of  what,  etc. 

8  Let  ye  us  on  the  Rousseau  Island  (Insel,  rdb'-so'  in'-zel)  skate 
(Schlittschuhlaufen,  shlit'-shoo-la-oo'-f  n).  Notice  the  conjuga- 
tion :  I  skate,  ich  laufe  Schlittschuh,  etc.  Lit. :  I  run  (on)  skate 
(Sclilittschuh,  lit. :  slide-shoe). 

4  Leihen,  li'-'n. —  6  All  right  =  gut. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  275 

What  is  making  that  noise  against  the  window?^ 
It  is  not  raining,  I  hope.^  —  No ;  it  is  too  cold  for 
that.2  It  is  hailing.  —  What  frightful  weather!  Shall 
we  go  out  in  such  weather  ?  —  Yes,  lei  us  go  out 
anyhow.* 

3.- MEETING.^ 

Did  you  see  Mr.  Habberton  this  morning?  —  Yes, 
I  saw  him  on  Broadway.  —  Well,  did  you  speak  to 
him  about  that  little  affair  in  Wall  Street?^  —  No,  I 
did  not  tell  him  about  it.^  —  Why  did  n't  you  ?  — 
Because  he  did  not  ask  me."  I  thought  he  knew  it.^ 
—  Have  Caswell  &  Co.  sent  us  those  packages?^  — 
They  have  n't  sent  them  yet.^^  —  Why  did  n't  you 
write  to  them  (about  it)?^^  —  I  did,^'^  but  they  have 
not  answered  me  yet.^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


I  What  is  that  {for  a)  noise  (Gerausch,  gg-ro-ishO  at-the  (am) 
window? —  2  Hoffentlich,  lit. :  hopincjhj. 

3  Dafiir,  lit. :  therefor.    For  use  of  da  instead  of  it,  see  p.  108,  n.  1. 
<  Shall  we  by  such  w.  out-go?  —  Let  ye  us  anyhow  (doch)  oiit-^o. 

5  Have  you  with  him  about  (German:  over)  that  little  affair(Vor- 
fall,  f5r'-fal',  masc.)  in  Wall  Street  (an  der  Borse)  spoken. 

6  I  have  to  him  nothing  of  it  (see  page  168,  note  1)  said. 

7  Because  he  me  not  asked  (gef  ragt)  has. 

8  I  thought  that  he  it  knew  (wuste,  imperfect  of  wissen). 

5*  Have  Caswell  &  Co.  to-us  those  packages  (packete,  pa-ka'-te, 
v-euter)  sent  (geschickt)? —  ^^  They  have  them  not  yet  sent. 

II  Why  have  you  to-them  not  written  (geschrieben) ? 

12  I  have  to-them  written. — Tlie  Germans  cannot  simply  say  I  did,  but 
must  use  a  complete  sentence,  as  here.    See  page  259,  note  2. 

13  But  they  have  to-me  not  yet  answered  (geantwortet). 
*  Begegnung  (feia.),  he-g&ch'-ndbu. 


276  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  be  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation,  then  without  it,  in 

preparation  for  reading  aloud  and  translating 

in  class. 


«efeftttrf. 

—  Unb  \vol)\n  fii^rt  jeite  gro^artige,  breite  Xx^pp^  gu 
utifrer  9^ed)ten,  bid)t  am  glufe? 

—  ©ie  fii^rt  ^u  ber  ^ruf)(fd)en  ^erraffe,*  bem  Siebling§= 
aufentt)a(t  ber  ^re^beuer.  2Btr  woUrn  (;inaufge(;eii  unb  m\§> 
ohtn  ^twa§>  erfrifd^en,  el;e  wit  nad)  ber  S^euftabt  ge^en. 

—■md)  ber  ^euftabt? 

—  3a.  ®enn  tt)a§  ©ie  6i§  je^t  bon  ^reSben  gefe^en 
(jaben,  ()ei§t  bie  Slltftabt.  2Bir  iDotlen  bann  iiber  bie  ^riidfe 
nad)  ber  S^euftabt  gel;en,  mo  e^  ^  inbe§  au^er  bem  :|)rdd)tigen 
Sa^anifc^en  ^alai§,  wdd}c§>  5luguft  ber  ©tarfef  erbaueti 
(ie§,  toenig  (Be^enStDerte^  giebt.^ 

—  Sluguft  ber  (5tar!e  ?  2Bar  er  rt)ir!(ic^  fo  ftar!,  ba§  er 
einen  foldjeu  ^einamen  t)erbiente?2 

—  ©eiDtfe.  (5r  fott^  einmal  einen  ©olbaten  in  boiler 
9?iiftung  mil  einer  Qan'o  frei^  au^ge^alten  ^aben,  unb  ein 
anbere^  9Ka(  (;at  er  ein  eiferne^  ^^re^^engelcinber  ioie  einen 
^inbfaben  ^ufatnmengebogen.  Slber  ba  finb  tDir  auf  ber 
^rid;lfd)en  Xerraffe.  fiaffen  8ie  xn\§>  (;ier  einige  @rfri= 
fc^ungen  ^u  un^  ne^men,  unb  id;  wiH  3f)nen  UHal;renb  be» 
erjciljlen,  \vk  5luguft  ber  ©tarfe  einmal  einen  Mann  fanb, 
ber  il)m  an  6tar!e  gleid)fam. 


1  Es  gieht  =  thei-e  is,  there  are.    For  the  difference  between  Es  giebt, 
and  Es  ist  {there  is),  Es  sind  {there  are),  see  page  409,  note  2. 

2  From  verdienen,  to  deserve,  to  earn. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  277 

For  Self-Study,  should  he  read  by  means  of  the  translation,  then 

without  it,  and  when  thoroughly  understood,  read 

aloud  in  German. 


READING. 
A  WALK  THROUGH  DRESDEN.  — 2. 

—  And  where  leads  that  magnificent,  wide  flight- 
of-steps  to  our  right,  next  to-the  river? 

—  It  leads  to  the  Briihl  terrace,  the  favorite-resort  of- 
the  Dresden-people.  We  will  go-up  and  ourselves  up- 
thereJI  somewhat  refresh,  before  we  to  the '  new  town '  go. 

—  To  the  '  new  town  ? ' 

—  Yes.  For  what  you  until  now  of  Dresden  seen 
have,  is-called  the  'old  town.'  We  will  then  over 
the  bridge  to  the  new  town  go,  where  there,  however, 
except  the  beautiful  Japanese  Palace  which  August 
the  Strong  built  had,  J  little  worthy-to-see  is.^ 

—  August  the  Strong?  Was  he  really  so  strong 
that  he  such  a  nick -name  got?^ 

—  Certainly.  He  is  said'^  once  a  soldier  in  full 
armor  with  open  hand  out-held  to-have.  And  another 
time  did  he  an  iron  baluster  as  a  thread  together 
bend.  But  there  are  we  on  the  Briihl  terrace.  Let 
us  here  some  refreshments  to  ourselves  take,  and 
I  will  to-you  during  that  relate  how  August  the 
Strong  once  a  man  found,  who  to-him  in  strength 
equal-came. 


8  Strictly:  He  s/mZ?  one-time,  etc.—  ^  Frei  =  free,  open. 
*  Briil'-sh'n  te-ra'-se.—  t   A-do'-goost  d'r  s/itar'-ke. 

X  Lit.:  build  let.    Liiess,  imperfect  of  lassen.—  J|  Strictly:  up-stairs. 


278  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

—  5t(^  Slii^uft  ber  ©tarfe  ciitft  fpa^iercii  ritt/  i^dor*  fein 
^ferb  ein  ^ufcifen.  ©r  trat^  ba(;er  in  bent  ndd)fteu  ®orf 
bei  einem  §iif|cl)inieb  ein.^  3(t§  berfelbe^  ein  ^ufeifcu  ()er= 
i>or(;olte,  iiin  baio  ^ferb  511  befdjlageu,  U)otlte  ber  Jlurfiirft 
^^uuor  unterfud^en,  ob  e§  aud;^  ftar!  genug  fei.  @r  fa^te 
ba^ofelbe^  niit  beiben  ^ciiiben  imb  brad;  e^3  burdi^  tme  eine 
9Jtobrriibc.  „  ^ic$  (^ifen  taugt  md)t^/'  fagte  cr  ;^u  bent 
§nffd;nueb,  mcldier  fogteid;  niel)rere  anbere  l^erDorbolte ;  aber 
ber  Slnrfi'irft  ^erbrad)  cine^5  wad}  bent  anbern.  ^er  (Sd)niieb 
mad)te  cine  beben!(id)e  9}Jiene7  nnb  feine  ©efellen^  faf;en 
einanber  Denuunbert  an.^  ©nblid;  tijat^^  ber  ilnrfiirft,  a[§> 
ob  er  ein^i  gefnnben  batte,  tt)eld;e§  ftarf  gemig  metre.  ®a^ 
^ferb  u>nrbe  bamit^^  bcfc^lagen,  nnb  aU  ber  ©d;ntieb  mit 
feiner  3(rbeit  fertig^^  mar,  gab  ibnx  ber  5!nrfiirft  einen 
barten  2^(;a(er.^^  ®er  ©djmieb  naf)nt  benfelben  ^mifcben 
bie  ginger  nnb  botg  i(;n  frnnnn.  „  liefer  X(;aler  tangt 
nid)t§,  ^err  ilnrfiirft/'  rebete^^  er  hm  gremben  an/^  ben 
er  injruifd^en  erfannt  ^atte.  ®er  ^urfiirft  reicbte  ibnt  nocb 
me^rere  Xi)akx,  aber  ber  (3(f)mieb  ^erbrad)  einen  nacb  bent 
anbern.  „DJnn/'  fagte  ber  ^n^fiirft  enblid;,  „(;ier  ift 
ein  Sonieb'or,  ber  mirb  mo^P^  gnt  fein."  ^ierniit  mar 
ber  !Sd)mieb  ^ufrieben,  unb  ber  Jlurfiirft  frente  fid),  je= 
manben  gefnnben  jn  t;aben,  ber  i(;m  an  ©tdrfe  gemad)fen^' 
mar. 

—  2)ie  @efd)id)te  ift  Wixtiid)  red)t  (;ubfd). 

—  ©^  frent  mid;,  bafe  fie  3f)nen  gefddt.  2(ber  nnn  moHen 
mir  anfbrec^en.    Sledner,  ma§  finb  mir  fd;nlbig? 


,1  Imperfect  of  reiten,  to  ride.—  2  Imperfect  of  eintreten,  to  enter. 
3  Strictly:  the  same.  —  4  Strictly:  if  it  also  strong  enough  may-he. 
s  Strictly  ;  the  same. —  ^  Strictly  :  broke  it  through. 
^  Miene  =  look,    appearance. —    ^   Geselle  =  comjianion,  journey- 
an.  —  'j  From  ansehen,  to  look  at.  —  •=•  Imperf.  of  verlieren. 
l^  That,  imperfect  of  thun.    Anglice :  The  Elector  'made  out.' 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  279 

—  As  August  the  Strong  once  went-out  riding,^  lost 
his  horse  a  shoe.  He  entered  therefore  in  the  next  vil- 
lage in-the  shop-of  a  blacksmith  into.  As  the  latter^  a 
horse-shoe  held-out  in-order  the  horse  to  shoe,  wished 
the  Elector  first  to  ascertain  whether  it  was  perhaps^ 
strong  enough.  He  seized  it^  with  both  hands,  and 
broke  it  in-two  ^  like  a  carrot.  "  This  iron  is-worth 
nothing,"  said  he  to  the  blacksmith,  who  immediately 
several  others  brought-out;  but  the  Elector  broke  one 
after  the  other.  The  smith  made  a  dubious  face,^  and 
his  journeymen^  looked-at  each-other  astonished  {on)? 
Finally,  did  ^^  the  Elector^  as  if  he  had^^  one  found 
which  strong-enough  was.  The  horse  was  therewith  ^^ 
shod,  and  when  the  smith,  with  his  work  ready  was,^'^ 
gave  to-him  the  Elector  a  hard  thaler.^*  The  smith 
took  the-same  between  his  fingers  and  bent  it  crooked. 
"  This  thaler  is-worth  nothing.  Sir  Elector,"  spoke  he 
the  stranger  to}^  whom  he  in-the-meantime  recognized 
had.  The  Elector  handed  him  yet  another  thaler,  but 
the  smith  broke  one  after  the  other.  "  Now,"  said  the 
Elector  at-last,  "here  is  a  Louis  d'or,  that  will  per- 
haps^^  good  be."  Therewith  was  the  smith  satisfied, 
and  the  Elector  rejoiced  (himself),  some-one  found  to- 
have,  who  to-him  in  strength  a-match^''  was. 

—  The  story  is  indeed  very  pretty. 

—  It  rejoices  me  that  she  (to)  you  pleases.  But  now 
will  we  ' break  up.'     Waiter!     What  do  we  owe? 


lA  Past  part,  of  iinden. 

12  Angllce :  with  it.     See  page  168,  note  1. —  13  Anplice:  finished. 
"  A  thaler  =  three  marks. —  is  From  anreden,  to  speak  to,  to  ad- 
dress.— 16  Strictly:  which  will  well  good  be.—  ^'  Strictly:  equal, 
f  Iraperf.  ofgeben.  —  X  Imperf.  ofuehnien. —  Imperf.  of  biegen. 


280  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    JSTADT. 

* 

^anfiaQun^^f>titf ^  —  LETTER  of  thanks. 

DIRECTIONS.  —  Read  and  translate  this  letter,  after  which  copj 
it  ott',  —  then  learn  it  by  heart,  and  some  hour  or  two  afterward, 
write  it  out  again  from  memory.  For  model  of  letters,  etc.,  s^^ 
pages  48  and  49. 


TRANSLATION.  —  I  use  the  first  opportunity  to  write  you  and 
to  thank  you  heartily  for  the  presents  which  you  have  sent  us. 
My  parents  send  their  (strictly :  the)  best  compliments,^  and  I 
beg  you  to  believe  me,*  very  respectfully  yours,*  — 


1  Strictly :    salutations.  —  *  Lit. :    I  myself  (selbst)   recommend 
me  (mich)  to-you  with  especial  respect. 


Part  hi. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


DAS  WETTER  UND  DIE  STADT, 


SECTION    III. 


1. 

ABOUT  THE  WEATHER. 

2. 

VOCABULARY :  THE  CITY. 

3. 

VOCABULARY:  USEFUL  IDIOMS. 

4. 

TO  ASK  ONE'S  WAY. 

5. 

IN  A  CAB  AND  OUT. 

6. 

ABOUT  GERMAN  :  IN  BERLIN. 

7. 

WHICH  IS  THE  RIGHT  CASE? 

8. 

ACCEPTANCE  AND  ORDER. 

281 


282  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 


III. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Wir  werden  zu  Hause  bleiben  inussen.* 

Der  Himmel  ist  bedeckt.     Wir  miissen  zu  Hause 

bleiben. 
Was  hat  dein  Vater  gesagt? 
Er  sagte,  wir  miissten  ^  zu  Hause  bleiben. 
Warum  denn? 
Weil  es  gleich  regnen  wird.     Der  Himmel  ist  so 

triibe. 


2.  Wer  macht  solchen  Larm? 

Ich  bin  es  nicht.^ 

Julie  ist  es,  nicht  wahr? 

Was  sagst  du? 

Ich  sage,  es  ist  Julie.^ 


NOTES. 

1  Miissten,  imperf.  subjunct.  of  miissen.  When  dass  is  left  out  at 
the  beginning  of  a  dependent  clause,  tlie  verb  of  the  dependent  clause  i& 
often  put  in  the  subjunctive,  and  is  nevt  r  put  at  the  end.   See  p.  136,  n.  1. 

2  When  the  predicate  after  it  is,  is  a  noun,  the  construction  in  German 
is  the  same  as  in  English.  Thus:  It  is  Julia  =  Es  ist  Julie.  Bui 
when  the  predicate  after  it  is,  is  a  personal  pronoun,  tlie  Germans  reverse 
the  English  construction.  Thus:  R  is  /=ich  bin  es  (lit. :  I  am  it);  It 
i?  he  =  er  ist  es ;  It  is  we  =  vk^ir  sind  es ;  It  is  you  =  Sie  siud  es,  etc?. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


283 


III. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.    Ver     var^-d'n     tsoo 
lia-db^-ze   bli^-beu   mii^- 

Be-dekt'. 

Ge-zakht'. 

Zakh'-te mus'-t'n. 


Glich  rach'-nen.  virt 
trii'-be. 


2.    Var    makht    z6V'Ch*n 

Ich'  bin  es  nicht'. 
Yoo'-li-e nichV  var. 


We  shall  have  to  stay  at 
honie.i 

The  sky  is  overcast.     We  must 

stay  at  home. 
What  did  yonr  father  say? 
He  said,  we  must  stay  at  home. 
Why  so? 2 

Because  we  are  going  to  have 
rain.  The  weather  is  so 
cloudy.^ 


Who  is  making"  so  much 
noise  ?  ^ 


It  is  JuUa,  isn't  it?^ 
What  do  you  say  ? 
I  say  it  is  JuUa.** 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  We  shall  at  home  stay  must.  —  2  Why,  then? 
3  Because  it  directly  rain  will.    The  sky  is  so  dark. 
*  Who  makes  such  (a)  noise? 

5  Julia  is  it,  not  true? 

6  Also,  Ich  sage,  dass  es  Julie  ist. 

*■  Notice  that  ivjinitives  (as,  bleiben)  connected  with  a  modal  auxil- 
iary (as  konmen,  mogen,  wollen,  niiissen  etc.)  do  not  take  zu. 
Thus,  here  :  bleiben  {not  zu  bleiben)  miissen. 


284  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Sage  ihr,  sie  solP  ruhig  sein. 

Sie  ist  argerlich,  well  sie  zu  Hause  bleiben  muss. 

Ich    kaiin    nichts    dafiir.^       Das    Wetter    ist    zu 
schlecht,  um  auszugehen. 

Ins  Unvermeidliche  muss  man  sich  fiigen. 

Sie   muss    bis    morgen   warten.     Sie  wird   nichts 
dabei^  verlieren. 


Ich   werde    den    gaiizen    Tag    zu   Hause 
bleiben  niiissen. 

Warum  denn? 

Um  die  Arbeiter  zu  iiberwachen,  die  heute  kom- 


men. 


A  propos.*  Wir  miissen  auch  die  Decke  im  Ess- 
zimmer^  machen  lassen,  solange  die  Arbeiter 
hier  sind. 

Ware  es  nicht  besser,  die  Wande  in  der  Kiiclie 
auch  streichen  zu  lassen? 

Dafiir  ist  es  zu  spat. 


NOTES. 

1  Observe  the  indicative  mood,  although  the  conjunction  dass  is 
not  used.  This  is  because  tlie  sentence,  being  one  of  command, 
demands  a  tense  of  a  more  positive  nature  than  tlie  subjunctive. 

2  Never  say  ich  kann  es  nicht  helfen.  German-Americans  some- 
times use  this  expression,  which,  however,  is  incorrect. 

8  See  page  168,  note  1.  —  ■*  See  ]>age  230,  note  2. 

5  Or,  Speisezimmer,  s^pi'-zg-tsi'-in'r.  —  The  dining-room  of  a 
hotel  or  other  large  houses,  however,  is  called  Speisesaal. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


285 


Roo'-ich. 

Er'-ger-licTi. 

Da-fiir'. 


OOn'-fer-mit'-li-cTie 
fii'-g'n. 
Da-bi'  fer-le'-r'n. 


Tell  her  she  must  be  silent.* 

She  is  angry  because  she  has 

to  stay  at  home. 
I  can't  help  it'-*    The  weather 

is  too  (wretchedly)  bad  to  go 

out. 
What  can't  be  cured  must  be 

endured.^ 
Let  her  wait    till    to-morrow. 

She  won't  lose  anything  by 

it. 


3.    IcJi  var^-de  dan  g'an^- 
tsen  tsikh  tsoo  ha-db^-z6. 


Ar'-bi-t'r u'-b'r-va'- 

kh'n. 

De  de'-ke   im    es'-tsi'-m'r 
zo'-lan'-e. 


Ven'-de kw'-cTie 

sTitri'-cTi'n. 


Tsoo  shp§it'. 


I'll  have  to  stay  at  home 
all  day.* 

Why  will  you  have  to  stay  in  ? 
To  keep  watch  over  the  work- 
men who  are  coming.^ 

By  the  way ;  we  must  have  the 
ceiling  in  the  dining-room 
done  while  the  workmen  are 
here. 

Had  we  not  better  have  the 
kitchen  walls  whitewashed 
too?« 

It  is  too  late. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATION. 


1  She  shall  quiet  be.—  2  I  can  nothing  for  it. 

3  To-the  inevitable  must  one  submit  (sich  fiigen.    Strictly:  him- 
self join).— Ins  =  in  das;  lit.:  m  the. 

4  I  shall  the  whole  day  at  home  (to)  stay  be  obliged  (lit. :  must), 

5  In  order  the  workingmen  over-watch  (to  superintend)  who  to-day 
come. 

6  Were  it  not  better  the  walls  in  the  kitchen  paint  to  let. 
*  When  to  means  in  order  to,  it  is  rendered  by  um. 


286  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

4.   Das    hatteii    Sie    western    sagen    soil  en  ^ 
walireiitl  tile  Anstreicher  hier  waren. 


Das   macht   nichts   aus.^     Wir   miissen   auch   den 
Keller  reinigen  und  weissen  lassen. 

tjbrigens    hatte    ich    an    Ihrer    Stelle    das    ganze 
Haus  in  Ordnung  bringen  lassen. 

Sie  scherzen  wohl.     Sie  wissen  ja,  dass  ich  nicht 
die  Mittel  habe,  eine  solche  Ausgabe  zu  machen.^ 

Wie  viel  wiirde  es  denn  kosten? 
Nicht  weniger  als  zweitausend  Thaler. 

Ja,  das  ist  zu  viel. 

Damit  miissen  wir  noch  warten. 


Kote.  —  Study  the  Agreement  of  Adjectives, 


5.  Siehe,  da  ist  unser  Freund  Miiller. 

Sie  lassen  sich  wirklich  gar  nicht  mehr  sehen. 
Was  ist  das  fiir  ein  Wetter! 


NOTES. 
1  Lit.  :  That  makes  nothing  out.  Anglice  :  It  does  not  matter.  The 
verb,  machen,  to  make,  appears  naturally  in  a  great  many  idiomatic 
cxprrs.sions.  Notice  the  following  German  phrases,  among  others,  in 
wliicli  machen  has  an  entirely  idiomatic  meaning:  Was  macht  der 
Vater,  how  is  i/our  father  f  Ich  mache  mir  nichts  daraus,  /  don't 
care  for  it ;  Die  Saclie  macht  sicli,  matters  are  going  on  ver;i  ivrll ;  Ein 
Kxamen  (e-ksa'-m'n)  machen,  to  jxiss  an  e.r(nninatio)i;  Sich  auf 
den  Weg  maclien,  to  set  out;  Das  macht  sicli  nicht  gut,  that 
does  not  look  well. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


287 


4.  Das  lie^-t'ii  ze  g-es^-t'rii 
ztr-g-'ii  so^-leii  vA^-rent 
<le  aii^-s/*tri'-c^'r  her 
va^-r'n. 

Ri'-ni-gen vi'-s'n. 

tj'-bri-gens in  ort'- 

noofi  brin'-'n. 

Sher'-tsen i'-ne  zol'- 

che  a-o6s'-ga'-be. 


Ta'-ler. 


Tsoo  fel'. 


You  should  have  men- 
tioned^ it  yesterday 
while  the  whiteAvashers 
were  here. 

No  matter.     We  will  have  to 

have  the  cellar  cleaned  and 

whitewashed. 
Any  way,  in  your  place,  I  would 

have   had   the   whole   house 

gone  over.2 
You  are  joking,  surely.^    You 

ought  to  know^  that  I  have 

not  the  means  to  go  to  such 

an  expense.^ 
(But  now)  how  much  would  be 

needed?® 
Not  less  than  2,000  dollars. 

Yes,  it  is  too  much  (money). 
We  must  wait.'' 


pages  479  and  480. 


5.    Ze^-6   da   ist 
fro-int. 

Gar'  nicTit  mar. 


dbn^-z6r 


Wliy!    Here  is  our  friend 
Miiller! 

You  are  becoming  a  stranger.^ 
What  weather!     Eh? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  That  had  you  yesterday  to-say  ought.  —  Taught  to  have,  etc.,  is  not 
rendered  by  Ich  sollte haben,  but  by  Ich  hiitte sollen 

(Lit. :  I  had ought. 

2  Beside.s  had  I  {i.e.,  I  would  have,)  in  your  place  tlie  whole  house 
in  order  bring  let.  Ich  liatte  {imperfect  suhjunct.  of  Haben)  =/  liad, 
might,  or  woidd  have.  —  ^  You  jest  indeed  {i.  e.,  surely). 

*  You  know,  indeed.  —  ^  A  such  expense. 

6  How  much  would  it  {then)  cost?—  ^  There-with  must  we  still  wait. 

8  You  let  yourself  really  not  more  see, 


288  DAS    WETTER   UND    DIE    STADT. 

Horen  Sie,  wie  es  donnert. 
Aber  ich  muss  mit  Ihnen  sprechen. 
Ich  mochte  mir  Geld  von  Ihnen  borgen. 
Wie  viel  brauchen  Sie? 


Note.  —  Study  the  Comparison  of  Adjectives, 


7.  Wie  viel  wiirde  es  kosteii,  ilir  Hans  um- 
bauen  zvi  lasseii? 

Es    wiirde    wenigstens    hundert    tausend    Mark  * 

kosten. 
So  viel? 

Nicht  einen  Pfennig  weniger. 

Aber  Herr  Schmidt  sagte  mir,  dass  es  ihm  nicht 
mehr  als  funf  und  siebzig  tausend  Mark  kosten 
wiirde,  sein  Haus  umbauen  zu  lassen. 

Herr  Schmidt  mag  sagen,  was  er  will. 

Ich     lasse     mir     das     von       ihm    nicht     weis- 
machen 


NOTES. 

1  Such  words  as  Pfennig,  Mark,  Thaler,  are  generally  indeclin- 
able and  preserve  the  form  of  the  nominative  singular.  Likewise, 
nouns  indicating  measure,  weight,  and  number  retain  tlie  singular 
form  when  preceded  by  a  numeral.  Thus  :  Funf  Fuss  lang,  five  feet 
(lit.:  foot)  long.  Zwei  Pfund  Butter,  (wo  pounds  of  (lit.:  pound) 
butter;  Drei  Dutzend  Handschuhe,  .s'/.r  dozens  (lit. ;  dozen)  of  gloves. 
However,  feminine  words  ending  in  e,  take  the  form  of  the  plural,  as; 
zehn  Flaschen  Wein,  teii  bottles  of  wine. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


:89 


Ve  es  do'-n'rt. 

Bor'-g'n. 
Bra-66'-7ife'n. 


See!     It  is  thundering. 

But  I  must  speak  to  you. 

I  want  to  borrow  some  money.^ 

How  much  do  you  need?^ 


pages  480  and  482. 


7.  Ve  fel  vur^-tl6  6s  kos^- 
t'n  er  ha-dbs  dbm^- 
ba-db  -'n  tsdb  la''-s'ii. 

Va'-nicT^-st'ns. 


Zakh'-te zin  lia-(5t)s' 

66m'-ba-(56'-'n.  "^ 


Vis'-ma'-feTi'n. 


How  much  would  you 
need  for  rebuilding^  your 
house  ?=^ 

I  would  not  need  a  cent  less 
than  100,000  marks.* 

(Would  you  need)  as  much  (as 

that)  ? 
Not  a  cent  less. 
But  Mr.  Smith  was  telling  me 

that  he  would  not  need  more 

than   75,000   marks  to  have 

his  house  rebuilt.* 
Mr.  Smith   may  say  what  he 

likes. 
He  will  never  make  me  believe 

that  the   moon   is    made   ot 

green  cheese.* 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  I  might  to-me  (some)  money  from  you  borrow. 

2  How  much  would  it  cost  to  have  the  house  rebuilt  (lit. :  the  house 
rebuild  to  let)  ? 

8  It  would  at  least  100,000  marks  cost. 

4  But  Herr  Scliniidt  said  to-me  that  it  to-him  not  more  than  75,000 
marks  cost  would  liis  house  rebuilt  to  have. 
6  I  let  to-me  l/ialfrom  him  not  white-make. 
*  How  much  need  you? 


290  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

8.  Weiin  du  wilLst,  dass  ich  dich  heute 
abend  ins  Theater  fiihre,  so  musst  du 
um  sieben  Uhr  hier  sein.* 

Sei  ohne  Sorge,  ich  werde  zur  rechten  Zeit  da  sein. 

Das  ist  aber  auch  notig. 

Welchen  Hut  wirst  du  aufsetzen?^ 

Ich  werde  meinen  weissen  Atlashut  aufsetzen.^ 

Den^  wiirde  ich  nicht  nehmen. 

Warum  nicht? 

Er  gefiillt  mir  nicht. 

Er  ist  doch  aber  ganz  modern.* 

Das  mag  sein,  aber  ich  finde  ihn  gar  nicht  hiibscli. 


Note.  — Study  the  Strong  Verbs,  Class  III., 


9.   A  propos,  wollen  wir  nicht  Frau  von  X. 
einladen  ? 

Nein. 

Warum  nicht? 
'      Ich  finde,  dass  sie  gar  nicht  nett  ist. 


NOTES. 

1  If  not  familiar:  werdeii  Sie  aufsetzen.  —  2  Por  the  idiomatic; 
expressions  used  in  matters  of  dress,  see  page  226,  note  1. 

8  When  der,  die,  or  das  stands  for  tlie  demonstrative  pronoun,  it 
is  pronounced  with  a  strong  accent. 

4  Notice  tli(>  (hstinctioTi  in  pronunciation  between  modern  (mo- 
dern'), ino'lcni,  and  modern  (mo'-d'rn),  ratteii. 

■-•■■  The  s|u'akc!s  ;ire  sunpos d  to  be  very  familiar.  If  not  so,  tiie 
sentence  would  be  :   JVenn  Sie  tvolien,  dass  ich  Sie,  etc. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


291 


8.  V6u  doo  vilst^  das  \ch 
(Well  ho-i^-te  ii^-b'nt  ins 
te-a^-t'r^fii^-re. 

O'-ne  zor'-ge da'  zin. 

Nu'-tic7i. 
A-oof'-ze'-ts'n. 

At'-las-tioot'. 

Dan. 


Mo-dern'. 

Gar'  nicTit  liupsh.'. 


If  you  want  me  to  take 
yon  to  the  theater  this 
evening-,  you  must  be 
here  at  seven  o'clock.^ 

Don't  be   afraid.^     I   shall   be 

here  on  time. 
That's  right.8 
What  bonnet  are  you  going  to 

put  on. 
I  am  going  to  put  on  my  white 

satin  bonnet.'* 
You  must  not  put  on  that  one.^ 

Why  not? 

I  don't  Uke  it  at  all.» 
But  it 's  quite  in  the  fashion.' 
That  may  be;    but  I   do   not 
think  it  is  nice  at  all.^ 


page  516. 


9.    A    pro-po^    v6^-l*n    ver 
YiicJit in^-la'-d'n  ? 


Gar'  nicTit  net'. 


By  the  way,  must  we  not 
invite  Mrs.  de  X.  ?  ^ 

No.     (We  must  not.) 

Why  (must)  (we)  not? 

I  think  she  is  not  at  all  a  nice 
person. i<^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  If  you  wish  that  I  you  to-day  evening  in  the  theater  take  (lit. : 
lead).  — For  the  order:  so  musst  du,  see  page  84,  II. 

2  Be  without  care.  —  ^  Tliat  is  {hut  also)  necessary. 

4  My  wliite  satin  hat.  —  ^  That  (one)  should  I  not  take. 
6  It  (lit. :  he,  because  Atlashut  is  of  masculine  gender)  pleases  to- 
me not.  —  "^  It  is  yet,  however,  quite  modern. 

8  But  I  find  it  (lit. :  h'nn)  not  at  all  pretty. 

9  Will  wo  not.  —  1"  That  she  entirely  not  genteel  is. 


292  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Aber  sollen  wir  nicht  Herrn  Blum  eiiiladen? 

Er  ist   doch   ein   sehr  angenehmer  Mann,   nicht- 

wahr? 
Man  sagt  es.     Ich  werde  ihn  einladen. 

Aber  Johann  muss  den  Wagen  bestellen. 

Anna  muss  mir  auch  Papier,  Tinte  und  Federn^ 

bringen. 
Wozu? 
Ich   muss   an  meine  Naherin  schreiben,  dass  sie 

zum  Anprobieren  kommt. 


lO.  Was  willst  du  thun? 

Ich  muss  dem  Madchen  klingeln. 

Willst    du    so    gut    sein    und    mir    die    Glocke 

reichen  ? 
Hier  ist  sie. 
Da  ist  Anna. 
Gnadige  Frau  wiinschen? 
Ich  brauche  Tinte. 
Die  im  Tintenfass  ist  ganz  eingetrocknet. 

Dann  miissen  Sie  welche^  holen. 


NOTES. 

1  We  could  say  here :  etwas  Papier,  Tinte  und  einige  Pedern, 

as  some  before  a  singular  noun  is  rendered  by  etwas,  and  before 
a  plural  noun,  by  einige  (lit.:  a  few).  But  frequently  the  Germans 
do  not  translate  some  at  all,  and  use  the  noun  without  any  article, 
as  here. 

2  Some,  referring  to  a  preceding  substantive,  is  usually  translated  in 
German  by  ivelcher,  welche,  welches :  Will  you  have  some  water  f  = 
Yes,  (live  me  some.  Wollen  Sie  Wasser  (or,  etwas  Wasser) 
haben?  =  Ja,  geben  Sie  mir  trelches. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


293 


Zo'-l'n. 
An'-ge-na'-m'i^. 

Be-s7ite'-rn. 

A'-na pa-per',  tin'-te 

. '.  .  .  fa'-d'rn. 


Vo-tsoo^ 

Nei'-e-rin an'-pro- 

be'-r'n. 


lO.  Vas  vilst  doo  toon^? 

Klin'-'ln. 
G16'-ke. 

Her  ist'  ze. 


De' tin'-t'n-fas' 

in'-ge-trok'-net. 


But  should  we  not  invite  Mr. 

Blum  ? 
He  is  a  very  nice  man,i  is  he 

not? 

That 's  what  they  say.^  I  must 
invite  him. 

But  John  must  order  the  car- 
riage. 

Jane  will  also  have  to  bring  me 
some  ink,  paper,  and  pens. 

What  for? 

I  must  write  ^  to  my  dress- 
maker to  come  and  try  on 
(my  dress).* 


What  are  you  grolngr  to  do  ? 

I  must  ring  the  servant.* 
Will  you  have  the  kindness  to 

hand  me  the  bell  ?  ^ 
(Certainly.)     Here  it  is. 
(Ah !)     Here  is  Jeanette. 
Madam  has  called  for  me  ?  • 
Yes.     I  must  have  some  ink. 
That  in  the  inkstand  is  all  dry. 

(Well)  then,  you  must  go  and 
get  some. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Pleasant.    Also  :  Ein  sehr  netter  Mann.  —  2  One  says  it. 

3  The  German  word  schreiben,  to  write,  requires  the  preposition 
an  (lit. :  at)  with  the  accusative;  but  the  Germans  could  also  use  the 
dative  with  schreiben,  without  the  preposition.  Thus,  they  could  say  as 
well :   Ich  muss  meiner  Naherin  schreiben.  —  <  To-the  servant. 

5  Will  you  so  good  be  and  to-me  the  bell  hand?— The  Germans 
could  also  leave  out  und  and  use  the  infinitive,  as  the  English  do: 
Willst  du  so  gut  sein,  mir  die  Glocke  zu  reichen? 

6  Gracious  woman  wish? —  *  To-the  '  trying-on^  may  come. 


294  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

Bringen  Sie  auch  Federn  und  Briefpapier  mit. 

Aber  was  soil  ich  zu  Mittag  maclieii? 

Hat  der  Schlachter^  das  Fleisch  geschickt? 
Ja,  Madam. 

Gut.      Braten    Sie    das    Fleisch    und    noch    ein 
Huhn  dazu! 


Note.  —  Study  the  Possessive  Pronouns, 


11.  Jetzt    muss    ich    meine    Geschafte    be- 
sorgen. 

Johann,  ist  der  Wagen  da? 

Ja,  er  ist  vor  der  Thur. 

Mein  Freund,  du  vergiszt,  ich  brauche  Geld.^ 

Ich  muss  meine  Weihnachts-Einkaufe  machen. 

Wie  viel  brauchst  du? 

Ich  brauche  ungefahr  hundert  und  fiinfzig  Thaler, 

Das  ist  zu   viel.       Du   musst  mit  hundert  aus- 
kommen.^ 

Die  Geschafte*  gehen  jetzt  zu  schlecht. 


NOTES. 

i  Or,  der  Metzger  (mets'-g'r).    Also,  der  Fleischer. 
2  Or,  dass  ich  Geld  brauche. 

8  Or,  zuf  rieden  sein,  to  he  satisfied. 

*  Business,  in  the  sense  of  a  business  =  das  (or  ein)  Geschaft.     In 
the  sense  of  business  in  general,  we  say  die  Geschafte  {plural). 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY. 


295 


Bref'-pa-per'. 


Sm.ech'-VT, 


Bring  (me)  also  some  pens  and 

note  paper. 
But,   what    must   I    make    for 

dinner  ? 
Has  the  butcher  sent  the  meat? 
Yes,  ma'am. 
Very  well.     Roast  it,  and  put 

a  chicken  on  to  broil. ^ 


page  487. 


11.  Y6tst  mobs  ichmV-ne 
gr6-sh6f -te  b6-z6r^-g'n. 


Fer-gist'   ich  hra-db' -khe 
gelt'. 
Vi'-na7^7its'-in'  -ko-i'-f  e. 


OOn'-ge-far'. 
A-oos'-ko'-men. 

Tsoo  shlecht'. 


Now,  I  must  be  off  to 
business.^ 

John,  did  you  order  the  car- 
riage ? 

Yes,  sir ;  it  is  at  the  door. 

My  dear,  you  forgot.  I  need 
money. 

I  must  make  my  purchases 
for  Christmas.* 

How  much  do  you  need  ? 

I  need  about  a  hundred  and 
fifty  dollars. 

That's  too  much.  You  will 
have  to  be  satisfied  with  a 
hundred  to-day.* 

Business  is  bad  just  now.^ 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  And  besides  a  chicken  there-to. 

2  I  must  take  care  of  my  business. 
^  My  Christmas  purchases. 

*  You  must  with  a  liundred  out-come. 

5  The  affairs  (strictly  :  business)  go  now  too  badly. 


296 


DAS    VVETIER    UND    DIE    STADT. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


I.  — Die  Stadt. 


Der  Biirgermeister^  (bwr'-g'r-mis'-t'r), 

Das  Rathaus  (rat'-lia-dos'), 

Das  Museum  (moo-za'-dbm), 

Die  Bibliothek  2  (be-bli-6-tak'). 

Die  Kirche  (kir'-cTie), 

Der  Dom  (dom), 

Eine  Sackgasse  (zak'-ga'-se), 

Ein  Laden,  m., 

Der  Blumenmarkt, 

Am  Ende  der  Strasse, 

Das  Trottoir^  (tro-to-ar'), 

Die  Fahrstrasse ;  Der  (Fahr-)  Damm, 

Das  Pilaster  (pflas'-t'r), 

Der  Asphalt  (as-falt'),* 

Die  Rinne  (ri'-ne), 

Der  Kanal  (ka-nal'), 

Nehmen  Sie  die  erste  Strasse 

rechts, 
Wenden  Sie  sich  nach  links,* 
Gehen  Sie  am  Ufer  entlang,^ 


The  mayor. 

The  city-hall. 

The  museum. 

The  library. 

The  church. 

The  cathedral. 

A  blind  alley. 

A  shop. 

The  flower-market. 

At  the  end  of  the  street. 

The  sidewalk. 

The  roadway. 

The  pavement. 

The  asphaltum. 

The  gutter. 

The  sewer. 

Take  the  first  turning  to 

the  right. 
Turn  to  the  left. 
Keep  along  the  wharf. 


1  In  large  cities  the  mayor  is  called  Oberbiirgermeister. 

2  The    German    word    Biichersamnilung    (bii'-c/i'r-zain'-loon) 

{fern.),  lit. :  books-collection,  or  Biiclierei  (fern.),  is  only  rarely  used. 

*  The  German  Biirgersteig  (bier'-g'r-s/itie/i')  {masc),  lit. :  citizen- 
path,  is  not  frequently  used. —  *  Or,  as'-falt. 

6  Or,  simply,  wenden  Sie  sich  links. —  ^  OO'-f'r  ent-laii'. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  297 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


II. — Wie  litdsst,  u.  s.  w. 


Wie  heisst  church  auf 

deutsch  ?  1 
Es  heisst  Kirche  (Kir'-cTie), 
Wie  wird  das  geschrieben  ?  ^ 

Es  wird  geschrieben 

Wie  wird  das  ausgesprochen  ?  ^ 
W^ie  sagt  man  dafur  auf 

spanisch  ?  * 

Man  sagt  * 

Wiegefalhg?* 

Wie  meinten  Sie  ? 

Ich  habe  Sie  nicht  verstanden, 

Sprechen  Sie  nicht  so  schnell, 

Wie  nennt  man  das  auf 

deutsch  ?  ^ 
Man  nennt  das 


How  do  you  say  church  in 
German  ? 

We  say  Kirche. 

How  do  you  spell  it  ? 

They  spell  it 

How  do  you  pronounce  it? 

What  does  it  mean  in  Span- 
ish? 

It  means 

Beg  pardon  ? 

What  did  you  say  ?  * 

I  did  n't  understand  you. 

Don't  speak  so  fast. 

How  do  you  call  it  in  Ger- 
man? 

That  is  called  t 


1  Observe  the  idiomatic  use  of  the  preposition  auf.  Lit. :  how  do 
you  call  church  upon  German?  How  calls  one  that  upon  German? 
We  could  also  say,  im  Deutschen  (lit. :  in-tlie  German).  —  Adjectives 
of  nationality  are  written  with  a  small  letter,  unless  accompanied  by  the 
article.     Hence  :  auf  deutsch ;  but :  ini  (for  in  dem)  l>eutschen. 

2  Past  participle  of  schreiben.  The  word  buchstabieren  (boofcli'- 
s/tta-be'-r'n),  to  spell,  is  not  used  as  often  as  schreiben. 

3  A-obs'-ge-s^pro'-fc/i'n,  past  participle  of  aussprechen. 

4  Or,  im  Spanischen.     Lit. :  liovv  says  one  therefor  in-the  Spanish 

5  Lit. :  how  (is  it)  agreeable?  i.  e.,  Ijow  does  it  please  to  you? 

*  Lit. :  how  meant  you? —  •••  Man  z'dkht. —  f  One  calls  that. 


298  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  be  learned  by  heart  and  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  conversation, 
whether  for  self-study  or  preparation  for  the  class-room. 

GESPRACHE. 

l.—AUF   DER    STRASSE. 

Entschuldigen  Sie,  mein  Herr,  ich  habe  mich  ver- 
irrt.^  Konnten  Sie  mir  nicht  sagen,  wo  die  Schiller- 
strasse  ist?  —  Nehmen.  Sie  die  dritte  Strasse  rechts, 
dann  die  zweite  links,  bis  Sie  auf  eiiien  grossen 
Platz,  den  Albert-Platz,^  konimen.  Gehen  Sie  schriig^ 
iiber  den  Platz  in  die  Bautznerstrasse.*  Diese  gehen 
Sie  grade  aus  bis  in  die  Schillerstrasse.  —  Ich  fiirchte,^ 
das  werde  ich  nicht  finden.  —  Wenn  Sie  das  fiirchten, 
so  nehmen  Sie  eine  Droschke. 

2.-JiV  DER    DROSCHKE. 

Kutscher,  sind  Sie  nicht  bestellt?  —  Nein,  mein 
Herr.  —  Gut,  dann  nehme  ich  Sie  auf  Zeit.  Sehen 
Sie   auf   Ihre    Uhr.  —  Es   ist   zwanzig    Minuten   iiber 

drei Da   ist   der   Tarif.^ — Lassen   Sie   sehen. 

^^  Preise   fiir  Droschkenfahrten  ^  auf  Zeit :    Bis  zu  20 
Minuten  Zeitdauer^  Jfi  Pfennige ;  von  20  his  SO  Minxden. 


Pronunciation   and  Translations. 

1  I  have  lost  my  way.     Lit.:   T  have  vxysdf  strayed. 

2  Al'-b'rt-plats'.—  8  ShrSc/*.—  4  Ba-oots'-n'r. 

5  I  fear.       «  Ta-ref.  —  ^  Dr6sh'-k»n-f ar'-t'n ;  Lit.:  cab-drivers. 
8  Tsit'-da-do'-'r,  duration  of  time. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  299 

60  PJ. ;  von  30  bis  J^  Minuten,  60  Pf.  ;  von  45  Minuten 
bis  zu  einer  Stunde,  1  Mark  W  PfJ^  —  Wohin  wiinschen 
Sie  zuerst  ?  —  Fahren  Sie  nach  der  Schillerstrasse, 
No.  248. 

3.-ANKUNFT   AM   BESTIMMUNGSORT,*    ETC.f 

Da  sind  wir  schon.  —  Fahren  Sie  naher^  an  das 
Trottoir.     Ich  fiirchte,  ich  trete^  in  den  Rinnstein.^ 

—  Kann  ich  meinen  Regenschirm  und  meinen  tjber- 
zieher  *  im  Wagen  lassen  ?  —  Jawohl,  mein  Herr.  — 
Nun  nach  Hotel  Bellevue.     Fahren  Sie  schnell! 

4:.— DAS   DEUTSCHE. 

Sie  sprechen  deutsch,  nicht  wahr?  —  Ich  spreche  es 
ein  wenig.  —  Ich  bin  iiberzeugt,^  Sie  sprechen  es  sehr 
gut.  —  Ich  versichere  Sie,  nein.^  Ich  will  es  diesen 
Winter  noch  besser  lernen.  —  Finden  Sie  es  schwer? 

—  Ich  finde,  dass  der  Gebrauch'^  des  Artikels  und  der 
Priipositionen  sehr  schwer  ist.  Es  gehort  sehr  viel 
Ubung  dazu.^  A  propos,  Sie  miissen  mir  sagen,  wie 
handkerchief  auf  deutsch  heisst.  —  Taschentuch.^  — 
Wie  gefallig?  —  Taschentuch  heisst  es. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Na'-»r,  comparative  of  nahe  (na'-he),  near. 
'■^  Treten  (trS-fn),  to  step.     Lit. :  I  fear  I  step. —  ^  Gutter-stone. 
4  U'-b'r-tse'-'r,  overcoat.—  ^  U'-b'r-tso-ic/it',  convinced,  sure. 
6  I  assure  you  I  don't. —  ^  Ge-bra-o6fc/«/,  use. 

*  It  requires  mueli  practice.     Lit. :  It  (i.  e.,  There)  belongs  very  much 
practice  thereto.  —  «  Ta'-sh'n-toofe/i'. 

*  Be-s/tti'-niobias-ort',  place  of  destination. —  f  Und  so  weiter. 


300  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  be  translated  and  written  out  into  German,  hut  also  to  he  treated 
orally  in  the  class-room.    (For  Self -Study,  see  Directions,) 

EXERCISES. 

I.  — ABOUT    THE    TIME* 

What  time  is  it  by^  your  watch?  —  I  cannot  tell 
you.  I  have  not  my  watch  with^  me.  Does  not 
yours  go?^  —  No,  it's  stopped.* — Did  you  forget  to 
wind  it?^  —  No.  I  wound  it  last  night.^  I  think 
the  spring  is  broken.^  I  must  take  it  to  a  watch- 
maker. 

2.  — TO    ASK    ONE'S    WAYA 

Beg  pardon.  Which  is  the  way  to  the  Royal 
Library  ?  ^  —  It  is  very  far  from  here.  You  must 
take  a  'bus  or  a  cab.  —  How  long  will  it  take  me 
to  get  there,  with  the  'bus?^  —  You  would  need  an 
hour  at  least.^^  —  That's  too  long.^^  I  see  a  cab 
station  at  the  end  of  the  street.^    I  '11  take  a  cab. 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Auf  (dative).—  2  Bei. 

8  Goes  yours  (Ihre,  or  die  Ihrige,  see  page  488)  not? 

^  Sie  ist  stehen  geblieben  (from  stehen  bleiben,  to  stop). 

"  Sie  aufzuzielien. —  ^  I  have  it  (feminine)  yesterday  evening 
wound-up  (aufgezogen).—  '^  Oesprungen. 

8  Wie  komine  ich  nacli  der  Koniglichen  Bibliothek. 

'■>  Wie  viel  Zeit  werde  ich  mit  dem  Omnibus  brauchen,  um 
dorthin  zu  kommen.  —  10  You  would  at  least  (wenigstens)  an 
hour  need. —  ^^  Zu  lange.  —  12  Am. 

*  Von  der  Zeit.  —  f  Sich  nach  dem  Weg  erkundigen. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  301 

Note. —  Study  the  modal  auxiliaries  Sollen  afid  Diirfen, 
page  506. 


3.  — IN   BERLIN. 

Well,  what  are  your  plans  for  to-day  ?  ^  —  I  am 
going  to-day  to  Kreuz  Mountain.^ — Why,  is  there  ^ 
a  mountain  in  Berlin  ?  —  Certainly.  Are  you  not 
aware*  how  proud ^  the  citizen  of  Berlin  is  of^  his 
Kreuz  Mountain?  It  is  a  very  modest  hill"  only, 
it  is  true ;  but  from  there  one  has  a  very  beautiful 
view^  of^  Berlin.  From  Kreuz  Mountain  rises  ^^  the 
National  *  Monument,  which  Frederic  William  III. 
caused  to  be  erected  ^^  in  commemoration  of  the  War 
of  Independence^'^  of  1813-15. — Well,  can  I  count ^^ 
upon  you  for  to-morrow,  then?  I  am  going  to-mor- 
row to  t  the  Zoological  Garden  with  several  American 
friends,  and  would  like  very  much  to  have  you 
accompany  us.^*  —  I  will,  with  pleasure.^^ 


Note.  —  Study  the  Formation  of  Adjectives,  page  480. 


Aids  to   Translation. 


1  Was  haben  Sie  heute  vor  (from  vorhaben,  to  intend,  to  have 
in  view).—  2  I  will  to-day  to  Kreuz  Mountain  (nach  dem  Kreiiz- 
berg,  kro-its'-berc/i.'  (lit.:   Cross  Mountain),  go.—  ^  Giebt  es  deun. 

4  Know  you  not.—  5  Stolz,  s/itolts.  —  6  Auf,  with  the  accusative. 

7  Eine  sehr  bescheidene  Anhohe  (an'-hu  -e). —  ^  Blick  (masc). 

9  Auf.—  1'^  Auf  dem  Kreuzberg  erliebt  sich. 
11  Errichteu   liess. —  i'^  Zur  Erinnerung  an   die  Befreiungs- 
kriege.—  i^  Reclinen.  —  i^  Dass  Sie   uns  begleiteten  (imperfect 
^iubjunctive  of  begleiten).     Lit.:  that  you  us  may-meet. 
15  That  will  I  willingly. —  *  National  (na-tsi-6-nar).  —  f  In. 


302  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  literal  translation  opposite,  then  with- 

out  it,  in  preparation  for  reading  aloud  and  translating 

in  class. 


«efeftttrf. 

—  ®er  reid)e  .taufmann  9)lu(ler,  tt^elc^er  eine  fcf)ii:)ad)e 
@efunb()eit  fjatte,  tvax  ent)d)Ioffen,  bie  ©eebaber^  aiif  (B\)ii 
auf^ufudjeti.  @r  fdjiffte^  fid)  ba^in  ein,  ^atte  abcr  ba§ 
UngtM,  ba  er  fid)  ^u  melt  iiber  bie  (Sd)iff§n)anb  ^  tjorboi]/ 
iiber  ^orb  ^u  fatten.  3ft  er  in  ber  (See  ober  in  bie  6ee 
gefatlen  ? 

—  „3n  bie  ©ee/'  ii:)erben  ©ie  a(§  grammatifcf)  gebi(= 
beter  :^efer  antmorten. 

—  D(;  nein!  Qn  ber  (See,  benn  e§  ift  ^atit)  (ba 
tief)* 

©erettet,  begab^  er  fic^  nad)  Hamburg.    ®a§ 

$otel  auf  bem  ^ungfernftieg,  ba§  man  i^m  em^fo(;(en^ 
fjatte/  \mv  jebod)  iiberfiillt,  unb  er  mufete  fic^  mit  eincni 
befd^eibenen  gimmerdjen  im  bierten  ©tode  begniigen.  ^cfto 
^errlidjer  ttjar  bie  2In^fic^t.  (Sr  trat  an^  genfter;  ha 
ergriff^  i(;n  ein  ©c^toinbel,  unb  er  ftiir^te  ^inuttter.  3ft  er 
auf  ber  ©trafee  ober  auf  bie  ©tra^e  gefatten? 

—  „2luf  bie  ©trafee/'  meinen  ©ie.f 

—  @efel;tt!  2(uf  ber  ©trage,  benn  e§  n)ar  ber  ^t^eite 
gall. 


1  strictly  :  sea-baths,  —  2  From  sich  einschiffen,  to  embark. 

*  Strictly:  ship-t^a^^. —  •*  From  vorbiegen. 

5  From  sich  begeben.  —  6  From  empfehlen. 
7  Anglice :  whicli  liad  been  recommended  to  him. 

*  From  ergreifen. 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  303 

For  Self-Study ,  should  he  used  by  means  of  the  literal  translation, 
then  without  it,  and  when  thoroughly  understood,  read  ■ 
aloud  in  German. 


READING. 
WHICH     IS     THE     RIGHT     CASE? 

—  The  rich  merchant  Miiller,  who  a  weak  health 
had,  was  decided  (the)  sea-bathing^  at  Sylt  to  seek. 
He  embarked  {himself)  there-to,  but  had  the  misfortune, 
as  he  himself  too  far  over  the  ship's-side  bent-forward, 
overboard  to  fall.  Is  he  in  ^o-the  (der)  (sea),  or  in 
the  (die)  sea  fallen  ? 

— "  In  the  (die)  sea,"  will  you  as  (a)  grammatically 
educated  reader  answer. 

—  Oh,  no !  In  ^o-the  sea,  for  it  is  da  tief  (lit. : 
there  deep)  * 

Saved,  betook  he  himself  to  Hamburg.     The 

hotel  on  (the)  Maiden-lane,  which  one  to-him  recom- 
mended had,^  was  however  overfull,  and  he  had-to 
himself  with  a  modest  little-room  i?i-the  fourth  story 
content.  So-much  the  more  magnificent  was  the  view. 
He  stepped  to-the  window ;  there  seized  him  a  dizziness, 
and  he  was-hurled  (to  the  pavement)  below.  Is  he  on 
^o-the  (street),  or  upon  the  street  fallen?  —  "Upon  the 
{die)  street,"  you  think. — Wrong!  On  ^o-the  [der)  street, 
for  it  was  the  second  fall  (see  note  %). 


*  A  play  on  the  word  Dativ  (pronounced :  da'-tef)  and  the  two 
words  da  tief, 

t  Lit. :  You  mean.     Meinen  =  to  mean,  to  suppose,  to  think,  etc. 

X  Fall,  in  German,  means  either  fall  or  case.  Hence,  der  zweite 
Fall = the  second  fall;  or,  the  second  case  {i.  e.,  the  genitive). 


304  DAS    WETTER    UND    DIE    STADT. 


"^^^f-^^  ^-C^^t^^^e^^^/^  ^^t^-((^f*<^i^j^^'y<?.^^^^^i:^^^^ 


THE    WEATHER    AND    THE    CITY.  305 


r^.yfl€^iciMy  $;  <L^^^^/€n^e^ 


DIRECTIONS. 

Read  and  translate  the  above  letter,  after  which  make  a  copy 
of  it, — then  learn  it  by  heart,  and  in  an  hour  or  two  afterwards 
write  it  out-  again  from  memory.  If  necessary,  see  the  Written 
Alphabet,  etc.,  pages  48  and  49. 

TRANSLATION. 

Acceptance  of  ofTers  of  service  and  order.  —  Your  honored 
(favor)  of  March  29th  is  at  haud.^  We  thank  you  very  much 
for  your  kind  offer  of  services,  and  seize  the  first  opportunity 
to  make  use  of  them.  On  receiving  the  present/  please^  pur- 
chase, on  the  most  favorable  terms  you  can,^  fifty  tons  of  the 
same  article,  and  forward  them  by  usual  route. ^®  Draw  upon 
us  for  the  amount  ^^  at  your  convenience  after  advice.^^ 


1  Acceptance  of  offers  of  service. —  ^  Order. —  3  "While. 

*  Friendly,  kind. —  ^  Lit.;  thank  you  in-thc-best-way  (bestens) ; 
I.e.,  very  much,  exceedingly. —  6  Herewith. 

'  On  (strictly  :  hy)  receipt  of  these  lines.  —  8  To  request,  to  entreat. 

9  In  the  best  way. —  i"  Lit.  :  to  tis  in  the  ordinary  forwarding  way  to 
j)lease  {mu  tvoUen)  to  let  go  (strictly :  proceed,  zugehen).  —  ^  The  whole 
clause  depends  on  the  verb  ersuchcn  Tvir  Sie.    Strictly:    We  entreat 

(or,  request  you),  50  tons to-;nrc}i::zc  and  to-us to-forward 

to-please. —  i^  Ljt.  :  after  advice,  (a-ve')  you  cayi  yourselves,  wlien  you  please, 
at  your  convenience  'kon'-va-nT-ents'^  recover.  Sich  erholen,  to  recover 
one's  self.  —  ■••"  Lit. :  is  in  our  possession  (be-zits'). 


Part  IV. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


Ei:N^KAUrE. 


.o^.. 


SECTION     I. 


1.  AT  THE  TAILOR'S. 

2.  AT  THE  MILLINER'S. 

3.  GOODS  AND  SMALL  ARTICLES. 

4.  IN  A  DRY-GOODS  STORE. 

5.  THE  VOYAGE  UP  THE  RHINE  (I). 

6.  INVITATION  TO  DINNER. 

7.  FORM  OF  ACCEPTANCE. 


307 


IV. 


EINKAUFE. 

Ich  wiirde  Ihnen  sehr  verbuiiden  sein, 
weiin  Sie  heiite  in  die^  Stadt  gelien  iiiid 
einige  Einkaufe  fur  niich  besorgeii^  konn- 
ten.  —  Mit  Vergniigen.  Um  wie  viel  Ulir 
glauben  Sie,^  dass  ich  avisgehen  soUte? 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Ich  v«ir'-d6  e^-nfen  zar  f6r-bobn^-cl'n  zin,  v6n  ze 
h6-i^-t6  in  de  shtaV  ga^-'ii  dont  i^-iii-g"e  in^-kd-i'-fe 
fiir  mich  b6-z6r^-g'ii  kun^-t'n.  —  Mit  fer-g-nu^-g*!!. 
OOm  ve  f el  oor^  g'la-db^-b'n  ze  das  ich  a-obs^- 
g-a'-'n  z6F-te. 


1  In  die  Stadt  (accusative).  In  is  one  of  the  nine  prepositions 
which  govern  sometimes  the  dative  and  sometimes  the  accusative 
case.  As  explained  on  page  268,  they  govern  tlie  dative  when  no 
motion  is  implied ;   and  the  accusative,  when  motion  from  one  place 

308 


IV. 


THE     PURCHASES. 

I  would  be  very  much  obliged  to  you, 
if  you  would  go  into  the  city  to-day  and 
make^  some  purchases  for  me.  —  With 
pleasure.  At  what  hour  do  you  think*  I 
sliould  go? 

LITERAL    TRANSLATION. 

I  should  to-you  much  obliged  be,  if  you  to-day 
into  the  city  go  and  some  purchases  for  me  pro- 
cure could.  —  With  pleasure.  At  what  o'clock  think 
you  that  I  out-go  should  ? 


to  the  other  is  implied.     In  the  present  sentence,  of  course,  in  governs 
the  accusative. 

"  Besorgen.     Lit. :  to  care  for,  to  procure. 

3  Familiarly:  glaubst  du? 


310  EINKAUFE. 

.1. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Ich  wiirde  Ihnen  sehr  verbunden  sein.^ 

Ich  bin  Ihnen  sehr  verbunden. 

Wollen    Sie    inir  den    Gefallen   thun   und   diesen 
Brief  fiir  mich  abschreiben?^ 

Das  thut  mir  sehr  leid,  aber  ich   kann  es  wirk- 

Hch  nicht. 
Ich  habe  keine  Zeit. 
Ich    muss    unbedingt    noch     heute     zu     meinem 

Schneider  gehen. 
Ich  muss  ihm  150  Mark^  bezahlen,  die*  ich  ihm 

schulde. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Adverbs, 


2.  Herr  Klein,  ich  komme,  um  Ihnen  meine 
Rechnung  zu  bezahlen. 

Wie  hoch  belauft  sich  dieselbe?^ 


NOTES. 

1  Or,  ich  ware  Ihnen  sehr  verbunden.  Lit. :  /  were  to,  etc. 
The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  often  used  thus,  instead  of  the  first 
conditional. —  2  Abschreiben;  imperfect:  schrieb  ab;  past  parti- 
ciple :  abgeschrieben. 

8  Fortheundeclined  form  of  Mark,  see  page  59,  note  *. 

<  Die  =  welche.  The  relative  pronoun  [that  or  ivhich)  cannot  be 
omitted  in  German. —  6  Or,  -wie  viel  betragt  dieselbe? 


THE    PURCHASES. 


311 


I. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  Ich  v//r^-cle   e^-iien  zar 
f6r-bd6ii^-d'ii  zin. 


Vo'-l'n  ze  mer  dan  ge-fa'- 
I'n  toon  oont  de'-zen  bref 
fur  mioh  ap'-shri'-b'n. 

Das  toot  mer  zar  lit'. 


Ki'-ne  tsit'. 
Obn'-be-dint'. 


Be-tsa'-l'n     de     ich     em 
sh(561'-de. 


I   should    be  very  (much), 
oblig^ed  to  you. 

I  am  very  (much)  obliged  to 

you. 
Will  you  do  me  the  favor  to 

copy  this  letter  for  nie?^ 

I    am    very  sorry,   but    I    can 
really  not  (do)  it.^ 

I  have  no  tune. 

I  must  positively  call  at  my 
tailor's  to-day,* 

I  must  pay  him  150  marks  I 
owe  him.* 


pages  528  and  529. 


2.  H6r  klin,  ich  k6^-m6 
cmni  e^-n^n  mF-n6  r^c^''- 
iiobii  tsdb  b^-tsa^-l'n. 

Be-16-ift'. 


Mr.  Klein,  I  have  come  to 
settle  my  account  with 
you.s 

What  is  the  amount?® 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Will  you  to-me  the  favor  do  and  this  letter  for  me  copy  (lit. :  off- 
write). 

2  That  does  to-me  miich  pain  {or  affliction). 

3  I  must  positively  (lit. :  unconditionally)  still  to-day  to  my  tailor 
go. —  *  Which  I  to-him  owe.     Also,  die  ich  ihm  schuldig  bin. 

6  I  come  in  order  to-you  my  bill  to  i)ay. 
6  How  highly  amounts  the  same? 


312  DIE    EINKAUFE. 

Hier  ist  die  Rechnung.     Es  macht  180  Mark. 

Wie?     Das  ist  nicht  moglich. 

Das  muss  ein  Irrtum  sein. 

Ich  glaube,  dass  Sie  sich  irren.^ 

Ich  schulde  Ihnen  nur  150  Mark. 

Ich  kann  mich  irren,  aber  ich  glaube  kaum. 


Note. — Remember  that  many  German  reflexive  verbs  are 
sicli  erinnern,  to  recollect,  to  remember ;  sich  irren,  to  be 


Erinnern  Sie  sich  deiin*  nicht,  dass  ich 
Ihnen  vor  zwei  Monaten  250  Marlt 
hezahlt  hahe? 

Sehen  Sie  doch  in  Ihrem  Hauptbuch  nach. 

Sie  haben  recht;   ich  erinnere  mich  dessen^  sehr 

wohl. 
Mein  Buchhalter  muss  den  Irrtum   beim^  tJber- 

tragen*   gemacht   haben.     Das   thut   mir  unge- 

mein    leid,   und   ich   bitte  Sie  tausendmal   um 

Entschuldigung. 

Nehmen  Sie  es  nicht  libell 


NOTES. 

1  Or,  Ich  glaube,  Sie  irren  sich,  without  dass.    See  p.  136,  n.  1. 

2  Dessen,  genitive  of  das.  Observe  that  der,  die,  das,  when  used 
as  a  demonstrative  pronoun  {i.  e.,  meaning  this  or  (hnf),  lias  in  tlie 
genitive  singuLar  the  long  forms  dessen,  deren,  dessen,  instead  of 
des,  der,  des.  Likewise,  in  the  plural,  the  genitive  {of  these,  or  of 
those)  is  deren  instead  of  der. 

8  Beim,  am,  are  contractions  of  bei  dem,  an  dem.     See  page  530. 

*  Lit.:  by  the  carrying-over.  ij'bevtraL^en  =  to  carry  over.  Intinitives 
are  thus  frequently  used  as  nouns.  They  are  then  spelled  with  a 
capital. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


313 


In  ir'-toom. 


Das  ze  zlch  i'-ren. 
Sliool'de. 

Ich  gla-do'-be  ka-oom'. 


Here  is   the  bill.     It  is^  180 

marks. 
What !     That  cannot  be.^ 
There  must  be  a  mistake. 
I  think  you  are  mistaken.^ 
I  only  owe  you  150  marks. 
I    may   be    mistaken,*    but    I 

hardly  think  so. 


not  reflexive  in  English.    Thus  :  sich  belaiif  en,  to  amount ; 
mistaken;   icli  erinnere  mich  nicht,  I  do  not  remember. 


3.  Er-i^-n'rn   ze  zlch  d6n 
jilchV. 

Ha-oop  t  '-boo^Ti'. 


B6o7^7i'-lial'-t'r li'-b'r- 

tra'-g'n dbn'-ge-min' 

lit ta-66'-z'nt-mar. 


U'-b'l. 


I>o  you  not  remember 
that  I  paid  you  250 
marks  two  months  ago  ? 

Just  look  in  your  ledger. 

You  are  right.  I  remember  it 
very  Avell.® 

It 's  a  mistake  my  book-keeper 
must  have  made  in  trans- 
ferring (the  accounts).  I  am 
exceedingly  sorry,  and  hope 
you  will  excuse  me.* 

Please  overlook  it.^ 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  It  makes.  —  Es,  as  in  English,  is  used  in  German  as  the  indefinite 
and  impersonal  subject  of  a  verb,  as:  Es  macht  180  Mark;  Es 
regnet;  Es  ist  mein  Bruder  (It  is  my  brother);  Es  freut  inicli 
sehr;  etc.,  etc. 

2  That  is  not  possible.  —  ^  x  believe  that  you  {i.  e.,  yourself)  err. 
*  I  can  err  me  {i.  e.,  myself). 

6  I  remind  me  {i.  e.,  myself)  of  that  very  well. 

^  I  ask  you  thousand  times  for  pardon. 

^  Take  ye  it  not  ill. 

*"  Denn  makes  the  question  more  polite. 


314  EINKAUFE. 

Durchaus  nicht.     Hier  siiid  150  Mark. 

WoUen  Sie  so  freundlich  sein,  mir  eiue  Quittung 

zu  geben? 
Gewiss.     Darf  ich  bitten? 

Und    nun    mochte    ich    mir    einen    neuen   Rock 
machen  lassen. 


Bis  wann  soil  der  Rock  fertig  sein? 

Ich  brauche  ihn  *  nachsten  Freitag. 

Ich  gehe  am  Freitag  in  Gesellschaft. 

Aber    ich    rechne    sicher    darauf,   dass    der  Rock 

passt. 
Sie  konnen  sich  darauf  verlassen.^ 
Hat  der  letzte  nicht  gut  gepasst? 
O  ja,  mit  Ausnahme  der  Armel. 

Was  fehlte^  denn  den  Armeln? 

Sie  waren  ein  wenig  zu  kurz. 

Gut.      Dann   werde    ich    sie    diesmal    ein    wenig 

langer  machen. 
Und  wann  kann  ich  zum  Anprobieren^  kommen? 

Bitte  kommen  Sie  Mittwoch  abend 


NOTES. 

1  Verlassen  =  <o  leave^  to  forsake.  Sich  verlassen  =  io  rely,  to  de- 
pend upon. 

2  Remember  the  phrase:  Was  fehlt  Ihnen?  What  is  the  matter 
with  yoiif —  3  See  note  4,  on  preceding  page. 

*  As  a  general  rnle,  the  pronoun  of  tlie  third  person  singular  agrees 
in  gender  with  the  noun  it  relates  to.  Thus:  referring  to  a  coat 
(which  is  masculine),  It  is  ready —  '^v  {not  es)  i^t  fertig;  I  need  it^Xoh 
brauche  ihn  (lit. :  him). 


THE    PURCHASES. 


315 


DobrcTi'-a-oos'. 
Kvi'-td6nT 


Certainly.^  Here  are  150  marks. 
Will  you  have  the  kindness  to 
give  me  a  receipt  ? 

Here  it  is,  sir.^ 

Now,  I  'd  like  to  have  a  (new) 
coat  made. 


4.   Bis   van^   z61   d^r   r6k 
fer^-tic^  zin? 

Bra-ob'-khe n§iCh'- 

sten.  ^ 
Ge-zel'-shaft. 
Past. 


Mit  a-oos'-na'-me 
er'-m'l.^ 
Fal'-te  den  dan. 

Tsoo  koorts'. 

In  va'-nic7t  leii'-'r. 

An'-pro-be'-r'n. 


When  must  you  have  it  ?  ^ 

I  must  have  it  for  next  Friday. 

I  go  to  a  party  on  Friday.* 
Be  sure  to  have  the  coat  fit.* 

You  can  depend  on  it. 

Did  not  the  last  one  fit  you  ? 

Yes,  excepting  the  sleeves.* 

What  did  they  lack? ^ 
They  were  a  little  too  short.  * 
Very  well.     I  '11  make  these  a 
little  longer. 

And  when  shall  I  come  to  try 

it  on  ?  8 
Please  come  on  W'day  ev'ng. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Absolutely  not.  —  2  Certainly.  May  I  ask  {understood :  you  to  take 
the  receipt). —  This  manner  of  speaking  is  quite  frequent,  either  in 
presenting  anything,  or  making  any  request  or  polite  remark. 

3  Till  when  shall  the  coat  ready  be?—  *  In  society. 

s  But  I  count  surely  on-it  that  the  coat  fits. 

6  With  the  exception  of  the  sleeves.  —  ^  What  lacked  then,  etc. 
Den  Armeln,  dative  plural  of  Armel,  (ra.). 

8  And  when  can  I  to-the  trying-on  come? 


316  EINKAUFE. 

Nun,  wie  gefallt  Ihnen  der  Anzug? 
Sitzt  er  nicht  aufs  beste?^ 

Ich  muss  gestehen,  er  sitzt  wirklich  ausgezeichnet. 

Diesmal  bin  ich  vollstandig  damit  zufrieden. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Strong  Verbs, 


5.   Siehe   da,'    Frau  Fischer!      Womit  kann 
ich  Ihnen  dienen? 

Ich  mochte  gern  einen  Hut  haben. 

Und    was    fiir    einen    wiinschen    Sie?    (wenn    ich 

bitten  darf?) 
Einen  hohen,  mit  Band  garniert. 

Hier  ist  ein  sehr  hiibscher. 

1st  der  Hut  nicht  aus  der  Mode? 

Im  Gegenteil;   dasf  ist  die  neueste  Mode. 


NOTES. 

1  Observe  that  the  Germans  use  two  forms  of  the  superlative  in 
forming  adverbial  expressions.  The  one,  preceded  by  am  (abbrevia- 
tion for  an  detn),  is  used  in  a  Comparative  sense.  Thus :  am 
besten  =  #lie  best  {way  or  thing ;  i.  e.,  better  than  all  others).  The  other, 
used  in  tlie  sentence  above,  is  preceded  by  aufs  (for  auf  das),  and 
is  used  in  an  absolute  sense.  Thus:  aufs  beste  (lit.:  on  the  best) 
—  most  good,  or  excellent,  without  any  idea  of  comparison.  N.  B.  — The 
'absolute  superlative'  is  also  often  expressed  simply  by  the  termi- 
iiMtion  St.  Thus:  Gefalligsf,  most  obligingly;  gutigsf,  most  kindly; 
freundlichsf,  vwst  friendly. 


THE    PUKCHASES. 


317 


An'-tsooA;7i'. 

Zitst  ....  a-o6fs  bes'-te. 

Ge-s7ita'-'n. 

Fol'-sTiten'-dicTi tsoo- 

fre'-d'n. 


Well,  how  do  you  like  the  suit? 

Does  it  not  fit  (most)  ^  splen- 
didly? 

I  must  admit  it  fits  me  very 
well  indeed.''^ 

This  time  I  am  perfectly  satis- 
fied with  it. 


Class  IV.,  page  517. 


5.  Ze^-6  da%  fra^db  fV- 
sh*r;  vo-mit^  k^ii  ich  e^- 
n6n  de^-nen? 

Hoot. 


Ho'-'n  mit  bant  gar-nert' 


A-oos'  d'r  rno'-de. 

Im  ga'-g'n-tir no-i' 

'ste.  "" 


There  is  Mrs.  Fisher; 
what  are  your  com- 
niaiids  ?  ^ 

I  would  like  (to  have)  a  bonnet. 
How  would  you  desire  it?* 

I  want  it  high,  and  trimmed 

with  ribbons.^ 
Here  is  a  very  pretty  (one). 
Is  n't  it  out  of  fashion  ?  * 
On  the  contrary,  it 's  the  latest 

style  out  ? ' 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Sits  it  (lit. :  he,  because  it  is  der  Anzug,  see  page  314,  note  *)  not 
on  the  best? 

2  He  sits  really  excellently. 

3  See  there,  Mrs.  Fisher!     Wherewith  can  I  to-you  serve? 

4  And  what  kind  (strictly  :  what  for  (a)  one)  wish  you? 

5  A  high  (one)  with  ribbon  trimmed. 

6  Out  of  the  fashion. 

7  That  is  the  newest  fasliion. 
*  See  page  197,  note  1. 

t  For  the  use  of  the  neuter  das,  see  page  236,  note  4. 


318  EINKAUFE. 

Wie  steht^  mir  der  Hut? 

Er  steht  Ihnen  wirklich  sehr  gut. 

Und  was  kostet  dieser  Hut? 

Er  kostet  75  Mark. 

1st  das  der  genaueste  Preis? 

Ja.     Ich  kann   iliii  Ihnen  wirklich   nicht  billigei 

lassen. 
Nun,  dann   will    ich   einen   andern  wiihlen,  denu 

so  viel  mag  ich  nicht  bezahlen. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Strong  Verbs,  Class  V., 


6.  Bitte  zeigen  Sie  mir  einen  Strohliut! 

Was  kostet  dieser? 

Der  kostet  nur  45  Mark. 

Auch  das  ist  mir  noch  zu  teuer. 

Nun,  weil  Sie  es  sind,  sollen  Sie  ihn  fiir  40  Mark 

haben. 
Gut,  dann  will  ich  ihn  nehmen. 
Bitte  scliicken  Sie  den  Hut  in  meine  Wohnung. 
Sie  wohnen  noch  in  der  Luisenstrasse? 

Ach  nein,  ich  bin  am  1.  Mai  umgezogen.^ 
Hier  ist  meine  neue  Adresse. 


NOTES. 

1  Stehen,  lit. :  to  stand,  is  used  also  in  the  sense  of  to  become,  to  he 
becoming,  as  applied  to  dress.  Likewise,  we  have  seen  that  passeii 
and  ^itzen  (lit. :  to  .^it),  are  used  with  the  meaning  of  to  fit. 

2  Umgezogen,  past  participle  umziehen,  to  move  round,  to  draw 
round;  a  strong  verb. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


319 


s^itat' 


DSr  ge-na-d6'-'ste  pris. 
Bi'-li-g'r  la'-s'n. 

I'-nen  an'-d'rn  va'-l'n. 


How  does  it  become  me  ?  ^ 

It  becomes  you   very  well  in- 

deed.a 
And  what  is  the  price  of  this 

hat? 
75  marks. 

Is  that  the  lowest? * 
Yes.     I  can't  let  you  have  it 

(any)  cheaper.'* 

Well,  then,  I  '11  select  another, 
for  I  am  not  willing  to  pay 
so  much. 


page  517. 


6.  Bi''-t6   tsr-g'n    ze    mer 
i^-n6n  sMro^-hoot', 


Vil  ze'  es  zint. 


^n  dar  loo-e'-z'n-s7itra'-se. 

c50m'-ge-tso'-g'n. 
A-dre'  -se. 


Please  show  me  a  straw 
hat. 

What  is  the  price  of  that  one  ? 
It  costs  only  45  marks. 
Even  that  is  too  much  (for  me). 
Well,  as  it  is  you,  I'll  let  you 

have  it  for  40  marks.^ 
In  that  case,  I  '11  take  it. 
Please  send  the  hat  to  my  house. 
You    still     reside     in    Louisa 

Street  ?« 
No,  I  moved  on  the  first  of  May.' 
Here  is  my  new  address. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  How  stands  to  me  the  hat? —  2  jj^,  becomes.     See  [)age  314. 
8  The  most  exact  price ?^ —  ■*  I  can  him  to-yon  really  not,  etc.    See 
page  314.  —  ^  Xosv  because  you  it  are,  shall  you  it  for  40  marks  have, 
«  You  live  still  in  tlie  Louisa  Street? 
7  I  have  (strictly  :  am)  moved.    See  page  106,  note  1, 


320 


EINKAUFE. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart 


VOKABELN. 


1.  —  Stoflfe,*  m. 


Das  Tuch  {tooJcTi), 

Die  Wolle  (v6'-le), 

Der  Musselin  (moo-se-len'), 

Das  Leinwand  (lin'-vanf), 

Die  Baumwolle  (ba-d5m'-v6'-le), 

Der  Atlas  (at'-las), 

Die  Seide  (zi'-de), 

Der  Moire  ^  (mo-a-ra'), 

Der  Pliisch  (plwsh.), 

Die  Stickerei  (s7iti'-ke-ri'), 

Der  Kattun  (ka-toon'), 

Der  Barchent  (bar'-cTient), 

Das  Futter  (foo'-t'r), 

Der  Einsatz  (in'-zats'), 

Die  Vorhange  ^  (for'-tiefi'-e),  m., 


Cloth. 

Wool. 

Muslin. 

Linen. 

Cotton  cloth. 

Satin. 

Silk. 

Watered  silk. 

Plush. 

Embroidery. 

Printed  calico. 

Ticking,  drill. 

Lining. 

Insertion. 

Curtains. 


Zu  herabgesetzten  Preisen*  verkaufen,  To  sell  at  reduced  prices. 
Zum  Kostenpreis  *  verkaufen,  To  sell  at  cost. 

Versteigern  ^  (fer-sTiti'-g'rn),  To  sell  at  auction. 

Mit  Verlust  verkaufen  (fer-ldbsf),       To  sell  with  loss. 
Aus  zweiter  Hand  kaufen,  To  buy  second-hand. 


1  Or,  das  Moir6. 

2  Or,  die  Gardinen  (gar-de'-nSn),  /. 
8  HSr-ap'-gS-zSts'-t'n  pri'-z'n. 

4  Kos'-t'n-prls  . 

6  Or,  verauktioniereii  (fgr-a-dok-tsi-o-ne'-r*!!). 

*  Or,  Zeuge  (ts6-i'-g8),  stuffs,  ^  ^ 


THE    PURCHASES. 


321 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


2.  —  Weibliche  Arbeiteii.* 


Stricken  (s?itri'-k'n), 

Das  Kniiuel  (kno-i'-'l), 

Das  Nadelkissen  (na'-d'l-ki'-s'n), 

Das  Strickzeug  (s7itrik'-ts6-ic7i'), 

Die  Stricknadel, 

Die  Masche  (ma'-slie), 

Stopfen  (s7it6'-pf  n), 

Die  Stopfnadel, 

Die  Naht  (nat), 

Niihen  (ngl  -'n), 

Die  Naherei  (nei-e-ri'),^ 

Die  Niilimaschine  (na'-ma-she'-ne), 

Die  Niiherin  (nil'-e-rin), 

Die  Nahnadel, 

Die  Stecknadel  (sTitek'-na'-d'l), 

Das  Ohr  (^r),  « 

Der  Faden  (fa'-d'n), 


To  knit. 

The  ball. 

The  pin-cushion. 

The  knitting. 

The  knitting-needle. 

The  mesh. 

To  darn. 

The  darning-needle. 

The  seam. 

To  sew. 

Needle-work. 

The  sewing-machine. 

The  seamstress. 

The  needle. 

The  pin. 

The  eye  (of  the  needle). 

The  thread. 


Einfadeln  (in'-f^'-dln), 
Der  Fingerhut  (fin'-'r-h.oot'), 
Die  Schere  (sha'-re), 
Stick  en  (sTiti'-k'n), 


To  thread  (a  needle). 
The  thimble. 
The  scissors. 
To  embroider. 


1  Or,  Naharbeit  (iia'-ar'-bit),  Handarbeit. 
■-=•  Vip'-li-f/te  ar'-bi-t'ii,  needle-work. 


322  EINKAUFE. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  recited  as  a  conversation,  whether  for 

Self-Study  or  preparation  for  the  class-room.     (See 

Directions  before  Part  I,) 

GESPRACH. 

IM  MODEWARENGESCHAFT* 

Guten  Morgen,  gnadige  Frau.  Worn  it  konnte  ich 
Ihnen  dienen  ?  —  Ich  brauche  lieute  nichts.  Aber 
ich  bringe  Ihnen  eine  neue  Kundin.^  —  Das  ist  sehr 
liebenswiirdig^  von  Ihnen.^  Und  was  wiinschen 
gnadige  Frau?  —  Ich  mochte  gern  etwas  Pliisch 
haben.  Dieser  gefallt  mir  nicht.  Ich  brauche  etwas 
Besseres.f  —  Dann  wird  Ihnen  diese  Sorte  gewiss 
gefallen.  —  Und  was  kostet  der?*  —  Zwei  Mark  der 
Meter .^ — Das  ist  fiirchterlich  teuer.  —  Wie  viel  brau- 
chen  Sie  denn?  —  Fimfzig   Meter.  —  Nun,  dann   will 

ich  Ihnen  den  Meter  zu  1   Mark  75^  lassen 

Aber  es  ist  nicht  hell  genug.     Gretchen,  ziinden  Sie 
das  Gas  anJ     Wir  konnfen  nicht  mehr  sehen. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Koon'-din,  female  customer,  from  der  Kunde,  male  customer. 

'^  Le'-b'ns-vier'-dic/i,  kind.  —  »  In  you. 

^  Dar',  used  as  demonstrative  ;  understood  Plusch. 

6  Ma'-t'r,  meter.  —  6  Supply :  Pfennige. 

7  From  Anziinden  (an'-tsi/n'-d'n),  to  light. 
*  Mo'-de-va  -r'n-ge-shgft',  dry-goods  store. 

t  An  adjective  following  etwas  and  nichts  is  used  substantively, 
and  therefore  written  with  a  capital.     Hence,  fesseres,  not  6esseres. 


THE    PURCHASES.  323 

To  he  translated  and  written  into  German;  hut  also  to  he  recited 

orally  in  the  class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see 

Directions,  before  Part  I.) 

EXERCISES. 

I. -IN   A    DRY-GOODS    STORE. 

What  do  you  wish,  madam?  —  T  would  like  to  see 
some  plush.  —  This  way,  please.^  —  Have  you  any- 
thing darker?^  —  Certainly,  madam.  Here  is  some- 
thing darker.^  —  I  like  that  better.*  What  is  the  price 
of  it?  — (That  is)  20  marks  a^  yard.  — I  think  this 
is  too  dear.     Can  you  not  let  me  have  it  for  less?^ 

—  No,  madam.     I  cannot  let  you  have  it  any  cheaper. 
It 's  the  very  lowest.^     We  cannot  sell  with  loss. 

Q.- ABOUT   A     CLOCK.* 

Did  you  see  the  clock  Mr.  Marston  bought  this 
morning? — Where  did  he  buy  it?  —  He  bought  it 
second-hand,  in  a  store  on  the  Konigs  Platz.  —  How 
much  did  he  pay  for  it?  —  (One)  hundred  marks. — 
But  is  it  a  good  one?^  —  Yes,  it  keeps  good  time.^ 

—  Well,  I  never  could  ^^  buy  anything  second-hand. 


Aids   to  Translation. 

1  Hier,  wenn  es  Ihnen  gef allig  ist.  —  2  Etwas  Dunkleres. 

8  Ein  dunklerer.  —  4  That  pleases  (gefallt)  to-me  better. 

5  Tlie  (die). —  ^  Konnen  Sie  mir's  nicht  billiger  geben?  — 
Mir's,  abbrev.  for  mir  es.  Frequent.  — 5"  Das  ist  der  genauestePreis. 
Also  :  ausserste,  or,  billigste.  —  8  Is  it  (sie)  good  ?  —  9  Sie  geht  sehr 
gut  (strictly  :  goes  very  well).  —  10 1  could  never.  —  *-  Wandulir  (vanf* 
oor'),  /;  or,  simply,  Uhr.    Also,  Regulator,  ra-gdo-la'-tor,  masc. 


324  EINKAUFE. 

To  he  reaa  oy  means  o,   the  notes,  in  preparation  for  translating  and 

reading  aloud  in  class.     For  Self-Study,  to  be  translated,  and 

when  thoroughly  understood,  read  aloud  in  German. 

—  2Bie  fro(;  bin  ic^,  ha^  tvxx  enblid)  mtf  bem  ^oot  ftnb. 
2)ie  33efid)tigung  ^  be^  ®om§  unb  all  ber  ©e(;en»it)iirbig- 
feiten^  t)on  Sloln  mad)t  einen^  fo  miibe,  bafe  e»  \t)ir!Iid) 
eine  ©rfrifrfmng*  ift,  ben  di^dn  ^tnaiif5ufa(;rert  unb  bie 
(;crr(ic^en  Sanb)d;aft§bUber  ^  gemdc^lid;^  an  fic^  Doriiber^ 
gteiten"  gu  (affen. 

—  ©ie  (;aben  red)t.  ^d)  freue  mic^  ungemein^  barauf, 
ben  f(i)onen  ©trom^  ^u  fe^cn,  Don  bem  id;  foDiel  gef)drt 
i)aht.  ^iele  Slmerifaner  Ijalten  i^n  fiir  tueit  fd)oner,  a(g 
ben  §nbfon.    Slber  ba§  !ann  id)  bi§  je^t  nocf)  nid)t  fagen. 

—  dhiv  ©ebulb!  ©en  fdjonften  XeiP«  be§  9^I;ein^  f)aben 
tt)ir  nod)  nid)t  gefe^en.  tlbrigen^  fc^eint  e^  mir  iiber= 
Ijaupt  miifeig/^  bie  beiben  gll'iffe^^  mit  einanber^^  ^u  i)er= 
g(eid)en.^^  ©er  §ubfon  ift  o(;nc  g^^^^f^^  ^^^^  grofeartiger/^ 
al0  ber  9i^ein,  aber  er  bietet^^  nid)t  bie  malerifdjcn  ^'  unb 
romantifd)en  2lnfic^ten/^  ioie  fie  am  dlijmi  unfer  Sluge^" 
f orttoal;renb  ^^  ent^iiden,^^  nic^t  bie  blii^enben  2Beinberge,^ 


1  Be-zif?li,'-ti-gdoS,   visiting.  —  2  Za'-'ns-vicr'-dicJi-ki-t'n,  curi- 
osities.—^  One;  'a  body.'  —  *  Lit.:  a  refreshment.    Anglice:  refreshing 

fi  Lit.:  landscape  pictures,  or  views. 

6  Ge-mac/t'-lic/i.,  slowly,  conveniently.  —  ^  Glide  before. 

8  Exceedingly,  uncommonly. —  9  Stream. —  10  Part. 
11  Useless.  —  12  Rivers.  —  i3  One  another.  —  i*  Compare. 
15  More  immense.  —  ^^  Offers.  —  i7  Picturesque. 
18  Views,  sights.  —  i^  Eyes.     Das  Auge,  the  eye. 
20  Licessantly.  —  21  Charm,  delight.  —  22  Blooming  vineyards. 

*  Rin'-ri'-zg.     Lit. :  Rhine-travel.    Also,  Rheinfahrt. 


THE    PURCHASES.  325 

Die  altm  ^urgriiinen^  nnb  mobernen  (Sc^ldffer,  it^etc^e  bie 
Ufcr^  be§  dii)dn§>  fc^mucfen^  uub  iijn  jum  fd)dnften  unb 
intereffanteften  ©trom  ber  2Be(t  mac^en. 

—  3Sa^  ftir  ein  grower  Drt*  (iegt  ta  ^u  unfrer  9f?e(f)ten? 

—  5)a§  tft  ^onn,  etne  ©tabt  bon  iiber  30,000  (£in= 
it)o[)nern,  bie  nainentUd;^  burc^  tf)re  Umt)erfitat  berii^mt^ 
ift,  iiK(d)e  ^u  ben  beftcu  unb  6efnd)teften  2)eutfd)Ianb§ 
i^,d)'6vt.  ^^rinj  3l(6ert,  ber  ©ema^l  ber  ^onigin  t)on  (^ng= 
ianb,  (;at  (;ier  ftubiert.  ^ie  ©tabt  befi^t^  and;  eine  fd)5ne 
Statue  33eet^ot)en§,  ber  ^u  "^onn  geboren  'max. 

—  2l(;!  ge^t  fcingt^  bie  Sanbfd)aft  an  fc^oner  gu 
iDerben. 

—  3^/  wii^  ^i^  tt)erben  gleic^  ba§  ©iebengebirge^  fe(;en. 
^itte  nebmen  ©ie  inein  @(a^3.^^    (Seben  ©ie  bie  33erge?^^ 

—  ©e(;r  gut.  2luf  bent  einen  fe(;e  id;  aud;  eine  ntalerifc^e 
S^iuine. 

—  ® a§  ift  ber  ®rad)enf e(g/^  p)av  ^^  ber  niebrigfte/*  aber 
bei  ^t)eiten;^^  befud)tefte  ^^  Don  't)m  fieben  Bergen.  6d)on 
e^e  if;n  £orb  ^tjron  befungen  f)atte  a(§  "  The  castled  crag 
of  Drachenfels/'  VDar  fein  ©i^fel^^  einer  ber  befud^teften 
^unfte  am  9il;ein,  'i)a  er  eine  unbefc^reibUd;  ^^  fd)dne  2(u§= 
fid;t  bietet.  §ier  folP^  and)  ©iegfrieb,  ber  ^c(b^  ber 
9^ibeUingen,2i  ben  ^radjen  befam^ft  ^  unb  erfc^lagen  ^  (;aben. 


1  Ruins.     Lit. :  castle-ruins.  —  2  Shore.  —  ^  Adorn.  —  *  Place. 

5  Especially.  —  «  Celebrated.  —  ^  Possesses.  —  8  From  anfangen. 

9  Seven  mountains.      The  neuter  singular  das  Gebirge  is  used, 
because  these  mountains  form  a  single  group. 

1*^  Field-glass.—  n  Der  Berg,  mountain.     Plural:  Berge. 

12  Drachenfels,  name  of  one  of  the  seven  mountains.    Lit.:  Dragon- 
rock. —  13  Indeed. —  i'*  Ne'-drie/i-ste,  lowest. —  ^^  By  f^., 

16  Most  visited. —  i^  Summit. —  i^  Indescribably. 

19  Lit.:  Here  f^hall  also  Siegfried.     Anglice :  Here  Siegfried  is  said,  etc. 

^0  Hero.—  21  Die  Nibelungen.     "The  Dwarfs,"  a  famous  German 
legend.— 22  Fought.-  23  Slain. 


326  DIE    EINKAUFE. 

—  SSeld;  prad;tl^oI(c§  ^i(b !  ^  ^ie  ^erge  unb  gelfen^ 
init  limn  ina(enfd;en  9^uiiien,  bie  jaBUofen^  ©dnffe  auf 
bciu  6trom,  bie  Ueblid;en*  Drte  an  ben  Uferii,  bie  griinen 
3nfe(n/  ha^^  ift  ein  entjiidenbe^  ^  panorama/ 

—  ^a,  e§  ift  iDirfUd;  nad)  meiner  2(nfid;t  ber  fc()onfte 
^eil  be§  9^(;eine§. 

—  Unb  mie  (;ei6t  bie  reijenbe^  3nfel  ^ier  ^u  unfere  Sinfen? 

—  ^a§  ift  9]onnenmert.^  ^a§  ftattlidje  ©ebdubc  auf 
ber  Snfel  ift  ein  grauenftofter.^^  §ier  ijat  ber  Sage 
md)^^  §i(begunb  iwn  ^rad)enfelg,  bie  ©eliebte^^  9^o(anb§, 
beg  ^alabing  Raxl§>  be^  ©rofeen,  ber  ini  2:t;al  t»on  3tonce»= 
t)alle§  fiel/^  ben  ©c^leier^*  genommen,  ai§>  fie  ben  ^elben= 
tob  1°  beg  ©eliebten  erfatjren.^^    2l6er  ^olanb  fe^rt  i)cun :  i' 

„Unb  begrabt^^  bag  ^lofter  fd)on  ^ilbegunb, 
©0  fe^  id;  mid)  ^ier  auf  ben  ©tein 
Unb  fd)aue  ^eitlebeng/^  junt  3::obe  njunb,^ 
^inab^i  auf  ha§>  ^lofter  am  9^^ein." 
(5ef)en  ©ie  ^ier  ^ur  9?ed)ten  bie  ^uine  'oon  Sftolanbged,^^ 
ber  )oon  9^o(anb   erbaiiten  33urg!23   ^on  bem  fogenannten 
Dblanbgbogen^  genie^t^  man   eine   it>unbert?ol(e   2lugfid;l 
auf  hm  dti^^in. 


1  Picture. —  ^  Felsen  {masculine),  rocks, 
8  Tsal'-lo'-z'n,  numberless,  innumerable.  —  *  Lovely. 
5  Iii'-z'ln,  islands. —  6  Charming. —  ^  View. —  ^  Charming. 
8  No'-nen-vart'. —  w  Convent.     Lit.:  women's  cloister. 
11  Lit. :  here  to-the  saying  (i.  e.,  story)  according.     Anglice:  Here  as  the 
story  goes. —  '*  Sweetheart.' —  13  Imperfect  of  fallen. 
14  Shli'-'r,  veil.  —  is  Heroic-death. 
16  Learned. —  iT'  Heimkehren,  to  return  home. 
18  And  does  the  cloister  bury  beautiful   Hildegund !  —  Should   be 
die  schOne.     But  poetical  license  allows  the  use  of  the  undeclined 
form  schon. —  19  Lit.:  look  during  life.     Anglice:  My  life  long, 
20  Sore,  wounded.—  21  Down. 
22  Lit. :  Roland's  Ci)nier.  —  23  Cnstle,  or  fort. 
24  Roland's  arch. —  '^^  Geniessen,  to  enjoy. 


THE    PURCHASES.  327 

DIRECTIONS.  —  Translate  and  copy  off  these  notes,  then  learn 
them  by  heart,  and  some  time  afterward  write  them  from 
memory.  For  models  of  German  letters,  consult  pages  48  and 
49,  if  necessary. 


1  Invitation  to  dinner.  —  Mr.  and  Mrs.  A.  have  (lit. :  give  themselves 
the  honor)  the  honor  to  invite  Mr.  and  Mrs.  D,  to  dinner  for  next 
Tuesday,  7th  inst.  (lit. :  the  7th  of  this)  (at)  one  o'clock  in  the  after- 
noon.—  2  j^it. :  of-afternoon.  —  ^  Einladen,  to  invite.  —  ■*  Acceptance. 

5  Send  their  very  best  thanks  (lit.  :  thank  most  obligingly). 

6  And  will  ])e  happy  to  accept  it  (lit. :  and  will  to-the  saine  continuance 
give). —  *  Or:  Mittagsessen. 


Part  IV. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


Ei:N^KAUrE. 


•o^o*« 


SECTION     II. 


1. 

MAILING  LETTERS,  etc. 

2. 

IN  A  DRY- GOODS  STORE. 

3. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

4. 

VOCABULARY:  THE  BODY. 

5. 

VISIT  OF  THE  TAILOR. 

6. 

AT  THE  HABERDASHER'S. 

7. 

ON  THE  RHINE  (II). 

8. 

INVITATION  TO  A  PARTY. 

88» 


330  ElNKiVUFK 


II. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Wenii  Sie  heute  eiiiige  Einkaufe  fiir  mich 
besorgeii  konnten,^  — 

(So)^  wiirden  Sie  mich  sehr  verbinden. 

Das  thut  mir  sehr  leid,  aber  ich  habe  wirklich 
keine  Zeit. 

Wollte  ich  fiir  Sie  ausgehen,*  so  ^  konnte  ^  ich  die 
Briefe  nicht  schreiben,  die  heute  noch  abgehen 
miissen. 

Sind  die  so  wichtig? 

Ja ;  einige  hatte  ich  schon  vor  einer  Wochef  schrei- 
ben sollen.J  Zum  Beispiel,  wenn  ich  meinem 
Oiikel  heute  nicht  schreibe,  (so)^  wird  er  mir 
nicht  zur  rechten  Zeit  Geld  schicken  konnen. 
um  das  Haus  in  der  Marktstrasse  zu  kaufen. 


NOTES. 

1  For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  see  page  340,  Section  II. 

2  When  a  principal  clause  ./o^^ows  a  dependent  clause  it  may  indiffer- 
ently be  introduced  or  not  by  so  if  the  dependent  clause  expresses  a  condi- 
tion. Thus  we  can  say  either:  Wenn  Sie  heute  einige  Einkaufe 
fiir  mich  besorgen  kdnnten,  so  wiirden  Sie,  etc. ;  or:  Wenn  Sie 
heute  einige  Einkaufe  fur  mich  besorgen  konnten,  wiirden 
Sie,  etc. —  Do  not  forget,  however,  that  so  cannot  be  used  if  the  j)riiu>i- 
pal  clause  begins  the  sentence.  Thus,  we  would  say  :  Sie  wiirden 
mich  sehr  verbinden,  wenn  Sie,  etc.;  never:  So,  wiirden  Sie 
mich  sehr  verbinden,  otc.  —For  inversion  (w^iirden  Sie),  see  page 
84,  III.  —  t  Vor  einer  Woche,  a  week  ago.    Strictly  :  Before  of -a  week. 

\  See  page  287,  note  I. 


THE    FURCHASES. 


331 


II. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  V6n  ze  ho-F-t^  i^-ni-gr^ 
in^-ko-i -fe  I'iii*  mich  be- 
z6r^-g^  kun^-t'n,— 

Zo. 


Lit' 


A-d6s'-ga'-'n  . 
.  '.^.  .  stiri'-b'n. 


Vich'-ilGh. 


Markt'-s7itra'-se. 


.  bre'-fe 


If  you  could  make  some 
purchases  for  me  to- 
day,i  — 

You    would    oblige    me    very 

much. 
I  am  very  sorry,  but  I   have 

really  no  time. 

If  I  went  out  for  you  ^'  I  would 
not  be  able  to  write  several 
letters  which  must  go  to-day. 

Are  they  so  important? 

Why,  yes.  Some  (of  them) 
should  have  been  written  a 
week  ago.^  For  instance,  if 
I  do  not  write  to-day  to  my 
uncle  he  will  not  be  able  to 
send  me  money  in  time  to 
buy  that  house  in  Market  St.^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  If  you  to-day  of  some  purchases  for  me  take  care  could. 

2  A-few  had  I  already  before  of  a  week  to-write  ought.    See  p.  287,  n.  1. 

3  Will  he  to-me  the  money  not  to-the  right  time  to-send  be  able. 

*  Instead  of,  Wenn  ich  fiir  Sie  ausgehen  wollte.  In  any  clause 
expressing  a  condition,  the  conjunction  wenn  may  be  omitted.  In 
that  case  the  sentence  assumes  the  interrogative  form,  that  is  to  say, 
the  verb  comes  at  the  very  beginning  of  the  clause.  Thus :  If  I  ivere  to 
go  out  for  you  may  be  rendered  either  by :  Wenn  ich  fiir  Sie  aus- 
gehen wollte,  or,  with  wenn  omitted  by  :  Wollte  ich  fiir  Sie 
ausgehen  (lit.  :  would  I  for  you  go  out).  N.  B.  —  Wlietlier  Avenn  i.- 
omitted  or  not,  it  is  at  the  option  of  the  speaker  to  use  or  not  to  use  so 
with  a  principal  clause  following.    See  note  2,  page  330. 


332  EINKAUFE. 

Das  ist  etwas  anderes.     Aber  warum  telegraphie- 
ren  Sie  ihm  nicht? 

Was   fallt   Ihnen  ein?^     Er   bekommt   da,  wo  er 
wohnt,  einen  Brief  schneller  als  eine  Depesche.^ 

Dann  muss  er  in  einem  sehr  kleinen  Ort  wohnen. 

Allerdings 

Nun,  was  giebt's?* 


2.  Der  Brieftrager  hat  soeben  diese  beideii 
Briefe  fur  Sie  gebracht. 

Geben  Sie  her! 

Hier  sind  sie. 

So.     Nun  bringen  Sie  diese  Briefe  auf  die  Post! 

Soil  ich  sie  freimachen?^ 

Das  versteht  sich.     Und  einen  *  miissen  Sie  ein- 

schreiben  lassen. 
Wohl  den^  nach  New  York. 
Eben^  den.     Hier  haben  Sie  eine  Mark   fiir  das 

Porto. 


Note  —  Study  the  Demonstrative  Pronouns, 


NOTES. 

*^  From  Einfallen,  to  occur.    Also :  Wo  denken  Sie  hin  ? 

2  Or,  ein  Telegram m  (ta-lS-gram'),  iieut. 

8  Or,  frankieren  (f raii-ke'-r'ii). 

4  When  ein,  eine,  ein  is  used  without  a  nomi  it  has  a  strong  accent 

6  Demonstrative  pronoun. —  6  Any  demonstrative  pronoun  may  b< 
einpliasi/ed  by  putting  eben  before  it.  —  *  Abbrev.  for  was  giebt  es 
This  abbrev.  of  es  into  »9  (or  strictly,  s)  is  quite  frequent. 


THE    PUKCHASES. 


333 


Ta-le-gra-fe'-r'n. 


Felt in!. 

slie. 


Vas  gepts'. 


.  da-pe'- 


2.  Dar  bref -tr4  -g'r  hat 
zio-a^-b'n  de^-z6  bi^-d'n 
bre^-fe  fiir  ze  g^'hrakht^, 

Har'. 

Her  zint'  ze. 

A-6of  de  post'. 

Fri'-ma'-T^Ti'n. 

Fer-s?itat' in'-shri'- 

b'n. 

Dan'. 

A'-b'n  dan' p6r'-to. 


That  is  different.!  I  think  you 
had  better  send  him  a  tele- 
gram.^ 

What  are  you  thinking  about  ? 
A  letter  will  reach  him 
quicker  than  a  telegram, 
where  he  lives.^ 

It  must  be  a  very  slow  place.* 

So  it  is 

Well,  what  is  the  matter? 


The  letter-carrier  has  just 
now  broiig-ht  these  two 
letters  for  you. 

Give  them  to-me. 
Here,  madam. 

Well.    Now  mail  these  letters.^ 
Shall  I  put  stamps  on  ?  ® 
Of  course.     You  must  have  one 
(of  them)  registered. 

The  one  for  N.  Y.,  I  suppose."^ 

Exactly. 8  Here  is  a  mark  for 
postage. 


page  499. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  That  is  something  else. 
^  But  why  telegraph  yon  to-him  not? 

3  What  to  you  occurs  (fallt  .  .  .  ein)?     He  receives  there,  where  he 
lives,  a  letter  quicker,  etc. —  ■*  Then  must  he  in  a  very  small  place  live, 
s  Now  take  (strictly  :  bring)  ye  these  letters  to  the  Post-office. 
6  Shall  I  them  free  make? 
'  Well  {or  rather,  surely)  the  for  N.  Y.  —  8  Even  the  (i.  e.,  that  one). 


334  EINKAUFE. 

3.  Da    Sie    lieute    niclit   ausgehen,   so    muss 
icli  nieiue  Einkaiife  selbst  besorg^en. 

Johann,  der  Wagen  soil  vorfahren 

Georg,  nach  den  Linden 

Halten  Sie  an,  Georg,  ich  will  hier  aussteigen. 

Fahren  Sie  an  das  Trottoir  heran  ! 
Ich  fiirchte  in  den  Rinnstein  zu  treten. 


Was  steht  zu  Ihreu  Diensten? 

Bitte  zeigen  Sie  mir  einige  Seidenstofie. 

Hier,  wenn's  gefallig  ist. 

Was  kostet  diese  Seide? 

15  Mark  der  Meter. 

Das    ist    mir    zu    teuer.     Auserdem    ist    mir    die 

Farbe  zu  dunkel. 
Ich  mochte  gern  etwas  helleren  Stolf'  haben. 


5.  Aber  hier  ist  ein   Stiick,  das  Ihuen  g^e- 
wiss  gefallen  wird. 

Nein,  das^  geMlt  mir  auch  niclit.     Ich  will  lieute 
lieber^  keine  Seide  kaufen. 


NOTES. 

1  Das   used   as  a   demonstrative   pronoun    (instead    of  dieses)    is 
strongly  accented.—  2  Irregular  comparative  of  the  adverb  gern.  Lit. 
/  ivUl  to-day  rather  no  silk  buy. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


335 


3.  Da  ze  li6-i^-te  iiicJit 
a-obs^-j?ii  -'n  zo  iiioi)s 
\eh  luV'ue  in^'-ko-i'-fe. 

Por'-fa'-r'n. 

Ga-6rc7i'. 

A-dbs'-s7iti'-g'n. 

Tro-to-aiy. 
Rin'-sTitin'. 


4.  Vas   shtaV  tsoo   e^-r'n 

den^-st'n. 

Tsi'-g'n zi'-d'n- 

shto'-ie. 


Ma'-t'r. 

A-ob'-s'r-dam 
ts^  doon'-k'l. 

He'-le-r'n. 


far'-be 


5.  A^-b'r  her^  ist  in  shtitJc'^ 
das  e^-n^n  g6-vis^  g-6- 
fa^-l'n  virt. 

Das'  SL-obkh'  nicht. 


As  you  do  not  go  out  to- 
tlay,  I  have  to  do  my 
shopping-  myself. 

John,  order  the  carriage^ 

George!     To  the  Linden. 
Stop,   George.     I   want   to   go 

into  that  store. 
Get  nearer  to  the  sidewalk. 
I  am   afraid   to  step  into  the 

gutter. 


What  can  I  do  for  you? 

Please,  let  me  see  some  silk 
stuffs.2 

This  way,  if  you  please. 

How  much  is  this  silk  ?  * 

That  is  fifteen  marks  a  yard. 

That  is  too  dear  for  me.  Be- 
sides, it  is  too  dark. 

I  would  like  something  of  a 
lighter  color.* 


Here  is  something"  you 
will  like,  madam.^ 

No,  I  don't  like  that  either.*  I 
will  rather  not  buy  any  silk 
to-day. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  The  carriage  shall  go-forth.  —  2  Pray,  show  me  some  silk  stuffs. 
3  What  costs  this  silk?—  ^  Some  lighter  stuff.  —  5  But  here  is  a 
piece  that  to-you  surely  please  will.  —  ^  No,  that  pleases  me  also  not. 


336  EINKAUFE. 

Wollen  Sie  mir  gefiilligst  sagen,  wo  die  Abteilung 
fiir  Leinenzeug  ist? 

Gewiss;   rechts,  am  Ende  des  Saales 

Was  kosten  diese  Taschentiicher  ? 

20  Mark  das^  Dutzend. 

Gut.     Geben  Sie  mir  2  Dutzend! 

Wunschen  Sie  vielleieht  sonst  noch  etwas? 

Ja,    ich    brauche    noch    Stecknadeln    und    einen 

Kamm. 
Hier  sind  Stecknadeln,  und  auf  jenem  Tisch  finden 

Sie  Kiimme. 
Gut.     Ich  nehme  2  Piickchen  Stecknadehi,  einen 

weiten  und  einen  engen  Kamm.* 

Was  macht  das  2Hisammen  ? 

Die  Taschentiicher  kosten  40  Mark,  2  Packchen 
Nadehi  1  Mark,  der  weite  Kamm  2  Mark  50, 
und  der  Staubkamm  1  Mark  25,  macht  zu- 
sammen  44  Mark  75. 


Note.  — Study  how  to  translate  "it,  him,  her," 


6.  Adele,    hast    du    das    Taschentuch    ge- 
saiimt  ? 

Ja,  hier  ist  es.^ 


NOTES. 

1  Observe  that  in  German  the  definite  article  (der,  etc.)  is  used 
instead  of  the  indefinite  (ein,  etc.)  with  expressions  of  measure  or 
quantity.  —  ^  It  =  es,  here,  because  Taschentuch  is  neuter. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


337 


Ap'-ti'-ld6fi   fur   li'-nen 
tso-ich'. 


Ta'-sli'n-tu'-cTi'r. 


Zonst'  nokh  et'-vas. 
S7itek'-na'-d'ln. 


Tsvi  pek'-cTi'n. 


Tsoo-za'-ni*n. 


Will  you  please  tell  me  where 
the  department  for  linen 
goods  is? 

On  the  right  side,  at  the  rear  of 
the  store  ^ 

How  much  are  these  handker- 
chiefs ? 

Twenty  marks  a  dozen. 

Very  well.  Give  me  two  dozen. 

Do  you  want  anything  else  ? 

Yes,  I  want  some  pins  and  a 
comb. 

Here  are  pins,  and  on  that 
table  you  will  find  combs. 

Very  well.  I  will  take  two 
packages  of  pins,  a  large 
comb,  and  a  fine  one. 
How  much  is  that  altogether?^ 
The  handkerchiefs  are  40 
marks  ;  2  packages  of  pins,  1 
mark;  the  large  comb,  2^ 
marks ;  and  the  fine  comb. 
1\  marks;  altogether,  44 
marks  75  (pfennig). 


etc.,  pages  484  and  485. 


6.  A-da^-16 ta^-sh'n- 

tobkh'  g-^-zo-imt^. 


Adele,  have  you  hemined 
the  pocket-h'd-k'ch'f  ? 

Yes,  here  it  is. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Certainly  ;  right  at  the  end  of  the  hall. 

2  What  makes  that  together? 

*  Or,  Staubkamm,  s/ita-oop'-kam'.     Lit. 


dust-comb. 


338  EINKAUFE. 

Das  ist  ganz  hiibsch,  nur  der  Saum  ist  ein  biss* 
chen^  breit;  doch  das  schadet  nichts. 


Wo    hast   du    das    Leinenzeug   zu   den  Taschen- 

tiichern  gekauft? 
Bei  Gerson.     Was  soil  ich  jetzt  nahen  ? 

Glaubst    du,  dass   du    den    Armel   deines   blauen 

Kleides  ausbessern  konntest?     Du  weisst,*  dass 

er  zerrissen  ist.^ 
Ich  werde  es  versuchen. 
Bringe    mir   meinen    Fingerhut;    er   ist  auf  den 

Boden  gefallen. 
Hier  ist.er. 

Ich  kann  die  Nahnadel  nicht  einfadeln. 
Gieb  sie  'mal  her  I    So. 
Ich  danke  schon. 
Ich  werde  diesen  Saum  aber  lieber  auf  der  Nah- 

maschine  nahen. 
Was  stickst  du  da,  Marie? 

Ich    sticke    ein    Paar    PantofFel    als   Geburtstags- 
geschenk  fiir  Rudolf. 

Lassf  mich  das  Muster  sehen ;  es  ist  sehr  hiibsch. 


NOTES. 

1  Ein  bisschen,  familiar  expression  =  ein  'wenig.  Strictly :  a  little 
bit. 

'^  Observe  tlie  use  of  the  indicative  mood  although  in  indirect  quota- 
tion. Verbs  of  kmnving,  proving,  being  convinced,  etc.,  are,  as  seen  here, 
more  apt  to  have  an  inilicative  than  a  subjunctive  after  them. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


339 


Za-d6in  .    ...  bis'-cTj'n  brit' 
jtia^det. 


Yetst'  na'-'n. 

Er'-m'l     a-oos'-be'-s'rn 
tser-ri'-s'n.   ^ 


VeT-zoo'-kh'n. 
Fin'-'r-tLOOt'  bo'-d'n. 


HSr'. 


STitikst. 


S7iti'-ke  par  pan-to'-f  1 
Roo'-dolf 

Md6s'-t'r. 


That  is  very  well  done/  only 
the  hem  is  a  little  too  wide ; 
that  does  not  make  any  dif- 
ference though. 2 

Where  did  you  buy  the  linen 
for  the  handkerchiefs  ? 

At  Gerson's.  What  shall  I 
sew  now? 

Do  you  think  you  could  mend 
the  sleeve  of  your  blue  dress ; 
you  know  it  is  torn."*^ 

I  will  try. 

Bring  me  the  thimble.     It  has 

fallen  on  the  floor. 
There  it  is. 
I  cannot  thread  the  needle. 

Give  it  to  me.     There  it  is.* 
Thank  you,  very  much. 
I  will   rather    sew   this    seam 
with  *  the  sewing-machine. 

What  are    you   embroidering, 

Mary? 
I  am  making  a  pair  of  slippers 

for    a    birthday    present    to 

Rudolph.^ 
Let  me  see  the  pattern,  f    It  is 

very  pretty. 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 


1  That  is  quite  pretty.  —  2  However  that  harms  nothing. 
3  Give  it  once  hither.     So.—  *  On. 
5  As  birthday  present  for  Rudolpli. 

*  If  not  familiar:  Glauben  Sie  dass  Sie konnten.    Sie 

wissen,  etc.  —  f  If  not  familiar:  Lassen  Sie. 


340  EINKAUFE. 

THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I. -IN   A   MAIN    CLAUSE. 

1.  The   present  subjunctive  is   often   used  to  express  a 
wish  or  a  request.     Thus  : 

1.  Long  live  the  king !  =  Lang  lebe  der  Konig. 

Let  7iot  mankind  tempt  the  gods  =  DeY  Mensch   versuche 

die  Gotter  nicht. 
Let  every  man  do  his  duty  =  Jedei'  Mann  thue  seine  PHicht.* 
This  use  is  naturally  limited  to  the  third  person  (singular  or 
plural).     For  the  first  person  plural,  however,  the  subjunctive 
is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  imperative.    Thus : 

J  Lassen  Sie  uns  gehen  (^imperative),  or 
X  Gehen  wir !    (subjunctive). 

2.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  followed  by  doch   is  also 
occasionally  used  to  express  a  wish.     Thus: 

Iivish  the  Spring  would  come !  =  Kaine  doch  der  Friihling! 
(Lit.  :  Might-come  only  the  Spring  /)  f 


n.-IN   A   DEPENDENT   CLAUSE. 
1.    IN   INDIRECT    STATEMENTS    OR    QUESTIONS. 

The  Subjunctive  is  frequently  used  in  indirect  statements 
{as:  I  said  that  he  did 7iH  know  it)  and  indirect  questions  {as:  I 
asked  ivhat  o^clock  it  tvas),  especially  after  verbs  ex})ressiiig 
doubt,  fear,  hope,  purpose,  desire,  advice,  entreaty, 
etc.  —  The  subordinate  clause  in  these  cases  is  usually  in- 
troduced by  dass,  damit,  damit  nicht  (lest),  wenn,  ob,  etc. 

1.  /  said  he  did  not  know  = 

Ich  sagte,  dass  er  es  nicht  wisse, 

2.  /  asked  what  o^ clock  it  was  = 

Ich  fragte,  wie  viel  Uhr  es  sei  (lit. :  it  be). 


*•  This  may  also  be  rendered  by  using  soil.  Thus:  Jeder  Mann 
soil  seine  Pflicht  thun. 

t  Notice  the  po.sition  of  the  subject  {after  the  verb)  in  these  opta- 
tive forms. 


THE    PURCHASES.  341 

3.  I  advise  you  not  to  go  =  lc\\  rathe,  dass  Sie  nicht  gehen 

(lit. :  that  you  not  go). 

4.  Leave  the  picture  here,  so  he  may  see  it  = 

Lassen  Sie  das  Bild  hier,  damit  er  es  sehe  {may-see). 

5.  Speak  to  him,  lest  he  (i.  e.,  for  fear  he  may)  forget  «7  =  Sprechen 
Sie  mit  ihm,  damit  er  es  nicht  vergesse.f 

Note  1.— Notice,  however,  that  in  Enghsh  when  the  verb  of  the 
first  clause  is  in  ajmst  tense  (as  in  the  first  and  second  sentences)  the 
verb  in  the  second  clause  is  also  put  in  a  past  tense.  (Thus :  He 
said  he  did  not  know. —  /  asked  what  o'clock  it  teas).  In  German, 
however,  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  used 
indifferently  and  without  any  reference  to  the  tense  of  the  verb  in  the 
first  clause.    Thus^  we  could  say  inditferently  : 

r  Er  sagte,  dass  er  es  nicht  wisse  (lit. :  may  know),  or : 
'  \  Er  sagte,  dass  er  es  nicht  wusste  (lit. :  ynight-know). 


'-\ 


Ich  fragte,  wie  viel  Uhr  es  sei  (lit.  :  may-he),  or: 
Ich  fragte,  wie  viel  Uhr  es  ware  (lit. :  might-he). 


Note  2.  — But  in  case  the  present  subjunctive  o^  the  particular 
verb  happens  to  be  the  same  in  form-  as  the  present  indicative,  the 
imperfect  subjunctive  only  must  then  be  used.    Thus  : 

They  said  they  had  no  children  = 

Sie  sagten,  dass  sie  keine  Kinder  hatten.* 

Never  haben,  because  haben  is  the  form  for  both  the  indicative  and 
subjunctive  present. 

2.    AFTER   WENN. 

The  subjunctive  must  be  used  after  wenn  (if),  provided 
the  speaker  wishes  to  express  that  the  condition  introduced  by 
if  is  contrary  to  the  actual  fact.     Thus  : 

Wenn  ich  Geid  hattCf  wiirde  ich  es  den  Armen  geben  =  If  I 


*  As  already  known  (see  page  136),  the  conjunction  dass  is  fre- 
quently omitted,  in  which  case  the  construction  of  the  subordinate 
clause  is  the  same  as  that  of  a  principal  clause.  But  this  does  not  affect 
the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  which  is  employed  in  either  case,  if  indi- 
cated. Thus  we  can  say  indifferently  {but  with  the  subjunctive  in  either 
case) : 

Sie  sagten,  dass  sie  keine  Kinder  hatten,  or: 
Sie  sagten,  sie  hatten  keine  Kinder, 
f  Lit.  :  m  order  that  he  it  forget  not. 


342  EINKAUFE. 

had  money  {but,  in  fact,  I  have  none),  I  'd  give  it  to  the  poor. 
Note  1.  —  The  conjunction  wenn  may  be  omitted.     In  that  case 
tlie  interrogative  order  is  used,  the  verb  coming  at  the  very  beginning 
of  the  clause.    Thus  we  can  say  indifferently : 

Wenn  er  krank  ware,  wiirde  er  nicht  hier  sein.     Or: 
Ware  er  krank,  (so)*  wiirde  er  niclit  hier  sein. 
Note  2.  — When  if  really  means  whether  (as  :  /  don^t  know  if  he  could 
come),  it  should  not  be  translated  by  tvenn,  but  by  o6;  and  the  indicative 
or  subjunctive  may  be  used  indifferently,  as  the  speaker  chooses.    Ex  : 
He  asked  me  if  {i.  e.,  'whether)  I  tvas  satisfied = 
Er  fragte  mich,  ob  ich  zufrieden  -ware. 
I  do  not  know  if,  {%.  e.,  tvhether)  he  is  there  — 
Ich  weiss  nicht,  ob  er  da  ist. 


3.    AFTER   VERBS    OF    COMMAND. 

After  befehlen  (Jto  order,  to  command)  and  sagen  [used  in 
the  way  of  command),  one  of  the  auxiliaries  sollen  (or  mogen) 
must  be  used,  and  they  are  placed  in  the  subjunctive.     Thus : 

He  ordered  rue  to  write  the  letter  at  once  ■=■ 

Er  befahl  mir,  dass  ich  den  Brief  sogleich  schreiben  sollfe. 

I  told  him  to  come  home  at  onGe= 

Ich  sagte  ihm,  dass  er  sofort  nach  Hause  kommen  sollfe. 
N.  B.  —  After  the  weaker  verbs  of  command,  as  sagen,  etc.,  mogen 
is  often  used  instead  of  sollen.    Thus  we  could  say  as  well :  Ich  sagte 
ihm,  dass  er  sofort  nach  Hause  kommen  mochte. 


4.    INSTEAD    OF    THE    CONDITIONAL. 

The  subjunctive  is  frequently  used  instead  of  the  conditional. 
Thus  : 

It  woidd  be  a  pity  =  Es  ware  schade !  (subjunctive).     Or : 

Es  wiirde  schade  sein  (conditional). 

It  would  have  been  a  pity=F>s  ware  schade  gewesen  {past 

.subjunctive).     Or  : 
Es  wiirde  schade  gewesen  sein  (past  conditional). 


*  So  is  often  used  to  begin  a  subordinate  clause  where  no  corre- 
sponding word  is  used  in  Englisb.  In  reality  it  may  be  either  used  or 
omitted  in  German,  as  the  speaker  may  choose. 


THE    PUllCHASES.  343 

The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 
Der  inensehliclie  Korper.* 


Der  Kopf  (kopf), 

Die  Stirn  (sTitirn), 

Das  Gesicht  (ge-zic^t'), 

Die  Backe  (ba'-ke) ;  Die  Backen,^ 

Das  Auge  (a-oo'-ge)  ;  Die  Augeii, 

Das  Ohr  (or)  ;  Die  Ohren, 

Die  Nase  (na'-ze), 

Der  Mund  (moont), 

Die  Lippe  (li'pe)  ;  Die  Lippen, 

Das  Kinn  (kin), 

Der  Zahn  (tsan) ;  Die  Zahne, 

Der  Bart  (bart), 

Der  Hals  (hals), 

Der  Riickeii  (rw  -k'n), 

Die  Brust  (broost), 

Die  Hand  (bant) ;  Die  Hande, 

Der  Finger  (fifi'-'r)  ;  Die  Finger. 

Das  Knie  (kne) ;  Die  Kniee  (kne' 

Das  Bein  (bin)  ;  Die  Beine, 

Der  Fuss  (foos)  ;  Die  Fiisse, 

Einen  Zahn  aiisziehen,* 

Halsschmerzen  *  haben, 


The  head. 
The  forehead. 
The  face. 

The  cheek ;  the  cheeks. 
The  eye ;  the  eyes. 
The  ear ;  the  ears. 
The  nose. 
The  mouth. 
The  lip  ;  the  lips. 
The  chin. 

The  tooth  ;  the  teeth. 
The  beard. 
The  neck. 
The  back. 

The  breast,  the  chest. 
The  hand;  the  hands. 
The  finger  ;  the  fingers, 
■e),2  The  knee ;  the  knees. 
The  leg ;  the  legs. 
The  foot ;  the  feet. 
To  extract  a  tooth. 
To  have  a  sore  throat 


1  Also,  die  Wange  (van'-e);  phir. :  die  Wangen. 

2  Sometimes  sliorteiuMl  to  Knie  (kne). 

3  A-oos'-tse -'n. —  ^   Hals'-shnier -ts'n. 

*  DSr  niensh'-li-c/te  kur'p'r.    The  human  body. 


344  EINKAUFE. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  then  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  conversa 

lion,  whether  for  self-study  or  preparation  in  the  class-room. 

(See  also  Directions  before  Part  I,) 

GESPRACHE. 

l.  —  BESUCH  DES  SCHNEIDERS. 

Guten  Morgen,  mein  Herr.  Ich  bringe  Ihnen  den 
Anzug  zum  Anprobieren.  —  Ich  wollte  eben  ausgehen ; 
konnten  Sie  nicht  den  Nachmittag  wiederkommen. 
—  Das  ist  mir  leider^  nicht  moglich.  Ich  bin  zu 
beschaftigt. — Nun  gut;  aber  schnell,  wenn  ich  bitten 

darf Wie   sitzt   der  Anzug  ?  —  Der   Rock   sitzt 

ausgezeichnet.  Nur  im  Riicken  wirft  er  einige 
Falten;^  warten  Sie,  ich  will  sie  aufheften.^  —  Aber  es 
kommt  mir  vor,*  als  seien  die  Schosse^  zu  lang.  Sie 
gehen  ja  bis  iiber  die  Kniee.— ^eien  Sie  ohne  Sorge.^ 
Das  werde  ich  schon  in  Ordnung  bringen. 

2.-BEIM  HAARSCHNEIDER.* 

Ich  mochte  mir  gern  die  Haare^  schneiden^  lassen, 
aber  ziemlich^  kurz,  bitte.  —  Wie  das  letzte  Mai? — 
Nein,  nicht  ganz  so  kurz.  —  So.  Wollen  Sie  sich  nicht 
auch  rasieren^^  lassen?  —  Ja,  aber  beeilen^^  Sie  sich. 


Pronunciation   and   Translations. 

1  Li'-d'r,  unfortunately.  That  is  for  uie  {slrictli/,  to  me)  unfortu- 
nately not  possible.  I  am  sorry,  I  can  't  do  it.  —  2  Die  Falte,  fal'-tS, 
fold,  crease.     Falten  werfen,  lit. :  to  throw  folds. 

8  A-oof -hef '-t'n,  to  pin  up. — ■*Itseeuisto  mo.  —  5  gchoss,???.,  fl;ij^. 

6  Do  not  trouble  yourself,  lit. :  he  without  anxirfii.  —  7  From  das 
Haar  (liar),  hair.  —  «  To  out.  —  »  TsemMIch,  })r('tt\-.  —  i"  Ra-ze'-r'n, 
to  shave.  — 11  BS-i'-l'n,  sich  beeilen,  roHexive  verb,  to  make  haste. 

*  Har'-shni'-d'r,  hair-dresser.    Also :  Frizeur  (£re-s<irO. 


THE    PURCHASES.  345 

To  be  translated  and  ivrittcn   into    German,  hut  also  to  he  recited 

orally  in  the  class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see  Directions 

be/ore  Part  I,) 

EXERCISES. 

I.- AT  A   HABERDASHER'S.* 

What  can  I  do  for  you,  sir  ?  —  Have  you  any  neck- 
ties?^—  Yes,  sir;  What  kind  (of  neck-ties)  do  you 
wish  ?  —  I  want  a  silk  neck-tie.  —  Here  are  some  very 
nice  (ones).  —  They  are  not  long  enough.  —  They  are 
a  yard  long,  sir.  —  What  is  the  price  of  this  one  ?  — 
Fifty  cents.  —  I  can  buy  a  better  neck -tie  in  America 
for  forty  cents.  —  That  is  impossible.  But  to  get  your 
custom,^  I'll  let  you  have  one  for  forty-five  cents. 
But  it  is  very  cheap.  —  Very  well,  I'll  take  it.  —  Do 
you  need  anything  else?  Are  you  not  in  need  of 
collars  ?  ^  —  Yes.  How  do  you  sell  collars  ?  —  That 
depends  on*  the  quality.^  —  These  are^  six  marks  a^ 

dozen.     Those  are  five  marks  a  dozen Which 

(ones)  will  you  choose?^  —  I'll  take  these. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Gender  of  Nouns,  pages  463  and  465. 


Aids  to   Translation. 

1  Krawatte  (kra-va'-te)  or,  Halsbinde  (hals'-bin'-de). 

2  Um  Ihre  Kundscliaft  (koont'-shaft)  zu  bekommen. 

3  Need  (brauchen)  you  not  collars  (Kragen,  kra'-g'n,  m.)? 

*  To  depend  oii  =  abhangen  (ap'-hen'-'n)  von. 

«  Qualitat,  /.     (Kva  -li-tat)  or  Giite.  —  6  Kosten. 
7  The  —8  Wahlen  (vaM'n). 

*  Beim  Krawattenmacher  (Kra-va'-t'n-ma'-feli'r). 


346  EINKAUFE. 

2.- A    VISIT. 

Good  morning,  Mr.  Korner!  —  What!  Ts  that  you, 
my  dear  fellow?  —  It  is  I,  as  you  see.  —  Well,  I  did 
not  expect^  to  see  you  so  soon.  I  am  delighted.^ 
When  did  you  return  to  the  city?^  —  I  arrived  here 
an  hour  ago.*  —  Did  you  do  all  the  business^  you 
wanted  in  Europe?  —  Yes,  I  bought  goods  at  very 
fair  prices,^  too.  But  what  is  the  matter  with  your 
hand?^  —  Nothing  much.^  Only  I  was  in  a  railroad 
collision^  the  other  day,  and  I  had  my  hand  cut^^  by 
some  broken  glass.^^ — A  railway  collision!  It  must 
have  been  terrible  ?^^  —  For  a  few  moments,^^  yes. 
But  after  that,t  it  was  found  ^^  that  nobody  had  been 
seriously  hurt.^*  Some  had  their  faces  or  hands  cut,^^ 
others  their  shoulders,  arms,  or  legs  bruised.^^  One 
man  had  his  wrist  dislocated.^^  But  that  was  all.  — = 
That  is  quite -^^  enough,  goodness  knows  ^^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 

1  Erwarten,  to  expect.     Regular  verb. 

2  It  rejoices  me  much.  — ^  When  are  you  to  the  city  back-come? 

*  Before  an  hour  (eine  Stunde).  —  5  Which  is  never  omitted  in  Ger- 
man. —Alle  Ihre  Geschaf te.  —  6  Very  cheap.  — ^  Wliat  liave  you  vvitli 
your  hand  made?  — «  It  is  not  bad  (schlimin).  —  »  Esfand  neuliehein 
Zusammenstossstatt,  als  ich  auf  dem  Zug  war.—  i"  My  IkiiuI  was 
througli  some  broken  ghiss  (einige  Glasssplitter)  luirt  (verletzt). 

11  Schrecklich.  —  12  Augenblicke.  —  13  Fand  es  sicli,  lit. :  found 
iC  itself.  —  1*  Nobody  seriously  hurt  (ernstlich  verletzt)  was. 

ifi  To-some  (Einigen)  was  the  face  or  the  hand  cut  (zerschnitten). 

i«  To  others  {dative)  were  the  shoulders  or  legs  bruised  (gequetscht, 
from  quetschen,  to  bruise).  —  i'  To  one  man  was  the  wrist  (das 
Handgelenk)  dislocated  (verrenkt). 

18  Gerade.  — 19  Wabrhaftig,  lit. :  truly.  —  f  Danach. 


THE  PURCHASES.  347 

To  he  read  by  meaiu  of  the  notes,  in  preparation  for  translating  and 

reading  aloud  in  German.     For  Self-Study,  to  be  translated, 

and  when  thoroughly  understood,  read  aloud  in  German. 


mf)exntciU*  —  2^ 

—  3it  bcr  Xi)ai,  ba§  Singe  ermiibet  faft/  biefe  enblofe 
giUIe^  fd)oner  :!8anbfd)aften  ju  fel;en.  Slber  \vk  breit  mirb 
je^t  ber  diijcxn ! 

— 2(l(erbing§!  2Btr  naf)ern^  w\§>  jelit  ^obtenj/  einer  ber 
fd)bnfteu  ©tcibte  be^  9H;ein§.     ^onnen  ©ie  e^3  fcf)en? 

—  ©an^  gut,  unb  iua^  ift  bag  fiir  eiiie  im))ofante  gefte^ 
auf  beni  anbern  lifer? 

—  ^ai?>  ift  bie  beriil)mte  geftimg  @l)renbreitftein,^  bie 
ncbft'  ben  gegcniiberliegenben^  Serfen  t>oii  .^^obleuj  eine 
bcr  bebeuteubften  ^  geftungen  ^^  (5iiro))ag  bilbet.^i  ©ie  tuiirbe 
nur  ^UKinmt  eiugenomnien/^  aber  beibemaP^  fonnte  bie 
^efa^ungi*  nur  bnrd)  hunger  ^nr  Ubergabe^^  gejmmgen^^ 
ii^erben. 

—  ®a§  ift  iuirflid)  !ein  SSnnber,  mnn  man  biefe  ge- 
iDaltigen^'  ©teinmaffen  ^^  betrac^tet.^^ 


1  Lit. ;  gets  tired  almost.     Aiigllce :  gets  quite  tired. 

2  Abundance.  —  ^  Sich  nahern  (lit. :  to  near  ones  self),  to  approach. 
4  Ko'-blents.  —  5  Stronghold.—  6  A-r'n-brit'-s/ttln. 

7  Together-with.  —  8  Neighboring.     Lit.:  opposite-lying. 

9  Most  important, —  i<>  Fortresses. —  "  Constitutes. 
12  Captured.—  13  Both  times.—  i*  Garrison. 
15  Surrender.—  is  Forced.—  i^  Powerful. 
18  Mass  of  stone.  —  la  Beholds. 


348  EINKAUFE. 

—  SSenn  ©ie  tmeber  einmal  an  ben  9^f)e{n  fommen,  fotlten 
<Bk  i)kt  auSfteigen  uitb  Jloblenj  unb  ©(;renbreitfteiu  imb 
©totjenfel^  *  befiidjen. 

—  3ft  ©tol^enfel^  ()ter  in  ber  9fla(;e? 

—  3a  ii:)o^l,  e§  ift  nic^t  meit  Don  ^oblen^,  gan^  nabe  am 
Dfi(;eiit.  SBir  miiffen  e§  l>om  ^oot  au§  gleid)  fe(;en  fonnen. 
©e(;en  ©ie!  ^a  ift  e§,  auf  bem  redjtcn  lifer.  ©^  ift 
reid)  an  fc^onen  ©cmcilben  nnb  mtt)a\t  vt)ertt)oIIe  8amni= 
(ungen  Don  ^fJiiftungcu/  SBaffen^  nnb  fonftigen  2(Itertnmern.^ 
Slber  vueit  (;errUd;er  aU  atte  biefe  ^oftbarfeiten  ^  ift  bie 
rt)nnberi)o(le  3lu§fidBt,  metc^e  man  l)on  bem  ©rf)fo^  geniefet. 

—  ^er  ghife  ^uirb  tuirfUd)  immer  fd)oner.  ®iefe  fteilen"^ 
gelfemifer  erinnern^  (eb(;aft^  an  ben  §nbfon.  Slber  ma-c 
fi'ir  ein  mertmiirbig  geformter^  ^^erg  uijtbt  fid;^  ba  jn 
nnferer  £infen?  Unb  atte  ^(ide^^  finb  auf  ^m  Jyelfen 
gcrid)tet.^^ 

—  1)a^  ift  bie  bietbefnngene  ^^  Sorelei.^^  (Sie  fennen 
bod)^*  bie  alte  ©age?  2luf  biefem  gelfen  faf,!"^  bie  ^ee^^ 
Snrlei  nnb  lodte  mit  i(;rem  ©efang  ^'  bie  ©cbiffer  ^^  an  fid) 
unb  ^og^^  fie  in  bie  2Bellen,^^  iDilbrenb  ibre  gat^r^enge^^  an 
ben  5l(i^>V^en22  ftranbeten.^^  ^oren  ©ie,  bie  ©efellfcbaft^^ 
ftimmt^^  bie  ^einefdje^  :^orelei2'  an:^  ,,'^d)  mi^  md;t,  tua^ 


1  Armors.  —  2  Weapons.  —  ^  Various  antiquities. 

^  Precious  things.  —  ^  Craggy,  steep.  —  ^  Remina.  —  7  Vividly. 

8  Formed. —  ^  Sich  erheben,  to  rise.—  i<>  Looks.—  n  Directed. 
12  Much  sung.—  13  L,o'-re-li.'  —  ^*  Surely,  of  course. 
16  Imperfect  of  sitzen,  /o  .9*7. 
1*  Fairy. —  '"  Songs. —  '8  Boatmen,  sailors. 

19  Tmpei-fcct  of  Ziehen,  to  pvll,  to  drag. 

20  Waves.—  21  Crafts,  boats.—  22  Craggy  rocks. 
28  Were  stranded—  2-1  Company. 

26  FroT\i  anstinimen,  to  start  to  sing,  to  'strike  up.* 
26  Of  Heine  —  •^'  Title  of  a  song. 
*  S/ttol'-ts'ii-fels  ,  a  cnstle. 


THE    PURCHASES.  349 

foil  e^  bebeuten/  ba§  id)  fo  traurig^  bin."  ^ie  beutfcbcn 
©tubenten,  bie  ^ier  Dorbeifa(;rcn/  finb  nid)t  fo  romantifd;. 
Dft  rufen  fie:  „3Scr  ift  ber  ^iirgermeifter *  'oon  Dber= 
mefel?  "  ^  unb,  „  (Sfcl^  ballt "  ba§  @d)o^  ber  33eri3e  mieber."' 

—  3^/  ^^i^  ©tubenten  ^  ift  nic^t§  ^eilig/^  fie  treiben  ^^  mit 
allem  ifjren  (Sdjerj.^^  SSie  angene(;m  ift  e§  bagegen/^  mit 
einem  fo  liebenvtoiirbigeii  ^^  unb  fo  funbigen  ^^  @efellfd;after  ^^ 
iDie  ©ie  auf  bcm  9^(;ein  511  reifen,  ber  auf  aEe^  ©e(;en^= 
it)erte  aufmerffam  mad^t}'^ 

—  (Sie  fdier^en.  '^^h^x  ^eutfd^e  fennt  bie  fc^onen  ^unfte 
bes  9^(;ein^.  Slber  nun  fommen  ioir  balb  nac^  beni  fd)ijnen 
^ingcn.^^  S^^^*^^  ^^^"6  ^^  S^jnen  hen  befannten  3}Jaufeturni  ^^ 
^eigen.  ®a  ift  er  fdion.  (5e(;en  ©ie  jenen  ^urm^  auf 
ber  fteinen  '^n^d  Dor  un§.  ^en  ^urm  foil  ^ifcbof  §atto 
v>on  Tlain},  ^^  erbaut  l;aben,  urn  Don  \)m  Doriiberfal;renben  ^ 
vSd)iffcrn  3^^^^  }>^^  erl;eben.^  (Sinft  brad)  nun  eiue  $unger§= 
not^  au^,  unb  ^ifd)of  §atto/ber  reidje  ^^orrate^  an  J^orn 
Ijatte,  tooUte  ben  airmen  nid)t^  geben.  (Sr  trieb  fie  Diel= 
mel)r^  in  eiue  ©c^eune  imb  liefe  biefe  an3i'inben.^  211^ 
nun  bie  Ungliidlid)en  jammerlic^^  fd)rieen,  foil  er  gerufen 
^abeu:^  Qoxt  i^r,  n)ie  bie  3Jiau§lein  ^feifen?^^    @eitbem 


1  Lit. :  what  it  shall  mean.     Anglice  :  what  it  means. 

2  Sad.—  «  Travel  by,  pass  by. —  *  Mayor. 

5  O'-b'r-va-z'l,  a  town  near  by.  —  6  A'-z'l. 
7  From  wiederhallen,  to  resound.—  8  W-chb, 
9  Dative  plural. —  ^^  Sacred. —  11  Practice. 
12  Jesting.—  13  However.—  i^  Amiable. 
15  Learned,  well-posted. —  I6  Companion. 

17  il/aA;es  (o?je,  understood)  a^fenfiVe.     Anglice:  calls  one' s  attention. 

18  Bifi'-'n,  a  well-known  and  pretty  town. 

19  Mouse  {or  rat)  tower.  —  20  Tower. 

21  Bishop  Hatto  of  Mayence. 

22  Passing  by.—  23  Toll.—  24  To  raise.—  25  Famine. 

26  Store,  stock.—  27  Moreover.—  28  Set  on  fire.—  20  Pitifully. 
^  Lit.:  Shall  he.     Anglice:  he  is  said  to.—  3i  Whistle,  squeak. 


350  EINKAUFE. 

ocrfo(t]tcii^  ifm  bie  9}laii)e  iinb  fdmuimmcn^  if)m  biird)  ba§ 
aSafjcr  wad)  unb  fletterteii^  ben  ^iirin  (;inauf,  in  ben  fid; 
ber  ^ifd)of  gefliidjtet,*  nnb  frafeen^  if)n  auf.^ 

—  SBeld)  fc^redlid;e  @eid)i(f)te ! 

—  ©ie  tt)irb  nur  baburc^  einigerma^en  ^  f)infatlig/  ba§ 
Der  Xurm  erft  200  '^a\)x^  nad)  be§  ^ifd)of^  Xobe  erbaut 
rt)orben  ift.  Slber  ba  (;aben  Wix  ^ingen  'oov  im§,  "Fair 
Bingen  on  the  Rhine,"  it)ie  ^t^ron  fingt. 

—  ©0  (;ei6t  eg  mit  9ied)t,  ben!c  id).  SJ^anc^e  Sanb- 
fdjaft/  bie  mir  (;eute  gefe(;en  ^aben,  luar  woijl  grogartiger, 
aber  biefer  ^lid  auf  bingen  erfd)eint  mir  ungemein^  lieblid) 
unb  anmutig^^  unb  madjt  einen  tiefen  ©inbrud^^  auf  mid). 

—  (^:g  ift  imrflid)  fd)i)n.  3^^^*^^  ^^  ^i^^^  t;aben  nun  ben 
fd)onften  2:^eil  be§  S^ibeing  gefet)en.  3mifd;en^^  bingen  unb 
Tlaxn^  iuirb  bie  ©egenb  n)ieber  f(ad)  ^^  unb  unintereffant 

—  2l(;!     8inb  Wix  enblid;  in  SJJainj? 

—  $50,  ba  ift  ber  Sanbung^pla^  ^^  gerabe  i^or  un§. 

—  3d)  mu^  geftef)en,  id)  bin  tniibe  getuorben  unb  it)erbe 
bie  erfte  9^ad)t  in  ^Jlain^  fid)er  gut  fcbtafen. 

—  3n  it)eld)em  (Baftt)au§  tDerben  ©ie  abfteigen?^^ 
^3d)  gel;e  gar  nid)t  in  ein  @aft^au§.     3^)  tuerbe  bei 

meineni  ^reunb,  §errn  9iitter,  mo^nen. 

—  Sf^itter!  ^a§  ift  ja  mein  ^ruber.  3Be(c^  mer!rt)iirbi= 
ge§  3^if^^tt^^^^"ti^^ft^ii  •  ■^^  3^)  ^i^^  UTorgen  uteinen  3>rubet 
befud)en  unb  iDerbe  ©ie  ^offent(id)  fef)en.  3iia^U<i)^n  er= 
(auben  ©ie  mir,  3^nen  meine  ^arte^^  ^u  geben. 


1  Pursued.—  2  Imperfect  of  schwimmen,  to  swim. 
8  From  klettern,  to  climb. —  ^  Fled  (had,  understood). 
6  From  auff resseu;  to  devour.  —  ^  Xo  a  certain  extent. 
''  Weakened. —  8  a  great  deal  of  landscape.  —  ^  Uncommonly. 
10  Pleasing. —  ^1  Iini)ression. —  12  However. —  i^  Between, 
w  Flat.—  15  T.anding.  —  i«  Absteigen,  to  stop,  to  "put  up." 
1?  Coincidence.  —  is  Card. 


THE    PURCHASES.  351 

DIRECTIONS.  —  Translate  and  copy  off  the   following  notes, 
learn  tbein  by  heart,  and  afterward  write  them  from  memory. 

!♦  — ©inlabuug  gu  cincr  5Kbc^^ocfclIfd)afLl 
2,  —  5lniia^mcf(^rcibcn»* 


1  Evening  party  (lit.  :  evening  society). —  2  Send  their  best  regards, 
and  pray  Mr.  H.  to  favor  them  (Ht. :  to-them  the  pleasure  to  do). 

8  To  be  present  (lit. :  to  appear).  —  •*  Form  of  acceptance  (lit. :  writing 
(or,  letter)  of  acceptance) .  —  *  From  eiripfangen,  to  receive. 

*  And  accept  with  many  thanks  [Ht. :  and  take  the  same  with 
(strictly  :  under)  best  thanks  with  great  pleasure  on], 


ParI^  IY. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


EINKAUFE 


•o^o» 


SECTION     III. 


1. 

ON  RISIN5. 

2. 

TRYIN3  ON  A  PAIR  OF  SHOES. 

3. 

SMALL  ARTICLES:  COLORS. 

4. 

AT  A  GLOVE-MAKER'S. 

5. 

ABOUT  JEWELS. 

6. 

AT  THE  OPTICIAN'S. 

7. 

A  WALK  IN  VIENNA. 

8. 

DECLINING  AN  INVITATION 

863 


354  EINKAUFE. 


III. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Sie  miissen  aufsteheii,  meiii  Herr. 

Wer  klopft? 

Ich   bin  es,  der  Kellner.     Sie   haben   mir  gesagt, 

dass   ich    Sie    zur   rechten    Zeit   wecken   sollte.^ 

Es  ist  schon  sechs  Ulir  voriiber. 
Wie!     Ist   das    moglich?     Es   ist  ja   noch   nicht 

einmal  hell. 
Das   ist   richtig.      Aber   die    Tage    nehmen    auch 

schon  ab.     Sehen  Sie  doch  auf  Hire  Uhr. 

Ich  kann  die  Streichholzchen  nicht  finden.  End- 
lich !  Da  sind  welche.*  Sie  haben  recht,  zehn 
Minuten  iiber  sechs. 

Brauclien  Sie  sonst  etwas? 

Freilich !     Bringen   Sie   mir   schnell   Wasser  zuni 

Waschen.f     Das  Madchen  hat  mir  gestern  abend 

keins  gebracht. 


NOTES. 

1  Verbs  of  command  or  request  (as  sagen,  to  say;  befehlen,  to 
trummand,  etc.),  take  sollen  in  the  dependent  clause.  Solleii  may 
then  be  in  the  present  or  imperfect  subjunctive  (or  even  in  the  present 
indicative),  largely  at  the  option  of  the  speaker.  Thus,  in  above  sen- 
tence, we  could  say  either:  dass  ich solle,  sollte  (or  even  : 

soil).  The  imperf.  suhjunc,  however,  would  not  be  usually  employed, 
unless  the  verb  on  which  it  depends  (as  haben  gesagt,  in  the  sentence 
above)  is  itself  in  a  past  tense. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


355 


III. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.    Ze    in?«^-s'ii    a-dbf^- 
s/ita  -'n  mill  her^. 

Klopft'. 

Kel'-n'r for-ii'-b'r. 


Nokh  nicht   in-mal   tiel' 


S^tric7i'-h.ults'-c7i'n. 


Fri'-licTi va'-sh.'n. 


Sir,  you  must  g-et  up. 

Who  is  that  knocking?^ 

It  is  1,2  (sir)  the  waiter.     You 

told  me  to  call  you  in  time. 

It  is  past  six  o'clock. 

What '.     Is  that  possible  ?    It  is 

not  daylight  yet.^ 
That's  true,  sir.     But  the  days 

are  getting  shorter.^  Look  at 

your  watch. 
I  can't  fiud  any  matches.     At 

last !    Here  are  some.''^    You 

are  right.     Ten  minutes  past 

six. 
Do  you  want  anything  (else)  ? 
Certainly.     Bring    me    (quick) 

some  water  to  wash   with.* 

The  girl   did   not  bring  me 

any  last  night.® 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Who  knocks?—  ^  I  am  it.—  s  It  is  indeed  not  yet  (even)  clear. 

4  But  the  days  take  also  already  off.  Could  also  be  in  German : 
warden  schon  kiirzer.  —  s  To-the  washing. 

6  Tlie  girl  lias  to-nie  yesterday  evening  none  broiiglit. 

"•■■  As  seen  here,  the  relative  pronoun,  welcher,  welche,  welches, 
is  sometimes  used  as  an  indefinite  pronoun,  in  the  sense  of  some.  See 
l)a,oe  292. —  Could  also  say,  Hier  sind  einige,  lit.:  Here  are  a  few. 
Not  usual. —  t  See  p.  312,  note  4. 


356  EINKAUFE. 

2,  Eduard,  du  musst  dich  beeilen.' 

Zieh  dich  schnell  an.^ 

Aber  ich  habe  die  ganze  Nacht  nicht  geschlafen. 

Ich  koimte  nicht  einschlafen. 

Ich    glaube,   du    bist   nur   ein   wenig  faul ;  *   ich 

werde  das  Fenster  ofFnen  und  die  frische  Morgen- 

luft  hereinlassen. 

Nun,  wenn  es  sein  muss,  (so)t  stehe  ich  auf. 
Bitte,  hole  mir  etwas  Wasser,  ich  will  mir  die 
Hande  und  das  Gesicht^  waschen. 

Hier  ist  Wasser  in  diesem  Waschbecken ;  ich 
habe  dir  auch  ein  reines  Handtuch  mitge- 
bracht. 

Danke  schon.  Aber  wo  ist  Kamm  und  Biirste? 
Ich  muss  mich  kammen.^ 

Da  sind  sie,  unter  dem  Spiegel. 
Dieser  Spiegel  ist  staubig;   wisch  ihn  ab,  bitte! 
So.    Willst  du  nun  Stiefel  oder  Schuhe  anziehen? 
Ich  will  die  neuen  Knopfschuhe  anziehen. 


Note.  — Study  the  Relative  Pronouns, 


NOTES. 

1  Sich  beeilen,  sich  anziehen,  sich  kammen,  reflexive  verbs. 

2  Observe  that,  especiully  vvitli  the  parts  of  the  body,  the  Germans 
prefer  to  use  the  definite  article  instead  of  the  possessive  adjective,  and 
that  then  they  express  the  personality  by  a  personal  pronoun  (as:  to 
me,  to  him,  to  her,  to  ns).  Thus,  Enjrlish  :  I  have  broken  my  arm.  Ger- 
man :  Ich  habe  mir  den  Arm  gebrochen. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


357 


2.  A^-doo-art  <loo  mobst^j 
dich  be-i^-1'ii. 

Tse  dich  simel'  an'. 


In'-stila'-fn. 

Fa-ool ....  fri'-stie  mor'- 
g'n-idoft'  her-in'-la'-s'n. 


Md6s' 


Vasli'-be'-k'n hant' 

tookh'  mit'-ge-hvaikht'. 


Biirs'-te ke'-m'n. 


STipe'-g'l. 
Shta-ob'-hich. 

Knupf '-shoo '  -e. 


Edward,  yoii  must  hurry 
up  J 

Huiry  up  and  dress. ^ 

But  I  have  not  slept  the  whole 

night. 
T  could  not  get  to  sleep. 
I  think   you   are   only  a  little 

lazy.   I  will  open  the  window 

and  let  in  the  fresh  morning 

air. 
Well,  if  there  is  no  other  way* 

I  will  get  up.     Please  get  me 

some  water.     I  will  wash  my 

hands  and  face.* 
Here  is  water  in  the  basin.     I 

have    brought    you    also    a 

clean  towel. 

Thank  you.  But  where  is  the 
comb  and  brush?  I  must 
comb  my  hair.^ 

Here  they  are,  under  the  look- 
ing-glass. 

This  looking-glass  is  dusty; 
wipe  it,  please. 

So.  Will  you  have  your  boots 
or  shoes  ? 

I  '11  put  on  my  new  buttoned 
shoes. 


pages  491  and  492. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

*  If  not  familliar:  Sie  miissen  Sich  beeilen. 

"  Dress  yourself  quickly.— If  not  fain. :  Ziehen  Sie  Sich  sehnell 
an.  —  8  If  it  must  be  (lit. :  be  must). 

<  I  will  to-me  the  hands  and  the  face  wash.  —5  I  must  myself  comb. 

*  Or,  dass  du  nur  ein  wenig  faul  bist. 
t  For  the  use  of  so,  see  page  342. 


358  EINKAUFE. 

3.  Was  fehlt  Ilinen  (cleiiii)  ? ' 

Nichts.     Die  Schuhe  passen  mir  nicht. 

Sie  sind  zu  eng. 
Wo  driicken  sie  denn? 

Sie  sind  iiber  dem  Spann^  zu  eng,  und  an  den 
Fersen^  machen  sie  mir  auch  Schmerzen.^ 

Ich  werde  diese  Schuhe  niemals  tragen  konnen. 

Das   ist  argerlich.     Was   haben   Sie    denn   dafiir 

bezahlt? 
Dreissig  Mark. 

Versuchen  Sie  es  doch  noch  einmal! 
Sie  haben  gut  reden.     Ich  versichere  Ihnen,*  dass 

es  ganz  unniitz  ist. 
Und    ich    wiirde    Ihnen    raten,*    die    Schuhe    zu 

behalten. 
Neue  Schuhe  driicken  immer  ein  wenig. 
Aber  das  giebt  sich  mit  der  Zeit. 


NOTES. 

1  Denn  may  be  omitted.     Also  :  Was  haben  Sie  ? 

2  Der  Spann,  the  instep.     Die  Ferse,  the  heel. 

8  Or,  die  Fersen  thuen  mir  auch  ^veh.  Lit. :  the  heels  do  to-me 
also  woe.    See  page  356,  note  2. 

4  We  can  say  either,  ich  versicliere  Ilmen^  or  icli  versichere 
Sie,  using  eitlier  the  dative  or  tlie  accusative.  N.  B.  —  WJien,  however, 
the  verb  liappens  to  have  another  object,  the  personal  pronoun  can  only 
be  used  in  the  accusative  (^STie).  Tims:  I  assure  you  of  my  friend- 
ship=\Q\i  versicliere  Sie  niciner  Freundscliaft  (never:  Ihnen 
meiner  Freundschaft). 


THE    rUKCHASES. 


359 


8.  V^s  falt^  e^-iien  (den)  ? 


Tsoo  en'. 
Dm'-k'n. 
U'-b'r  dam  sTipan' 


an  dan  fer'-z'n  ....  a-obkh' 

shmer'-ts'n.  ^ 


Er'-g'r-lic7i. 


Nokh  in'-mal. 
Fer-zic7i'-re ....  oon'-nwts'. 


Tsoo  be-hal'-t'n. 


Gept  zich  mit  dar  tsit 


What  is  the  matter  with 
you?i 

Nothing  (is  the  matter  with 
me).  Only  my  shoes  don't 
fit  me. 

They  are  too  narrow. 

Where  do  they  pinch  you  ?  f 

They  are  too  tight  in  the  in- 
step,^ and  they  hurt  also  my 
heels.^ 

I  '11  never  be  able  to  wear  these 
shoes. 

That 's  too  bad.  What  did  you 
pay  for  them  ? 

Thirty  marks. 
Try  them  on  again.* 
You  may  say  what  you  please.^ 
I  assure  you  that  it 's  no  use.^ 

And  I  advise  you*  to  keep 
these  shoes. 

New  shoes  always  pinch  (your 

feet)  a  little. 
But  you  soon  get  used  to  them.'' 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  What  ails  you,  then  ? 

2  They  are  to-me  over  the  instep  too  tight. 

3  On  the  heels  they  make  to-me  also  pains. 
*  Try  {ye)  it  however  once  more. 

5  You  have  good  talking.  —  6  That  it  wholly  unnecessary  is. 

7  But  that  ceases  in  thne.      Strictly  :  But  that  gives  itself  with-ihe-time. 

•'■■  Instead  of  Ich  rate  Ihnen,  lit.:  I  advise  you.  The  use  of  the 
conditional  (wiirde  rateii,  xvnuJd  advise)  is  more  polite. 

t  Where  pinch  they  then.  —  DeDn  makes  the  expression  more 
polite. 


3G0  EINKAUFE. 

4.  Habeii    Sie   dem  Diener  gesagt,   dass  er 
die  Briefe  auf  die  Post  bringeii  soU?^ 

Welche  Briefe  meinen  Sie  denn? 

Ich   meine   die,^   von    denen^   ich    gestern   abend 

mit  Ihnen  gesprocheii  babe. 
Ich  habe  es  vergessen. 

Johann,  bringen  Sie  diese  Briefe  auf  die  Post! 
Soil  ich  sie  freimachen? 
Das  versteht  sich.     Und  vergessen  Sie  nicht,  auf 

diesen  da  eine  20 -Pfennig -Marke  zu  kleben,  er 

geht  ins  Ausland. 

Soil  ich  ausserdem  noch  etwas  besorgen? 

Erkundigen  Sie  sich  auch  auf  der  Post,  wann^ 
der  nachste  Hamburger  Dampfer  nach  New 
York  abgeht. 

Und  wenn  Sie  beim  Buchhandler  vorbeikommen, 
kaufen  Sie  den  neuesten  Plan  und  Fiihrer 
durch  Berlin.     Haben  Sie  mich  verstanden?^ 

Ja  wohl,  ich  werde  alles  besorgen. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Uses  of  the  Definite  Article, 


NOTES. 

1  For  the  use  of  soil  after  verbs  of  command  (as  sagen,  befehlen, 
etc.),  see  page  118  note  4,-2  Or,  diejenigen.  —  3  Or,  von  welchen. 

*  In   questions,  either  direct  or  indirect,  wann    must   bo  used  in 
German,  7iever  wenn. —  ^  Or,  Verstehen  Sie  mich? 

*  That   understands   itself.     Could  also  say,   simply,    Natiirlich, 
na-tur'-lic/t. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


361 


4.  Ha^-b'n  ze  tlam  de^-u'r 
g-e-za/c/tt^das  ar  de  bre^- 
f6  a-obf  de  pOst^  brin^-'n 
zorT 

De'  fon  da'-nen. 


Fri'-ma'-A:7i'n. 

Tsvan'-tsicTi    pfe'-nicTi 

mar'-ke  tsoo  kla'-b'n 

a-oos'-lant'. 


A-(56'-s'r-dain be-z6r'- 

Er-kdbn'-di-g'n  ....  nacTi'- 
ste  liain'-bdbr'-g'r  dam'- 
pfr, 

BooA:7i'-h.ent'-rr  for-bi'-ko'- 
m'n plan'. 


Be-z6r'-g'n. 


Did  you  tell  the   servant 
to  mail  those  letters?^ 


Which  letters  do  you  mean  ? 
The  letters  of  which  I  spoke  to 
you  last  night. 

I  forgot  (about)  it. 

John,  mail  these  letters. 

Shall  I  pay  the  postage  ? 

Certainly.*  And  don't  forget 
to  put  a  live-cent  stamp  on 
that  one;  that  is  for  a  for- 
eign country.^ 

Anything  else  ?  ^ 

Inquire  at  the  Post-office*  when 
the  next  Hamburg  steamer 
leaves  for  ]Nevv  York. 

And  when  you  pass  by  the 
bookseller's,^  get  the  latest 
map  and  guide  through  Ber- 
lin.    Do  you  understand? 

Perfectly.  I  'U  see  to  every- 
thing.* 


pages  461  and  462. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Have  you told  that  lie  the  letters  to  the  Post-office  take 

(lit. :  bring)  shall.  —  2  And  forget  ye  not  on  this  there  a  twenty-pfen- 
nig stamp  to  paste;  it  goes  into  the  foreign-land. 

8  Shall  I  besides  still  something  take  care  of. 

*  Inform  (ye)  yourself  also  at  the  post. 

5  By  the  bookseller  before-come. —  ^  I  will  all  take-care  of. 


362 


EINKAUFE. 


The  folloiving  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Verschiedene  Gegenstande.* 


Der  Handschuh  (liant'-slioo'), 

Glaceehandschuhe  (gla-za'-h.ant'-sh.oo' 

Der  Spazierstock  ^  (sTipa-tser'-sTitok'), 

Die  Kette  (ke'-te), 

Der  Ring  (rin), 

Ohrringe  (or'-rifi'-e), 

Das  Armband  (arm'-bant'), 

Das  Halsband  (lials'  — ), 

Ein  Diamant  (de-a-mant'), 

Juwelen(yoo-va'-rn),  n., 

Das  Opernglas,  f 

Das  Augenglas,  n., 

Die  Brille  «  (bri'-le), 

Die  Brieftasche, 

Ein  Flaschchen  (flesli'-cTi'n), 

Das  Theebret  (ta'-bref), 


Wie  viel  kostet  das  ? 
Wie  viel  macht  das  ? 
Wie  viel  fordern  Sie  fur  —  ? 
Wie  viel  rechnen  Sie  fiir  —  ? 
Wer  ist  es  ? 
Wo  ist  es  ? 


The  glove, 
i),   Kid-gloves. 
The  cane. 
The  chain 
The  ring. 
Ear-rings. 
The  bracelet. 
The  necklace. 
A  diamond. 
Jewels. 

The  opera-glass. 
The  eyeglass. 
The  spectacles. 
The  pocket-book. 
A  flask. 
The  tea-tray. 


How  much  does  that  cost  1 
How  much  is  that? 
How  much  do  you  ask 

for  —  ? 
Who  is  it? 
Where  is  it? 


1  Or,  simply,  der  Stock. 

2  Notice  that  die  Brille  is  singular.     A  pair  of  spectacles  =  JEJiM^ 
grille.  —  *  Various  objects. —  t  h\^o:  Der  Operngiicker. 


THE    FUKCHASES. 


363 


The  following  vocabulary  to  be  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Farben. 

(ADJECTIVES. 

Die  Farbe  (far'-be), 

Weiss  (vis), 

Schwarz  (slivarts); 

Gran  (gra-oo), 

Rot,  rotlich  (rot,  rUt'-lich), 

Karmesin  (kar-me-zen'), 

Piirpurn  (poor'-poorn), 

Rosa  (ro'-za), 

Violett  (ve-o-lef), 

Gelb,  gelblich  (gelp,  gelp'-licTi), 

Blond  (blont), 

Braim  (bra-66n), 

Blau,  bliiulich  (bla-ob,  bl6-i'-lic7i), 

Griin,  griiiilich  (grun), 

Built  (boont), 


(NOUNS.) 


Das  Weiss  (vis), 

Das  Schwarz  (sbvarts), 

Das  Blau  (bla-ob), 

Das  Braun  (bra-don), 

Das  Rot  (rot), 

Das  Gelb  (gelp), 

Das  Griin  (griin),  u.  s.  w.. 

Das  scliniutzt  leicht, 

Wascliecht, 


) 

The  color. 

White. 

Black. 

Gray. 

Red,  reddish. 

Crimson. 

Purple. 

Pink. 

Violet. 

Yellow,  yellowish. 

Fair. 

Brown. 

Blue,  bluish. 

Green,  greenish. 

Multicolored ;  variegated. 

White. 

Black. 

Blue. 

Brown. 

Red. 

Yellow. 

Green,  etc. 

That  is  easily  soiled.^ 

Fast  color.2 


1  Lit. :  tliat  soils  easily.  —  2  Vash'-ec/rt'.     Lit. :  washing-genuine. 


364  EINKAUFE. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  then  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  conversa- 
tion, whether  for  self-study  or  preparation  for  the  class-room. 
{See  also  Directions  before  Part  I,) 

GESPRACHE. 

1 .  -  BEIM  HANDS CHUHMA  CHER. 

Eduard,  du  musst  dir  neue  Handschuhe  kaiifen. 
Diese  sind  ganz  abgetragen.^  —  Ja;  weisst  du,  wo  eiii 
guter  Handschuhladen  ist  ?  —  Sieh  da !  Auf  der 
andern  Seite  der  Strasse  ist  einer.^  —  So  lass  uns 
hiniibergehen^  und  welche^  kaufen. 

Was  steht  zu  Ihren  Diensten,  meine  Herren?  — 
Mein  Freund  mochte  gern  ein  Paar  Glaceehand- 
scliuhe  kaufen.  —  Welche  Nummer  haben  Sie?  —  Icli 
weiss  es  wirklich  nicht,  ich  vergesse  die  Nummer 
immer.  —  Diese  werden  Ihnen  passen.  —  Ich  finde, 
sie  sind  etwas  lang  und  zu  eng.  Ich  fiirchte,^  sie 
werden  zerreissen,  wenn  ich  sie  anprobiere.  —  Warten 
Sie!  Ich  will  etwas  Pulver^  hineinstreuen.'^  Jetzt 
versuchen  Sie  es! — Ja,  sie  scheinen  zu  passen;  und 
was  kosten  sie?  —  Fiinf  Mark.  —  Das  ist  zu  teuer. — 
Bitte  um  Entschuldigung,  das  ist  der  ausserste  Preis. 
—  Zeigen  Sie  mir  andere,  die  nicht  so  teuer  sind. — 


Pronunciation  and   Translations. 
^  Ap'-gg-tra'-g'n,  worn  out.  —  2  gee  Grammar,  page  461  note  *. 
8  Hin-ii'-b'r-ga'-'n.  —  *  See  Grammar,  page  492. 
5  I  am  afraid.-     3  Pool'-f  r,  powder. 
7  Hm-in'-s/itro-i'-'n,  to  put  in.     Lit. :  to  strew  in. 


THE    PURCHASES.  365 

Zu  welchem  Preise  wiinschen  Sie  sie  ?  ^  —  Ich  wiinsche 
nicht  mehr  als  vier  Mark  zu  bezahlen. 

2 .  - SCHMUCKSA CHEN* 

Sie  haben  meinen  Sclimuck  noch  nicht  gesehen? 
—  Nein.  —  Nun  dann  ziehen  Sie  die  kleine  Schub- 
lade^  auf;  da  finden  Sie  ein  Kiistchen,^  worin  er 
liegt.  —  Ah!  Der  schone  Kamm!  Und  welch  pracht- 
volles  Halsband!  —  Aber  was  sagen  Sie  zu  den  Ohr- 
ringen  und  den  Armbandern? — Sie  sind  wundervoll. 
Was  fiir  ein  Feuer*  haben  diese  Diamanten!  —  A 
propos,  Sie  wissen,  dass  die  alten  Alchimisten  den 
Diamant^  sowohl  als  auch^  das  Gold^  und  den  Sa- 
phir^  der  Sonne^  geweiht^^  batten.  —  Nein,  das  wusste 
nicht.  —  Ja.  Sie  batten  auch  den  Tiirkis^^  und  das 
Blei^^  dem  Saturnus^^  geweiht,  den  KarneoP^  und 
das  Zinn^^  dem  Jupiter,^^  den  Smaragd^^  und  das 
Eisen  ^^  dem  Mars/^  den  Amethyst  ^^  und  das  Kupfer  ^^ 
der  Venus/2  das  Quecksilber  ^^  dem  Merkur/^  und  das 
KrystalP^  und  das  Silber  dem  Mond.^^ 


Pronunciation   and   Translations. 

1  Lit. :  to  what  price  wish  you  them  ?  Ahglice :  How  high  do  you  want 
to  go? —  2  Slioop'-lii'-de,  drawer.  —  3  Kest'-c/i-'n,  box. 

4  Fo-i'-'r,  fire.     What  a  brilliancy  I  —  ^  De-a-mant'. 

6  As  well  as.     Lit. :  so  well  as  also.  —  ^  Golt.—  ^  Sa'-fer, 

9  Stcn  is  feminine  in  German.     IHe  Sonne  (z5'-ne). 

w  Ge-vit',  from  weilien,  to  consecrate,  to  dedicate. 

1^  Titr-kez'.  —  Bli,  lead.  —  Kar-ne-oV.  —  Tsin,  pewter.  —  Sma- 
rafc/tt',  emerald.  —  I'-z'n,  iron.  —  A-me-tist'.  —  Kdbp'-f» r.  —  Kvek'- 
zil'-b'r,  mercury.     -  Kris  taF. 

i-  Za-toor'-noos.  —  Yoo'-pi-t'r.  —  Mars.  —  Va'-noos.  —  Mer- 
koor'.  — 2>er  Mond,  the  moon. —  =•  Shinook'-za -fc/ten,  jewels. 


366  EINKAUFE. 

To  he  translated  and  written  iyito  German,  hut  also  to  he  recited 
orally  in  the  class-room.     {For  Self-Study,  see  Direc- 
tions, before  Part  I.) 

EXERCISES. 

l.-BEI   DEM    OPTIKER* 

What  do  you  wish,  gentlemen?  —  Let  me  see^  a 
good  opera-glass.^  —  Here  is  one^  of  the  best  quality. 

—  I  cannot  see  anything  with  it.*  What  is  the 
price  of  it?  —  Twenty-five  marks.  —  Isn't  that  very 
dear?  —  Not  for  an  opera-glass  of  that  grade.^ — Is 
that  your  lowest  price  ?  —  Yes,  sir,  it 's  the  very 
lowest.  —  Now,  my  friend  would  like  to  see  a  pair  of 
spectacles.  —  Is  the  gentleman  long  or  short-sighted?^ 

—  I  am  short-sighted.  —  Please  read  this.  —  I  cannot. 

—  Can  you  read  that  ?  —  Yes,  I  can  read  this.  — 
Well,  then,  here  is  a  (pair  of  spectacles)  that  will 
suit  you.' 


Aids  to  Translation, 


1  Zeigen  Sie  mir.     Lit. ;  show  me. 

2  Opernglas,  o'-p'rn-glas',  neuter. 

3  Kines  (or  eins)  not  ein.  When  used  without  a  noun,  the  indefinite 
article  is  declined  like  the  definite  article.  Thus  :  einer,  eine,  eines. 
Seep,  364,  n.  2.  —  *  I  can  nothing  with  it  see. 

5  Von  dieser  Giite.     Lit.  -  of  this  fjoodness. 

6  Weitsichtig  (vit'-zic/t'-tic/i),  oder  kurzsichtig. 

7  One  {feminine)  \vliich  to-you  suit  (passen)  will 
*  At  the  optician's. 


THE    PURCHASES.  367 

2.-IM   KLEIDERGESCHAFT. 

What  can  I  do  for  you,  madam?  —  I  would  like 
to  have  a  suit  for  my  little  boy.  —  Please  pass  this 
way,*  madam.  Here  is  a  very  fine  suit.  —  It  is  too 
light  ;^  it  would  show  the  dirt  too  easily.^  —  Here  is 
something  .  darker.  —  I  do  not  like  blue,t  show  me 
something  in  gray.  —  Here  is  a  dark  gray.  —  It  is 
too  dark,  I  want  something  lighter  .....  Is  this  fast 
color  ?^ — Yes,  madam,  we  warrant  it.*  —  How  much 

is  this  suit  ?  —  Fifty  marks We  have  only  one 

price. 

Note.  —  Study  the   Cases  when   the    Definite   Article   is 
not  used,  page  462.  \ 


3.  —  BEI   DEM   HAARSCHNEIDER. 

How  do  you  wish  to  have  your  hair  dressed^  this 
morning?  —  I   want   to    have    it    curled.^     (Do)   not 

(put  on)  too  much  pomade  ^ You  did  not  brush 

my  hair.^  —  I   beg   pardon,  look   in  this  mirror.  —  I 
was  wrong.^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Hell,  liel.—  2  It  (see  page  814)  would  too  easily  (zu  leicht)  soil 
(schmutzen,  shmoo'-ts'n).  —  3  1st  die  Farbe  eclit  (Sc/it).  Lit. : 
genuine. —  ■*  Wir  stehen  dafiir.     Lit.:  stand  for  it. 

fi  How  will  you  this  morning  your  hair  (n.)  to-make  let? 

8  I  want  it  curled  (gelockt,  ge-lokt').  N-  B.  —  A  curl  =  eine 
Locke.     Curls  =  liOcken.  —  "^  Pomade,/.,  po-ma'-de. 

8  You  have  my  hair  not  brushed  (gebiirstet).  —  ^  I  had  wrong. 

*  Bitte,  hier.  —  f  1  have  blue  not  willingly. 

X  Ein  dunkles  Grau« 


368  EINKAUFE. 

To  be  read  by  means  of  the  notes  in  preparation  for  translating  and 

reading  aloud  in  class.     For  Self-Study,  to  be  translated,  and 

when  thoroughly  understood,  read  aloud  in  German. 


SSSiem— !♦* 

—  9^un,  tt)o  fottefi  it)ir  (;eute  ^inge^en? 

—  3d)  benfe,  \mv  ge(;en  ^uerft  nati)  ber  9?mgftra§e.^  3Bie 
©ie  iDiffeii,  halUn^  manege  Scute  bie  Mngftrafee  fi'ir^  bie 
fd)dnfte  ©trafee  in  ©uro^a;  obglcic^^  ic^  biefe  2lnfid;t  md)t 
teile,  fo  mu^  ic^  bod^  gefte(;eu/  "oa^  fie  eine  :prad)tt)olIe 
©tra^e  ift. 

—  SSarum  ^ei§t^  fie  benn  eigentlid)^  Sf^ingftrafee  ? 

—  5Rim  an§>  bent  einfadjen  ©runbe,  n)eil  fie  faft  einen 
tjollftvlnbigen '^  3?ing  bilbet. 

—  @^  ift  eine  feltfame^  3bee,  eine  runbe  ©trafee  anju; 
(egcn.^ 

—  ^urc^au^  ni^t.  Sie  tDurbe  einfad;^^  an  8teIIe^^  ber 
gcftung^iuerfe  ^^  gebaut,  U)eld)e  bie  ©tabt  friil;er  umgaben.^^ 
3etU  trcnnt^^  bie  ©tra^e  bie  Slltftabt  \)on  ber  Df^euftabt, 
^ueld)e  beilaufig^^  ungefd^r  idjn  mat  fo  gro^  wic  erftere  ift. 
Siber  ha  finb  n)ir  in^tvifc^en  ^^  auf  bem  Mng  angelangt. 


1  Riii'-sfetra  -sS.—  2  Halten  fiir,  to  consider.—  »  Although. 
4  Ge-s/ita'-'n,  to  admit.  —  ^  Heissen,  to  be  called, 
c  Any  way.    Strictly:  properly.—  ^  FSr-s/iten-dic/i,,  complete. 
8  Strange. —  ^  Anlegen  (separable  verb),  to  construct.     T.it. :  to  lay, 
to  put  against. —  i"  Simply. —  n  In  the  site  of. 

12  Fes'-tdons-var'-ke,  fortifications-   from  Festungswerk,  neut. 

13  Imperfect  of  umgeben  (oom-gS'-b'n),  to  surround. 

!•<  Treimen  (tre'-nen),  to  separate.  —  '5  Bi'-l6-T'-fTe/#.,  by  tlie  way. 
JG  Tn-tsvi'-sh'n,  m  tlie  meantime. —  •••  Ven,  Vienna. 


THE    PURCHASES.  369 

—  SStrflid^  gro^arttg!  2Bte  breit  bte  (Strafee  tft,  unb 
ti:)elc^  ^errltd;e  ©ebdube  ^u  beibcn  <Seiten!  Slber  iDa^  ift 
ha§>  fur  ein  fd)dne§  ©ebaube  511  unferer  9^ed)ten? 

—  ®ag  ift  bie  Unii^erfitat.^  (Sie  U)tffen,  bte  mebt5tmfd;e  ^ 
©d)u[e^  ber  SSiener  Umt)erfttat  ift  berii^mt.  ®ie  fd)dnc 
.^ird;e  t)or  ber  Uniijerfitat  ift  bie  ^otit)!ird)e.*  ®er  t)er= 
ftorbene^  ^uifer  3JiapmiIian^  bon  aJieiifo^  liefe  fie  jur 
(Srinneriing  an  bie  gliidlid)e  S^ettiuig^  be§  ^aifcr^3  l^on 
Dftreid;  erric^ten,  beffen  Sebert  burd;  ein  ^ttmtat^  Oebrot;!^^ 
Ujorben  tvat, 

—  3Belc^  geitJattiger  ^au  er(;e6t  fid)  (;ier  gerabe  i?or  un§  ? 

—  ^a§  ift  bie  ^aiferlic^e  ^iing."  (3ie  ent(;alt  einige 
fe^en^rt)erte  SJiufeen.  ^or  attem  mdd;te  id)  3^nen  gem 
bie  ^aiferlid)e  (5d)a^!ainmer  ^^  S^ig^n,  tt)enn  tt)ir  bie  33urg 
bcfud;en.  ®ort  ift  imter  anbern  ^oftbarfeitcn  ^^  ber  Xxa- 
mant  aufbett)a(;rt/*  m^^n  ^arl  ber  ^ii(;ne  t)on  33urgunb  ^^ 
in  ber  (Sd)(ac^t  bei  ©ranfon  Dertor,  unb  tt)eld;er  133 
J!arat^^  tuiegt.  2ln  anberer  ©telle  ift  ein  ©maragb  ^u 
fe(;en,  ber  nid;t  n)eniger  a(^  2980  ^arat  fc^n:)er  ift.  ®ie 
trone^^  ^avl§>  be§  ©rofeen  ift  mid)  bafelbft  aufben^a^rt. 

—  Unb  \va§>  ift  ba§  fiir  eine  ^ird;e  5U  unferer  fiinfen? 

—  ®ag  ift  bie  2luguftiner!ird)e/^  eine  ber  fd)dnften 
^irc^en  2Bien§,  ba^  nid)t  tDeniger  at§  (;unbert  ^ird^en  unb 


1  OO-ne-ver'-zi-t^t', /.,  university. —  2  Ma-di-tse'-ni-she,  medi- 
cinal. 

8  The  facnJtti  of  medicine.     Strictly:  the  medicinal  school. 

^  V6-tef'-kir'-e/ie,  votive  church. —  °  Verstorben,  deceased,  late. 
6  3Iak-si-me-li-an'.—  ^  Mek'-si-ko.—  ^  Jlcscue. 

9  A-ten-tat',  attempt.  —  1°  From  bedrohen,  to  menace,  threaten 
witli.—  11  Ki'-z'r-li-c/fe  h6orch\ 

1-  Shats'-ka'-m'r,  /.,  treasure-room.—  13  Jewels. 

i"*  AiifbeAvaliren,  to  keep,  to  save,  to  preserve. 

15  Bobr-gobnt'.  -  lo  Ka-rat%  carats.—  i^  Crown. 

18  A-oo-goos-te'-u'r-kir'-c/te,  C'liurcli  of  the  Augustinians. 


370  EINKAUFE. 

©^nagogen^  0)lt,  o^ne  bie  ^(dfter  ^u  redjneu.  ^ie  3j[u= 
gufttnerfird)e  ent(;a(t  iibrtgen^  and)  bae  3}ceifteriDcrf  Sano- 
t)a§,  ba§  ©rabmal^  ber  (Sr^l;eqogin  ^  (i:()riftine.*  ©^  ift 
ein§  ber  ^errlid)ften  ^i(bit)er!e,  'i)a^  je  gefdjaffen  tt)orbeu 
ift.  ®a  fallt  mir  eiti/'  id;  mufe  ©ie  morgcn  and;  in  bie 
Jla^iijinerfird^e^  fiil;ren.  ©ie  ift  ebenfo  berii(;int  ai§>  ^(oftei 
mie  a(§  ©rabftdtte'  be§  ungllidlid)en  ^erjogc^  t^oii  3teid)s= 
ftabt,  be§  ein^igen  'Bofyn§>  be§  grogeii  Sla^oleon.  ^a§ 
(Btab  ber  gro^en  S^aiferiu  3J^aria  Xi}u^\ia  ift  ebenfatl» 
bafelbft. 

—  2lber  it)erben  it)ir  nii^t  mid;  ben  ^om  befud;en? 

—  ^a§  Derfte^t  fid;,  ^er  8tep(;an§bom  ift  ein^3  ber  am^ 
ge^eic^neteften  goti^c^en^  ^amuerfe  @uropa§.  2Bir  biirfen 
nidjt  i:)erfdumen,^  i^n  511  befud)en  ^a^u  ift  bie  2Iu§fid;t 
Don  ber  ©^i^e^^  be§  3:^nrme^^  luirftid;  grofearttg,  Tlan 
tann  bon  'Da  bie  berti(;mten  (Sd)lad)tfelber  ^^  Don  3Sagranx, 
:2obau  unb  ©feUngen  fe(;en,  fo^uie  bie  ^^orftdbte^^  2Bien§ 
mit  ber  ^onan.^^ 

—  3ft  itt  ber  £aiferli(f)en  ^nrg  nid;t  and)  eine  @emd(be= 
fmnmlung  ? 

—  ^a§  nid)t.  ®ie  ©emdibegalerie  befinbet  fic^  im 
fogenanntcn  ^ebebere/*  einem  gerdumigen^^  ©ebdnbe  in 
ber  9leuftabt.  ^iefe  ©emdibegalerie  gi(t^^  fiir  eine  ber 
bebeutenbften  Slnnftfammlungen  (Suro^a^.  3lber  fe(;en  ©ie 
biefen  ftattlid^en  '^an  i)or  un§?    2)a§  ift  ba^  nene  D^ern= 


1  Die  Synagoge  (zin  -a-go'-ge),  synagogue. 

2  Grap'-mal',  tomb.  —  3  Erts'-her'-tso-gin,  Archduchess. 
4  Kris-te'-ne.  —  ^  Btj  the  way.     Strictly  :  there  occurs  to  me. 

6  Ka-poo-tse'-n'r-kir'-clie,  Church  of  the  Capuchins. 

7  Grap'-s/i-te'-te,  burying-place.—  8  Go'-tish. 

9  We  rmist  not  fail.  —  i«  Die  Spitze,  top.  —  n  Battle-fields. 
12  Die  Vorstadt  (for'-sJttat),  suburb.  —  13  D5'-iia-oo. 
"  Bel-ve-dar'.  —  i5  Spacious.  —  16  From  gelten,  tolje  considered. 


THE    PURCHASES.  371 

f}au^,  ®a§  alte  ift  t>or  mel)reren  Sa^ren  abgebrannt.^ 
Bk  U)iffen,  bie  SBieuer  finb  6eruf)jnt  fur  i(;re  t)ortreff(tc^e  ^ 
Sluffubrimg  ^  t>on  D^ern. 

—  Srber  l;ore  id)  ba  nicfit  SJliifi!? 

—  3a  iDol;(,  fie  fd;a[lt^  l>om  ^^solf^garteu  ^  beriiber,  ivo 
ba^  befannte  ©traii6'ld)e  Drd)efter  fpielt.  ©ollcn  tt)ir  cttua 
()iiuiberi3e(;eu  uub  bay  S^on5ert  an(;oren? 

—  ^^oinit  bin  ic^  ganj  eiiu^erftanbeii.  3d)  mod)te  bie 
(5trau§'fcl)c  ^apctle^  )d)x  gern  l;breu  unb  aud)  ©traufe 
felbft  gerne  fel;en 

— ^©0,  tDit  Woilm  i)kv  ^la^  nef)men.  25ir  finb  gerabe 
^iir  ^aiife''  t3e!ommen.  2(ber  ba§  mad)t  nid)t^3.  3<^  ^^^ 
fel;r  miibe  unb  Sie  \v>oi)i  and),  unb  fo  fonnen  \v>\v  eine 
gcit  lang  au§ruf)en.  A  propos,  auf  n)e(d)em  2Bege  finb 
(Sie  eigentUd;^  nacb  SSien  gefommen? 

—  3^)  ^^11"  ^^oii  SreSben  unb  bin  iiber  Tlmd^m  gefaf)ren. 

—  ma  ber  (gifenbaf)n? 

—  ^a§>  (;atten  ©ie  nic^t  tf)un  follen.^  (Sie  fatten  in 
Sin^  au^fteigen  unb  'oon  ba  init  bem  ^am^fboot  bie  ®onau 
l;inunter  fafiren  fotten.  ®ie  lifer  ber  ®onau  finb  faft 
ebenfo  fd)i3n  mie  bie  be§  9^(;ein».  ©ie  n:)erben  ba§  felbft 
beurteilen^^  fonnen,  benn  wiv  woiUn  i'lberntorgen  nad)  ^ah- 
lenberg  fabren.  ^ag  ift  ein  fel;r  intereffanter  2lu§f(ug.^^ 
©ine  ^abn,  \vdd)t  ber  9f?igibal)n  ai)nlid)  ift/^  fiU;rt  auf  bie 
§d()e  be§  Merges,  unb  bon  ba  geniefet  man  eine  :prad)tDotte 
2(u§fid)t  auf  bie  ®onau  unb  'ti^n  Wiener  2Ba(b.^^  .... 
Slber  (;oren  (Sie?    ^a  beginnt  bie  3)Zufif  rt)ieber. 


1  From  abbrennen,  to  burn  up.  —  2  Excellent.  —  3  Performance. 

*  To  sound. —  5  Peox)le's  garden. —  ^  Band. 

7  Pa-db'-ze,  intermission. —  8  Any  way. —  ^  See  page  287,  note  1 
w  Judge.  —  11  Excursion.  —  12  Resembles.    Lit. :  is  like. 
IS  The  celebrated  Vienna  forest. 


372  EINKAUFE. 


DIRECTIONS.  —  Translate  and  copy  off  the  following  notes, 
then  learn  them  by  heart,  and  some  time  afterwards  write 
them  again  from  memory.     Consult  pages  48  and  49. 

!♦  — mbfagcbricf.i 


2»  — ^(bfaQcbttef* 


J^^^^^^^.^^^^^'i/^h^H^l^^^^CA     ^^6-«*^^:a«:/5*^«^<^<^;?^;;^!^ 


f^/h*^ 


■^^■^-f-t/^^  VfH^C-^-^^    C^<t>^'P^-*l^^i!>f'^'^-<t<^'ic^^^ 


1  Letter  of  refusal.—  2  A  sudden  indisposition  unfortunately  (lei- 
der)  deprives  Mr.  H.  (lit. :  rohs  me)  of  the  pleasure. —  ^  This  evening 
(lit. :  the  to-day  evening).  —  ^  To  spend. —  ?  Expression  of  the  greatest 
(strictly:  most-lively)  regret. —  ^  Regret  very  much  liaving  already  an 
engagement  for  Tuesday  (lit. :  that  they  for  T.  already  elsewhere  promised 
have). —  7  Which  prevents  their  acceptance  of,  etc.,  (lit.:  and  thereby 
are  hindered to  accept). —  8  Amiable. —  ^  Aunehmen,  to  accept. 


ParI^  IY. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


EIIS^KAUFE. 


•o^* 


SECTION     IV. 


1. 

IN  A  CAB. 

2. 

AT  THE  TICKET  OFFICE. 

3. 

VARIOUS  ARTICLES. 

4. 

AT  A  SILVERSMITH'S. 

5. 

IN  A  STATIONERY  STORE. 

6. 

ON  GOING  TO  BED. 

7. 

AT  THE  CONCERT  IN  VIENNA. 

8. 

A  LETTE?v  FROM  BERLIN. 

873 


374  EINKAUFE. 

rv. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Um  wie  viel  XJhr  glauben   Sie,  dass  ich 
ausgeheii  sollte?^ 

Sie  sollten^  sofort  gehen. 

Das  kann  ich  nicht.     Ich  muss  erst  meine  Briefe 

schreiben. 
An  wen  miissen  Sie  denn  schreiben? 
An  meinen  Agenten  in  New  York. 
Warum  haben  Sie   ihm  vorige  Woche   nicht  ge- 

schrieben  ? 
Ich  habe  ihm  vor  vier  Wochen  geschrieben,  aber 

er  hat  mir  nicht  geantwortet. 
Aber  sehe  ich  recht? 
Nun? 

Da  kommt  meine  Frau. 
Sie  sieht  ganz  verstort  aus. 
Was  giebt  es  denn? 
Ich  habe  die  Etagere  umgeworfen.* 

Und    obendrein    habe    ich    mir   das^   Kleid    zer- 
rissen.f 


NOTES. 

1  Imperfect  subjunctive.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  and  pluperfect 
subjunctive  of  sollen  are  translated  oxight  and  ought  to  have.  Sie  hiit- 
ten  gehen  sollen  =  You  ought  to  have  gove.     Lit. :  you  had  lo-go  ought. 

2  Observe  the  use  of  the  definite  article  instead  of  the  English  pos- 
sessive adjective.  This  is  especially  the  case  when  speaking  of  parts 
of  the  body.  Thus:  Ich  will  mir  die  Hiinde  wasclien=/  will 
wash  my  hands.    Lit. :  /  ivill  to-iue  the  hands  wash,    fcsee  page  35G,  note  2. 


THE    PUKCHASES. 


375 


IV. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  OOm  ve  fel  oor^ 
grla-db^-b'ii  ze  das  ich 
a-o^s^-ga -'n  z6F-t6? 

Kan. 

An  van'. 
A-gen'-t'n. 
Fo'-ri-ge  vo'-khe. 


Za'-e  ich  veoht'l 


Ter-shtiiTt'. 

Gept'. 

A-ta-zha'-re  d6ni'-ge-v6r'- 


f'n. 


At  what  time  do  you 
think  I  ought  to  go 
out? 

You  ought  to  go  (out)  at  once. 
I  can't  (do)  it.     I  must  write 
my  letters. 

Whom  must  you  write  to  ?  * 
To  my  business  agent  in  N.  Y. 
Why   didn't    you    write    him 

last  week? 
I  wrote  him  a  month  ago,^  but 

he  has  not  answered. 

But  what  is  that  ? » 
Well  ? 

There  comes  my  wife. 
She  looks  all  upset. 
What  is  the  matter? 
I  have  upset  the  etag^re. 

And,  besides,  I  have  torn  my 
dress.* 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

The  simple  dative  could  also  be 


1  On  whom  must  you  then  write? 
used :   Went  miissen  Sie,  etc. 

2  Before  four  weeks. 
8  But  see  I  rightly  ? 

^  I  have  to  my  the  dress  torn. 

*  Past  participle  of  umwerf en,  to  upset,  to  upturn. 

t  Past  participle  of  zerreisseu,  strong  verb,  to  tear 


376  EINKAUFE. 

Ja,  ein  Ungliick  kommt  selten  allein. 
Ich  muss  ein  andres  ^  Kleid  anziehen. 


2  Was  ich  sagen  wollte,^  haben  Sie  den 
Herrn  gesehen,  dessen  Haus^  Sie  kau- 
fen  wollten? 

Welchen  meiiien  Sie?     Den,*  an  dessen  Agenten 
ich  mieh  vorgestern  gewendet  habe? 

Nein.     Ich  meine  den   Herrn,  dessen  Besitzung* 
in  Potsdam  ist. 

Ah  so  ?     Nein,  ich  habe  ihn  nicht  wieder  gesehen. 

Warum  nicht? 

Die  Sache  verhalt  sich  so. 

Ich   habe   mich  naher  nach  dem  Besitztum^  er- 

kundigt. 
Nun? 
Und  ich  habe  gehort,  dass  mehrere  Hypotheken 

darauf^  stehen. 
Das  ist  etwas  anderes. 


NOTES. 

1  Short  form  for  anderes.  —  2  Or,  A  propos. 

8  Observe  that  a  clause  beginning  with  dessen  or  deren  is  a  de- 
pendent  clause.  See  page  36.  So  the  verb,  whether  in  a  sinii)le  or 
compound  tense,  is  found  at  the  end  of  the  clause.  But  the  noun  on 
which  dessen  (or  deren)  depends  follows  that  pronoun  immediately. 
That  is,  instead  of  saying,  dessen  Sie  das  Haus  kaufen  wollten, 
we  say  {exacthj  as  in  Eiujlhh),  dessen  Haus  Sie  kaufen  wollten. 

4  Property  =  die  Besitzung,  or,  das  Besitztum. 

fi  See  page  1G8,  note  1. 


THE    PUKCHASES. 


377 


OOn'-glwk'. 


2.  Vas  ich  za^-g'n  v6r-t6 
ha'-b'n  ze  dan  h6rii^  g6- 
za^-'n  de^-s'n  lia-obs^. 


Dan a-gen'-t'n 

ge-ven'-det, 

Be-zi'-tsd6ii. 


Fer-lielt'-zic7t  zo'. 

Be-zits'-toom     er-kdon 
dicTit. 


He-p6-ta'-k'n. 


Well,   you    know  misfortunes 

never  come  singly.^ 
(Well),  I  must  go  and  change 

my  dress.^ 


By  the  way,^  have  you  seen 
the  gentleman  whose 
house  you  wanted  to 
buy? 

What  ?  The  one  to  whose  agent 
I  applied  day  before  yester- 
day? 

No.  I  mean  the  gentleman 
whose  property  is  in  Pots- 
dam. 

Ah !  No,  I  did  n't  see  him 
again. 

Why? 

Well,  now,  the  matter  stands 
tliis  way :  * 

I  have  inquired  more  closely 
after  the  property. 

Well? 

And  I  have  learned  that  there 
are  several  mortgages  on  it.* 

This  is  different.® 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  A  misfortune  comes  rarely  alone. 

2  I  must  another  dress  put  on. 

3  What  I  wanted  to  say  (or,  A,  propos). 

4  The  thing  holds  itself  so. 

5  That  several  mortgages  thereupon  stand.     Hypothek  is  fern. 

6  Tliat  is  something  else  (lit. :  other). 

*  Remember  that  der,  used  as  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  is 
strongly  accented.  Could  also  say,  denjenigen,  accusative  of  der- 
jenige. 


378  EINKAUFE. 

Und  wozu^  haben  Sie  sicli  nun  entsch lessen  ? 
Ich  werde  vor  der  Hand  gar  kein  Haus  kaufen. 

Nun,  sind  Sie  endlieh  fertig? 
Im  Augenblick. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Reflexive  Verbs, 


3.  Kutscher,  iiach  dem  Stettiner  Bahnhof ! 

Sie  miissen  sieh  aber  beeilen. 

Sie  miissen  spatestens  um  8  Uhr  dort  sein. 

Ich  fiirchte,  dass  wir  uns  verspaten.^ 
Davor^  brauchen  Sie  sieh  nicht  zu  fiirchten. 
Wie  dieser  Kutscher  uns  zusammenriittelt ! 

Wenn  Sie   nicht  wollen,  dass  wir   den   Zug   ver- 
saumen,  (so)  miissen  Sie  sieh  *  das  gefallen  lassen. 

A  propos.     Sind  Sie  kiirzlich   bei    Frau   Sporken 

gewesen  ? 
Ich  habe  mir  schon  langst  vorgenommen^  sie  zu 

besuchen. 
Es  ist*  mir  immer  etwas  dazwischen  gekommen. 


NOTES. 

1  See  page  168,  note  1. 

2  Or,  ich  fiirchte,  wir  verspaten  uns.    Sieh  verspaten  (reflex- 
ive verb),  to  be  late.  —  8  gee  page  168,  note  1. 

4  Sieh  means  one's  self,  himself,  herself,  themselves,  yourself  yourselves, 
Sieh  is  in  the  dative  case  :  ich  lasse  mir  etwas  gefallen, 

5  Sieh  (dative)  vornehmen  (reflexive  verb),  to  intend 
*  Es  ist,  there  is.     Lit. :  it  is. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


379 


Ent-stLlo'-s'n. 


Fer  -tio^i. 


But  what  have  you  decided  (to 

do)?i 
For  the  present  I  shall  not  buy 

any  house  at  all.^ 
But  now,  are  you  ready  ?  * 
In  a  minute. 


pages  518  and  519. 


3.    Kobt^-sh'r   wiikh  dam 
s/fct6^-te-n'r   baii^-hof . 

S7ip§.'-t'-stens. 

FlircTi'-te  ....  fer-s?ipa'-t'n. 

Da'-for. 

Tsoo-za'-m'n-rw'-trt. 

Fer-z6-i'-m'n. 

Kwrts'-licTj  ....  sTipor'-k'n. 

For'-ge-no'-m'n. 

Da-tsvi'-stL'n. 


Driver,  to  the  Stettin  de- 
pot!* 

You  must  hurry  up. 

You   must   be  there   at  eight 

o'clock  at  the  latest. 
I  am  afraid  we  shall  be  late. 
No  fear,  hoss.^ 
How  this  coachman  is  shaking 

us! 
If  you  don't  wish  to  miss  the 

train,  you  '11  have  to  put  up 

with  it.« 
By  the  Avay,  did  you  see  Mrs. 

Sporken  lately. 

I  intended   to   call   upon  her 

long  ago. 
But     something     has     always 

come  in  the  way.'' 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  And  to  what  have  you  yourself  now  resolved  (t.  e.,  decided). 

2  I  shall  before  the  hand  entirely  no  house  buy. 

3  Now,  are  you  ready  at  last.  —  *  Or,  Fahren  Sie  uns  nach  dem 
Stettiner  Bahnhof.     Drive  us,  etc. 

5  For-that  need  you  not  to  fear.—  6  If  you  don't  want  that  we 
the  train  miss,  (so)  must  you  to-yourself  that  please  let. 
^  There  is  to-me  always  something  between-that  come. 


380  EINKAUFE. 

Morgen  will  ich  sie  bestimmt  besuchen. 

Da  sind  wir! 

Gieb  mir  Geld  fiir  den  Kutscher. 
Ich  habe  kein  einzelnes  Geld  bei  mir. 
Kutscher,  hier  ist  Ihr  Fahrgeld,  und  50  Pfennige 
Trinkgeld. 


4.  Wiirden  Sie  wohl  so  freundlich  sein  und 
mir  sageii,^  wo  man  die  Billette^  nacli 
Potsdam  nimmt?* 

Gewiss ;  auf  der  andern  Seite  am  mittleren  Schalter. 

Danke  schon. 

Bitte  geben  Sie  mir  2  Billette^  erster  Klasse  nach 

Potsdam. 
Wie!     Sie  geben  mir  bloss  1  Mark  zuriick! 

Das    stimmt.       Zwei    erster    Potsdam    macht    4 
Mark,  und  eine  Mark  sind  5  Mark. 

Sie  haben  mir  doch  einen  Fiinfmarkschein  gegeben. 


5.  Ich  glaubte,  das  Billet  koste    nur  1  Mark 

Ja,  zweiter  Klasse! 


NOTES. 

1  Or,  mir  zu  sagen. 

2  Or,  Billets. 

8  Remember  that  the  Germans  prefer  the  active  to  the  passive  voice, 
whenever  U,  is  jvissililc  to  use  tlie  former. 

•*  Or.  Ich  glaubte,  dass  das  Billet  nur koste  (or,  kos< 

tete),  present  (or,  iinperfect)  subjunctive.    See  page  341,  note  1. 


THE    rUKCHASES. 


381 


Be-s7itirnt'. 


In  -ts'l-nes. 
Far'-gelt'  .  . 


triiik'-gelt'. 


I  will   surely  call  on   her  to- 
morrow.^ 
Here  we  are. 

Give  me  money  for  the  driver. 
I  have  no  change  with  me.^ 
Cab!    here   is   your  fare,   and 
fifty  pfennig;  for  you 


4.  Vwr^-d'n  ze  vol  zo 
fro-int^-lic/^  zin  oo-nt 
mer  za^-gr'n. 

Mit'-le-r'n  slial'-t'r. 


Bios. 

STitimt . 

Fwnf-mark'-stLin' 


Would  you  have  the  kind- 
ness to  tell  me  where 
the  tickets  for  Potsdam 
are  taken  ?^ 

Yes,  sir ;  on  the  other  side,  the 
middle  wicket. 

Many  thanks. 

Two  first-class  tickets  for  Pots- 
dam, please. 

But  you  are  giving  me  only 
one  mark  change.* 

That's  right.^  Two  first-class 
tickets  for  Potsdam  are  four 
marks,  and  one  are  five. 

You  have  given  me  a  five-mark 
bill. 


5.  ich  gla-6i)p^-t^   dg^s 
bil-y6t^ 


I  thought  the  tickets  were 
only  1  mark  SO.*^ 

It  is  the  second-class  ticket. 


LITERAL  TRANSLATIONS. 

1  To-morrow  will  I  her  surely  visit. 

2  I  have  no  single  money  by  me. 

3  Where  one  the  tickets  for  Potsdam  takes. 

*  How  !    You  give  me  only  one  mark  back. 

6  That  agrees.    Strictly  :  is  tuned. 

«  I  believed  the  ticket  cost  only  1  mark  50. 


382  DIE    EINKAUFE. 

Was  kostet  ein  Retourbillet  ? 
Drei  Mark,  erster  Klasse. 
Bitte  geben  Sie  mir  zwei. 
Einsteigen  nach  Potsdam!^ 
Bitte  zeigen  Sie  mir  Ihre  Billets. 
Der  Zug  geht  ab ! 

Noch   nicht.      Sie    haben    Zeit   genug   zum    Ein- 
steigen. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Irregular  Verbs, 


6.  Endlich  sind  wir  unterwegs. 

Wie  herrlich  glanzt  die  Sonne ! 
Das  Gras  sieht  frisch  und  griin  aus,  und  iiberall 
bliihen  die  Blumen. 

Es  ist  wirklich  reizend  auf  dem  Lande. 

Ja,  ganz  anders  als  in  der  Stadt. 

Aber  was  ist  das  fiir  eine  Staubwolke  da  driiben  ? 

Es  ist  eine  Schaiherde,  die  zum  Fluss  hinabeilt. 
Die  Tiere  sind  heiss  und  durstig  und  laufen 
daher  an  das  Wasser. 

Sie  haben  recht.  Aber  das  erinnert  mich  daran, 
dass  ich  auch  durstig  bin.  Sie  steigen  auf  der 
nachsten  Station  aus,  —  wiirden  Sie  nicht  so 
freundlich  sein,  mir  einen  Trunk  Wasser  oder 
ein  Glas  Milch  zu  besorgen?^ 

Gewiss. 


NOTES. 

1  Lit.:  to  get  in  for  Potsdam.     In  phrases  like  the  above  the  infini- 
tive is  used  witli  an  imperative  meaniufj;. 

2  Lit. :  to  prociu-e. 


THE  PURCHASES. 


383 


Re-toor'-bil-yet' 


Gat  ap 


How  much  is  an  excur.  ticket  ? 
Three  marks,  first-class. 

Well,  give  me  two. 
All  aboard  for  Potsdam  !  ^ 
Please  give  ^  me  your  tickets. 
The  train  is  going  to  start !  ^ 
Not  yet.     You  have  plenty  *  of 
time  to  get  on  the  train. 


pages  520  and  521, 


6.  Ent^-lic^  zint  ver  don' 

Glentst'. 
Blii  -'n. 


Ri'-ts'nt. 


SMa-<56p'-v61'-ke. 

Shaf'-iiar'-de liin- 

ap'-ilt'. 


Trd6iik. 


At  last!  — we  are  on  our 
way. 

How  beautifully  the  sun  is 
shining!  The  grass  looks 
fresh  and  green,  and  flowers 
are  blooming  everywhere. 

It  is  really  charming  in  the 
country. 

How  different  from  the  city  ! 

But  how  dusty  it  is  over  there !  '^ 

It's  a  flock  of  sheep  running 
down®  to  the  river.  They 
are  thirsty  and  warm,  and  so 
they  are  going  to  the  water. 

They  are  wise.  And  that  makes 
me  think  I  am  thirsty,  too. 
You  are  going  to  get  out  at 
the  next  station,  —  won't  you 
please  bring  me  a  drink  of 
water,  or  a  glass  of  milk? 

Certainly. 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  To-get-in  for  Potsdam.—  2  Show.—  3  The  train  goes  off. 

4  Enough.—  5  But  what  is  that  for  a  dust  cloud  there  over-there  f 

8  Which  to-the  river  hurries-down. 


384 


EINKAUFE. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  be  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN, 


Verscliiedene   Gegenstande.* 


Loschpapier  (lusii'-pa-per'),  n., 

Ein  Heft,  n., 

Federn  ^  (fa'-d'rn), 

Ein  Federhalter,  m., 

Eiiie  Bleifeder  2  (bli'-fa'-d'r), 

Tinte  (tin'-te),  /., 

Ein  Tintenfass^  (tin'-t'n-fas'),  n., 

Ein  Kupferstich  (koop'-i'r-s/iticTi'),  m., 

Eine  Radierung  (ra-de'-robn), 

Ein  Gemiilde,  n.,  (ein  Bild,  n.), 

Ein  Olgemalde  (ul'-ge-mal'-de), 

Eine  Palette  *  (pa-le'-te), 

Ein  Pinsel  (pin'-z'l), 

Eine  Staffelei  (s7ita'-fe-li'), 

Ein  Rahmen  (ra'-m'n), 

Ein  Schemel  (slia'-in'l),  m., 

Ein  Federmesser  (fa'-d'r-me'-s'r), 

Eine  Broschiire  (bro-shu'-re), 

Ein  gebundenes  ^  Buch  (ge-b66n'-d'-nes), 


Blotting-paper. 

A  copy-book. 

Pens. 

A  pen-holder. 

A  pencil. 

Ink. 

An  inkstand. 

An  engraving. 

An  etching. 

A  picture. 

An  oil-painting. 

A  palette. 

A  brush. 

An  easel. 

A  frame. 

A  stool. 

A  penknife. 

A  paper-bound  book. 

A  bound  book. 


Ein  Bild  malen  lassen, 
Ein  Bild  einrahmen  lassen, 
Ein  Buch  binden  ^  lassen, 


To  have  a  picture  painted. 
"  "  ''  "  framed. 
"       "     "  book  bound. 


1  From  die  Feder.  —  2  Or,  ein  Bleistift  (bli'-s/itiff),  masculine. 
3  Or,  ein  Schreibzeug  (shrip'-tso-ic/i-'),  n. 

*  Or,  ein  Farbeiibrett  (far'-b'n-bref),  u..     Lit. :  color-board. 
6  From  binden,  to  hind.  -  "^  Or,  einbinden. 

*  P5r-she'-d'-ne  gjS'-g'n-s/iten'-dg,  different  articles. 


THE    PURCHASES. 


385 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Bildliche   Redensarten.i 


Was  bedeutet  das  ?  f 

Wie  meinen  Sie  ? 

Lassen  Sie  horen.^ 

Er  ist  mit  einem  blauen  Auge 

davon  gekommen. 
Sie   wisseii,   was    es    wortlich^ 

bedeutet.     Aber  bildlich  ge- 

braucht,*  bedeutet  es : 
Er  ist  niit  eineni  kleinen  Ver- 

lust  davon  gekommen. 
Wie  wurden  Sie  aber  den  fol- 

genden  Satz  iibersetzen  ?  ^ 
Er  ist  nicht  auf  den  Kopf  ge- 

fallen. 
Das  bedeutet : 
Er  ist  ein  kluger  Kerl. 
Sagen  Sie  mir  noch,  was  diese 

Redensart  bedeutet : 
Ich  habe  ihr  ordentlich  den  Kopf 

geivaschen. 
Es  bedeutet : 

Ich  habe  sie  heftig  gescholten.® 
Ihre  Freundin  hat  gewiss  viel 

Arger  mit  ihrem  Dienstmad- 

chen  gehabt. 
Ich    kann    auch    ein    Liedchen 

davon  singen!' 


What  does  that  mean  ? 

What  do  you  mean  ? 

Let  me  see.^ 

(Lit. :  he  has  ivith  a  blue  eye  out- 

of  it  come.) 
You  know  what  it  means  Ht- 

erally.      But    figuratively   it 

means : 
He  has  come  out  of  it  with  a 

small  loss. 
But  how  would  you  translate 

the  following  sentence  ?  — 
(Lit. :   he  has  not  fallen  on  his 

head.) 
That  means : 
He  is  a  shrewd  fellow. 
Just    tell    me    now   what  this 

expression  means : 
(Lit. :    I   have   to-her   regularly 

washed  the  head.) 
It  means : 

I  have  scolded  her  soundly. 
Your  friend  has  certainly  had 

considerable  trouble  with  her 

servant. 
I  have  had  some   experience 

that  way  myself.' 


1  Ra'-dens-ar'-t'n,  expressions. — 2  Strictly:  Let  {me,  understood) 
hear.  —  3  Vurt'-lic/i,  word  for  word. —  ■*  P'iguratively  used. 

5  iibersetzen  (u'-b'r-zet'-s'n)  =  to  translate;  iibersetzen  (u'-b'r- 

zet'-s'n)  =  to  si)ring,  to  set  across.  —  6  From  schelten,  to  scold,  etc. 
7  Lit. :  /  can  also  a  little  song  therefrom  sing.  —  f  Be-do-i'-tSt. 


386  EINKAUFE. 

To  he  learned  by  heart  and  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  conversation, 

whether  for  self-study  or  preparation  for  the  class-room. 

{See  also  Directions  before  Part  I.) 

GESPRACHE. 

1 .  —  BEIM   PAPIERHANDLER* 

Was  wiinschen  Sie? — Ich  mochte  gern  Briefpapier 
haben.  —  Dies  ist  sehr  gutes  Briefpapier.  —  Das  For- 
mat ^  ist  mir  aber  zu  klein.  —  Hier  ist  ein  grosseres 
Format.  —  Dies  ist  gut.  Was  kostet  es? — Das  Buch^ 
1  Mark,  und  der  Bogen  ^  5  Pfennige.  —  Haben  Sie 
kein  billigeres  ?  —  Gewiss.  Dieses  kaiin  ich  Ihneu 
mit    60    Pfennigen    das    Buch    verkaufen.  —  Schon ; 

geben  Sie  mir  ein  Buch  davon Wie  viel  kosten 

die  Converts?*  —  50  Pfennige  das  Piickchen.  —  Geben 
Sie  mir  eins,  bitte.  Wie  viel  macht  das  zusammen? 
—  1  Mark  10  Pfennige.  —  Haben  Sie  auch  Losch- 
papier  ?  —  Ja  wohl.  —  Und  wie  verkaufen  Sie  es  ?  — 
Der   Bogen    kostet    10    Pfennige.  —  Gut ;    ich    nehme 

5  Bogen Wie  viel  wiirden  Sie  fiir  jenes  Tinten- 

fass  rechnen?  —  Welches  meinen  Sie,  dieses?  —  Nein, 
jenes  dort  driiben.  —  Das  kostet  zehn  Mark. 


Pronunciation   and   Translations. 

1  For '-mat',  size  (used  only  of  paper  or  books).  —  2  Quire. 

8  Slieet.  —  ^  Envelopes.  Das  Convert  (koo-verf);  plural,  die 
Converts,  or,  die  Coiiverte;  also,  der  Brief uinschlag  (bref- 
oom'-sliljife/t');  die  Brief  uinsclilage,  lit. :  letter -wrapper. 

••  Pa-per'-lient'-l'r,  stationer. 


THE    PURCHASES.  387 

2. -IN   DER    GEMALDE-AVSSTELLUNG.* 

Da  ist  das  Gebaude  des  Kunstvereins.^  Sollen  wir 
die  Ausstellung  besuchen  ?  —  Sie  wird  noch  nicht 
geofFnet^  sein;   es  ist  noch  sehr  friih.  —  Doch ;  sehen 

Sie,  es  ist  auf  ^ Sehen  Sie  diese  schone  Eadie- 

rung?  — Welche  meinen  Sie? — Dort  links  in  der  Ecke.^ 
Aber  kommen  Sie,  ich  will  Ihnen  das  neueste  Gemalde 

Kaulbachs^  zeigen Was  halten^  Sie   davon? 

—  Ich  muss  gestehen,  es  ist  anmutig  und  gefiillig,' 
aber  es  ist  nicht  sehr  kriiftig.^  —  Sie  haben  recht. 
Es  ist  ziemlich  weich.  Das  werden  Sie  aber  nicht 
von  jenem  Bild  dort  driiben  sagen  konnen.  —  Ah! 
das  ist  eines  von  Meyer's^  beriihmten  Kinderbildern. 
Welche  Natiirlichkeit !  Welche  Mannigfaltigkeit !  ^^ 
Was  fiir  Farben!  Das  ist  das  Leben  selbst.  Man, 
hort  die  Kinder  formlich  ^^  lachen !  —  Das  ist  viel 
gesagt.^^  Aber  ich  kenne  keinen  modernen^^  Maler, 
der  das  heitere  Wesen^*  und  die  Anmut  der  Kinder 
so  natiirlich  wie  Meyer  darstellen  kann. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Koonst'-fer-Ins';  gen.  ofrterKunstverein, art-society. — 2  Open. 

3  Open.  Lit.:  upon.  —  Auf machen  =  opeu ;  zumachen  =  <o  shut. 
Machen  Sie  die  Thiir  auf  =  Open  the  door.  Machen  Sie  das 
Fenster  xu  =  Shut  the  window.  —  ^  E'-ke,  corner.  —5  Ka-dol'-baA:/is'* 

6  Halten,  to  hold,  to  think.  —  ^  Graceful  and  pleasant. 

8  Strong.  —  9  Johann  Georg  Meyer,  a  celebrated  modern  German 
painter.  —  i**  Ma'-nicfe-fal'-tic/i.-kit,  variety. 

11  Furm'-Iic/i-,  almost.  —  12  Anglice :  That  is  saying  a  good  deal. 

13  Mo-dgr'-nen.  See  p.  290,  n.  3.  —  "  Joyful  spirit.  Wesen,  vS'- 
z'n  =  being,  essence,  nature,  etc. —  ■••  A-oos'-s7ite'-ldoS,  exliibition. 


388  EINKAUFE. 

To  be  translated  and  written  into  German,  but  also  to  be  recited 

orally  in  the  class-room.     (For  Self-Study,  see 

Dii^ections,  before  Part  I.) 

EXERCISES. 

l.-AT   A    SILVERSMITH'S.* 

Have  the  kindness  to  show  me  that  tea-tray.^  — 
Which  one  do  you  mean,  sir?  —  The  one^  3^ou 
showed  me  day  before  yesterday.  —  Here  it  is,  sir. 
It  is  a  very  beautiful  thing.^  —  What  is  the  price  of 
it?  —  One  hundred  (and)  seventy-five  marks.  —  That 
is  impossible!  —  But  see  how  fine  the  workmanship 
is,*  sir.  —  Can  you  not  let  me  have  it  a  little  cheaper? 
—  I  think  not.  —  Come.  Tell^  me  your^  lowest  price. 
* — Well,  are  you  ready  to  buy?^  —  Then  I'll  let  3^ou 
have  it  at^  (one)  hundred  and  fifty  marks.  —  Very 
well.     You  may  send  it.^     Here  is  my  address.^^ 

2. -AT   A    STATIONER'S. 'i 

Let  us  go  into  that  stationery  store."  I  want  to 
buy  a  penknife  and  a  blue  pencil  ^^ Please  show 


Aids  to   Translation. 
1  Theebret,  neuter.  —  '^  That  wliich  j'ou  to-rae  day-before-yester- 
(luy  shown  (gezeigt)  have.  —  8  It  is  sometliing  very  beautiful. 
4  Welch  feine  Arbeit  das  isti— •  s  Nennen.  —  6  Tlie. 
"  Will  you  buy  it?—  ^  Fiir.  —  «  Sie  konnen  es  niir  schicken. 
1"  Note  that  the  German  word  Adresse  is  spelled  with  only  one  d. 
li  Papierhandlung, /(Wi/n/^/c. —  i^  JMtiustift,  viascuUne. 
*  Iin  Silberwarengeschaft,  zTr-b'r-vii'-r'n-ge-sheft'. 
t  Papierhiindler,  pa-per'-hSnt'-Pr. 


THE    PURCHASES.  389 

me  a  good  penknife.  —  Here  is  a  four-bladed  one.^ 
Two  blades^  would  do.^  How  do  you  sell  these?  — 
Three  marks.  —  That  is  rather^  dear.  —  The  steel ^  is 
of^  the  best  quality.  —  Very  well,  I'll  take  this  one. 
Why!'  That's  too  bad!^  I  left  my  pocket-book 
on  my  bureau,^  and  I  have  no  change  with^^  me. 
George,  lend^^  me  three  marks  till  this  evening. 


Note.  — Study  the  Use  of  the  Indefinite  Article,  p.  533. 


3.  — ON   RETIRING.* 

John,  put  on  another  cover.^^  I  was  cold  last 
night.^^  Did  you  put  clean  sheets  on,  too?^* — Yes, 
sir. — Very  well.  Will  you  give  me  my  gown^^  and 
slippers?  ....  Thank  you.  Now,  before  you  go, 
light  ^^  the  lamp.     You   will   (come  and)   calP^  me 

very  early  to-morrow  morning By  the  way, 

you  know  Mr.  Korner,  who  comes  to  see  me  some- 
times?^^ Well,  if  he  comes  to-morrow,  tell  him  I 
shall  be  back  at  five  o'clock  precisely.^^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 

1  Here  is  one  (eins)  with  four  blades  (See  note  2). 

2  Blade  =  (die)  K.linge;  fern.—  3  Wurden  gentkgen.—  *  Etwas. 
5  Der  Stahl.—  c  Von. 

7  Oh.  —  8  Argerlich.  —  ^  Schreibtisch,  m. 

10  Bei.  —  11  Leilien.  —  12  Geben  Sie  mir  noch  eine  Decke. 

13  Ich  habe  vorige  Nacht  gefroren;  or,  Es  hat  niich  vorige 
Nacht  gefroren.—  "  Have  you  also  clean  sheets  (reine  Betttiieher) 
brought?—  15  Schlaf rock,  w.  —  I6  Anziinden.—  i^  Wecken. 

18  Zuweilen.—  i^  Punkt  funf  Uhr. 

*  Vom  Schlafengehen. 


390  EINKAUFE. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  notes,  in  preparation  for  translating  and 

reading  aloud  in  German.     For  Self-Study,  to  be  translated, 

and  when  thoroughly  understood,  read  aloud  in  German. 

Sefeftiirf* 
Sm  ^on^cti  in  SSlen* 

—  D  tt)e(d)  (^inreifeenbe ^  M\x\\l\  Unb  iuelcf)  ein  ©^icll^ 
Qd^  ^cibe  ©traufe'fdje  ^cin^e^  mid)  t)on  aiibereu  Drd;cftcrn 
gef)drt,  aber  je^t  fe^e  ic^  ein,  mciw  mu§  fie  in  3Bien  bbren, 
urn  fie  tDiirbigen*  gu  fonnen.  ^a§  ift  alfo  ber  beri'ibiiitc 
©traufe ! 

—  D^ic^t  3c>^^nn  ©traufe,  ber  beriU;mte  3Sa(^er!onitv" 
tt)eld)en  ©ie  mo^l^  meinen,  ber  ift  tot;  e^  ift  fein  6ol)ii, 
ber  aber  nid)t  minber^  beriU;mt  ift  a(g  ber  ^ater.  greilid) 
fodte  man  ben  jungen  ©trmife  e^er®  "iizw  ^olfafbnig^  nennen, 
benn  er  ^ai  a(§  5lomponift^  befonber^  in  ber  ^^olfa  ^^^or= 
treffUc^e^  geleiftet. 

—  fiftreid)  fc^eint  n)ir!(id)  ba§  !(affifd;e  £anb  ber  ^awy- 
mnfif  ^u  fein.  ©inb  benn  nid)t  and)  banner  nnb  @nni3l 
Dftreid)er^^  gert)efen? 

—  @eu)i6,  nnb  banner  ift  nod)  ba^n"  ein  SBiener  ^inb 
ebenfo  tt)ie  (Strang.  ©§  ift  and)  md)t  ^n  t)ertDnnbern/2  baft 
bie  STan^mnfi!  6ei  nn§  blii^t.^^    ©ie  tviffen  bod),  ba^  fein 


1  Hinreissend    (hin''-ri'-s'nt),    charming.     liit. :    '  carry ing-away; 
transporting.  —  2  S/ipel',  play  ;  i.  e.,  performance. 

8  Der  Tanz  (tants),  dance.  —  ^  Vier'-di-g'ii,  to  appreciate. 
6  Val'-ts'r-ku'-nicJi,  pol'-ka — ,  king  of  waltz,  polka. 

6  I  suppose.  —  7  Less.     Also  :  weniger.  —  «  Rather. 

9  Kom'-po-nist',  (composer. —  i"  Austrians. —  n  Moreover. 

12  Astonishing.     Strictly  :  It  is  not  to  wonder  at  (i.  e.,  to  be  wondered  at). 
18  Bluht,  from  blUhen  (blu'-'n),  to  flourish. 


THE    PURCHASES.  391 

3Solf  fo  gern  tanjt^  \mc  wix  Oftreid^er.  3l6er  md)t  blo^ 
bie  Xan^inufi!  ift  in  Dftrciif)  ^u  §au§,  jebe  ©attung^  ber 
3}tii[if  vuirb  l;ier  aufs  eifrigfte^  ge^flegt.^  ©inb  bod)  all 
bie  groBen  bcutfdicu  9)leifter^  ber  2^on!unft^  entmeber  in 
DftreicB  geborcn^  ober  boc^  in  25ien  au§gebi(bet^  tuorben. 
^a  ift  erfteit§  §ai)bn,  ber  ^^ater  ber  neuern  SuftriimentaU 
nuifi!,^  einer  ber  Ueben^iviirbigften  ^^  ^imftler,  bie  je "  gelebt 
l)abm. 

—  Da^  miiB  er  in  ber  Xf)at  gemefen  fein.  SSie  froC;- 
fiimig^^  unb  (;eiter^^  ift  feine  ^iifif!  (Seine  <Bi)n\pi)0' 
nien^*  fiiib  fiir  inid)  nod)  immer  eine  unerfd)i)^f(id;e  ^^ 
Dneaci^  be^  ©emiffe^^.^^ 

—  ^ennen  (5ie  and)  feine  fogenannte  2lbfd)iebs=©l)nT= 
pi)on\c  ?  ^^ 

—  'J^itiirlid; ;  bie  8mnpf)onie,  in  ti)e(d)er  cin  3i^fti'iii"'^nt 
nad)  beni  anbern  t)erftnmnit.^^  3d)  meife  aber  nidit,  anc^ 
me(d)em  5Xn(a^^"  §ai)bn  biefe  ©t)m^()onie  gefcbricben  bat. 

—  ^a^  loill  id)  3^)J^*^i^  fagen.  (Sie  iuiffen  bod),  ha^ 
^iirft  ©ftert^a^t),  ber  ein  Ieibenfd)aftlid)er2^  33eref)rer^  ber 
Tln)\t  \mx,  i3at)bn  ^n  feinem  £a^ctlnteifter  ^^  niad)te;  e» 
bilbcte  fid)  eine  3lrt  grennbfd)aft5bnnb  2*  ,^mifd)en  bem 
^iinftler  nnb  beni  fiirftlid;en  itnnftfrennb.  ^er  5yut:ft  be= 
fd;Io6    aber    enblicf)    an^    6^>arfam!eit§riidfid)tcn2^    feine 


1  Tanzen,  to  dance. —  2  Kind,  sort.—  3  Most  ardently. 

*  From  pflegen,  to  cultivate.     Lit. :  to  nurse.—  ^  Master. 

6  Ton'-kooiist',  music.  —  ^  Ge-bo'-r'n,  born, 

^  From  ausbilden,  to  give  a  tinishing  education. 

s  In-s/itroo-men-tar.  —  ^^  Most  amiable.  —  11  Ever. 
1'^  Cheerful.—  is  Serene,  calm.—  i^  Zim'-fo-iie'-'n. 
^5  Inexhaustible.—  I6  Source. 

I''  Der  Genuss  (ge-noos'),  pleasure.  —  is  Fare\vell-SyTnphonj\ 
19  Leaves  of.     Lit.  :  (^rou's  dumb. —  '■^''  Der  Anlass,  motive,  occasion. 
21  Passionate. —  22  Fer-a'-rer,  worshiper;  i.e.,  friend. 
23  Leader  of  the  band. —  24  Friendly  alliance. 
26  S/ipar'-zam-kits-rick -sic/t-t'n,  motives  of  economy. 


392  EINKAUFE. 

^a^elle  gu  entlaffen.^  §al;bn  \mv  tief  betriibt^  iiber  biefen 
@ntfd)lu6^  feine§  §errn.  2lber  er  madjk  gute  Mene  ^um 
bofen  ©^iel.*  ®r  fdjrieb  eine  neiie  @l;mv^(;onie  fiir  ba§ 
(e^te  ^onjert,  bie  2lbfd)ieb§ft)mp()onie.  (^ine  glcin^enbe  @c= 
fel(fd)aft  mar  t^erfammelt.^  ^ie  ^lii\it  bcr  neuen  (5l;m= 
:p(;ome  begann  liiftig^  unb  ()eiter.  SIber  attina(;Ucf)  tDurbe 
fie  iinmer  iueid)er^  nnh  trauriger.^  (SnbUd)  !Iang  c§  \vk 
fdjmer^tic^ee  ^^ebfdiQen.^  (Sin  3nftriimciit  wad)  beiu  an- 
bern  berftummte,  cm  9)iufifer  narf)  bcm  anbern  blic^^^  mdj 
'^eenbigung  feiner  ^artie  feinc  Sampc  mi§^^  unb  t)cr= 
fc^tt)anb ;  ^^  jute^t  nod;  cine  ©eigenfabcn^/^  and)  bcr  ©ciger 
t)erfd;tDinbet,  bcr  Siebling^Si^ioUnift  bc^  giirftcn.  „3Ba§  fod 
bag  alleg  bebcuten?"  ricf  bcr  giirft  crftaunt.^s  ^^^.^o  |f^ 
unfcr  2lbfcf)icb/'  antmortctc  §at)bn.  „  dliin  id)  iuill  mcincn 
(5ntfd)(u§  micbcr  crmagcn/'^*  fat3te  Iad;cnb  bcr  giirft,  unb 
er  be^ielt^^  bie  ila^cllc  and)  fcrner^^  bet  fid;. 

—  D,  bag  ift  intcrcffant.  dlun  \)crftct;e  id)  bie  Tln\it 
nod)  cinmal  fo  gut.  2lber  bie  Wniit  bcginnt  l^on  ncueni. 
....  211;,  bie  ^ann^dufcr=Dut)crturc !  ^^  .  .  .  . 

—  2Selci)cr  Jlontraftli^  ©traufe  unb  3Sagncr!  2Bag 
^alten  ©ie  eigcntUd^  Don  2Bagner? 


1  To  dismiss.  —  2  Grieved.  —  8  Decision. 

*  Proverb.   He  made  the  best  of  a  bad  thing.     Lit. :  he  made  a  good  face 
to  a  bad  game. 

*  A  briUiant  company  had  assembled. 

*  Merry.—  "<  Weich,  soft. 

8  Traurig  (tra-db'-ric/i),  sad. 

s  Sorrowful  wailing,  va'-kla'-g'n,  i 

1"  From  aiisblasen,  to  blow  out, 
1^  Verschwinclen,  to  disappear. 
12  Gi'-g'n-ka-dents',  violin  cadenza. 
18  Astonished.  —  i4  To  reconsider. 
16  From  behalten,  to  keep. 
16  For  the  future.     Strictly  :  further. 
^  Tan'-ho-i-z'r-oo-v'r-tu'-re.—  is  Kon'-trast'. 


THE  PURCHASES.  393 

—  9^im,  ba^  id)  fein  2Sagner=@ntt)ufiaft  ^  bin,  ba§  Ijahm 
©ie  \v>oi)i  fd;on  cjeinerft.  3c^  glaube  nic^t,  ba§  SSagner^ 
„£imftti)erf  bcr  Suhinft"^  ^ie  D^ernfrage  lolV  aber  ba§ 
mitB  id;  gcfteben,  ha^  feine  ©d^o^fungen  t>on  einem  ge= 
nialeii  ©trebcn*  erflillt  finb,  ba§  SKagnet  ein  bebeutenber 
9)Jaim  gcmefcn  fein  imife. 

—  D(;nc  3^^c^f '-'^  ^  ^^^  ^^  ^^^-  S^ber,  bcr  i^n  ^erfi)nlic^ 
fenncn  gcternt,  \:)at  biefen  ©iitbrucf^  befomnien.  Qd;  felbft 
(;abc  cincr  mir  unt>erge6Iid)en  ©^ene"  beigert)o(;nt,  mo 
Wagner  and)  cine  ben  it)al;r^aft  grofecn  Tlann  i;>erratenbe^ 
^cfd;eibenf)eit  ^  5nr  Sc^an  trug.^^  ©^  mar  auf  einem 
^anfett"  in  ^aireutl;  wad)  ber  erften  luffii^rung  ber 
9^ibelnngeni2  im  ^al)x  1876.  STbbei^  Sifet  fc^te  einen 
golbnen  ^ranj/*  'Dm  Stalien  gefanbt  i)atU,  auf  ba§  §aupt 
be^  ®id)ter§  unb  ^ontponiften.  liefer  aber  na^m  ben 
.^ran^;^  nnb  fe|te  i^n  feiner  @emab(in  anf§  §au^t  mit 
^m  SSorten :  „  2Ba§  ic^  @nte§  gefcbrieben,  ba§  banfe  ^^ 
id)  i(;r;  fie  (;abe^^  ben  ton^/' 

—  SDa§  emig  SBeiblic^eP^  3n  ber  ^^at,  nirgenb^^^ 
(;aben  bie  grauen  einen  grdfeern  (Sinflufe^^  aii^geiibt^  al^ 
in  ber  ^unft. 


J  fen-too-zT-ast'.  —  ^  Art- work  of  the  future. 
3  Losen  (lu^^z'n),  to  solve.—  ■*  Striving. 
5  Without  doubt.—  6  Tn'-drook',  impression. 
■^  A  scene  that  T  will  never  forget. 
8  Betraying,  showing. —  ^  Modesty. 

10  Displayed.     Lit. :  carried  to  the  exhibition. 

11  At  a  banquet.  —  12  Ne'-be-lo62-'n. 
13  A-ba'.  —  14  Wreath,  crown. 

15  Owe.—  16  Subjunctive.    See  page  340,  Section  I.,  par.  1, 

!''■  Womanly,  woman-like. 

18  NTr'-g'uts,  nowhere. —  i9  Influence. 

^  Ausiiben,  to  exercise.  * 


394  EINKAUFE. 


fiottef^jottdeni* 


-^'^'f^ 


'<f-f^ 


THE    PURCHASES.  395 


^.^-^^  ^-^^'-^^^'^■-^ir^t'^^''^^ 


'.^^^ 


/L</c,^^*^f'tf-'*^^t.^^'^^t>^^*^^ 


-^^-t^t-^^^^^C^^^J^^p^^^ 


^^.^f^ 


J^^^^^^ocJe^  ty^T-z^^Xy . 


DIRECTIONS. 

Follow  directions  already  given  on  page  372. 

TRANSLATION. 

We  have  been  already  two  weeks  in  Berlin,  yet  this  is  the 
first  opportunity  I  have  had  to  write  you.^  You  have  lived  so 
long  in  this  splendid  city,  that  I  need  not  to  write  you  about 
the  beautiful  sights^  we  have  enjoyed.  The  magnificent  Tier- 
garten,  the  Brandenburg  Gate,  the  new  Museum,  the  Opera- 
house,  the  king's  palace,  etc.  We  have  seen  and  admired 
everything.  To-morrow,  we  will  (go)  to  Charlottenburg  and 
there  visit  the  Mausoleum.  On  Wednesday  we  shall  go  on 
to  Paris  with  the  lightning  express.  Write  us  to  Paris.  Yours 
very  affectionately,*  — 


1  Strictly :  but  first  to-day  come  I  thereto  (komme  ich  dazu)  to- 

you  to  write. 

2  Strictly  :  the  beauties. 

"  Strictly  :  with  heartfelt  greeting  remain  I,  your  — 


Part  Y. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH 


v^EHGNUGE]sr  u:nd  gesu:n^dheit. 


.©♦o. 


SECTION    I 


1. 

EIN  BESUCH. 

2. 

BLUM  EN:  TIERE. 

3. 

IN  PARIS. 

4. 

IM  GARTEN. 

5. 

EINIGE  SPRICHWORTER. 

6. 

AUF  DEM  BALL. 

7. 

GESPRACHE  UBER  LITTERATUR. 

8. 

EIN  BRIEF  VON  BOSTON. 

V. 


VERGNUGEN     UND    GESUNDHEIT.* 

Seit  zwei  Wochen  habe  ich  nichts  von 
Fraulein  Kaiifmann  geselieii.  Ich  nioclite 
wirklich  wissen,  ob  sie  krank  ist?^ 

Glauben  Sie  docli  das  nicht;  ich  liabe 
sie  soeben  getroffeii,  wie  sie  zweispannig 
im  Grossen  Garten  spazieren  fuhr.^ 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Zit  tsvi  YO^'kh'n  ha^-b6  ic7i  nichts  f6ii  fro-i^-lin 
ka-obf-nian  g-e-za^-'n.  Ich  muc^^-te  virk^-lic/t  vF- 
s'li  op  ze  kraiik^  ist. 

Gla-db^-b'n  ze  d6kh  d^s^  nicht;  Ich  lia^-be  ze  zo- 
a^-b'ii  ge-tro^-f  n  ve  ze  tsvi^-s/*p6'-iiic/i  im  gro^- 
s'li  grar^-t'n  s^p^-tse^-r'n  foor. 


1  See  page  342.  —  ^  Fuhr,  imperfect  of  fahren,  to  go,  to  drive. 
3  Zweispannig  is  here  an  adjective  used  adverbially.     Lit. :   two 
horse-with.     'Turn-out'  has  to  be  supplied. 

398 


V. 


PLEASURES     AND     HEALTH. 

I  have  not  seen  anything  of  Miss  Kanf- 
mann  for  the  last  two  weeks.  I  wonder  if 
slie  is  ill? 

Don't  you  believe  it ;  for  I  have  just 
met  her  in  the  Great  Garden  driving  a 
two-horse  turn-out. 

LITERAL    TRANSLATION. 

Since  two  weeks  have  I  nothing  from  Miss 
Kaufmann  seen.  I  would-like  indeed  to-know  if 
she  ill  is. 

Believe  ye  however  that  not;  I  have  her  just- 
now  met  as  she  a  two-horse  {turn-out)  ^  in-the  Great 
Garden  to-promenade  drove,^ 


*  To  go  out  driving  =  Spazieren  fahren.     Lit.:   to   {promenade) 
drive.     See  ])age  60. 

*  Fer-gnU'-g'n  dont  ge-zoont'-hit. 


400  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 


I. 

GERMAN. 

1.   Seit   zwei  Wocheii   liabe    ich    nichts  von 
Fraiileiii  Kaufinaun  geselieii. 

Waiiii  ^  habeii  Sie  Fraulein  Kaufmaiin  zum  letzten 

Mai  gesehen? 
Ich   kanii   Ihnen   nicht  genau   sagen,  wann^  ich 

sie  zuletzt  gesehen  habe. 
Ich  glaube  aber,  dass  es  wenigstens  *  zwei  Wocheii 

her  2  ist. 
Glauben  Sie,  dass  sie  krank  ist? 
Keine  Idee.     Ich  habe  sie  gestern  abend  gesehen, 

als  ich  aus  dem  Theater  kam. 

Sie  sah  gar  nicht  aus,  als  ob  sie  krank  ware.^ 

Sind  Sie  dessen  sicher?t 
Ich  weiss  es  ganz  bestimmt. 
tJbrigens  sehe  ich  sie  fast  jeden  Tag.  | 


NOTES. 

1  Observe  that  the  English  conjunction  when,  in  direct  or  indirect 
questions,  is  rendered  by  "wann  and  not  by  weiin.  N.  B.  — Wann  is 
also  used  (wninterrogatively)  in  the  sense  of  whenever:  Sie  koniien 
koininen,  tvann  Sie  wollen  {whenever  you  like). 

^  Her  (lit. :  lather,  here,  this  way),  calls  the  attention  more  pointedly 
to  the  time  since  which  a  thing  has  7iot  taken  place.  Ex. :  Wie  lange 
ist  es  her  ?  =  How  long  ago  is  it  ?  Lang,  lang  ist's  her  i  —  Long, 
long  ago!    Her  can  he  omitted. 

3  Or,  als  ware  sie  krank.    See  page  342. 


PLEASUKES    AND    liEALTH. 


401 


PRONUNCIATION. 


I. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.   Zit    tsvi    \6''-kh*i\    ha^- 
b6  ich  uichtii  fon. 

NicTit  ge-na-do' tsoo- 

letst'.  "" 


Va'-nic7t-st'ns li§.r'. 


I-da' te-a'-t'r. 

De'-s'n  zi'-ch'r, 
XJ'-bri-g'ns. 


It  is  two  weeks  since  I  saw 
Miss  Kaufniann  last.^ 

When  did  you  see  Miss  Kauf- 
mann  last  ?  ^ 

I  can 't  tell  you  when  I  saw 
her  last. 

But  I  think  that  it  is  at  least 
two  weeks  ago. 

Do  you  think  she  is  ill  ? 

No,  I  don't.*  I  saw  her  yester- 
day on  my  way  from  the 
theater.* 

She  did  n't  look  as  if  she  were 
ill. 

Are  you  very  sure  of  it  ? 

I  am  positive  about  it.^ 

Besides,  I  see  her  almost  every 
day. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Since  two  weeks  liave  I  nothing  of  Miss  Kaufniann  seen. 

2  Also.  Seit  wann  haben  Sie  Fraulein  Kaufmann  nicht  ge- 

seheu  ?  —  ^  ISo  idea. 

^  1  have  her  yesterday  evening  seen  wlien  I  out  to-tlie  theater  came. 

5  I  know  it  qnite  positively. 

••'  Or,  niindestens. 

t  Or,  gewiss. 

X  Tag,  iiiasculine  noim,  strong  declension,  third  class  (genitive  singu- 
lar in  8  or  es;  plural  in  c). 


402  VERGNUGEN    VND    GESUNDHEIT. 

Note.  —  Study  the  use  of  the  auxiliaries 


2,  Johanii,  ist  jeniaiicl  da  gewesen?* 

Nein,  giiadige  Fran,  es  ist  niemand  gekommen. 

Es  hat  gekliiigelt.^ 

Herr  Kronenberg  wiinscht  Sie  zu  sprecben. 

Guten   Tag,   Herr   Kronenberg.      Bitte   legen   Sie 
ab  und  machen  Sie  es  sich  bequem. 

Danke  schon.      Ich   fiihle  mich   sehr  behaglich^ 

in  diesem  Sessel.* 
Und   wie    ist    es    Ihnen    ergangen,*   seit   ich    Sie 

zuletzt  gesehen  habe. 
Ich  war  vier  Wochen  f  auf  dem  Lande  und  bin 

i miner  wohl  gewesen. 

Und  was  macht  Ihre  Familie? 
Danke,  es  geht  alien  gut.     Darf  ich  mich  erkun- 
digen,  wie  es  Ihnen  geht? 

Hoffentlich  befinden  Sie  sich  ebenfalls  wohl. 
Gottlob,^  ja.     Haben  Sie  Nachrichten^  von  Ihrem 
Sohn? 


NOTES. 

1  Or,  Hat  jemand  nach  mir  gefragt?  —  2  Or,  Es  hat  gescliellt. 

3  Bequem  is  never  used  directly  of  persons.  We  can  say  :  Machen 
Sie  sich  es  bequem  (lit. :  viake  it  to-yon  comfortnhh).  But  never 
say,  Ich  fiihle  mich  bequem;  or.  ich  bin  bequem.  Used  tlius, 
bequem  means  idle.  Hence,  I  am  comfortnhfc  =^  Ich  fiihle  mich  sehr 
behaglich.     Lit.:   I  feel  myself  very  comfortable. 

^  From  ergehen,  niseparable  verb.  —  ^  Lit. :  God-praise.  Also, 
Gott  sei  Dank  (got  zT  daiik');  lit. :  God  he  tliauk.-. 

8  Die  Nachricht,  feminine  noun,  weak  declension  {plural  in  en). 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


403 


Haben  and  Sein,  page  519. 


2.   Yo-lian^    ist 
da^  ge-va^-z*!!, 

Ne'-mant. 

Ge-klin'-'lt. 
Kro'-nen-barcTi. 

La'-g'n  ze  ap'  . 
kvam'. 


ya^-mant 


be- 


"Be-iiakh'-lich 

Er-gan'-'n. 

Vol'. 


Fa-me'-li-e. 
Er-k(56n'-di-g'n. 


A'-b'n-fals'. 

Got'-lop'  ya' 
Tich'-Vn. 


ze'-s'l. 


nakh' 


John,  has  any  one  been 
here  ? 

No,  ma'am.     Nobody  came. 

Some  one  has  ruiig.^ 

Mr.  Kronenberg  would  like  to 
see  you. 

Good  morning,  Mr.  Kronen- 
berg. Take  off  your  overcoat 
and  make  yourself  comfort- 
able. 

Thanks.  I  feel  very  comfort- 
able in  this  arm-chair. 

And  how  have  you  been  since 
I  saw  you  last  ? 

I  was  in  the  country  for  four 

wrecks,  and  have  been  well 

all  the  time. 
And  how  is  your  family? 
Thank  you,  everybody  is  well. 

May   I    inquire   about   your 

health  ? 
You  are  also  well,  I  hope.' 
Oh,  yes,  indeed.    Have  you  any 

news  from  your  son? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  It  has  rung.  Could  also  be  es  hat  jemand  geklingelt,  but 
the  impersonal  use  of  klingeln  (also,  schellen)  is  more  frequent. 

2  Make  ye  it  to-yourself  comfortable. 
2  Hopin|:j;ly. 

•••  Der  Sessel,  arm-chair.  Noun  of  the  strong  declension,  first  class 
{ijeiMrc  swg^dar  in  s,  no  ending  in  plural).  Also,  der  Lehnstuhl 
(lan'-s/ftool  ). 

t  Woclien,  accusative  i)lural.  Woche,  feminine  noun,  weak  de- 
clension (j>^»r«n?i  cm).     Seepage 


404  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

Er   teilte    uns    gestern    mit/    dass    er    von   Wien 

abgereist  sei. 
Wir  erwarten  ihn  jeden  Tag. 


Note.  — Study  the  uses  of  the  Infinitive,  pp.  524-5. 


3.  Wie?    Sie  woUeii  schon  gehen? 

Es  thut  mir  sehr  leid,  aber  ich  muss  fort. 

Meine  Frau  erwartet  mich. 

Wir  wollen  eine  Vorlesung*  von  Professor  Momm- 

sen  besuchen. 
Ich  muss  vor  6  Uhr  zu  Hausef  sein. 
Dann  will  ich  Sie  nicht  zuriickhalten. 
Wann^  werden    Sie    uns   wieder    das  Vergniigen 

bereiten  ? 

Ich   werde    Sie    bald    wieder   besuchen,   ich    ver- 

spreche  es  Ihnen. 
Hal  ten  Sie  aber^  auch*  WortlJ 
Bitte  bemiihen  Sie  sich  nicht. 
Erlauben    Sie    mir,    Sie    bis    an    die    Thiire    zu 

begleiten. 


NOTES. 

1  From  mitteilen,  separable  verb. 

2  Remember  that  in  questions,  the  English  when  is  to  be  rendered 
by  wann.  Elsewhere  it  is  rendered  by  wenn,  or  als  (except  when 
meaning  whenever,  wlien  it  is  also  rendered  by  wann). 

8  Notice  that  aber  is  not  always  first.     Lit. :  keep  ye  but  also  word. 

*  Auch  in  the  above  phrase  answers  the  English  .mreb/,  without  /nil. 
Likewise  in  the  phrase:  Werden  Sie  es  auch  thun?  Will  you  be 
sure  to  do  itf    Lit. :  will  you  it  also  (i.  e.,  surely)  do? 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


405 


Er-var'-t'n 
takh'. 


ya'-d'n 


He  wrote   me   yesterday   that 
he  left  Vienna.^ 

We  are   expecting  him   from 
day  to  day .2 


paragraphs  I,  2,  and  3. 


3.   Ve?     Ze   v6M'n    shoii 

Ich  mdbs  fort'. 

Er-var'-tet. 

For'-la'-z6t)n pro-fe'- 

s6r. 

Tsoo-rwk'-tLal'-t'n. 
Be-ri'-t'n. 

Fer-s7ipre'-c7ie. 
Vort'. 


Er-la-d6'-b'n 
t'n.      '^ 


be-gli' 


What !  You  are  groing-  to 
leave  already?^ 

I  am  very  sorry  to  leave  you, 

but  I  must.* 
My  wife  is  expecting  me  (then). 

We  are  going  to  a  lecture  by 
Professor  Mommsen.^ 

I  must  be  home,  etc. 
Then  I  will  not  keep  you. 

When  will  you  do  us  the 
pleasure  (to  come  and  see 
us)  again? 

I  shall  call  again  soon,  I 
promise  you. 

Be  sure  and  do  so. 

Don't  disturb  yourself,  pray. 

I  will  see  you  to  the  door.^ 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  That  he  from  Vienna  departed  be.    For  the  subjunctive,  see  p.  340. 

2  We  expect  him  every  day.—  ^  How?    You  will  already  go? 
'*  But  I  must  away  {i.  e.,  go). 

5  We  will  a  lecture  of  Professor  Mommsen  visit. 

6  Allow  me  to  accompany  you  (until)  to  the  door. 
■^  Feminine  noun,  weak  declension  {plural  m  en). 

t  Neuter  noun,  strong  declension,  fifth  class.        Plural :  Hauser. 
X  Neuter  noun,  strong  declension,  fifth  class.        Plural  :  Wdrt«r. 


406  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

Empfehleii  Sie  mich  Ihrem  Herrii  ^  Gemahl,  bitte. 
Danke.     Griissen  Sie  Ihre  liebe  Frau  bestens ! 

Leben  Sie  wohl,  gnadige  Frau! 
Adieu,  Herr  Kronenberg!     Auf  baldiges  Wieder- 
sehen ! 


Note — Study  the  Interrogative  and  Indefinite 


Jetzt   miissen   wir   uns    fiir   deii    Abend 
vorbereiten. 

Die  Gaste  werden  bald  kommen. 

Erwarten    Sie    heute    abend    eine    grosse    Gesell- 

schaft? 
Nein,  denn  mehrere  von  unseren  Freunden  sind 

bereits  aufs  Land  gegangen. 

Ich    kann    es    niemandem  ^    verdenken,    der    die 

heisse  Stadt  verlassen  kann. 
Das  Wetter   ist   fiir   die   Jahreszeit  ungewohnlich 

warm  und  schwiil. 
Da  fallt  mir  ein,  haben  Sie  schon  Ebers'  neuesten 

Roman  gelesen? 
Nein,  ich  wollte  ihn  lesen  und  fragte  beim  Bucb- 

handler   darnach,  aber  er  war  nicht  mehr   zu 

haben.^ 
Das  Buch  verkauft  sich  so  schnell,  dass  der  Vorrat 

ausgegangen  war. 


NOTES. 

1  Weak  declension  [plural  hi  n  or  en). 

2  Or,  niemanden;  or,  niemand.    See  p.  404, 

3  Not  more  to  have.    Tlie  infinitive  following  to  he,  is  used  in  the 
active  form  in  German  instead  of  the  passive.    See  page  525,  par.  4, 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


407 


Em-pfa'-rn. 

Vol'. 

Bal'-di-ges  ve'-d'r-za'-'n. 


My  regards  to  your  husband. 
Thank  you.     My  kind  regards 

to  your  wife. 
I  wish  you  good-day. 
Good-by,  Mr.  K.     We  hope  to 

see  you  again  before  long.^ 


Pronouns,  pages  492-4. 


4.  Yetst  mii^-s'ii  ver  dons 
fiir  d'li  a^-b'nt  for^-be- 
ri-t'ii. 


A-6bfs  lant'. 


Fer-den'-k'n. 


OOn'-ge-van'-licTi- 

shviil. 


A'-b'rs  no-i'-'st'n  ro-man'. 


For'-rat' 


Now  we  must  prepare  for 
the  evening. 

People  will  soon  begin  to  come. 
Do  you  expect  a  great  deal  of 
company  to-night? 

Not  a  great  deal,  because  some 
of  our  friends  have  already 
gone  to  the  country. 

I  don't  blame  them ,  if  they  ^  can 
get  away  from  the  hot  city. 

The  weather  is  unusually  warm 
for  the  season. 

By  the  way,^  have  you  read 
Ebers'  latest  novel? 

No,  I  wanted  to  read  it,  and 
called  for  it  at  the  bookstore, 
but  it  was  not  to  be  had. 


The   book   sells    so  fast, 
were  quite  out  of  it.* 


they 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Upon  speedy  again-seeing. 

'^  /  can  grudge  it  to  no  one  who,  etc. 

3  Tliere  occurs  to-nie  in.     Einfallen,  separable  verb,  =  to  occur. 

-*  The  book  sells  itself  so  fast  that  the  stock  out-gone  was,  idiomatic. 


408 


VERG^'UGEN    UND    GESUJNDHEIT. 


IDNPERSONAL    VERBS. 

Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  refer  to  an  action 
without  the  iiise  of  a  personal  subject.  These  verbs  are  always 
in  the  tliird  person  singular,  and  in  German  the  impersonal 
pronouns  generally  take  es  as  their  subject. 

I.  Most  hnpersonal  verbs  are  conjugated  with  haben : 

SPECIMEN    OF    CONJUGATION. 

.  INDICATIVE. 


Present. — 
Imperfect. — 
Perfect. — 
Pluperfect. — 
First  Fut. — 
Second  Fut. — 
First  Condi. — 
Second  Condi.- 


Es  regnet, 

Es  regnete, 

Es  hat  geregnet, 

Es  hatte  geregnet, 

Es  wird  regnen, 

Es  wird  geregnet  haben, 

Es  wiirde  regnen, 

■Es  wiirde  geregnet  haben. 


It  rains. 

It  rained. 

It  has  rained. 

It  had  rained. 

It  will  rain. 

It  will  have  rained. 

It  would  rain. 

It  would  have  rained. 


Present. — 
Imperfect. — 
Perfect. — 
Pluperfect.- 
FiRST  Fut. — 
Second  Fut.- 


SUBJUNOTIVE. 

Es  regne, 

Es  regnete, 

Es  habe  geregnet, 

Es  hatte  geregnet, 

Es  werde  regnen 


It  may  rain. 
It  might  rain. 
It  may  have  rained. 
It  had  rained. 
It  will  rain. 


Es  werde  geregnet  haben.  It  will  have  rained. 


II.  —  Most  verbs  may  be  used  impersorially .  Thus 
Iclingeln,  to  ring;  es  klingelt,  the  bell  rings  (lit.:  it  rings)., 
folgen,  to  follow  ;  es  folgt,  it  follows. 


The  following,  however,  are  absolutely  impersonal  verbs 

Es  donnert,  It  is  lightning.  Es  frier t.       It  is  freezing. 

Es  blitzt,       It  is  thundering.  Es  regnet,     It  rains. 

Es  hagelt.     It  is  hailing.  Es  schneit,   It  snows. 


THE    PURCHASES.  409 

m.  —  Many  vet'bs  which  are  personal  in  Enghsh  are  im- 
personal in  German.     Thus : 

Es  bangt  mir,i  I  am  afraid  (lit. :  it  frightens  me). 

Es  fehlt  mir,  I  want  (lit.:  it  fails  me). 

Es  gelingt  mir,^  I  succeed  (lit. :  it  succeeds  to-me). 
Es  diirstet  mich,  I  am  thirsty  (lit. :  it  thirsts  to-me). 
Es  fragt  sich,  It  is  a  question  (lit. :  it  asks  itself), 

Es  freut  mich,^         I  a7n  glad  (lit. :  it  rejoices  me). 
Es  friert  mich,*        I  am  cold  (lit. :  it  freezes  me) . 
Es  hungert  mich,^  I  am  hungry  (lit, :  it  hungers  me). 
Es  jammert  mich,   I  am  sorry  (lit, :  it  grieves  me). 
Es  rent  mich,  I  repent  (lit, :  it  repents  me). 

Es  wundert  mich,*  I ivonder  (lit. :  it  wonders  me). 

ji  V.  Intransitive  verbs  (like  gehen,  to  go),  which  other- 
wiftft  are  never  used  in  the  passive  voice,  may  become  passive 
if  U8ed  impersonally.     Thus  : 

Es  wird  sehr  schnell  gegangen  =  We  are  going  very  fast 
(lit. :  it  is  very  quickly  gone). 

Bei  uns  wird  viel  gesungen=  With  us  (i.  e.,  in  our  club, 
society,  etc.)  we  sing  a  great  deal  (lit. :  is  a-great-deal  sung). 

Note  1.  —  The  impersonal  subject  es  may  be  omitted  except  with 
verbs  indicating  the  phenomena  of  nature  (as,  es  regnet).  Thus:  I 
am  a/raid  =  Es  ist  mir  bange;  or,  simply,  Mir  ist  bange. 

Note  2. —  There  is,  there  are,  are  rendered  either  by  es  giebt  (for 
both  numbers),  or,  es  ist,  es  sind.  They  are  rendered  by  es  giebt 
when  tlie  meaning  is  of  a  general  nature.  Ex.:  There  are  many  bad 
books  =  Es  giebt  viele  schlechte  Biiclier. 

They  are  rendered  by  es  ist,  or  es  sind,  when  the  meaning  is  of 
a  personal  or  particular  nature.  Ex. :  T/icre  are  many  books  on  this 
table  =  Es  sind  viele  Biiclier  auf  diesem  Tisch. 

Note  3.  —  In  order  to  lay  a  special  stress  on  tlie  subject  of  a  sen- 
tence, the  Germans  often  begin  a  sentence  with  es  preceding  the  verl), 
while  the  real  subject  is  made  to  follow  it.  Thus  :  Some  soldiers  cnme  = 
Es  kamen  Soldate/n.''  No  other  road  goes  to  Kussnacht  =  'Es  fiihrt 
kein  andrer  Weg  nach  Kiissnacht  [lit. :  it  (i.  e.,  there)  leads,  etc.]. 


1  Or,  Es  ist  mir  bange. —  2  Perfect:  T succeeded,  Es  ist  mir  ge- 
luugen;  or.  Es  hat  (or  ist)  mir  gegliickt. —  ^  Oj-  leh  freue 
mich.  —  4  Or,  Ich  f riere.  —  ^  Or,  Ich  hungre. 

®  Or,  Ich  wundere  mich.  —  "^  Lit. :  It  (i.  e.,  there)  came  soldiers 


410  VERGNUGEN     UN!)    GESUNDHEIT. 

The  following  vocnhuhry  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


I.— Blumen.* 


Die  Rose  (ro'-ze), 

Die  Kamelie  (ka-ma'-li-e), 

Die  Tulpe  (tool'-pe), 

Das  Veilchen  (fil'-cTi'ii), 

Die  Lilie  (le'-li-e), 

Der  Flieder  (fle'-d'r), 

Das  Gras  (gras), 

Das  Blatt  (blat), 

Das  Laub  (la-d6p), 

Das  Vergissmeinnicht  (fer-gis'-min-nic7it') 

Das  Geisblatt.(gis'-blat'), 

II.  — Tiere.1 
Der  Hund, 
Die  Katze  (kat'-se), 
Das  Pferd  (pfart), 
Der  Ochse,  die  Kuh  (6k'-se,  koo), 
Das  Schaf  (shaf), 
Die  Ziege  (tse'-ge), 
Der  Vogel  (fo'-g'l), 
Der  Flugel  (flu'-g'l), 
Die  Feder  (fa'-d'r), 
Die  Hiiliner  (h.u'-n'r), 
Das  Huhn,  die  Henne  (hoon,  he'-ne), 
Der  Hahn  (h.an), 
Die  Fiichsjagd  (fdoks'-yaTcTif), 
Auf  die  Jagd  gehen, 


The  rose. 

The  camelia. 

The  tulip. 

The  violet. 

The  lily. 

The  lilacs. 

The  grass. 

The  leaf. 

The  foliage. 

The  forget-me-not 

The  honey-suckle. 

The  dog. 
The  cat. 
The  horse. 
The  ox,  the  cow. 
The  sheep. 
The  goat. 
The  bird. 
The  wing. 
The  feather. 
The  chicken. 
The  hen. 
The  cock. 
Fox-hunting, 
To  go  hunting. 


*  Die  Blume  (bloo'-m5),  flower.  —  f  Das  Tier  (ter),  animal. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  411 

To  he  learned  by  heart  arid  then  repeated  aloud  as  a  real  conversa- 
tion, whether  for  self-study  or  preparation  in  the  class-room. 
{See  also  Directions  before  Part  J.) 


GESPRACHE. 

I.- IN   PARIS. 

Ah,  guten  Tag!     Sie  sind  es?     Ich  wusste  nicht, 
dass  Sie  in  Paris  waren.     Sind  Sie  schon  lange  hier  ?  ^ 

—  Nein,  ich  bin  soeben  erst  angekommen,  aber  wie 
lange  sind  Sie  schon  in  Paris?  —  Erst  seit  zwei  Mo- 
naten.  —  Und  was  halten  Sie  von  der  Ausstellung?^ 
Glauben  Sie,  dass  dieselbe  von  Erfolg^  sein  wird?  — 
Das  ist  ganz  ausser  Zweifel.^  Sie  werden  sich  hier 
gewiss  sehr  gut  unterhalten.^  A  propos,  was  sagen 
Sie  zu  dem  EifFelturm?^  —  Ich  habe  ihn  noch  nicht 
gesehen,  ich  werde  erst  heute  nachmittag  die  Aus- 
stellung  besuchen. 

2.-IM    GARTEN. 

Ist  die  Mutter  im  Garten?  —  Ja,  komme  doch  mit! 

—  Sobald  *"  ich  meinen  Hut  geholt  habe.  Hier  bin 
ich.  —  Wie  schon  sind  die  Blumen  jetzt!  —  Lass  uns 
einen    Strauss^   fiir    Mama   binden.^  —  Schon,    nimm 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Have  you  been  here  long?  For  the  use  of  present  tense  instead  of 
the  perfect,  see  p.  256,  n.  4.—  2  Exhibition.—  3  Von  Erfolg  (er-folc/i'), 
a  success.     Strictly:  of  s^uccess. —  *  Without  doul)t. —  ^  Amuse. 

6  F-f  l-toorm',  ]•>; (Tel -tower. —  ^  As  soon  as.—  8  S/ttra-oos,  nose- 
gay: also,  eiti  Bouquet  (boo-kef)  neut. —  ^  Make.     Lit.:  bind. 


412  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

diese  gelbe  Rose  fiir  die  Mitte/  und  hier  sind  noch 
zwei  weisse  und  drei  rote  Rosen. — Bitte  pfliicke^  auch 
einige  Nelken.^ — Aber  nimm  dich  in  acht,*  du  trittst^ 
auf  das  Blumenbeet.^  —  Jetzt  lass  uns  ins  Haus  gehen, 
es  lautet^  zum  Mittagessen. 

3.  — VON  SPRICHWORTERN* 

Ich  habe  die  Sprichworter  so  gern;  sie  sagen  uns, 
wie  ein  Volk  denkt  und  fiihlt.  Haben  die  Deutschen 
nicht  auch  viele  Sprichworter?  — Ja,  gewiss.  Ubri- 
gens^  haben  die  Englander  und  Deutschen  sehr  viele 
Sprichworter  gemein.^  Vergleichen  ^^  Sie  nur  das 
deutsche  ^^  Der  Mensch  denkt,  Gott  lenkt,"  ^^  mit 
dem  englischen,  '^Man  proposes  and  God  disposes ; " 
^^  Ende  '^  gut,  alles  gut,"  mit  ^^All  's  well  that  ends 
well"  u.  s.  w.  —  Aber  sind  nicht  die  deutschen  Sprich- 
worter poetischer  ^^  als  die  englischen  ?  Meine  Freun- 
din  gebrauchte  ^*  neulich  z.  B.  f  ein  deutsches  Sprich- 
wort,  das  mir  so  gut  gefallen  hat :  <^  Morgenstunde  hat 
Gold  im  Munde."  ^^    1st  das  nicht  ein  hiibsches  Bild  ? 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Put  this  yellow  rose  in  the  middle.  —  ^  Pfliicken  (pflie'-k'n),  to 
pluck,  to  pick. —  8  Die  Nelke  (neP-ke),  pink.  —  ^  Take  care. 

6  From  treten,  to  step.  —  6  Flower-bed.  —  ^  The  bell  rings. 

8  Besides.—  9  'In  common,'  —  w  Compare. 
"  From  lenken,  to  direct.  —  12  Das  Ende,  the  end. 
^  Po-a'-ti-sh'r,  more  poetical.  —  i^  Used. 
16  This  proverb  answers  the  English  :  Early  to  bed,  early  to  rise,  etc. 

*  About  proverbs.    Das  Sprichwort  (sli.pricli.'-v6rt'),  the  proverb 

t  Abbreviation  for  zum  Beispiel. 


4 

PLEA8UKES    AND    HEALTH.  413 

SaTTie  directions  as  heretofore  to  be  followed.     (For  Self-Study,  see 
Directions,  before  Bart  J.) 


EXERCISE. 
AUF  t>EM  BALL. 

What  a  charming  party !  ^     What  a  brilliant  sight !  ^ 

—  Is  it  not  ?    This  is  a  fine  ball I  would  like 

to  make  the  acquaintance^  of  that  young  lady.  Will 
you  be  so  kind  as  to  introduce*  her  to  me?  —  With 
pleasure.  Miss  Kaufmann,  I  have  the  honor  to  pre- 
sent to  you,  Mr.  Korner.  —  I  am  very  much  pleased^ 
to  make  your  acquaintance.  I  have  heard  so  much 
of  you.  —  You  are  very  kind.  Would  you  do  me  the 
favor  to  dance ^  this  quadrille^  with  me?  —  I  am 
very  sorry,  sir,  but  I  am  already  engaged^  for  the 
quadrille.  —  May  I  have  the  pleasure,^  then,  for  the 
next  waltz  ?  —  Certainly. 

How  gracefully ^^  that  young  lady  dances!  Who 
is  she,  I  wonder?  —  That  is  Miss  Kronenberg.  —  You 
ought  to  see  her  together  with  her  sister.  —  They 
resemble  ^^  each  other  like  two  peas.^^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Welch  reizende  Gesellschaf t !  —  '^  What  for  a  brilliant  (glan- 
zend)  sight  (Anblick,  w,asculine).  —  ^  Bekanntscliaft. 
*  Vorstellen. —  5  jt  is  to  me  very  agreeable. —  ^  Tanzen. 
'  Die  Quadrille,  ka-dril'-ye.  —  »  Engagiert,  an-ga-zhert'. 
9  Vergniigen.  —  i"  Anmutig.  —  ^  Gleiclien,  to  resemble. 
12  Wie  ein  Ei  dem  andern.    Lit. :  As  an  egg  to-ike  other. 


414  VERGNUGEN    VND    GESUiXDHKlT. 

2b  be  read  by  means  of  the  notes  in  prepiration  for  translating  and 

reading  aloud  in  class.     For  Self-Study,  to  be  trayislated,  and 

when  thoroughly  understood,  read  aloud  in  German. 


«efefturf. 
5Ctt^  t>et  t)etttf(f>cn  Sittetatun*— !♦ 

—  3l(),  Sie  fommeu  au§  bem  2::^eater!  9Zun,  \ok  ijai 
3i)ncn  bie  Dpcr  gefallen? 

—  Sic  iuiffen,  ba§  id)  SSagner  felbft  immer  gem  f)ore, 
menu  id)  aixd)  bie  3)kfif  f einer  9lad)a^mer  ^  nid)t  (iebe. 
lufecrbcm  freut  e^  mid)  fe(;r,  bafe  id;  enblicf)  ben  gan^cii 
„9iint3  ber  9ZibeIimgen "  ^  ge(;drt  (labe.  5^lU;er  I;abe  id) 
Diel  i^on  bem  grofeen  beutfd)en  @ebid;t,  bem  ^libehingenlicb, 
gelefen.  ^ilbet  bem:  biefe^  ben  Xejrt^  511  ^Bagner^  3iint3 
ber  ^libelumgei' ? 

—  0,  !eine^3ti:)eg§.  2Bagner  l^at  ben  3:^ei1  ^u  all*  feinen 
Dpcru  felbft  gefd)rieben.  ^a§  gro^e  beiitfd)e  ^ol!^e|)o§/ 
l^on  tueld^em  ©ie  foDiet  geI;ort  I;aben,  'tia^  fogenannte  3Jibc= 
lungenlieb,  umrbe  gegen  1200  nac^  Sl)riftu§^  mifgefcbrieben. 
®er  ^icf)ter  fiigte^  Sieber  i)on  ben  alten  ©ijttern  nnb 
§e(ben/  \x>t{d)z  'i^a^  3Sol!  noc^  fang,  511  einem  grofeartigen 


1  Nafc/i'-a'-m»r,  imitator. 

2  Wagner's  celebrated  'tetralogy,'  of  which,  as  is  well  known,  the 
four  parts  are:  Das  Rheingold,  Rhinegold ;  Die  Walkiire  (val- 
kii'-re),  the  Valkyre  ;  Siegfried  and  Goetterdammerung  (gu'-t'r- 
de'-me-rdoii),  the  Twilight  of  the  Gods.  —  3  Tekst,  libretto. 

^  Notice  that  all  followed  by  the  article,  or  a  pronoun,  may  be  used 
undeclincd.  Tlius  we  may  say  either:  zu  alien  seinen  Opern ;  or, 
simply,  zu  all  seinen  Opern. —  s  F61ks'-a'-p6s,  national  epic 

6  About  1200  A.  D.  Lit. :  after  Christ.—  ^  From  zusammenfUgen 
(tsoo-za'-m'n-fii  -g'n),  to  [)ut  together,  to  combine. —  8  Heroes. 

*■  Li-tS-rii-toor',  literature. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  415 

©ebicBt  jufammen,*  \vcld)c§>  ben  ^ob  ©iecjfrieb^  unb  bie 
9iad)c^  ber  ^riem(;Ub  befjaubclt.^  ^ie  ^elben  be§  9^{bc= 
liiiujcitliebey  reben  nnt)  benfen  iDie  ^Jtittcr^  be^3  12.  3af)rf)iin= 
bertij,  luogegen*  SSagner^  ^elben  tmrflid)  nod;  mi;t(;i]dK^ 
©cftaltcn^  finb.  2lud)  bie  gonn^  feiner  ®ramen  ift  bic^ 
ber  cilteften  beut)d;en  ^oefie,  ncintlid;  bie  3((Iitteration.^ 

—  ©iebt  e§  benn  eine  beutfd)e  "^^oefie,  bie  alter  ift,  a(§ 
ha§>  9Hbe(nngenlieb  ? 

—  Qa  geiuiJB.  ©d)on  ^a^itu^^^  berid>tet  'oon  Siebern, 
mldjc  bie  alten  ^eutfd)en  jum  Sobe^^  ber  (Stammt»ater  ^^ 
be§  'isolfe^3  nnb  feiner  ^elben  bei  feftlid)en  @elei3en(;eiten/^ 
befonbery  l^or  einer  ^djladjt,  gefnngen  baben.  ^iefe  Sieber 
gerieten^*  bnrcb  bie  SsbltoDanberung  ^^  in  3?ergeffent)eit.i* 
^nrd)  bie  c^rofeen  ^(;aten  mad)tiger  5lbnige  l)en>orgernfen/^ 
entftanb^^  U>abrenb  ber  ^^blfenranbening  bie  nene  bentfdie 
^elbenfagc.^^  ^on  jenen  ^iebern  ber  bentfd;en  §e(benfage 
ift  nn^  inbey  nnr  ein  einjige^,  ha§>  ^ilbebranbSUeb/^  er= 
(;a(ten,2o  tr)eld;e§  ^ur  geit  ^axl§>  bee  (^5ro6en  im  ^(ofter 
gu  gulba  anfge,^eid)net  n^urbe.^^ 

—  Unb  miirbe  e^  ©ie  (;eute  nicbt  gu  U^eit  fii(;ren/^  a^enn 


1  Ra'-fc/te,  revenge.—  2  Treats.—  3  Knights.—  *  While. 

5  Me'-ti-slie,  godlike.     Lit. :  mythical. 

6  Die  Gestalt  (ge-s/italt'),  fignre.  —  ''  Form,  form. 

8  Or,  diejenige,  that. —  ^  A-li-tS-ra-tsi-6n',  alliteration.  Allitera- 
tion, in  old  German,  as  well  as  Anglo-Saxon  poetry,  took  the  place  of 
rhyme.  Tt  consisted  in  having  two  important  words  begin  with  the 
same  letter  in  the  first  line  of  a  couplet,  while  the  word  on  which  the 
stress  of  the  voice  fell  in  the  second  line,  also  began  with  that  same 
letter.—  i°  Ta'-tsi-tdbs,  Tacitus.  —  i^  Tn  the  i>raise  —  i-^  Ancestors. 

13  On  festival  occasions.  —  i^  In  Vergessenheit  geraten  (or, 
koininen),  to  fall  into  oblivion,  to  be  forgotten. 

15  Migration  of  the  nations. —  i^  Called  forth. —  i?"  Imperfect  of 
entstehen,  to  arise. —  is  Heroic  legend. —  i°  Hil'-de-brants'-let'. 

20  Preserved. —  21  From  aufzeichnen,  to  write  (strictly:  to  draw), 
to  put  down.  —  22  Would  it  not  take  you  too  long?  Lit, :  would  it  not 
lead  you  too  far  f —  *  See  wote  7,  on  opposite  page. 


416  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

©ie  mir  hm  3n^a(t  btefe§  ctlteften  3^i^i^»iff^^^  beutfd^er 
^oefie  mitteiten  mottten? 

—  ^urd)au^  md)t.  ©§  ift  un§  \a  nur  ein  fragment  ^ 
beg  £iebe§  er(;a(ten.  §i(bebranb  ift  breifeig  3a()re  (ang  t)on 
feirtem  §eimat(anb^  abmefenb*  geiuefen.  (Sr  I;at  feine  @e= 
maMin  unb  ein  Mnb  t)on  brei  3a(;ren  ^uriitfgelaffen.^  ^ei 
feiner  dtudtdjx  ftef)t^  i^m  ein  dtiiUx  an  ber  S^ifee^  eine§ 
,^eere§  gegeniiber^  unb  tDeI;rt^  i^tn  ben  (Sintritt^  in  fein 
:^anb.  (£in  ilam^f  foil  ftattfinben.  ^ei^or  berfelbe  Seginnt, 
fragt  §ilbebranb  wad)  bent  9kmen  feine^  ©egner^.^^  liefer 
facjt,  er  fei  ^abubranb,  ber  8ol)n  §ilbebranb§,  glaubt  aber 
bem  §ilbebranb  nidit,  t^elc^er  erfldrt,  ^afi  er  fein  ^ater  fei. 
(Blaubii:)itrbige^^  Scanner  l)aben  il;m  ben  ^ob  feine§  ^ater§ 
gemelbet/2  unb  er  mirft^^  feinem  ©egner  bal;er  Siige^*  unb 
geigbeit  ^^  \)ov}^  3n  $ilbebranb§  Seek  fam^ft  ritterlicl)e  ^^ 
@^re  unb  bciterlid^e  greube.  ^oni  ©djtnerj  iibermannt/^ 
ruft^^  er  au§:^^ 

„2Bel)e  nun,  imltenber^^  @ott,  SSel^gefrfjid^o  na^tl^i 
3d)  tvallete^  f^ci^i^tg  ber  ©ommer  unb  3Binter,* 
Man  fd)arte^  mid;  immer  in  bie  9?eil)en  ber  Sdjiiten,^^ 
^ic^t  fanb  ic^  bie  ©tatte,*  bie  ^u  ^obe  mic^  ftredte.^ 


1  Das  Zeugnis,  testimony.  —  2  Fra-gment',  neuter,  fragment. 
Also,  Bruchstiick,  neuter.  —  »  Native  country.  —  •*  Absent. 

6  Left  behind.  —  6  Steht  ihm  gegeniiber.  Lit. :  stands  to  him 
against.    Also,  sta7ids  before  him.  —  '  At  the  head.  —  8  Refuses. 

»  Entrance,  —  w  Adversary.  —  "  Worthy  of  belief. 

12  Announced.  —  18  Etwas  vorwerfen,  to  reproach  with. 

i<  Lie. —  15  Cowardice. —  I6  Knightly. —  i^  Overpowered. 

18  Ausrufen,  to  exclaim.  The  following  verses  are,  of  course,  a 
translation  in  modern  German  from  the  original  poem. 

19  Present  participle  of  walten,  to  govern,  to  rule.  —  20  Disaster. 

21  Nahen  =  sich  nahern,  to  approach. —  22  Lived.    Lit. :  wandered. 

28  Placed,  —  24  Shooters,  i.  e  ,  those  who  fought  foremost, 

2*  Brought  (lit. :  stroke)  me  to  death. 

*  Note  the  alliteration  {here,  the  return  of  w,  s,  and  sch). 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  417 

^oc^  mm  foil  fiifeeg  ^tnb  mit  bem  (Sd)ii:)erte  ^  mic^  f)auen,2 
^en  9)brbfta(;(^  mir  f^nben,  ober  id)  ifjm  ^um  3}Jorber 
toerbeii/'* 

33eim  begitm  be§  S^^i'^^^^f^^  bric&t^  ba§  fragment  ab.^ 

—  D  mie  fd)abe  tft  ba§;  gerabe  \vo  bie  ^anblung  am 
intereffanteften  5U  tDcrben  Derf|)rid)t.  2lber  ©ie  fagten  t>or= 
f)in,  bag  ba§  §ilbebranb§Ueb  ^ur  geit  ^arl§  be§  ©rogen, 
alfo  mn  800  t»erfa6t^  tt)iirbc,  ba§  9fJibe(imgen(ieb  bagcgcn 
erft  urn  1200.  ^abm  bie  ba^mifc^enliegenbcn  3a6r(;unbcrte 
feine  ^oetifd)en  ^qeugniffe^  ber  ©eutfdben  auf^mt^eifen  ?  ^ 

—  ^n  biefer  3^^iW^"3^it  tt)urbe  allerbing^  and)  gebicBtet. 
3lber  ber  eigentlicbe  R5o(f§gefang  ^^  \mv  ^xio)d)cn}^  ®a§ 
(S()riftentiim  ^2  marf)te  feinen  ©influfe  immer  me(;r  igeltcnb^^ 
imb  iKtbrcingte  ^*  bie  alten  ^cibnifdbeu  ^^  Sieber.  ^ie  @eift= 
licku^^  bid)teten  in  jcner  3^^*,  abcr  meift  in  ber  ^pvad)c 
ber  5lird)e,  ber  tatcinifd;en  ^"  (Sprack.  3ii^^<^i^^'^^  gebraud)^ 
ten  fie  p)ax  bie  (S^rad)e  be§  ^^olfc§,  aber  ibre  SBerfe  in 
bcutfd;er  (Bpvadjc  finb  au^fd^UcfeUd)  ^"^  religiofer  91atiir^^ 
nn'o  ijahm  einen  ijoijm  SBert^o  ^^^  ^|^  @efd;id)te  ber 
beutfd)en  ©^radje,  aber  menig  ^oetifd)en  3Sert.  3nbe§  id) 
mu§  l;ier  abbrcdjen.  ^d)  i:}aht  nod)  f)ente  Slbenb  eine 
gufammenfunft  21  mit  meinem  grennbe,  ^errn  Sietrid). 
2Benn  e^  3(;nen  red)t  ift,  tt)olIen  tt)ir  unfere  UnterC;aItung 
morgen  ahen^  fortfefeen. 


1  Sword.  —  2  Hit.  —  »  Murderous  steel. 

*  /.  e.,  sein  Morder  werden. —  ^  Duel.  —  ^  Breaks  off. 

7  Composed,  written. —  8  Products. —  ^  To  exhibit. —  ^  National  song. 

11  Past  participle  of  erloschen,  extinguished,  gone. 

12  Christian  religion. —  i^  Made  its   influence   more  and  more  felt 
(geltend,  literally,  =  ' of  worth,'  authoritative). 

14  Imperfect  of  verdrangen,  to  push,  to  remove.  —  is  Heathenish. 

1'*  Cliergymen. —  1^  Latin. 

18  Exclusively.—  i^  Genitive:  of  a  religious  nature. 

20  Value.—  21  Engagement. 


418  YERGNUGEN    UNJJ    GE.SUNDHEIT. 

The  folhwirig  letter  to  be  learned  by  heart,  and  written  from  memory 

in  German  script  some  hour  or  two  afterwards.     This 

can  be  done  in  two  sections,  if  too  long. 


Boston,  "tizn  1.  Suit  1889. 
3J?eine  (iebe  Souife! 

3^ren  Ikh^n  33rief  bom  22.  t)ongen  SJZonat^  I;abe  id) 
geftern  erl;a(ten.  2®ir  (;aben  un§  allc  \zi)x  gefreut,  baraug 
^u  crtef)en,  bag  e^  3(;ucn  in  ^^ari^  fo  c^ut  gef alien  ^at. 
Slber  tDarnm  finb  (5ie  nur  fo  furjc  3^'^^  ^^  geblieben? 

3n  S^iom  ^iiten  ©ie  fid)^  l>or  Dbft  unb  uniHn*baulidKn 
©^eifen^  ebenfo  ti:)ie  bor  (^i^^maffer,  biefem  i^iebUngegetrcinf^ 
ber  Slmerifaner.  3d;  braud;e  3I)nen  nicbt  ^n  empfcblcn, 
nad)tlid)c  2lu§f(iigc^  nad;  5lrt  ber  ©aifi;  5[)ti(Ier  jn  l^ennci; 
ben/  aber  id;  mod;te  3f)nen  ratcn  fid)  nid)t  ^n  erini'iben, 
ni(f)t  ^u  lange  in  ben  fallen  unb  feud)ten^  Slird)en  ^u  t^er^ 
VDeilen"  unb  am  Slbenb  nid;t  in  \it\\  ©tragcn  ber  unfterb= 
Iid)en^  ©tabt  f^a^ieren  ^u  geben.  2Senn  ©ie  a(P  biefe 
33orficl)t!oma§regeln  ^^  antDenben/^  bann  ift  e§  in  9iom  nid^t 
gefat)rlid;er  al§  in  Lofton,  bielleid;!  nid;t  fo  gefdbrlid). 

SSir  finb  gottlob  alle  gan^  gefunb  unb  benfen  ndd;fte  "iB^iK 
auf^  Sanb  ^u  gel)en.  Sitte  fd^reiben  ©ie  un§  nacl)  9leit)^ort. 
3cl)  berbleibe  in5tt)ifd;en 

3l)t:e  treue  greunbin, 

Katharine  Fuller. 


1  Abstain  {yourself). —  2  Indigestible  foods. 

3  Favorite  drink.  Dative  case,  in  apposition  to  Kiswasser,  wliioh 
is  in  tlic  (]ativ(>  case. —  ■*  Niglitly  excnrsions. —  ^  7,,  avoid. 

6  Feucht  (fo-icht),  humid. —  ^  'Po  stay. —  »  Immortal. 

5  Instead  of  alle.  Observe  that  all,  followed  by  the  article  or  a 
pronoun,  may  be  used  nndeclined. 

10  Precautionary  measures. —  n  To  employ.     Anglice :  take. 


Part  V. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH 


VERG^UGE:Nr   UND    GESUNDHEIT, 


•o^o* 


SECTION    II. 


1.  KRANKHEIT. 

2.  BESUCH  DES  ARZTES. 

3.  VOKABELN  :  KRANKHEITEN. 

4.  VOKABELN  :  DAS  BEFINDEN. 

5.  BESUCH  BEIM  ARZT. 

6.  OCHS  ODER  BAR. 

7.  GESPRACHE  UBES  LITTEBATUR. 


419 


420  VERGNUGEN    VND    GESUNDHEIT. 

II. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Ich  mochte  wissen,  ob  er  krank  ist.* 

Von  wem  sprechen  Sie? 

Ich  spreche  von  meinem  kleinen  Sohn.* 

Was  fehlt  ihm  denn? 

Er  klagt  zuweilen  iiber  heftige  Kopfschmerzen.f 

Er  wird  in  der  SchuleJ  zu  sehr  angestrengt.^ 
Ja,  er  hat  dieses  Jahr  sehr  viel  zu  arbeiten. 

Vorige  Woche  sah  er  so  blass  aus. 
Ich  fiirchte,  dass  er  krank  wird. 
Ich  denke,  ich  werde  den  Arzt^  kommen  lassen. 
Ich  glaube  nicht,  dass  er  in  der  Stadt  ist.* 
Ich  war  vorgestern  bei  ihm,  aber  er  war  soeben 
abgereist. 


NOTES. 

i  Or,  sei.    See  p.  342.  —  2  Past  participle  of  anstreiigen,  to  strain. 

8  Strong  declension,  5th  class  (modify  vowel  and  add  e,  or  cr,  in 
plural).     Also,  familiar:  Der  Doktor  (dok'-tor). 

^  Or,  ich  glaube,  er  ist  nicht  in  der  Stadt.  Notice  that  when 
dass  is  oniittoil,  nicht  can  no  longer  be  in  the  principal,  but  must  be 
in  the  dependent  clause.  Never  say  :  Ich  glaube  nicht^  er  ist  .  .  .  . , 
but  always,  Ich  glaube,  er  ist  nicht 

*  Strong  declension,  5th  class  {vwdlfy  vowel  and  add  e,  or  er,in 
plural).--  t  Der  Schmerz,  mixed  declension. 


PLEASUKES    AND    HEALTH. 


421 


II, 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TRANSLATION. 


1.  Ich  mucJi^-te  vF-s'n  op 
ar  krank^  ist. 


Zon'. 


KlQ-kht hef'-ti-ge 

koDf'-sliiiQer'-ts'n. 

Shoo'-le  tsoo  zar'  an'-ge- 
fi^trefit'. 


Bias. 


Artst. 


Zo-a'-b'n  ap'-ge-rist' 


I  wonder  if  he  is  iU. 

Whom    are    you    speaking 

about ?i 
About  my  little  boy. 
What  is  the  matter  with  him  ? 
Sometimes    he    complains    so 

much  of  headaches.^ 
They  give  him  too  much  to  do 

at  school.^ 
Yes,  he  studies  very  much  this 

year.'* 
Last  week  he  looked  so  pale. 

I  fear  he  will  get  ill.^ 

I  think  I  '11  send  for  the  doctor. 

I  don't  think  he  is  in  the  city,  g 

I  went  there  day  before  yester- 
day,® but  he  had  just  gone 
away. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Of  whom  speak  you  ? 

2  He  complains  sometimes  of  (lit. :  over)  violent  headaches. 

8  He  is  in  the  scliool  too  much  overworked  {strictly :  strained). 
^  Yes,  he  has  this  year  very  much  to  work. 

5  That  he  ill  becomes. 

6  I  was  day-before-yesterday  by  him,  i.  e.,  at  his  house. 
t  Weak  declension. 

^  Strong  declension,  6th  class  {modify  vowel   and  add  e  or  er  in 
plural). 


422  VERGNUGEN    UNI)    GESUNDHEIT. 

Er  ist  aaf  einige  Tage  *  aufs  Land  gegangen. 

Das  ist  sehr  unrecht  von  ihm,  da  so  viele  Krank- 

heiteii  f  herrschen. 
Aber  horen  Sie  einmal. 
Es  ist  jemand  an  der  Thiir.  J 
Julie,  offne  schnell !    Ich  glaube,  dass  es  Paul  ist. 

Ja,  er  ist  es. 


2.  Was  fehlt  dir  denn,  mein  Kiiid?§ 

Warum  weinst  du? 

Julius  neckt^  mich  immer  in  der  Schule. 

Sei  ruhig;  das  Weinen^  hilft  (zu)  nichts. 

Woriiber  denkst  du  nach?^ 

Ich  liberlege^  mir  etwas. 

Nun,  was  ist  es  denn? 

In  der  letzten  Schulwoche  werde  ich   ihm   einen 

Streich  ^  spielen. 
Wer  zuletzt  lacht,  lacht  am  besten.^ 
Das  ist  nicht  recht  von  dir. 


NOTES. 

1  From  necken,  to  tease. 

2  Infinitives  used  substantively  are  written  with  a  capital. 

3  From  nachdenken,  to  think  ahovt,  to  meditate. 

*  Distinguish  iiberlegen  (u'-b'r-la'-g'n),  with  the  accent  on  iiher,, 
to  lay  over,  from  iiberlegen  (ii'-b'r-la'-g'n),  with  the  accent  on  legen, 
to  reflect,  to  meditate.  —  5  Der  Streich,  tlie  i^froke ;  also,  the  trick.  Notico 
the  exju-ession  :  ein  dummer  Streich,  a  great  piece  of  folly  (lit.:  a 
stupid  trick).     Der  Streich,  strong  declension,  3d  class. 

fi  For  the  superlative  adverbially  used,  see  page  520. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


423 


A-d6fs  lant'. 


OOn'-vecht'  .  . 
hi-t'n  lier'-sh.'n. 


Kraiik' 


IsV. 


2.  V^s  falt^  der  d6n  min 
kiiit^  ? 

Vinst'. 
Y6o'-li-d6s  nekt'. 

Koo'-ich. 

Nakh'. 
XJ'-b'r-la'-ge. 

Sliool'-v^o' -khe shtrich' 

sTipe'-l'n. 

T-iSikht. 
Nicht'  TechV. 


He  has  gone   to  the   country 

i'or  ^  11  few  days. 
It  is  very  mean  of  him,  when 

there  is  so  much  sickness. ^ 

But  what  is  that  ? 

There  is  some  one  at  the  door. 

JuHa,  (go  and)  open  the  door, 

quick.     I  think  it  is  Paul. 
Yes.     It  is  he. 


What   is   the   matter,  my 
child  ? 

What  are  you  crying  for  ? 
JuUus  is  always  making  fun  of 

me  at  school.® 
Quiet  yourself  down.     What  is 

the  use  of  crying  like  that?* 
What  are  you  thinking  about? 

I  'm  thinking  about  something.* 
(Well)  now  what  is  it?^ 
I  am  going  to  plan  him  a  good 
trick,'  the  last  week  of  school. 

He  who  laughs  last  laughs  best. 
That  is  not  right. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Upon. —  2  As  so  many  diseases  reign. 
^  Julius  teases  nie  always  in  the  school. 

*  The  crying  helps  notliing  (or,  to  nothing). 

*  I  meditate  to-me  sometliing. 

^  What  is  it,  f!i(')i  ?     Denii  way  be  left  out. —  '  A  stroke. 

*  Der  Tag,  str(»n<2;  declension,  3d  class  [adds  e  in  plural). 
t  Die  Krankheit,  weak  declension  [plural  in  en). 

X  Die  Thiir,  weak  declension  {plural  in  eti\ 

^  Das  Kind,  strong  declension,  4th  class  [addt'  er  in  plural). 


424  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

Note.  —  study  the  uses  of  the  Infinitive, 


3.  Ich  fiirchte,  du  bist  krank. 

Ich    habe    dir    immer    gesagt,    dass    du    zu    viel 

arbeitest. 
Du  siehst  so  schlecht  aus.  f 
Ich  muss  den  Arzt  kommen  lassen. 
Julie,  hole  den  Arzt! 
Und  du,  mein  Kind,  lege  dich  sofort  ins  Bett! 

Ich  werde  dich  ordentlich  zudecken. 


4.  Nun,  wie  fiihlst  du  dich  jetzt?^ 

Ich  fiihle  mich  sehr  schwach. 

Hast  du  Schmerzen? 

Ja,   im   ganzen   Korper ;   alle   Glieder  ^  thun   mir 

weh. 
Zuweilen  habe  ich  Schwindel  ^  im  Kopf. 
Ah,  da  kommt  der  Doktor. 
Nun,  was  giebt  es  denn? 
Wann  bist  du  krank  geworden? 


NOTES. 


1  Most  German-Americans  erroneously  say:  wie  fiihlst  du?  in- 
stead of,  wie  fiihlst  du  dich  ?     To  be  avoided. 

2  Das  Glied  (glet),  limb.  Glied  means  also  a  member  (of  some 
society,  etc.).  In  tlie  latter  sense,  liowever,  the  Germans  usually  pre 
fer  the  word  Mitglied  (mit'-glet'). 

3  Schwindel,  dizziness.     Strong  declension,  1st  class. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 
page  525,  papags.  4  to  7. 


425 


3.   Ich   furch^'t^  doo   bist 
kraiik^. 


ShlecTit . 

Ho'-le. 

La'-ge zo-fort'  ins 

bet'. 
6r'-d'nt-lic7i  tsoo'-dek'-'n. 


4.  Noon  ve  fiilst^  doo  dlch 
y6tst? 

Zar'  stivaA:7i  . 


Gle'-d'r  va'. 


Shvin'-dl. 
Komt'. 


I  am  afraid  you  are  ill.* 

I  told  you  you  were  studying 

too  much. 
You  look  so  bad. 
I  must  send  for  the  doctor. 
Julia,  go  for  the  doctor.^ 
And  you,  my  child,  go  to  bed 

at  once.^ 
I  '11  cover  you  up.* 


Well!     How  do  you  feel 
now? 

I  feel  very  poorly.* 

Do  you  feel  pains  ?  * 

I  feel  pains  all  over  my  body.® 

Sometimes  my  head  swims. 
Ah !     Here  is  the  doctor. 
Well,  what  is  the  matter? 
When  did  you  get  sick  ? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Fetch  the  physician.  —  *  p^t  yourself  at  once  Into-the  bed, 
8  I  shall   you    properly  up-cover.  —   •*    I    feel   myself  very   weak 
(schwach).  —  ^  Have  you  pains?    Also,  feel  tjou  pains  ? 
6  Yes,  in  the  whole  body,  all  the  limbs  make  to-me  pain. 
*  Or,  when  not  speaking  familiarly:  Sic  sind  krank. 
t  Not  familiar;  Sie  sehen  so  schleclit  aus. 


426      VERGNUGEN  UND  GESUNDHEIT. 

Vorgestern    abend    habe    ich    Kopfschmerzen    ge- 

habt. 
Gestern  abend  wurde  mir  libel  ?^ 

Heute  friili  konnte  ich  kaum  atmen. 

Vor    einer    Stunde    musste    ich    aus    der    Schule 

nach  Hause  gehen. 
Zeige  mir  deine  Zunge! 
Sie  ist  etwas  belegt. 
Hast  du*  Appetit?2 
Nein.     Ich  habe  schon  liber  vier  Wochen  keinen 

Appetit. 

Erlaub'  einmal ;   ich  will  dir  f  den  ^  Puis  fiihlen. 

Er  geht  ziemlich  langsam. 
Hast  du  *  warme  Fiisse  ?  * 

Nein,    Herr    Doktor.      Meine    Fiisse   und    Hande 
sind  kalt. 


Warum  springst  du|  denn  auf?^ 

Ich  bekam  einen  Stich  in  die  rechte  Seite.' 


NOTES. 

1  Es  wird  mir  iibel,  impersonal  expression.  For  the  omission 
of  es  in  the  above  phrase,  see  page 

2  The  German  word  Esslust  is  rarely  used. 

8  For  the  use  of  the  detiiiite  article  instead  of  the  possessive  adjec- 
tive, see  page  356,  note  2.—  ^  Der  Fuss,  Die  Hand,  hotii  strons^;  de- 
clensions, Hh  class  (modi/;/  (lie  vowel  and  add  e,  "/"  ei»,   in  the  plural). 

^  Was  ist  denn  los?  Vcnj  familiar. —  6  From  aufspringen,  to 
jump  tip,  a  strong  verl).    -    7  (!(Mild  also  be,  in  der  rechten  Seite. 

^  If  not  fanuhar:  Habeu  Si«? 


PLEASURED    AiND    HEALTH. 


427 


At'-m'n. 


Tsd6n'-e. 
Be-lac7it'. 


Er-la-dop' 
In. 
Lan'-zam. 

Fu'-se. 


polls'  fii 


Night    before    last 
headache. 


I    had    a 


Last  night  I  felt  sick   at  my 

stomach.^ 
This   morning  I  could  hardly 

breathe. 
An  hour  ago  I  was  obliged  to 

leave  school  and  come  home. 
Show  me  your  tongue. 
It 's  pretty  well  coated. 
Have  you  (any)  appetite  ? 
No,  (doctor).     It's  more  than 

a  month  that  I  had  a  good 

appetite.^ 
Excuse  me.    lam  going  to  feel 

your  pulse.* 
It  is  not  very  rapid. 

Are  your  feet  warm  ?  * 
No,  doctor.   My  hands  and  feet 
are  cold. 


5.  Vas  liast^  doo  d6n? 

STiprifist  .....  a-oof. 

T'-nen  shtich'. 


What  is  the  matter? 

What   makes    you   jump   like 

that?  5 
It  was  a  stitch®  in  my  right 

side. 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Yesterday  evening  (it)  became  to-me  ill. 

2  I  liave  already  over  four  weeks  no  appetite. 

3  I  will  to-yon  the  pulse  feel. 

4  Also:  Sind  deine  Fiisse  warm? 

5  Why  juinp-you  then  up  f 

6  I  received  a  stitcli.    Der  Stich,  niasc.  noun,  strong  declens.,  3d  class, 
t  Not  familiar:  icli  will  Ihnen  den  Puis  fdhlen. 

J  If  not  familiar:  WashabenSie? 

X  If  not  familiar :  Warum  Springen  Sie? 


428  VERGNiJGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

Atme*  einmal  tief  auf!^ 
0,  das  thut  mir  weh. 
Jetzt  sprich  f  einmal  laut ! 
Noch  lauter! 


Note.  —  Study  the  list  of  Separable  Verbs, 


6.  Was  mussen  wir  thun? 

Lassen  Sie  dieses  Rezept  in  einer  guten  Apotheke 

machen  I 
Er  muss  dreimal  taglich  zwei  Pillen  nehnien.^ 

Morgen  werde  ich  wiederkommen. 

Glauben  Sie,  dass   er  bald  wieder  gesund^  wird, 

Herr  Doktor? 
Das  hoffe  ich  ganz  bestimmt. 
Das  freut  mich  sehr. 
Sorgen  Sie  nur  dafiir,  dass  er  seine  Medizin  regel- 

massig  nimmt. 


NOTES. 

^  From  aufatmeii,  to  breathe,  a  weak  verb. 

2  ¥Ane  Pille,  a  pill,  weak  declension. 

3  Gesund,  licallh''  •  h'?o,  healthful. 
*  Not  familiar:  Atmen  Sie. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


429 


At'-me  in-mal  tef  a-d6f'. 
Va. 


Now  breathe  heavily.* 
Oh  !  it  hurts  me. 
Now  speak  aloud. 
Louder. 


page  523. 


6.  Vas  mw^-s'ii  ver  toon^? 

Ra-tsept' ^-p6-ta'-ke. 

T§iCh'-lich pi'-l'n. 


Ge-zc56nt'. 


Ma-di-tsen' 
m§i'-sich. 


ra'-g'l- 


What  will  we  have  to  do  ? 

Have  this  prescription  filled 
out  at  a  good  druggist's.* 

He  will  have  to  take  two  pills 
three  times  a  day.* 

To-morrow  I  shall  return  to 
see  him. 

Do  you  think  he  will  soon  re- 
cover, doctor? 

I  am  sure  he  will. 
I  am  very  glad. 

Only  take  care  and  have  him 
take  his  medicine  regularly.* 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 


1  Deeply.  —  2  In  a  good  drug-store  (die  Apotheke). 

8  Daily,  taglich ;  also,  den  Tag,  the  day. 

*  Care  you  only  fur  that  (lit. :  therefore),  that  he  his  medicine,  etc. 

t  Not  familiar :  Sprechen  Sie. 


430  VERGNIJGEN    UND  GESUNDHEIT. 

THE    PREPOSITIONS. 

The  following  is  a  full  list  of  German  prepositions : 

PREPOSITIONS    GOVERNING   THE   ACCUSATIVE. 

biSf  unto,  till ;  ohne,  ivithout  ; 

durch,  through;  sonder,  without; 

filr,  for  ;  um,  about ; 

gegen  for,  gen),  against ;  wider,  against. 

PREPOSITIONS    GOVERNING    THE    GENITIVE    CASE 

anstatt  (or,  statt),  instead  of;    ungeachtet, 
halher,^for  the  sake  of;  ^  ohngeac 

kraft,  ill  virtue  of ;  unfei^n, 


,     ,,        ,,,,        ,       .  n  T.  T-^^(  notwithstanding; 

halher,^for  the  sake  of;  ^  ohngeachtet, '  '^ 


,..  ,  ._,    .  not  far  from ; 

langs,  along;  unweit,  )       ^     -^ 

lautf  according  to ;  vertnoge,  by  dint  of; 

^nittelSf  by  means  of ;  wdhrend,  during  ; 

trotZf^  i)i  spite  of;  wegen,  on  account  of; 

um willen,*  on  account  of;   zufolge,^  in  consequence  of^ 

PREPOSITIONS    GOVERNING    THE     DATIVE    CASB- 

aus,  out ;  samt,  )     , 

,    .    ,  1^1  along  with; 

bet,  by;  nebst,  )         ^  ' 

mit,  with;  nachst,  next  to; 

obf  if;  binnerif  within; 

von,  from ;  ausser,  outside  ; 

zUfto;  entgeg en,*  against ; 

nach,  after;  gegenuber,*  opposite; 

seitf  since;  gemiiss,^  in  accordance  with; 

gleichf  like  ;  zuwider,  contrary  to. 


1  Halber  (or  halben),  follows  its  noun. 

2  Also,  the  compounds  of  halb,  suaserhalb,  outside;  innerhalb, 
within;  oberhalb,  afiove;  and  unterhalb,  6g/(ni>. 

*  Frequently  governs  the  dative  also. 

*  Example  :  On  account  of  him  =Um  seinei*  willen. 

*  Also,  the  compounds  of  seit,  diesseit  (or  diesseits),  on  this  side 
of;  and  jenseit  (or  jenseits),  on  that  side  of. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  431 

I>REPOSITIONS     GOVERNING     SOMETIMES    THE    ACCUSA- 
TIVE   AND    SOMETIMES    THE    DATIVE. 

atif  at,  on;  uber,  above,  across; 

auff  upon ;  unter,  under,  among  ; 

hlnter,  behind;  vor,  before; 

in,  1)1,  into  ;  zwischen,  between. 
neben,  beside; 

CONTRACTION     OF    PREPOSITIONS    WITH    THE    ARTICLE. 

The  frequent  contraction  of  prepositions  with  the  dative 
singular  masculine  and  neuter  {dem),  the  accusative  singular 
masculine  and  neuter  {den,  das),  and  the  dative  plural  (den), 
has  already  been  noticed.  Thus,  an,  in,  etc.,  contract  with 
the  singular  into  am  (for  an  dem),  ans  (for  an  das),  at  the ; 
im  (for  in  dem),  ins  (for  in  das),  in  the;  and  hinter,  unter-, 
etc.,  with  the  dative  plural  into  hintern,  untern,  etc.     Ex. : 

My  head  swims  =  Ich  habe  Schwindel  im  Kopf. 

He  must  go  lo  bed  =  Er  muss  ifis  Bett. 

She  is  sitting  at  the  window  =  Sie  sitzt  am  Fenster. 

/  like  him  very  much  =  lE,r  ist  mir  ans  Herz  gewachsen. 

We  live  behind  the  mountains  =  Hintern  Bergen  wohnen  wir. 


HOW    TO    TRANSLATE    WHEN. 

1.  When  is  rendered  by  wann  : 
First,  when  it  is  interrogative.     Ex. : 

When  will  you  come  f  —  Wann  werden  Sie  kommen  {never  wenn)  ? 

Second,  in  the  sense  of  whatever.    Ex. : 

I  shall  come  when  you  say=  Ich  komme  wann  Sie  wollen. 

2.  When  =  wenn,  if  it  can  be  replaced  by  if.    Ex. : 

When  you  come,  I  shall  tell  you  = 

Wenn  Sie  kommen,  will  ich  es  Ihnen  sagen. 

3.  When  =  als,  whenever  it  refers  to  a  .single  past  occasion. 
Ex.: 

When  he  came  in,  he  saw  the  table = Als  er  eintrat,  sah  er  den 
Tisch. 


432 


verg:nugen  und  gesundheit. 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Krankheiten. 


Leidend  sein  *  (li'-d'nt), 

Die  Unpiisslichkeit,^ 

Die  Epidemie  (e-pi-da-me'), 

Die  Ohnmacht^  (pn'-maikht'), 

Der  Schwindel  (sh.vin'-d'l), 

Die  Nase  blutet  mir  (bloo'-tet), 

Die  Erkaltung  (er-kel'-tdon), 

Der  Husten  (hoos'-t'n), 

Eiii  Schnupfen  (sh.nd6p'-f  n),  m., 

Die  Heiserkeit  (h.i'-z'r-kit),* 

Das  Fieber  (fe'-b'r), 

Das  Nervenfieber  (nar'-fn — ), 

Das  Scharlachfieber  (sliar'-laA:7i— 

Die  Impfung  (iin'-pfd6fi), 

Die  Masern  (ma'-z'rn), 

Die  Gicht  (gicTit), 

Die  Schwindsucht,* 

Die  Wunde  (vd6n'-de), 


To  suffer  from  ill  health. 
The  indisposition. 
The  epidemic. 
The  fainting  fit,  the  swoon. 
The  giddiness. 
I  am  bleeding  at  the  nose. 
The  cold. 
The  cough. 
The  cold  in  the  head. 
The  hoarseness. 
The  fever. 
The  nervous  fever. 
•),  The  scarlet  fever. 
The  vaccination. 
The  measles. 
The  gout. 
The  consumption. 
The  wound. 


Wie  sehen  Sie  aus ! 

Ich  bin  schrecklich   erkaltet, 

Sie  hat  eine  dicke  Backe,* 


How  you  do  look ! 
I  have  a  terrible  cold. 
Her  cheek  is  swollen. 


1  Lit.:   to  be  suffering.—  2  OOn'-pgs'-lic/i-kit.  —  «  Lit.:    power- 
lessness  {stvicUy:  without  power) .  —  *  Notice  the  adjective  heiser, /loarsc. 
•5  Shvint'-zo6fcli.t'.—  «  Lit. :  sfie  has  a  thick  cheek. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


433 


The  following  vocabulary  to  he  learned  by  heart. 


VOKABELN. 


Das  Befinden.* 


Wie  geht's  ?  * 

Danke,  es  geht  mir  sehr  gut; 

und  was  machen  Sie  ?  ^ 
Ich  bin  gar  nicht  wohl. 
Wie  befindet  sich  Ihr  Herr 

Bruder? 
Es  geht  ihm  gar  nicht  gut. 
Wie  steht's  mit  Ihrer  Gesundheit?  ^ 
ZiemUch  gut,  ich  danke. 
Es  geht  besser.^ 
Ich  huste.* 
Ich  bin  erkaltet.^ 
Ich  habe  mich  erkaltet. 
Ich  habe  mich  stark  erkaltet. 
Ich  habe  mich  verbrannt.' 
Ich  habe  ein  geschwollenes  ' 

Gesicht. 
Sie  wurde  ohnmachtig.® 
Du  wirst  dich  erkalten. 
Ich  habe  mir  den  Arm  gebrochen. 


How  d'ye  do  ? 

I  am  very  well,  thank  you ; 

and  yourself? 
I  am  not  very  well. 
How  is  your  brother  ? 

He  is  not  at  all  well. 

How  is  your  health  ? 

Pretty  good,  thank  you. 

Better. 

I  have  a  cough. 

I  have  a  cold. 

I  have  caught  a  cold. 

I  have  caught  a  severe  cold. 

I  burnt  myself. 

My  face  is  swollen. 

She  fainted. 

You  are  going  to  take  cold. 

I  have  broken  my  arm. 


1  Very  familiar,  instead  of  Wie  geht  es  Ihnen?  or,  "Wie  befinden 
Sie  sich?—  2  Or,  Wie  geht's  mit  Ihrer  Gesundheit? 
8  It  goes  better.  —  ■*  Hoos'-te.  —  5  Er-kel'-tet. 

*  F€r-brant',  i)ast  participle  of  verbrennen  (fer-bre'-nSn);  im- 
perfect, verbrannte.    See  page  507.  —  ''  Ge-shvol'-'nes. 

*  On'-niec/i -ticli..     Lit. :  she  became  weak  ;  i.  e.,  fainting. 

*  The  state  of  health. 


434  VERGNUGEN-    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

The  same  directions  as  heretofore  to  be  followed. 

GESPRACHE. 

l.-BESVCH   BEIM   ARZT* 

Ich  komme,  um^  Sie  um  Ihren  Eat  zu^  bitten.^  — 
Was  fehlt  Ihnen  denn?  —  Ich  huste  seit  zwei  Mo- 
naten.  Ich  habe  alle  moglichen  Arzneien^  genom- 
irien,  aber  ohne   Erfolg.*  —  Wie   hat   es   angefangen? 

—  Ich  hatte  mich  beim  Baden  ^  erkaltet.  Darauf  habe 
ich  eine  Woche  lang^  Fieber  gehabt.  Die  ganze  letzte 
Woche  hat  mich  gefrosteltJ  Ein  Arzt,  den  ich  um 
Rat  fragte,  meinte,  ich  hatte  das  kalte  Fieber.f  —  Er 
hat  sich  sicher  geirrt.  —  Glauben  Sie,  dass  ich  die 
Schwindsucht ^  habe?  —  Wie  lange  husten  Sie  schon? 

—  Erst  seit  zwei  Monaten. — Gut.  Ich  sehe  jetzt,  was 
Ihnen  fehlt.  —  Glauben  Sie,  dass  ich  ernstlich  krank 
bin  ?  —  Nein.  Sie  sind  nur  stark  erkaltet.  Ich  ver- 
sichere  Sie,  dass  die  Sache  nicht  ge^hrlich®  ist.     Sie 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Um— zu,  in  order  to.  —  2  Einen  um  Rat  bitten,  or  f  ragen,  to 

consult  one. —  8  AH  kinds  of  medicine.  Lit.:  all  possible  medicines.  Die 
Arzenei  (or,  Arznei),  ar-tsg-ni',  or  Medizin  (ma-di-tsen^,  medi- 
cine.— •*  Without  result.     Anglice,  without  getting  well. 

*  Baden  (ba'-d'n),  to  bathe.  —  «  For  a  week.     Lit. :  o  week  long. 

7  Es  frostelt  (frus'-t'lt)  mich,  impersonal  phrase,  I  feel  chilly. 
On  the  omission  of  es,  see  page  409.  —  ^  Also,  die  Auszehrung 
(a-dos'-tsa-rooS).  —  ^  Ge-fS^r'-licli,  dangerous.  —  *  Visit  at  a  phy- 
sician's;  consultation. —  f  Chills  and  fever.     Lit.:  cold  fever. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  435 

miissen   diese   Pulver^   nehmen.  —  Wie   viel   soil   ich 
taglich  nehmen?  —  Nehmen  Sie  jeden  Tag  drei. 

2.  —  VOM   SPIELEN* 

Warum  wollen  Sie  nicht  mit  mir  Karten  spielen?^ 
—  Wozu^  soil  ich  mit  Ihnen  spielen,  ich  verliere  ja 
doch  immer.*  —  Gut.  Dann  lassen  Sie  uns  Ball  spie- 
len!—  Nein,  ich  habe  den  ganzen  Nachmittag  Ball 
gespielt.  Ubrigens  habe  ich  auch  keine  Zeit.  Wir 
bekommen  heute  Besuch  zum  Mittagessen,  und  ich 
muss  mich  jetzt  anziehen. 

3.  —  0CHS    ODER    BAR  A 

Warum  sehen  Sie  so  verstimmt^  aus? — Ich  wusste 
nicht,  dass  ich  verstimmt  aussehe.  Ich  bin  im  Ge- 
genteil^  in  sehr  guter  Stimmung.^  —  Und  doch  hat 
man  mir  gesagt,  dass  Sie  auf  der  Borse  viel  verloren 
haben.  Sind  Sie  Ochs^  oder  Bdr^  gewesen? — Ich  war 
weder^  das  eine,  noch^  das  andere,  lieber  Herr.  Ich 
war  ein  Esel. 


Pronunciation  and  Translations. 

1  Pdol'-f'r,  ?i.,  powder.—  2  Karten  (die  Karte,  kar'-tg),  spie- 
len, to  play  cards.—  ^  See  page  493.—  ^  Or,  Ich  gewinne  (ge-vi'- 
ng,  w'm)  ja  doch  nie  (or  niemals,  ne'-mals,  never). 

s  Ver-s/».timt%  in  had  humor.  Lit.:  niistuned,  out  of  tune;  also, 
ubellaimig  (u'-b'l-la-oo'-nic/i.).  —  ^  On  the  contrary. 

"Die  Stininiung,  disposition,  humor.  Lit.:  tune;  also,  die 
Laune  (la-do'-ne).  —  8  in  Amerilta  werden  die  jenigen,  -welche 
auf  Hausse  spekulieren,  Ochsen  genannt;  die  jenigen,  welche 
auf  Baisse  spekulieren,  Baren. 

9  Neither,  nor. —  *  On  playing. —  f  Bull  or  bear. 


436  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

The  same  directions  as  heretofore  to  be  followed. 

EXERCISES. 

.  —  VERSCHIEDENES.  * 

What  is  the  matter  with  you?  You  look  so  pale. 
I  fear  you  are  ill.  —  No,  nothing  is  the  matter  with 
me.  —  But  you  will  get  ill,  unless  you  take  better 
care  of  yourself.^ 

I  think  I  will  go  and  buy  some  theater  tickets  for 
to-night.  —  I  don't  think ^  the  office^  is  open.  —  No 
matter,  I  must  try  to  get  some.* 

Well,  I  got^  tickets.  —  I  am  very  glad  (you  did). 
What  did  you  pay  for  them.^  —  Two  marks  apiece. 
■ — Are  they  good  (ones)?  —  (The)  seventh  row^  on 
the  right. 

2.—EINLADUNG    UND    ABFAHRT. 

I  have  invited  your  cousin  to  (come  and)  dine 
with  us  day  after  to-morrow.  Do  you  think  he  will 
come?  —  I  know  he  will  come  if  he  can.  But  he 
has  a  great  deal^  to  do 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Wenn  Sie  slch  nicht  mehr  schonen.    Lit. :  if  you  do  not 

spare  yourself  more.  —  ^  See  page  420,  note  4, 

8  Die  Kasse  (ka'-se).  —  4  Welche.  —  6  I  have  received. 

•  Dafiir.  —  7  Reihe  (ri'-g),  /.  —  8  Very  much. 

*  Lit. :  Different.    Anglice :  Miscellanies, 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  437 

Well,  I  must  start,^  unless  he  comes  within  a  few 
minutes  2  —  But  you  cannot  go  without  him.  He  is 
the  only^  (one)  who  knows  the  road.*  —  No  matter, 
I  am  going.  —  Are  you  sure  you  can  manage  the 
horses?^ — 1  am  sure  I  can.^  —  Very  well,  good  luck^ 
(to  you).  

Note.  —  Study  the  uses  of  the  participles,  page  527. 


3.—EIN   FREVND. 

I  have  just  met  our  friend  Wiener.  —  He  is  your 
friend,  perhaps,  but  not  mine.  —  Do  you  not  think 
he  is^  a  good  man?  —  (I  know  he  is)  not.^  He 
played  me  a  mean  ^^  trick  the  other  day.  —  There 
must  be  some  mistake.^^  I  hope  you  will  change  ^^ 
your  opinion.^^  —  I  know  I  will  not,  unless  he  acts 
differently.^*  —  Well,  in  order  that  you  may  become 
friends  again,  I  '11  invite  you  both  to  dinner  with 
me,  and  we  '11  talk  the  thing  over.^^ 


Aids  to  Translation. 


1  Aufbrechen. 

2  If  lie  not  in  a  few  (ein  paar)  minutes  comes. 

3  Einzige.—  4  Der  Weg  (vacit),  strong  declension,  3d  class. 

5  Verstelien  Sie  auch  sicher  mit  Pferden  umzugehen? 

6  O  gewiss.—  5"  Nun  gut,  viel  Gliick. 
8  That  he,  etc.  —  ^  No.  —  lo  Arg,  arch. 

11  Tliere   mnst  some   misunderstanding    (Missverstandnis,  mis' 
fer-slitent'-nis)  lie  before  (vorliegen,  for'-le  -g'n). 

12  Andern.—  i3  Die  Ansicht;  or,  die  3Ieinung. 

14  If  he  not  otherwise  (anders)  acts  (handelt\  no. 

15  We  will  over  the  thing  (Sache)  talk  (sprechen;  or,  reden). 


438      VERGNUGEN  UND  GESUNDHEIT. 

To  he  read  by  means  of  the  notes,  in  preparation  for  translating  and 

reading  aloud  in  German.     For  Self-Study,  to  he  translated, 

and  when  thoroughly  understood,  read  aloud  in  German. 

Sefefiiirf. 

9^un  laffen  ©ie  un^  unfere  geftrige  Unter^altung  fort= 
fe^en!  3<^  ^^^  fjeute  t)erfud)en,  '^l)mn  ein  ^ilb  "oon  ber 
beutfc^en  ^oefie  ^ur  3^^^  ^^^  ^reu^^iige^  5U  geben.  gd; 
fagte  3f)nen  geftern,  bag  bie  beutfd)e  ^oefie  in  ber  3^^^ 
nafi}  Ravi  't^^rti  ©rogen  unter  bem  ©influfe  ber  @eift(id)feit 
ftanb.  ®a§  cinberte  fid)  aber  im  12.  3af)r^iinbert.  ®a 
blii^t  ber  beutfd)e  ©efang  'von  neuem.^  ^ie  .^reuj^iige 
erregten^  eine  grogartige  ^egeiftenmg/  bie  3ugc^  nadj  bem 
Drient  belebten^  bie  ^^antafie/  unb  bie  §o(;enftaufen  * 
unb  anbere  giirften  ^flegten  bie  ^oefie  an  ihxm  ^ofcir^ 
unb  unterftii^ten ^  bie  ©anger;  bie  beutfd)en  D^itter^^  batten 
auf  i^ren  Qno^cn  bie  ^oefie  ber  fran^ofifcben  3;^ronbabour^ 
mio  ^ronbere^t  fennen  gelernt  nnb  iiberfe^ten  beren  SSerfe^^ 
in^  ^entfd)e,  fur^^,  bag  ganje  ^olt  rt)nrbe  tmeber  t)on  ber 
^uft^2  ^nm  ,,  ©ingen  unb  ©agen"  erfiillt:  bie  ©anger 
^^ogen^^  t)on  $of  ^u  §of  unb  fangen  bie  alten  ^elbenlieber 
mieber,  bie  im  ^erjen  beg  33o(!eg  fo  (ange  gefd)Iummcrt  ^* 


1  Kro-its'-tsii '-ge,  Crusades.     Lit.:  cross-expeditinm. —  2  Anew. 
8  From  erregen,  to  stir  up.  —  *  Enthusia^^m. —  5  Expeditions. 
«  Beleben,  to  animate.—  ^  Imagination.  —  «  Courts.    Der  Hof, 
die  Hofe.—  »  Supported.—  «  Der  Ritter,  the  knight. 

11  For  the  use  of  deren,  see  page  489.   Also :  die  Werke  derselben. 

12  Strictly:  desire.  Angllce :  love. —  18  Imperfect  of  Ziehen.  See 
page  614.  —  1*  Slumbered.—  *  The  emperors  of  tlie  Swabian  house  of 
Hohenstaufen,  the  most  celebrated  of  whom  was  Frederick  Barbarossa, 

t  The  Troubadours  and  Trouveres,  the  early  poets  of  France. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  439 

t)atkn,  aber  nod^  nic^t  gan^ltrf)  ^  tJcrt^effen  traren,  'unb  ge= 
bilbete^  ritter(id)e  ©anger,  tt>eld)e  ©imt^  unb  33erftanbm^* 
ftir  bie  @eful)Ie  be§  ^oiU§>  t;atten,  fd)ufen  burc^  funft(erifd)e5  ^ 
3u)'ammenfugen  jener  alten  ^elbentieber  bie  beiben  f)errlic^en 
^BolUtpm,^  ha§>  9libeIungenHeb  unb  ha§>  @ubrun  = 
(ieb,  tt)eld)e  man  mit  9^ed)t^  mit  ben  griedjifc^en  @^o= 
^den/  ber  3(iabe^  imb  ber  Dbl)ffee/^  t^erglic^en  ^^  ^at. 
Slnbere  ritterlid^e  ^^  ®ic^ter  bearbeiteten  bie  ©agenftoffe, 
Ujeldje  fie  bei  i^ren  fran^ofifd)en  ^orbilbem^^  fanben,  bie 
Sllejanberfage/*  bie  ©age  t>on  ^arl  bent  ©rogen  nnb 
D^Jolanb,  bie  ©age  t>on  ^onig  5(rtu§  nnb  feiner  ^afe(= 
rnnbe/-^  bie  ©ralfage/^  n.  f.  to.,  nnb  fo  entftanben  bie 
grofeen  2Berfe  ber  ritterlid)en  ®id)t!nnft  be§  TlittdalUx^,  ber 
^ar^it)a(  be§  SSolfram  Don  (Sfd)enbad),  'i^m  mandje 
fiir  ben  grofeten  bentfdjen  ®id)ter  aller  3^^ten  I^alten,  nnb 
^riftan  nnb  Sfolbe  )i)on  ©ottfrieb  l^on  ©trafe^ 
bnrg.^^  ©ie  miffen,  ^a^  25agner  and;  biefe  beiben  ^'pm 
jn  3JJnfi!bramen  bearbeitet  bat. 

—  3<i-  ®^  P^^  H^^^  beiben  le^ten  SSerfe.  ^riftan  nnb 
3iolbe  l)ahc  id)  f)ier  ge^ort.  2Bie  gem  mdd)te  ic^  anc^ 
^ar^iijal  fef)en,  ba§  le^te  nnb  bebentenbfte  SBer!  be§ 
a^eifterg !  ^«  3d)  furcbte  aber,  e§  n)irb  in  9ieit)  3)orf  fobalb 
noc^  nid^t  anfgefiil;rt  merben  fonnen.  Slber  ba  ©ie  ^eute 
einmal  bie  grennblid;!eit  ^aben,  mid;  .  mit  ber  bentfd)en 
^oefie  be^  ajlittela(ter§  ^^  befannt^  ^n  mac^en,  fo  mdd)te 


1  Ganzlich  =  ganz,  entirelj'. —  2  Educated.  —  ^  Sense. 

4  Understanding  —  ^  Artistic—  ^  Folks'-a  -p'n,  plural  of  Volks- 
epos,  national  epic.  —  t  Justly.  —  ^  Gre^cM-sh'n  e-p6-p<i'-'n,  Greek 
epic  poems.—  »  E-li-a'-de,  Iliad.  —  10  O-di-sa',  Odyssey. 

11  From  vergleichen,  to  compare.—  ^^  Knightly. 

13  Das  Vorbild,  model.—  1*  Legend  of  Alexander  the  Great. 

16  Round  Tal)le.  —  I6  The  Holy  Grail,  a  famous  legend. 

15^  S/itras'-boorc/i'.-  is  Master. 

19  Middle  age.—  20  Acquainted. 


440  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

ic^  (3ie  bitten,  mir  and)  ettDa§  t>on  ben  9)tinnefdngcrn 
ju  cx^ai)Un,  t)on  benen  id)  fo  t)ie(  ge^i)rt  fjabe. 

—  2)a^  tt)ill  ic^  gem  tf)un,  aber  id)  mn§  mid)  fur^ 
faffen,  benn  e§>  ift  fe^r  f^cit  gen:)orben.  Tlinm  ift  ba§  a(te 
beut|d)e  SSort  fiir  eble  reine  £iebe,  unb  'i)a  bie  ritter(id)en 
Sanger  in  i^ren  It;rid)en  @ebid)ten  meift  bie  Siebe  be= 
fungen  fjaben,  fo  nennt  man  biefe  ritterlic^en  ^id)ter  SJJinne- 
fcinger.  Bk  fingen  t)om  J^ii^Ung  mit  feinem  ^liitenbuft/ 
'oon  'iim  ^ad)tigallenliebern,2  aber  t)or  allem  ^reifen  fie  bie 
(Sd)dn(;eit  unb  3^^^}^^  ^^^  g^rauen.  ^er  bebeutenbfte  unb 
Dielfeitigfte  *  biefer  £t)ri!er^  be§  3JJitte(a(ter§  tt)ar  SSalt^er 
t)on  ber  ^ogeltoeibe  au§  2^i^roI.  3^m  ging  ®eutfd)(anb 
liber  atte§  in  ber  2Be(t.  ©r  mar  and)  ein  grower  greunb 
ber  9latur  unb  foll^  bie  ^Sogel  fe^r  lieb  ge^abt  ^aben;  in 
feinem  2:^eftament^  beftimmte®  er,  bafe  bie  33i?gel  auf  feinem 
@rab  taglic^  mit  ^rot  unb  2Baffer  gefiittert  ^  tt)erben  fotlten, 
unb  barauf  be^ie^t^^  fid)  ha§>  t)iibfcf)e  @ebid)t  Songfellon:)^ : 
Walther  von  der  Vogelweide. 

—  D  ja,  id)  fenne  e§  fe^r  gut.  Slber  erlauben  <Bk  mir 
j^um  (Sd)Iufe^^  noc^  eine  g^age.  Qat  t)a§>  beutfd)e  TUttd- 
alter  neben^^  ber  e^ifd)en  unb  It)rifd)en  ^oefie  nid)t  and) 
2)ramen  (;ert)Drgebrad)t  ?  ^^ 

—  ^ramen  im  eigentlic^en  ©inne  nid)t;  ein  nationa(e§ 
beutfc^e^  ^rarna  .ijat  fid)  erft  floater  entmidelt.^*  ^ie 
beutfd)e  ^oefie  fd)Iummert  nun  nac^  ber  berrlid)en  ^litte 
im  3Jlittela(ter,  um  erft  it)ie  ^ornro§d)en  ^^  nac^  3a^rl)un' 
berten  it)ieber  ^u  neuer  (Bd}onl)t\t  ju  ertx)ac^en. 

1  Fragrance  of  buds. —  2  Songs  of  the  nightingale. —  8  Modesty. 

*  Most  many  sighted.  —  ^  Le'-ri-k'r,  lyrical  poet.  —  6  jg  said  to. 

7  Tgs-ta-mgnt',  testament,  last  will.—  »  Disposed.—  »  Fed. 

I*'  Refers.  —  n  Finally.  —  12  Besides.  —  I8  From  hervorbringen,  to 
produce.  —  1*  Developed.  —  i^  The  heroine  of  Grimm's  well-known 
fairy-tale  of  '  May  Blossom  '  (lit. :  little  thornrose).  — '  Little  Thornrose ' 
was  a  king's  daughter,  who,  through  the  acts  of  a  bad  fairy,  falls  into 
a  deep  sleep,  from  which  she  awakes  only  one  hundred  years  later. 


Part^  Y. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH 


VERG:NruGE^  u:n^d  gesu:n^dheit< 


•o^« 


SECTION    III. 


i.  VON  EINER  FREUNDIN. 

2.  DIE  AUFGABE. 

3.  NACH  DER  ABREISE  EINES  FREUNDES. 

4.  BEI  DER  ARBEIT. 

5.  WAS  GIEBT'S  NEUES? 

6.  BEI  EINEM  FREUNDE. 

7.  UNTERRICHT:  ZERSTREUT, 

8.  GESPRACHE  UBER  LITTERATUR. 


441 


442  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

III. 

GERMAN. 

1.  Glauben  Sie  doch  das  nicht ;  ich  habe  sie 
so  ebeii  im  grosseii  Garten  spazieren 
fahreii  sehen.* 

Ich  ging  mit  einem  meiner  Freunde  spazieren. f 

Wo  sind  Sie  ihr  begegnet?^ 

Gleich  am  Eingang  des  Gartens;   sie  wollte  nach 

der  Stadt  zuruck,^  aber  als  J  sie  mich  sah,  kehrte 

sie  wieder  um.     (See  page  84,  III.) 

Es  ist  kein  Zweifel  mehr.^  Sie  will  mit  mir 
brechen.  Ich  wiinschte,  dass  sie  mich  besuchte,  § 
und  sie  hatte  es  mir  versprochen. 

Warum   lachen   Sie?     Mir   ist  es  gar  nicht   zum 

Lachen. 
Aber  ich  weiss,  was  ich  thue.  §     Ich  werde  sie  nach 

dem  Grund  eines  solchen  Betragens  fragen. 

Sie  wird  immer  gleichgiiltiger  gegen  mich. 

Nun  leben  Sie  wohl.     Ich  muss  Sie  verlassen. 
Ich.mochte  heute  abend  ins  Tlieater  gehen 


NOTES. 

1  Or,  Wo  haben  Sie  sie  getroffen?  Notice  that  begegnen 
governs  the  dative  case.  —  2  Fahren  is  understood. 

8  Notice  that  in  German  mehr  has  to  be  separated  from  kein,  if 
the  latter  is  used  as  an  adjective  (i.  e.,  before  a  noun).  So  never  say,  as 
many  German- Americans  do,  kein  mehr  Brot,  but  always  kein 
Brot  mehr,  —  *  Or,  gesehen.    See  p.  176.  —  f  For  zu,  see  p.  524, 

X  See  note  f,  opposite  page.  —  ^  For  non-use  of  infinitive,  see  p.  524, 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


443 


III, 


PRONUNCIATION. 

1.  Gla-db^-b'n  ze  dokh 
<las^  \\\cht,  \ch  lia^-be  ze 
zo  a^-b'ii 

Be-gac7i'-net. 
Tn'-gan'. 

Tsvi'-f  1 bre'-cTi'n. 

L,a'-kh'ji. 
Grd6nt'. 

Glic?i'-gur-ti-g'r. 


Te-a'-t'r 


TRANSLATION. 

Don't  believe  it.  For  I 
have  just  met  her  rid- 
ing" out  in  the  Park, 

I  was  taking  a  stroll  with  a 
friend  of  mine. 

Where  did  you  meet  her? 

At  the  very  ^  entrance  of  the 
Garden.  She  was  about  to 
drive  back  to  the  city,  but 
when  she  saw  me,  etc.^ 

There  is  no  doubt  of  it.'  She 
is  going  to  break  with  me.  I 
wanted  her  to  visit  me,  and 
she  had  promised  to  do  so.  X 

Why  do  you  laugh  ?  I  don't 
feel  like  laughing.'* 

But  I  know  what  to  do.  I  in- 
tend to  ask  her  the  reason* 
for  such  conduct. 

She  is  getting  to  be  more  and 
more  indifferent  toward  me. 

Well,  good-bye.     I  am  going. 

I  feel  like  going  to  the  theater 
to-night 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Directly  at  the  entrance.  —  ^  strictly  :   Turned  she  again  around. 

>*  It  (i.  e.,  there)  is  no  doubt  more. 

4  To-me  is  it  not  at  all  to-the  laughing. 

•••  After  tlie  reason  ask. —  To  ask  for  is  usually  rendered  by  fragen 
nacU,  sometimes  by  fragen  rem  (or  iiher,  or  tvegen),  but  never  by 
fragen  fiir. —  f  Wheii  =  alSf  when  it  refers  to  a  single  past  occasion. 
See  page  232.  —  |  See  page  446,  note  1. 


444  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

2.  Icli  kaiiii  dieses  Gediclit  iiiclit  leriien,  es 
ist  zu*  scliwer. 

Ich  will  gern  etwas  anderes  lernen. 

Gut.     Dann  nehmen   Sie   diesen   kurzen  Auszug! 

Glauben   Sie,  dass   Sie  ihn  bis   morgen   lernen 

konnen  ? 
Ich  hoffe  es.^ 
Haben    Sie    Ihre    deutsche    Arbeit    schon    abge- 

schrieben  ? 
Nein.     Ich  will  sie  heute  nachmittag  abschreiben. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Prepositions, 


Warum  sind  Sie  (denn)  so  traurig? 

Sehe  ich  traurig  aus?     Ein  Freund  von  mir  ist 

soeben  nach  Amerika  abgereist. 
Ich  wusste  nicht,  dass  der  Herr   schon   abgereist 

ist.2 
Ich  glaubte,  Sie  sollten^  mit  ihrn  reisen. 

Ich  kann  noch  nicht  abkommen.    Aber  ich  werde 

auch  bald  reisen. 
Wie  heisst  dieser  Herr? 


NOTES. 

1  The  English  word  so,  when  used  to  represent  a  preceding  verb  or 
clause,  as  in  the  above  sentence,  is  rendered  in  German  by  es  (lit. :  it). 
Ex.:  Do  you  think  so  I*  =  Glauben  Sie  esf  I  hope  so  =  Ich  hofte 
eSf  etc. 

2  Or,  sei  (or  war,  or  ware). 

8  /  am  to,  I  have  to,  are  rendered  in  German  by  ich  soil,  or  ich 
muss. 


l^LEASUREt^    AND    HEALTH. 


445 


2.  Ich  kan  <le^-z6s  g-e- 
dichV  uicJit  ler^-nen  es 
ist  tsob  shvar''. 


Koor'-ts'n. 


Ap'-ge-slire-b'n. 
Ap'-shri'-b'n. 


I  couldn't^  learn  that 
poem,  it  is  too  hard. 

I  am  Avilling  to  learn  some- 
thing else. 

Well.  Then  take  this  short 
extract.  Do  you  think  you 
could  learn  it  for  to-morrow  ? 

I  hope  so.^ 

Have  you  already  copied  your 

German  exercise? 
No.   I  '11  copy  it  this  afternoon. 


pages  530  and  531. 


3.  Va-rdbm^  zint-'  ze  d6n 
zo  tra-db^-ric^. 


Mit'  em. 
Ap'-ko'-m'n. 


What  makes  you  so  sad?^ 

Do  I  look   sad?    A  friend  of 
mine  has  just  left  for  America. 

I  did  not  know  the  gentleman 

had  gone. 
I  thought  you  were  to  *  go  with 

him. 
Not  yet.     But  I  will  go  soon. 

What  is  the  gentleman's  name? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  I  can't. 

2  I  liope  it. 

3  Why  are  you  so  sad? 

4  You  should,  etc.    See  note  3,  on  opposite  page. 

-'•  When  zu  means  too,  it  may  be  pronounced  short  or  long  (tsoo,  or 
tsdo).  Either  way  is  correct.  When  zu  is  a  preposition  and  means 
to,  however,  it  is  short  (tsoo)  before  verbs,  and  long  elsewhere. 


446  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

Er  heisst  Gottfried  Leonhardi. 
Was  fiir  ein  schoner  Name  ist  das! 


4.  Nun  lass  uns  an  die  Arbeit  gehen  I 

Ich  habe  sehr  viel  zu  thun. 

Ich  habe  meine  englische  Arbeit  abzuschreiben. 

Ich  habe  sehr  viele  Fehler  gegen  die  Iiiterpunk- 

tion  gemacht. 
Sie  habeii  zu^  fliichtig  gearbeitet. 
Sie  batten  sorgfaltiger  arbeiten  sollen. 

Ich  habe  meine  Feder  irgendwo  liegen  lassen. 
Nehmen  Sie  eine  von  meinen.^ 
Danke.     Sie  sind  sehr  liebenswiirdig. 

Ist  es  heute  nicht  schrecklich  warm? 
Ja,  aber  nicht  so  warm  wie^  gestern. 

Ihre  Federn  sind  dicker  als^  die  meinigen.*     Ich 
kann  nicht  damit  schreiben. 

Bitte  um  Entschuldigung ;   sie  sind  nicht  so  dick 
wie  Ihre.     Wollen  Sie,  dass  ich  eine  hole? 


NOTES. 

1  For  the  pronunciation  of  zu  =  too,  see  page  445, 

2  Or,  den  meinigen. —  ^  jf  two  persons  or  things  are  compared 
with  one  another,  tlie  conjunction  of  comparison  is  als  (than),  after  a 
coniparutive,  hut  wie  (as)  after  a  positive.  Dini't  say:  dicker  urie 
die  meiniges;  hut,  dicker  als  die  meinigen.  On  the  contrary, 
never  say :  so  tvat'in  als  gestern;  hut,  so  warm  tvie  gestern. 

*  Die  meinigen  =  m//i6',  viy  own;  die  Meinigen  {spelled  with  a 
capital),  however,  —my  family. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


447 


Got'-fret'. 


4.    Noon  las^  dbns  ^n  de 
ar^-bit  ga^-'n. 

Tsdo  toon. 


Fa'-l'r in-t'r-poonk- 

tsi-on'. 


Fliich'-tich. 
Z6rc7i'-fel'-ti-g'r. 


Di'-k'r. 


Nicht 


His  name  is   Gottfried   Leon- 

hardi. 
What  a  pretty  name ! 


Well,  let  us  go  to  work. 

I  have  a  great  deal  to  do. 

I  have  to  copy  my  EngHsh 
exercise. 

I  have  made  a  great  many  mis- 
takes in  1  the  punctuation. 

You  have  worked  too  hurriedly. 
You    ought    to    have    done   it 

more  carefully. 
I  have  left  my  pen  somewhere. 
Take  one  of  mine. 

Many  thanks.     You  are  very 

kind. 
It  is  very  warm  to-day,  —  is  it 

not?  2 
Yes,  very   warm ;   but  not  as 

warm  as  it  was  yesterday. 
Your  pens    are    coarser   than 

mine.      I    can't    write    with 

them.^ 
Pardon  me.     They  are  not  as 

coarse    as    yours.*    Do   you 

want  me  to  (go  and)  get  one?^ 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Against.— 2  Is  it  to-day  not  terribly  warm?  — 3  Therewith. 

*  Or,  die  Ihrigen.  This  form  has  always  to  be  written  with  a 
capital,  and,  therefore,  may  sometimes  also  mean  your  fionily.  See 
note  4  on  the  opposite  page. 

5  Will  yon  that  I  one  fetch?  — When  an  infinitive  in  English  fol- 
lows another  verb  which  has  a  different  subject,  Germans  prefer  not  to 
use  the  infinitive,  but,  instead,  the  indicative  or  subjunctive  with  dass^ 
as  here. 


448  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

Sie  hatten  recht.     Ich  glaubte  nicht,  dass  meine 

so  dick  waren. 
Aber  was  ist  das?     Haben  Sie  nichts  gehort? 

Nein,  ich  habe  nichts  gehort. 

Sind  Sie  schwerhorig? 

Nein,  ich  bin  es^  nicht. 

Sprechen  Sie  nicht  so  laut.     Ich  hore  jemanden. 

Ich  auch. 


Note.  —  Study  the  Conjunctions, 


5.  Nicht  wahr,  Sie  haben  Durst? 

Ja,  ich  bin  sehr  durstig. 

Soil  ich  Ihnen  ein  Glas  Wein  und  etwas  zu  essen 
holen  lassen? 

Nein,  ich  danke;   ich  war  vor  einer  Stunde  sehr 

hungrig. 
Jetzt  habe  ich  keinen  Hunger  mehr.*     Geben  Sie 

mir  nur  ein  wenig  Wasserl 

Wie  miide  sehen  Sie  aus !  .  .  .  . 
Nun,  was  giebt  es  Neues? 

Wissen  Sie,  welche  Nachricht  ^  ich  eben  f  erhalten  | 
habe?§ 


NOTES. 

1  The  Germans  do  not  ordinarily  use  such  phrases  as  7  am,  I  have, 
I  do,  etc.,  but  complete  the  sentence  by  means  of  the  word  es.  Thus  : 
Are  you  sick  ?  =  Sind  Sie  krank  ?  Answer ;  No,  I  am  vot  =  Nein,  ich 
bin  es  nicht.  — ^rc  i/ov.  Mr.  Strnuas ?  =  ^\n(\  Sie  Herr  Strauss? 
Ans. :  Yes,  I  am  =  .la,  ich  bin  es,  —  2  Plur.  Nachrichten.    See  p.  473. 


PLEASUKES    AND    HEALTH. 


449 


Ze  lia'-t'n  recTit. 


Slivar'-li<i'-ric7i. 

Zo  la-dot'. 
Ich  a-dbkh'. 


You  were  right.   I  did  n't  think 
mine  were  so  coarse. 

But  what  is  that  ?    Did  n't  you 

hear  something  ?  ^ 
No,  I  have  not.^ 
Are  you  hard  of  hearing? 
No,  I  am  not.* 

Don't  speak  so  loud.     I  hear 

somebody. 
So  do  I. 


page  532. 


6.   Nic/it^   var 
ddbrst^  ? 


ze   ha^-b'n 


Nakh'-Tich'-Vn. 


You  are  very  thirsty,  are 
you  not? 

Yes,  I  am. 

Shall  I  have  a  glass  of  wine  and 

something  to  eat  brought  to 

you  ? 
No,   thank    you.     I   was   very 

hungry  an  hour  ago.* 

But  now  I  am  not  hungry  any 
more.  Give  me  a  little  water 
only. 

How  tired  you  look !  .  .  .  . 

Well,  what's  the  news? 

Do  5'ou  know  what  news  I 
have  just  heard? 


LITERAL   TRANSLATIONS. 

1  Have  you  nothing  heard?—  2  I  have  nothing  heard. 

*  I  am  it  not. —  ■*  Before  an  hour. 

*  For  the  position  of  mehr  and  kein,  see  page  442. 
t  Or,  bekommen.  —  X  Or,  so  eben. 

i  Also,  welche  Neuigkeit  (no-i'-ic/i-kit)  ich  eben  geliorthabe? 


450  VERGNUGEN    UNO    GESUNDHEIT. 

Kennen  Sie  Herrn  Dietrich? 
Ich  keniie  ihn  sehr  gut. 
Er  hat  soeben  Bankrott  gemacht.^ 
Das  ist  niclit  moglich.     Wer  es  Ihnen  auch  im- 
mer  gesagt  haben  mag,  ich  glaube  es  nicht. 

Aber  ich  versichere  Sie,  dass  es  so  ist. 

0  das  ist  zu  schade.     Das  thut  mir  wirklich  sehr 

leid. 
Jedermann  mochte  ihn  gut  leiden. 
Glauben    Sie,   dass    es   zu    einem    Ausgleich    mit 

seinen  Glaubigern  hommen  wird? 
Wer  kann  das  wissen ! 


Note.  —  Study  the  Interjections, 


6.   Ich   hore,   dass    Sie   Ihr    Doktorexamen  t 
macheii  wollen. 

Ich  bin  Doktor.* 
Wie?     Sie  sind  schon  Doktor? 
Ja,  ich  bin's.2 

Ich  gratuliere  Ihnen.^     Aber  was  ist   aus   Ihrem 
Freund  Wieland  geworden? 

Er  ist  hier  auf  der  Universitat. 

Aber  es  ist  Zeit,  dass  wir  gehen. 

Lassen  Sie  uns  eilen,  damit  wir  nicht  vom  Regen 

iiberrascht  w^erden. 
Nehmen   Sie   sich   in    acht,   dass    Sie    nicht    nass 

werden. 


NOTES. 

»  Or,  er  hat  soeben  falliert. 

2  Familiar,  instead  of  ich  bin  es.     For  the  use  of  es,  see  i)age  448. 

8  Or,  ich  wiinsche  Ihnen  Gliick.     Lit.:  I  ivhh  ijoa  lack. 

*  For  the  omission  of  the  indefudte  article,  see  Appendix,  page  53"^ 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH. 


451 


Det'-Tich. 
Bafi-krot'. 


Ya'-d'r-Tnan' 

A-66s'-glic7i' 
g'rn. 


gl6-i'-bi- 


Do  you  know  Mr.  Dietrich  ? 

I  know  him  very  well. 

He  has  just  failed. 

That 's    impossible.     Whoever 

may  have  told  you  so,  I  don't 

believe  him. 
But  I  assure  you  he  has. 
That's  too  bad.      I   am   very 

sorry  (for  him). 

He  was  hked  by  everybody.^ 

Do  you  think  he  will  come  to  an 
agreement  with  his  creditors? 

Nobody  can  tell.^ 


page  533. 


6.     Ich    hiire    das    ze    er 
d6k^-t6r-6k-s^'-in'n. 

Bin'. 


Gra-too-le'-re 


dO-ne-ver-zJ'  t§it'. 
XJ'-b'r-rastiV. 
In  akht\ 


I  understand  ^  you  are  g-o- 
ing  to  become  a  doctor.* 

I  am  (a)  physician. 

What !     You  are  already,  etc. 

Yes,  I  am. 

I  congratulate  you.     But  what 

has  become  of  your  friend, 

Mr.  Wieland? 
He  is  here  at  the  university. 
But  it  is  time  to  be  going. 
Let  us  hurry,  so  that  Ave  may 

not  be  caught  out  in  the  rain. 

Take  care  not  to  get  wet.^ 


LITERAL    TRANSLATIONS. 
1  Everybody  miglit  liim  well  suffer.  —  2  ^yjio  can  that  know. 
3  /  hear.     Germans  would  not,  in  tliis  circumstance,  say  :  ich  ver- 
stehe.  —  ■*  That  you  your  doctor  —  examination  make  will. 
6  That  you  not  wet  become. —  f  Oi-,  Ihre  Doktorpriifiing. 


452  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

The  same  directions  as  hereto/ore  to  be  followed. 

GESPRACHE. 

1.  —  UNTERRICHT* 

Sie  lernen  deutsch  ?    Kommen  Sie  denn  gut  voran  ?  ^ 

—  Es  kommt  mir  vor,  als  ob  ich  ganz  gute  Fortschrit- 
te^  machte.  —  Finden  Sie  die  deutsche  Aussprache^ 
schwer?  —  Ausserordentlich  schwer.  Und  danii  giebt 
es  audi  so  viele  Worter,  welche  fast   gleich   lauten.* 

—  Nun,  das  finden  Sie  in  alien  Sprachen.  Ich  muss 
dabei  an  eine  Dame  denken,^  welche  an  einem 
schwiilen  Sommertag  in  einem  Hotel  in  Mainz  ab- 
stieg^  und,  da'^  Sie  sehr  durstig  war,  von  dem 
Madchen  ein  Glas  Eiswasser  verlangte.^  Ungliick- 
licherweise  konnte^  sie  nicht  gut  deutsch  und  sagte, 
indem  sie  sich  bemiihte/^  die  ihr  fremden  und  un- 
gewohnten  ^^  Worte  recht  deutlich  ^^  auszusprechen, 
^^Heiss    Wasser"    statt    ^^  Eiswasser."     Das    Madchen 


Pronunciation  and   Translations. 

1    Are  you  getting  along   well?    Also:    kommen   Sie    gut  vor- 
'warts  ?  —  2  Progress.  —  3  A-oos'-sJipra'-fc/ie. 

4  Sound  alike. —  6  Lit.:    /  must  thereby  of  a  lady  think.     Anglice: 
That  makes  me  think  of  a  lady.  —  ^  Iniper.  of  absteigen,  str.  verb. 
'  As.  — 8  Imperfect  of  verlangen,  weak  verb,  to  a.^k. 
^  Understood  :  sprechen.     Can  you  speak  German  f    Kiinnen  Sie 
deutsch?    Sprechen  being  understood. 

^^  From  sich  bemiilien,  to  take  j)ains. —  ^^  Foreign  and  unusual. 
12  Distinctly.  —  •■'•-  dOn'-t'r-riclit'. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  453 

ging  und  kehrte^  bald,  zur  grossen  Enttauschung  ^ 
der  armen^  Dame,  mit  einem  machtigen  Topf*  heis- 
sen,  kochenden^  Wassers  zuriick.^ 

2. -  ZERSTREUT* 

Haben  Sie  Professor  Mommsen  kiirzlich  gesehen? 
—  Ich  bin  ihm  soeben  begegnet,  aber  ich  weiss  nicht, 
was  er  hatte,  er  hat  mich  nicht  einmal  gegriisst.  — 
Diese  Professoren  sind  doch  alle  zerstreut.  Dabei 
fallt  mir  die  Geschichte  von  einem  Professor  in  Got- 
tingen  ein,  von  dem  man  sich  erzahlt,  dass  er  eines 
Tages  einem  Dienstmadchen  mit  zwei  Kleinen^  auf 
der  Strasse  begegnete,  ^^Was  fiir  reizende  Kinder," 
redete  er  sie  an,  ^^  das  sind  wohl  ZwilHnge?"'^  — 
Gewiss,  Herr  Professor,  und  sie  gehoren  alle  beide 
Ihnen,"  war  die  Antwort.  —  Wissen  Sie,  was  man  von 
Lessings  Zerstreutheit  erzahlt?  —  Nein,  ich  habe  nie 
gehort,  dass  Lessing  zerstreut  war.  —  Doch ;  in  seinen 
letzten  Lebensjahren  hatte  er  haufige  Anfalle^  von 
Zerstreutheit.  Eines  Abends  pochte  er  an  seine 
Hausthiir,  worauf  der  Diener,  der  ihn  in  der  Dun- 
kelheit  nicht  erkannte,^  aus  dem  Fenster  hinunter 
rief:  ^^Der  Herr  Professor  ist  nicht  zu  Hause." — ^^Gut, 
gut,"  antwortete  Lessing,  ^^es  thut  nichts,  ich  werde 
ein  andermal  wiederkommen." 


Pronunciation   and   Translations. 

1  Imperfect  of  nturuckkehen,  to  come  back,  to  return. 

2  Disgust, —  3  Poor. —  ■*  A  huge  kettle. —  ^  Boiling. 

*  Little  ones. —  "^  Twins. —  8  Frequent  attacks. 

•  Imperfect  of  erkennen,  to  recognize.  —  *  Absent-minded. 


454  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

To  he  translated  and  read  aloud  in  German,  whether  for  Self-Stud'^ 
or  'preparation  for  the  class-room. 

5lu^  J>et  Sittetrttttt*  —  3* 

.  —  9^un,  §err  ^rofeffor,  mie  lauge  bauerte  benn  ^orn= 
rd§d)en§  (3d)luniiner  ?  ©ie  fagten  neiilid)/  bie  beiit)'d;e 
^^oej'ie  fei  nadj  ber  fd)oiien  3^^^  ^^"^  TOnnefcinger  in  (angen 
©c^Iaf  gefallen. 

—  @§  tDar  a(lerbing§  ein  (anger  ©d)taf,  \)zxm  erft  mit 
bem  (grfd)einen  beg  „3}kifia§"2  i;)on  ^(o^ftod  i.  %  1748 
beginnt  bie  ^meite  glan^enbe  ^^eriobe  ber  bentfdjen  Sittera= 
tur,  bie  3^^^  ^^^  ^laffifer.^  (S^  ift  inbe§  intereffant,  bie 
Derfd)iebenen  ^^erfud)e*  ^u  betrad)ten/  ioeldie  bie  bentfd)e 
®id)tfunft  mad)te,  urn  ai\^  bem  tiefen  ©djlnmmer  ^u  er^ 
txjac^en.  '^\x^x\i  toaren  e^  bie  ^iirger^  in  ben  anfb(n()en= 
ben^  <Stdbten,  it)e(d)e  im  14.  unb  15.  3a()r^unbert  bie 
^oefie  in  bie  ^cinbe  na()men,  ganj  natlirlid),  benn  'i^a^ 
9f?ittertum  ^  'max  in  9^o()eit^  au^geartet/^  nnb  bie  @eift(id)= 
feit  n^ar  t)erVDelt(id)t.^i  6o  tuarb  ber  9}Zinnegefang  ^utn 
3Jl  e  t  f  t  e  r  g  e  f  a  n  g  .^    Slber  bie  ^anbioerf^meifter  ^^  ftrebten  " 


1  The  other  day.  —  2  '  The  Messiah,'  a  celebrated  epic  poem. 

8  Classical  (poets,  understood),  namely  :  Klopstock,  Lessiiig^  Wie- 
land,  Herder,  Goethe,  and  Schiller.  —  ■*  Der  Versuch  (fer- 
zookh'),  attempt.  —  s  'X'o  view,  consider. —  ^  The  citizens,  i.  e.,  the 
lower  orders  as  distinguished  from  the  nobles  who  formerly  (for  in- 
stance, under  the  name  of  Minnesdnger)  had  monopolized  German 
poetry. —  7  From  aufbliihen,  to  begin  to  bloom.  — 8  Chivalry,  i.  e., 
the  nobles.     See  n.  6.  —  ^  Rudeness,  barbarousness.  —  !<>  Degenerated. 

1^  The  clergy  had  become- worldly, —  12  jjt. :  so  became  the  Mifine~ 
gesang  {love-song)  to  Meistergesang  {master-song).  Anglice:  So  the 
Mlanegesang  turned  into  the  Meistergesang.  Tbo  Meistergesang  was 
the  art  of  song  as  practiced  by  the  masters  {of  trades),  that  is  to  say,  by 
the  citizens,  the  lower  orders.   See  n.  G.  — 18  Master  tradesmen.  —  1*  Strove. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  455 

nur  nacf)  einer  |)cbantifc^  gefe^ma^igen  ^  Jorm  ber  ®id)= 
timgen,  ber  S"')'^!^  ''^^'^^  imbebeutenb  unb  meift  auf  ha^ 
Se()rl;afte,^  ba^  3}JoraUfd;e  befc^rcinft.^  ©iefer  9Jieifterge= 
fang  cr(;ebt  fid)  erft  im  16.  Sa^r^unbert  in  Qan§>  ©ad)§, 
eineni  ber  frnc^tbarften  *  unb  t)ie(feitigften  beutfcben  ®id)ter, 
5U  einer  getuiffen  ©rofee.  ©r  bidjtete  nid)t  nur  ^af)llofe 
3}2eifterfpriic^e/  fonbern  audi  t)ol!gtiimIid)e  ^  (;umoriftifd;e 
(Sr^dl^lungen '  unb  t)ie(e  ^ramen,  befonberg  gaftnad)tf^iie!e, 
ja  iDir  fonnen  i(;n  aud;  ben  ®id)ter  ber  fird)(i(f)en  ^  9tefor= 
mation  nennen  unb  :liut(;er  an  bie  ©eite  ftetlen.  Qan^ 
<Bad)§>  wax'o  yon  feinen  g^i^Q^^^'^fKi^  ^  ^)^^  t)ere(;rt,  bie 
3'?ad;U')elt  ^^  aber  ijattc  i(;n  (ange  t)ergeffen  unb  tjerfannt.^^ 
^Tft  @dt(;e  erfannte  feinen  SSert^^  mieber  unb  fdjrieb  ^u 
feiner  G:(;renrettung  ^^  ha^  befannte  @ebid)t,  „§an§  (Bad)- 
fen^  ^*  poetifd)e  ©enbung/'  ^^  in  bem  er  Don  il;m  fagt : 
^a  broben  in  't^m  SBolfen  fc^toebt^^ 
©in  ©id;fran5/'  emg^^  jung^^  belaubt,^^ 
^en  fe^t  bie  ^ladjwdt  i^m  auf^  §au!pt. 
©eitbem  toirb  Qan§>  (Sad)fen§  ^erbienft^^  urn  bie  beutfcbe 
Sitteratur  botlauf  geioiirbigt,^  unb  feine  S^aterftabt  ^fHirn^ 
berg,  wMjc  itber(;au^t  eine  ber  §au^tftatten  be§  9JJeifter= 
gefang^  tuar,  ijat  xijm  ein  fd)oneg  ®en!ma(  gefe^t. 

—  Unb  i)at  \i)m  nid)t  9^id)arb  SKagner  in  feinen  „  3}Jeifter= 
fcingern"  ein  nod;  fd;bnere§  ^enfmal  gefe^t? 

—  ©ie  i}ahm  red)t,  nieine  greunbin,  unb  umfonie^r  ^  a{§> 
gerabe  bie  „  9Jleifterfanger "  eine  ber  i)olf§tiimlid)ften  unb 


A  Legal.  —  2  Didactic  poetry.  —  ^  Confined.  —  *  Prolific. 
6  Didactic  poems  (lit. :   sayings,  sentences),   of  the  master-singers 
(i.  e.,  singing  trades-people).  —  ^  Popular. —  T'  Narrations,  stories. 
8  Religious. —  »  Contemporaries. —  i**  Posterity.  —  n  Mistaken. 
12  Value.—  13  Vindication. —  "  For  the  formation  of  the  genitive 
of  proper  names  ending  in  s,  see  page  475. —  i^  Mission. 
16  Hovers.  —  i''  Oak -crown.  ~  is  Eternally.  —  i^  Young,  new. 
20  Leafed.  —  21  Merit.  —  22  Appreciated.  —  23  The  more  so. 


456  VERGNUGEN    UND    GESUNDHEIT. 

anfprec^enbfteu  ^  Opun  SBagnerS  finb,  bie  §an§  ©ad)fen§ 
^06  2  fiir  atle  3^iten  berfiinben^  voerbeiL  Slber  laffen  (Sie 
mid)  better  ge^en  unb  nuume(;r  be^  Manm^  gebenfen,  ben 
id)  fd)on  in  ^erbinbimg*  mit  §an^  <Bad)§>  ^x\va^ni^  i)ahc: 
^ut^er  f)at  fid)  burd)  feine  Sibeliiberfefeimg  fo  tt)ie  burd; 
feine  geiftlid)en  Sieber^  ein  imfterb(id)e§  ^  ^erbienft^  urn  bie 
beutfd)e  fiitteratur  emorben.^  ©r  gab  bem  beut|d)en  ^olf 
eine  ein^eit(id)e  ©d)riftf^rad)c,^  bie  fid)  burc^  bie  ^ibe(  mit 
§iilfe  ber  neu  erfunbenen  33ud)bruder!unft  ^^  balb  iiber  a^aw^ 
^eutfd)Ianb  t)erbreitete."  Tlit  ber  ^Reformation  fd)ienen  aEe 
^ebingungen  ^2  erfiillt,  um  tDieber  eine  grofee  beutfd)e  ^oefie 
entfte^en  ^u  taffen/^  al§>  ber  breifeigjdbrige  ^rieg  aufSbrad). 
^ie  gliigel  be§  ©eifteS^^  (agen^^  bnrd)  ba§  (Slenb^^  be§ 
^riege^  faft  gan^  barnieber.^^  2Sic  ba§  Sanb  ein  'Manh 
ber  gremben/^  fo  rt)arb  anc^  bie  beutfd)e  ©^rad)e  burd)  bie 
©inmifc^ung  ^^  t)ieler  grembmorter,  befonber^  franjbfifc^er, 
entftellt/^  unb  felbft  nad)  gefd)(offenem  grieben^  tuaren  bie 
^eutfd)en  nod)  lange  nid)t  im  ftanbe,^^  fid)  Don  bem  (Sin= 
fluff e  be§  3(u§(anbe§  ^2  ^^  befreien.  ©0  n^ar  benn  bae  ganje 
17.  3af)r^unbert  aud)  fiir  bie  ^oefie  eine  febr  traurige 
geit.  3n  biefer  3^^^  na^men  fid)^^  bie  ©elebrten^^  ber 
^id)tung  an.^  ^§>  entbrannte  in^befonbere '^^  ein  I;eftiger 
5lam^f  gmifc^en  @ottfd)eb  in  Sei^^ig  unb  ^obmer  in  ber 


1  Most  attractive.  —  2  Praise.  —  «  To  announce.—  ■*  Connection. 

5  Mentioned. —  6  Religious  songs,  hymns. —  ^  Immortal. 

8  Sich  ein  Verdienst  erwerben  um,  etc.     To  deserve  well  of. 
Lit. :  to  gain  (for)  one's  self  a  desert.  —  ^  A  uniformly  written  or  book- 
language.  —  10  Art  of  printing.  —  ^^  Sich  verbreiten,  to  spread. 
12  Conditions,  promises.  —  i*  To  have  originate. 
1*  The  '  wings  of  genius.' 

16  Da(r)niederliegen,  to  lie  down.  —  1*  Misery,  affliction. 
iJ"  Prey  of  foreigners.  —  I8  Admixture.  —  i^  Disfigured. 
20  Frieden  schliessen,  to  make  peace. —  21  Able. 
22  Foreign  country.  -     "^  Sich  annehmen,  to  take  care. 
2*  Learned  men.—  25  Insbesondere  (or,  besonders),  especially. 


PLEASURES    AND    HEALTH.  457 

©c^ttjeta.  3n  biefem^  ^anbelte  e§  fid)^  einmaP  barurn, 
ob  bie  befferen  fran^ofifc^en  obcr  bte  befferen  eng(ifcf)en 
®id)ter  nad)al;mengtt)erte  *  ^orbilber  fiir  bie  ®eutfd)en  feien, 
unb  bann  barum,  ob  bie  ^oefie  ©ad)e  be§  33erftanbe§^ 
ober  beg  ©efii^Ig  fei.  ®a  erfd)ien  ^Id^lid),  tt)af)renb  biefi^r 
^amp\  nod)  bauerte,^  ber  ®rli)fer/  ber  ®ornri)gd)en  toieber 
gum  Seben  tix^U,  griebrid;  Gottlieb  Rlop\tod,  unb 
fii^rte^  mit  feinem  „9JJeffia§"  bie  p)dU  ^oetif(i)e  ©lan^^eit 
ber  beutfdjen  :^itteratur  E)erauf,^  beren  ^elben  aufeer  ^Io^= 
ftod  Seffing,  SSielanb,  Berber,  @dtl;e  unb  ©(f)iner 
finb.  Unb  ^ierinit,  meine  greunbin,  (;a(te  id;  meine  2(uf:= 
gabe/  (5ie  in  aller  ^ur^e  mit  bem  (SnttDidelung^gang  ber 
beutfcf)en  Sitteratur  befannt^^  311  mac^en,  fiir  geldft.^ 

—  2(ber  taffen  ©ie  mid)  bod)  nod)  eine  grage  an  ©ie 
ric^ten !  3Sen  ^alten  ©ie  benn  fiir  hm  gro^eren  ^ic^ter, 
(Sd)iaer  ober  ©ot^e? 

—  @§  gab  eine  Q^xt,  gndbige  ^rau,  tt)o  biefe  ?^rage  ^an= 
fig"  genug  (eb^aft/^  \a  ^i^g^^  t)i§!uticrt  tt)urbe.  @liid= 
Iid)ertt)eife  ^*  ^at  barauf  ©ot^e  felbft  bie  befte  Slntoort 
gegeben,  inbem  er  au^rief :  ^^  „  ®ie  tf)orid)ten  ^^  ^eutfc^en ! 
Xa  ftreiten  fie  fid)  nnn  fjerum/'  toer  grower  fei,  ob  ©critter 
ober  ic^ !  ©ie  foUten  bod;  fro^  fein,  ta^  fie  ^wd  fo(d)e 
^erle^^  ^aben,  n)ie  tt)ir." 


1  Understood,  Kampf.—  2_Es  handelt  sich  {thoroughly  idiomatic). 
Anglice:  The  question  is.—  ^  In'-mal',  in  the  first  place. —  <  Worthy 
of  imitation. —  ^  Intellect.—  ^  Lasted,  continued.  N.  B.  —  Distinguish 
from  dauern,  to  last,  the  impersonal  verb  dauern :  es  dauert  mich 
(also,  ich  bedaure),  I  regret. —  ^  Deliverer,  saviour. 

8  From  herauflRihren,  to  inaugurate,  lit. :  to  lead  up. 

9  T  hold  my  problem  (Anglice  :    /  consider  my  attempt)  you  in  the 

shortest  way  (lit. :  in  all  shortness) (for)  solved.     Eine  Aufgabe 

losen  (lu'-z'n),  to  solve  a  problem. —  ^  Familiar. —  n  Frequently. 

1'^  In  a  lively  way.  —  is  Ardently. 

1^  Fortunately.  —  i^  Exclaimed.  —  I6  Foolish. 

17  Sich  herumstreiten,  to  dispute.  —  is  Fellows. 


GRAMMAR. 


THE     ARTICLE. 

The  Germans  have  two  articles,  the  definite  and  the  ifir' 
definite  article. 

I.  — THE     DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

The  definite  article  corresponds  to  the  English  thr. 

The  singular  of  the  article,  —  The  nominative  singu- 
lar {or,  first  case)  has  distinct  forms  for  the  7)iaseuline,  fcniinwp, 
and  neuter.  The  other  cases  [genitive  (or  case  with  of),  dative 
(or  case  with  to),  and  accusative  (or  'direct-object'  case)],  have 
separate,  but  not  always  distinct  endings.     Thus  : 


Singular 

of  the 
article. 


NoM.  —  der,  die,  das  =the. 

Gen.  —  des,  der,  des   =  of  the. 

Dat.  —  dem,  der,  dem  =  to  the. 

[  Ace.  — den,  die,  das  —the. 


iNCtice  that  the  feminine  article  is  exactly  the  same  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative.    The  same  is  true   of  the  neuter* 

article. 

The  plural  of  the  article,  —  In  the  plural  there  is  only 
one  form  for  all  the  genders ;  but  there  are  distinct  forms  for  the 
cases  (except  that  nominative  and  accusative  are  alike).  Thus: 


FOR    ALL    GENDERS. 

r  1 
Plural  of 


f  NoM.  —  die  =the. 


,  ,   Gex.  —  der  =  of  the. 

'     ,      I  Dat.  — den=to  the. 
article.    \ 

I  Ace.  — die  =the. 


469 


460 


GRAMMAR. 


N.  B.  —  The  following  pronouns  are  declined  like  the  defi 
nite  article,  except  that  their  ve.uter,  nominative  and  accusative 
end  in  es  instead  of  as.     Thus:  das;  but,  dieses; 


SINGULAR. 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUT. 

dieser,       diese,       dieses  =this. 

jener,         jene,         jenes  =that. 

mancher,  manche,  manches  =ma7iya. 

jeder,         jede,         jedes  =  every. 

welcher,    welche,    welches  =  which? 


PLURAL. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

diese      =  these. 


jene 

manche =ma?i2/  «• 
no  plural. 
welche  =  which? 


Specimen   of   Declension. 


SINGULAR. 


MASC.  FEM.  NEUT. 

NoM.  —  dieser,    diese,    dieses  =this. 
Gen.  —  dieses,    dieser,  dieses  =  of  this. 
Dat.  — diesem,  dieser,  diesewi=to  this. 
Ace.  — diese»i,    diese,    dieses   =this. 

Let   the    student   decline   jener,    mancher,  jeder,   and 
welcher  according  to  this  model. 
For  the  use  of  the  definite  article,  see  opposite  page. 


PLURAL. 

ALL    GENDERS. 

diese    =  these. 
dieset*  =of  them. 
diesew,  =  to  them. 
diese    =  these. 


II.  —  THE     INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

The  indefinite  article  (English :  a,  an)  has,  of  course,  no 
plural.     It  is  declined  as  follows : 


MASO.         FEM.           NEUT. 

NOM. 

—  ein,        eine,     ein       =  a  (an). 

Gen. 

—  eines,    einer,  eines    =  of  a. 

DAT. 

—  einei^t,  einer,  einetn  =  to  a. 

Ace. 

—  einen,   eine,     ein       =a. 

N.  B.  —  Notice  that  in  the  declension  of  the  masculine,  ein 
differs  from  the  definite  article  only  in  the  nominative  (ein) 
having  no  ending.  In  the  feminine,  ein  is  declined  exactly  like 
the  definite  article.  In  the  neuter  (as  in  the  masculine),  ein 
differs  from  the  definite  article  in  having  no  ending  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative. 


GRAMMAR.  461 

OTHER     WORDS    DECLINED    I.IKE    EIN. 

The  numeral  adjective  kein  and  the  following  posses- 
sive  pronouns : 

tneint  my,      sein,  his,  unser,  our,      Ihr^  your, 

deifif    thy,      ihr,^  her,  euer^  your,    ihr^    their, 

are  decUned  like  ein.     These  words,  however,  have  2^  plural, 
which  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  the  definite  article.    Ex. : 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

MASC.        FEM.      NEUT.  ALL  GENDERS. 

NoM. —  mein,        meine,    niein       —my.  meine    =my. 

Gen.  —  meincs,    nieiner,  meines    =ofmy.  meiner  =of  my. 

Dat.  — meiuetn,  nieine^*,  uieinetn  =  to  m,y.  mQinen^to  my. 

Ace.  — meinew-,  nieine,    mein       =my.  meine    =7riy.* 

III.  — USES    OF    THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

General  Rule.  —  The  definite  article  is  more  frequently 
used  in  German  than  in  English. 

OASES    WHEN    THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE    IS    USED. 

1.  With  propel'  names : 

If  the  proper  name  is  preceded  by  an  adjective.    Ex. : 
Poor  William  =  Der  arme  Wilhelm. 
Rich  England  =  Das  reiche  England. 

2.  With  the  genitive  plural  of  cotmnon  nouns,  as  it  is 
sometimes  the  only  way  of  distinguishing  it  from  the  nomi- 
native.    Thus : 

3Ien\s  d7dy='Die  Pflicht  der  Menschen  {never:  Die  Pflicht 
Menschen,  because  Menschen  is  the  form  of  the  nominative  as 
well  as  of  the  genitive  ]}lund). 

3.  With  abstract  nouns  (generally).    Ex. : 

Beauty  =  Die  Schonheit. 


1  Notice  that  ihv  =  her  or  their.  The  context  naturally  always  shows 
which  is  meant. 

2  Ihr,  written  with  a  capital,  is  a  more  polite  form  (for  your). 

*■  When  used  without  a  noun,  eiw,  mein,  dein,  etc.,  are  declined 
exactly  like  tiie  definite  article,  both  in  the  singular  and  phiral.  Thus: 
my  =  mein,  nieine,  mein^  etc. ;  but,  mi?ie  =  meiner,  meine,  meines, 
etc. 


462  GRAMMAR. 

4.  With  names  of  materials  (as,  wood,  gold,  water,  etc.), 
if  the  word  is  used  either  in  a  general  or  definite  sense.    Ex. : 

Gener. —  Gold  is  precious  =  Das  Gold  ist  wertvoll. 
Defin.  —  The  Gold  was  poor  =  Das  Gold  war  schlecht. 

5.  With  names  of  the  seasons,  months,  or  weeJcs,     Ex. : 
Summer  is  beautifal  here  =  Der  Sommer  ist  hier  schon. 

May  is  a  charming  month  =  Der  Mai  ist  ein  reizender  Monat. 
Come  on  Thursday  =Kon\men  Sie  am  Donnerstag. 

6.  For  use  with  parts  of  the  body,  see  p.  356.^  Observe  that 
the  use  of  the  article,  even  in  some  of  the  above  cases  (as  for 
instance  with  abstract  nouns),  is  often  optional  in  German. 

OASES    WHEN    THE     DEFINITE    ARTICLE    IS    NOT    USED. 

1.  With  names  of  jnaterials,  if  denoting  a  certain  quan- 
tity.   Ex. : 

Give  him  gold  =  Gehen  Sie  ihm  Gold, 
Bring  me  water  =  Bringen  Sie^mir  Wasser, 

2.  In  proverbs,     Ex. : 

Early  to  bed,  early  etc.  —  Morgenstunde  hat  Gold  im  Munde. 
Lit. :  Morning  hour  has  gold  in  the  mouth. 

3.  After  the  genitive  of  the  relative  pronoun.     Ex. : 

The  man  whose  carriage  I  saw  =^Der  Mann,  dessen  Wagen  ich  sah. 

4.  Before  the  cardinal  points,  when  these  are  preceded  by  a 
preposition.    Ex. : 

Fro)n  the  North  to  the  South=Von  Nord  bis  Siid. 
Exception.  —  With  the  prepos.  in,  the  article  is  used.    Ex. : 
In  the  West  =  Im  Westen. 

5.  The  definite  article  is  also  omitted  before  a  noun,  which 
governs  a  genitive  when  the  genitive  precedes  the  noun.     Ex. : 

/  come  from  the  lap  of  dark  rocks  =  Ich  komme  aus  dunkler 
Felsen  Schoss  (but :  aus  detn  Schoss  dunkler  Felsen). 

This,  however,  is  not  usual  in  prose,  except  with  proper 
names. 

Thus:  3Ir.  I\or)irr's  Ji(if  =  ¥{errn  Korners  Hut  (instead  of  Ber 
Hut  des  H.  K. ;  also  used). 

N.  B.  —  For  spLvial  uses  of  the  definite  article,  the  uses  of  the 
indejinitr  article,  and  the  position  o/  both  articles,  see  Appendix. 


GRAMMAR.  463 

THE     NOUN. 

I.  — THE    GENDER    OF    NOUNS. 

Nouns  in  German  may  be  either  masculine,  feminine, 
or  neuter, 

GENERAL     RULES. 

1.     NAMES    OF    MALES    AND    FEMALES. 

Names  of  males  are  masculine,  and  names  of  females 

feminine.     Thus : 

MASCULINE.  FEMININE. 

Z>er  Mann,  the  man.  Die  Frau,  thewoman.^ 

Der  Lowe,^  the  lion.  Die  Lowing  the  lioness. 

Exceptions:  Das  Weib  (vip),  the  ivoman,  and  the  diminu- 
tive names  of  males  or  females  formed  by  suffixing  cJien  or 
lein.     Thus : 

Das  Madchen  (mat^-c/fc'n),  the  girl. 
Das  Frau  lein  (fro-i^-lin),  the  young  lady. 
Das  Mannlein  (m^n^-lin),  the  little  man. 

2      NAMES    OF    THINGS. 

Names  of  things  may  be  either  masculine,  feminine,  or 
neuter.  This,  for  a  number  of  them,  depends  on  their  signifi- 
cation; for  the  larger  part,  however,  it  depends  on  their  ter- 
mination. 

HOW    TO    TELL    THEIR    GENDER. 

1.  Masculine.  —  The  ivinds,  points  of  the  compass,  seasons, 
months,  and  days.     Ex. : 

Der  Nordwind,  the  north  wind ;  der  Friihling,  the  Spring. 
Im^  Dezember,  December ;  am^  Mittwoch,  Wednesday. 
Also,  usually  :  —  The  names  of  stones.     Thus : 

Der  Diamant  (de-a-mant''),  the  diamond. 
Der  Amethyst  (a-m6-tist0.  the  amethyst. 
Der  Smaragd  (sina-ra7([;^t''),  the  emerald. 


1  Pron.:  Lii'-ve ;  Lu'-vin. 

2  Frau  — ivoman,  lady,  wife.     Weib  {\ip)  =  ivommi.  wife,  female. 

3  Im  (for  in  ile^n,  lit. :  in  the  December)  da-tsern'-b'r. 

4  Am  (for  an  <fewi,  lit. :  on  th^  Wednesday)  m\t'-\okh^ 


464  GRAMMAR. 

2.  Feminine.  —  The  names  of  most  rivers.     Ex. : 

Die  Donau  (do^-iia-db),  the  Danube. 
Exception  :  X)e»'  Rhein,  the  Rhine. 
Also  :  The  names  of  many  pimits,  fruits,  srnd  floivers.    Ex. : 

Die  Linde,  the  linden-tree. 

Die  Birne,  the  pear. 

Die  Rose,  the  rose. 

3.  Neuter:  — 

1.  Most  collective  names.     Ex. :  Das  Volk,  the  people. 

2.  Names  of  substances,  especially  metals.    Ex. :  Das  Fleisch 

(flish) ;  das  Gold  (golt). 

3.  Names  of  countries  and  cities.     Ex. 
Das  reiche  England  =  Rich  England. 

Das  schone  Baden-Baden  =  Beautiful  Baden-Baden. 
Principal  Exceptions.  — l>ie  Schweiz;  die  Tuvke'i  (trn'-ki^- 

4.  Words  which  are  not  nouns,  but  which  are  used  as  such.   Ex.  : 

Das  Essen  =  2'he  eating.  Das  A  =  The  a. 

Das  Griin  =  The  green.  Das  B  =  The  b. 

Par.  i.-BY    THEIR    TERMINATION. 

1.  Masculine:  —  Nouns  of  one  syllable  ending  in  atich,  bs, 
ee,  elf  en,  g,  II,  nz^  pf,  ps,  sch,  tz,    Ex. : 

Der  llauch  {ra-obkh^},  the  smoke. 
Der  Kiebs  (kreps),  the  lobster. 
Der  Thee  (ta).  the  tea. 
Der  Nage^  (na^-g-'l),  the  nail 
Der  Tag  {tHkh),  the  day. 
Der  Regew-  ^ra^-gr'ii),  the  rain. 
Also,  nouns  ending  in  igr,  icJi,  ing,  ling,     Ex. : 
Der  Konig  (kiV-!iir/*).  the  king. 
Der  Teppich  (te/-pieh),  the  carpet. 
Der  Hdring  (h^^-riii),  ihe  herring. 
Der  Jungling  (y?iri^-liii  ,  the  young  man. 

2.  Feminine:  — 

1.   Nouns  of  one  syllable  ending  in  acht  or  ucJit,     Ex. : 
Die  Nacht  (n^kht),  night.        Die  Bucht  (bd<>A;/it),  the  bay. 


GRAMMAR.  465 

2.  Nouns  with  one  of  the  suffixes  ei,  heit,  heit,  schaft, 
uufff  in,  or  the  ending  e  {excepting  those  denoting  males).     Ex. : 

Die  Backerei  (be'-k6-riO,  the  bakery. 
Die  Leidenschaft  (li^-d'n-shg^ft),  passion. 
Die  Heldm  (heF-din),  the  heroine. 
Die  ^chljnheit  (shiin^-hit),  beauty. 
Die  Aohiung  (afcfe^-tdbn),  respect. 
Die  Perle  (per^-16),  the  pearl. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  ion  or  tat,     Ex. : 

Die  Nation  (na'-tsi^onO-    I>ie  Qualitat  (kvsi-li-tdt''). 

3.   Neuter:  — 

1.  Nouns  with  one  of  the  suffixes  chen,  lein,  sal,  set, 
turn.     Ex. : 

Das  INIadchen  (niat^-ci^'n),  the  girl. 

Das  Schicksal  (sliik^-sal),  the  fate. 

Das  Mannlein  (mfen^-lin),  the  little  man. 

Das  Riitsel  (r4t^-s*l),  the  riddle. 

Das  Sklaventuni  (skla^-v'n-toom),  slavery. 

Exceptions  :  Der  Reichtum  (rlch^-tobm),  wealth,  riches. 
Der  Irituni  (ir^-tooni),  error. 

8.  Nouns  with  the  prefix  ge,     Ex. : 

Das  Gemalde  (g6-mdF-d6),  the  painting. 
Exceptions:    Der    Geruch    (g^-robkh^),    smell;    der  Ge- 
schmack    (g-fe-shmakO,   taste;    der   Gedanke,   thought;    der 
Gewin,  gain;    die    Geschichte    (g6-sliic^^-t6),   history;    die 
Gestalt,  the  form ;    die  Gewalt,  the  violence. 

Note. —  Gender  of  compound  nouns:  As  a  rule,  the  gender  of 
compound  nouns  is  the  same  as  the  gender  of  their  last  compo- 
lUMit  iKiri.     Ex.  : 

Die  Hochzeit  {hokh'-tsit),  the  wedding ;  from  die  Zeit,  time. 
Exceptions  :  —  1.   Names  of  towns.     Ex. : 

Das  Wittenberg  ;  from  der  Berg. 

2.  Many  compounds  of  der  Mut  (moot),  the  spirit.     Ex. : 

IHe  Wehmut  (va'-moot),  sadness. 
Die  Anmut  (an'-moot),  grace. 

3.  Various  words,  as  : 

Die  Antwort  (ant'-vort),  answer ;  from  das  Wort,  etc. 


466  GRAMMAR. 

II.  — DECLENSION    OF    NOUNS.* 

GENERAL     RULES. 

1.  In  the  singular  of  all  declensions,  the  accusative  of  the 
feminine  and  of  neuter  nouns  are  the  same  in  J'orm  as  the 
nominative.     Thus : 

NoM. :  Die  Frau.      Ace. :  Die  Frau. 
NOxM. :  Das  Buch.     Ace. :  Das  Buch. 

2.  In  the  pluralf  the  nominative,  genitive,  and  accu- 
sative  of  any  one  declension  are  exactly  the  same  inform. 

The  dative  (plural)  of  all  nouns,  to  whatever  declension 
they  may  belong,  always  ends  in  n. 

THE     THREE     DECLENSIONS. 

Nouns  are  declined  after  three  declensions:  The  strong 
(or  s)  declension,  the  weak  (or  n)  declension,  and  the 
mixed  declension. 

To  the  strong  (or  s)  declension  belong  tnost  of  the 
^nasculine  and  neuter  nouns.  These  form  their  geni- 
tive singular  by  adding  s  (or  es)  to  the  nominative.     Ex. : 

NoM. :  Der  Vater.    Gen.  :  Des  Vaters. 
NoM. :  Das  Kind.     Gen.  :  Des  Kinder. 

To  this  same  declension  belong  also  a  few  feminine  nouns. 
These,  however,  like  all  feminine  nouns,  do  not  take  any  ending 
whatever  in  the  singular.  They  are  classified  with  the  strong 
declension,  however,  because  {milike  most  feminine  nouns,  which 
end  in  n  or  en  throughout  the  plural)  they  end  in  n  (or  en)  only 
in  the  dative  plural,  as  the  nouns  of  the  strong  declension  do. 

To  the  weak  declension  belong  nearly  all  feminine 
nouns,  and  a  few  masculine. 


••■  The  declension  of  German  nouns  certainly  offers  considerable 
difficulties.  The  classification  made  in  this  book,  however,  will  be 
found  to  make  the  comprehension  and  final  mastery  of  this  part  of 
German  grammar  much  easier  than  heretofore.  Although,  after  all, 
the  ear  is  the  best  and  most  accurate  teacher  in  this  particular,  and 
learners  will  discover  that  insensibly  they  will  require  a  faculty  of 
using  the  right  ending  irrespective  of  theoretic  knowledge.  But  a 
thorough  study  of  the  declensions  can  only  hasten  and  perfect  this 
result. 


GRAMMAR.  467 

Kouns  of  this  declension  end  in  n  (or  en)  tlu'oughout  their 
plural  (hence  the  navie  of  n  declension).'^ 

To  the  mixed  declension  belong  some  thirty  nouns, 

which  take  the  endings  of  the  strong  declension  in  the 
singular;  and  those  of  the  weak  declension  in  the 
plural. 

THE    STRONG    DECLENSION. 

Characteristics.  —  As  already  seen,  all  nouns  of  the  strong 
declension  form  their  genitive  singular  by  adding  s  (or  es) 
to  the  nominative  singular. 

Classes.  —  But  the  nouns  of  this  declension  are  divided  into 
five  classes,  according  to  the  way  in  which  their  plural  is 
formed. 

1.- FIRST    CLASS. 

Characteristics.  —  Nouns  of  the  first  class  form  their 
plural  ivithout  any  additional  termination. 

Specimens  of  Declension. 

MASCULINE    NOUN. 
SINGULAR.  PLUBAL. 

NoM.  —  Der    Adler,  the  eagle.  Die  Adler,  the  ea^fks. 

Gen. — Des    Adlers,  of  the  eagle.  Der  Adler,  of  t?ie  ea^ks, 

Dat.  — Dem  Adler,  to  the  eagle.  DenAdlerw,f  io  the  eagles. 

Ace.  —  Den  Adler,  the  eagle.  Die  Adler,  the  eagles. 

NEUTER    NOUN. 

NoM.  —  Das    Madchen,  </iY?  (7^V/.  Die  Madchen,  iAe  ,9^r&. 

Gen. — Des    M2i6.c\\er\s,  of  the  girl.  Der  ^IMeheu,  of  the  girls. 

Dat.  — Dem  Miidchen,  to  the  girl.  Den  Madchen,^  to  the  girls. 

Ace.  —Das    ^IMohen,  the  girl.  Die  MMohen,  the  girls. 


1  Words  like  Madchen,  already  ending  in  n,  do  not,  of  course,  take 
any  additional  n  in  the  dative  plural. 

*  Masculine  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  n  or  en  in  the  singular 
also,  in. all  the  oases  except  the  nominative.  Thus:  Der  Knabe,  ^Ae 
boy ;  des  Knabcn,  of  the  hoy,  dem  Knaben,  to  the  hoy,  etc. 

t  As  already  seen,  on  o})posite  page,  par.  2,  all  nouns  of  whatever 
declension,  lake  n  (or  en)  in  the  dative  plural. 


468  GRAMMAR. 


2. -SECOND    CLASS. 

Characteristics. — Nouns  of  the  second  class  form  their 
plural  like  those  of  the  first,  except  that  they  inodify  their 
stern  vowel  (i.  e.,  change  a,  o,  u,  or  au,  into  a,  o,  «i,  or  du).* 

Specimens  of  Declension. 

MASCULINE    NOUN. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NoM.  —  Der   Vater,  the  father.  Die  Vater,  the  fathers. 

Gen. — Des    Yaters,  of  the  father.  I) er  Yitter,  of  the  fathers. 

Dat.  — Dem  Vater,  to  the  father.  Den  Vaterw,,  to  t fie  fathers. 

Ace.  — Den  Vater,  the  father.  Die  Vater,  the  fathers. 

FEMININE    NOUN, 

NoM.  —  Die  Mutter,  the  mother.  Die  Mi^tter,  the  mothers. 

Gen. — Der  Mutter,  of  the  mother.  Der  Miitter,  of  the  mothers. 

Dat.  — Der  Mutter,  to  the  mother.  Den  Mwttern,  to  the  mothers. 

Ace.  — Die  Mutter,  the  mother.  Die  Mwtter,  the  mothers. 

Note. — To  the  first  and  second  class  belong  masculine  nouns 
ending  in  elf  en,  cr,  the  neuter  nouns  in  chen  and  lein,  and  the  two 
feminine  nouns  Mutter  and  Tochter,     Examples  : 

singular.  plural. 

Der  Amerikaner  (a-ma-ri-ka'-n'r),  Die  Amerikaner, 

the  American. 

Der  Bruder  (broo'-d'r),  the  brother.  Die  Briider  (bru'-d'r). 

Der  Engliinder  (eii'-len-d'r),  the  Die  Englander. 

Englishman. 

Der  Himmel  (hi'-m'l),  the  sky.  Die  Himmel  (hi'-m'l). 

Der  Lehrer  (la'-rer),  the  teacher.  Die  Lehrer  (la'-rer). 

Der  Nagel  (na'-g'l),  the  nail.  Die  Nagel  (n§.'-g'l). 

Der  Ofen  (o'-f  n),  the  stove.  Die  Ofen  (li'-f  n). 

Der  Schiller  (sliii'-rr),  the  pupil.  Die  Schuler. 

Der  Vogel  (f5'-g'l),  the  bird.  Die  Vogel  (fii'-g'l). 

Die  Tochter  (tokh'-t'r),  the  daughter.  Die  Tochter  (tucTi'-t'r). 

Das  Baumchen  (bo-im'-cTi'n),  the  Die  Baumchen. 

little  tree. 


Thus :  Die  Mutter,  the  mother.    Die  Mictter,  the  mothers. 


GRAMMAR. 


469 


3. -THIRD    CLASS. 

Nouns  of  the  third  class  form  the  plural  by  adding  e  to  the 
nominative  singular.     It  also   frequently  adds   e  to  the   dative 
lar. 


Specimens  of  Declension. 


MASCULINE    NOUNS. 
1. 


SINGULAR. 

NoM.  —  Der    Fisch,  the  fish. 
Gen. — Des    Fisches,'^  of  the  fish. 
Dat.  — Dem  Fische,^  to  the  fish. 
Ace.  — Den   Fisch,  the  fish. 

2. 

NoM.  —  Der    Konig,  the  king. 
Gen. — Des    Konigs,^  of  the  king. 
Dat.  —  Dem  Konig,  to  the  king. 
Ace.  —  Den   Konig,  the  king. 


PLUBAL. 

Die  Fisch  e,  the  fishes. 
Der  Fische,  of  the  fishes. 
Den  Fisch  e/t,  to  the  fishes. 
Die  Fische,  the  fishes. 


Die  Konige,  the  kings. 
Der  Konige,  of  the  kings. 
Den  Konigew-,  to  the  kings. 
Die  Kchiige,  the  kings. 


FEMININE    NOUN. 


Die  Kenntnis,^  the  knowledge. 
Der  Kenntnis,  of  the  knowledge. 
Der  Kenntnis,  to  the  knowledge. 
Die  Kenntnis,  the  knowledge. 


Die  Kenntnisse,^  theatfs.-\ 
Der  Kenntnisse,  of  the  " 
Den  Kenntnissen,  to  the  " 
Die  Kenntnissc,  the  atVs. 


NEUTER    NOUN. 


NoM.  —  Das    Gesetz,  the  law. 
Gen. — Des    Gesetzes,  of  the  law. 
Dat.  — Dem  Gesetzc,  to  the  lar). 
Ace.  —  Das    Gesetz,  the  law. 


Die  Gesetze,  the  laws. 
Der  Gesetze,  of  the  laws. 
Den  Gesetzen,  to  the  laws. 
Die  Gesetze,  the  laws. 


1  The  genitive  ends  in  s  or  es.    Whether  the  one  or  the  other  is 
used  depends  on  euphony. 

2  Could  also  be:   dem  Fisch.     Wiiether  the  e  is  used  or  not  is 
mostly  a  matter  of  euphony  and  option. 

8  Notice  that  the  s  is  doubled  in  the  plural. 

*  Observe  that  Kentnis,  being  a  feminine  noun,  has  no  ending  at 
all  in  the  singular.     See  page  466.  —  f  The  attainments,  oftlie  att's,  etc. 


470 


GRAMMAR. 


Note.  — Most  of  the  nouns  of  the  third  class  are  monosyllabic 
masculines  and  neuters. 


EXAMPLES. 


SINGULAR. 


Der  Arm  (arm),  the  arm. 
Der  Brief  (bref),  the  letter. 
Der  Schuh  (slioo),  the  shoe. 
Der  Tag  (ta/^Ti),  the  day. 
Das  Heer  (iiar),  the  army. 
Das  Geschenk  (ge-stienk').f 
Das  Pferd  (pfart),  the  horse. 
Das  Schaf  (stiaf),  the  sheep. 
Das  SchifF  (sliif),  the  ship. 


Die  Arme  (ar'-me). 
Die  Briefe  (bre'-fe). 
Die  Schuhe  (shoo'-e). 
Die  Tage  (ta'-ge). 
Die  Heere  (h.a'-re). 
Die  Geschenke.:|: 
Die  Pferde  (pfar'-de). 
Die  Schafe  (slia'-fe). 
Die  Schiffe  (stii'-fe). 


FOURTH    CLASS. 


The  fourth  class  adds  er  to  the  nominative  singular  to 
form  the  plural;  and,  like  the  third  class,  may  add  e  in  the 
dative  singular. 


MASCULINE    NOUN. 


SINGULAR. 

NoM.  —  Der    Geist,  the  spirit. 
Gen.  —  Des    Geistes,  of  the  spirit. 
Dat.  — Dem  Geistc,*  to  the  spirit. 
Ace.  —  Den  Geist,  the  spirit. 


PLURAL. 

Die  Geister,  the  spirits. 
Der  Geister,  of  the  spirits. 
Den  Geistern,  to  the  spirits. 
Die  Geister,  the  spirits. 


NEUTER    NOUN. 


NoM.  —  Das   Kind,  the  child. 
Gen.  —  Des   Kindes,  of  the  child. 
Dat.  — Dem  Kinde,^  to  the  child. 
Ace.  —  Das   Kind,  the  child. 


Die  Kinder,  the  children. 
Der  Kinder,  of  the  children. 
DenKindert*,  to  the  children. 
Die  Kinder,  the  children. 


To  the  fourth  class  belong  some  neuters,  most  of  them 
monosyllabic,  and  a  few  monosyllabic  masculines. 


*  Or :  dem  Geist,  dem  Kind,  dem  Sohn,  dem  Bucb, 

ceding  page,  note  2. —  t  The  present. 

t  'EAn  —  ,  a  present.    Pron. :  gS-shen'-kS. 


See  ore 


GRAMMAR.  471 

EXAMPLES. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Das  Bild  (bilt),  the  picture.  Die  Bilder  (bil'-d'r). 

Das  Lied  (let),  the  song.  Die  Lieder  (le'-d'r). 

Das  Weib  (vip),  the  woman.  Die  Weiber  (vi'-b'r). 

Der  Leib  (lip),  the  body.  Die  Leiber  (li'-b'r). 

5. -FIFTH    CLASS. 

The  fifth  class  forms  the  plural  by  modifying  the  root  vowel 
(a  into  a,  o  into  o,  a  into  m,  and  au  into  da)  and  adding  the 
endings  e  or  er, 

MASCULINE    NOUN. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.  —  Der    Sohn  l,zon),  the  son.  Die  Sohne  (z-Q'-ne),  the  sons, 

D.  —  Des    Sohues,  of  the  son.  Dev  ^dhue,  of  the  sons. 

G.  —  Dem  Sohne,*  to  the  son.  Den  Sdhnen,  to  the  sons. 

A.  —  Den   Sohn,  the  son.  Die   Sohne,  the  so7is. 

FEMININE    NOUN. 

N.  —  Die  ila,nd  (h.a.nt),  the  hand.  Die  ¥1  dude  (h.en' -de),  the  hands. 
G.  —  Der  Hand,  of  the  hand.  Der  Haiule,  of  the  hands. 

D.  —  Der  Hand,  to  the  hand.  Den  Hrtiide**',  to  the  hands. 

A.  —  Die  Hand,  the  hand.  Die  Hande,  tlie hands. 

NEUTER    NOUN. 

N.  —  Das  Bu('l)(boo?^7i).  the  hook.  Die  Bii^'her  (bij.' -ch'r),  the  books. 
G.  —  Des   Biu'lie.s,  of  the  hook.       Der  Bw-.'lier,  of  the  books. 
D.  —  Dem  Biiclie,*  to  the  l>ook.       Deii  BU-herfif  to  the  books. 
A.  —  Das  Buch,  t  he  hook.  Die  Bik-her,  the  books. 

To  this  class  belong  some  monosyUahic  masculines,  about  thirty 
monosyllabic  fe))iinines,  and  many  monosyllabic  neuters. 

EXAMPLES. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Der  Arzt  (artst),  the  physician.  Die  Arzte  (erts'-te). 

Der  Fluss  (floos),  the  river.  Die  Fliisse  (flw'-se). 

Der  Gast  (gast),  the  guest.  Die  Gaste  (ges'-te). 

Der  Mann  (man),  the  man.  Die  Manner  (me'-n'r), 

Der  Wald  (valt).  the  woods.  Die  Walder  (vel'-d'r). 

Die  Frucht  (frd67i;7it),  the  fruit.  Die  Friichte  (irilch'-te). 

Die  Gans  (gans),  the  goose.  Die  Giinse  (gen'-ze). 


472  GRAMMAR. 

Die  Kuh  (koo),  the  cow.  Die  Kiihe  (ku'-e). 

Die  Nacht  (nafeTit),  the  night.  Die  Niichte  (nec7i'-te) 

Die  Stadt  (sTitat),  the  city.  Die  Stadte  (s7tte'-te). 

Das  Band  (bant),  the  ribbon.'^  Die  Bander  (ben'-d'r). 

Das  Dach  (daT^Ti),  the  roof.  Die  Daclier  (de'-c7i'r). 

Das  Dorf  (dorf),  the  village.  Die  Dorfer  (dur'-f  r). 

Das  Land  (lant),  the  country.  Die  Lander  **  (len'-d'r). 

Das  Wort  (vort),  the  word.  Die  Worter  »  (vur'-t'r). 

Das  Volk  (folk),  the  people.  Die  Volker  (ful'-k'r). 

THE    WEAK    DECLENSION. 

All  nouns  of  the  weak  declension  form  their  plural  by 
adding  en  to  the  nominative  singular.     Thus  : 

Singular  :  Die  Absicht.    Plural  :  Die  Absichtew. 

Exceptions :  Nouns  ending  in  e,  el  or  er,  take  only  n.    Thus : 

Singular  :  Die  Blume.     Plural  :  Die  Blumew. 
Die  Feder.  "         Die  Federw. 

Nouns  belonging  to  the  Weak  Declension.  —  Nearly 
all  feminine  nouns;  sorne  masculines  ending  in  e;  a  few 
monosyllabic   masculine  nouns,  and  many  foreign  words 

accented  on  the  last  syllable. 

N.  B.  —  All  nouns  of  the  weak  declension  are  declined  alike 
throughout  the  plural.  But  the  masculine  nouns  end  in  n  or 
en  throughout  the  singular  also  (the  nominative  excepted). 

Specimen  Declension  of  Feminine  Nouns. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NoM.  —  Die  Frau,  the  lady.  Die   Fniu en,  the  ladies. 

Gen.  — Der  Frau,  of  the  lady.  Der  Frawen,  o/tJir  l<uii(s. 

Dat.  — Der  Frau,  to  the  lady.  Den  Francw,  io  the  Indies. 

Ace.  — Die  Frau,  the  lady.  Die  Fvnwen,  the  ladies. 


1  The  same  word,  but  of  a  different  gender  (Der  Band),  means  the 
volume.     It  lias  for  its  plural,  die  Bande. 

2  Also,  dieLande.    The  latter,  however,  is  only  used  poeticaliy. 
8  This  word  has  another  plural,  Wortc,  which  means  expressions 


GRAMMAR. 


473 


NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 


NOM. 

Gen, 

DAT. 

Ace. 

NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 


SINGULAR. 

Die  Bliime,  the  flower. 

Der  Bliime,  of  the  flower. 

Der  Blume,  to  the  flower. 

Die  Blume,  the  flower. 


PLURAL, 

Die  Blumew,  the  flowers. 
Der  Blumew,  of  the  flowers. 
Den  Blumeti,  to  the  flowers. 
Die  Blumew,  the  flowers. 


Specimen  Declension  of  Masculine  Nouns. 


Die   Knabeti',  the  boys. 
Der  Knahen,  of  the  boys. 
Den  Knabew.,  to  the  boys. 
Die  Knaben,  the 


Der    Knabe,  the  boy. 
Des    Knabeti,  of  the  boy. 
Dem  Knaben,  to  the  boy. 
Den   Knabew.,  the  boy. 

Der    Fiirst,  the  prince.  Die    Furstew-,  the  princes. 

■Des  Fypgten,  of  the  prince.  Der  Yiirsten,  of  the  princes. 
■  Dem  Fiirstew.,  to  the  prince.  Den  Fiirstefi,  to  the  princes. 
-Den  Fiirsten,  ^^epnnce.       Die   Yursterif  the  princes. 


Specimen  Declension  of  Foreign  Nouns  of  the  Weak  Declension. 

N.  —  Der    Student,  the  student.  Die  Studenten,  the  students. 

G.  —  Des  Studenten,  of  the  student.  Der  Studentcw-,  of  the  stud's 
D.  —  Dem  Studenten,  to  the  student.  Den  Studentew.,  to  the  stud's, 
A.  —  Den   Btudenten,  the  student.     Die  Studenten,  the  students. 

Examples  of  Nouns  of  the  Weak  Declension. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Die  Absicht,  the  vieiv. 

Absichten. 

Die  Art,  the  kind. 

Arten. 

Die  Amerikanerin,^/if?Amerikane- 

Die  Bahn,  the  rail- 

Amer. lady  (or girl). 

1     rinnen.* 

road. 

Bahnen. 

Die  Dame,  the  lady. 

Dam  en. 

Die  Burg,  the  fort. 

Burgen. 

Die  Erfahrimg. 

Erfahrungen 

.  Die  Flut,  the  flood. 

,  Fluten. 

Die  Feder,  pen. 

Federn. 

Die  Jagd,  the  hunt 

. Jagden. 

Die  Freiheit. 

Freiheiten. 

Die  List.2 

Listen. 

Die  Franzose.'' 

Franzosen. 

Die  Pfiicht.* 

Pflichten 

Der  Biir,  the  bear. 

Baren. 

Der  Soldat.« 

Soldaten. 

Der  Fiirst,  the  prince. 

Fiirsten. 

Der  Monarch, 

Monar- 
chen. 

1  A-ma-ri-ka'-ng-rin.  —  2  The  stratagem.  —  3  Fran-tso'-zS,  the 

Frenchman.  — ^  The  duty. —  6  Zol-dat',  the  soldier. 
*  Words  ending  in  In  double  the  n  in  the  plural. 


474  GRAMMAR. 


THE    MIXED     DECLENSION. 

A  few  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  form  their  singular 
according  to  the  strong  declension ;  but  their  'plural  according 
to  the  iveak  declension.  These  nouns  make  up  the  so-called 
mixed  declension. 

Specimen  Declension, 

MASCULINE    NOUN. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NoM.  —  Der    Staat,  the  state.  Die   Staatew-,  tJie  states. 

Gen.  —  Des    Staates,  of  the  state.  Der  Staaten,  of  the  states. 

Dat.  —  Dem  Staate,  to  the  state.  Den  Staaten,  to  the  states 

Ace.  —  Den   Staat,  the  state.  Die   Staate**,  the  states. 

NEUTER    NOUN. 

NoM.  —  Das    Auge,  the  eye.  Die  Augen,  the  eyes. 

Gen.  — Des    Auges,  of  the  eye.  Der  Augew,  of  the  eyes. 

Dat.  — Dem  Auge,  to  the  eye.  Den  Augew,  to  the  eyes. 

Ace.  —  Das    Auge,  the  eye.  Die  Augew,  the  eyes. 

Learn  the  following  nouns  of  the  miaced  declension  : 

NOMINATIVE.  GENITIVE.  PLURAL. 

Der  BdiUer,  the  peasant.  Des  Bauers.  Die  Bauern. 

Der  Gevatter,  the  godfather.  Des  Gevatters,  Die  Gevattern. 

Der  Nachbar,  the  neighbor.  Des  Nachbars.  Die  Nachbarn. 

Der  Pantoffel,  the  slipper.  Des  Pantoffels.  Die  Pantoffeln. 

Das  Bett,  the  bed.  Des  Belies.  Die  Betten. 

Das  Herz,  the  heart.  Des  Herzens.^  Die  Herzen. 

N.  B.  —  A  few  masculine  nouns  in  e,  like  Name,  name;  Ge- 
danke,  thought, ■  Friede,  peace;  Glaube,  belief;  and  Wille, 

will,  take  irregularly  n  in  the  oblique  cases  in  the  singular. 
But  they  nevertheless  take  the  special  ending  of  the  strong 
declension  in  the  singular  (s  in  the  genitive),  and  the  endings 
of  the  weak  declension  in  the  plural.  Ex. :  der  Name,  des 
Nametis,  dem  Namew,  den  Namen.    Plural:  die  Namen,  etc. 


1  Irregular,  as  also  the  dative  (dem  Herzen). 


GRAMMAR.  475 

DECLENSION     OF     PROPER     NOUNS. 

Names  of  countries  or  cities  form  their  genitive  by  add- 
ing s,  unless  they  already  end  in  s,  z  or  a?,  when  they  do  not 
vary,  and  instead  of  the  genitive,  tiie  preposition  von  is  used 
before  the  noun.    Ex. : 

Die  Fliisse  Deutschlands  (or  :  Deutschlands  Fliisse)  = 
The  rivers  of  Germany  (lit. :  Germany's  rivers).    But : 

Dresden  streeets  = 
Die  Strasse  Dresden*  (or :  Dresdens  Strasse).    But : 
Die  Gesellschaftskreise  von  Paris  =  The  circles  of  PaHs  society 
(not,  Paris  Gesellschaftskreise,  because  Paris  ends  in  s). 

Names  of  Persons  when  used  with  an  article  remain  in- 
variable in  the  singular.  When  used  without  an  article  they 
take  8  in  the  genitive  singular.    Thus  : 

Of  Friedrich  =  Des  Friedrich  {noun  invariable).     Or: 
Friedrichs  {no  article;   therefore  the  sign  of  the  genitive) . 
Exceptions.  —  Masculine  names  ending  in  s,  ss,  schf  a?,  or 
is^f  and  the  feminine  names  ending  in  e,  have  their  genitive 
singular  ending  in  ens.    Thus : 

John  —-  Hans.  John's,  or  of  John  =  Hansews, 

Sophia  =  Sophie.       Sophia's,  or  of  Sophia  =  Soph i ens. 
Note  1. — The  dative  and  accusative  singular  o( proper  nouns 
is  always  exactly  like  the  novdnative.     Exceptions  : 

Jesus  and  Christus  are  declined  thus :  Gen.,  Of  Jrsus,  of  Christ 
=  Jesu,  Christi;  Dat.,  To  Jesus,  to  Christ  =Jesu,  Christo;  Ace, 
Jesus,  Christ  =  J esum,  Christum. 

Note  2. — A  title  (except  Herr)  remains  undeclined  if  followed  by 
a  name  in  the  genitive  and  not  preceded  by  an  article.     Thus : 
Die  Tochter  Konig  Ludwigs  {no  article  before  Konig). 
But  if  an  article  precedes,  the  case  is  reversed;  i.e.,  the  title  is  put 
in  the  genitive,  and  the  name  is  undeclined.     Thus: 

Die  Tochter  d,es  Konigs  Ludwig  {Konig  is  preceded  by  an  article). 
N.  B.  —  A  second  appended  title  is  declined  whether  the  name 
preeeding  it  is  declined  or  not.     Thus  : 

Die  Tochter  Konig  Ludwigs  des  Zweiten.     Or : 
Die  Tochter  des  Konigs  Ludwig  des  Zwoiten. 
In  the  plural  proper  nouns  are  unvariable  also,  except  in 
the  dative  when  they  add  n  (or  cw). 


476  GRAMMAR. 

THE     ADJECTIVE. 
I DECLENSION    OF    THE    ADJECTIVE. 

The  adjective  may  or  may  not  take  on  an  ending. 

1.  The  adjective  takes  no  ending  tvhatever  when  not 
closely  accompanying  a  noun  which  it  qualifies.     Tiuis : 

This  man  is  ric/i  =  Dieser  Mann  ist  reich, 
Reich  has  no  ending  because  it  is  separated  from  its  noun, 
Mann. 

2.  The  adjective  takes  on  endings  whenever  closely  ac- 
companying and  preceding  the  noun  it  qualifies,  and  then  it 
agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  its  noun.     Ex. : 

The  rich  man  =  Der  reich c  Mann. 
To  the  rich  man  =  Dem  reich  en  Mann. 
A  beautiful  lady  =  Eine  schone  Dame. 
A  small  child  =  Ein  kleines  Kind. 
Rich  me7i='R,ek-he  Manner."^ 
These  endings,  however,  differ  when  the  adjective  is  pre- 
ceded by  an  article,  and  when  it  is  not  so  preceded. 

I.— ENDmGS    OF   THE    ADJECTIVE    WITHOUT    AN    ARTICLE. 

When  not  preceded  by  an  article  (der  or  ein),  the  adjec- 
tive has  the  same  termination  as  the  definite  article  (der,  die, 
das),  except  that  it  ends  in  en  instead  of  es  in  the  genitive 
singular  of  the  masculine  and  neuter.f 


Specimen 

Declension. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

NOM. 

—  grosser, 

grosse, 

grosses. 

grosse. 

Gen. 

—  grossest. 

grosser*. 

grosser. 

grosser. 

DAT. 

—  grossewi, 

grosser. 

grossetw. 

grosser. 

Ace. 

—  grosser. 

grosse. 

grosses. 

grosse. 

*  In  poetry  the  adjective  is  sometimes  placed  after  the  noun,  and 
then  it  remains  invariable  (takes  no  ending).  Ex. :  Little  red  rose 
=  R6slein  rot  (instead  of  rotes  Roslein^ 

t  In  poetry  and  elevated  diction,  the  ending  es  for  the  genitive 
of  the  masculine  and  neuter  of  the  adjective  is  used. 


GRAMMAR.  477 

Examples : 

(  Red  wine  =  Rotcr  Wein. 
NoM.  -^  War7n  soup  =  Warme  Suppe. 
(  Fresh  bread  =  Frischcs  Brot. 
(  A  glass  of  red  tvine=  ^in  Glas  roten  Weines. 
Gen.  -<  A  plate  of  warm  soup  =  Ein  Teller  warmer  Suppe. 
(  A  piece  of  fresh  bread  =FAn  Stiick  M&chen  Brotes. 
{  With  red  wine=M.ii  rotetn  Wein. 
Dat.  •<  With  warm  soup  =  Mit  warmer*  Suppe. 
(  With  fresh  bread  =  Mit  fnschem  Brot. 
(  Send  red  mne=  Schicke  roten  Wein. 
Ace.  <  Eat  warm  soup  =  Iss  warme  Suppe. 
(  Buy  fresh  bread  =  Ksiu^e  frischcs  Brot. 
Note.  —  When  tnanchf  many  a;  welch,  what  a;  and  solch,  such  a, 
are  used,  without  any  ending  before  an  adjective,  as  is  sometimes  the 
case,  that  adjective  is  declined  as  when  wnaccompanied  by  an  article, 
as  above.    Thus: 

Many  beautiful  flowers  =Manch  schone  Bhimen. 
What  a  blue  sA;y/  =  Welch  blaner  Himmel !  •'• 

n.  — ENDINGS    OF   THE   ADJECTIVE   WITH   AN   ARTICLE, 
t.    WHEN     PRECEDED    BY    THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

When  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  the  adjective  ends  in 
en- throughout 'the  cases,  except  in  the  nominative  singular  of 
all  the  genders,  and  in  the  accusative  singv.lar  of  the  feminine 
and  neuter,  which  all  end  in  e. 

Specimen  Declension. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUT.  ALL  GKXPF.RS. 

N.  —  der    grosse,f  die  gro8se,f  das    grosse.f  die  grossew^.f 

G.  —  des    grosseti-,  der  grosser,  des    gros.?en.  der  grosser. 

D.  — dem  grosser,  der  grosser,  dem  grossefi.  den  grosser^. 

A.  —  den   grosser*,  die  grosse,     das    grosse.  die  grossen. 

■'•  The  adjective  is  also  declined  as  above  when  preceded  by  an  in- 
variable word  (such  as  genug;  allerlei,  all  khuh  of,  and  tlie  numerals). 
Ex.:  Enough  fresh  bread— Genug  frisches  Brot;  Three  large  loaves 
=  I>rei  grosse  Brote. —  f  Ex.:  Der  grosse  Mann,  etc.;  die  grosse 
Hand,  etc. ;  das  grosse  Haus,  etc.  Plur.  .-  Die  grosse?*  ( Manner,  Hiinde, 
or  Hauser) ,  etc. 


478  GRAMMAR. 

N.  B.  —  When  the  adjective  is  preceded  by  one  of  the  de- 
monstrative or  indertnite  pronouns,  dieser,  jenei%  jeder, 
mancher,  welcher,  or  by  the  interrogative  welcher  (see 
page  493),  it  takes  the  same  endmgs  as  when  preceded  by  the 
definite  article  itself. 

Specimen  Declension  with  JHeser, 

MASCULINE.  FEMININE. 

NoM.  —  Dieser    grosse     Mann.^  Diese   schone     Frau.® 

Gen.  — Dieses    grossew.  Mannes.^  Dieser  schoncw-  Frau.* 

Dat.  —  Diesem  grosser.  Mann.  Dieser  schoneW'  Frau. 

Ace. — Diesen   grosser  Mann.  Diese   schone    Frau. 

NEUTER. 

NoM.  —  Dieses    kleine     Haus.* 
Gen.  —  Dieses    kleinei*  Hauses.® 
Dat.  —  Diesem  kleineti  Haus. 
Ace.  — Dieses    kleine     Haus. 
PLURAL   (all  genders). 
Diese  grosser  Manner;  diese  schonew  Frauen;  diese  kleincn 
Hauser;   etc.,  en  being  the  adjective  ending  in  all  cases  and 
genders. 

2.     WHEN     PRECEDED     BY    THE    INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

When  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  {ein,  eine,  ein), 
the  adjective  is  declined  exactly  as  when  preceded  by  the 
definite  article,  with  the  exception  of  the  nominative  singular 
of  the  masculine  and  neuter  (which  take  respectively  er 
and  es),  and  tJie  accusative  singular  of  the  neuter  (which 
takes  es), 

^eciinen  Declension  with  ein,  eine,  ein, 

MASCULINE.  FEMININE. 

NoM.  —  Ein        grosser  Mann.  Eine   schone     Frau. 

Gen. — Fines    grosseti- Mannes.  Finer  schonew  Frau. 

Dat.  — Einem  grossew.  Mann.  Einer  schonen  Frau. 

Ace.  —  Einen   grosser  Mann.  Eine   schone     Frau. 


1  This  large  man.  —  2  Of  this  large  man.  —  3  This  beautiful  lady. 
^  Of  tliis  l)eautifiil  hidy. —  ^  This  small  house. 
6  Oi  this  small  house. 


GRAMMAR.  479 

NEUTER. 

NoM.  —  Ein        kleincs  Haus. 
Gen.  —  Eines    hleinen  Hauses. 
Dat.  — Einem  kleine/i  Haus. 
Ace.  — Ein        kleines  Haus. 
Note  i.  —  With  ein  there  is,  of  course,  no  plural. 
Note  2.  —  Adjectives  preceded  by  the  possessive  pronouns, 
tnein,  deirif  sein,  unser,  euer,  ihr,  and  the  indefinite  kein, 
take  tiie  same  ending  as  with  ein.     But  the  adjective  is  also 
declined  in  the  plural  with  these,  its  endings  being  en  for  all 
cases.     Thus : 

Keine   grosse/i  Manner,        Meine  scho-nen  Blumen, 
Keiner  grosser*.  Manner,        Meiner  schouen  Blumen, 
<^tc.,  en  being  always  the  ending. 

Note.  —  When  a  personal  pronoun  in  the  nominative  is  qualified 
oy  an  adjective,  the  adjective  agrees  with  it.  Thus  :  /,  poor  man  =  Ich 
arnier  Mann. 

ADJECTIVES    USED     SUBSTANTIVELY. 

1.  if  an  adjective  is  used  substantively,  i.  e.,  instead  of  (and 
therefore  without)  its  noun,  it  takes  the  same  endings  then  as 
if  the  noun  were  present.    Th\is  : 

Der  Arme,^  instead  </,  Der  armc  Mann. 
Ein  Armcr,  instead  of,  Ein  arnier  Mann. 

Observe  that  when  so  used  the  adjective  is  written  with  a  cap. 

After  etwas,  something;  wenig,  little;  nichts,  noiJihig ; 
tnehr,  ynore ;  and  viel^  much,  however,  adjectives  used  sub- 
stantively take  the  ending  es,     Ex. : 

Etwas  Neues  =  something  new.     Viel  Gutes  =  mucJi  good. 

II.  — AGREEMENT    OF    THE    ADJECTIVE. 

1.  As  we  have  already  seen,  the  adjective  agrees  in  gender, 
nufnber  and  case  with  its  noun.     Ex. : 

Ein  grosser*  Mann  {masc.  7iom.).  Eine  schone  Frau  {/em.  nom.). 
Eines  grosser  Mannes  {ni.  gen).  Einer  schonew.  Frau  (/.  gen). 
Ein  kleines  Kind  {netd.  nam.).        Eine  kleine  Blume  (/.  nom.). 


1  The  poor  one  (or  man,  or  fellow),     Lit. :  the  poor. 


480  GRAMMAR. 

2.  When  two  or  more  adjectives  qualify  the  same  noun, 
they  all  agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case.     Ex. : 

Er  ist  ein  armer  kleiner  Mann  =  He  is  a  poor  little  man. 
Sehen  Sie  jenen  grosse/i-  rundcn  Tisch  =  >S^ee  that  large  round 
table. 

III.  -THE    FORMATION     OF    ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives  are  formed  from  nouns,  verbs,  etc.,  by  adding 
various  suffixes,  such  as  bar,  en,  n,  em,  haft,  ig,  isch,  lich, 
sam,    Ex. : 

dankftar     —thankful  (from  Dank). 
kupferti       =  (made  of)  copper  (from  Kupfer). 
iugem\haft  =  virtuous  (from  Tugend,  virtue). 
macbtigr      ^powerful  (from  Macht,  power). 

Adjectives  are  also  formed  by  adding  one  of  the  prefixes 
ge,  miss,  ur,  or  erz  to  other  words  (as  nouns,  verbs,  other 
adjectives,  etc.).     Ex. : 

Crcrecht  =just  (from  recht,  right). 
Uralt     =  very  old  (from  alt,  old). 

Finally,  the  prefix  un  is  used  to  denote  a  contrary  quality 
to  that  expressed  by  the  primitive  adjective.    Ex. : 

Begreiflich  =  comprehensible,     t/wbegreiflich  =  incomprehensible. 

N.  B.  —  Notice  that  in  adjectives  compounded  with  tew-,  the 
primary  accent  is  on  the  prefix.  Thus:  B^-grifMicTi ;  but, 
dbn^-b6-grif-lic^. 

IV.  — COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

The  comparison  of  adjectives  in  German  is  very  similar 
to  that  of  English  adjectives. 

Thus,  the  comparative  is  formed  by  adding  er  ;  the  super- 
lative, by  adding  est  (or  st). 

Moreover,    for    both   comparative  and  superlative,  the 

vowels  a,  o  and  u,  are  frequently  modified  (into  a,  6  and  U)» 


GRAMMAR.  481 

Specimens  of  Comparison. 

POSITIVE.  COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

jung,  young.  junger,  younger.  jiingsi,    youngest. 

breit,  broad.  breiter,  broader.  breitcsf,  broadest. 

schon,  beautiful.        schoner,  more  beaut,      schons*,  most  beaut. 

Note.  —  The  termination  est  for  the  superlative  is  used  after  the 
Unguals  (cf,  #,  s#,  ss,  sell,  or  z).     After  all  other  sounds,  st  is  used. 
Declension  of  Adjectives  in  the  Comparative  and  Superlative, 

Adjectives    in    the    comparative   or  superlative  degree   arc 
declined  like  the  positive  (or  simple)  form  of  the  adjective.    Ex.: 

MASCULINE    SINGULAR. 
COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

NoM.  —  Der    grossere^    Mann.^  Der    grosste*  Mann.* 

Gen.  —  Des    grosserew-  ^  Mannes.  Des    grosstew-  Mannes. 

Dat.  — Dem  grosseren  ^  Mann.  Dem  grosstew-  Mann. 

Ace. — Den  grossere/i- ^  Mann.  Den    grosstei*  Mann. 

FEMININE    SINGULAR. 

NoM.  —  Die  schonere^     Frau.  Die  schonste    Frau. 

Gen.  — Der  schoneren*  Frau.  Der  schonsten  Frau. 

Dat.  — Der  schonerew.*  Frau.  Der  schonste/i  Frau. 

Ace.  — Die  schonere*     Frau.  Die  schonste    Frau. 

NEUTER    SINGULAR. 

NoM.  —  Das    kleinere^     Haus.  Das    kleinste    Haus. 

Gen. — Des    kleineren*  Hauses.  Des   kleinstew.  Hauses. 

Dat.  — Dem  kleineren*  Haus.  Dem  kleinstew-  Haus. 

Ace.  — Das    kleinere^    Haus.  Das   kleinste     Haus. 

PLURAL. 

Die  grosserew-  Manner,  etc.  Die  grossten    Manner,  etc. 

Die  schonercti  Frauen,  etc.  Die  schonstc/t  Frauen,  etc. 

Die  kleineren.  Hauser,   etc.  Die  kleinste?*   Hiiuser,  etc. ; 

en  being  the  ending  of  the  plural  adjective  in  all  genders  and  cases. 


1  With  ein,  it  would  be,  ein  grosserei*,  in  the  nominative,  and 
grossercM  in  all  other  cases.  —  ^  The  larger  man  ;  of  the  larger  man, 
etc.—  3  The  largest  man,  etc. —  ^  The  declension  of  the  feminine 
adjective  is  exactly  the  same  with  eine,  etc.,  as  with  die,  etc. 

5  With  ein,  it  would  be  ein  kleineres  in  the  nom.  and  ace,  and 
kleineren  in  the  other  cases.  —  '•■  Grosste  instead  of  grosseste  (rare). 


482  GRAMMAR. 

Irregular  Comparison. 

The  following  adjectives  are  irregular  in  their  comparison*. 

POSITIVE.  COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

gut,  good.  besser,  better.  best,  best. 

hoch,  high.  hoher,  higher.  hochst,  highest. 

nah,  near.  naher,  nearer.  nachst,  nearest. 

viel,  much.  mehr,  more.  meist,  most. 

Note.  —  For  the  peculiar  forms  of  superlative  with  am  and  aufs^ 
see  adverbs,  page  529. 

v.  — NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 

For  the  list  and  main  peculiarities  of  numeral  adjectives, 

see  pages  180  to  183. 

ADDITIONAL.    REMARKS. 

1.  The  cardinal  numerals,  zwei  and  drei,  have  plural  geni- 
tive forms  (zweier,  of  two;  dre'ier,  of  three),  which  are  used 
whenever  there  is  no  other  word  (article  or  adjective)  indicat- 
ing the  case  of  the  noun  accompanying  them.     Ex. : 

On  account  of  two  offences  =W egen  zweier  Vergehen. 

2.  The  Germans  do  not  use  the  word  one  or  ones  after  an 
adjective.  They  cannot  say,  a  pretty  one,  a  good  one  ;  but  only : 
a  pretty,  a  good;  eine  hiibsche,  ein  guter. 

3.  Nouns  of  weight  or  ineasure,  following  a  number,  are 
put  in  the  singular  {unless  stress  is  laid  on  the  idea  of  multitude). 
Ex.: 

3000  feet  high  =  3000  Fuss  hoch  {not :  Fiisse). 
500  pounds   =  500  Ffund  (not :  Ffunde). 
This  does  not  hold  good  with  feminine  nouns,  however.    Ex. : 
Four  bottles  =  Y'\er  Flnschen,'^ 

4.  Ordinal  numerals  (der  erste,  der  zweite,  etc.)  are  de- 
clined like  any  other  adjective  accompanied  by  the  article.   Ex. : 

The  first  =  der  erste  /  of  the  first  =  des  (fern. :  der)  ersten,  etc. 
See  page  477. 


1  When  a  fraction  is  added,  however,  the  noun  is  always  in  the 
singular,  whether  it  is  feminine  or  not.  Ex.:  Six  weeks  and  a  Jialf 
=  Sechs  und  eine  halbe  Woehe  {not :  Woc-en). 


GRAMMAR.  483 

THE    PRONOUN. 
I.  — PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

FIRST     PERSON. 

NoM.  —  ich,  I.  wir,  us. 

Gen.  — nieiner,^  of  me.  unser,  of  us, 

Dat.  —  mir,  to  me.  uns,  to  us. 

Ace.  — micb,  me.  uns,  its. 

SECOND    PERSON    {familiar), 

NoM.  —  (III,  thoii.  ihr,  f  you. 

Gen.  — deiner,*  of  thee.  euer,  of  you. 

Dat.  —  dir,  to  thee.  euch,  to  you. 

Ace.  —  dich,  thee.  euch,  you. 

SECOND    PERSON    {formal). 

NoM.  —  Sie,  X  you. 
Gen.  —  Ihrer,  of  you. 
Dat.  —  Ihnen,  to  you. 
Ace.  — Sie,  you. 

THIRD     PERSON. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUT.         ALL  GENDERS. 

N.  —  er,  he.  s,\e,  she.  es,it.  sie,  they. 

G. — seiner,*  of  him.  ihrer,  of  her.  seiner,  of  it.  ihrer,  of  them. 

D.  —  ihm,  to  him.  ihr,  to  her.  ihm,  to  it.  ihnen,  to  them. 

A.  —  ihn,  him.  sie,  her.  es,  it.  sie,  they. 


*•  Mein,  dein,  and  sein  are  older  forms  of  these  genitives  and  are 
still  occasiuiially  used,  especially  in  poetry.  —  As  already  explained 
in  the  body  of  the  book,  du,  deiner,  etc.,  are  familiar  forms  used 
with  relatives,  children,  and  intimate  friends.  They  are  also  used  in 
prayers  and  in  poetry. 

t  Ihr,  euer,  etc.,  are  the  plural  forms  of  du,  etc.,  and  their  use  is 
identical,  except  that  they  (usually)  are  employed  only  when  speaking 
to  more  than  one  person, 

X  Notice  that  this  form  of  you  is  exactly  the  same  as  that  of  the 
third  person  plural,  except  that  it  is  written  with  a  capital  letter. 


484  GRAMMAR. 

PECULIAR   USES    OP    THE    PRONOUNS    ER,   SIE,   ES. 
I.     WHEN     REFERRING    TO     MEN,     WOMEN,     OR     CHILDREN, 

In  referring  to  men,  women,  or  children,  er  is  used  for  he, 
and  sie  for  she  (even  if  the  noun  represented  happens  to  be 
f/r(n)).matically  neuter,  as  in  the  case  of  Kn'dblein,  little  hoy; 
Weibf  woman;  Mddchen,  girl;  Frdulein,  young  lady).   Ex.: 

1.  Have  you  seen  my  father  ?    Ans. :   /  have  seen  him  =  Ich 

habe  ihn  gesehen. 

2.  Have  you  seen  my  sister?    Ans.:   I  have  feen  ^e?'=Ich 

habe  sie  gesehen. 

3.  Have  you  seen  the  girl?    Ans. :  I  have  seen  her=lQ\i  habe 

sie  gesehen  (not  es,  although  Mddchen  is  neuter). 
Exception.  —  The  only  exception  to  this  is  with  the  word 
Kind,  child,  to  represent  which  es  is  used.    Ex. : 
The  child  tnust  come  home,  it  is  tired  = 
Das  Kind  muss  nach  Hause  kommen,  es  ist  miide. 

2.     WHEN     REFERRING    TO    ANIMALS    OR    INANIMATE    THINGS. 

When  referring  to  inanimate  things,  er  (accusative  :  ihn) 
is  used  to  represent  nouns  which  are  masculine ;  sie  (accusa- 
tive :  sie),  nouns  which  are  feminine;  and  es  (accusative  :  es\ 
nouns  which  are  neuter.    Ex. : 

The  lion  is  not  cruel;  it  is  generous  = 
Der  Lowe  ist  nicht  grausam ;  er  ist  grossmiitig. 
All  the  same,  men  fear  him  = 
^  Trotzdem,  fiirchten  ihn  die  Menschen. 

f  The  hat  does  not  quite  suit  me  ;  it  is  a  little  too  small = 
Der  Hut  passt  mir  nicht;  er  ist  etwas  zu  klein. 
But  I  will  take  ^7=  Aber  ich  will  ihn  doch  nehmen. 

The  dove  was  frightened ;  it  flew  away  = 
Die  Taube  war  erschrocken ;   sie  flog  fort. 
But  I  called  it  back  =  Aber  ich  rief  sie  zuriick. 

This  pen  is  not  good;  it  scratches  = 
Diese  Feder  ist  nicht  gut ;  sie  kratzt. 

f  The  beast  is  wild  ;  it  is  dangerous  = 
*  1  Das  Tier  ist  wild ;  es  ist  gefahrlich. 


GRAMMAR.  485 

f  J  c?o  not  like  this  bread  ;  it  is  too  hard  = 
'  I  Ich  esse  dieses  Brot  nicht  gern ;  es  ist  zu  hart. 

3.     SPECIAL    USES    OF    ES. 

1.  It  is  used  impersonally  as  in  English.     Ex. : 

It  is  my  father  =  Es  ist  mein  Vater. 
It  is  hailing  =  Es  hagelt,  etc. 

2.  It  is  often  used  in  the  sense  of  there.    Ex. : 

There  is  a  hat  on  the  table  =Es  liegt  ein  Hut  auf  dem  Tisch. 
There  are  many  people  here  —  Es  sind  viele  Leute  hier. 

3.  It  sometimes  merely  announces  a  coming  subject.     Thus : 
Es  ist  die  Rede  von  dem  letzten  Kriege  (lit. :  it  is  {the)  talk 

about  the  last  war).    Anglice  :  The  conversatiori  is  about  the  last  war. 

4.  It  may  stand  for  the  English  so,  when  this  word  repre- 
sents another  word  or  sentence  already  used.    Thus  : 

He  used  to  be  rich  =  Er  war  friiher  reich. 

He  is  not  so  now=  Aber  jetzt  ist  er  es  nicht  mehr.^ 

5.  The  English  use  of  the  word  it,  in  such  forms  as  it  is  I,  it 
is  we,  was  it  you,  etc.,  is  reversed  in  German.     Thus  : 

It  is  7=  Ich  bin  es,  ^  It  is  we  =  Wir  sind  esJ 

Is  it  If  =  Bin  ich  es  ?  *      Is  it  you  ?  =  Sind  sie  es  ?  ^  etc. 

4.   SPECIAL   USE  OF    THE   GENITIVES  AND  DATIVES  OF  ER,  SIE,  ES. 

The  genitives  of  er,  sie,  es  {seiner,  ihrer,  seiner),  and  their 
datives  {ihm,  ihr,  ihm),  are  used  either  for  persons  or  animals. 
I  think  of  him  =  Ich  denke  seiner. 
I  have  written  to  him=  Ich  habe  ihm  geschrieben. 
They  are  not  frequently  used  for  inanimate  things.     But  in- 
stead, the  genitive  and  dative  of  der  (or  die,  das),  or,  more 
frequently,  of  derselbe  (or  dieselhe,  dasselhe)  is  used.    Ex. : 
Here  is  a  good  ball.    What  is  the  price  of  it  f  =  Hier  ist  ein  guter 
Ball.    Was  ist  dessen « Preis  ?  Or :  Was  ist  der  Preis  desselben  ? 


1  Lit. :  He  was  formerly  rich,  but  now  is  he  it  not  more. 

2  Lit. :  lam  it.  —  s  Lit. :  Am  lit  f 

*  Lit. :   We  are  it.  —  5  Lit. :  'Are  you  it  ? 

•  For  the  irregular  forms  dessen,  deren,  dessen,  whose,  of  which 
( plur. :  deren ),  instead  of  des,  der,  des;  plur. :  der,  see  page  491. 


486  GRAMMAR. 

N.  B.  —  But  when  the  dative  or  the  accusative  are  used  with 
a  preposition,  a  word  conipoimdetl  of  that  preposition  and  the 
adverb  da  is  used  instead.  As  :  To  i/  =  clazu  ;  of  them  (neuter)  = 
davon ;  with  z7  =  damit ;  for  that  =  dalur,  etc.,  etc.     Ex. : 

You  have  the  ball.  At  least  you  played  with  ^7  =  Sie  haben  den 
Ball.     Wenigstens  haben  Sie  damit  gespielt. 

REFLEXIVE    USE    OF    THE    PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

1.  The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  alone  has  a  special  re- 
flexive form  :  sich,     Ex. : 

He  hurt  himself  =  Er  hat  slch  verletzt. 
She  is  grieved  at  it  =  Sie  griinit  sich  dariiber. 
They  are  washing  [themselves)  =  Sie  waschen  sich, 
N.  B.  —  Sich  is  also  the  reflexive  form  of  Sie,  you.    Ex. : 
You  have  hurt  yourself  =:  Sie  haben  sich  verletzt. 

2.  With  the  other  persons,  the  accusative  or  dative  oi  i\\QBuh]. 
pronoun  is  used  as  a  reflexive  form,  if  that  pronoun  is  the  sub- 
ject of  the  verb.     Thus  : 

I  have  hurt  myself  =z  Ich  habe  tnich  verletzt. 

I  hay  a  house  for  tnyseXf  —  Ich  kaufe  ^nir  ein  Haus. 

Thou  hast  hurt  thyself  =  Du  hast  dich  verletzt. 

Thou  huyest  a  house  for  thyself  =i  JDu  kaufst  dir  ein  Haus. 

We  have  hurt  ourselves  =  Wir  haben  uns  verletzt. 

We  build  a  house  for  ourselves  =  Wir  bauen  uns  ein  Haus.* 

3.  But,  if  the  pronoun  is  not  the  subject  of  the  verb,  or,  in 
any  case,  when  greater  emphasis  is  desired,  the  word  selbst  (self) 
is  simply  added.     Ex. : 

1.  I  saw  him  himself  =  Ich  habe  ihn  selbst  gesehen. 

2.  I  did  it  myself  =:  Ich  habo  cs  selbst  gethan. 

3.  She  hei'selfBiiid  so  =  Sie  liat  es  selbst  gesagt. 

4.  This  same  word,  selbst  (or  selber)  is  added  to  nouns  in 
the  sense  of  himself,  herself,  itself,  tliemselves.     Ex. : 

The  robbers  themselves  —  Die  Rauber  selbst,  f 


*  The  reflexive  pronouns  have  sometimes  a  reciprocal  meaning, 
i.  e.,  the  meaning  Ot  one  another.  Ex. :  We  struck  each  other  =^\\"ir  lial)t'n 
Tins  gesclilagen.     They  i^aiv  each  otJirr  —  '^-'le  salion  sic-li. 

■f  Selbst  sometimes  =  e?.'cn.     liven  the  <  hihh  en  ~  Selhst  (ixeH^in^er, 


GRAMMAR. 


487 


II — THE    POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS., 

The  form  and  declension  of  the  possessive  j^ronounSf  when 
really  used  as  adjectives  (that  is,  with  a  noun),  liave  ah-eady  been 
given  on  page  461. 

When  used  really  as  pronouns  (i.  e.,  instead  of  a  noun),  they 
may  be  declined  or  undeclined. 

\.     THEY    ARE    UNDECLINED 

when  used  as  predicates*     Ex. : 

This  traueling-bag  is  tnine  =  Diese  Reisetasche  ist  tnein  (not 

meine). 
These  cards  are  not  ours  =  Diese  Karten  sind  nicht  unser, 

2.     THEY    ARE    DECLINED 

when  used  substantively  (i.  e.,  not  qualifying  a  noun,  but 
representing  one).  Ex. :  Question  :  Is  this  not  your  traveling-hag  f 
Answer  :  It  is  mine  =  Es  ist  meine. 

FORM   OF   DECLENSION    WHEN    USED    SUBSTANTIVELY. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

meiner, 

meine, 

meines. 

meine. 

meines, 

meiner, 

meines. 

meiner. 

memeni. 

meiner. 

meinem. 

meinew. 

meineii, 

meine, 

meines. 

meine. 

Decline  the  following  Pronouns  like  Meiner: 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

MASO. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

deiner. 

deine. 

deines, 

deine   =  thine. 

seiner, 

seine,* 

seines, 

seine    =  his. 

ihrer, 

ihre,t 

ihres, 

ihre      =  hers. 

unserer,t 

unsere,t 

unseres. 

unsere  =  ours. 

euerer,  % 

euere,* 

eueres, 

euere   =  yours. 

Ihrer, 

Ihre, 

Ihres, 

Ihre      =  yours. 

ihrer, 

ihre, 

ihres, 

ihre      =  theirs. 

'"■•  Before   Majestat,  and   some   other  titles,  seine,  seiner,  euere, 
and  euerer,  are  often  abbreviated  into  Se.,  Sr.,  Ew. 

f  Or,  unser,  unsere  (don'-z'r,  oon'-zre).  —  |  Or,  eurer,  eure. 


488 


GRAMMAR. 


But  these  same  possessive  pronouns  are  frequently  used  with 
the  article,  instead  of  ivithout.  In  that  case  they  are  declined 
like  all  other  adjectives  preceded  by  the  article.  See  page  477. 
Thus : 


MASO. 

N.  —  Der    meine, 
G. — Des    nieinen, 
D.  —  Deni  meinen, 
A.  —  Den    raemen. 


SINGULAR. 

FEM. 

die  meine, 


PLURAL. 

ALL  GE>-DKRS 

die  meinen.^ 


NEUT. 

das    meine 

der  iwQiuen,    des    meinew,  der  meinew. 

der  meinew.,    dem  meinew.,  den  meinen. 

die  meine,      das    meine,  die  meinen. 


DECLINE    LIKE    DER    {DIE    OR    DAS)    MEINE: 


SINGULAR. 

MASC,   FEM.   and  NEUT. 

Der  (die  or  das)  deine, 
Der  (die  or  das)  seine, 
Der  (die  or  das)  ihre, 
Der  (die  or  das)  unsere, 
Der  (die  or  das)  euere, 
Der  (die  or  das)  Ihre, 
Der  (die  or  das)  ihre. 


PLURAL. 

ALL    GENDERS. 

die  deinen,  thine. 
die  seinen,  his. 
die  ihren,  hers. 
die  unseren,  ours. 
die  eueren,  yours. 
die  Ihren,  yours. 
die  ihren,  theirs. 


Note. — Still  another  form  of  these  pronouns  used  with  the  article, 
and  declined  like  der  (die,  das)  inline  is  the  following  : 


SINGULAR. 

Der  (die  or  das)  meinige, 
Der  (die  or  das)  deinige, 
Der  (die  or  das)  seinige, 
Der  (die  or  das)  ihrige, 
Der  (die  or  das)  unsrige, 
Der  (die  or  das)  eurige, 
Der  (die  or  das)  Ihrige, 
Der  (die  or  das)  ihrige, 


PLURAL. 

die  nieinigen,  mine. 
die  deinigen,  thine. 
die  seinigen,  his. 
die  ihrigen,  hers. 
die  unsrigen,  ours. 
die  eurigen,  yours. 
die  Ihrigen,  yours. 
die  ihrigen,  theirs. 


Example.  —  Masculine :  der  meinige,  des  nieiniger*,  dem 
nieinigen,  den  meinigen.  Feminine:  die  meinige,  der  niein- 
igen, der  meinigen,  die  meinige,  etc.,  etc. 

Note.  — The  Germans  cannot  use  such  a  plirase  as  a  friend  of  mine 
a  friend  of  yours,  etc. ;  but  say  instead,  either:  one  of  mi/  friends,  einer 
meiner  Freunde;  or:  a  friend  of  me,  ein  Freuiid  voii  inir. 


GRAMMAR. 


489 


III. 

MASC. 

dieser, 

jener, 

derjenige, 

der, 

derselbe, 

solcher, 


DEMONSTRATIVE     PRONOUNS. 

SINGULAR. 

FEM.  NEUT. 

diese,  dieses,  this  (or,  this  one). 

jene,  jeiies,  that  (or,  that  one). 

diejenige,  dasjenige,  that  (or,  that  one). 

die,  das,  that  (or,  that  one). 

dieselbe,  dasselbe,  the  same. 

solche,  solches,  such. 

PLUEAL    FOR    ALL    GENDERS. 


dieselben,  the  same. 
solche,  such. 


diese,  these.        diejenigeii,  these. 
jene,  those.         die,  those. 

1.  Dieser  and  jener  are  declined  according  to  the  following 
model,  already  given  on  page  460. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

diese,  these. 
diese/*,  of  these. 
dieseii,  to  these. 
diese,  these. 


N.  —  dieser, 
G.  —  dieses, 
D.  —  dieseiw, 
A.  —  diesen. 


dieses,  this."^ 
dieses,  of  this.^ 
diesewi,  to  this.^ 
dieses,  this. 


Qiese, 
dieser, 
dieser, 
diese, 

2.  Derjenige,  etc.,  is  declined  as  follows : 
SINGULAR. 

N.  —  derjenige,^      diejenige,^      dasjenige.* 
G.  —  desjenigen,*    derjenigen,"''  desjenigen.* 
D.  —  dewijenigew,    derjenigen,     deni]enigen, 
A.  —  dewjenigew-,     diejenige,        dasjenige. 


PLURAL. 

diejenige/i.t 
derjenigen.f 
dew-jenigew-. 
diejenigen.. 


3.  Der,  die,  das,  which  are  reallv  the  same  in  form  as  the 
definite  article,  are  declined  exactly  Uke  it  when  they  are  used 
as  adjectives  (i.  e.,  before  a  noim).  Ex.:  That  man  is  brutal  = 
Der  Mann  ist  roh.     Write  to  that  man^Schreibe  dein  Mann. 

[Observe  that  when  der,  die,  das  are  used  as  deiiionstr.  adjec.  (or 
pronoun)  they  have  a  stronger  accent  than  when  used  as  the  article.] 

ISoTE.  —  When  die,  das,  der,  however,  are  used  as  demon- 
strative pronouns  (i.  e.,  instead  of  a  noun),  they  have  irregular 


1  Or,  this  one.  —  2  Qr,  of  this  one.  —  *  Or,  to  this  one. 
*  That  one,  of  tliat  one,  etc.  —  f  Those,  of  those,  etc. 


490  GRAMMAR. 

forms  in  the  genitive  of  all  cases  and  numbers,  and  in  the  dative 
plural 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.  —  der,  die,  das,  that  one.  die,  those,  the  ones. 

G.  —  desseUf  deren,  dessen,  of  that  one.  deren,  of  those. 

D.  —  deni,  der,  dem,  to  that  one.  denen,  to  thosp. 

A.  —  den,  die,  di^,^,  that  one.  die,  those. 

USES    OF    THE    DEMONSTRATIVES. 

1.    DIESER    AND    JENER. 
This  man  =  dieser^  Mann.     That  woman  =jene  Frau. 
2.    DER,    DERJENIGE,    AND    DERSELBE. 

1.  Der,  etc.,  is  used  for  emphasis  instead  of  jener,  jene, 
jenes,  er,  sie,  es.     Ex. : 

That  man  is  bad  =  Der  Mann  ist  schlecht. 
Oar  houses  and  those  of  our  friends  = 
Unsere  Hauser  und  die  unserer  Freunde. 
He  must  he  deaf=  Der  muss  taub  sein. 
She  is  here  =  Die  ist  hier. 

2.  Derjenige,  etc.,  is  occasionally  used  instead  of  der,  etc. 

3.  Derselhe,  etc.,  is  used  to  avoid  ambiguity  or  repetition. 
Ex.: 

He  came  with  Mr.  X.  and  his  brother  =  Er  kam  mit  Herrn 
X.  und  dem  Bruder  desselhen  (lit. :  the  br.  of  the  same.) 
Do  you  see  her  f  =  Sehen  Sie  dieselbe  [not  Sie  sie)  f 

4.  Solch,  such,  may  be  either  preceded  or  followed  by  ein, 
eine,  e^c.    Ex. : 

Such  a  man  =  Ein  solcher*  Mann  ;  or,  solch  ein  Mann. 
Such  a  ruoman  =  Eine  solche  Frau  ;  or,  solch  eine  Frau. 
Notice  that  \f  solch  is  followed  by  ein,  it  is  invariable. 
Note!.  — All  the  demonstrative  pronouns  maybe  emphasized  by 
placing  e6cn  (wen)  before  them.     Ex.:   The  same  =  deTse\be.     The  very 
same=  e6e II  (lerselbe.     Also,   tn  o?ie  i/;orcZ ;  ebenderselbe. 

NoTK  2.  —  Instead  of  using  dieses  and  jenes  with  a  preposition 
tlie  rtcvniaiis  often  substitute  the  word  hier  (or  da)  with  the  prepo- 
sition fi)ll<»\vin^'.  Tims:  From  this  follows  =  Hier  aua  Mgt.  With 
this  f  c(»irlvi1<=  Hiermit  ^ch\'\e»se  ich. 


GRAMMAR.  491 


IV.  — RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Welcher,  welche,  welches  )     ,        ,  .  ,     , 
T^  J.  J  c 'i^ho,  which,  that. 

Der,  die,         das  >        '  ' 

Declension  of  welcher,  tvelche,  tvelches. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

MASC. 

FE3I. 

NEUT. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

K 

—  welcher, 

welche. 

welches, 

welche,  who,  which. 

D. 

—  (lessen. 

der  en. 

dessen. 

deren,  whose,  of  which. 

G. 

—  welch  eaw, 

welcher. 

welchew. 

,  Welches,  to  whom,  to  " 

A. 

—  welch  e»i, 

welche, 

welches. 

welche,  ivhom,  which. 

Declension  of  der. 

die,  das. 

N. 

—  der, 

die, 

das. 

die,  whom,  which. 

G. 

—  (lessen. 

deren, 

dessen. 

deren,  whose,  of  ivhich. 

D. 

—  dem, 

der, 

dem , 

denen,  to  whom,  to  which. 

A. 

—  den. 

die. 

das, 

die,  whoyn,  which. 

Note  1.  —  The  relative  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  tlieir  noun,  and  they  never  can  be  omitted.     Ex. : 

English.  —  The  flowers  you  brougld  me  (or,  tvhich  you  brought  me). 
German,  always.  —  Die  Blumen,  tvelche  (or  die)  Sie  mir,  etc. 

Note  2.  —  When  the  relative  pronoun,  referring  to  inanimate  objects 
or  a  whole  clause,  is  connected  with  a  preposition,  the  adverb  wo  fol- 
lowed by  the  preposition  is  often  used  instead.     Ex. : 

She  did  n't  have  the  key  with  ivhich  to  open  the  door  = 
Sie  liatte  don  Schliissel  nicht,  tvotnit  (  =  ^nit  ivelchem,  or  mit 
dem)  die  Thiir  geoffnet  wird. 

Likewise:  i)v/ w7aV/t  =  wodurch.  From  which  =  wora.us.^ 

For  which  =  wozu.  Among  ivhich  =  worunter.i 

Note  3. —  The  genitive,  dessen,  deren,  dessen f  plural,  deren, 
always  precede  the  noun  which  governs  them.     Ex. : 

The  gentleman  whose  acquaintance  I  made  = 
Der  Herr,  dessen  Bekanntschaft,  etc. 
The  window,  the  payie  of  which  is  broken  — 
Das  Fenster,  dessen  Seheibe,  etc. 


1  Before  a  vowel,  in  these  combinations,  -wo  takes  an  r. 


492  GRAMMAR. 

Note4.  —  The    accusative,   welchen,  tvelche,   tvelches,  plural, 
ivelche,  is  frequently  used  in  the  sense  of  some  or  any.     Ex. : 
Question  :  Have  you  any  baggage  f  =  Habeii  Sie  Gepitck  ? 
Answer:     Yes,    I   have    some    (or:    yes,    I    have)  — i a.,    ich    habe 
tvelches.     Or : 

Here  are  newspapers.     Do  you  wish  any  ?  = 
Hier  sind  Zeitungen.     Wiinsclien  Sie  tvelche  ? 
Note  5.  — A  sentence  beginning  with  a  relative  pronoun  is  always  a 
dependent  sentence,  and  the  verb  is  therefore  always  at  the  end,    Ex. : 

Die  Blumen,  welche  (or  die)  Sie  mir  britigen. 

Die  Blumen,  tvelche  (or  die)  Sie  mir  gebracht  haben» 

NOTICE     THE    FOLLOWING    COMBINATIONS: 

Derjenige,  welcher  (or,  der)  ;  Or :  der,  welcher  =  /ie  who.^ 
Diejenige,  welche  (or,  die);  Or:  die,  \\e]che  =  she  who.^ 
Dasjenige,  welches  (or,  was)  ;  Or:  das,  wsis  =  that  which.^ 
Diejenige,  welche  (or,  die)  ;  Or:  die,  we\che  =  those  who.* 

Note.  —  He  who,  she  who,  are  sometimes  rendered  by  tver,  instead 
of  the  above,  and  what  by  u^as,  instead  of  das,  was.     Ex. : 
He  who  denies  it,  etc.  =  Wer  es  leugnet,  etc. 
To  these  words  (wer  and  was),  im^ner  and  auch  (or,  auch 
ijnmer ;  or,  auch  nur)  are  sometimes  added  for  emphasis: 
Whoever  did   this,  etc.  =  Wer  auch   (or,  wer  hnmer ;   or, 
wer  auch  immer;  or,  wer  auch  nur)   das  gemacht 
hat,  etc. 

v.  — INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Wer'^=  Who? 

Was?=Whatf 

Welcher,  welche,  welches  =  Which?  or,  whatf 

Was  fur  (ein)?-  What  sort  off 

1.  — Declension  of  Wer» 

NoM. —  Wer  ?  who  ?  Dat.  —  Went ?  to  whom? 

Gen.  —  Wessen  ?  ivhose  ?      Ace.  —  Wen  ?  whom  ? 

2.  —  Was  is  invariable. 


1  Or,  that  which.  —  2  Qr,  that  which.  —  8  Qr,  what.  —  ^  Or,  those  which. 


GRAMMAR.  493 

3.  —  Declension  of  welcher. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

MASC.  FEM.  JJEUT.  A1.L  GENDERS. 

N.  —  welcher?  welche?  welches?  welche?  which f 

G.  —  welches  ?  welcher  ?  welches  ?  welcher  ?  of  which  f 

D.  —  welchew*  ?  welcher  ?  welchew*  ?  welcheiw  ?  to  which  f 

A.  —  welches?  welche?  welches?  welchew?  ivhichf 

Note.  —  WofUr,  woniit,  etc.  ;see  page  491)  can  also  be  used  inter- 
rogatively instead  of  fiir  was,  mit  teas,  etc.     Ex. : 

How  (German :  with  what)  did  I  deserve  it  ?  =  Womit  habe  ich  das 
verdient  ? 

VI.  — INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

These  are  used  either  as  adjectives  (i.  e.,  with  a  noun),  or  as 
pronouns  (i.  e.,  representing  a  noun).     Ex. : 

Have  you  all  the  baggage  ?  =  Haben  Sie  alles  Gepack  ? 
We  have  everything  =  Wir  haben  alles. 

THOSE    USED    BOTH    AS    ADJECTIVES    OB    PRONOUNS: 

All,  all  Etwas,  some. 

Jeder,  every.  Genug,  enough. 

Kein,  no.  Viel,  much. 

Manch,  many  a.  Wenig,  little. 

Beide,  both.  Mehr,  more. 

Irgend  einer  (e,  es),  any  one.  Der  namliche,  the  same. 

1.  All,  Jeder,  kein,  and  manch,  agree  in  gender,  number, 
and  case  with  their  noun. 

C  All  the  people  =  Alle  Leute. 
Adjective  use.  -|  Many  a  <ime=Manches  Mai. 
(_  Every  man  =  Jeder  Mann. 
Pronominal  use:   Alle  sind  gekommen.    Manche  (many) 
sind  gekommen.    tTeder  soil  seine  Pflicht  thun. 

N.  B.  —  For  peculiarities  oi  all,  see  p.  414,  n.  4;  also  p.  533. 

2.  Etwas  and  genug  are  invariable.    Etwas,  however,  has 
for  its  plural :  einige,  a  few,  some.     Ex. : 

Adjective  use.  \  f  ™*  """f  =  ^*«'«*  ^^f  ^^^- 

(.  Some  bottles  =  Einige  Flaschen. 


494  GRAMMAR. 

Pron.  use  :  Ich  habe  etwas  gehort.    Ich  habe  gemig  gehort. 

Note.  —  The  Germans  usually  omit  the  use  of  etwas  und  einigcy 
some  or  any,  before  a  noun.  Thus:  Have  you  any  bread  '/  =  (usuixWy) 
Haben  Sie  Brot?  {not,  ettvas  Br ot).  Have  you  any  bottles  ?  =  {\i^\xa.\\y) 
Haben  Sie  Flaschen?  {not,  einige  P'laschen). 

3.  Not  any  is  usually  rendered  by  Jcein,  not  by  nicht  ein : 

Have  you  no  bread  f  =  Haben  Sie  kein  Brot? 

Pron.  use:  T have  none  =  Ich  hahe  keines. 

4.  Viel  and  wenig  are  declined  like  adjectives  when  pre- 
ceded by  an  article  or  a  pronoun.     Ex. : 

His  numerous  affairs  =  Seine  vieleW'  Geschiifte. 

If  no  article  or  pronoun  is  present,  viel  or  tvenig  takes  no 
ending  except  in  the  plural. 

He  has  much  good  fortune  =  Er  hat  viel  Gliick. 
He  has  mariy  friends  =  Er  hat  viele  Freunde. 

5.  Mehr,  more,  several,  has  a  plural,  mehrere  (or,  ^nehre). 
Mehr  has  also  a  superlative :  die  tneisten  =  most.    Ex. : 

Most  people  =  die  nieisten  Leute. 

THOSE  USED  ONLY  AS  PRONOUNS: 

man,  one,  they,  people.  jedermann,  everybody. 

einer,  one,  same  one.  niemand,  nobody. 

einander,  each  other,  one  another.  selbst  (or  selber),  self. 

jemand,  somebody.  nichts,  nothing. 

fTedermann  is  invariable,  except  in  the  genitive  where  it 
takes  s. 

Declension  of  Jemand  and  nientand, 

N. — jemand,  somebody,  or  some  one. 

G. — jemands,  or  jemandcs,  of  somebody,  or  of  some  one. 

D.  — jemand,  jemandeiw,  jemandcn,  to  somebody,  or  to  some  one. 

A. — jemand,  or  jenianden,  somebody,  or  some  one. 

Niemand  is  declined  [ifi  jemand. 


GRAMMAR.  495 

THE    VERB. 

General  Remarks. 

1.  The  verb  (Latin,  verbum,  word)  is  the  word  which  expresses 
action  or  state.     In,  /  walk,  he  told  me,  the  verbs  are  walk  and  told. 

2.  A  verb  has  a  subject  (or  subjects),  and  an  object  (or  objects). 

(1)  The  subject  is  that  person  or  thing  of  which  anything  is 
affirmed  or  denied.  Thus :  in.  My  father  spoke  to  him,  My  sister 
and  I  read  the  papers  every  day,  Alfred  does  not  rejoice  over  your 
good  fortune;  my  father,  my  sister  and  I,  and  Alfred,  are 
the  subjects. 

(2)  The  object  is  that  person  or  thing  through  which  the 
action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb  is  transmitted.  Thus,  in 
the  above  sentences,  him,  the  papers,  and  good  fortune  are  the 
objects. 

GERMAN    VERBS. 

German  verbs  govern  their  object  in  the  accusative,  genitive, 
or  dative  cases,  or  by  means  of  a  preposition.     Ex. : 

Ace.  —  I  see  the  boy  =  Ich  sehe  den-  Knaben, 

Gen.  —  I  think  of  that  day  =  Ich  gedenke  jencs  Tages, 

Dat.  —  I  follow  the  man  =  Ich  folge  dem  Manne  (ht. :  I  follow 
to-the  man.  —  /  followed  him  =  ich  folgte  ihm. 

Prep.  —  /  strive  for  honor  =  ich  streite  um  Ehre. 

Transitive  Verbs,  —  Verbs  that  can  take  an  object  in  the 
accusative  case  (and  without  a  preposition)  are  called  transi- 
tive. Thus,  ich  sehe,  is  a  transitive  verb,  as  it  governs  the 
accusative  (as  for  instance :  dew  Knaben.  See  example 
above). 

Intransitive  Verbs.  —  Verbs  that  cannot  take  their  object 
in  the  accusative,  but  govern  it  in  the  genitive  or  dative  case 
(or  through  a  preposition)  are  called  intransitive.  Thus:  ich 
gedenke,  ich  folge,  ich  streite  (see  examples  above)  are 
intransitive  verbs,  as  the  first  two  govern  their  object  Qenes 
Ti\ges,  and  detn  Mannc)  in  the  genitive  and  dative  respect- 
ively, and  the  third  governs  its  object  (Ehre)  through  a 
preposition  (um). 


496  GRAMMAR. 

N.  B.  —  Observe  that  verbs  which  are  transitive  in  English 
are  often  intransitive  [i.  p.,  govern  their  object  in  an  obHque 
case  (genitive  or  dative)  or  through  a  preposition]  in  German. 
Thus :  To  follow,  is  a  transitive  verb  in  Engh.-?h,  as  we  say,  for 
instance,  I  followed  him;  they  followed  their  leader;  but  its 
German  equivalent  folgen  is  mtransitive,  as  the  Germans 
really  say  to  follow  to,  Ex.:  I  followed  the  man=Ich  folgte 
detw  Manne  (lit.:  I  followed  to-the  man). 

Passive  Verbs* — Passive  verbs  in  German  are  formed  by 
joining  the  auxiliary  werden  (lit. :  to  become.  See  page  502) 
to  the  past  participle  of  any  transitive  verb.     Thus  : 

Transitive  Vp:rb:     Schlagen,   to  strike. 
Passive   Verb:     Er  wird  geschlagen,   he  is  struck;  Er 
wurde  geschlagen,  he  was  struck ;  etc.     See  also  page  510. 

Refledcive  Verbs.  —  Reflexive  verbs  are  those  in  which  the 
action  is  reflected  on  the  subject.  Ex. :  /  dress  myself  {ich 
kleide  tnich  an);   I  flatter  myself  (ich  schmeichle  tnir). 

Impersonal  Verbs.  —  Impersonal  (or  unipersonal)  verbs 
are  those  which  are  used  only  in  one  person  (the  third  person 
singular).     Ex.:  It  rains  =es  regnet. 

MOOr»S    AND     TENSES. 

Verbs  are  divided  into  moods  (to  express  the  mode  of  the 
action  or  state).  There  are  Ave  such  divisions  in  a  German  verb : 
(1)  the  indicative;  (2)  the  subjunctive;  (3)  the  condi- 
tional; (4)  the  imperative;   (5)  the  infinitive. 

Tha  participles  are  words  which  partake  of  the  nature  both 
of  the  verb  and  the  adjective.  There  are  two  participles :  the 
present  participle  (Ex.:  asking,  frag  end),  and  the  past  j)articij>lr 
(Ex. :  asked,  gefragt). 

The  indicative,  subjunctive,  conditional,  and  infini' 

live  are  subdivided  into  tenses  (I.atin,  tempus,  time)  to  express 
the  time  of  the  action  or  state. 

Simple  tenses  are  those  which  are  simply  made  up  of  a 
stem  and  a  termination.  As,  liab-en,  hab-e,  fvas-te,  lieb- 
end,  etc.,  etc.    Hab,  frag,  lieb  are  stems  ;  en,  e,  te,  end  are 

terminations,  and  vary  to  indicate  various  persons  and  tenses. 


GRAMMAR.  497 

Compound  tenses  are  made  up  of  one  of  the  auxiliary  (oi 
helper)  verbs,  coupled  with  the  past  participle  or  infinitive  of  any 
verb  being  conjugated.  Thus  with  asked  (and  ask),  we  form 
compound  tenses,  as  I  have  asked  (ich  hahe  gefragt);  I  had 
asked  {ich  hatte  gefragt);  I  will  ask  (ich  werde  frag  en);  1 
would  ask  {ich  ivUrde  fragen),  etc.,  etc. 

The  simple  tenses  of  a  German  verb  are  the  present  and 
imperfect.  These  two  tenses  are  found  in  the  subjunctive  as 
well  as  in  the  indicative  mood."^ 

The  compound  tenses  of  a  German  verb  are : 

(1)  The  perfect  and  the  pluperfect,  formed  with  one  of 
the  auxiliaries,  haben  or  sein,  and  a  past  participle  of  the  verb. 
Ex. :  7  have  asked  (ich  habe  gefragt),  I  had  asked  {ich  hatte 
gefragt). 

(2)  The  future,  the  conditional,  the  second  future  and 
the  second  conditional,  formed  with  the  modal  auxiliary 
werden  (or  its  imperfect,  wiirde),  and  the  infinitive  (present 
or  past)  of  the  verb.  Ex. :  Ich  werde  fragen,  I  shall  ask;  ich 
werde  gefragt  haben,  I  shall  have  asked. 

THE    AUXILIARIES. 

The  auxiliaries  are  divided  into  tense  auociliaries  and 
modal  auociliaries , 
The  auxiliaries  of  tense  (haben,  sein,  and  werden)  are 

used,  as  we  have  already  seen,  to  form  the  compound  tenses 
of  verbs. 

The  auxiliaries  of  mode  are :  (1)  konnen,  to  be  able  to, 
*  to  can ' ;  (2)  wollen,  '  (to)  will ' ;  (3)  milssen,  to  have  to,  '  (to) 
'must';  (4)  sollen,  '(to)  shall' ;  (5)  mogen,  '{to)  may';  (6)  dUr- 
fen  '{to)  may.' 

THE     CONJUGATIONS. 

The  Gertnan  verbs  are  divided  into  regular  and  irregu- 
lar  verbs. 

The  regular  verbs  are  subdivided  into  two  conjugations: 
the  weak  (or  new)  conjugation,  and  the  strong  (or  old) 
conjugation. 


*  Tlie  infinitive  also  has  a.  present  and  a,  past  tense. 


498 


GRAMMAR. 


FIRST    "TENSE"   AUXILIARY. 

Haben,*  to  hai^e. 

I.— THE    INDICATIVE. 


1.  Present. 

icli  habe,  /  have. 
du   hast,  thoti  hast. 
er    hat,  he  has. 
wir  haben,  ice  have. 
ihr  habt,'  you  have. 
Sie  haben,  you  have. 
sie  haben,  they  have. 

2.  Imperfect. 

ich  hatte,*  /  had. 
du  hattest,  thou  hadst. 
er    hatte,  he  had. 
wir  hatten,  we  had. 
ihr  hattet,  you  had. 
Sie  hatten,  you,  had. 
sie  hatten,  they  had. 

3.  Perfect. 

ich  habe    gehabt,*  /  have  had.' 
du  hast     geliabt,  thoii  hast  had. 
er    hat       gehabt,  he  has  had. 
wir  haben  gehabt,  lae  have  had. 
ihr  habt     gehabt,  you  have  had. 
Sie  haben  gehabt,  you  have  had. 
sie  haben  gehabt,  they  have  had. 


4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  hatte     gehabt,  /  had  had. 
du   hattest  gehabt,  thou  hadst  had. 
er    hatte     gehabt,  he  had  had. 
wir  hatten  gehabt,  ive  had  had. 
ihr  hattet  gehabt,  you  had  had. 
Sie  hatten  gehabt,  you  had  had. 
sie  hatten  gehabt,  they  had  had. 

5.  First  Future. 


ich  werde  haben,  /  shall  have. 
du  wirst  haben,  thou  wilt  have. 
er  wird  haben,  he  will  have. 
wir  werden  haben,  we  shall  have. 
ihr  werdet  haben,  you  will  have. 
Sie  werden  haben,  you  will  have. 
sie  werden  haben,  they  tvill  have. 

6.  Second  Future. 

ich  werde  gehabt  haben,  T  shall  h.  h. 
du  wirst  gehabt  haben,  thou  tvilt  h.  h 
er  wird  gehabt  haben,  he  will  h.  h. 
wir  werden  gehabt  haben,  we  shall  h.  h. 
ihr  werdet  gehabt  haben,  you  will  h.  h. 
Sie  werden  gehabt  haben,  you  tvill  h.  h. 
sie  werden  gehabt  haben,  they  will  h.  h. 


II. -THE    CONDITIONAL. 


First  Conditional. 

ich  wurde*  haben,  /  would  t  have. 
du  wiirdest  haben,  thou  tvouldst  hart 
er    wiirde     haben,  he  would  have. 
wir  wUrden  haben,  we  would  have. 
ihr  wurdet  haben.  you  would  have. 
Sie  wiirden  haben,  you  would  have. 
"iie  wiirden  haben,  they  would  have. 


Second  Conditional. 

ich  wiirde  gehabt  haben,  Iio''d  t  have  h. 
du  wiirdest  gehabt  haben,  thou  ivhl.  h.  h. 
er  wiirde  gehabt  liaben,  he  tv'd  have  h. 
wir  wiirden  gehabt  haben,  we  w\l  h.  h. 
ihr  wurdet  gehabt  haben,  you  u-'d  h.  h. 
Sie  wUrden  gehabt  haben,  you  wUl  h.  h. 
sie  wiirden  gehabt  haben,  they  tv^d  h.  h. 


For  the  use  of  this  2d  per.  pin.,  see  p.  28.  —  2  Or,  simply,  I  had,  etc. 
Pron. :  ha'-b'n;  ha'-tS;  ge-hapt';  viir'-de.  —  f  Or,  should. 


GRAMMAR. 


499 


III. -THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.* 


1.  Present. 

ich  habe,  I  have. 
du  ha6e««,*  thou  have. 
er    \iabe,  he  have. 
wir  haben,  ice  have. 
ilir  habet,  you  have. 
Sie  haben,  you  have. 
sie  haben,  they  have. 

2.  Imperfect. 

ich  hatte.t /Aad.* 
du  hattest,  thou  hadst. 
er    hatte,  he  had. 
wir  hfitten,  we  had. 
ilir  hfittet,  you  had. 
Sie  batten,  you  had. 
sie  h«tten,  they  had. 

3.  Perfect. 

ich  habe  gehabt,  1  have  had.* 
du  \\a,hest  gehabt,  thou  have  had. 
er  ha&e  gehabt,  he  have  had. 
wir  haben  gehabt,  we  have  had. 
ilir  habet  gehabt,  yo'U  have  had.. 
Sie  haben  gehabt,  you  have  had. 
sie  haben  gehabt,  they  have  had. 


4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  hatte     gehabt,  1  had  had. 
du  hattest  gehabt,  thou  hadst  had. 
er    hatte     gehabt,  he  had  had. 
wir  batten  gehabt,  we  had  had. 
ihr  hattet    gehabt,  you  had  had. 
Sie  batten  gehabt,  you  had  had. 
sie  hatten  gehabt,  they  had  had. 

5.  First  Futiire. 

ich  werde  haben,  /  shall  have.* 
du  tverdest  haben,  thou  ivilt  have. 

er    tverde  haben,  he  will  have. 

wir  werden  haben,  we  shall  have. 

ihr  werdet  haben,  you  will  have. 

Sie  werden  haben ,  yoti  toill  have. 

sie  werden  haben,  they  will  have. 

6.  Second  Future. 

ich  werde  gehabt  liaben,  I  shall  h.  h.* 
du  tverdest  gehabt  haben,  thou  wilt  h.  h- 

er    tverde  gehabt  haben,  he  will  h.  h. 

wir  werden  gehabt  haben,  we  shall  h.  h. 

ihr  werdet  gehabt  haben,  you  will  h.  h. 

Sie  werden  gehabt  haben,  you  toill  h.  h. 

sie  werden  gehabt  haben,  they  will  h.  h. 


IV.  — THE    IMPERATIVE. 


habe,  have  (thou). 

er  soil  X  haben,  let  him  have.^ 

haben  wir,  {or,  lasst  uns  haben),  let  us  h. 


habet 

haben  Sie  t 

Sie  SoUen  haben,  t  let  them  have.^ 


have  (ye). 


THE    INFINITIVE. 


Present  :  haben,  to  have. 
Pres.  Part.  :  habend,  Jiai'ing. 


Past  :  gehabt  haben,  to  have  had. 
Past  Participle  :  gehabt,  had. 


1  Lit. :  he  shall  have.  —  2  Lit. :   They  shall  have. 

*  As  may  be  observed,  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  differ  only  in 
a  few  forms  from  those  of  the  indicative  mood.  The  differences  are 
brought  out  prominently  in  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  by  means  of 
full  face  italic  letters.  —  For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  see  page  340. 

t  Pron.:  he'-te;  he'-test;  etc. 

}  Pron.:  zol;  ha'-b'nze;  ze  zo'-l'n  ha'b'n. 


500 


GRAMMAR. 


SECOND    "TENSE"    AUXILIARY. 
Sein,*  to  6c. 


I, -THE    INDICATIVE. 


1.  Present. 

ich  bin,  I  am. 
(Ill  bist,  thou  art. 
er  ist,  he  is. 
vvir  sind,*  it'e  are. 
ihr  seid,*  you  are. 
Sie  sind,  you  are. 
sie   sind,  they  are. 


4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  war      gewesen,*  /  had  been. 
dii  warst  gewesen,  thou  hadst  been. 
er    war      jrewesen,  he  had  been. 
wir  waren  gewesen,  ive  had  been. 
ihr  waret  gewesen,  you  had  been. 
Sie  waren  gewesen,  you  had  been. 
sie   waren  gewesen,  they  had  been. 


2.  Imperfect. 

icli  war,  /  was. 
du  warst,  thou  wast. 
er  war,  he  teas. 
wir  waren,  we  were. 
ilir  waret,  you  loere. 
Sie  waren,  you  xoere. 
sie   waren,  they  were. 


5.  First  Future. 


ich  werde 
du   wirst 
er    wird 
wir  werden 
ihr  werdet 
Sie  werden 
sie  werden 


sein,  /  shall  be. 
sein,  thou  wilt  be. 
sein,  he  will  be. 
sein,  we  shall  be. 
sein,  you  will  be. 
sein,  you  tvill  be. 
sein,  they  will  be. 


3.  Perfect. 


6.  Second  Future. 


ich  bin   gewesen, •  /  have  been.^  Ich  werde 

du  bist  gewesen,  thoti  hast  been.  du  wirst 

er    ist     gewesen,  he  has  been.  er    wird 

wir  sind  gewesen,  we  have  been.  wir  werden 

ihr  seid  gewesen,  you  hai^e  been.  ihr  werdet 

Sie  sind  gewesen,  you  have  been.  Sie  werden 

sie  sind  gewesen,  they  have  been.  sie  werden 


gewesen  sein,  /  shall  h.  b. 
gewesen  sein,  thou  wilt  h.  b. 
gewesen  sein,  he  will  h.  b. 
gewesen  sein,  ice  shall  h.  b. 
gewesen  sein,  you  will  h.  b. 
gewesen  sein,  you  will  h.  ft. 
gewesen  sein,  they  tvill  h.  b. 


II.— THE    CONDITIONAL. 


First  Conditional. 


Second  ConditionaL 


ich  wiirde    sein,  /  should  be. 
du  wiirdest  sein,  thou  wouldst  be. 
er    wiirde    sein,  he  tvould  be. 
wii  wiirden  sein,  we  should  be. 
ihr  wlirdet  sein,  yoti  ti'ould  be. 
Sie  wiirden  sein,  you  would  be. 
sie  wiirden  sein,  they  would  be. 


ich  wiirde  gewesen  sein,  /  should  h  b. 
du  wiirdest  gewesen  sein,  thou  ic^ldst  h.  b. 
er  wiirde  gewesen  sein,  he  would  h.  b. 
wir  wiirden  gewesen  sein,  we  should  h.  b. 
ihr  wiirdet  gewesen  sein,  you  would  h.  b. 
Sie  wiirden  gewesen  sein,  you  would  h.  b, 
sie  wiirden  gewesen  sein,  they  ic'ld  h.  b. 


1  Or,  simply,  I  was. 


Pron,  :  zin,  zint,  zit,  gS-vS'-z'n. 


GRAMMAR. 


501 


1.  Present. 

ich  «ct%t  /  be. 
du   seiest,  thou  he. 
er    set,  he  he. 
wir  seien,  we  he. 
ihr  seiet,  you  be. 
Sie  seien,  you  be. 
sie  seien,  they  be. 


in.— THE   SUBJUNCTIVE.* 

4.  Pluperfect. 


ich  waret  gewesen,  I  had  been. 

du   wtirest  gewesen,  thou  hadst  been. 

er    ware  gewesen,  he  had  been. 

wir  woren  gewesen,  we  had  been. 

ihr  Wrtret  gewesen,  you  had  been. 

Sie  waren  gewesen,  you  had  been. 

Bie  waren  gewesen,  they  had  been. 


2.  Imperfect. 

ich  ware,  t  I  were. 
du  warest,  thou  wert. 
er    w/ire,  he  were. 
wir  waren,  tve  were. 
ihr  waret,  you  ivere. 
Sie  waren,  you  were. 
sie  waren,  they  were. 


3.  Perfect. 


ich  sei 
du  seiest 
er    sei 
wir  seien 
ihr  «e«e# 
Sie  seien 
sie  «eien 


gewesen, 
gewesen, 
gewesen, 
gewesen, 
gewesen, 
gewesen ; 
gewesen, 


/  have  heen. 
thou  have  been, 
he  have  heen. 
we  have  been, 
you  have  heen. 
you  have  been, 
they  have  heen. 


5.  First  Future. 

ich  werde  sein,  §  /  shall  he. 
du  werdest  sein,  thou  wilt  he. 

er    uierde  sein,  he  will  he. 

wir  werden  sein,  we  shall  he. 

ihr  werdet  sein,  you  toill  be. 

Sie  werden  sein,  you  will  be. 

sie  werden  sein,  they  will  he. 

6.  Second  Future. 

ich  werde  gewesen  sein,  /  shall  h.  h. 
du   werdest  gewesen  sein,  thou  wilt  h.  h. 

er    werde  gewesen  sein,  he  will  h.  b. 

wir  werden  gewesen  sein,  ice  shall  h.  b. 

ihr  werdet  gewesen  sein,  you  tvill  h.  h. 

Sie  werden  gewesen  sein,  yoii  tvill  h,  b. 

sie  werden  gewesen  sein,  they  will  h.  b. 


sei,  be  (thou). 

er  soil  sein,  let  him  6«.§§ 

seien  wir  (or,  lasst  uns  sein),  let  us  be. 


IV.  — THE   IMPERATIVE. 

be  (J/6').§§ 


seid 

seien  Sie 

sie  soUen  sein,  let  them  be. 


Present  :  sein,  to  be. 


v.— THE    INFINITIVE. 

Past  :  gewesen  sein,  to  have  been. 


Pres.  Participle  :  seiend,  being.W 


Past  Participle  :  gewesen,  been. 


*  For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  see  pages  340-352. 
t  Pron. :  zi,  zl'-'st,  zi,  zi'-'n,  zi'-'t. 
X  Pron.:  va'-re,  va'-r'st,  va'-r'n, 
g  Pron. :  var'-de,  vSr'-dest. 
§g  Pron.  -.  zol  zin  ,  zi'-'n  ver,  zit,  zi'-'n  ze. 
II  Pron.:  zF-'nt. 


502 


GRAMMAR. 


THIRD    "TENSE"   AUXIIIARY. 
Werden,  to  become. 


I. -THE    INDICATIVE. 


1.  Present. 

ich  werde,  /  become. 
du   wirst,*  thou  becomest. 
er    wird,*  he  becomes. 
wir  werden,  we  become. 
iJir  werdet,!  you  become. 
Sie  werden,!  you  become. 
sie  werden,  they  become. 


4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  war      geworden,  /  had  become. 
du  warst    geworden,  thou  hadst  become. 
er    war      geworden,  he  had  become. 
wir  waren  geworden,  ive  had  become. 
ihr  waret   geworden,  you  had  become. 
Sie  waren  geworden,  you  had  become. 
sie  waren  geworden,  they  had  become. 


2.  Imperfect. 

ich  ward,2  /  became.^ 
du  wardst,2  thou  becamest. 
er    ward, 2  he  became. 
wir  warden,  ive  became. 
ihr  wurdet,  you  became. 
Sie  wiirden,  you  became. 
sie  warden,  they  became. 


5.  First  Future. 


ich  werde  werden, 
du  wirst  werden, 
er  wird  werden , 
wir  werden  werden, 
ihr  werdet  werden, 
Sie  werden  werden, 
sie  werden  werden. 


/  shall  become, 
thou  wilt  become, 
he  will  become, 
we  shall  become, 
you  will  become, 
you  ivill  become, 
they  will  become. 


3.  Perfect. 


6.  Second  Future. 


ich  bin   geworden,  t  I  have  become. 

du   bist  geworden,  thou  hast 

er    ist     geworden,  he  has 

wir  sind  geworden,  we  have 

ihr  seid  geworden,  you  have 

Sie  sind  geworden,  you  have 

sie  sind  geworden,  they  have 


ich  werde    geworden  sein,  I  shall  have  b. 
du   wirst      geworden  sein,  thou  icilt  h.  b. 
er    wird       geworden  sein,  he  will  have  b. 
wir  werden  geworden  sein,  we  shall  have  b 
ihr  werdet  ijeworden  sein,  you  will  have  b. 
Sie  werden  geworden  sein,  you  ivill  have  b. 
sie  werden  geworden  sein,  they  ivill  have  b 


II.  — THE    CONDITIONAL. 


First  Conditional. 


Second  Conditional. 


ich  wurde     werden,  /  should  become. 
da   wiirdest  werden,  thou  tvouldst 
er    wUrde     werden,  he  would 
wir  wiirden  werden,  we  should 
ilir  wiirdet   werden,  you  would 
Sie  wiirden  werden,  you  would 
sie  wiirden  werden,  they  would 


ich  wiirde  geworden  sein,  /  should  h.  b. 
du  wiirdest  geworden  sein,  thou  w'ld  h  h. 
er  wiirde  geworden  sein,  he  would  h.  b. 
wir  wiirden  geworden  sein,  we  should  h.  b. 
ihr  wiirdet  geworden  sein,  you  tv'ld  h.  l>. 
Sie  wiirden  geworden  sein,  yoxi  w'ld  h.  b. 
sie  wiirden  geworden  sein,  they  w'ld  h.  b. 


1  See  page  28  note  1.  —     Or,  ich  wurde,  du  wurdest,  er  wurde. 
*  Pron,  :  virst,  virt.—  f  Proii. :  vart.—  X  Pron. :  gg-v6r'-d»u. 


GRAMMAR. 


503 


ni.  — THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


1.  Present. 

ich  werde,  /  become. 
du  tverdest,^  thou  become. 
er  iverde,^  he  become. 
wir  werden,  we  become. 
ihi"  werdet,  you  become. 
Sie  werden,  you  become. 
sie  werden,  they  become. 


4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  tviire^  geworden,  /  had  become. 
du  wdrest  geworden,  thou  had  become. 
er    xvdre     geworden,  he  had  become. 
wir  wdren  geworden,  we  had  become. 
ihr  wiiret    geworden,  you  had  become. 
Sie  wdren  geworden,  you  had  become. 
sie  wdren  geworden,  they  had  become. 


2.  Imperfect. 

ich  wYtrde,"^  1  became. 
du   wi'trdest,  thou  became. 
er    tviirde,  he  became. 
wir  wi/rden,  we  became. 
ihr  wiirdet,  you  became. 
Sie  wi/rden,  you  became. 
sie  wiirden,  ihey  became. 


5.  First  Future. 

ich  werde  werden,^  /  shall  become. 
du  iverdest  werden,  thou  wilt  become. 

er    werde  werden,  he  will  become. 

wir  werden  werden,  ice  shall  become. 

ihr  werdet  werden,  you  will  become. 

Sie  werden  werden,  you  will  become. 

sie  werden  werden,  they  had  become. 


3.  Perfect. 


6.  Second  Future. 


ich  sei^ 
du   seiest 
er    set 
wir  seien 
ihr  seiet 
Sie  seien 
sie  seien 


geworden  ,3  I  have  become. 
geworden,  thou  have  *' 
geworden,  he  have  *' 
geworden,  we  hare  " 
geworden,  you  have  *' 
geworden,  you  have  " 
geworden,  they  have  " 


ich  werde^  geworden' sein, /sftaZi  ^.  . 
du  werdest  geworden  sein,  thou  wilt  h.  b. 
er  werde  geworden  sein,  he  ivill  have  b. 
wir  werden  geworden  sein,  we  shall  h.  b. 
ihr  werdet  geworden  sein,  you  will  h.  b. 
Sie  werden  geworden  sein,  you  will  h.  b. 
sie  werden    geworden  sein,  they  will  h.  b. 


IV.  -  IMPERATIVE. 


werdet         j 


werde,  become  {thou). 
er  soil  werden,  let  him  become.* 
werden  wir  {or,  lasst  uns  werden),  let    sie  soUen  werden,  let  them  become, 
us  become. 


v.- THE    INFINITIVE. 

Present:  werden,  to  become. 

Past  :  geworden  sein,   to  have  become. 

The  Participles. 

Present  Participle  :  werdend,  becoming. 
Past  Participle  :  geworden,  become 


1  See  page  499,  note  *.  —  «  See  pages  340-342. 

3  Or,  worden,  wlien  vised  with  the  passive  voice.     See  Note  p.  510. 

*  Pron. .  vSr'-de;  Sr  zol  var-d'n  ;  last  dons  var'-d'n. 


504 


GRAMMAR. 


THE    MODAL   AUXILIARIES. 
I.  — KoAiien  {can),  to  be  able. 


INDICATIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  kann,  I  can,  I  am  able. 
du  kannst,  thou  canst. 
er    kann,  he  can. 
wir  konnen,  we  can. 
ihr  konnt,  you  can. 
Sie  konnen,  you  can. 
sie  konnen,  they  can. 


THE     OTHER 


INDICATIVE. 


2.  ich  konnte,  etc.,  /  could,  etc.  2. 

3.  ich  habe  gekonnt,*  /  hare  been  able.  3. 

4.  ich  hatte  gekonnt,*  /  had  been  able.  4. 

5.  ich  werde  konnen,  /  shall  be  able.  5. 

6.  ich  werde  gekonnt  haben,t  /  sh.  h.  b.  a.  G. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  kiinne,  I  can,  I  am  able. 

du   konnest,  thou  can. 

er    konne,  he  can. 

wir  koinien,  we  can. 

ihr  konnet,  you  can. 

Sie  konnen,  you  can. 

sie  konnen,  they  can. 

TENSES    ARE: 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

ich  kwnnte,  etc.,  I  could,  etc. 


ioh  habe  gekonnt,*  /  have  been  able. 
ich  h'/tte  gekonnt,*  /  had  been  able. 
icli  werde  koinien,  /  shall  be  able. 
ich  werde  gekonnt  haben  l.s.  h.  b.  %. 


1.  ich  wiirde  konnen, /sAott/rf  fte  aftZe.         1.  No  imperative. 

2.  ich  wlirde  gekonnt  haben,  I  sh.  h.  b.  a.     1.  konnen.    2.  gekonnt. 

11.— Wollen  (will),  to  ivish,  to  like. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present.  1.  Present, 

ich  will,  /  will.  ich  wolle,  I  will. 

du  wollest,  thou  tvill. 


du  willst,  thou  willst. 
er    will,  lie  tvill. 
wir  wollen,  tve  will. 
ihr  wollt,  you  will. 
Sie  wollen,  you  will. 
sie  wollen,  they  will. 

THE     OTHER 

INDICATIVE. 

2.  ich  wollte,  etc.,  I  wanted,  etc. 

3.  ich  habe  gewollt,t  I  {have)  wanted. 

4.  ich  hatte  ge wollt,  t  /  had  wanted. 

5.  ich  werde  wollen,  /  shall  want. 

6.  ich  werde  gewoUt  %  haben,  1  sh.  h.  w. 

1.  ich  wiirde  wollen,  [should  want  to. 

2.  ich  wUrde  gewoUt  haben,  /  sh'd.  h.  w. 


er    wolle,  he  will. 
wir  wollen,  toe  will. 
ihr  woUet,  you  tvill. 
Sie  wollen,  yoti  tvill. 
sie  wollen,  they  tvill. 

TENSES    ARE: 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2.  ich  wollte,  etc.,  /  wanted,  etc. 

3.  ich  habe  gewoUt,  t  /  have  wanted. 

4.  ich  hf/tte  gewollt,  t  /  had  wanted. 

5.  ich  werde  wollen,  /  shall  want. 

6.  ich  werde  gewollt  haben. 
1.   wolle,  will  (thou). 

1.   wollen.    2.  gewollt. 


*  Or,  kdnnen.    See  p.  526,  par.  6. 
X  Pron.:  gS-kont';  gS-v5lt'. 


t  Or,  wollen.    See  p.  627. 


GRAMMAK. 


505 


III. — Miissen  (fnust)^  to  have  to,  to  be  obliged. 


INDICATIVE. 
1.  Present. 

ich  muss,  I  must. 
(Ill   imisst,  thou  must. 
er    muss,  he  must. 
wir  miissen,  we  must. 
ihr  miisst,  i/ou  must. 
Sie  miissen,  you  must. 
sie  miissen,  they  must. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
1.  Present, 
ich  miisse,  I  must. 
du  mussesi,  thou  must. 
er    miisse,  he  must. 
wir  miissen,  we  must. 
ihr  miisset,  you  must. 
Sie  miissen,  you  must. 
sie  miissen,  they  must. 


THE     OTHER    TENSES    ARE: 


INDICATIVE. 

2.  ich  musste,  etc.,  /  had  to,  etc. 

3.  icli  liabe  gemusst,*  /  hai^e  had  to. 

4.  ich  Iiatte  gemusst,*  /  had  had  to. 

5.  ich  werde  miissen,  /  shall  have  to. 

6.  ich  werde  gemusst};  haben,» 

1.  ich  wiirde  miissen,  I  should  have  to. 

2.  icli  wiirde  gemusst  haben.^ 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2.  ich  miisste,  etc.,  I  shHd  he  obliged  to. 

3.  ich  habe  gemusst,*  /  ivas  obliged  to. 

4.  ich  hatte  gemusst,*  /  wUd  h.  h.  oH.  to. 

5.  ich  werde  miissen,  /'//  have  ic. 

6.  ich  werde  gemusst  liaben.^ 
1.  No  imperative. 

1.  miissen.    2.  gemusst.t 


INDICATIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  mag,  I  may. 
du  magst,  thou  mayst. 
er    mag,  he  may. 
wir  mogen,  ive  may. 
ihr  mogt,  you  may. 
Sie  mogen,  you  may. 
sie  mogen,  they  may. 


IV.  — Mogeii  {may),  to  like. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  moge,  I  may. 
du  tnogest,  thou  may. 
er    moge,  he  may. 
wir  mogen,  we  may. 
ihr  moget,  you  may. 
Sie  mogen,  you  may. 
sie  mogen,  they  may. 


THE     OTHER    TENSES    ARE: 


INDICATIVE. 


2.  ich  mochte,  etc.,  I  might,  etc. 

3.  ich  habe  gemocht,t  /  have  liked. 

4.  ich  hatte  gemoclit,t  /  had  liked. 

5.  ich  werde  mogen,  /  shall  like. 

6.  ich  werde  gemocht  §  haben.^ 

1.  ich  wiirde  mogen,  I  should  like. 

2.  ich  wurde  gemoclit  haben.* 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2.  ich  mochte,  etc.,  /  might,  etc. 

3.  ich  habe  gemocht,t  /  have  liked. 

4.  ich  hatte  gemocht,t  /  had  liked. 

5.  ich  werde  mogen,  /  shall  like. 

6.  ich  werde  gemocht  t  liaben.' 

1.  No  imperative. 

2.  mogen.    2.  gemocht.§ 


1  I  sliall  have  had  to.  —  ^  I  would  have  had  to. 

3  I  shall  have  liked. —  *  I  would  have  liked. 

*  Or,  miissen.    See  page  176.  —  f  Or,  mogen.    See  page  176,  n.  1, 

I  Pron. :  gS-moosV.  —  ^  Pron. :  ge-m5Arlit'. 


506 


GRAMMAR. 


V.  —  Sollen,  (shall),  to  have  to,  to  Jiave  an  obligation. 


INDICATIVE. 

1.  Present. 

:ch  soil,  /  am  to,  I  shall. 
du   soUst,  thou  shalt. 
er    soil,  he  shall. 
wir  sollen,  we  shall. 
jhr  soUt,  you  shall. 
Sie  sollen,  you  shall. 
&ie  sollen,  they  shall. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  solle,  /  shall,  I  am  to. 
du  sollest,  thou  shall. 
er    solle,  he  shall. 
wir  sollen,  we  shall. 
ihr  sollet,  you  shall. 
Sie  sollen,  you  shall. 
sie  sollen,  they  shall. 


THE     OTHER    TENSES    ARE: 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


2.  ich  sollte,  etc.,  /  should,  etc.  2. 

3.  ich  habe  gesollt,*  /  had  to.  3. 

4.  ich  hatte  gesollt,*  /  had  had  to.  4. 

5.  ich  werde  sollen,  /  shall  have  to.  5. 

6.  ich  werde  gesollt  haben.i  6. 

1.  ich  wiirde  sollen,  I  should  have  to.  1. 

2.  ich  wiirde  gesollt  haben.2  1. 


ich  sollte,  etc. ,  /  should,  etc. 
ich  habe  gesollt,*  /  have  had  to. 
ich  hatte  gesollt,*  /  had  had  to. 
ich  werde  sollen,  I  shall  have  to. 
ich  werde  gesollt  haben.i 
No  imperative. 
sollen.    2.  gesollt. 


VI.  — Diirfen  (to  dare),  to  he  allowed. 


INDICATIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  darf,  /  am  allowed. 
du  darfst,  thou  art  allowed. 
er    darf,  he  is  allowed. 
wir  diirfen,  tve  are  allowed. 
ihr  diirft,  you  are  allowed. 
Sie  diirfen,  you  are  allowed. 
sie  diirfen,  they  are  allowed. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  durfe,  I  am  allowed. 
du   durfest,  thou  art  allowed. 
er    d'urfe,  he  is  alloived. 
wir  diirfen,  we  are  allowed. 
ihr  diirfet,  you  are  allowed. 
Sie  diirfen,  you  are  allowed. 
sie  diii'fen,  they  are  allowed. 


THE     OTHER     TENSES     ARE 


2.  ich  durfte,  etc.,  /  was  allowed. 

3.  ich  habe  gedurf  t,t  /  have  been  alVd. 

4.  ich  hatte  gedurft,t  /  had  been  alVd. 

5.  ich  werde  diirfen,  /  shall  be  aWd. 

6.  ich  werde  gedurft  haben.^ 

1.  ich  wiirde  diirfen,  I  should  be  alVd. 

2.  ich  wiirde  gedurft  haben.< 


2.  ich  diirfte,  etc.,  /  was  allowed,  etc. 

3.  ich  habe  gedurft, t  /  have  been  all'd. 

4.  ich  hatte  gedurft, t  /  had  been  all'd. 

5.  ich  werde  diirfen,  /  shall  be  allowed 

6.  ich  werde  gedurft  haben.s 
1.  No  imperative. 

1.  diirfen.    2.  gedurft. 


1  I  shall  have  had  to. —  ^  j  should  have  had  to. 

•  I  shall  have  been  allowed.  —  *  I  should  liave  been  allowed. 

♦  Or,  sollen.    See  page  176,  note  1.  —  f  Or,  diirfen.    See  p.  176. 


GRAMMAR.  507 

\ 
THE    CONJUGATIONS. 

There  are  two  conjugations  in  German :  the  weak  (or  new) 
conjugatiotif  and  the  strong  (or  old)  conjugation. 

VERBS     OF    THE     WEAK    CONJUGATION. 

The  verbs  of  the  weak  conjugation  form  their  im- 
perfect by  adding  te  to  the  stem  of  the  infinitive;  and  their 
past  participle,  by  prefixing  ge  and  suffixing  t  to  this  same 
stem.    Thus : 

Infinitive  :  Frozen,  to  ask.    Stem  :  frag. 
Imperfect  :  Ich  fragte,  I  asked.    Past  Part.  :  ge  fragf . 

PECULIAR    VERBS    OF    THE    WEAK    CONJUGATION. 

1.  Inseparable  verbs  (verbs  with  one  of  the  prefixes  ge, 
er,  etc.,  see  p.  236.)  omit  ge  in  the  past  participle.  Thus : 
ftclohnen,  to  reward ;  past  part.  :  ftelohnt ;  not,  begrelohnt. 

N.  B.  —  These  same  verbs  do  not  insert  zu  between  the  prefix 
and  the  simple  verbs  as  do  the  separable  verbs.  Thus  :  Infini- 
tive with  zu :  zu  belohnen ;  not,  be««*lohnen. 

2.  Verbs  ending  in  ieren  in  the  infinitive  also  omit  ge  in  the 
past  participle.  Ex. :  Stndieren,  to  study ;  past  part.  :  stU'- 
diert ;  not,  grestudiert. 

3.  Verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  el  or  er,  take  n  instead  of  en  in 
the  infinitive  ending ;  and  in  the  present  1st  pers.  sing.,  drop  the 
e  before  I  or  r,  Ex.:  Inf.,  schmeicheln,  to  flatter ;  instead  of 
schmeichelen.     Pres.,  Ich  schmeichle  {not,  schmeichele). 

4.  Six  verbs,  with  their  derivatives,  follow  the  weak  con- 
jugation; but,  besides,  change  the  stem  vowel  into  a  in  the 
imperfect  indicative  (not  subjunctive)  and  in  the  past  participle. 
Thus: 

brennen,  to  bum.  ich  brannte,  I  burned,  gebrannt,  burned, 

kennen,  to  know.  ich  Dannie,  I  knew.  gekannt,  kneiv. 

ncnnen,  to  name,  ich  nannte,  I  named.  genannt,  named. 

rennen,  to  run.  ich  rannte,  Iran.  gerannt,  ran. 

^endien,  to  send.  ich  sandte,  J  sen^  gesandt,  sen^ 

viCndiQii,  to  turn.  loh  \\a\\ditQ,  I  turned.  gQy^andii,  turned. 

N.  B.  —  Senden  and  wenden  may  also  be  regular:  sendete, 
gesendet. 


508 


GRAMMAR. 


THE  WEAK   CONJUGATION. 

MODEL:  — Pragen,  to  ask. 


I.  — THE    INDICATIVE. 


1.  Present. 

ich  frag  e,  /  ask  or  am  asking.* 
du   frag  8t,i  thou  dost  ask,  etc. 
er  2  frag  t,  he  asked  or  is  asking. 
wir  frag  en,  ice  ask  or  are  asking. 
ihr  f rag  1 3  ^ott  asA:  or    "        " 
Sie  frag  en,  "      "  or    *'        •* 
sie  frag  en,  thep  "  or    '•       " 

2.  Imi>erfect. 

icU  frag  te,  /  asked  or  was  asking. 
du  frag  test,  thou  didst  ask,  etc. 
er»  frag  te,  he  asked  or  was  asking. 
wir  frag  ten,  we  asked  or  were  " 
ihr  frag  tet,  you  "  or  "  " 
Sie  frag  ten,  "  "  or  "  " 
sie  frag  ten,  they  "      or     "      *' 


4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  hatte     gefragt,  I  had  asked. 

du  hattest  gefragt,  thou  hadst  asked. 

er    hatte     gefragt,  he  had 

wir  hatten  gefragt,  ice    " 

ihr  hattet   gefragt,  you  " 

Sie  hatten  gelragt,  you  " 

sie  hatten  gefragt,  they  had 

5.  First  Future. 

ich  werde    fragen,  /  shall  ask. 
du  wirst      fragen,  thou  wilt  ask. 
er    wird       fragen,  he  will 
wir  werden  fragen,  we  shall 
ihr  werdet  fragen,  you  will 
Sie  werden  fragen,    '•       •' 
sie  werden  fragen,  they  will 


3.  Perfect. 

ich  habe  gefragt,  /  have  asked.^ 
du  hast  gefragt,  thou  hast  " 
er*  hat  gefragt,  he  has  '* 
wir  haben  gefragt,  we  have  " 
ihr  habt  gefragt,  you  have  " 
Sie  haben  gefragt,  you  "  " 
sie  haben  gefragt,  they  have  " 


6.  Second  Future. 

ich  werde    gefragt  haben,  /  shall  h.  asked. 

du  wirst      gefragt  haben,  thou  will  h.  " 

er    wird       gefragt  haben,  he  will      "  " 

wir  werden  gefragt  liaben,  we  shall    "  " 

ihr  werdet  gefragt  haben,  you  icill    "  " 

Sie  werden  gefragt  haben,    *'       ♦'      "  " 

sie  werden  gefragt  haben,  they  will  "  ♦' 


II. -THE    CONDITIONAL. 
First  Conditional.  Second  Conditional. 


ich  wurde     fragen,  /  would  ask.  X 
du   wlirdest  fragen,  thou  w'ldst  ask. 
er3  wlirde     fragen,  Ae  ?(70mW       " 
wir  wUrden  fragen,  we     "  " 

ihr  wiirdet    fragen,  you    "  •' 

Sie  wlirden  frag-en,  you  "  " 

sie  wUrden  fragen,  they  "  " 


ich  wiirde     gefragt  haben,  /  w'd  or  s'/i  h.  a. 


du  wiirdest  gefragt  iiaben,  th.  w. 
er  wiirde  gefragt  haben,  he  ' 
wir  wlirden  gefragt  haben,  we  ' 
ihr  wUrdet  gefragt  haben,  you  ' 
Sie  wUrden  gefragt  haben,  "  ' 
sie  wUrden  gefragt  liaben,  they  ' 


or  s.  h.  as. 


1  Or,  du  fragest.  —  ^  Or,  sie  {she) ;  or,  es  {it) ;  or,  man  {one,  people). 

*  Or,  ihr  f  raget. 

*  Or,  I  do  ask.  —  f  Or,  simply,  I  asked. —  J  Or,  I  should  ask. 


GRAMMAR. 


509 


Note.  —  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  are 
almost  the  same  in  form  as  those  of  the  indicative.  Wiiere  differ- 
ences do  exist,  the}'  have  been  brought  out  by  the  means  of  full-face 
italic  letters,  as :  du  frages*.    For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  see  p.  340. 

ni.  — THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


1.  Present. 

icli  frag  e,  /  mat/  aslc. 

du   frag  est,  thou  mayest  ask. 

er    flag  e,  he  may 

wir  frag  en,  we  may 

ihr  frag  et,  you  may 

Sie  frag  en,    "    " 

sie  frag  en,  they  may 


4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  hiitte     gefragt,  /  had  asked. 
du  hattest  gefragt,  ihou  hadst  asked^ 
er    hfitte     gefragt,  he  had  " 

wir  hatten  gefragt,  we    "  " 

ihr  httttet   gefragt,  you  "  ♦* 

Sie  hatten  gefragt,    "    "  <* 

sie  hatten  gefragt,  they  "  ** 


2.  Imperfect. 

ii'h  fragte,  tasked. 

du  frag  test,  thou  didst  ask. 

er    frag  te,  he  asked. 

wir  frag  ten,  we    " 

ihr  frag  tet,  yov,   " 

Sie  frag  ten,   "     " 

sie  frag  ten,  they  " 

3.  Perfect. 


6.  Future. 

ich  werde  f ragen,  /  shall  ask. 
du  tverdest  f ragen,  thou  shall  ask. 

er    werde  fragen,  he  shall 

wir  werden  fragen,  we     '* 

ihr  werdet  fragen,  you   " 

Sie  werden  fragen,    "     " 

sie  werden  fragen,  they  " 

6.  Second  Future. 


ich  liabe     gefragt,  I  (may)  have  asked.*  ich  werde       gefragt  haben,  Is.  h.  asked. 


du  habes*  gef  i-agt,  thou  mayest  h. 
er    habe     gefragt,  he  may  have 
wir  haben  gefragt,  ice    "       " 
ihr  liabt't  gefragt,  you  *'       " 
Sie  haben  gefragt,    "     "       " 
sie  liaben  gefragt,  they  "       " 


du  tverdest  gefragt  haben,  th. ' 
er  werde  gefragt  haben,  we  ' 
wir  werden  gefragt  hahen,  he  ' 
ihr  werdet  gefragt  liaben,  y.  ' 
Sie  werden  gefragt  haben,  '*  ' 
sie  werden     gefragt  haben,  "   ' 


IV. -THE    IMPERATIVE. 


f  rage,  ask  (thou). 

er  soil  fragen,  let  him  ask. 

fragen  wir  (or,  lasst  uiis  f ragen).t 


fraget;  f ragt ;  )_„..„.. 
or,  fragen  Sie  |««*<2'^>- 
sie  sollen  fragen,  let  them  ask. 


v.— THE    INFINITIVE. 
Present  :  fragen,  to  ask.  Past  :  gefragt  haben,  to  have  asked. 


Present  Participle:  frag  end,  as^ingr.  Past  Participle  :  ge  fragt,  asked. 


*  Or,  simply,  I  asked.—  f  Let  us  ask.    Also:  Wir  woUen  fragen^ 


510  GRAMMAR. 

THE    PASSIVE   VOICE. 
MODEL :  gefragt  werden,  to  be  asked. 

Note. —  See  full  conjugation  of  tverden,  page  502. —  Notice,  how- 
ever, that  tvorden  is  used  as  a  past  participle  instead  oi^  getvorden. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present.  !•  Present. 

ich  werde    gefragt,  /  am  asked.  ich  werde  gefragt,  I  {may)  he  asked. 

du  wirst      gefragt,  thou  art  asked.  du  werdest  gefragt,  thou  maijest  be  a. 

er    wird       gefragt,  he  is  asked.  er    xverde  gefragt,  he  may  be  asked. 

wir  werden  gefragt,  we  are  asked.  wir  werden  gefragt,  ice  mxiy  be  asked. 

ihr  werdet  gefragt,  you  are  asked.  ilir  werdet  gefragt,  you  may  be  asked. 

Sie  werden  gefragt,  you  are  asked.  Sie  werden  gefragt,  you  may  be  asked. 

sie  werden  gefragt,  they  are  asked.  sie  werden  gefragt,  they  may  be  asked. 

2.  Imperfect.  2.   Imperfect. 

ich  wurde  gefragt,  etc.,  /  icas  asked,  etc.  ich  wlirde  gefragt,  etc.,  /  might  be  a.,  etc. 

3.  Perfect.  3.  Perfect. 

ich  bin  gefragt  worden,  /  h.  been  asked,  ich  sei  gefragt  worden,  I  may  h.  b.  asked. 

4.  Pluperfect  4.   Pluperfect. 

ich  war  gefragt  worden,  /  had  b.  asked,  ich  ware  gefragt  worden,  I  might  h.  h.  a. 

5.  First  Future.  5.   First  Future 

ich  werde  gefragt  werden,  /  sh.  be  as'd.  ich  werde  gefragt  werden,  I  sh.  be  asked. 

6.  Second  Future.  6.   Second  Future 

ich  werde  gefr.  worden  sein,  Is.  h.  b.  a.  ich  werde  gefr.  worden  sein,  I  sh.  h.  b.  a. 

7.  First  Conditional.  INFINITIVE. 

ich  wiirde  gefragt  werden,  /  sh'd  be  a.     Present:  gefragt  werden,  to  be  asked. 

8.  Second  Conditional.         Past:  gefragt  worden  sein,  to  have  been 
ich  wlirde  gefr.  worden  sein,  /  s.  h.  b.  a.      asked. 

REMARKS. 

1.  Only  transitive  verbs  have  a  personal  passive  voice.     See  i)age  496. 
INIany  intransitive  verbs  have  an  impersonal  passive  voice.     Thus ;  Es 

tvird  gesungen,  ive  (or,  they)  sing ;  lit. :  it  is  sung. 

Hence,  in  translating  English  passive  forms  into  German,  the  pupil 
must  consider  whether  the  German  verb  is  transitive  or  intransitive. 
For  instance,  I  am  followed  cannot  be  rendered  by  the  direct  or  personal 
passive  voice  in  German,  as  folgen  is  an  intransitive  verb  ;  but  either 
by  the  active  voice  with  tnan  (thus:  man  folgt  mir),  or  the  imper- 
sonal passive  (thus:  es  tvird  mir  gefolgt). 

2,  Notice  that  sein  can  often  be  used  in  German  with  a  past  parti- 
ciple as  well  as  tverden.  But  the  use  of  sein  expresses  a  state  or  con- 
dition, while  werden  expresses  arfion.  Thus  :  the  room  is  clea7ied=D:\s 
Zimmer  ist  g(M-einigt;  or,  Das  Zinmur  ivird  gereinigt.  The  house  was 
destroyed  =\>ei^  Haus  war  (or  wurde)  zerstort. 


GRAMMAR.  511 

VERBS    OF    THE    STRONG    GOKJUGATiON. 

Strong  verba  (of  which  there  are  about  ItO)  are  conjugated 
Uke  the  weak  verbs,  excepting  that : 

(1)  They  form  their  imperfect  not  by  adding  te  to  the  stem, 
as  the  iveak  verbs,  but  simply  by  changing  the  stem  vowel.   Ex.: 

Infix.  :  schlagen,  to  strike.    Imper.  :  ich  schlwg,  I  struck. 

(2)  They  form  their  past  participle  by  adding  en  (not  t). 
Ex.: 

Infin.  :  schlagen,  to  strike.    Past  Part.  :  geschlagcn. 
N.  B.  —  The  greater  number,  however,  also  change  the  stem 
vowel  in  the  past  participle.    Ex.: 

Infin.  :  singen,  to  sing.    Past  Part.  :  gestengen,  sung. 

(3)  Strong  verbs  having  a,  o,  or  au  in  the  stem  of  the 
infinitive,  change  it  into  a,  o,  or  du  in  the  second  and  third 
person  singular  of  the  present.    Ex. : 

J  S  schlagen,  to  strike.    ,  ( ^lu  schlagst;  er  schlagt. 

'  <  laufen,  to  run.  '\  du  laufst ;  er  lauft. 

For  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  see  Note,  page  513. 

The  strong  verbs  are  best  classified  into  5  classes,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  stem  vowel  of  the  imperfect  muX  past  part,: 

Strong  verbs  of  the  first  class  are  those  in  which  the  stem 
vowel  of  both  the  imperfect  and  past  'participle  is  o. 

Strong  verbs  of  the  second  class  are  those  in  which  the 
stem  vowel  of  both  the  imperfect  and  past  participle  is  i  (or  ie). 

Strong  verbs  of  the  third  class  are  those  in  which  the 
stem  vowel  of  the  imperfect  is  a,  and  the  stem  vowel  of  the 
past  participle  is  u  or  o. 

Strong  verbs  of  the  fourth  class  are  those  in  which  the 
stem  vowel  of  the  imperfect  is  a,  i,  or  ie ;  and  the  stem  vowel 
of  the  past  participle,  the  same  as  that  of  the  infinitive. 

Strong  verbs  of  the  fifth  class  are  those  in  which  the 
stem  vowel  of  the  imperfect  is  u;  and  the  stem  vowel  of  the 
past  participle,  the  same  as  that  of  the  infinitive. 

Note.  —  Observe,  that  in  all  strong  verbs,  the  stem  vowel  of  the 
impeifect  is  different  from  that  of  the  infinitive,  while  the  stem  vowel  of 
the  past  participle  is  ditfereut  from  the  infinitive  only  in  the  first  three 
classes. 


512 


GKAMMAR. 


THE  STRONG   CONJUGATION. 

MODAL  VERB :  Schlagen,  to  strike. 

Note  1.  —  As  already  seen  on  preceding  page,  strong  verbs  of  which 
the  stem  vowel  of  the  infinitive  is  a,  o,  at*,  modify  it  to  a,  o,  du  in 

the  second  and  third  person  singular  of  tiie  indicative  present. 


I.— 

1.  Present. 

ich  schlage,  f  strike. 
du   schlfigst,  tkou  strikest. 
er    schUrgt,  he  strikes. 
wir  schlagen,  we  strike. 
ilir  schlagt,  you  strike. 
Sie  schlagen,  you  strike. 
■sie  schlagen,  they  strike. 

2.  Imperfect. 

ich  schlitg,  /  struck. 

du  schlwgst,  thou  didst  strike. 

er    schlwg,  he  struck. 

wir  schlttgen,  ice  striick 

ihr  schliegt,  you  struck 

Sie  schlMgen,  you  struck. 

sie  schlugen,  they  struck 


THE    INDICATIVE. 

4.  Pluperfect. 

ich  hatte  geschlagen,  /  had  struck. 

du  hattest  geschlagen,  thou  hadst  struck. 

er    hatte  geschlagen,  he  had  struck. 

wir  hatten  geschlagen,  we  had  struck. 

ihr  hattet  geschlagen,  you  had  struck. 

Sie  hatten  geschlagen,  you  had  struck. 

sie  hatten  geschlagen,  they  had  struck. 

5.  First  Future. 

ich  werde    schlagen,  /  shall  strike. 
du  wirst      schlagen,  thou  wilt  strike. 
er    wird      schlagen,  he  will  strike. 
wir  werden  schlagen,  we  will  strike. 
ihr  werdet  schlagen,  you  will  strike. 
Sie  werden  schlagen,  you  will  strike. 
sie  werden  schlagen,  they  will  strike. 


3.  Perfect. 

ich  habe  geschlagen, 
du  hast  geschlagen, 
er  hat  geschlagen, 
wir  haben  geschlagen, 
ihr  habt  geschlagen, 
Sie  haben  geschlagen, 
sie  haben  geschlagen, 


6.  Second  Future. 

/  have  struck,  ich  werde    geschlagen  haben,  I  will  h.  sfk. 

thou  hast  ^*  du  wirst     geschlagen  haben,  <Aom  to.  ^. " 

he  has       "  er    wird      geschlagen  haben, /le  «7'Z(i/i. '< 

we  have  struck,  wir  werden  geschlagen  haben,  we  sh.  h.  " 

you  have   "  ihr  werdet  geschlagen  haben,  you  w.h.  " 

you  have   "  Sie  werden  geschlagen  haben,  you  w.  h.  " 

they  have  *'  sie  werden  geschlagen  haben,  they  w.  h.  " 


II. -THE    CONDITIONAL. 
First  Conditional.  Second  Conditional. 


ich  wiirde  schlagen,  Iw'ld  strike. 
du  wurdest  schlagen,  thou  w'st  " 
er  wiirde  schlagen,  he  would  *' 
wir  wlirden  schlagen,  we  would  " 
ihr  wiirdet  schlagen,  yow  womW* 
Sie  wUrden  schlagen,  you  would  " 
»ie  wiirden  schlagen,  they  wHd  " 


ich  wurde  geschlagen  haben,  /  w.  h.  sVck. 
du  wUrdest  geschlagen  haben,  thou  w.  h.  " 
er  wiirde  geschlagen  haben,  he  w.  h.  " 
wir  wUrden  geschlagen  haben,  we  to.  h.  " 
ihr  wiirdet  geschlagen  haben,  you  w.  h.  " 
Sie  wurden  geschlagen  haben,  you  w.  h.  ** 
sie  wUrden  geschlagen  liaben,  they  w.  h,  " 


GRAMMAR. 


513 


Note  2.  —  All  strong  verbs  form  their  imperfect  subjunctive  by  adding 
e  to  the  imperfect  indicative.  Those  which  have  in  the  imperfect  in- 
dicative a,  o,  or  i«,  modify  it  into  a,  b,  or  U. 

III.  — THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


1.  Present. 


4.  Pluperfect. 


ich  schlage,  /  may  strike. 
du  schlagest,  tliou  mayest  strike. 
er    schlage,  he  may  strike. 
wir  schlageu,  we  may  strike. 
ihr  schlaget,  you  may  strike. 
Sie  schlagen,  you  may  strike. 
sie  schlagen,  they  m^y  strike. 


ich  hatte  geschlagen,  /  had  struck. 

du  hattest  geschlagen,  thou  hadst  struck 

er    hatte  geschlagen,  he  had  struck. 

wir  hatten  geschlagen,  ?re  Jiad  struck. 

ilir  hattet  geschlagen,  you  had  struck. 

Sie  hatten  geschlagen,  you  had  struck. 

sie  hatten  geschlagen,  they  had  struck. 


2.  Imperfect. 


5.  First  Future. 


ich  schli/ge,  /  might  strike. 
du  schli/gest,  tliou  mightst  strike. 
er    schliige,  he  might  strike. 
wir  schliigen,  we  might  strike. 
ihr  schliiget,  you  might  strike. 
Sie  schliigen,  you  might  strike. 
sie  schliigen,  they  might  strike. 


ich  werde  schlagen,  /  shall  strike. 
du  werdest  schlagen,  thou  wilt  strike. 

er    werde  schlagen,  he  will  strike. 

wir  werden  schlagen,  we  shall  strike. 

ihr  werdet  schlagen,  you  will  strike. 

Sie  werden  schlagen,  you  icill  strike. 

sie  werden  schlagen,  they  tcill  strike. 


3.  Perfect. 


6.  Second  Future. 


ich  habe    geschlagen,  /  have  struck. 
du  habest  geschlagen,  thou  have 
er    habe     geschlagen,  he  have 
wir  haben  geschlagen,  we  have 
ihr  habet   geschlagen,  you  have 
Sie  haben  geschlagen,  you  have 
sie  haben  geschlagen,  they  have 


ich  werde  geschlagen  haben,  /  .s.  h.  sfck 
du  werdest  geschlagen  haben,  thou  w.  /i." 
er  werde  geschlagen  haben,  he  w.  h.  " 
wir  werden  geschlagen  haben,  we  w.  h.  " 
ihr  werdet  geschlagen  haben,  you  w.  h.  " 
Sie  werden  geschlagen  haben,  you  w.  h." 
sie  werden  geschlagen  haben,  they  to.  h. " 


IV.— THE    IMPERATIVE. 


schlage,  strike  {them). 

er  soil  schlagen,  let  him  strike. 

schlagen  wir  (pr,  lasst  uns  schlagen). 


schlaget,  or  )    ,^.;^,,  (    ). 

schlagen  Sie  J 

sie  soUen  schlagen,  let  them  strike. 


v.— THE    INFINITIVE. 


Present:  schlagen,  to  strike. 
I'.HES.  Part.  :  schlag  end,  striking. 


Past:  geschlagen  haben,  to  have  struck. 
Past  Part.  :  ge  schlag  en,  struck. 


514 


GRAMMAR. 


THE  STRONG  VERBS. -FIRST  CLASS. 


Stem  Vowel  of  both  Imperfect  and  Past  Participle:  o. 


Infinitive. 

Imperfect. 

Past  Participle. 

1. 

betriigen,*  to  deceive. 

ich  betrog,  /  deceived. 

betrogen,  deceived. 

2. 

biegeii,*  to  bend. 

ich  bog,  /  bent. 

gebogen,  bent. 

3. 

bieten,  to  offer. 

ich  bot,  /  offered. 

geboteii,  offered. 

4. 

fliegen,  to  fly. 

ich  flog,  I  flew. 

geflogen,^^<7n„ 

5. 

fliehen,  to  flee. 

ichfloh,  I  fled. 

geflohen,  fled. 

G. 

fliessen,  to  flow.* 

ich  floss,  /flowed. 

geflossen,  flowed. 

7. 

frieren,*  to  freeze. 

ich  fror,  I  froze. 

gef  roren ,  frozen. 

8. 

geiiiessen,*  to  enjoy. 

ich  genoss,  /  enjoyed. 

genossen,  enjoyed. 

9. 

giessen,  to  pour. 

ich  goss,  I  poured. 

gegosseii,  2'oured. 

10. 

kriecheii,  to  creep. 

ich  kroch,  /  crept. 

gekrochen,  crept. 

11. 

liigen,  to  lie. 

ich  log,  /  lied. 

gelogen,  lied. 

12. 

riechen,  to  smell. 

ich  roch,  /  smelt. 

gerochen,  smelt. 

13. 

schiebeu,  to  shove. 

ich  schob,  /  shoved. 

gesclioben,  shoved. 

14. 

scliiessen.  to  shoot. 

ich  schoss,  /  shot. 

gescliossen,  shot. 

15. 

schliesseii,  to  shut. 

ich  schloss,  /  shut. 

geschlossen,  shut. 

16. 

spriesseii,  to  sprout. 

ich  spross,  /  sprout. 

gesprossen,  sprout. 

17. 

verdi-iessen,  to  vex. 

ich  verdross,  /  vexed. 

verdrossen,  vexed. 

18. 

verliereri,  to  lose. 

ich  verlor,  /  tost. 

verloreii,  lost. 

19. 

wiegeu,  to  weigh. 

ich  wog,  /  weighed. 

geA^ogeii,  iveighed. 

20. 

Ziehen,*  to  draw. 

ich  zog,  /  dretv. 

gezogen,  drawn. 

21. 

fecliten,t  to  fight. 

ich  focht,  I  fought. 

gef  ochten,  fought. 

22. 

flechten.t  to  twine. 

ich  flocht,  /  twined. 

geflochteii,  twined. 

23. 

hebeii,  to  raise. 

ich  hob,  /  raised. 

gehobeii,  raided. 

24. 

quellen,  to  gush. 

ich  quoll,  I  gushed. 

gequollen,  gushed. 

25. 

saufen,  to  drink. 

ich  sofl",  /  drank. 

gesoffeii,  drunk. 

26. 

scheren,  to  shear. 

ich  sclior,  /  shore. 

geshoreii,  shorn. 

27. 

schiuelzeiijt  X  to  melt. 

ich  schmolz,  /  melted. 

geschniolzen,  melted. 

28. 

schwellen.t  t  to  swell. 

ich  schwoU,  /  swelled. 

geschwoUen,  swolle7i. 

29. 

schworen,  to  stvear. 

ich  schwor,  /  swore. 

geschworen,  sworn. 

30. 

weben,  to  weave. 

ich  wob,  /  wove. 

gewoben,  woven. 

*  Pron. :  bg-trii'-g'n,  he-trokh/,  be-tro'-g'n.  — be'-g'ii,  bofc/t, 
gg-b5'-g'ii.  — fle'-s'ii,  flos,  ge-flo'-s'n.  — fre'-r»n,  fror,  ge-fr5'-r'n. 
—  ge-ne'-s'n,  ge-nos',  ge-no'-s'n.  — tse'-'ii,  tsofc/#,  g?-tso'-g'ii. 

t  These  verbs  change  e  into  i,  in  the  second  and  third  person  singu- 
lar of  the  indicative  present  (also,  in  second  person  singular  impera- 
tive). Ex.:  Ich  fechte,  du  ftchtst,  er  ficht.  Imper.  :  fiht.  —  Ich 
.schnielze,  du  schmflzt,  etc. 

X  These  verbs,  when  used  intransi/ir/j/,  may  have  the  weak  forms. 


GRAMMAR. 


515 


THE   STRONG    VERBS. -SECOND    CLASS. 


Stem  Vowel  of  both  Imperfect  and  Past  Participle:  i  or  ie. 


1.  (i.) 


Infinitive. 

1.  beissen,  to  bite. 

2.  gleichen,  to  resemble. 

3.  gleiten,  to  glide. 

4.  greifeii,  to  seize. 

5.  leideii,*  to  suffer. 
G.  pfeifen,  to  whistle. 

7.  reisseii,  to  tear. 

8.  reiten,  to  ride. 

9.  schleicheii,  to  creep. 

10.  schleifen,'  to  whet.^ 

11.  schueideii,  to  cw^. 

12.  schreiteii,  to  stride. 
13  streiclien,*  to  stroke. 

14.  streiten,  to  strive. 

15.  weichen,2  to  yield. 


Imperfect. 

ich  biss,  /  bit. 
ich  glich,  /  resemble. 
ich  glitt,  I  glid. 
ich  griff,  /  seized. 
ich  litt,  /  suffered. 
ich  pflff,  /  whistled. 
ich  riss,  /  tore. 
ich  ritt,  /  rode. 
ich  schlich,  /  crept. 
ich  schliff,  /  whetted. 
ich  schnitt,  /  cut. 
ich  schritt,  I  strode. 
ich  strich,  /  struck. 
ich  stritt,  /  strove. 
ich  wich,  /  yielded. 


16.  bleiben,  to  remain. 

17.  gedeihen,  to  thrive. 

18.  leihen,  to  lend. 
lit.  nieideu,  to  shun. 

20.  preisen,  to  praise. 

21.  reiben,  to  rub. 

22.  scheiden,  to  part. 

23.  scheinen,  to  shine. 

24.  schreiben,  to  writo. 

25.  schreien,  to  cry. 

20.  schweigen,  to  6e  silent. 

27.  steigeii,  to  ascend. 

28.  treiben,  to  drive. 
2*1.  weiseii,  to  s^o?/;. 
30.  zeiheii,  to  accuse. 


2.  (ic.) 

ich  blieb,  /  remained. 
ich  gedieh,  /  throve. 
ich  lieh,  /  Ze?i^. 
ich  mied,  /  shunned. 
ich  pries,  I  praised. 
ich  rieb,  /  rubbed. 
ich  schied,  [parted. 
ich  schien,  /  slwne. 
ich  schrieb,  /  ivrote. 
ich  schrie,  /  o^erf. 
ich  schwieg,  /  w^as  silent. 
ich  stieg,  /  ascended. 
ich  trieb,  /  drove. 
ich  wies,  /  showed. 
icli  zieh,  /  accused. 


Past  Participle. 

gebissen,  6i^. 
geglichen,  resembled. 
geglitten,  ^Zirf. 
gegrifEen,  seized. 
gelitten,  suffered. 
gepfiffen,  ivhistled. 
gerisseii,  torn. 
geritten,  ridden. 
geschlichen,  crept. 
geschliffeu,  whetted. 
geschnitten,  cut. 
geschritten,  stridden. 
gestrichen,  struck. 
gestritten,  striven. 
gewichen,  yielded. 


geblieben,  remained. 
gediehen,  thriven. 
geliehen,  lent. 
gemieden,  shunned. 
gepriesen,  praised. 
gerieben,  rubbed. 
geschieden,  parted. 
geschieuen,  shone. 
gesclirieben,  written. 
geschrien,  cried. 
geschwiegen,  been  silent. 
gestiegen,  ascended. 
getrieben,  driven. 
gewieseii,  shown. 
geziehen,  accused.^ 


^  In  the  sense  of  to  pull  along,  schleifen  is  a  weak  verb,  and  conju- 
gated thu.s :  schleifen,  schleif*e,  gesclileif*. 

2  Weichen  =  to  soften,  is  weak  :  weichen,  weiclif c,  geweicli*. 

«  Li'-d'n,  lit,  ge-li'-t'n.  —  s/itri'-c/t'n,  s/itric/i,  gg-s/itri'-c/t'n. 

t  Heissen,  to  he  called,  is  irregular  in  the  past  participle.  Thus: 
heissen,  hiess,  geheissen. 


516 


GRAMMAR. 


THE  STRONG  VERBS.-THIRD  CLASS. 

Stem  Vowel  of  the  Imperfect:  a.    Stem  Vowel  of  the  Past 
Participle:  u  or  o. 


Infinitive. 

1.  binden,  to  bind. 

2.  dringen,  to  press. 

3.  findeii,  to  find. 

4.  klingen,  to  sound. 

5.  gelingen,  to  succeed.^ 

6.  ringen,  to  ring. 

7.  schlingen,  to  sling. 

8.  scliwinden,  to  vanish. 

9.  schwingen,  to  swing. 
10.  singen,  to  sing. 

A.  sinken,  to  sink. 

12.  springeti,  to  spring. 

13.  trinken,  to  drink. 

14.  winden,  to  wind. 

15.  zwingeii,  to  force. 

16.  befehlen,  to  command.^ 

17.  bergen,  to  hide. 

18.  brechen,  to  break. 

19.  dreschen,  to  thrash. 

20.  helfen,  to  help. 

21.  nehnieii,  to  take. 


Imperfect. 
ich  band,  I  bound. 
ich  draiig,  /  pressed. 
ich  faiid,  I  found. 
ich  klang,  /  sounded. 
es  gelang  (uiir),  /  suc'ded. 
ich  rang,  /  rang. 
ich  schlang,  /  slung. 
ich  schwand,  /  vanished. 
ich  scliwang,  /  swung. 
ich  sang,  /  sang. 
ich  sank,  /  sank. 
ich  sprang,  /  sprang. 
ich  trank,  /  drank. 
ich  wand,  /  wound. 
ich  zwang,  I  forced. 

(o.) 

ich  befahl,  /  commanded. 
ich  barg,*  /  hid. 
ich  brach,*  /  broke. 
ich  drasch,  /  thrashed. 
ich  half,  /  helped. 
ich  nahm,  /  took. 
22.  erschrecken,3  to  frighten. ich  erschrak,*  /  wasfri'd. 


23.  sprechen,  to  speak. 

24.  stehlen,  to  steal. 

25.  sterben,  to  die. 

26.  treffen,  to  hit,  to  meet. 

27.  verderben,  to  perish. 


Past  Participle. 
gebunden,  bound. 
gedrungen,  pressed, 
getundeii,  found. 
geklungen,  sounded. 
gelungen,  succeeded. 
gerungen,  rung. 
geschlungen,  siting. 
geschwunden,  vanished. 
geschwungen,  swung. 
gesungen,  sung. 
gesunken,  sunk. 
gesprungen,  sprung. 
getrunken,  drunk. 
gewunden.  v)ound. 
gez  w  ungen ,  forced. 

befohlen,  commanded. 
geborgen,  hidden. 
gebrochen,  broken. 
gedroschen,  thrashed, 
geholfen,  helped. 
genommen,  taken. 
erschrocken,  frightened. 
gesprochen, spoken, 
gestohlen,  stolen. 
gestorben,  died. 
getroffen,  7net. 
verdorben,  perished.li 


ich  sprach,*  /  spoke. 

ich  stahl,*  /  stole. 

ich  starb,*  /  died. 

ich  traf ,  /  met. 

ich  verdarb,  I  perished. 
NoTK. — The  verbs  of  the  third  class  (and  also  of  the  fourth), 
which  have  e  as  the  stem  vowel  of  the  infinitive,  take  1  in  the  second 
and  third  person  singular  of  the  indicative  present,  and  in  the  singular 
of  the  imperative.  Thus :  helfen,  to  help.  Indic.  Sing.  :  Ich  helfe,  dii 
hilfst,  er  hilft.  Imper.  :  hiU,  help  them.  Indic.  Sing.  :  Ich  esse,  /  m<  ,- 
du  isst,  er  isst,  etc. 


1  Likewise:  Misslingen,  «o/ai7;  es  misslang,  misslungen. 

2  Likewise :  Empf ehlen,  to  recommend.  —  But  f ehlen,  to  fail,  is 
weak.    Tlius  :  f  ehlen,  to  fail ,  ich  fehlte,  gefehl*. 

3  Erschrecken  (or,  simply,  schreckeii',  when  used  transitively,  is 
weak.—  ••  Pron. :  barc/t,  hr'dkh,  er-shrak,  shpv'dkh,  stal,  s/itarp. 

t  Conjugated  in  the  same  way:  gebaren,  to  hear;  schelten,  to 
scold;  gelten,  to  be  worth ;  stechen,  to  sting ;  werben,  to  sue ;  werfen, 
to  throw.    Thus  :  Ich  gebar,  ich  schalt ;  geboren,  gescholten,  etc. 


GRAMMAR. 


617 


FOURTH    CLASS. 

Stem  Vowel  of  tlie  Imperfect :  a  or  i  (or  ie).    Stem  Vowel  of 

the  Past  Participle,  same  as  in  the  Infinitive. 


1.  essen,!  to  eat. 

2.  fresseu,'  to  devour. 

3.  geben,!  to  give. 

4.  lesen,!  to  read. 

5.  messen,!  to  measure. 

6.  genesen,  to  get  well. 

7.  geschehen,!  to  happen. 

8.  sehen,i  to  see. 

9.  treten,3  to  tread. 

10.  vergessen,!  to  forget. 

11.  fangen,2  to  catch. 

12.  hangen,2  to  hang. 

13.  kommen,  to  come. 

14.  blasen,2  to  blow. 

15.  braten,2  to  roast. 

16.  fallen,2  to  fall. 

17.  halten,2  to  hold. 

18.  lassen,2  to  let. 

19.  raten,2  to  advise. 

20.  8chlafen,2  to  sleep. 

21.  hauen,  to  hew. 

22.  laufen,2  to  run. 

23.  8tossen,2  to  push. 

24.  rufen,  to  call. 


ich  ass,*  I  ate. 

ich  f rass,*  /  devoured. 

ich  gab,*  f  gave. 

ich  las,*  /  read.* 

ich  mass,*  /  measured. 

ich  genas,*  1  got  well. 

es  geschah,*  it  happened. 

ich  sah,*  /  saiv. 

ich  trat,*  /  treaded. 

ich  vergass,*  I  forgot. 

ich  flng,  /  caught. 

ich  hing,  /  hanged. 

ich  kam,*  /  came. 

ich  blies,  /  blew. 

ich  briet,  /  roasted. 

ich  fiel,  //ei^. 

ich  hielt,  /  held. 

ich  liess,  /  let. 

ich  riet,  i  advised. 

ich  schlief,  /  s^e/><. 

ich  hieft,  1  hew. 

ich  lief,  /  ran. 

ich  stiess,  1  pushed. 

ich  rief ,  /  called, 

FIFTH    CLASS. 


gegessen,  ea^en.t 
gefressen,  devoured. 
gegeben,  given. 
gelesen,  read. 
gemessen,  measured. 
genesen,  gotten  well. 
geschehen,  happened. 
gesehen,  seen. 
getreten,  treaded. 
vergessen,  forgotten. 
gefangen,  caught. 
gehangen,  hanged. 
gekommen,  come. 
geblasen,  blown. 
gebraten,  roasted. 
gef  alien, /aiZe?i. 
gehalten,  held. 
gelassen,  let. 
geraten,  advised. 
geschlafen,  slept. 
gehauen,  hewn. 
gelaufen,  rtm. 
gestossen ,  pushed. 
gerufen,  called.* 


Stem  Vow^el  of  the  Imperfect:  u.     Stem  Vowel  of  the  Past 
Participle,  same  as  in  the  Infinitive. 


1.  backen,  to  bake. 

2.  fahren,  to  drive. 

3.  graben,  to  dig. 

4.  laden,  to  load. 

5.  mahlen,  to  grind. 

6.  schaffen ,  to  create. 

7.  schlagen,  to  strike. 

8.  tragen,  to  jarry. 

9.  wachsen,  to  grow. 
10.  waschen,  to  wash. 


ich  buk,  /  baked. 
ich  fuhr,  /  drove. 
ich  grub,  /  digged. 
ich  lud,  /  loaded. 
ich  mahtte,  I  ground. 
ich  schuf ,  /  created. 
ich  schlug,  /  struck. 
ich  trug,  I  carried. 
ich  wuchs,  /  grew. 
ich  wusch,  /  washed. 


gebacken,  baked. 
gefahren,  driven. 
gegraben,  digged. 
geladen,  laden. 
gemalilen,  grinded. 
geschnffen,  created. 
geschlagen,  struck. 
getragen,  carried. 
ge wachsen,  grown. 
gewaschen,  u-ashed. 


1  See  Note,  opposite  page.—  2  See  page  511.  —  3  Treten  makes  du 
tri**st,ertri**.—  4  The  a  of  all  these  imperfects  is  long  vii). 

•^-  Bitten,  to  beg,  and  liegen,  to  lie,  also  make :  ich  bat,  ich  lag, 
/  begged,  I  lay;  gebeten,  gelegen,  begged,  laid. —  Do  not  confound 
with  beten,  to  pray;  and  legen,  to  lay,  which  are  weak.  Thus:  ich 
betete,  ich  legte ;  gebetet,  gelegt.  —  f  Instead  of  geessen. 


518 


GRAMMAR. 


THE    REFLEXIVE   VERBS. 

MODEL  VERB :  Sich  f  reuen,*  to  rejoice. 
Pres.  Part.  :   sich  freuend,  rejoicing.     Past  Part.  :   gefreut. 
INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Present, 
ich  freue    mich,  I  rejoice.^ 
du   freust  dicJi,  thou  rejoicest.f 
er    freut    sieJi,  he  rejoices. f 
wir  frenen  tins,  we  rejoice.^ 
ihr  freut     eiicJi,  you  rejoice.^ 
Sie  freuen  sich,  you  rejoice.^ 
sie  freuen  sich,  they  rejoice.^ 

IMPERFECT. 

ich  freute     mich,  I  rejoiced. 

du   freutest  dich,  thou  didst  rejoice. 

er    freute     sich,  he  rejoiced. 

wir  freiiten  uns,  we  rejoiced. 

ibr  freutet    euch,  you  rejoiced. 

Sie  f  reuten  sich,  you  rejoiced. 

sie  freuten  sich,  they  rejoiced. 


Present, 
ich  freue     mich,  I  (may)  rejoice. 
du  freuest  dich,  thou  (mayest)  rejoice. 
er    freue     sich,  he  (may)  rejoice. 
wir  freuen  uns,  we  (may)  rejoice. 
ihr  f reuet   euch,  you  (may)  rejoice. 
Sie  freuen  sich,  you  (may)  rejoice. 
sie  freuen  sich,  they  (may)  rejoice, 

IMPERFECT. 

ich  freute  mich,  I  might  rejoice. 
du   freutest  dich,  thou  mightest  rejoice, 

er    freute  sich,  he  might  rejoice. 

wir  freuten  uns,  we  might  rejoice. 

ihr  freutet  euch,  you  might  rejoice. 

Sie  freuten  sich,  you  might  rejoice. 

sie  freuten  sich,  they  might  rejoice. 


THE     COMPOUND     TENSES    ARE: 


1.  Perfect  Indicative, 
ich  habe  mich  gefreut,  /  have  refd. 
du  hast  dich  gefreut,  thoic  hast  " 
er  hat  sicJi  gefreut,  he  has  " 
wir  haben  uns  gefreut,  we  have  " 
ihr  habt  euch  gefreut,  you  have  " 
Sie  haben  sich  gefreut,  you  have  " 
sie  haben  sic/t    gefreut,  they  have*' 

2.  Pluperf.  :  ich  hatte  mich  gefreut, 

etc.,  I  had  rejoiced,  etc. 

3.  First  Fut.:  ich  werde  mich  freuen, 

etc.,  /  shall  rejoice,  etc. 

4.  Sec.  Fut.:  icli  werde  mich  gefreut 

haben,  etc.,  I  sh.  have  rej'd,  etc. 


1.  Perfect  Subjunctive, 
ich  habe     mich  gefreut,  1  have  rej'd. 
du  haftest  dich  gefreut,  thou  hast 
er    ha,be     sich    gefreut,  he  has 
wir  haben  uns     gefreut,  ive  have 
ihr  habe*   euch  gefreut,  you  have 
Sie  haben  sich    gefreut,  you  have 
sie  haben  sich    gefreut,  they  have 

ich  hatte  mich  gefreut,  /  have  rejoiced. 

ich  werde  mich  freuen,  /  shall  rejoice. 

ich  werde  mich  gefreut  haben,  /  sh.  have 
rejoiced,  etc. 


1.  First  Conditional  :  ich  wiirde  mich  freuen,  etc.,  /  would  rejoice,  etc. 

2.  Second  Conditional  :  ich  wiirde  mich  gefreut  haben,  I  would  have  rejoiced. 

Note  1.  —  There  are  very  few  strictly  reflexive  verbs  in  German, 
but  all  transitive  verbs  may  be  used  reflexively.  Thus :  lieben,  to 
love;  sich  lieben,  to  love  one's  self. 


-  Pron  :  ZTc/i  fro-i'-'n,  ge-fro-It'. 

t  Pron.  :  fro-i'-e,  fro-i'-'st,  fro^t',  fro-r-'n. 


GRAMMAR.  519 

Note  2.  —  A  few  reflexive  verbs  take  their  pronoun  in  the  dative 
The  most  important  are : 

sich  ausbitten,  to  request.  sich  schmeicheln,  to  flatter  one's  self. 

sicli  einbilden,  to  imagine.  sich  verschaffen,  to  procure. 

sich  die  Freiheit  nehmen,  to  take  sich  vorstellen,  to  imagine. 

the  liberty.  sich  wehe  thun,  to  hurt  one's  self. 

These  verbs  are  really  conjugated  like  those  which  take  theii 
reflexive  pronoun  in  the  accusative,  the  only  difference  in  the 
form  of  the  pronouns  being  in  the  1st  and  2d  person  singular 
{mir  and  dir,  instead  of  mich  and  dich).  Ex, :  ich  schmeichle 
^nir,  du  schmeichelst  dir  ;  but,  er  schmeichelt  sich,  etc. 

USES    OF    HABEN   AND    SEIN. 

All  transitive  verbs ,  all  refleocive  verbs,  and  most  itw- 
personal  verbs  form  their  perfect  and  pluperfect  with 
habefi,     Ex. : 

Infinitive.  Perfect;  Pluperfect. 

1.  Fragen,  to  ask.    ich  habe  gefragt.  ich  hatte  gefragt. 

2.  Sich  freuen,        ich  habe  mich  gefreut.  ich  hatte  mich  gef 

3.  Regnen,  to  rain,  es  hat  geregnet.  es  hatte  geregnet. 

Intransitive  verbs  which  express  a  change  of  condition, 
or  a  change  of  place  from  one  point  to  the  other,  form  their 
perfect  and  pluperfect  with  sein,  Ex.:  Perfect:  Ich  bin 
gekommen,  /  have  come;  du  bist  gekommen,  thou  hast  come, 
etc.  Pluperfect:  Ich  war  gekommen,  I  had  come;  etc.  The 
most  important  are: 

abfallen,  to  decay.  gehen,  to  go 

abreisen,  to  leave.  geschehen,  to  happen. 

aiikomnien,  to  arrive.  hinauf gehen,  to  go  up. 

begegnen,  to  meet.  hinuntergehen,  to  go  down 

bleiben,  to  remain.  kommen,  to  come. 

elnschlafen,  to  fall  asleep.  steigen,  to  mount. 

entfliehen,  to^ee.  sterben,  ^o  rfie. 

erscheinen,  to  appear.  verschwinden,  to  disappear. 

fallen,  to  fall.  zuriickkehi-en,  to  return. 

Some  intransitive  verbs  of  motion  take  either  haben 
or  sein  in  the  perfect  and  pluperfect.  Such  are:  eilen,  to 
hurry,  laufen,  to  run,  reiten,  to  ride,  etc.  They  take  haben  when 
the  simple  action  is  mentioned  without  reference  to  the  point  to 
or  from  which  the  action  takes  place.  They  take  sein  in  the 
opposite  case.  Thus  :  He  has  ridden  fo-dnj/  =  EY  hat  heute  gerit- 
ten.     But :  He  has  ridden  to  Berlins  Er  ist  nach  Berlin  geritten. 


520  GRAMMAR. 


THE    IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

The  verbs  which  do  not  strictly  follow  the  rules  of  conju. 
gation,  of  either  the  weak  or  the  stem  conjugation,  are  the 
following : 

1.  The  auxiliaries f  which  have  already  been  conjugate(J 
(pages  498  to  506). 

2.  Bringen,  to  bring ;  denTcen,  to  think;  wissen^  to  know.'*' 

3.  GeheUf  to  go ;  stehen,  to  stand ;  thun,  to  do. 

I. -THE    AUXILIARIES. 

The  auxiliaries  have  already  been  conjugated  (page  498). 
Note  the  following  expressions : 
He  ought  to  have  done  it  =  Er  hatte  es  thun  sollen  (lit. :  he  had 

it  to-do  ought). 
He  could  have  done  z7  =  Er  hatte  es  thun  konnen  [lit. :  he  had 
it  to-do  been-able  (strictly  :  be-ah\e.    See  page  176,  note  1)]. 

ll.—BRINGEN,    DENKEN.    AND     WISSEN.* 
INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present.  1.  Present. 

1.  ich  bringe,  etc.,  /  bring,  etc.*  1.  ich  bringe,  etc.,  /  bring,  etc. 

2.  ich  denke,  etc.,  I  think,  etc.*  2.  ich  denke,  etc.,  I  think,  etc. 

3.  ich  weiss,  etc.,  /  know,  etc.^  3.   ich  wisse,  etc.,  /  know,  etc. 

2.  Imperfect.  2.  Imperfect. 

1.  ich  brachte,  etc.,  /  brought,  etc.  1.  ich  brachte,  etc.,  /  brought,  etc. 

2.  ich  dachte,  etc.,  /  thought,  etc.  2.   ich  dachte,  etc.,  /  thought,  etc. 

3.  ich  wusste,  etc.,  /  knew,  etc.  3.  ich  wiisste,  etc.,  /  knew,  etc. 

The  compound  tenses  are  conjugated  like  those  of  any 
other  verbs.     Thus : 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Perfect:  Ich  habe  gebracht,  ich  habe  gedacht,  ich  habe 
gewusst. 


1  Ich  bringe,  du  bringst,  er  bringt,  wir  bringen,  etc. 

2  Ich  denke,  du  denkst,  er  denkt,  wir  denken,  etc. 

8  Ich  weiss,  du  weisst,  er  weiss,  wir  wissen,  ihr  wisst,  Sie  wissen,  etc. 

*  When  to  know  can  be  rendered  at  all  by  to  he  acquainted  with,  it  is 
in  German,  kennen.  I  know  this  gentlema)i  =  Ich  kenne  {not :  icli  icciss 
diesen  Herrn.  —  Elsewhere,  to  know  =  wissen. 


GRAMMAR. 


521 


Pluperfect  :  Ich  hatte  gebracht,  ich  hatte  gedacht,  ich  hatte 
gewusst.  —  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  :  Ich  hatte  gebracht,  etc. 

First  Future  :  Ich  werde  bringen,  denken,  or  wissen. 

Second  Future  :  Ich  werde  gebracht  haben,  ich  werde  ge- 
dacht haben,  ich  werde  gewusst  haben. 

CONDITIONAL    MOOD. 

First  Conditional:  Ich  wiirde  bringen,  ich  wiirde  denken, 
ich  wiirde  wissen. 

Second  Conditional  :  Ich  wiirde  gebracht  haben,  ich  wiirde 
gedacht  haben,  ich  wiirde  gewusst  haben. 

lll.-GEHEN.    STEHEN,    AND     THUN. 


INDICATIVE. 

1.  Present. 

1.  ich  gehe,  etc.,  I  am  going,  etc. 

2.  ich  stehe,  etc.,  I  am  standing,  etc. 

3.  ich  thue,  etc.,  I  am  doing,  etc. 

2.  Imperfect. 

1.  ich  ging,  etc.,  I  went,  etc. 

2.  ich  stand,  etc.,  /  stood,  etc. 

3.  ich  that,  etc.,  /  did,  etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  Present. 

ich  gehe,  etc.,  I  {may)  go,  etc. 
ich  stelie,  etc.,  I  {may)  stand,  etc. 
ich  thue,  etc.,  I  {may)  do,  etc. 

2.  Imperfect. 

ich  ginge,  etc.,  /  {might)  go,  etc. 
ich  stande,  etc.,  I  {might)  stand,  etc. 
ich  thate,  etc.,  I  {might)  do,  etc. 


The  past  pa^'ticiple,  of  these  three  verbs  are:  gegangen, 
gestanden,  gethan. 

The  compound  tenses  are  conjugated  like  those  of  all  other 
verbs.    Thus : 


Perfect  Indicative  : 

Pluperfect  Indic.  :— 

Pluperfect  Subj.  :  — 
First  Future  :  — 

Second  Future  :  — 

First  Conditional  :  - 

Second  Conditional: 


ich  bin  gegangen,  I  have  gone  (see  page  519). 
ich  habe  gestanden,  /  have  stood. 
ich  habe  gethan,  /  have  done. 

{ich  war    gegangen,  I  had  gone  (see  page  519). 
ich  hatte  gestaiuien,  /  had  stood. 
ich  hatte  gethan,  /  had  done. 
I  ich  ware  gegangen,  /  had  gone  (see  page  519). 
1  ich  hatte  gestanden,  ich  hatte  gethan. 
ich  werde  gehen,  stehen,  or  than, 
ich  werde  gegangen  sein,  I  shall  have  gone. 
ich  werde  gestanden  haben,  /  shall  have  stood. 
ich  werde  gethan  haben,  /  shall  have  done. 
■  ich  wiirde  gehen,  stehen,  or  thun. 
f  ich  wiirde  gegangen  sein,  /  would  have  gone. 
I  ich  wiirde  gestanden  haben,  /  woicld  have  stood. 
{  ich  wiirde  gethan  haben,  /  wouhl  have  done. 


522 


GRAMMAR. 


SEPARABLE    VERBS. 

The  prefix  of  separable  verbs  (see  page  234)  is  separated 
from  the  stem  in  the  present  and  innperfect  indicative  and 
in  the  subjunctive j  in  principal  sentences^  and  also  in 
the  imperative.  Thus,  ankoin7nen,  to  arrive:  I  arrive  =  iGh. 
koimne  an;  I  arrived  =  ich  Team  an;  I  might  arrive  =  ich. 
kmne  an;  Arrive  in  time  =  komme  zur  rechten  Zeit  an. 

Note.  —  Notice,  however,  that  in  dependent  clauses  this  prefix 
cannot  be  separated  from  the  stem.    Thus  :  als  er  ankam,  etc. 

*'Ge"  and  *^siu**  are  placed  between  the  prefix  and  the  stem. 
Thus,  Past  Part.  :  angrekommen.     Infin.  (with  tsw) :  an«ri*kommen. 

CONJUGATION    OP    A    SEPARABLE    VERB. 
MODEL:   Ankomnien^  to  arrive, 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

ich  komme     an,i  I  {may)  arrive. 


INDICATIVE. 
Present, 
ich  komme    an,i  /  arrive. 
du  kommst  an,  thou  arrivest. 
er    kommt     an,  he  arrives.  ■ 
wii-  konimen  an,  toe  arrive. 
ilir  konnut    an,  you  arrive. 
Sie  kommen  an,  you  ar-rive. 
sie  kommen  an,  they  arrive. 

Imperfect, 
ich  kam  an, 2  etc.,  1  arrived. 

Perfect, 
ich  bin  angekommen,  I  have  arrived. 

Pluperfect, 
ich  war  angekommen,  I  had  arrived. 

First  Future, 
ich  werde  ankommen,  /  shall  arrive. 

Second  Future, 
ich  werde  angekommen  sein,  I  sh.  h.  a.    ich  werde  angekommen  sein,  I  shall  h.  a. 

First  Conditional.  IMPERATIVE, 

ich  wiirde  ankommen,  /  ahould  arrive,     komme  an,  kommt  an,  etc. 

Second  Conditional.  Participles. 

ich  wUrde  angekommen  sein,  I  sh.  h.  a.    ankommend,  angekommen. 


dii   kommest  an,  thou  (jnayest)  arrive. 
er    komme     an,  he  {may)  arrive. 
wir  kommen  an,  ?re  {may)  arrive. 
ihr  kommet   an,  you  {may)  arrive. 
Sie  kommen  an,  you  {may)  arrive. 
sie  kommen  an,  they  {may)  arrive. 

Imperfect, 
ich  kame  an,3  etc.,  I  arrived. 

Perfect, 
ich  sei  angekommen,  /  have  arrived. 

Pluperfect, 
ich  ware  angekommen,  I  had  arrived. 

First  Future, 
ich  werde  ankommen,  I  shall  arrive. 

Second  Future. 


1  In  dependent  clauses,  ich ankotnme,  —  2  jn  dependent 

clauses,  ich ankam,  —  3  In  dependent  el.,  ich ankdme* 


GRAMMAR.  523 

1.  Prefixes  with  which  Separable  Verbs  are  Formed. 

The  following  prefixes  are  those  which  occur  most  frequently 
with  separable  verbs :  ab,  an,  aiif ,  aus,  bei,  dar,  ein,  fort, 
her,  bin,  mit,  nach,  vor,  weg",  zu,  zuriick.* 

2.  Principal  Parts  of  some  Separable  Compound  Verbs. 

Prefix.       Infinitive.  Imperfect.  Past  Participle. 

ab,  —    abgehen,  to  leave;  ich  ging  ab,  /  left;  abgegangen,  left. 

an,—   anf angen,  to  begin ;  ich  &ng  an,  I  began;        angefangen,  begin. 

auf,  —  aufhoren,  to  cease;  ich  horte  auf ,  /  ceased ;  aufgehort,  ceased. 

aus,  —  ausgehen,  to  go  out;  ich  ging  aus,  I  got  out ;  ausgegangen,  got  out. 

bei,  —  beistehen,  to  assist;  ich  stand  bei,  I  assisted ;  beigestanden,  assisted. 

dar,  —  darstellen,  to  represent;  ich  stellte  dar,  /  repre'd;  dargestellt,  represented. 
ein,  —  einladen,  io  invite;  ich  lud  ein,  /  invited;      eingeladen,  invited. 

fort,  — fortfahren,  to  continue;  ich  fuhr  fort,  /  cont'd;  fortgefahren,  continued. 
her, —  herkommen,  to  come  ^ere;  ich  kam  her,  I  came  ^'e ;  hergekommen,  come  k'e. 
hin,  —  hingehen,  to  go  there ;  ich  ging  hin,  /  went  th. ;  hingegangen,  gone  there. 
mit,  —  mitteilen,tocommunic'te;ich.  teilte  mit,  IcomHed;  mitgeteilt,  communi' ted. 
nac/i— nachfolgen,  to  follow;  ich  folgte  nach,  IfoVd;  nachgefolgt,/o/Zoi^erf. 
vor,—  vorstellen,  to  introduce;  ich  stellte  vor,  rinfro'd;  vorgestellt,  introduced, 
tveff,— yfegnelimen,to  take  away;  ich  nahm  weg,  I  took  a.  /  weggenommen,  taken  a. 
zu, —    zumachcn,  to  shut;  ich  machte  zu, /sAm^;     zugemacht,  s/im^. 

zuruck,  zurUckkommen,  toreVn-,  ich  kam  zuriick,  Iret'd;  zuriickgekommen,  refd. 

For  inseparable  verbs  (verbs  with  one  of  the  prefixes  be, 
emp,  entf  er,  ge,  ver,  zer,  and  wider),  see  page  236. 

Notice  that  separable  verbs  have  the  main  accent  on  the 
prefix,  while  inseparable  verbs  take  it  on  the  stem.    Thus, 
Separable:  aufstehen^  to  get  up;  pron.:  ^-C)bf-s7ita'-'n. 
Inseparable:  bestehen,  to  endure;  pron.:  b6-sMa^-'n. 

Note.  —  Some  verbs,  compounded  with  the  prefixes  durch,  iiber, 
iinter,  um,  and  w^ieder,  are  separable,  while  others  are  inseparable. 
Thus  :  umkommen,  to  perish,  separable ;  but,  umgeben,  to  surround, 
inseparable.  But  many  others  are  both  separable  and  inseparable 
according  to  meaning.  When  used  in  their  ordinary  sense,  they  are 
separable;  when  used  figuratively,  they  are  inseparable.    Ex.: 

Separable.  Inseparable. 

iibersetzen,  to  put  over.f  iibersetzen,  to  translate.f 

umgehen,  to  go  out  of  one's  way.f  umgehen,  to  avoid.f 

wiederholen,  to  bring  back  again.if  wiederholen,  to  repeat.-f 


*  There  are  also  many  compound  prefixes  with  which  verbs  may 
be  compounded.  Most  of  them  are  formed  with  hin  and  her,  as 
hinab,  herauf ,  etc.  —  f  Pron.:  ii'-b'r-zSt'-s'n,  and  ii -b'r-zet'-s'n; 
dom'-ga'-'n,  and  dom-ga'-'u;  ve'-d'r-ho'-l'n,  and  ve'-d'r-ho'-l'n. 


524  GRAMMAR. 

THE    INFINITIVE. 

Par.  I. -THE    INFINITIVE    WITHOUT    ZV. 

The  infinitive  is  generally  preceded  by  zu.  It  is  used  wiih- 
out  zu,  however : 

(1)  When  it  depends  on  one  of  the  modal  auxiliaries,  kon- 
nen,  wollen,  milssen,  Jtiogenf  sollenf  and  dUrfen,    Ex. : 

You  can  go  —  Sie  kunnen  gehen  (no  zu). 

(2)  When  it  depends  on  either  of  the  seven  following  verbs: 
fiihlen,  heissen,  helfen,  horen,  lassen,  lernen,  sehen, 
Ex.: 

I  hear  him  sing=  Ich  hore  ihn  singen  (no  zu). 

(3)  After  hleihen,  gehen,  fahren,  reiten,  in  certain  idio- 
matic expressions.     Thus : 

He  keeps  his  seat  =  Er  bleibt  sitzen. 

He  is  taking  a  walk  =  Er  geht  spazieren. 

He  is  taking  a  ride  =  Er  reitet  spazieren. 

Par.  2. -THE    INFINITIVE    WITH    ZU. 

The  infinitive  is  preceded  by  zu : 

(1)  When  it  depends  on  another  verb;  excepting,  how- 
ever, the  modal  auxiliaries  or  the  seven  verbs,  fUhlen,  heissen, 
helfen,  horen,  lassen,  lernen,  sehen.    See  above.     Ex. : 

I  want  to  buy  a  house  =  lch.  wiinsche  ein  Haus  zu  kaufen. 
He  stopped  working  =  ^1  horte  aufzu  arbeiten. 

(2)  When  it  depends  on  an  adjective.     Thus : 

I  am  ready  to  go  out  with  you  =  Ich  bin  bereit,  mit  Ihnen  aus«i*- 
gehen. 

(3)  When  it  depends  on  a  noun.     Ex. : 

The  art  of  writing  (German :  to  write)  is  very  useful  =  Die  Kunst 
zu  schreiben  ist  sehr  niitzlich. 

(4)  When  it  depends  on  one  of  the  prepositions  :  um,  ohne, 
anstatt.    Thus : 

He  remains  instead  of  goings  Er  bleibt,  anstatt  zu  gehen. 
He  praises  the  book  without  having  read  i<  =  Er  lobt  das  Buch, 
ohne  es  gelesen  zu  haben. 


GRAMMAR.  525 

rar.  5. —THE    INFINITIVE    WITH    UM  ZU. 

1.  Whenever  to  in  English  really  means  in  order  to,  it  is  ren- 
dered by  um  zUf  in  German. 

He  has  gone  to  town  to  buy  a  book=E>r  ist  nach  der  Stadt  ge- 
gangen,  um  ein  Buch  zu  kaufen. 

2.  Um  zu  is  also  used  before  any  infinitive  depending  on 
an  adjective  preceded  by  zu  {too^  or  followed  by  genug,     Ex. : 

Das  Kind  ist  zujung,  um  allein  in  den  Wald  zu  gehen, 
Sie  sind  alt  genug,  um  es  besser  zu  wissen. 

Par.  4. -PECULIAR    USES    OF    THE    INFINITIVE. 

In  English,  an  infinitive  following  the  verb  to  be  is  generally 
in  the  passive  voice.    Ex. : 

His  death  is  to  be  feared. 

In  German,  on  the  contrary,  an  infinitive  following  sein,  is 
in  the  active  voice.     Thus  : 

Sein  Tod  ist  zu  furchten  (lit. :  is  to  fear). 

3.  The  English  infinitive,  following  how,  what,  and  where,  is 
to  be  rendered  in  German  by  the  infinitive  with  sollen,  k'on- 
nen,  or  miissen.    Thus : 

I  do  not  know  what  to  do=  Ich  weiss  nicht  was  ich  thun  soil. 

4.  An  infinitive  dependent  on  a  verb  in  a  compound  tense 
(generally),  precedes  the  past  participle.     Thus : 

It  has  begun  to  ram  =  Es  hat  za  regnen  angefangen. 

If  the  infinitive,  however,  is  modified  by  some  other  word  (as : 
to  rain  heavily)  it  is  placed  last.     Thus  : 

It  has  begun  to  rain  very  heavily  =F,s  hat  angefangen,  sehr 
he/tig  zu  regnen. 

Par.  5. -THE    INFINITIVE    USED    AS    A    NOUN. 

Any  infinitive  in  German  may  be  used  as  a  noun.    Thus : 
Eating  and  drinJcing  =  Das  Essen  und  das  Trinken, 

Note  1, — Nouns  formed  of  an  infinitive  are  always  neuter,  and 
declined  like  other  neuter  nouns. 


526  GRAMMAR. 

Note  2.  —  Such  nouns  are  always  written  with  a  capital,  as  all  other  ' 
nouns.     Ex. :  Das  Essen, 

Note  3.  — The  infinitive  used  as  a  noun  corresponds  almost  always 
to  an  English  present  participle  (or  verbal  noun,  i.  e.,  a  noun  ending 
in  ing).  Ex. :  The  reading  of  such  a  book  is  not  useful  =  'DEiS  Lesen 
nines  solchen  Buches  ist  nutzlich. 

Par.  6. -THE  INFINITIVE  USED  FOR  A  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 
The  infinitive  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  and  of  the  five  verbs, 
heissen,  helfen,  horen,  sehen,  and  lassen  is  used  instead 
of  the  past  participle,  when  preceded  by  another  verb  in  the 
infinitive.     Thus : 

1.  I  have  not  been  able  to  do  ^^=:  Ich  habe  es  nicht  thun  kon- 
nen  [lit. :  /  have  it  not  to-do  to-be-able  (and  not  gekonnt,  been 
able),  because  another  infinitive  (thun)  is  present]. 

2.  I  let  the  book  lie  on  the  table  =lch  habe  das  Buch  auf  dem 
Tish  liegen  lassen  [and  not :  gelassen,  because  another  in- 
finitive (liegen)  is  present]. 

N.  B.  —  Should  the  construction  just  referred  to  (the  use  of 
the  infinitive  of  one  of  the  above  verbs,  instead  of  the  past 
participle)  occur  in  a  dependent  clause,  the  auxiliary,  instead 
of  coming  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  according  to  the  general 
rule,  is  placed  just  before  the  two  infinitives.     Ex. : 

I  am  sorry  you  did  not  do  i^  =  Es  thut  mir  leid,  dass  ich  es  nicht 
gethan  habe.  Auxiliary  at  the  end,  according  to  the  general  rule. 
But: 

/  assure  you  I  could  not  have  done  it  =  Ich  versichere  Sie,  dass 
ich  es  nicht  habe  thun  konnen.  Habe  out  of  its  normal  place, 
because  of  the  presence  of  the  peculiar  construction,  thun  konnen. 

Likewise  :  I  did  not  know  I  had  let  the  book  lie  on  the  table  =  Ich 
wusste  nicht  dass  ich  das  Buch  auf  dem  Tisch  hatte  liegen 
lassen  (and  not:  liegen  lassen  hatte). 

Par.  7. -NON-USE    OF    THE    INFINITIVE    IN    GERMAN. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  English  infinitive  preceded  by  a  noun 
or  pronoun  (as :  I  wished  him  to  come  and  see  me;  I  advised 
my  father  not  to  yield)  is  not  rendered  by  the  infinitive  at  all, 
in  German,  but  by  dass  and  the  indicative  or  subjunctive. 
Thus :  I  wished  him  to  come  and  see  me=  Ich  wiinschte,  dass 
er  mich  besuchte. 


GRAMMAR.  527 

USE    OF    THE    PARTICIPLES. 

1.  The  German  past  and  present  participles  may  be 

used  with  a  noun,  Uke  adjectives,  as  in  EngUsh.    Tlius: 
Eine  Uebende  Mutter  =  ^  loving  mother. 
Der  erwachsene  Sohn  =  The  grown-up  son. 
So7ne  participles  are  employed  like  genuine  adjectives, 
and  therefore  admit  also  of  predicate  use,  as  reizend,  charm- 
ing; hinreissend,  overpowering ;  gelelirt,  learned;  bekannt, 
known ;  beriihint,  renowned ;  geschickt,  clever,  etc.     Ex. : 
It  is  charming  —  Es  ist  reizend. 

Note  1.— The  past  participle  of  verbs  of  motion  which  de- 
pend on  kommen  is  used  instead  of  their  present  participle.     Thus : 
He  came  running  =YiY  kam  gelaufen  (lit. :  he  came  run). 
Note  2. — The  past  participle,  by  an  elliptical  construction,  is 
sometimes  used  instead  of  an  imperative.    Thus : 

Stillgestanden  !  =  Stand  still .'  (lit. :  stood-still). 
Aufgepasst !  =  Attention ! 

2.  Both  past   and  present  participles  may  be   used 
appositively  as  in  English.    Thus : 

Sie  sass  am  Fenster,  in  einem  Buch  lesend  =  She  sat  at  the 

windoiv  reading  a  book. 
Vom  Speer  getroffen,  sank  er  nieder  =  Struck  by  the  spear,  he 

sank  to  the  earth. 
Notice,  however,   that  the   English   participle  is  most  fre- 
quently rendered  in  German  by   a  relative   clause,   or  by  a 
clause  beginning  with  conjunctions,  like  indemf  wdhrend, 
da,  als,  nachdem,  obwohl,  etc. 
A   man,  having  such  opinions  =Ein  Mann,  welcher  solche 

Meinungen  hat. 
Not  finding  them,   I  went  away  =  Da  ich   sie   nicht  fand, 

ging  ich  fort. 
The    tables    being   removed  =  Nachdem   die   Tische   entfernt 

war  en. 
Note. — Some  modern  German  writers,  in  translating  these  English 
constructions,  sometimes  use  nn  aV)solute  participle,  as  in  a  phrase  like 
Dies  gesagt,  setzte  er  sicli=  This  said,  he  sat.     But  this,  however, 
is  to  be  avoided. 


528 


GRAMMAR. 


THE    ADVERB. 


I.  — ORIGINAL    ADVERBS. 


1.  Most  important  adverbs  of  place : 


wo?  where? 
wohin?  whither  f 
woher?  whence? 
hier,  here. 
aussen,  outside. 
innen,  within. 


oben,  upstairs. 

unten,  doum-stairs. 

vorn,  before,  iyifwnt. 

rechts,  on  the  right,  to  the  right. 

links,  on  the  left,  to  the  left. 

weit.  fern,  far,  far  off. 


2.  Most  important  adverbs  of  time: 


wann?  when? 

sonst,  ehedem,  formerly. 

bald,  soon. 

einst,  once. 

heute,  to-day. 

gestern,  yesterday. 


vorgestern,  the  day  before  yesterday. 
morgen,  to-morrow. 
iibermorgen,  the  day  after  to-inorrow. 
endlich,  at  last,  at  length. 
damals,  then,  at  that  time. 
inimer,  allezeit,  always. 


3.  Most  important  adverbs  of  modality: 


wie?  how? 
beinahe,  fast,  almost. 
nur,  bloss,  allein,  only. 
wenigstens,  at  least. 
anders,  otherwise. 
sehr,  recht,  very,  or  much. 
ziemlich,  tolerably. 
ungefahr,  about. 
sonst,  else. 
so,  ebenso,  so,  as. 
ganz,  quite. 
ganzlich,  wholly. 
besonders,  especially. 


ja,  ja  doch,  yes. 
allerdings,  by  all  means. 
gewiss,  certainly. 
wirklich,  really. 
gern,  ivillingly. 
nein,  no. 

keineswegs,  by  no  means. 
warum  ?  why  ? 
weshalb  ?  wherefore  f 
also,  so,  therefore. 
ausserdem,  besides. 
demnach,  accordingly. 
kaum,  scarcely. 


COMPARISON. 


Few  adverbs  are  capable  of  comparison.    The  principal  are 
hald,  soon;  gern,  willingly ;  oft,  often;  e^c     Thus: 


GRAMMAR.  629 

bald,  soon.  friiher,  or  eher,  sooner,  baldigst,  the  soonest 

gem,  willingly,  lieber,  rather.  am  liebsten,  best. 

oft,  often.  ofter,  oftener.  am  oftesten,  oftenest. 

viel,  much.  mehr,  more.  am  meisten,  most. 

II.  — ADJECTIVES    USED    AS    ADVERBS. 

Almost  all  adjectives  may  be  used  as  adverbs.  In  this  case 
the  German  adjectives  are  undeclined,  so  that  the  adverb  is 
in  fact  just  like  the  predicate  adjective  (see  page  476). 

Charles  is  industrious  =  1^2^x1  ist  fleissig. 

Charles  works  industriously  =  Karl  arbeitet  fleissig, 

COMPARISON. 

Adjectives  are  also  used  as  adverbs  in  the  comparative  degree. 
Ex. :  Charles  works  more  industriously  than  Henry  =  Karl  arbeitet 
fleissiger  als  Heinrich. 

The  Supei'lative  Degree,  —  Adverbs  of  themselves  have 
no  superlative  forms,  but  the  superlative  of  all  adverbs  is  or 
can  be  expressed  through  adjectives  in  one  of  three  ways : 

(1)  By  the  simple  superlative  of  the  adjective.  Ex.:  freund- 
liclist,  most  friendly.  Not  many  adjectives,  however,  can  be  so 
used. 

(2)  By  adding  am  {an  dem)  to  the  superlative  in  the  dative 
case.    Thus:   am  schdnsten  =  most  beautifully. 

Red  roses  smell  best  =  Rote  Rosen  riechen  am  hesten. 

(3)  When  there  is  no  comparison,  but  merely  a  high  degree  is 
to  be  expressed,  aufs,  added  to  the  accusative  of  the  adjective, 
is  used.  Thus  :  aufs  drm^lichste  —  most  poorly  (poorly  in  the 
highest  degree).     Ex. : 

The  boy  was  clad  Tnost  poorly  =  Der  Knabe  war  aufs  arinlichste 
gekleidet. 
Note  1. — Observe  that  the  superlative  adverbial  form  with  am  is 

used  in  the  predicate,  instead  of  the  undeclined  form.     Thus: 

Red  roses  are  beautiful  =  Die  roten  Rosen  sind  schoti  {schbn,  the  predi- 
cate is  undeclined,  according  to  rule,  page  476).     But  in  tlie  superl,: 

Red  roses  are  most  beautiful=  Die  roten  Rosen  sind  am  schbnsten  (or, 
die  schbnsten;  but  never  simply,  schbnst). 
Note  2.  —  A  few  superlative  adverbs  are  formed  in  ens.   Thus:  bes- 

tens,  in  the  best  way ;  hochstens,  in  the  highest  way ;  meistens,  mostly. 


530  GRAMMAR. 

THE    PREPOSITION. 

Lists  of  the  German  prepositions,  according  to  the  different 
cases  they  govern,  have  ah'eady  been  given  on  page  268. 

I.  —  CONTRACTION     OF     PREPOSITIONS     WITH     THE 

ARTICLE. 

Some  German  prepositions  may  be  contracted  with  the  dative 
or  accusative  of  the  definite  article,  so  as  to  form  a  single  word 
with  it.     Thus  : 

am, /or  an  dem.  ans, /or  an  das. 

im,  for  in  dem,  aufs,  for  auf  das. 

vom, /or  von  dem.  durchs, /or  durch  das. 

zum, /or  zu  dem.  furs, /or  fur  das. 

zur,  for  zu  der.  hinters,  for  hinter  das. 

beim, /or  bei  dem.  ins, /or  in  das. 

hinterm,  for  hinter  dem.  ubers,  for  iiber  das. 

iibern, /or  iiber  den.  urns,  for  um  das. 

ausserm, /or  ausser  dem.  unters, /or  unter  das. 

untern, /or  unter  den,  etc.  vors, /or  vor  das,  etc. 

Note.  —  In  some  expressions  the  contracted  form  only  can  be  used. 
Thus: 

On  Sunday  =  Am  (never  an  dem)  Sonntag ;  Frankfort-on-the-Main 
=  Frankfurt  avn  Main;  In  earnest  =  Im  {not  in  dem)  Ernst;  In  fun 
=  Im  Scherz,  For  fun  =  Zum  (not  mu  dem)  S{)a.s.s  ,  Luckily  =  Zutn 
GUlck  ;  For  instance  =  Zum  Beispiel ,  To  sbig  at  sight  (lit.:  from  sheet) 
=  Vom  (not  von  dem)  Blatt  singen.  Also,  as  already  seen  on  page 
529,  Am  (never  an  dem)  besten,  schonsten  ;  aufs  arnilichste,  etc. 

II.  — IDIOMATIC    USE    OF    SOME    GERMAN    PREPOSI- 

TIONS. 

1,  Von  =  of,  from.    But: 

Ich  werde  von  meinem  Vater  geliebt  =  I  am  loved  by  my  father. 
Manche  Volker  leben  von  Fischen  =  3Iany  people  live  on  fish. 

2.  Zu  =  to.     But: 

Zu  Hause,  zu  (in)  Dresden  =  At  home,  at  Dresden. 


GRAMMAR.  531 

3.  Bei=by.    But: 

Ich  war  bei  dem  Minister  =  I  tvas  with  the  minister. 
Ich  habe  kein  Geld  bei  u\\y  =  I  have  no  inouetj  with  me. 
Die  Schlacht  bei  VV^aterloo=  I'he  battle  of  Waterloo. 
Bei  Tisch  sein  =  At  the  table.    Bei  einem  Fluss  =  To  be  on  a 
river. 

4.  An  =  at.    But: 

Am  Hudson ;  an  der  Kuste=  On  the  Hmlson;  on  the  coast. 

Am  Sonntag  =  On  Sunday. 

An  einer  Krankheit  sterben=  To  die  of  a  sickness. 

An  seiner  Stelle  =  In  his  place. 

5.  Auf=  on,  upon.     But : 

Auf  dem  Markt;  aw/ der  Post;  auf  dem  Ball  =  At  the  market; 

at  the  Post-office ;  at  the  ball. 
Auf  den  Markt;  a«*/die  Post;  auf  den  Ball  =  To  market,  etc. 
Ich  gehe  auf  das  (or  aufs)  Land=  I  (jo  to  the  country. 
Ich  bin  auf  dem  Land  =  1  ayn  in  the  country. 
Gehe  auf  die  Strasse  =  Go  into  the  street. 
Er  ist  auf  der  Strasse  =  He  is  in  the  street. 
Was  ist  das  auf  deutsch  ?  =  WJiat  is  that  in  German  f 

6.  In  —  in,  into.     But : 

In  die  Schule,  Kirche,  Oper  gehen  =  To  go  to  school,  church,  etc. 

In  einiger  Entfernung  =  yl<  some  distaiice. 

In  diesem  Augenblick  =  On  this  instant. 

Im  Gegenteil ;  im  ganzen  =  On  the  contrary ;  on  the  whole. 

7.  Tor,  nach  =  before,  after.     But: 
Vor  alien  Dingen  =  Above  all. 

Vor  Kummer  sterben  =  To  die  of  sorrow. 

Vor  einigen  Jsihven  =  Some  years  ago. 

Nach  Deutschland  reisen  =  To  go  to  Germany,  etc. 

Note.  —  Observe  that  nach,  is  used  when  speaking  of  a  place  to 
which  we  go  to;  but  «ie,  when  speaking  of  a  person  to  whom  we  go: 
Er  geht  nacU  Berlin  ;  but,  Er  geht  ssu  nieinem  Onkel. 

8.  Um,  about,  round.     But : 

Um  8  Uhr  =  ^*  8  o'clock.     Um  Gottes  willen  =  l^or  God's  sake. 
Um  Goidi  — For  money.       Einen  Tag  um  den  andern  =  ^yerji 

other  day. 


532 


GRAMMAR. 


THE    CONJUNCTION. 

There  are  two  classes  of  conjunctions :  co-ordinating  con* 
junctions^  which  connect  principal  clauses ;  and  subordi- 
nating conjunctions,  which  are  used  to  connect  a  subor- 
dinate clause  to  the  main  clause.  After  the  co-ordinating 
(excepting  und,  odcr,  denn,  aber,  alleiUf  and  sondern) 
the  order  of  the  clause  is  inverted,  as  already  seen  on  page 


I.  — THE    CO-ORDINATING    CONJUNCTIONS. 


und,  and. 
auch,  also. 
ausserdem,  besides. 
dann,  then. 
ferner,  farther, 
erstens,  firstly. 
sowohl,  als,  both,  and. 
teils,  teils,  partly,  pHy. 
oder,  or. 
nach,  nor. 


entweder,  oder,  either,  or. 
weder,  noch,  neither,  nor. 
aber,  but. 
allein,  but. 
sondern,  but. 
doch,  yet,  though. 
jedoch,  yet,  though. 
dennoch,  yet,  though. 
gleichwohl,  nevertheless. 
dagegen,  on  the  contrary. 
indessen,  however. 


vielmehr,  rather. 
zvvar,  to  be  sure. 
wohl,  indeed. 
denn,  for. 
also,  accordingly. 
daher,  therefore. 
deswegen,  " 
deshalb,      " 
folglich,  conse'ly. 
mithin,         " 


Note  1.  —  The  conjunctions  aber,  and  sometimes  also  doch,  je- 
doch, indessen,  zwar,  wo'hl,  also,  are  not  always  at  the  beginning 
of  the  clause.     Thus  : 

The  ostrich  has  wings,  but  he  cannot  fly  =  Der  Strauss  hat  Fliigel,  er 
kann  aber  nicht  fliegen. 

Note  2.  —  Observe  that  sondern  is  used  only  after  a  negative 
clause.  As  regards  the  difference  between  aber  and  allein:  allein 
=  but,  in  the  sense  of  only.  Its  use  is  much  less  frequent  than  that 
of  aber,  and  it  generally  introduces  some  specific  objection. 

II.  — THE    SUBORDINATING    CONJUNCTIONS. 


als,  when. 

bevor,  ehe,  before. 

bis,  until. 

da,  siiice  (reason). 

dass,  that. 

damit,  that,  in  order  that. 

falls,  in  case  that. 


obwohl,  though. 

wiewohl,     " 

seit,  seitdem,  since. 

so  oft  als,  whenever. 

sobald,  as  soon  as. 

solange,  as  long  as. 

ungeachtet,  notwithstanding. 


GRAMMAR.  533 

indem,  ivhile.  wahrend,  while. 

je,  the  (with  the  comp.y  wenn,  when,  if. 

iiachdem,  after.  well,  because. 

ob^  ivhcther.  wie,  how,  as. 

ohgleicb,  obschon,  though.  wofern,  if,  provided. 

THE    INTERJECTION. 

ah  !  ach !  hi !   ah !  oh !  halt !   halt !  stop  I 

ach  !   ah  !  alas  I  oh  dear  !  au !   oh  ! 

he !  he  da !   ho !  I  say  !  st !  still !   hush !  hist ! 

oh!  ho!   oh!  ho!  leider!   alas !  unhappily ! 

o  wehe  I   oh  dear  !  alas  !  heisa !   huzza !  hurrah  I 

pfui !  fie  !  pish  !  juchhe !   hurrah  ! 

APPENDIX. 

PECULIAR    USES    OF    THE    INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

1.  It  is  omitted  from  before  a  predicate  noun  with  sein  or  werden* 
Thus :  He  is  a  physician  =  Er  ist  Arzt. 

He  became  a  merchant  =  Fjr  ward  Kaufman, 

2.  It  is  omitted  witli  kein  geringerer,  no  less  (a).     Thus  : 

No  less  a  King  than  I  =  Kein  geringerer  Konig  als  ich. 

3.  It  may  be  used  or  omitted  with  manch.    In  the  latter  case, 
manch  is  invariable.    Thus: 

Many  a  day  =  Maucher  Tag ;  or,  manch  ein  Tag. 
POSITION    OF    THE    ARTICLES. 
The  articles  in  German  are  placed  not  only  before  the  noun,  but 
also  before  all  adjectives  qualifying  it.     Thus : 

Half  a  minute  =  Eine  halbe  Minute. 
Both  the  parents  =  Die  beide*  Altern. 
Exceptions.  —  (1)  The  definite  article  follows  all.    Ex. : 
All  the  people  rvcre  there  =Alle  (or,  all)  die  Leiite  waren  da. 

(2)  The  indefinite  article  folloius  manch  and  welch. 

Many  a  man  =  Manch  ein  Mann. 
What  a  man  !  =  Welch  ein  Mensch  ! 

(3)  The  indefi.  arti,  may  either  follow  or  precede  solch  and  so,  Ex. : 
Such  a  man  =  Solch  ein  Mann  {or,  ein  solcher  INhmn). 

So  poor  a  woman  !=  So  ein  armes  Weib  {or,  ein  so  armes  Weib)! 


*  Witli   heide,  tlie  article  may  be  altogether  omitted.    Ex. :  Both 
parents  =  Die  beide  Altern;  or,  simply,  beide  Altern. 


GRAMMATICAL    INDEX. 


Abeb,  allein,  and  sondern,  85,  632. 

Accent,  in  German,  xx. 

,  of  separable  verbs,  234,  523. 

Accusative,  use§  of  the,  114-117. 

Adjectives,  declension  of,  476-479. 

,  formation,  comparison,  480-482. 

,  used  as  nouns,  273,  322,  479. 

,  of  nationality,  77. 

Adverbs,  528,  529. 

,  of  time,  their  place,  78. 

Als,  108,  443,  446. 

Agreement,  of  article,  174. 

,  of  pers.  pron.,  14,  52,  86,  314. 

,  of  adjectives,  16,  479. 

Apposition,  nouns  in,  32. 

Article,  Definite,  459. 

,  uses  of,  461,  462. 

,  place  of,  533. 

,  in  stating  prices,  45,  336. 

,  with  parts  of  body,  90, 356, 374, 429. 

,  with  names  of  months,  243. 

,  with  names  of  streets,  45. 

,  with  names  of  seasons,  90. 

,  contrac.  of,  6,  16,  53,  80,  90,  312. 

,  Indefinite,  460. 

,  omission  of,  450. 

,  repetition  of,  155. 

,  uses  of,  533. 

Bis,  used  with  other  prep.  224,  262. 

Conjunctions,  532, 533. 

Construction  of  principal  and  depend- 
ent clauses,  36,  37. 

,  no  progressive  forms,  76,  146,  147. 

,  invert.  &  emph.  forms,  84,  85, 144. 

,  after  und,  aber,  etc.,  84,  85, 136. 

,  no  emphatic  forms,  146,  147. 

,  place  of  pronoun  objects,  148. 

Da,  combined  with  prep.,  168,  200,  376. 

Das,  dies,  referring  to  any  gender,  236. 

Dass,  omitted,  136,  238,  240,  282,  312,  380. 

Dative  Case,  202,  203. 

,  use  of,  206,  207. 

Derselbe,  instead  of  er,  141. 

Dessen,  deren,  instead  of  des,  der, 
312,  490. 

Dependent  Clauses,  37. 

Diminutive,  with  ohen  and  lein,  82. 

Du,  when  used,  34,  156. 

EiN,  without  a  noun,  366. 

Er,  sie,  es,  uses  of,  484  ;  54,  226,  236. 

Es,  omission  of,  409,  434. 

,  added  in  German,  448,  450. 

Es  GlEBT,  276,  409. 

Genitive  Case,  174. 

,  uses  of,  178. 

,  omission  of,  179. 

,  none  after  nouns  of  measure,  198. 

Gern,  62,  212. 

Haben,  instead  of  to  do,  29,  76. 

HiN,  HER,  uses  of,  30,  58,  140,  144. 

I  AM  to,  I  have  to,  444. 

1  ought  to  have,  etc.,  how  rendered, 
287,330,371,374. 

IHR,  ihr,  your,  17,  28. 

634 


Impersonal  Expressions,  56,  426. 
Infinitive,  524-526. 

,  instead  of  participle,  176,  234. 

,  used  after  sein,  177,  406. 

,  after  how,  how  rendered,  202. 

,  used  as  a  noun,  312,  354. 

Interjections,  533. 

Ja,  use  of,  170. 

Kein,  not  any,  116,  119. 

Lassen,  to  have  done,  4,  24,  39. 

LlEBER,  comp.  of  GERN,  212,  334. 

Mal,  instead  of  einmal,  241. 

Man,  use  of,  24,  105. 

Nach,  Berlin,  etc.,  to  Berlin,  13. 

Names,  of  cities  and  count's,  gender,  19. 

Negatives,  place  of,  81. 

Nouns,  gender  of,  463-465. 

,  strong  declension  of,  467-472. 

,  weak  "  "    472,473. 

,  mixed         "  '*    474. 

,  proper,  declension  of,  475. 

Numbers,  cardinal,  180. 

,  ordinal,  182. 

,  fractional,  183. 

Numeral  Adjectives,  482. 

Ohne  zu,  56. 

Participles,  527. 

Possessive  Cask,  none  in  Oerman,  147. 

Prepositions,  114, 178,  207,  224,  268,  530. 

Present  Tense,  instead  of  past,  256. 

Principal  Clauses,  36. 

Pronouns,  personal,  483. 

,  possessive,  487, 

,  DEMONSTRATIVE,  489. 

,  RELATIVE,  310,  491. 

,  INTERROGATIVE,  492. 

,  INDEFINITE,  493. 

Selbst,  myself,  etc.,  6. 

Sie,  you,  17. 

Singular,  of  nouns  of  measure,  288, 482. 

,  with  money  denomination,  59. 

So,  introducing  a  principal  clause,  330. 

,  to  be  rendered  by  es,  444. 

SOLLEN,  after  v.  of  command,  354,  360. 
Subjunctive,  340  ;  82,  108, 138, 168,  342. 
Superlative,  absolute,  316. 
Verbs,  general  remarks,  495-497. 

,  auxiliary,  498-506. 

,  WEAK,  conjugation  of,  507-510. 

,  strong,  "  "    511-517. 

.reflexive,  260,  264,  518,  519. 

,  irregular,  520,  521. 

,  SEPARABLE,  152,  157,  164,  234,  522. 

,  Inseparable,  159,  204,  236. 

,  impersonal,  408,  409. 

,  with  HABEN  or  sein,  .52,  106,  519. 

Wann,  wenn,  als,  232,  360,  404,  443. 
Welch  (without  ending),  271. 
Welcher,  welche,  welches,  for  et- 

WAS  or  EINIGE,  292,  355,  492. 
"Wenn,  omitted,  331. 
Will  =  wollen,  or  werden,  26. 
Wo,  combined  with  preposi's,  274,  491. 
Zu,  11,  78,  200,  524. 


STANDARD     GERMAN     TEXTS 

Arnold.     Ein  Regentag  auf  dem  Lande  (Kern)    .         .         .     $0.25 
Baumbach.     Im  Zwielicht.     Vol.  I  (Bernhardt) ...        .65 

Im  Zwielicht.     Vol.  II  (Bernhardt)  65 

Baumbach  &  Wildenbruch.      Es  War  Einmal  (Bernhardt)         .65 
Benedix.     Der  Prozess,  and  Wilhelmi.     EinerMuss  Heira- 

ten  (Lambert) 30 

Bernhardt.      Deutsche  Litteraturgeschichte  .        .        .        .75 

Freudvoll  und  Leidvoll 65 

Dillard.      Aus  dem  Deutschen  Dichterwald  .         .         .         .60 

Ebner-Eschenbach.  Krambambuli,  and  Klaussmann.  Me- 

moiren  eines  Offizierburschen  (Spanhoofd)    .        .        .        .25 

Fahsel.     Allerlei .        .        .25 

Fouque.      Undine  (Senger) 50 

Freytag.     Die  Journalisten  (Johnson) 35 

Grimm.      Kinder-  und  Hausmarchen  (Vos)  .         .         .         .45 

Groller,     Inkognito,  and  Albersdorf.     Cand.  phil.  Lausch- 

mann  (Lentz) 33 

Heyse.     Das  Madchen  von  Treppi,  and  Marion  (Bernhardt)         .30 

Anfang  und  Ende  (Lentz) 30 

L'Arrabbiata  (Lentz)  .......         .30 

Hillern.     Hoher  als  die  Kirche  (Dauer) 25 

Keller.      Bilder  aus  der  Deutschen  Litteratur      .        .        •        .75 

Leander.     Traumereien  (Hanstein) 35 

Lessing.      Minna  von  Barnhelm  (Lambert)  ....         .50 

Nathan  der  Weise  (Diekhoff) 80 

Moser.     Der  Bibliothekar  (Cooper) 45 

Prehn.     Journalistic  German 53 

Ranke.      Kaiserwahl  Karl's  V.  (Schoenfeld)  .         .         .         .35 

Richter.     Selections  (Collins)        ......         .60 

Riehl.     Die  Vierzehn  Nothelfer  and  Trost  um  Trost(Sihler)        .30 

Der  Fluch  der  Schonheit  (Frost) 30 

Das  Spielmannskind  and  Der  Stumme  Ratsherr  (Priest)   .         .35 
Schanz.     Der  Assistent  and  Other  Stories  (Beinhorn)  .         .35 

Scheffel.      Der  Trompeter  von  Sakkingen  (Buehner)  .         .         .75 
Schiller.     Gustav  Adolf  in  Deutschland  (Bernhardt)   .        .        .45 

Wilhelm  Tell  (Roedder) 

Seidel.     Die  Monate  (Arrowsmith) 25 

Der  Lindenbaum  and  Other  Stories  (Richard)   .        .         .        .25 

Herr  Omnia  (Matthewman) 25 

Leberecht  Hiihnchen  und  Andere  Sonderlinge (Bernhardt)        .50 
Spyri.      Rosenresli  and  Der  Toni  von  Kandergrund    .         .         .25 

Stern.     Geschichten  vom  Rhein 85 

Geschichten  von  Deutschen  Stadten  .        .         .        .        .       1.25 

Stifter.     Das  Heidedorf  (Lentz) 25 

Stoltze.      Bunte  Geschichten 30 

Storm.     Immensee  (Dauer) 25 

Wagner.     Die  Meistersinger  (Bigelow) 70 

Wilbrandt.     Der  Meister  von  Palmyra  (Henckels)      .        .        .80 

Wildenbruch.     Das  Edle  Blut  (Eggert) 30 

Zschokke.      Der  Zerbrochene  Krug  (Berkefeld)   .         .         .         .25 

AMERICA  N       BOOK        COMPANY 


TWO   NEW   GERMAN   READERS 
BY  MENCO  STERN 

(Bcfd?id?tcn  von  X)eutfd?en 
Stdbten 

Cloth,    J2m0y  420  pages.        With    vocabulary,    map,    and 
illustrations.      Price,  $1.2^, 

Cloth,    i2mo,   J18  pages.      With    vocabulary,    maps,    and 
illustrations.      Price,  8^  cents. 

IT  has  been  found  from  much  experience  that  one  of  the 
best  ways  of  interesting  the  student  of  German  in  his 
work  is  to  acquaint  him  from  the  very  outset  with  the 
people  whose  language  he  is  studying.  For  this  purpose 
those  stories  are  best  adapted  which  in  tone  and  contents 
describe  faithfully  the  various  sections  of  the  German 
Empire,  portraying  their  local  color  and  giving  their  local 
traditions. 

These  two  volumes,  each  containing  nearly  one  hundred 
stories,  furnish  reading  matter  of  this  nature,  and  include 
besides,  valuable  suggestive  material  for  exercises  in  con- 
versation and  composition.  They  are  well  suited  for 
intermediate  and  advanced  grades,  and  provide  excellent 
preparation  for  the  reading  of  the  German  classics,  being 
widely  varied  in  character  and  subject  matter. 

The  sketches  all  portray  the  romance  of  Germany — its 
scenery,  cities,  castles,  and  homes,  interweaving  with  the 
descriptions  the  legends  and  folk-lore  tales  of  the  people. 
They  do  not,  however,  consist  of  fiction  only,  but  furnish 
also  many  facts  of  historical,  geograph(cal,  and  literary 
importance.  The  books  have  been  carefully  edited.  The 
vocabularies  are  complete  and  furnish  ample  aid.  The 
maps  enable  the  student  to  understand  the  full  geographical 
and  historical  significance  of  the  tales. 

AMERICAN      BOOK      COMPANY 

NEW    YORK         CINCINNATI         CHICAGO 

(22s) 


COMMERCIAL    GERMAN 

By   ARNOLD   KUTNER 

Hi^K  School  of  Commerce,  New  York  City 
Cloth,  12mo,  4-04-  pp.,  tuilh  -Vocabulary.     Trice,  ^t.OO 


'T^HIS  book  is  intended  for  use  in  commercial  schools  and 
-■■  in  commercial  courses  of  high  schools,  and  is  designed 
to  furnish  much  information  which  will  prove  useful  in  later 
business  life.  It  is  the  first  attempt  to  introduce  American 
students  to  a  foreign  language  by  means  of  its  commercial 
vocabulary. 

The  book,  which  is  complete  in  itself,  is  divided  into  two 
parts.  Part  I.  contains  the  elements  of  commercial  German, 
and  is  designed  to  carry  the  student  to  the  threshold  of  busi- 
ness correspondence.  Each  of  the  sixteen  lessons  contains  a 
reading  lesson,  special  vocabulary,  exercise  on  grammar,  and 
questions.  Following  thqse  are  thirty-one  brief  grammatical 
tables  of  the  principal  parts  of  speech,  with  references  to  the 
reading  lessons  which  illustrate  them. 

Part  II.  is  intended  to  widen  the  commercial  vocabulary 
by  means  of  reading  selections  dealing  with  German  business 
customs  and  institutions.  It  is,  moreover,  devoted  to  the 
study  of  commercial  correspondence,  business  forms,  docu- 
ments, newspaper  articles,  and  advertisements.  Selections 
I  to  20  are  intended  to  form  the  center  of  instruction  and  to 
provide  material  for  re-translation,  reproduction,  composition, 
and  conversation.  A  vocabulary  and  a  list  of  strong,  mixed, 
and  irregular  verbs  completes  the  book. 


Write  for  illustrated  descriptive  catalogue  of 
Modern  Language  publications. 

AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 

NEW  YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO 

BOSTON     ATLANTA   .   DALLAS   .  SAN  FRANCISCO 

(326) 


French   Literature 

With  Notes  and  Vocabularies 


Augier  Px,  Sandeau.      Le  Gendre  de  M.  Poirier  (Roedder).  .  .    $0.40 

Bruno.      Le  Tour  de  la  France  (Syms) 60 

Cameron.     Tales  of  France 1.00 

Chateaubriand.        Les    Aventurcs    du    Dernier    Abencerage 

(Bruner) 30 

Cr6mieux  &  Dcccurcelle.     L'Abbe  Constantin  (Fran9ois) 35 

Daudet.      La  Belle  Nivernaise  and  Other  Stories  (Jenkins).  .  .      .50 

Tartarin  de  Tarascon  (Fontaine) 45 

Dumas.      La  Tulipe  Noire  (Brandon) 40 

Les  Trois  Mousquetaires  (Fontaine) 60 

Erckmann  &  Chatrian.      Madame  Therese  (Fontaine) 50 

Foa.      Le  Petit  Robinson  de  Paris  (De  Bonneville) 45 

Foncin.      Le  Pays  de  France  (Muzzarelli) 00 

Fontaine.     Douze  Contes  Nouveaux .45 

Goncourt,  Edmond  and  Jules  de.     Selections  (Cameron) 1.25 

Goodell.     L'Enfant  Espion  and  Other  Stories 45 

Gverber.     Contes  et  Legendes.     Part  I  .• 60 

Contes  et  Legendes,       Part  II 60 

Hugo.     La  Chute  (Kapp) 35 

Labiche  &  Martin.      Le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon  (Castegnier)     .35 

La  Br^te.      Mon  Oncle  et  Mon  Cure  (White) 50 

La  Fontaine.     Fifty  Fables  (McKenzie) 40 

Legouve  &  Labiche.       La  Cigale  (Farrar) 25 

Mairet.      La  Tache  du  Petit  Pierre  (Healy) 35 

L'Enfant  de  la  Lune  (Healy) 35 

La  Clef  d'Or  (Healy) 35 

Merimee.     Colomba  (Williamson) 40 

MoliSre.      Le  Bourgeois  Gentilhomme  (Roi  &  Guitteau 35 

Racine.     Iphig6nie  (Woodward) 60 

Sand.      La  Mare  au  Diable  (Randall-Lawton) 35 

Sandeau.      Mademoiselle  de  la  Seigliere  (White) 40 

Schultz.      La  Neuvaine  de  Colette  (Lye) 45 

S6vigne,  Mme.  de.     Selected  Letters  (Syms) 40 

Syms.     An  Easy  First  French  Reader 50 

Le  Chien  de  Brisquet  and  Other  Stories 35 

Voltaire.     Selected  Letters  (Syms) '^5 


American  Book  Company 

NEW   YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO 

(214) 


Text-Books   in    French 

By  ANTOINE    MUZZARELLI 

Officier   d'Academie  ;    author   of   "  Les  Antonymes   de  la    Langue 
Franyaise,"  "  English  Antonymes,"  "  French  Classics,"  etc. 


MUZZARELLrS  ACADEMIC  FRENCH   COURSE— First  Year     .     $1.00 

Second  Year 1.00 

Keys  to  First  and  Second  Years   ....  Each,       1.00 

The  Academic  French  Course  embodies  in  two  books  a 
complete  system  of  instruction  in  the  French  language  for 
English-speaking  pupils.  The  course  is  remarkable  for  the 
simplicity  of  its  grammatical  treatment  and  for  the  care- 
fully selected  vocabulary  employed  in  the  exercises  and 
translations.  It  is  eminently  practical,  advancing  in  a 
constant  gradation  from  the  easiest  of  first  steps  to  those 
more  difficult.  Only  essential  rules  are  given,  and  those 
in  the  most  concise  form.  Besides  the  usual  grammatical 
drill,  it  includes  lessons  in  conversational  form,  entitled 
"A  Trip  to  Paris,"  replete  with  information  of  the  most 
practical  kind  and  largely  increasing  the  student's  vocab- 
ulary with  an  extensive  variety  of  expressions  in  daily  use 
among  the  educated  classes  in  France. 

MUZZARELLI'S  BRIEF  FRENCH  COURSE       .        .        .        .     $1.25 

This  is  prepared  on  the  same  general  lines,  and  though 
brief  is  comprehensive.  The  grammatical  topics  discussed 
have  been  wisely  chosen,  and  all  topics  of  primary  import- 
ance are  fully  treated.  The  exercises  in  reading  and 
writing  French  furnish  abundant  practice  on  all  points  of 
syntax.  The  book  contains  a  valuable  chapter  on  French 
Phonetics,  as  well  as  the  poetry  prescribed  for  memorizing 
by  the  Regents  of  the  University  of  the  State  of  New  York. 
It  is  especially  noteworthy  in  that  it  conforms  in  all  re- 
spects to  the  radical  reform  incorporated  in  the  new  laws 
of  syntax  officially  promulgated  by  the  Minister  of  Public 
Instruction  of  the  French  Republic,  on  March  ii,  1901. 


Copies  will  he  sent,  prepaid,  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  ?  Cincinnati  ♦  Chicago 

(212) 


Garner's  Spanish  Grammar 

FOR   THE  USE  OF  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES 
By  SAMUEL  GARNER,   Ph.D. 

Recently  Professor  of  Modern  Languages,  United  States  Naval  Academy 
C/otbj  I2m0y  415  pages.    Price,  $1.2^ 


THIS  grammar  contains  a  clear  and  concise 
outline  of  the  essential  features  of  the  language, 
and  is  distinguished  from  other  books  of  its 
kind  by  the  omission  of  unimportant  details.  Be- 
sides the  clear  exposition  of  grammar  and  syntax, 
it  includes  exercises  combining  drill  upon  gram- 
matical points,  with  practice  in  translation,  pronun- 
ciation, and  conversation,  and  at  the  same  time 
affords  ample  work  in  memorizing. 

The  reading  exercises  contain  easy  and  familiar 
dialogues  and  selections,  together  with  newspaper 
extracts,  which  are  particularly  valuable  in  acquiring 
a  practical  knowledge  of  the  language.  An  especially 
serviceable  feature  is  the  insertion  of  numerous 
business  letters  and  forms,  together  with  forms  of 
addresses,  epistolary  formalities,  and  Spanish  abbre- 
viations. English  and  Spanish  vocabularies  com- 
plete the  book.  No  other  grammar  now  published 
offers  so  attractive  an  introduction  to  the  study  of 
the  commercial  and  social  life  of  Spanish-speaking 
countries. 

Copies  sent  J  prepaid,  to  any  address,  on  receipt  of 
the  price  by  the  Publishers 

AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 

NEW  YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO 

BOSTON  ATLANTA  DALLAS  SAN  FRANCISCO 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  ot  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 
NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


APR  3  0  2001 


12,000(11/95) 


rtj  357CV